***** 
 
 
 r - v^ •- 
 
 ♦ 6 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 4 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
GREEK GRAMMAR, 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 USE OF LEARNERS, 
 
 By E. A. SOPHOCLES, A. M. 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 HARTFORD: 
 H. HUNTINGTON, Jux. * 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 F. J.HUNTINGTON AND COMPANY, 
 
 • 174 Pearl Street. 
 
 1840. 
 

 & 
 
 p 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by 
 
 H. Huntington, Jun., 
 
 in the Clerk's office of the District Court of the District of Connecticut, 
 
 3-<r>'.«r~ 
 
 CAMBRIDGE : 
 
 STEREOTYPED AND PRINTED BY 
 
 POLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON, 
 PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The materials, of which this compendious 
 Grammar is composed, have been drawn from 
 the best sources. 
 
 The examples given in the Syntax are taken 
 from the following classic authors : — Homer, 
 Hesiod, Pindar, iEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, 
 Aristophanes, Theocritus; Herodotus, Thucydides, 
 Xenophon, Lysias, Isocrates, iEschines, Demos- 
 thenes, Plato, Aristotle. 
 
 Those rules, which should be first read and 
 which should be committed to memory, are print- 
 ed in the largest type (as § 136. 1). 
 
 E. A. S. 
 
 New Haven, 
 
 October 20th 9 1839. 
 
 
C O N T E N T S 
 
 Part I LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 
 
 . k Alphabet - 
 I 
 
 - 
 - 
 
 lOgOO 
 ■oaaula 
 
 ables 
 
 Accent - 
 
 Enclitic* 
 Con 1 1 action 
 
 Sy 
 
 I tthesis, and Aphseresis 
 ctuetlon 
 lUBciatlon 
 
 Part II. INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 - 
 
 Noun - 
 
 f •.•|1S!>1|1 
 
 Declension ... 
 
 Third De< U nsion 
 
 Nouns of the Third Declension 
 • the Third Declension 
 ; N mis - 
 
 N mis ... 
 
 Nouns ... 
 
 . 
 
 Adjectives In **( 
 
 Adjectives in vg - 
 
 i >jj and i; 
 
 if. »,Vj cvg y Oc, wv, m( 
 • is of one ending 
 Compound Adjectives 
 
 us an 1 Defective Adjectives 
 Dagfcea df Comparison - 
 
 y ri^oc, rxrog - 
 Comparison by | — • «o-to? 
 Anomalous and Defective Comparison 
 Numerali - 
 
 inal Numbers ... 
 Ordinal Numbers 
 
 Numeral Substaotivea, Adjectives, and Ad- 
 verbs 
 Article 
 Pronoun 
 
 ns.1 Pronoun 
 Reflexive Pronoun 
 live Pronoun 
 native Pronoun 
 Indefinite Pronoun 
 Denioustriitive Pronoun 
 Relative Pronoun 
 
 cal Pronoun 
 Pronominal Adjectives 
 Verb 
 
 Augment 
 
 Syllabic Augment 
 Temporal Augment » 
 Augment of Compound Verbs 
 Verbal Hoots and Terminations 
 Indicative Mood - 
 
 Bubjunt live Mood 
 Optative Mood 
 
 Imp 
 
 Infinitive 14 kk! 
 
 Participle 
 
 Pt elect and Pluperfect Passive and Middle 
 
 Aorist P 
 
 lit of Verbs - 
 Formation of the Tenses 
 
 Present Active 
 
 Imperfect Active 
 
 First and Second Pel feet Active 
 
 First and Second Pluperfect Acti 
 
 First and Second Future Active 
 
 First and Second Aorist Active 
 
 Present and Imperfect Passive 
 
 Perfect Passive - 
 
 Pluperfect Passive 
 
 First and Second Aorist Passive 
 
 First, Second, and Third Future Passive 
 
 Present, Imperfect, Perfect, end Pluperfect, 
 Middle 
 
 First and Second Future Middle 
 
 First and Second Aorist Middle 
 Contract Verbs - 
 Verbs in /ui 
 
 Anomalous Verbs - 
 
 Adverb .... 
 
 Comparison of Adverbs 
 Derivation of Words 
 
 Derivation of Substantives 
 
 Derivation of Adjectives 
 
 Derivation of Verbs - 
 Composition of Words 
 
 16 
 17 
 18 
 
 19 
 19 
 20 
 20 
 
 99 
 100 
 101 
 101 
 105 
 106 
 108 
 108 
 110 
 112 
 111 
 113 
 114 
 115 
 
 116 
 116 
 117 
 118 
 1-24 
 135 
 168 
 171 
 172 
 172 
 175 
 176 
 177 
 
 Part III. SYNTAX. 
 
 Substantive 
 
 Adjective - 
 
 Article 
 
 Pronoun 
 
 Personal Pronoun 
 Reflexive Pronoun 
 
 ive Pronoun - 
 eative Pronoun 
 Indefinite Pronoun - 
 Demonstrative Pronoun 
 Relative Pronoun 
 Reciprocal I'ronoun 
 
 Subject aud Predicate 
 
 Object 
 
 Accusative 
 
 Genitive 
 
 Dati%e 
 
 Vocative 
 
 Voice* 
 Active 
 
 Feet 
 
 Trochaic Verse 
 Iambic Verse - 
 
 GREEK INDEX 
 
 mroLisH index 
 
 Part IV 
 
 188 
 189 
 190 
 194 
 194 
 201 
 202 
 207 
 221 
 227 
 227 
 227 
 
 Passive - 
 
 Middle 
 
 Deponent Verbs ... 
 Tenses .... 
 
 Present, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future 
 
 Imperfect ... 
 
 Third Future ... 
 
 Aorist ... 
 
 Moods .... 
 
 Indicative ... 
 
 Subjunctive ... 
 
 Optative ... 
 
 Imperative • 
 
 Infinitive ... 
 
 Participle .... 
 
 Adverb .... 
 Preposition .... 
 
 Conjunction ... 
 
 Interjection .... 
 Irregular Construction 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 259 | Dactylic Verse 
 261 Anapestic Verse 
 262 
 
 229 
 230 
 232 
 232 
 232 
 234 
 234 
 234 
 235 
 235 
 237 
 239 
 242 
 242 
 246 
 248 
 250 
 252 
 255 
 257 
 
 264 
 266 
 
 267 I 
 276 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS 
 
PART I. 
 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 
 
 THE GREEK ALPHABET. 
 
 § 1. 1. The Greek alphabet consists of the 
 following twenty-four letters : 
 
 Figure. 
 
 Representative. 
 
 Name. 
 
 A a 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 "Ahcpa Jllpha 
 
 B $ 6 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 Brjiu Beta 
 
 r 7 f 
 
 G 
 
 g 
 
 Tdfifia Gamma 
 
 J 8 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 Jikra Delta 
 
 E £ 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 ^EiplXov Epsilon 
 
 z I 
 
 Z 
 
 z 
 
 Zrjia Zeta 
 
 H v 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 r Hra Eta 
 
 & 6 
 
 TH 
 
 th 
 
 0rjra Theta 
 
 I i 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 'Icora Iota 
 
 K x 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 Kanna Kappa 
 
 A X 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
 Ad(,ifida Lambda 
 
 M {i 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 Mv Mu or My 
 
 N v 
 
 JY 
 
 n 
 
 Nv JYu or JYy 
 
 S I 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 SI Xi 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 *0 [.uxqov Omicron 
 
 II Tt TS 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 m pi 
 
 P 9 
 
 R 
 
 r 
 
 C P<5 Rho 
 
 2J a s final 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 Ziyfia Sigma 
 
 T t 7 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 Tav Tau 
 
 r v 
 
 Uor Y u or 
 
 y r Tyil6v Upsilon 
 
 (p 
 
 PH 
 
 ph 
 
 0T Phi 
 
 x X 
 
 CH 
 
 ch 
 
 XI Chi 
 
 ¥ xp 
 
 PS 
 
 ps 
 
 m Psi 
 
 SI (0 
 
 
 
 
 
 r Ji [isya Omega 
 
2 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [5) 1. 
 
 2. These letters are divided into vowels and 
 consonants. The vowels are a, £, ?/, *, o, is, a * 
 the consonants are /3, ^, 5, £, #, x, A, ^, v, |, zr, g>, 
 
 ^ T > <P> Xi V- 
 
 Note 1. E was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It 
 was qualified by the adjective -^iXov, smooth {not aspirated), only when it was 
 s I vowel. Anciently this vowel stood also for n and the diphthong u. 
 E. g. ctlSro was written AI0EP. 
 
 H was originally equivalent to the rough breathing. E. g. «*•«£ was writ- 
 ten HEILAP, te'fih, HE0MO2. 
 
 O stood also for u and the diphthong ov. E. g. vea.<r^u was written IIA- 
 2X0, ix ov<r h EX02I. It seems, that there was a time when O and XI were 
 distinguished from each other only by their size : hence the epithets fnx^ov, 
 small, and fjtXya., large. 
 
 T also was originally used both as a vowel and as a breathing. It was 
 called r/'/A.ov only when it was used as a vowel. As a breathing, or rather as 
 a consonant, it was probably equivalent to the obsolete letter digamma. The 
 modern Greeks still pronounce it like v orf, in the diphthongs iv and av. 
 
 Note 2. Before the introduction of <£ and X, the Greeks wrote IIH for 
 3>, and KH for X. E. g. they wrote ERICH ANTOI 'E*^™, EnET- 
 KH0MEN02 i<riv X o/u,&vos. Here H is equivalent to the rough breathing. 
 
 TH was probably never used for 0. 
 
 They wrote also K2 or X2 for H, and <E>2 for T. E. g. AEK2AI for 
 Ufa, TIIEAEX2AT0 for £rittg«™, <E>2TXA2 for ^o X & s . 
 
 Note 3. The most ancient Greek alphabet had three other letters, which 
 disappeared from it in later times, and then were called Wurnpa., numeral marks. 
 These are F or g 9 Q or ^/> ana< *J^« 
 
 F or ?, Bay, Vau, or Aiyufipta, Digamma, (that is, double gamma, so 
 called on account of its form F,) corresponds to the Latin F or V. It is still 
 to be seen in some ancient inscriptions. 
 
 T or ^7, Kin**, Koppa, corresponds to the Latin Q. It was probably 
 a deep guttural. 
 
 *7/} , 2av or 2a^<r~, San or Sampi, was perhaps sounded like the Eng- 
 lish sh. 
 
 Remark. The mark £ representing <rr must not be confounded with the 
 digamma. 
 
 Note 4. We observe, that a is used only at the beginning 
 or middle, and c at the end of a word. E. g. otoiao[iivog, not 
 Qtgiogfxtvoa. 
 
 Some editors unnecessarily put g at the end of a word com- 
 pounded with another. E. g. cigeQxoficu for daiqxo^iat, dvgivxrfg 
 for dvoxvxqg, ogng for ooxig. 
 
 Note 5. The letters of the Greek alphabet are employed 
 also as numeral fgures. The first eight letters denote units, 
 
*!•] 
 
 THE GREEK ALPHABET. 
 
 the next eight, tens, and the last eight, hundreds. The obso- 
 lete letters g, U 7)} denote 6, 90, 900, respectively. 
 
 Observe, that the letters denoting units, tens, or hundreds, 
 have an accent above. 
 
 Thousands commence the alphabet again, with a stroke 
 underneath. 
 
 Here follows a table of numerals. 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 LU 
 
 11 
 
 t 
 
 30 
 
 v' 400 
 
 z 
 
 2 
 
 # 
 
 12 
 
 H 
 
 40 
 
 q>' 500 
 
 ■/ 
 
 3 
 
 r 
 
 13 
 
 V 
 
 50 
 
 x ' 600 
 
 $ 
 
 4 
 
 & 
 
 14 
 
 i 
 
 60 
 
 ip' 700 
 
 s 
 
 5 
 
 is 
 
 15 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 g/ 800 
 
 S 
 
 6 
 
 r 
 
 IS 
 
 16 
 
 71 
 
 80 
 
 ^' 900 
 
 r. 
 
 7 
 
 < 
 
 17 
 
 h; 
 
 90 
 
 a 1000 
 
 n 
 
 8 
 
 ir\ 
 
 18 
 
 Q 
 
 100 
 
 V 2000 
 
 &' 
 
 9 
 
 id*' 
 
 19 
 
 a 
 
 200 
 
 \y 3000 
 
 r 
 I 
 
 10 
 
 X 
 
 20 
 
 T 
 
 300 
 
 &c. 
 
 Examples, /m%y == 1838, pyog = 1776, auv.u = 1821. 
 
 Note 6. There is another method of writing numerals, in 
 which I, ji, A, JZ£, II, Jh[ , -X", JSJ", ikf, respectively denote, 
 %q, one, nirxs, jive, Aiv.a, ten, nevrdxig Aiv.a, five times ten, or 
 fifty, 'Exarov (anciently IIEKATON), hundred, Hsvidxtg c E*a- 
 Tov,five hundred, xIXiol, thousand, neviaxig Xlhoi,five thousand, 
 Mvqioh ten thousand. (5^ 60.) 
 
 Here follows a table. 
 
 / 
 
 1 
 
 Ann 
 
 17 
 
 Mn 
 
 600 
 
 II 
 
 2 
 
 A nn i 
 
 18 
 
 W nn 
 
 700 
 
 III 
 
 3 
 
 An in i 
 
 19 
 
 Tn[ hiiii 
 
 800 
 
 IIII 
 
 4 
 
 AA 
 
 20 
 
 JC h hub 
 
 900 
 
 n 
 
 5 
 
 AAA 
 
 30 
 
 X 
 
 1000 
 
 ni 
 
 6 
 
 AAAA 
 
 40 
 
 XX 
 
 2000 
 
 nn 
 
 7 
 
 M 
 
 50 
 
 XXX 
 
 3000 
 
 mil 
 
 8 
 
 m* 
 
 60 
 
 xxxx 
 
 4000 
 
 nun 
 
 9 
 
 JM.AA 
 
 70 
 
 M 
 
 5000 
 
 A 
 
 10 
 
 J£[AAA 
 
 80 
 
 Mx 
 
 6000 
 
 AI 
 
 11 
 
 M444A 90 
 
 W XX 
 
 7000 
 
 All 
 
 12 
 
 H 
 
 100 
 
 nr xxx 
 
 8000 
 
 A III 
 
 13 
 
 nn 
 
 200 
 
 .M" xxxx 
 
 9000 
 
 Aim 
 
 14 
 
 IIHH 
 
 300 
 
 M 
 
 10000 
 
 An 
 
 15 
 
 main 
 
 400 
 
 MX 
 
 11000 
 
 Ani 
 
 16 
 
 M 
 
 500 
 
 &c. 
 
 
4 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [ § 2. 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 § 2. There are five short vowels, and five cor- 
 responding long ones. The short vowels are a, s, 
 H, o, v • the long vowels are a, q 9 C 9 co, v. 
 
 The mark (~) is placed over a short vowel, and the mark 
 (-), over a long one. These marks, however, are necessary 
 only in the case of a, i, and v, since the letters r\ and w repre- 
 sent long E and respectively. 
 
 Note 1. The vowels s and o are often called the short vow- 
 els, r\ and co, the long vowels, and a, i, v, the doubtful vowels. 
 
 Remark. By the term, doubtful, we are not to understand 
 that the quantity of «, i, v, is uncertain in any given syllable, 
 but that in some syllables these vowels are always long, and 
 in others always short. E. g. v in the words dljiog, nvgog icheat, 
 is always long; in the words nvh], vno, always short. 
 
 There are, indeed, instances where the quantity of these let- 
 ters is variable, as a in "Agr^, i in pttghcrj, and v in xogvpt]' 
 but we should recollect, that the sounds E and O also are, 
 in certain instances, variable, as fygpg and £egog, i'copsv and 
 i'ofiev. 
 
 Note 2. In strictness, the Greek alphabet has but five 
 vowels, j, E, I, 0, T. The long vowels differ from the short 
 ones in quantity, but not in quality. 
 
 Note 3. Commutation of Vowels. (1) When from any 
 cause the vowels s and o are to be lengthened, they are gen- 
 erally changed into the diphthongs ^ and ov, rather than into 
 their corresponding long ones r\ and w. E. g. £sivog for &vog, 
 fiovrog for porog. 
 
 (2) In some instances o is lengthened into oi. E. g. nolo, 
 for 7io«. 
 
 (3) The vowel « often passes into ai or rj. E. g. aid from 
 ad, je&riXa from ddXXa. 
 
 (4) The vowels w and e are frequently interchanged. E. g. 
 Ionic Teootgtg for riooccgeg, Doric niaQo} for mt£(o. 
 
 (5) The syllables «o and «w are often changed into «w. 
 E. g. Attic l.swg for Xa6g, Ionic iqsTueav for icpeifiacov. 
 
 (6) The vowels « and r\ are interchanged. E. g. Doric 
 a for rj, Ionic 7iqr t y^a for ngayfia. 
 
§ 3.] VOWELS. 6 
 
 The use of a for r\ is one of the leading peculiarities of the 
 Doric dialect. The use of rj for « is peculiar to the Ionic. 
 
 (7) The vowels a and w are sometimes interchanged. E. g. 
 xgd^ca and xqoj^co. 
 
 (8) The vowels s and o are often interchanged. E. g. 
 rhgocpa from tostim. 
 
 (9) The vowels rj and w are, in some instances, inter- 
 changed. E. g. tittiooo) and nxfaoata* 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 ^3. 1. There are fourteen diphthongs, of which 
 seven, at, av, si, ev, oi, ov, and vi, begin with a 
 short vowel, and seven, a, av, #, r\v, cp, cov, and 
 w, with a long one. The former are called proper 
 diphthongs, and the latter, improper diphthongs. 
 
 The i is written under the long vowel, and is called iota 
 subscript. In capitals it is written as a regular letter. E. g. 
 Till 'AriAT, Trj aylcy Till SOVSll, tw aocpM ' "Aidoy, adu. 
 
 2. The diphthongs are represented in English as follows : 
 
 Proper diphthongs. Improper diphthongs, 
 
 at by ai oi by oi « by d o) by 6 
 
 av " au ov " ou av " du cov " ou 
 
 ei, " ei i/j M yi 77 " e & M yi 
 
 «u " ew 771; " eu 
 
 Note 1. The diphthong cov belongs to the Ionic dialect. 
 It may be doubted whether the diphthong vt, was ever used. 
 
 Note 2. In the improper diphthongs, the second vowel was 
 nearly swallowed up by the preceding long one, which long 
 vowel constituted the leading element of these diphthongs. 
 
 Note 3. Commutation of Diphthongs. (1) The Ionians 
 often use cov for av. E. g. ^wi-^a for davpa. (§ 3. N. 1.) 
 
 (2) The Ionians use r{l for $u E. g. ayyfiov for ayyuov, 
 ^aoilrfi'rj for fictoilda. 
 
 (3) They use y for at. E. g. r^at for rifmuH. 
 
 (4) The Dorians use « for ov. E. g. ^cucra for fiovoa* 
 For ou before a they often use o*. E. g. ^uolaa for ^uovaa 
 
 1* 
 
6 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§4,5. 
 
 BREATHINGS. 
 
 § 4. 1. Every Greek word beginning with a 
 vowel must have either the rough breathing ( c ), or 
 the smooth breathing ('), over that vowel. E. g. 
 
 axovco, s7i6 i uerog. 
 
 Note 1. The vowel v at the beginning of a word takes the 
 rough breathing. E. g. (\uelg, vno. Except the Epic pro- 
 nouns i'\uui, i\uuiv, and i'uus. (§ 64. N. 2.) 
 
 2. The rough breathing is placed also over q at the begin- 
 ning of a word. E. g. 
 
 QSifia, $ ud tog. 
 
 3. When g is doubled in the middle of a word, the first one 
 takes the smooth breathing, and the other, the rough breathing. 
 E. g. agqijTog. 
 
 4. The breathing, as also the accent (§ 19. 5), is placed 
 over the second vowel of the diphthong. E. g. airog, algco, 
 vlog, ovcog. 
 
 Except the improper diphthongs a, r lt oj. E. g. ado), f,dov, 
 cldt}. So in capitals, "Aidn, 'iLdor, *Jlidq. 
 
 5. The rough breathing corresponds to the English h. 
 E. g. tnnoq^ oviog, Qtvucx, aQQTjzog, in English letters hippos, 
 houtos, rheuma, arrhetos. 
 
 Note 2. The smooth breathing represents the effort, with 
 which a vowel, not depending on a preceding letter, is pro- 
 nounced. Let, for example, the learner pronounce first the 
 word, act, and then, enact, and mark the difference between 
 the a in the first, and the a in the second word. He will per- 
 ceive, that the utterance of a in act, requires more effort than 
 that of a in enact. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 % 5. 1. The consonants A, [i, v, q, are, on ac- 
 count of their gliding pronunciation, called liquids. 
 
 2. The consonants £, |, y), are called double 
 consonants ; because £ stands for da, | for xo, and 
 ip for na. 
 
$§ 6> 7.] CONSONANTS. 7 
 
 Note 1. The preposition in in composition never coalesces 
 with the following a. E. g. iy.oxogTii£<jj, not igxognlfr. 
 
 Note 2. It is not exactly correct to say that £ stands for £<r, since, ac- 
 cording to the Greek notions of euphony, a lingual is always dropped before tr 
 (§ 10. 2). In strictness £ is a mixture of £ and <r, just as e is compounded 
 of a and i, o of a and i*, and b of wi and p. 
 
 With respect to its making position (§ 17. 2), this was probably owing to 
 its strong vocal hissing. 
 
 3. The consonants n, /3, <p, x, ^, /, z, 5, #, are 
 called mutes. They are divided into 
 
 smooth mutes zr, x, r, 
 middle mutes /3, 7, S, 
 rough mutes cp, %, &. 
 
 These letters correspond to each other in the perpendicular 
 direction. E. g. op is the corresponding rough of n . 
 
 4. The letter a, on account of its hissing sound, 
 is called the sibilant letter. 
 
 Note 3. The consonants v, o, c, I, ip, are the only ones that 
 can stand at the end of a genuine Greek word. 
 Except y. in the preposition in and the adverb ovx. 
 
 § 6. According to the organs with which they 
 
 are pronounced, the consonants are divided into 
 
 labials n, /3, cp, (i, 
 
 Unguals t, 5, #, £, c, A, v, q, 
 
 palatals x, y, /. 
 
 The labials are pronounced chiefly with the lips ; the Un- 
 guals, with the tongue] and the palatals, with the palate. 
 
 Note. Commutation of Consonants. (1) The Dorians 
 generally use od for J. E. g. xtopuudco for xco^utijw. This takes 
 place in the middle of a word. 
 
 (2) The Attics use it for oa. E. g. TioaTTw for nqaoaw. 
 
 (3) In some instances ^o is used for oa. E. g. uq^v for 
 «oo*?jy. 
 
 EUPHONIC CHANGES. 
 
 § 7. When a labial (n, /?, qp), or a palatal (x, /, #), happens to 
 stand before a lingual (t, <5, #) ; the former is changed into its 
 
8 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§8-10. 
 
 corresponding smooth, middle, or rough, according as the 
 latter is smooth, middle, or rough, (§ 5. 3.) E. g. 
 
 ihgin-iai for rhgifi-Tai, hglip-&i]v for irQi [ 6-&Tjv 
 
 yiygan-xav " yiygucp-jcti aivcp-&rjv " Lii>7i-&r}V 
 
 ijx-Tai, " rjy-iou (nXix-Sriv " £n'k£x-&i]V 
 
 xhtvx-KU " riiivx-Tm (Xe^-^v " iXey-&r]V. 
 
 So Efidopog from kma, oydoog from oxtoj, tmygdftdTjV for im- 
 ygdcpdyv. 
 
 So in Latin, nuptum for nubtum, actus for agtus i vectum for 
 
 Note. Except * in the preposition ex. E. g. ixdegco, Ix- 
 •frgoioxco, not fydigw, fz&gojoxca. 
 
 § 8» 1. A labial (n,^,^) before ^ is always changed into p. 
 E. g. 
 
 XsXsifi-fiai for XeXeiTT-fiat, yiygaix-^ac for y£yga(p-[iou. 
 
 thgifi-fJUL u TFTgifi-jAai, zidgn^-ixaL il rt&gacp-fxoct. 
 
 2. A labial (/J, g>) before o- is changed into tt. According to 
 § 5. 2, the combination no is represented by t//. E. g. 
 rgltpo) for Tglfi-oo) ygdwco for ygoccp-oea. 
 
 So in Latin, nupsi for nubsi, lapsus for labsus. 
 
 §0. 1. A palatal (*,;?) before ^ is generally changed into 
 /• E - g- 
 
 7te7iXey-fi(u for 7is7iX£x-(j,ai Thsvy-fiai for rhevx-fxcu. 
 
 Note. The preposition fV, remains unaltered before ^. E. g. 
 sx[A(xl-roo, iy. t utTos(x>, not iy^iaiica, ty/AEigsot). 
 
 2. A palatal (/,#) before a is changed into x. According 
 to § 5. 2, the combination x a is represented by |. E. g. 
 Asifco for Ity-oco xEh^co for tev^-goj. 
 
 So in Latin, fezi for tegsi, traxi for tralisi. 
 
 § 10. 1. A lingual (t, d, &, J) before ^ is often changed into 
 (J. E. g. 
 
 r\G-\iai for yd-fiott, ninna-pai for ni7iu&-[xai 
 
 Ttldo-fxa " 7thxd--ficc qjgoviia-fxa " cpgovxi^-fjia. 
 
 2. A lingual (t, <5, #, J) is always dropped before a. E. g. 
 
 ni-ob) for ttet-oco nld-Gco for 7ild&-G(o 
 
 a-oh) " (td-Gw cpgovxl-Gbi " cpgovxl'Q-GG). 
 
 So in Latin, amans for amants, monens for monents, lusi for 
 
§§ 11, 12.] CONSONANTS. 9 
 
 3. A lingual (r, d, &, £) before another lingual is often 
 changed into o. E. g. 
 
 tju-tul for rfi-jai ninlao-jai for ninXot$-T(u 
 
 i'a-TS " i'd-TS qooriHJ-Trj? " <jp£oyT*£-T?^. 
 
 4. A lingual (t, <5, #, Q before a palatal (*,/,/) is always 
 dropped. E. g. /]-xa for ffi-y.a, ninu-v.a for nintiS-xa, ntcpoov- 
 
 Tl-TCCC for TlHfQOVTl^-xa. 
 
 Note 1. The omission of a lingual before <rorx does not affect the quantity 
 of the preceding vowel. 
 
 Note 2. In the Epic language the r of the preposition xa.ro. is changed 
 into the following consonant. E. g. xayyovu for xaryovu for xccra. y'ovu, 
 xaXki-rov for xurkivov for xoctiXiwov, 
 
 Before two consonants the r of this preposition is dropped. E. g. xa,<r%&i 
 for xar<r;££i>$ for xaTJ^sS-g. 
 
 § 11. The letter a cannot stand between two consonants. 
 E. g. ytyQii(p-&vu for yey(jacp-o&ai, £yuX-&GU for iytiX-o&oii. 
 
 § 12. 1. Before a labial (n, ft, qp), >> is changed into p. E. g. 
 ifi-nlmu for iv-nlmat iu-q:.t*vr t g for ty-cpixr^g 
 
 ovu-{3uhoj " uvr-(2airtti ift-ipvyog M ty-ipi'/og. 
 
 So in Latin, imbcllis for inbcllis, impius for inpius. 
 
 2. Before a palatal (x, /,/), >' is changed into /. E. g. 
 
 gvy-xalto for ovr-xako ovy-yert}g for ow-yBvqg 
 
 Remark. The combinations //> /*» y& yj, are repre- 
 sented in English by /?£*, tic or p£, ;?.r, ncA, respectively. E. g. 
 «//o? angos, uyy.cov ancon or onkun, uy$oj anxo, tiy/M uncho. 
 
 3. Before a liquid (A, |U, o), y is changed into that liquid. 
 
 ovX-Xiyw for ovv-Xtyat ifi-pivm for ir-uho) 
 
 eX-Xoyog il tv-Xoyog ovq-qsq} (< ovv-otw. 
 
 So in Latin, colligo for conligo, commotus for conmotus, cor- 
 ruptus for con nipt us. 
 
 4. Before o~ or J, y is dropped. E. g. 5ul k uo-oi for dal^iov-at, 
 ov-£vyog for ovv-£vyog. 
 
 £wln many instances, after y has been dropped before a, the 
 preceding short vowel is lengthened. £ and o are changed 
 into u and ov respectively (§ 2. N. 3). E. g. 
 
 fisXu-g for nsXav-g ti&u-gl for Ti&ev-oi 
 
 Ttll'CpU-OI, " TBTVCpaV-Ol TV71T0V-OI " TVTllOV-Ol. 
 
10 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 13, 14. 
 
 This lengthening almost always takes place when vr, yd, y&, 
 are dropped before a (§§ 10. 2 : 12. 4). E. g. 
 
 ygdyu-g for ygix^arj-g Xtov-oi for Xiovr-oi 
 
 nxp&fl-S " rmp&drt-g onei-aco li onerd-ow 
 
 dtixrv-g " dsixrvn-g nu-aouai " ntiS-oopou. 
 
 Note 1. We must not suppose that the omission of the lingual has any 
 thing to do wiih the lengthening of the vowel before <r (§ 10. 2, N. 1). 
 
 Note 2. In some instances, y before o is changed into a. 
 E. g. ovaoojfiWg for ovrocojuog. 
 
 Note 3. The preposition (v remains unaltered before g, o, 
 £. E. g. irqum'sti, sigutioj, iv^ivyvvfti. 
 
 Note 4. In the following words v is not dropped before o ■ 
 xiroai (from xEinfei), niwavatq, niquavoai (irom q>alva). Also in 
 the ending rg of the third declension (§ 36. J), as iljMvg. Also 
 in the word ndliv, in composition, as 7iix).lvoto{.uoj. 
 
 $ 13. At the beginning of a word g is generally doubled, 
 when, in the formation of a word, it happens to stand between 
 two vowels. E. g. 
 
 nsgiggeco from jiegl and gsco I'ggsvy.a for i'gsvy.a. 
 
 § 14. 1. When, in the formation of a compound word, a 
 smooth consonant (n> x, t) happens to stand before a vowel hav- 
 ing the rough breathing, that smooth consonant and the rough 
 breathing form a corresponding rough consonant ((p,x, #). E. g, 
 acp-lrif.u for an-ir^i y.rx&-atgeaig for y.ai-cugsoig 
 
 dex-i'lixtgog " dtx-iluegog av&-i'j i u£gog " avT-i]y.zgog. 
 
 Note 1, In the words Ti&ginnov (Thragsg, Xtittoq), cpgovdog 
 (ngo, odog), xroifucxnov (to Ifidriov), daxegov (rov higov), the 
 rough breathing affects the smooth mute, although it does not 
 immediately come in contact with it. 
 
 2. The same change takes place when, of two successive 
 words, the first ends in a smooth consonant, and the next 
 begins with a vowei having the rough breathing. E. g. 
 
 acp ov for un ov f.it& rjtjtov for ^lbt rjfiwy 
 
 v.oi\? kixvToy " y.ax kaviov ov/ vfuwy u oiix ificjjQ 
 
 Note 2. The Ionic dialect violates these rules. E. g. dm- 
 HSG&aL for uyixio&ui, y.aThvdw for y.a&tvdco, ovx oiog for ov% oiog. 
 
 3. If two successive syllables would each have a rough con- 
 
§ 15.] CONSONANTS. 11 
 
 sonant (<p,# #), tne ^ rst rou gh consonant is often changed into 
 its corresponding smooth (n } %, t). E. g. 
 
 7iscpr { va for cptqjTjva Tt&rjXot for d^i&riXa 
 
 This change takes place in almost all reduplications. 
 
 Note 3. The Jirst aorist passive deviates from this rule. 
 E. g. acpe&rjv, fyv&r}v, not ans&riv, ixv&7ju. 
 
 Except hs&r^ from Tlfrr^i, and irv&rjP from #t'co. 
 
 Note 4. The termination &i of the imperative active 
 (§ 88. 1) is changed into -n, if the preceding syllable has a 
 rough consonant. E. g. tvcp^^tl for ivy&rj&i, tI&stl for il&e&i. 
 
 Except the imperatives cpdfri from qp^t, and Te&va&i from 
 •d-rqaxw. 
 
 Note 5. In the verb c EXSl, of which the future is h'^co, the 
 rough breathing is changed into the smooth breathing, l^a), on 
 account of x m tne following syllable. 
 
 4. A rough consonant (<p, #, #) is never doubled ; but instead 
 of this, its corresponding smooth (7r, x,t) is placed before it. 
 E. g. omcpvq, "iay-xog, 'di&lg, not dyyvg/'lax/og, *A&$Lg. 
 
 MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 15. 1. All datives plural in /, and all third persons in i 
 and f, are written both with and without a final v. They are 
 generally written with it when the next word begins with a 
 vowel. E. g. 
 
 &i]oo\v (t/Qioig -&7]oa] xctxolg 
 
 (prjolv oviog <p/^< ^or/.cjuj^g 
 
 TVTITOVGLV aVTOVg 1V71TOVOL Toviovg 
 
 tuTtQ^tv fis/ot tartgU fii/a. 
 
 2. Also, all adverbs of place in at (§ 121. 1). E. g. nXa- 
 xaiaai. 
 
 Also, the particles vv and ui, the adverbs niqvov and vootpi, 
 and the numeral uxooi. 
 
 Note. In some Grammars, v movable is written parentheti- 
 cally. E. g. dr^ol (v). 
 
 3. The words ovuog, Sxgig, utxQi$> ana * «J (that is, ixg), and a 
 few^fchers, drop the g before a consonant. E. g. oi/iw q>riol, ix 
 -d-tov. 
 
 "Axgig and fiizgig often drop the g even before a vowel. 
 
 4. The adverb ou becomes ovx or ot^ before a vowel. E. g. 
 
 OV QpT] 01, OVX U7TS, OVX UTllTO ($} 14. 2). 
 
12 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 16. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 § 16. 1. There are as many syllables in a Greek 
 word as there are vowels and diphthongs in it. 
 
 2. Words of one syllable are called monosyllables ; of two, 
 dissyllables ; and of more than two, polysyllables. 
 
 3. The last syllable except one is called the penult ; the last 
 except two, the antepenult. E. g. in iv-onXay-xvoq, %rog is the 
 last syllable, onlay, the penult, and tv, the antepenult. 
 
 Note 1. (1) Any single consonant may commence a Greek 
 word. 
 
 (2) The following combinations of consonants may com- 
 mence a Greek word or a syllable : /?<5, fiX, (3g, yX, yv, yg, dp, dv, 
 dg, -&X, &r, $g, y.X, xp, xv, xg, xt, pv, nX, nv, ng, tit, a/?, 0&, ox, 
 oxX, op, on, onX, ox, oil, org, ocp, ox, tX, Tfi, rg, cp&, cpX, cpg, %&, 
 Xh ZT> XQ- 
 
 (3) The following combinations also may commence a syl- 
 lable : yd, yp, &p, tv, (pv, xp- 
 
 (4) Further, any three consonants may begin a syllable, 
 provided the first and the last pair may each begin a syllable. 
 E - g- "tq, x&g- 
 
 Note 2. Greek words are divided into syllables in the fol- 
 lowing manner : 
 
 (1) A single consonant standing between two vowels, or a 
 combination of consonants capable of commencing a syllable 
 (§ 16. N. 1), is placed at the beginning of the syllable. E. g. 
 di-a-Xt-yo-paL, v-onlyy?;, xu-TO-nTgov. 
 
 (2) When the combination cannot commence a syllable, its 
 first consonant belongs to the preceding syllable. E. g. I'yl-#a), 
 ay-xw, yak- X(o. 
 
 (3) A compound word is resolved into its component parts, 
 if the first part ends with a consonant. E. g. na-Xlv-og-oog. 
 
 But if the first part ends with a vowel, the compound is 
 divided like a simple word, even when that vowel has been cut 
 off(§ 135. 3). E. g. na-gi-Xix-fiov. ^ 
 
 4. A syllable is called pure, when its vowel or diphthong is 
 immediately preceded by the vowel of the preceding syllable. 
 E. g. the following words end in «, ai, ag, og, pure : or\nl-tt, 
 orjni-ou, orjnl-ag, tiygi-og. 
 
§ 17.] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 13 
 
 QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 ^ 17. In any Greek word, every syllable is 
 either long or short. 
 
 1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a 
 long vowel or diphthong. E. g. in the following 
 words the penult is long by nature : 
 
 oixog, av&gcanog, tTpri, naaa. 
 
 2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when 
 its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by two 
 or more consonants, or by a double consonant 
 (£,!,t/>). E. g. in the following words the penult is 
 long by position: 
 
 iari, ogy.og, uonXayxvog, yga^co. 
 
 3. When a short vow r el is followed by a mute 
 and a liquid, the syllable is common. E. g. in the 
 following words the penult is either long or short : 
 
 liy.voVy v ft gig. 
 
 4. But the syllable is almost always long, when its vowel, 
 being short by nature, is followed by the following combina- 
 tions : pi t yl, yij, yv y <5 ( «, dr. E. g. the antepenult of i'fiksnov. 
 
 Note 1. In the Epic language the syllable is generally long 
 when its vowel, being short by nature, is followed by a mute 
 and a liquid. 
 
 Note 2. In Homer and Hesiod, <jy. and J, at the beginning 
 of a word, do not always affect the preceding short vowel. 
 E. g. (II. 6, 402 : 2, 634.) 
 
 5. Every syllable, which cannot be proved to be 
 long, must be assumed to be short. 
 
 Note 3. The quantity of «, i, v, must be learned by obser- 
 vation. The following remarks, however, may be of some use 
 to the learner : 
 
 2 
 
14 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§ 18, 19. 
 
 (1) Every circumflexed a, i, v, is long by nature. (§ 21.) 
 E. g. nay, ipi?, dgvg. 
 
 (2) Every «, i, v, arising from contraction is long by nature. 
 (§ 23.) E. g. Tt/i«, noXig, fioTQvg, from rlfxccs, noXisg> florgveg. 
 
 (3) Every ao, va, arising from olvxg, vvra, is long by nature. 
 (§ 12. 5.) E. g. rvyaoi, £evyvvg, for jvipavrai, &vyvvvxg. 
 
 (4) Derivative words generally retain the quantity of their 
 primitives. 
 
 § 18. 1. The epic and the lyric poets often shorten a long 
 vowel or diphthong at the end of a word when the next word 
 begins with a vowel. E. g. (Od. 5, 286) "fl nonoi, t\ fidXa drj 
 fiSTs^ovksvaocp &sol aXXcog, where w nonoi, -oav &eol, are dactyles. 
 
 Note 1. This kind of shortening occurs also in the middle 
 of a word. E. g. dr}loio ( ww-w), roiavxl (---)• 
 
 2. A short syllable is often made long by the epic poets. 
 E. g. inside ( ), AloXov ( ), cplXs exvgs (~ — w~-). 
 
 Note 2. It is supposed that the ancients generally doubled 
 in pronunciation the consonant following the short vowel. 
 E. g. they read iTznEidrj, AloXXov. 
 
 There are instances, however, where the short vowel was 
 lengthened without reference to the following letter. E. g. 
 did for d?d. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 § 19. 1. The Greek has three accents, viz. the 
 acute ('), the grave ('), and the circumflex ("). 
 
 The acute can stand only on one of the last 
 three syllables of a word ; the circumflex, only on 
 one of the last two, and the grave only on the last. 
 
 Remark 1. The place of the accent in every word must be 
 learned by observation. 
 
 Note 1. The following monosyllables (called atona) gen- 
 erally appear unaccented : 
 
 t\, slg or ig t iv or uv, t| or «x, ov or oix or ovx, w& and the 
 articles 6, f\, 61, at. 
 
§ 20.] ACCENT. 15 
 
 Remark 2. When the articles o, «, eU oth stand for demonstrative pronouns 
 (§ 142. 1, they should be read as if they were accented. 
 
 Remark 3. e O takes the acute when it is equivalent to the relative pronoun 
 (§ 142, 2> For *,-, see below (§ 123. N. 1). 
 
 Note 2. According to the old grammarians, the grave accent is understood 
 on every syllable which appears unaccented. Thus ccyB-owroxroyos, vv-rru, are, 
 according to them, avB-g&froxrovos, tuttu. It seems, then, that the grave 
 accent is no accent at all. 
 
 2. A word is called oxytone, when it has the acute accent 
 on the last syllable. E. g. mtsTog, tins, aya&ol. 
 
 Paroxytone, when it has the acute accent on the penult. 
 E. g. xieXo), (usfitglG&ui. 
 
 Propar oxytone, when it has the acute on the antepenult, 
 E. g. uv&Qwnog, u$loi, Tic/.ecjg. 
 
 3. A word is called perispomenon, when it has the circum- 
 flex on the last syllable. E. g. inidw, diuntQuv, nobotv. 
 
 Properispomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult. 
 E. g. T0VT0V t {itjj.vr { (j&ai, fxakkor. 
 
 4. A word is called barytone, when its last syllable has no 
 accent at all. (§ 19. N. 2.) E. g. tvtito), tovtov, nsQieg^ofisvog. 
 
 5. When the accented syllable has a diphthong, the accent 
 is placed over the second vowel of that diphthong. E. g. 
 ai/iaitt, dtoi'tua. Except the improper diphthongs a, r h <y. 
 (See also § 4. 4.) 
 
 § 90. 1. If the last syllable is long either by nature or by 
 position (§ 17. 1, 2), no accent can be placed on the ante- 
 penult. 
 
 2. The acute can stand on the antepenult only when the 
 last syllable is short. E. g. uv&gwnog, dity&ogsv, nilexvg. 
 
 Note 1. The endings at and oi are, with respect to accent, 
 short. E. g. XtyovTcti, uv&Q(tmoi. 
 
 Except the third person singular of the optative active. 
 E. g. Ti/.n' t oai, Tifitlooi. 
 
 Except also the adverb ol'xoi, at home, which in reality is an 
 old dative. 
 
 Note 2. The endings w, &>, tag, wc, tav, qw, of the second de- 
 clension, and ag, wv, of the genitive of nouns in i$, vg, of the 
 third declension, permit the accent to be on the antepenult. 
 (§§ 33 : 43. 3.) E. g. uvclyw, no/.eojg, nokeuv. 
 
16 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§§21,22. 
 
 Note 3. Also the Ionic termination w of the genitive sin- 
 gular of the first declension permits the accent to stand on the 
 antepenult. E. g. Tvdsldsw. (^ 31. N. 3.) 
 
 3. The penult, if accented, takes the acute when it is short 
 by nature, or when the last syllable is long by nature. E. g. 
 Xoyog, [iovoijg. 
 
 4. When a word, which has the acute on the last syllable, 
 stands before other words belonging to the same sentence, this 
 acute becomes grave ('). E. g. Tovg novr}Qovg xal rovg dya&ovg 
 av&gcoTiovg, not jovg Tiovygovg aal %ovg aya&ovg dv&gwnovg. 
 
 § 21 • 1. The circumflex can be placed only on a syl- 
 lable long by nature. E. g. t?Js Ti^g, diansgcov. 
 
 2. A penult long by nature, if accented, takes the circum- 
 flex only when the vowel of the last syllable is short by nature. 
 E. g. paXXov, tups, xajcurvS. So uvai, olxoi, (§ 20. N. 1.) 
 
 ENCLITICS. 
 
 § 22# 1. Enclitics are words which throw their accent 
 back upon the last syllable of the preceding word. The fol- 
 lowing words are enclitics : 
 
 (1) The personal pronouns pov, pol, ps, gov, gov, as, ov, of, 
 s, oqxaE f ocpwi'v, ocpicov, oyiag, ocpia, g<$lgi, oapiv, ocpi, Gcpag. We 
 must observe, that,of those beginning with oq>, only the oblique 
 cases are enclitic. 
 
 (2) The indefinite pronoun tIq, t\, through all the cases, as 
 also the words tov, tw, for twoq, tu>1. 
 
 (3) The present indicative of si pi, am, and (prjfil, say. 
 Except the monosyllabic 2 pers. sing, ti or tig, and cp^g. 
 
 (4) The particles no&h>, no&l, not, nr\, nov, nojg, noxi, yd, 
 &riv t xi or y.iv, vv or vvv, nio, nw, re, toI, qoc, and the insepar- 
 able particle de\ to. 
 
 2. If the word before the enclitic has the acute on the ante- 
 penult, or the circumflex on the penult, the enclitic throws 
 back an acute on the last syllable of that word. E. g. av&Qw- 
 nog Tig, for av&ownog ilg ' dsl$6v poi, for bu^ov \io\. 
 
 3. When the word before the enclitic has the accent on the 
 last syllable, the accent of the enclitic disappears. In this 
 case the acute does not become grave (§ 20. 4). E. g. iyol 
 (ptlfu, f° r tyv> < 3P 1 ?i Ufc ' " noXXolg tioi, for noXXolg rial* 
 
§ 23.] CONTRACTION. 17 
 
 Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent also when the pre- 
 ceding word has the acute on the penult. E. g. tovxov ys. 
 
 4. An enclitic of two syllables retains its accent, 
 
 (1) When the preceding word has the acute on the penult. 
 E. g. avdgsg xivsg. 
 
 (2) When the syllable upon which its accent would have 
 been thrown back has been elided (§ 25). E. g. nolX' ioxl } 
 for noXkd ioxi. 
 
 Note 1. Enclitics, which stand at the beginning of a sen- 
 tence, retain their accent. E. g, o ov ydg xgdxog iaxl fiiyiotov. 
 
 Remark. The abovementioned personal pronouns retain 
 their accent, when they depend upon a preposition. E. g. 
 inl ool, not ink ooi. Except pi in the formula ngog ps- 
 
 Note 2. When several enclitics succeed each other, the 
 preceding takes the accent of the following. E. g. ovdinoxi 
 ioxi oq*ioiv, for ovdinoxs iail ocpioiv. 
 
 Note 3. Frequently the indefinite pronouns and the par- 
 ticles are not separated by a space from the attracting word. 
 E. g. ovxs, firing, ooxig, oioxioiv, w'arct 
 
 CONTRACTION. 
 
 § 23. A pure syllable (§ 16. 4) and the one immediately 
 preceding it are often united into one long syllable. This is 
 called contraction. It takes places generally as follows : 
 
 aa are contracted into a, as into a, as xgvosa xgvou, vyiiu 
 
 pvda fiva. vyicc. 
 
 aa — a, as pvda fiva. sa — 77, as xgvoia XQ V(J fh 
 
 aai — a*, as firdai fxval. sac — ?/ or at, as xvnxsai rimy, 
 as — a, as xipas xlfxa. ^uatat %qv ooi. 
 
 asi — a, as xiudsi xipa. se — si, as (piles cplfoi. Some- 
 ar\ — a, as Ufiarrfs xipdxs. times into 77, as xgiijgss xgi^grj. 
 
 ■S — ?> as **/■*/?* xipag. ssi — si, as cpdisig ydslg. 
 
 «'t — a, as d'L'oow aoow. srj — 77, as (pdir^xs qodijxs, 
 
 ao — a, as xipdopsv xifiwpsv. srj — tj, as cpiXiyg ydijg. 
 
 aou — o), as xifidoifisv xi/uwfisv. si — si, as noks'l nolsi. 
 
 aov — (o, as Tipdovoi rifiwoi. so — ov, as ydio/usv ydovfisv. 
 
 an — a), as r^a'w t^w. sol — 01, as ydioifjisv (fdotpsv. 
 
 sa — 7i, as yia yr). Sometimes sov — ov, as cpdiovai cpdovoi. 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
*a> 
 
 — co, 
 
 as cpiXsco cpiXco. 
 
 V 
 
 — v> 
 
 as Tif.u]soaa n/nijooa 
 
 1}U 
 
 — 9* 
 
 as jifjrjsig Tififjg. 
 
 V 
 
 — 9* 
 
 as Ogrjioaa Ogjjooa. 
 
 16 
 
 — <"> 
 
 as 7io'Atf£ 7roA7c. 
 
 11 
 
 — t, 
 
 as hoAm 7ioAr. 
 
 oa 
 
 CO 
 
 or «, as yxoa ^co ; 
 
 18 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 24. 
 
 times into tj, as dmXorj di- 
 nky, 
 oj] — 01, as di]l6r t g dtjldlg. This 
 contraction occurs only in 
 verbs in oca. Verbs in copi 
 (§ 117) contract oy into w. 
 tu — 01, as ?^ch ^o2. 
 anloct dnXd* 00 — ov, as drjXoofisv drjXovusv. 
 
 oca — cci, as dinXoou dinXou. 001 — 01, as d?]Xooijjsv drjXo'lfisv, 
 
 os — ov, as di]X6sie drjXovrs. oov — ov, as drjXoovoi drjlovot. 
 
 osi — ov, as drjXosiv di]Xovv. oco — co, as dijXoco dijXco. 
 Verbs in oco (§ 116) con- oco -co, as ttXoco tiXco. 
 
 tract the endings ost, and vs ft, as i%&vsg IxOvg. 
 
 osig into ot and oig, as tV^Ao'ft t$ — vi, as nXri&vi nXi^d-vl, 
 drjXo7, dqXosig dt]Xo7g. co'i — co, as Xcotcov Xcocov. 
 
 or t — co, as dqXotjTe drjXcors. Some- 
 
 Note 1. (1) The Doric dialect contracts as and cm into 
 r\ and p respectively. E. g. ogas ogr] r ogdsi Soy. 
 
 The Attic does the same in the following verbs, diydco, £dco, 
 xvdco, nsivdco, ofidco, %gdo t uai,. 
 
 (2) The Ionic and the Doric contract so into sv. E. g. 
 oiscpavioviai OTScpavsvvjai. 
 
 Note 2. The contraction is often left to pronunciation. 
 
 E. g. zJiofii]d-sa ( w w — — ), Alyvm-lcov ( ). This kind of 
 
 contraction is called synizesis or synecphonesis. 
 
 Note 3. Accent. (1) If one of the syllables to be con- 
 tracted has the accent, the accent generally remains on the 
 contracted syllable. And if this syllable be a penult or ante- 
 penult, the accent is determined according to §^ 20: 21 ; if 
 it be a final syllable, it takes the circumflex, except when the 
 word uncontracted has the acute accent on the last syllable. 
 E. g. cpiXsofis&a cpiXovfis&a, nXtsrs nXuis ' Ti/udco ti^lco ' fiefiacog 
 fttficog. 
 
 (2) If neither of the syllables to be contracted has the 
 accent, the accent of the word generally retains its place. 
 E. g. noXssg noXsig. 
 
 CRASIS. 
 
 § 24. Two contiguous words are, in many instances, con- 
 tracted into one, when the first ends and the next begins with 
 
§§ 25, 26.] elision. 19 
 
 a vowel. This kind of contraction is called crasis. The 
 coronis (' ) is generally placed over the contracted syllable. E. g. 
 
 Tovvavxlov for to ivjxvxlov 
 T&Xrj&tg " to dXr t &sg. 
 
 Note 1. The i is subscribed only when it stands at the 
 end of the last of the syllables to be contracted. E. g. iywpcu 
 for iydt oifuai, but xdyco for y.ctl iyco. 
 
 Note 2. The crasis is sometimes left to pronunciation. 
 E. g. (II. 2, 651) 'EvvaUcp dvdgeiqjovTjj, to be read 'EvvaXiwvdgu- 
 
 (pOVTTj. 
 
 ELISION. 
 
 § 25. When the first of two contiguous words ends with a 
 short towel, and the other begins with a vowel, the former 
 often drops its final vowel, and the apostrophe (' ) is put over the 
 vacant place. This is called elision. E. g. 
 
 di, ifiov for dtd i t uov 
 
 in avio) " inl avioj 
 
 icp* r t [iiv (§ 14. 2) for inl r^ulr. 
 
 Remark. The prepositions neol and nqo never lose their 
 final vowel. E. g. nsgl uvxor, nob A&fipAt, 
 
 Note 1; The diphthong orj is sometimes elided by the poets, 
 but only in the passive terminations peri, out, rat, and o&ai. 
 E. g. fiovXofi 3 iyoh for floi'lopou fyti* y.uXiiad-' anayScUfjtrjv, for 
 xaXuo&ou anay^uiu^r. 
 
 Note 2. The epic poets, in some instances, reject the final 
 vowel even when the following word begins with a consonant. 
 E. g. uv rixvag, for drit wixvag ' nun Z^ri, for naou Zr\vL 
 
 Note 3. Accent. (1) In prepositions and conjunctions, .if 
 the elided vowel had the accent, this accent also is cut off with 
 the vowel. E. g. dfi<p aiTot, dl£ uni. 
 
 (2) In all other words the accent is thrown back upon the 
 preceding syllable. E. g. tpqpi iyw, for qqpi iyw. 
 
 SYNCOPE, METATHESIS, AND APH^RESIS. 
 
 § 2G. 1. Syncope is an omission of a vowel from the 
 middle of a word. E. g. nccrgog, for nonigog. 
 
 2. Metathesis is an interchange of place between two con- 
 tiguous letters in the same word. E. g. xgadla, for xagdla. 
 
20 
 
 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 
 
 m 27 > 28. 
 
 3. A phoresis is the taking of a letter from the beginning 
 of a word. E. g. nov 'otiv, for nov ionv. 
 
 Note. The combinations pX, [iq, vg, arising from a syncope 
 or from a metathesis, are changed into pjSk, pfe, v5q, respec- 
 tively. E. g. yafiPgog for yapegog, cevdgog for avigog. 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 § 27. The Greek has the following punctuation marks : 
 
 Comma, .... 
 
 Colon, 
 
 Period, .... 
 
 Interrogation, 
 
 Apostrophe (§ 25), 
 
 Coronis (§ 24), 
 
 Marks of quantity (§ 2), , , [-]and[^] 
 
 Marks of parenthesis, . . [( y 
 
 Mark of diaeresis, 
 
 Mark of admiration, 
 
 Note 1. The mark of diaresis is placed over i or v to 
 prevent its forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel. 
 E. g. yrgai, aurij, are trissyllables, but yr\qaiy avj^ are dissyl- 
 lables. 
 
 Note 2. The mark of admiration is not much used. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 § 28. 1. It is supposed by many that the ancient pronun- 
 ciation, that is, the pronunciation of the ancient Athenians 
 and of the well educated in general, is in a great measure lost. 
 The best expedient, according to some, is, to observe how the 
 Romans expressed Greek, and the Greeks Roman names. 
 This would be a very good expedient, if the ancient pronun- 
 ciation of the Latin language was not as uncertain as that of 
 the Greek. 
 
 According to others, the best rule is, to observe how the 
 ancient Greeks expressed the sounds made by particular ani- 
 mals. This rule is, to say the least, very ridiculous, because 
 dogs and sheep are hardly teachers of articulate sounds, and 
 because there are as many ways of expressing the sound made 
 
§ 28.] PRONUNCIATION. 21 
 
 by any animal, as there are nations upon the face of the earth. 
 The frog, for example, in ancient Greek sings ffgexexexeS xoa$, 
 xoa$, in modern Greek, fxndxa xdxa, in English, croak croak. 
 
 2. Others maintain that the modern Greek language is the 
 only source from which any definite notions concerning the 
 ancient pronunciation can be derived. First, because this 
 language is immediately derived from the ancient ; a circum- 
 stance of no small importance. Secondly, because its pro- 
 nunciation is remarkably uniform ; and uniformity in matters 
 of this sort cannot be attributed to mere chance. Further, 
 the modern Greek method is founded on tradition, while all 
 other methods hang on conjecture. For the benefit of the 
 curious we proceed to describe it. 
 a and a are pronounced like a in father. After the sound I 
 
 (i, t], si, oi, v, vi) it is pronounced like a in peculiarity \ 
 ai like s. 
 av, iv, r\v, av, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute 
 
 (/3, y, d) are pronounced like av, ev, eev, ov, respectively. 
 
 In all other cases, like af, ef, eef, off. 
 (} like v. 
 y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes, 
 
 York. In all other cases it is guttural, like the German g 
 
 in Tag. 
 yy and yy. like ng in strongest. 
 y% like nx. 
 yx like ng-h, nearly. 
 d like th in that. 
 e like e in fellow, nearly. 
 si like i. 
 sv, see av. 
 £ like z. 
 rj and rj like t. 
 t\v, see av. 
 & like th in thin, 
 i like i in machine. 
 * like k. 
 
 X like /. Before the sound /, like 11 in William. 
 fi like m. 
 
 pit like mb, as euTrgoa&ev pronounced embrosthen. 
 fixp (/i7i(j) like mbs. 
 v like n. Before the sound /, like n in oNion. 
 
 The words tov, ttjv, iv, ovv, before a word beginning with 
 
 x or |, are pronounced like to/, rr ( y, fy, ovy before % or {. 
 
 (See yx, yt) E. g. tqv xaiQov, iv SuActfw, pronounced to- 
 
39 LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. [§ 28. 
 
 yxaigov, tySvXo/cp. Before n or \p they are pronounced rop, 
 
 ryi, Sf$ t avfi. E. g. xbv novriQov, ovv ipv%jj, pronounced 
 
 TOfinorrjQov, oi\uipvxjj. 
 vr like nd, as evnpog pronounced endimos. 
 £ like x or As. 
 o like o in porter. 
 oi like i. 
 
 ou like oo in woow. 
 7r, o, likep, r. 
 t; like 5 in soft. Before /?, ;/, 8, (i, o, it is sounded like £ 
 
 E. g. xoofxog, o($£g(u, ^[ivqvti, pronounced xo^uog, 0iom, 
 
 Zjuvqvt}. So also at the end of a word, zovg faodelg Ttjg yfjg, 
 
 pronounced iov£@aode7g r^yfjg. 
 t like t in tell. 
 v like i. 
 vi like i. 
 qt like ph or f. 
 
 X like German ch or Spanish^. 
 j// like ps. 
 oj and w like o. 
 gov, see at/. 
 
 The rough breathing is silent in modern Greek. 
 
 So far as quantity is concerned, all the short vowels are 
 equivalent to the long ones. 
 
 The written accent guides the stress of the voice. 
 
 The accent of the enclitic, however, is disregarded in pro- 
 nunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent on 
 the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent. 
 E. g. dsi*6v {ioi, pronounced dtlt-ovfioi, but XiksxTal pot, has the 
 primary accent on the first syllable Af, and the secondary on 
 
PART II. 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 ^39. 1. The declinable parts of speech are 
 the noun, the article, the pronoun, the verb, and 
 the participle. 
 
 2. The indeclinable parts of speech are the 
 adverb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the 
 interjection. 
 
 3. The declinable parts of speech have three 
 numbers ; the singular, the dual, and the plural. 
 
 The dual may be used when two things are 
 spoken of ; but not necessarily. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 ^ SO. 1. Nouns are grammatically divided into 
 substantive and adjective. Substantives are divided 
 into proper and common. 
 
 2. The noun has three genders ; the masculine, 
 the feminine, and the neuter. The masculine is, in 
 grammar, distinguished by the article 6, the femin- 
 ine, by 17, and the neuter, by to. E. g. 6 dvrjg, the 
 man, % yvvrf, the woman, to cfvxov, the fig. 
 
 Nouns which are either masculine or feminine are said to 
 be of the common gender. Such nouns are, in grammar, 
 distinguished by the articles 6, r\. E. g. 6, y Sv&gojnog, a hu- 
 man being. 
 
24 
 
 INFLECTION OP WORDS. 
 
 [§31. 
 
 3. The noun has three declensions ; the first 
 declension, the second declension, and the third 
 declension. 
 
 4. The cases are five; the nominative, the geni- 
 tive, the dative, the accusative, and the vocative. 
 
 Note 1. All neuters have three of the cases alike, viz. the 
 nominative, accusative, and vocative. In the plural these 
 cases end in a * except some neuters of the second declen- 
 sion, which end in m (§ 33). 
 
 Note 2. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual, 
 are alike. The genitive and dative dual are also alike. 
 In the plural, the vocative is always like the nominative. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 § 31. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
 first declension. 
 
 s. 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 
 Mas. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 F. 
 
 4- M. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 SfM. 
 
 N. 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 rig 
 
 «£ 
 
 N. 
 
 
 a 
 
 N. 
 
 
 cu 
 
 G. 
 
 rig 
 
 rig or dig 
 
 ag 
 
 ov 
 
 ov 
 
 G. 
 
 
 aiv 
 
 G. 
 
 
 b)V 
 
 D. 
 
 V 
 
 V or £ 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 D. 
 
 
 aiv 
 
 D. 
 
 
 aig 
 
 A. 
 
 r\v 
 
 uv 
 
 civ 
 
 YlV 
 
 txv 
 
 A. 
 
 
 a 
 
 A. 
 
 
 ag 
 
 V. 
 
 V 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 r\ or « 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 
 at 
 
 2. Nouns in r\ or a or a are feminine. E. g. t\ 
 TifiTj, honor, f( /xovoa, muse, i) cocpid, wisdom. 
 
 Nouns in qs or as are masculine. E. g. 6 ts Xeovrjs, 
 publican, b ragtag, steward. 
 
 D. (two honors) 
 
 N. Tt(il(X 
 G. TlfJLVUV 
 
 D. Ti^ialv 
 A. Tiud 
 
 V. Tlfid 
 
 D. (two muses) 
 
 N. (xovaoc 
 
 G. [lOVOCXlV 
 
 D. jnovaaiv 
 A. fxovaa 
 V. [Aovoa 
 
 S. r) (honor) 
 
 N. tFjUtJ 
 G. Tifi^g 
 
 D. Tlfljj 
 A. Tlfi^V 
 
 V. Ti[iri 
 S. r\ (muse) 
 
 N. fiovaa 
 
 G. fxovarjg 
 
 D. fiovarj 
 
 A. [lovoav 
 
 V. uovoa 
 
 P. 
 
 (honors) 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 Tibial 
 
 TlfXWV 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Tifxacg 
 Tifiixg 
 Tifxal 
 
 P. 
 
 (muses) 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 flOVOCU 
 fXOVObiV 
 
 D. 
 
 fiovoaig 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 fiovoag 
 
 fiOVOOtl 
 
§31.] 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 25 
 
 s. 
 
 6 (publican) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two publicans) 
 
 P. 
 
 (publicans) 
 
 N. 
 
 TtXojrqg 
 
 N. 
 
 reXcova 
 
 N. 
 
 jtXwvcu 
 
 G. 
 
 TtXwvov 
 
 G. 
 
 Ttlwvaiv 
 
 G. 
 
 TsXcovwy 
 
 D. 
 
 TtXcovt] 
 
 D. 
 
 jilwvaiv 
 
 D. 
 
 rsXtovaig 
 
 A. 
 
 TllwV7\V 
 
 A. 
 
 itlwva 
 
 A. 
 
 jilwvag 
 
 V. 
 
 jslcovrj 
 
 V. 
 
 rsXojva 
 
 V. 
 
 relwvat, 
 
 S. 
 
 6 (steward) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two stewards) 
 
 P. 
 
 (stewards) 
 
 N. 
 
 j(X(j.lag 
 
 N. 
 
 la^ila 
 
 N. 
 
 xa^lai 
 
 G. 
 
 TOtfllOV 
 
 G. 
 
 Totfilaiv 
 
 G. 
 
 TCXfXlWV 
 
 D. 
 
 TCt{ila 
 
 D. 
 
 rafxlaiv 
 
 D. 
 
 TCfilaig 
 
 A. 
 
 Tot^dav 
 
 A. 
 
 i a pi a 
 
 A. 
 
 Tctfilag 
 
 V. 
 
 japla 
 
 V. 
 
 to. (da 
 
 V. 
 
 i a (Ala i 
 
 S. 
 
 rj (liouse) 
 
 N. 
 
 olxla 
 
 G. 
 
 oly.lag 
 
 D. 
 
 olxla 
 
 A. 
 
 OLXLUV 
 
 V. 
 
 olxla 
 
 3. Nouns in a pure (^ 16. 4), ga, and some 
 others, retain the a throughout the singular. E. g. 
 aocpia, oocpias, oocpia, aocpiav • %a>gdi, X a QUS-> X a Q$"} 
 %agdv. 
 
 D. (two houses) P. (houses) 
 
 N. olxla N. olxlav 
 
 G. olxiaiv G. olxiwv 
 
 D. olxiaiv D. olxlaig 
 
 A. olxla A. olxlag 
 
 V. olxla V. olxlai 
 
 4. The following classes of nouns in rjg have « in the voca- 
 tive singular. 
 
 (1) Nouns in r^g. E. g. nolli^g, citizen, voc. 7to).7tl<. 
 Remark 1. In Homer, a.Uct^irr t ;, unhappily brave, has voc. aUct^irn* 
 
 (2) Nouns derived from verbs by adding rjg to the last con- 
 sonant of the verb. (§ 129. N. 3.) E. g. yfWfxsTgrjg, geometer, 
 voc. ye(xjf.ihQ(i. 
 
 (3) All national appellations. E. g. Zxv&rig, Scythian, voc. 
 ^•xvdS. 
 
 (4) A few proper names. E. g. nvgal/^g, Pyrcechmes, 
 voc. IIvga7/(ia. 
 
 Note 1. Quantity. (1) A of the nominative singular is 
 always short when the genitive has r^. E. g. [iovoa, fiovorjg. 
 It is very often long when the genitive has ag. E. g. oocplu, 
 
 OOCpliXQ. 
 
 All proparoxy tones and properispomena have of course the 
 a short. E. g. akrj&SLa, fiolpa. 
 3 
 
26 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ § 31. 
 
 Further, oxytones and paroxytones, which have ag in the 
 genitive, have a long in the nominative. E. g. xrtQoi, /agag' 
 niiQct, TitTQctg. Except the numeral pld, and the proper names 
 Ki(Joii and Jlvggd. 
 
 (2) Ag is long. E. g. tafiiag, oocplag. 
 
 (3) yfv of the accusative singular always follows the quantity 
 of the nominative singular. E. g. povuvt, fiovudv oocpla,ooq>lav. 
 
 (4) A of the vocative singular from nouns in ag is always 
 long ; from nouns in rjg it is always short. E. g. rafilag, jafila ' 
 itoXlrqg, noXlxd. 
 
 (5) A of the nominative, accusative, and vocative, dual, is 
 always long. E. g. fiovau. 
 
 Note 2. Accent. (1) The accent remains on the same 
 syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : if 
 not, it is removed to the next syllable. (§ '20. 1, 2, 3.) E. g. 
 &dkaooa, ddlaaoav, -frdXaooou* &a\dooi]g, -frctldijoy* 
 
 Remark 2. AsanoiTjg, master, has voc. dionoTa, not dsGnora. 
 
 (2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- 
 bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent 
 on the last syllable. E. g. Tifirj, npijg, *i/ujj, rifjcug. 
 
 (3) SLv of the genitive plural of barytones also is circum- 
 flexed. E. g. povoa, povowv. 
 
 Except the feminine of barytone adjectives and participles in 
 og. (§ 49. 1.) E. g. u$iog, d$loc, d^ioiv ' rvnTOfiSvog, TVJiiO{i(vri, 
 
 TVTllOfAbVbJV. ' 
 
 Except also the following nouns : xQV air I?> zgyvtav ' ol hr}- 
 aiui, ijrjolwv ' acpvrj, ucpvwv. 
 
 Note 3. Dialects. (1) The following table exhibits the 
 dialectic peculiarities of the first declension. 
 
 Sing. N. Old u for ^c, as Innoiu. 
 
 G. Old uo, Ionic fo>, Doric a, for ov, as ^ATQsldrjg, *AtqzL- 
 duo, 'slroudto), 'AinEtdu. Before a vowel ta drops s, 
 as Jtyutlag, £o[ltim for J^nfiiUoi. 
 
 The Attics sometimes use the Doric genitive, es- 
 pecially in proper names. 
 Plur, G. Old uo)v, Tonic tow, Doric uv, for wv, as fiovoa, pov- 
 odo)v, novoiov, /novauv. 
 D. Old uiul, Ionic r^i or r t g, for aig, as fiovaot, [tovoaioi, 
 
 fiovtfTjOL, [lovorig. 
 A. Doric dg for ag, as xix vr i% izwdg. 
 
§§ 32, 33.] 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 27 
 
 Sing and Plur. G. D. Epic ^qpt or r\cpiv for r t g, jyj wy, eu$, as 
 
 (2) For 77 the Dorians use «, as xi^d, ag, a, dv, d. 
 On the other hand the Ionians use r\ for a, but only in the 
 singular, as oocplrj, rig, y, r]v, tj. (§ 2. N. 3.) 
 
 5) 32. Nouns in act, ea, tag, and orj, are contracted. (§ 23.) 
 E. * 
 
 /iyaa /^a, mina, G. fivdag fivdg, D. ^urraa jura, A. (xvdav pvdv, 
 V. ^uraa /ivw, Plural N. [ivdou prat, G. fivdcov fivcov, D. 
 fivdaig fxvalg, A. fivdug fiidg, V. pvaou fivcu. 
 
 oVxia ovxij, Jig-tree, G. ovxiag aix/~c, D. ovxin ovxj], A. ovxiav 
 ovxrjv, V. ovxiu ovxij, Plural N. ovxiav ovxal, G. cruxecor, 
 at>xcuj>, D. ovxiaig ovxalg, A. ovxiag ovxdg, V. ovxiai ovxeu. 
 
 ctqyvoict aoyvod, of silver, G. aqyvqiag aqyvqdg, &<C 
 
 'Egpiag 'Eq(xijg, Hermes, G/Eqfiiov 'Eqfiuv, D. ^Eq^iia 'Eqfitj, &C. 
 
 anion dnlr], simple, G. aTrAoVy? «7r^?, &<c. 
 
 Note 1. The vowels fa are contracted into ??. But when 
 they are preceded by a vowel or by p, they are contracted into 
 a. In the accusative plural they are always contracted into &. 
 
 Note 2. The contracted forms of fioqiag generally double 
 the g. Thus, fioqiag fioqqdg. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 § 33. 1. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
 second declension. 
 
 s. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. 6? F. 
 
 og cog 
 
 Neut. 
 
 OV COV 
 
 D. All genders. 
 
 N. CO 
 
 p. 
 
 N. 
 
 31. fy F. 
 
 01 CO 
 
 Neut. 
 d ca 
 
 G. 
 
 OV CO 
 
 OV CO 
 
 G. oiv cov 
 
 G. 
 
 cov 
 
 (OV 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 CO 
 OV COV 
 
 s cog 
 
 CO 
 
 OV cov 
 OV cov 
 
 D. oiv cov 
 A. eo 
 
 V. CO 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 oig cog 
 ovg cog 
 
 01 CO 
 
 oig cog 
 a (o 
 a ca 
 
 2. Nouns in og or cos are masculine or feminine. 
 E. g. 6 Xoyos, word, ?/ vrjoos, island, 6 vscos, temple. 
 
 Nouns in ov or cov are neuter. E. g. to ovxov, 
 fig, to dvco/ecov, hall. 
 
28 
 
 & 6 (word) 
 N. Xoyog 
 G. Xoyov 
 D. Zo'^o) 
 A. Xoyov 
 V. Ao>« 
 
 A TO (Jig) 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 avxov 
 ovxov 
 
 OVXto 
 
 ovxov 
 avxov 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 D. (two words) 
 N. Xoyto 
 G. Xoyoiv 
 D. Xoyoiv 
 A. Xoyia 
 V. xo/w 
 
 Z>. (two Jigs) 
 N. oi/xcu 
 G. oi'xo/v 
 D. ovxoiv 
 A. oi'xw 
 V. atxco 
 
 [§33. 
 
 P. (words) 
 N. Ao>(h 
 G. Xoytov 
 D. Ao'/ot? 
 A. Xoyovq 
 V. Ao'/o* 
 
 p. Ufc') 
 
 N. ovxa 
 
 G. ot'xwv 
 
 D. avxotq 
 
 A. arxa 
 
 V. aDxa 
 
 S. 6 (temple) 
 
 D. (two temples) P. (temples) 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 rMog 
 
 vmo 
 
 vmo 
 
 vmov 
 
 VMog 
 
 N. 
 G 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 VMO 
 
 VMOV 
 
 VMOV 
 
 VMO 
 
 VMO 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 VMp 
 VMOV 
 
 reo)Q 
 
 VMOg 
 VMO 
 
 S. to (hall) 
 
 N. avriymv 
 avojyeco 
 uvtoyMo 
 ar (>>y mov 
 avtoyetov 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 D. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 P. (halls) 
 
 N. ditoyMo 
 uvotyMov 
 urtoy&cog 
 avtoytm 
 uvtoyno 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 (two halls) 
 ccitoyeto 
 ur toy mov 
 aror/Mov 
 (xro'ysw 
 uvtoyMO 
 
 Note 1. The following neuters have o instead of ov in the 
 nominative, accusative, and vocative, singular : SXXo, avio, 
 ixtivo, o, to, tovto, from aXXog, uvTog, ixtlvog, oc, o, oizog, re- 
 spectively. 
 
 Remark 1. Further, the termination tov of the accusative 
 singular often drops the v. E. g. "A&(»g, acc - *A&ti for "Adtov. 
 
 Note 2. Quantity, yi of the neuter plural is always short. 
 
 Note 3. Accent. (1) The accent remains on the same 
 syllable as in the nominative, if the last syllable permits it : 
 if not, it is removed to the next syllable. (§ 20. 1,2,3.) E. g. 
 
 UV&OtoTtOg, aV&QtoTlOV, UV&Q(07lOI, ' ULV&QtoTlO), UvdQtoTltoV. 
 
 (2) The endings of the genitive and dative of all the num- 
 bers take the circumflex, when the nominative has the accent 
 on the last syllable. E. g. xrwg, Oiov, &solr, &to7g. 
 
§34.] 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 29 
 
 Except the genitive singular of nouns in wg. E. g. yew's, 
 gen. vsoj. 
 
 Remark 2. For the accent of proparoxy tones in us, m, see above (§ 20. 
 
 N. 2). 
 
 Note 4. Dialects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
 lectic peculiarities of the second declension. 
 
 Sing. G. Old oio, Doric w, for ov, as loyog, Xoyoio, Ao/w. 
 
 Nouns in wc have coo instead of oio, as Uneolg, 
 IlsTsajo. 
 Dual. G. D. Epic ouv for oiv, as Xnnog, Xttttouv. 
 Plur. D. Old oioi for otc, as Sqiyxog, doiyxdiai. 
 
 A. Doric og or og for ovg, as Xvxog, Xvxojg, Xvxog. 
 Sing, tip Plur. G. D. Epic oopi or oqpiv for ov, oj, cjv, oig, as 
 <&tog, fitocpiv. 
 
 § 34. Nouns in eog, oog, eov, oov, are contracted. (§ 23.) 
 E.g. 
 
 & 6 {mind) D. (two minds) P. (minds) 
 
 N. 
 
 voog 
 
 vovg 
 
 N. 
 
 vow 
 
 V(6 
 
 N. 
 
 vooi vol 
 
 G. 
 
 voov 
 
 VOX) 
 
 G. 
 
 VOOLV 
 
 %'6tV 
 
 G. 
 
 voojv vcav 
 
 D. 
 
 VOOJ 
 
 TO) 
 
 D. 
 
 VOOLV 
 
 volv 
 
 D. 
 
 vooig vdlg 
 
 A. 
 
 VOOV 
 
 vovv 
 
 A. 
 
 VOOJ 
 
 vol 
 
 A. 
 
 voovg vovg 
 
 V. 
 
 vos 
 
 VOX) 
 
 V. 
 
 row 
 
 VCii 
 
 V. 
 
 vooi vol 
 
 S. 
 
 to (bone) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two bones) 
 
 P. 
 
 (bones) 
 
 N. 
 
 OUTtOV 
 
 OOTOVV 
 
 N. 
 
 OOTSOJ 
 
 OOTOJ 
 
 N. 
 
 ooTsa oora 
 
 G. 
 
 OOTSOV 
 
 OOTOV 
 
 G. 
 
 OOTSOLV 
 
 1 OOTOIV 
 
 G. 
 
 OOTSOJV OOTOJV 
 
 D. 
 
 OUT SO) 
 
 OOTOJ 
 
 D. 
 
 OOTSOLV 
 
 OOTolv 
 
 D. 
 
 ooTsoig oGTolg 
 
 A. 
 
 OOTSOV 
 
 OOTOVV 
 
 A. 
 
 COTSOJ 
 
 OOTOJ 
 
 A. 
 
 OGTSCi OOTOC 
 
 V. 
 
 OOTSOV 
 
 OOTOVV 
 
 V. 
 
 OOTSOJ 
 
 OOTOJ 
 
 V. 
 
 OOTSa OOTCC 
 
 Note 1. The vowels see in the neuter plural are always con- 
 tracted into a. 
 
 Note 2. (1) The contracted nominative, accusative, and 
 vocative, dual, take the acute accent, contrary to the rule 
 (§ 23. N. 3). 
 
 (2) The contracted genitive and dative of polysyllabic com- 
 pounds in oog, oov } are accented contrary to the rule (ibid.). 
 E. g. avTinvoog avTiTirovg, G. olvtitivoov olvtittvov. 
 
 (3) Some of the contracted forms of adjectives in eog take 
 the circumflex on the last syllable, contrary to the rule (ibid.). 
 ■E. g. ^W£o$ XQVOovg, ZQVosa zgvoa. 
 
 3* 
 
30 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [$35. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 § 35. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
 the third declension. 
 
 ■«to 
 
 2. In the third declension the gender must be determined 
 by observation. 
 
 s. 
 
 All genders. 
 
 D. 
 
 All genders. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 S? F. 
 
 Net 
 
 N. 
 
 Q 
 
 N. 
 
 s 
 
 N. 
 
 
 f? 
 
 
 G. 
 
 OQ 
 
 G. 
 
 OLV 
 
 G. 
 
 
 b)V 
 
 (OV 
 
 D. 
 
 X 
 
 D. 
 
 OIV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ai(v) 
 
 «( 
 
 A. 
 
 V 
 
 A. 
 
 e 
 
 A. 
 
 
 ag 
 
 it 
 
 V. 
 
 9 
 
 V. 
 
 $ 
 
 V. 
 
 
 «S 
 
 a 
 
 8. 
 
 6 (crow) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two crows) 
 
 P. 
 
 (croios) 
 
 N. 
 
 xogal; 
 
 N. 
 
 XOQtXXS 
 
 N. 
 
 xogaxeg 
 
 G. 
 
 xoquxog 
 
 G. 
 
 xogaxoiv 
 
 G. 
 
 xoodxcjv 
 
 D. 
 
 XOQUXl 
 
 D. 
 
 XOOUXOIV 
 
 D. 
 
 XOgU$l(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 xoguxa 
 
 A. 
 
 xoQtxxe 
 
 A. 
 
 xogaxag 
 
 V. 
 
 xoga$ 
 
 V. 
 
 xogaxs 
 
 V. 
 
 xogaxeg 
 
 S. 
 
 V (tope) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two hopes) 
 
 P. 
 
 (hopes) 
 
 N. 
 
 iXntg 
 
 N. 
 
 iXnids 
 
 N. 
 
 iXnldsg 
 
 G. 
 
 iXnidog 
 
 G. 
 
 eXTildoiv 
 
 G. 
 
 iXnldwv 
 
 D. 
 
 ilnldt 
 
 D. 
 
 iXnidoiv 
 
 D. 
 
 iXnioi(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 iXnlda 
 
 A. 
 
 eXntds 
 
 A. 
 
 eXntdag 
 
 V. 
 
 iXnl 
 
 V. 
 
 iXnide 
 
 V. 
 
 iXnldeg 
 
 S. 
 
 6 (giant) 
 
 Z). 
 
 (two giants) 
 
 P. 
 
 (giants) 
 
 N. 
 
 ylyug 
 
 N. 
 
 ylyttvxs 
 
 N. 
 
 ylyavxeg 
 
 G. 
 
 yiyartog 
 
 G. 
 
 yiyunoiv 
 
 G. 
 
 yiyaviwv 
 
 D. 
 
 yiyavji 
 
 D. 
 
 yiyi'tvjoiv 
 
 D. 
 
 yiydoi{y) 
 
 A. 
 
 yiyuvra 
 
 A. 
 
 ylyuvTB 
 
 A. 
 
 yiyavxag 
 
 V. 
 
 yiyuv 
 
 V. 
 
 ylyavts 
 
 V. 
 
 ylyavieg 
 
 S. 
 
 o (weevil) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two weevils) 
 
 P. 
 
 (weevils) 
 
 N. 
 
 nig 
 
 N. 
 
 xU 
 
 N. 
 
 xUg 
 
 G. 
 
 xtog 
 
 G. 
 
 xutiv 
 
 G. 
 
 XLWV 
 
 D. 
 
 xU 
 
 D. 
 
 xioiv 
 
 D. 
 
 xiol(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 xiv 
 
 A. 
 
 xU 
 
 A. 
 
 xlag 
 
 V. 
 
 xig 
 
 V. 
 
 xle 
 
 V. 
 
 xleg 
 
§35.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 31 
 
 S. o (age) 
 
 D. (two ages) P. (ages) 
 
 N. 
 
 al(ov 
 
 N. 
 
 aitovs 
 
 N. 
 
 ctiwreg 
 
 G. 
 
 aUovoq 
 
 G. 
 
 alwpoiv 
 
 G. 
 
 aiwrav 
 
 D. 
 
 altavi, 
 
 D. 
 
 aitovoiv 
 
 D. 
 
 al(t)Oi(f) 
 
 A. 
 
 atwva 
 
 A. 
 
 alojvs 
 
 A. 
 
 ctlojvag 
 
 V. 
 
 alcjv 
 
 V. 
 
 alwvs 
 
 V. 
 
 aicijrsg 
 
 S. 
 
 6 (god) 
 
 D. 
 
 (tico gods) 
 
 P. 
 
 (gods) 
 
 N. 
 
 dutfMtiV 
 
 N. 
 
 dcclfiors 
 
 N. 
 
 dctlfxovsg 
 
 G. 
 
 duifxovoq 
 
 G. 
 
 daifj.oioiv 
 
 G. 
 
 daifxorcov 
 
 D. 
 
 dw'uovt, 
 
 D. 
 
 daifioroiv 
 
 D. 
 
 duifioai(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 dulfiova 
 
 A. 
 
 dalfiovs 
 
 A. 
 
 dui'fiovag 
 
 V. 
 
 dulfiov 
 
 V. 
 
 dulfiovB 
 
 V. 
 
 dulfiovtg 
 
 s. 
 
 6 (Hon) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two lions) 
 
 P. 
 
 (lions) 
 
 N. 
 
 limp 
 
 N. 
 
 kioiTS 
 
 N. 
 
 Xiovitg 
 
 G. 
 
 XeovTog 
 
 G. 
 
 XiOVTOlV 
 
 G. 
 
 XtOVTWV 
 
 D. 
 
 XioviL 
 
 D. 
 
 XtOVTOlV 
 
 D. 
 
 Xiovot(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 Xiona 
 
 A. 
 
 XSOVTS 
 
 A. 
 
 Xkovzag 
 
 V. 
 
 Xiov 
 
 V. 
 
 Xiovxi 
 
 V. 
 
 XtovTeg 
 
 S. 
 
 to (thing) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two things) 
 
 P. 
 
 (things) 
 
 N. 
 
 n q Hyp a 
 
 N. 
 
 7i Qtty \u are 
 
 N. 
 
 TTQUyfJOCTa 
 
 G. 
 
 ncHtyfuictTog 
 
 G. 
 
 7iqny^.aioiv 
 
 G. 
 
 TTQayiAUTtOV 
 
 D. 
 
 7l()(Xy[A(*Tl 
 
 D. 
 
 JlQtxyiJUTOLV 
 
 D. 
 
 7t(juy(juat(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 nguyfia 
 
 A. 
 
 TtgU'/jUUTS 
 
 A. 
 
 7i guy ft (xt a 
 
 V. 
 
 7T(JCCyfl(X 
 
 V. 
 
 Tiquy^icniB 
 
 V. 
 
 TIQlXyfXUTCl 
 
 Note 1. Quantity. (1) The terminations *, oi, a, a$, are 
 short. E. g. xogaxT, x6ga$i, xoguty.u, xogaxug. 
 
 (2) Nouns in svg (§ 44) may have w, ug, in the accusative. 
 E. g. (SaoiXivg, iu, dug. 
 
 Note 2. Accent. (1) In dissyllables and polysyllables the 
 accent generally remains on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
 native, if the last syllable permits it : if not, it is removed to 
 the next syllable. (§20. 1,2,3.) E. g. xoqa^, xogaxog, xoq(xxwv. 
 
 (2) Monosyllables throw the accent in the genitive and 
 dative of all the numbers upon the last syllable. In this case 
 the terminations oiv, av, are circumflexed. E. g. y.lg, y.iog, xtcov. 
 
 Except monosyllabic participles. E. g. dovg, dovTog, dovTi. 
 
 Except also the dual and plural of nug' tuxvtoiv, tkxvtcov, 
 naoi, (§ 53.) 
 

 I I ION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§36. 
 
 Except also the gnritirr dual and plural of the following 
 noun- , Oiog, KPAy head, ovg, nalg, ot]g, Tgwg, 
 
 qrw'c Ulster, qpcSv f^M. 
 
 Remark. Fi>r the accent of irecrja, fivrn^, Svyetrrif, Atifijrrif, ytttrr^ 
 atn», xv»*, and A PI IN, see below (§ 40. N. 3). 
 
 Note 3. Dialects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
 lectic peculiarities of the third declension. 
 
 Dual. G. D. Epic our for oir, as JThojJv, ^etgqrour. 
 
 Plur. G. Ionic ictv for wr, as ^/ t r, jp^yiw. 
 D. Old tain or eoi, as dinotg, dtntxtoai. 
 
 Sing, and Plur. G. D. Epic ocpi(v) or cpi(r) for og, i, toy, ah 
 as v/(K, pjrsu<pi m ruvg, ruv<pi. 
 
 § 36. I. The following table exhibits the endings of the 
 nominative and genitive, singular, of the third declension. 
 
 a gen. woe, cty.Toc, neut. 
 
 aig — aixog, aidoc, all genders. 
 
 av — arog, at roc, mas. or neut. 
 
 ag — ago*:, onog, «oroc, gener- 
 ally neuter. 
 
 ag — 0O£, umc, ubog, arog, av- 
 TOs, all genders. 
 
 avg — dog, iein. 
 
 tig — tigo$ t tgog, mas. or fern. 
 — trog, tnog t udog, mas. or 
 fern. 
 
 tv — irog, fToc, neut. 
 
 tvg — log, ni 
 
 t) — yrfo neut. 
 
 r t v — i,i mas. or fern. 
 
 rig — ? 
 
 ^ — Tjiog, 7 t 0ug, *og, mas. or 
 
 fern. 
 * — zoc, ITOfc neut. 
 iv — troc, mi-. Of i<'m. 
 ig — tog, /toc, id^g, lOog, irog, 
 
 mas. or fern. 
 Xg — Ao£. 
 
 vg — v&og. 
 
 £ — xoc, yog, %og, xrog, mas. 
 
 or fern. 
 ov — orog, oriog, neut. 
 oo — oooc, neut. 
 og — otoc, foe, neut. 
 ovv — odog, neut. 
 ore — ojtoc, oog, odog, mas. or 
 
 fern. 
 v — vog, neut. 
 vv — vrog, vrrog, mas. or neut. 
 vg — vcog, mas. or neut. 
 vg — vog, vdog,v&og, vrog, vv- 
 
 roc, mas. or fern. 
 ijj — nog,pog, opo$,mas.orfem. 
 w — oog, fern. 
 uir — cjrog, ovog, orzog, mas. or 
 
 fern. 
 c»g — o)oog, oqog, generally mas. 
 
 or fern. 
 oj£ — o)og, oog, ixnog, orog, wdog, 
 
 generally mas. or fern. 
 
 2. Most nouns of the third declension form their Nomina- 
 
§ 36.] THIRD DECLENSION. 33 
 
 tive singular by dropping the termination og of the genitive, 
 and annexing g. E. g. 
 
 Tioga^ gen, xogaxog, (§ 5. 2) 
 
 niXoip " IlsXonog, (ibid.) 
 
 iXnig " iXmdog, (§ 10. 2) 
 
 ylyug M ylyavTog, (§ 12. 5.) 
 
 So <jpAs«// (§ 8. 2), cpXtftog' ga* (§ 9. 2), qctyog* /?$• (ibid.), 
 PWOS' %KQig (§ 10. 2), /(XQiiog* ogvig (ibid.), ogn&og' gig 
 (§ 12. 4), ^noV* XT6/V (§ 12. 5), jctsj'o's* Tvydslg (ibid.), Tt/qp- 
 &svrog ' dovg (ibid.), doviog. 
 
 (1) Most masculines and feminines lengthen *$ into ^s, and- 
 og into cu$. E. g. TgLrjQrjg, jgiy^geog ' TEivipojg, rsivcpoiog. 
 
 (2) Many masculines lengthen sg into fi/^. E. g. paodtvg, 
 (kunlioq. 
 
 (3) All neuter substantives change eg into o$. E. g. rsi^og, 
 Tefcog. (§ 2. N. 3.) 
 
 (4) Some neuters change g into £. E. g. otsdcq, Gxiaxog. 
 
 (5) The following nouns lengthen o? into ovg' fiovg, fio6g' 
 novg, nodog' /ovg, %oog. (§ 2. N. 3.) 
 
 (6) The following change ag into uvg' ygavg, ygctog' ravg, 
 vaog. 
 
 (7) ^Mumr]*, sxog, changes the radical letter s into r\ in the 
 nominative. 
 
 Note 1. "Aval, uvay.rog, and n'J, vvv.iog, are the only nouns 
 in £ that have xtoc in the genitive. Originally they had gen. 
 avaxog, rv/6g. (Compare "Avaxtg, Dioscuri, and vv/iog, noctur- 
 nal.) 
 
 u AXg> ilag, is the only noun in Xg. 
 
 3. Many form their nominative singular by dropping the 
 termination 05 of the genitive, with such consonants as cannot 
 stand at the end of a Greek word (§ 5. N. 3). Masculines 
 a.udfemini?ies lengthen s and o, in the final syllable, into 77 and 
 a respectively. E. g. 
 
 alojv g^n. almvog 
 
 dalfxav u daljuiovog 
 
 Xsojv " Xiovxog 
 
 tx gay pot l< ngdypaxog. 
 So xrjv, xtjvog * Xifirjv, Xifisvog ' &£v, divxog ' owxrig, aunrigoq " 
 VX w i i\X 00 S ' d° v » dovxog ' qpwg, qxagog * i]xog, rjxogog ' grjxag, 
 QTjTogog * olvnnt,, aivi^ntog ' duxvvv, duxvvvxog. 
 
34 INFLECTION DF words. [§37. 
 
 Remark 1. In reality the nominative it formed from the root, which is 
 obtained by dropping eg of the genitive. K. g. xe^a^, xogaxos f root xo^ax. 
 
 Note 2. i\d« t rij 18 the only noun in a that has axiog in 
 the genitive. 
 
 ddftitn, ?', the only noun in c.q that has aorog in the genitive. 
 
 Mt/.t, to, the only substantive in t that has nog in the geni- 
 tive. 
 
 Note 3. Neuters in ceo are contracted when this ending is 
 preceded by *. E. g. lap *)«, G. hxoos i/'oo^. 
 
 The neuters difoao, oring, cpqeho, have gen. deXiarog dsXriTog, 
 ojiaiog ar^Toc, qotarog (fvrjiog, contrary to the rule (§ 23. N. 3). 
 
 Note 4. Nouns in nc, sr, gen. citoc, are contracted when 
 these endings are preceded by ^ or o. E. g. xtfiyetg iififtf, 
 ji^n t tviog titifjvtog' nXotxoag nXaxuvg, TiXaxosvTog 7iXtxxovvjog> 
 
 Remark 2. Proper names in «W are generally contracted. 
 E. g. lloutiduwv lloutidojr. 
 
 Note 5. The quantity of the last syllable of the nomina- 
 tive, and of the penult of the genitive, must be learned by 
 observation. Nevertheless we remark here, that 
 
 (1) Monosyllabic nominatives are long. E. g. nav, §lg, 
 duvg. Except the pronouns t/c, ii, t*$i tI. 
 
 (2) The vowels «, t, v, in the penult of the genitive are 
 short, when this case ends in og pure. E. g. ytiootg, uog' noXig, 
 "og ' duxov, vog. 
 
 Except '/oi/vg, aog' vavg, dog. 
 
 (3) The penult of the genitive of substantives is long, when 
 tlii— case terminates in uvog, irog, vvog. E. g. jnuv, avog' 2<xXa- 
 uig, "do,' rlwfjy.vg, ivog* 
 
 § 37. 1. The accusative singular of masculine and 
 feminine nouns is formed by dropping og of the genitive, and 
 annexing «. E. g. 
 
 %ooai t xooaxog ace. xoouxa. 
 
 2. Nouns in tg, re, uvg, ore, of which the genitive is in og 
 pure (\ 16, 4), form their accusative by dropping g of the 
 nominative and annexing v. E. g. 
 
 nohcy noXiog ace. noXiv 
 
§ 38.] THrRD DECLENSION. 35 
 
 If the genitive is not in og pure, they can have v in the 
 accusative only when the last syllable of the nominative is 
 not accented. E. g. 
 
 ogvig, ogrl&og ace. ogvi&a or ogviv 
 
 xogvg, xogv&og " xogv&a or xogvv. 
 
 Note I. In the Epic language, the following nouns often 
 have a in the accusative singular, contrary to the preceding 
 rule : fiovg, (3ou ' sigvg } evgiu * iz&vg, i^&va ' ravg, via. 
 
 Remark. The accusative singular of the obsolete JI2 is 
 always Ala. 
 
 Note 2. These three nouns, 3 AJiokko)v, Hoaeidwv, xvxmr y 
 have ace. ^Anokkcavoc and 'Anokkw, Uoustdava and lloaeidcj, xv- 
 y.eojra and xvxiw. 
 
 § 38. 1. In many instances the vocative singular of 
 masculine and feminine nouns is like the nominative singular. 
 
 2. Nouns in «c, ?jo, or, wg, and some others, form their 
 vocative singular by dropping og of the genitive, with such 
 consonants as cannot stand at the end of a Greek word 
 (§5. N. 3). E.g. 
 
 ylyag, ylynvjog voc. ylyav 
 du.lauv, dulporog " dulfiov. 
 
 3. Nouns in ig y vg, zvg, «i'c, and ore gen. oog, and the com- 
 pounds of novg, drop the g of the nominative. The ending iv 
 is always circumflexed. E. g. 
 
 iknlg voc. iknl 
 
 iz&vg f " Izdi 
 
 fiuaiktvg " pauiktv, 
 
 4. Nous in rjg gen. eog, shorten r t g into eg. E. g. ^toxgdirig, 
 voc. SZwy.gctTtg. 
 
 5. Feminines in oj, aig, gen. ooc, have 61 in the vocative 
 singular. E. g. r t /d 9 rtfoog, VOC. iy/m. 
 
 Note 1. A few proper names in tig gen. avTog, have « in 
 the vocative singular. E. g. yjuodufiag, urxog y voc. Aaodd^a. 
 
 Note 2. The following nouns shorten the final syllable in 
 the vocative singular : "Ajtokkcov, "Anokkov ' noosidwv, Jloaudov ' 
 0(xnr\g> owitg. 
 
36 1MI 1CTI0N OF WORDS. [§§ 39, 40. 
 
 Note 3. (1) The following nouns throw the accent back 
 on the penult in the vocative : arqQ t «Vf£ * dayy, dueg' naxrig, 
 
 7ldl(Q' OWTj'jQ, OWKQ. 
 
 (2) Polysyllabic vocatives, which end in a short syllable, 
 often throw the accent back on the antepenult. E. g. 2'cux^a- 
 
 Note 4. "Aval, king, when employed to invoke a god has 
 voc. «V«. Elsewhere its vocative is like the nominative. 
 
 § 30. 1. The dative plural is formed by dropping og of 
 the genitive singular, and annexing oi. E. g. 
 
 xoqcc*, xoQuxog dat. plur. xoQa^c (§ 5. 2) 
 
 (Xnic, iXnidog u iXnlui (§ 10. 2) 
 
 ylyug, yiyavxog u ylyuui (§ 12. 5). 
 
 2. Nouns in tvg, «iv, and org gen. ooc, form their dative 
 plural by dropping 5 of the nominative singular, and annexing 
 oi» E. g. /SaatXtvg, ftixoiXtvoi' ftovg, (3ovoi. 
 
 Note. The omission of v before <ri (§ 12. 4) in this case does not lengthen 
 the preceding short vowel. E. g. iuipav, 'haipovos, 'ha.lfAort. 
 
 SYNCOPATED NOUNS OF THE THIRD 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 § 40. I. The following nouns in tjo generally drop the c in 
 the genitive and dative singular. In the dative plural they 
 change the s into «, and place it after the q. (§§ 26. 2:2. N. 3.) 
 
 raoTijQ, r lt belli/ , G. yaoxeqog yaoiqog, D. yuoxigi yaoxgi, 
 
 D. Plur. yuuTQtiai and yaaxrJQOi. 
 drjjbirjirjo, t\, Ceres, G. /ttjfi/fXfqog JtjurjxQog, D. Jrjfji^xfQi 
 
 JrjjLirjQi. This noun is syncopated also in the accusative 
 
 singular, drjflTfTtQa sh^urjou. 
 Ovyuxr t o, r h daughter % G. dvyuxiqog dvyctXQog, D. dvyaxegi 
 
 dvyuxql, D. Plur. &vycnoouH. 
 MrjirjQ, t), mother, G. {iijxipog ft^xoog, D. ^ir\xiqi fir^xql, D. Plur. 
 
 fir t TOii(Jl. 
 
 fluTTjO, 6, father, G. naxiqog naxqog, D. naxiqi naxql, D. Plur. 
 
 71UX/JU0L. 
 
 2. 'stir,?, o, man % is syncopated in all the cases except the 
 nominative and vocative singular, and dative plural : 
 
§§ 41, 42.] THIRD DECLENSION. 37 
 
 *AvrjQ, uvigog avdgog, D. dvigi drdgl, A. aviga avdga, V. firtg, 
 DualN. A. V. dvtgs urdge, G. D. dvigoiv avdgoiv, Plvr. N. 
 avigtg tirdgeg, G. dvigwv dvdgwv, D. avdgdoi, A. avegag 
 Svdgae 9 V. dviotg uvdgsg. For the insertion of d, see 
 above (§ 26. N.). 
 
 3. APHN, o, 7aw&, and xvcov, 6 f\, efog", are declined as fol- 
 lows . 
 
 APIIN, G. dgvog, D. ajgvi, A. «£*«, Z>M«Z N. A. ttgve, G. D. 
 
 K^rotJ', Plur. N. ogvtg, G. «pwy, D. dgvdoi, A. ugrag. 
 Kvwr, G. xvv6$t D. xvf/j A. xj,W, V. xiW, Dual N. A. V. 
 
 >ciW, G. D. %yvo*t ? Plur. N. y.tWc, G. y.vvm', D. xfa/, A. 
 
 Note 1. The poets in some instances drop the i also in the 
 accusative singular, and in the nominative and genitive plural. 
 E. g. dvyuigu, Sv/aTgsg, TiaTgwv. 
 
 Note 2. s Aatr { Q, egog, o, star, imitates naxi\g only in the 
 dative plural, doigdoi. 
 
 Note 3. (1) The accent of the full forms of dvyg, APHN, 
 yctOTtjg, Ar^uiiTijo, y.voov, 7rar?^, is regular (§ 35. N. 2). 
 
 For the accent of the vocative of dv^g and nairjo, see above 
 (38. N. 3). 
 
 The accent of the full forms of dvydirjO and ^ri]g is ir- 
 regular in the cases which end in a short syllable. 
 
 (2) In the syncopated genitive and dative the accent is 
 placed on the last syllable. Except Ar^r^g. 
 
 CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 § 41. 1. Many nouns of the third declension, of which the 
 genitive ends in og pure (§ 16. 4), are contracted. 
 
 2. The contracted accusative plural is always like the con- 
 tracted nominative plural. 
 
 § 42. Nouns in yg, sg, og, gen. tog, nouns in ag gen. aog, 
 and nouns in co, tag, gen. oog, are contracted in those cases, 
 in which the termination (§ 35. 1) begins with a vowel. E. g. 
 4 
 
38 
 
 INFLECTION or WORDS. 
 
 B * 
 
 {gatttjf) 
 
 N. i 
 
 '-j/^ooi/s 
 
 I TOl/jQEl 
 
 D. (tiro galleys} 
 
 N.A.V. tqii'jqee TQirjQri 
 
 G. D. TQlljQEOlV TQlTJQOlv 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 S. to (wa//) 
 
 N. rt7xog 
 
 G. rei'xEog rsl/ovg 
 
 D. Tf/^ei' Tf/^e* 
 
 A . TU%og 
 
 V. rslxog 
 
 D. (two to alls) 
 N.A.V. Tf/^f£ T£ ot 
 G. D. t$i%£oiv reixolv 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 
 G 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 (galleys) 
 TQi/joteg TQUjQSig 
 
 TQ17]QE(0V TQM]QWV 
 
 Tgtiioeat(v) 
 TQiijoeixg TQirjQSig 
 TQii^seg TQDjgeig 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 (walls) 
 rei/EM inxr\ 
 
 TEIX8WV TEI%0JV 
 T8l'x8(Jl(v) 
 TUXtU TUX 1 ! 
 
 Ttlxsot xuxr\ 
 
 S. to (prize) 
 
 N. yegocg 
 
 G. yegaog yiowg 
 
 D. ys'pa'i ytgct 
 
 A. yiqag 
 
 V. yipctg 
 
 D. (two prizes) 
 N.A.V. ytoiiE yEQvi 
 G. D. yEguoiv yEQMV 
 
 S. y (echo) 
 N. ijyoj 
 
 rftoog rpovg 
 
 jxoa nx<* 
 fjXol 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Wot, 
 i]X™ v 
 
 D. (tioo echoes) 
 N.A.V. ftfoi 
 G. D. ^oly 
 
 P. (echoes) 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. yo^ 
 
 A. fjrovg 
 
 V. 7^0/ 
 
 Note 1. Proper names in xte^g, contracted xXrjg, undergo a 
 double contraction in the dative singular, and sometimes in 
 the accusative singular. E. g. 
 
 8, (Pericles) 
 
 N. J/fotxXirig J/EQixXrjg 
 
 G. J/foixXhog lhoixXiovg 
 
 D. JHolxXeeC J/iqixXeei ITeqlxXel 
 
 A. J/foiy.XtEa UeqlxXecx IJeqixXtJ 
 
 V. J/tfjixXEEg IlEQiy.XELg 
 
 p. 
 
 (prizes) 
 
 N. 
 
 yionu ytou 
 
 G. 
 
 ytouow ytqwv 
 
 D. 
 
 ytouui(r) 
 
 A. 
 
 ytooa ytou 
 
 V. 
 
 yteaa ytou 
 
$43.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 39 
 
 Remark. Sometimes proper names in y.Xsi]g have xXsog in 
 the genitive, and xket in the dative. 
 
 The noun c HgaxXsiig, Hercules, has voc. also c 'Hgc<xXsg. 
 
 Note 2. The ending sa, when preceded by a vowel, is 
 generally contracted into «. E.g. SfiTJg, vyisa vyia' xXsog, 
 xXssa y.Xsu.. 
 
 Note 3. Ksgag and rsgag, gen. ktoc, often drop the t 
 and are contracted like ysgug. E. g. y.sgag, y.sgccrog y.igaog xigcag. 
 Kg sag, in the later Greek, has aiog in the genitive. 
 
 Note 4. The dual and plural of nouns in w, coc, follow the 
 analogy of the second declension. 
 
 The uncontracted forms of these nouns are not used. 
 
 Note 5. The Epic language often contracts ssog inio r\og 
 or slog, su into ffi or git, and ££« into ^a or *7a. E. g. c lIguxXsr i g, 
 -xXssog -y.Xr t og, -y.Xis'L -yJSfi, -xXssct -xAiJa * onsog, onisog onslog, 
 anss'i onrj'l or otiul. 
 
 Note 6. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of 
 nouns in co, cog, ends in ovv. E. g. ylqua, s1i]tovv. 
 
 Note 7. The accent of the contracted accusative singu- 
 lar of nouns in co is contrary to the rule (§ 23. N. 3). 
 
 § 4:3. 1. Nouns in ig, vg, gen. tog, vog, are contracted in 
 the dative singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and 
 vocative, plural. E. g. 
 
 & 
 
 6 {serpent) 
 
 8. 
 
 o CM) 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ocpig 
 ocpiog 
 
 OCpiL OCpl 
 
 ocpiv 
 *> 
 
 OCpl 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ixdvog 
 Iz&vi Ix&vZ 
 IX&VV 
 iX&v 
 
 D. 
 
 {two serpents) 
 
 D. 
 
 (two fishes) 
 
 N.A.V. S<pie 
 
 G. D. OCplOlV 
 
 N.A.V. l x &vs 
 G. D. Ix&volv 
 
 p. 
 
 (serpents) 
 
 P. 
 
 (fishes) 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 ocpisg ocpig 
 
 OCpLCxiV 
 
 oopioiiv) 
 ocpiag ocpig 
 ocpisg ocpig 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 iX&vsg Ix&vg 
 iX&vcov 
 iX&voi(v) 
 ix&vag Ix&vg 
 Ix&vsg Ix&vg 
 
40 
 
 1NFLF 
 
 :> 43. 
 
 '2. The nouns 6, y ft U woman , *] >ui\\ sfo/7, 
 
 and o. r oiV, sfuep, are declined as folio 
 
 6. ,Wc, B. /&*, A. ^ V. fiov, Dual N. A. V. pit, 
 
 G. D. 5 .-?■; . Plur. N. ^5o«$ j?cl ( 
 5; ",. \ . 5.5; 3;.i;. 
 
 ; ; .:*;. G, ; ; T;.-. D. ; ; . A. ; ; u J . *\ . ; ; a, Dua 1 X. A. V. 
 
 7£a£, G D ; otfotf, Plur. N. /ocrfc ygaL G ; * D. 
 
 poavoi? -A. ; • , ^ • ' . - /C' :i ?• 
 
 wriig is regularly declined like j \ I cline 
 
 as follows : G. re«£, D. j A V, ■, ..;. Pft/r. X. 
 
 G. » «i>r, D. ravoi, A. r« re, V. 
 The Ionians change « ii: They have also 
 
 G. i5 ■;';, A. r?« and via, Dual D. rsolr, Plur. N. rag, A. 
 
 G. ota: olog, D. ©« oil, A. olr oir, Plur, N. 0*5. 
 .. D. otot, A. oiag oSoeg 
 
 3. Most nouns in md into ?, in all the 
 
 cases. :he nominati . and vocati 
 
 lar. v - in i$ and vq generally change - into «$. 
 
 8 (sfofe) 
 
 a 
 
 to (mustard) 
 
 N. itohg 
 
 X. 
 
 
 G t . ■ ,'.. i ; ; ; 
 
 G, 
 
 
 D. noiti noiu 
 
 D. 
 
 Gl 
 
 A. noli* 
 
 A. 
 
 
 V. noli 
 
 V. 
 
 ait 
 
 D. (two states) 
 
 D. 
 
 
 N.A.V. t 
 
 X A.V. on? 
 
 G. D. .TOAioir 
 
 G, 
 
 D. mnptioa 
 
 P. (sftf/es) 
 
 P. 
 
 
 N. irolct? 3Toi«$ 
 
 N. 
 
 oirr t nfa ainprq 
 
 G . t ;• ). : [■: 1 
 
 G. 
 
 '_"":» |XHMP 
 
 D. noluji(r) 
 
 D. 
 
 (FirjJjTf<Ji(r) 
 
 A - / ■ ; : ; t ; I. .- . ; 
 
 A. 
 
 airifraa ainyVij 
 
 V. nokttg Jioiitg 
 
 V. 
 
 a«r jf.Tsa (jinjjnj 
 
§44.] 
 
 TI1IUD DECLENSION. 
 
 41 
 
 s. 
 
 o (cubit) 
 
 a 
 
 TO (fftjf) 
 
 N. 
 
 Ttrtfiq 
 
 N. 
 
 a an/ 
 
 G. 
 
 711 'j[">>l 
 
 G. 
 
 OffTfO, - 
 
 D. 
 
 ■nr^n JTiyt* 
 
 D. 
 
 «arfi' u'artt 
 
 A. 
 
 w WW 
 
 A. 
 
 auru 
 
 V. 
 
 "U" 
 
 V. 
 
 aaiv 
 
 D. 
 
 (/iro cubits) 
 
 Z>. 
 
 (fwo cititf) 
 
 N.A.V. „wu 
 
 N.A.V. &ru 
 
 G. 
 
 D. nrixioi* 
 
 G. 
 
 D. uarfoiv 
 
 P. 
 
 (cubits) 
 
 P. 
 
 (rili. 
 
 N. 
 
 Mf 
 
 N. 
 
 ua uutr, 
 
 G. 
 
 *»'/< 
 
 
 i tmt 
 
 D. 
 
 n»>-ui(i) 
 
 D. 
 
 n(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 m. . .fif 
 
 A. 
 
 ■ 
 
 V. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 Note I. In raft in x; and 
 
 v is contracted. E. g. 
 
 mtf. Such contractions belong to ek. 
 
 Noti 2. The genitii* singular of neuters in i and i/ very seldom ends in »% . 
 
 Note 3. According I I grammarians, t: nuiiv ami 
 
 dual, of nouns in t$ and c* • r/\iy» Such forms, 
 
 I found in I of auihi : 
 
 Note 4. LTA*, in the Epic langua t : angcs i into *. E.g. gen. 
 
 •••An** for viXff. 
 
 I of ihe genitive of nouns in /f, of, see abore 
 (§20. N. 2). 
 
 §44. Nou [ are contracted in the d _ular, 
 
 and in the nominative, » . ind rocatife, plural. They 
 
 5 in the _ J >r. \\. g. 
 
 8 
 
 i tin 
 
 r. 
 
 ngt) 
 
 N. 
 
 (Uml 
 
 N. 
 
 (ktotltif 
 
 G 
 
 3anl 
 
 Q, 
 
 puaiXibiv 
 
 D. 
 
 fiuaiXii flaoiku 
 
 D. 
 
 fluaiXtvot(r) 
 
 A. 
 
 fltta. 
 
 A. 
 
 (Jaaildac (Jaotliie 
 
 V. 
 
 fluotXiv 
 
 V. 
 
 fiaaditg puudiif 
 
 D. i tiro kings) 
 
 N.A.V. flaui> 
 G. D. paotlioiv 
 
42 inflection or wouns, [^ 45, 40. 
 
 Note 1. The genitive and accusal ire, singular, are some- 
 times contracted. E. g. Jlsioatn'g, JleiQuiicog IleiQctiwg' ovy- 
 yQayn'g, uiyyoHifta ovyyoctytj. 
 
 Note 2. The vowels ea are contracted into a, when they 
 are preceded by a vowel. E. g. xoevg, xoia xocc. 
 
 Note 3. The ending hg of the nominative plural is some- 
 times contracted into tjg. E. g. Injievg, Innhg Innrig. 
 
 Note 4. The Ionians very often change s into ^, except 
 when it is in the diphthong zv. E. g. (3uoi).Evg f fiaadyog. 
 
 INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 
 
 § 45. Indeclinable nouns are those which have only one 
 form for all the genders, numbers, and cases. Such are, 
 
 1. The names of the letters of the alphabet. E. g. to, tov, 
 to) li).q)u, alpha. 
 
 2. The cardinal numbers, from 5 to 100 inclusive. E. g. 
 ot, at, t«, Twr, rote, Tovg, Tag neviE, Jive. 
 
 3. All foreign names not Grecized. E. g. o, to£, tw, tov 
 *Ada[i, Adam. 
 
 ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 
 
 § 40. 1. All nouns which have, or are supposed to have, 
 more than one nominative, are anomalous. Such are the fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 ur l 8o)r, oroc, f t , nightingale, from I'()NA2\ yorcnoc, yova- 
 
 regular. From AHA Si, G. ft, Dual yovu.jz, yovujoiv, 
 
 urfiovq, V. ar t dol. Plur. yovaxt/., yoruiwr, yo- 
 
 u'idr ( c, ov, o, the infernal re- vu.oi. 
 
 gions, regular. From A/2\ The poets have G. yovvog, 
 
 Q. SidoQ, D. 'ift'fff, A. Stt«. D. yowl, Plur. N. A. V. 
 
 ah/.r h ?~c, i r strength, regular. yovvct, G. yovrwv. 
 
 From AJ1, D. «/Lx/. yvvtj, rj, woman. The rest is 
 
 uvdoanodor, ov, to, slave, re_ni- from VT1SA1Z (oxytone), 
 
 lar. From ANAPA// ()T2\ yvruixoc, yvvuwl, yvvcuy.a, 
 
 D. Plur. ().rd(j(/.7i6df: u<u (Epic). yvvui, Dual yvvulxt, yvvcti- 
 
 yovv, to, knee. The rest is xotv, Plur. /W6uxf£, yvvai- 
 
§46.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 
 
 43 
 
 xcov, yvruizi, yvraixag, yvruts- 
 xsg. 
 
 The genitive and dative 
 of all the numbers take the 
 accent on the last syllable, 
 contrary to the rule (§ 35. 
 N. 2). 
 
 dais, idog, /?, fight, regular. 
 From AA2, D. dat 
 
 AIZ, see Zivg. 
 
 dogv, to, spear. The rest is 
 from AOPA2, doQctTog, 86- 
 qoltl, Dual doQctis, dugdtoiv, 
 Plur. doouTft, dogaTcov, dc- 
 
 QCt(Jl. 
 
 The poets have G. dogog, 
 
 dovgog, D. dogi, dovgl, Dual 
 
 doitge, Plur. N. dovga, G. 
 
 dovgcoi, D. dovgeooi (Epic). 
 dogv^oog, ov, o, spear-polisher, 
 
 regular. From AQPTZO^, 
 
 V. dogv$e. 
 sixmi; 6 tog, i], image, regular. 
 
 From EIKSl, G. tlxovg, A. 
 
 Hxci, A. Plur. fr/.ovg. 
 Ztvg, o, Jupiter, V. Z«v. From 
 
 A1Z, G. Aloq, D. Ad, A. Ala. 
 
 (§ 37. N. 1.) 
 
 Zr t v, o, G. Z)\r6g, D. Zr)vl, A. 
 
 Ztjvet, = preceding. 
 dsgdrnov, orrog, 6, attendant, 
 
 regular. From OEPAW, A. 
 
 •Stigima, N. Plur. tfeganeg. 
 i/tog, cogog, ichor, regular. Ace. 
 
 Sing, also i/co. 
 xdhog, co or coog, o, cable. From 
 
 KAAOX Plur. N. xdkoi, A. 
 
 #f</.orc. 
 xdgu Ionic y.dgi], to, head, G. 
 
 xdgrjog, D. xdgijTi, xdgcx, N. 
 
 Plur. xJou. From KPA2, 
 
 G. >jor<Toc, D. y.QctTi, A. t6 or 
 
 TO)' Ko«7T<r, Plur. G. ygcxTCOv, 
 D. xor<o'. From KPAA^, 
 G. xow'aroc, D. y.gduTi, Plur. 
 
 N. xgdaTa, A. toi«? y.goLTccg. 
 From KAPHAS, G. xao^'w- 
 toc, D. xagr]aTi, Plur. x«o?J- 
 «Ta. 
 
 xAa'doc, ov, 6, bough, regular. 
 From KAA2, D. xxaM, D. 
 Plur. xXddecu (Epic). 
 
 xoircoro?, ou, o, partaker, reg- 
 ular. From KOIISSIJX, 
 Plur. N. xonwrfc, A. xo*- 
 
 KPAAZ, KJ*A2, see x«oa. 
 xQirov, ov, to, lily, regular. 
 From KPI&02, Plur. N. 
 
 xghea, D. xgivsoi, 
 
 xgoxi h r t g, r h woof, regular. 
 From KPOZ, A. xoo'xa. 
 
 Ad«c contracted lpf$, o, stawe, 
 G. Xdaog Xuog, D. A««i.' Aca, 
 A. Xdav lav, Dual. Idas las, 
 Plur. N. Xdaeg Xutg, G. Xadcov 
 law, D. ;.«W* (Epic). From 
 ./ I ,ij(~), G. jlaoi;. 
 
 udoTig, o, Witness, A. (.idgTVV, 
 
 D. Plur. (lUQTvqu From 
 
 3IAPTTP, [.idgTrgog, [idgTV- 
 
 gi, &>C. 
 fxdoTi^ yog, i), scourge, regular. 
 
 From !442TI2i D. poem 
 
 (contracted from ^uotli), A. 
 
 paour. 
 ore i gov, to, dream. The rest is 
 
 from 0NEIPA2, ovuoutoc, 
 
 oret'gaTt, Dual ovsigi/.ie, orsi- 
 
 gdioir, Plur. orsigaiB, oiei- 
 
 gaTCov, ui'tigaoi. 
 ovg, to, ear. The rest is from 
 
 the Doric cog, corog, u)ti, Dual 
 
 cots, cotoIv, Plur, cot a, wtcov, 
 
 cool. 
 ngioSvg, 6, old man, A. Tigs- 
 
 g°it, V. ngiofjv. The rest is 
 
 from TigsoSvT^g, ov. 
 
 In Hesiod a Nom. Plur. 
 
 ngso-fatg occurs. 
 
44 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS, 
 
 [§46. 
 
 ngioftvg, 6, ambassador, G. 
 
 Tigeofiscog, Plur. N. A. V. 
 
 ngio^sig, D. TTgiofisoi. The 
 
 rest is from ngiofovxrig, ov. 
 ngooconov, ov, to, face, regular. 
 
 From I1P02SIIIA2, Plur. 
 
 N. 7lQOO(07iaTa, D. TigOGCOTlCC- 
 
 Ol. 
 
 ngoxoog, ov, r), ewer, regular. 
 From nPOXOTZ, D. Plur. 
 TtQoxovGi (like fiovoi from 
 
 nvg, nvgog, tivqL, to, fire. From 
 JITPON, Plur. N. A. nvgci, 
 
 G. 7IVQCOV, D. nvgolg. 
 
 oxcog, to. The rest is from 
 2KA2, oxazog, oy.axl, &,c. 
 
 axaycov, ovog, r), drop, regular. 
 From 2TAR N. Plur. axa- 
 ysg. 
 
 oxlxog, ov, o, row, regular. 
 
 From i] 2TIZ, oxixog, ouxl, 
 
 &c. 
 Tdcag, co, 6, peacock, regular. 
 
 From TA02, N. Plur. toloi. 
 vdcog, to, water. The rest is 
 
 from °TAA2, vdaxog, vdaTi, 
 
 From vdog, D. Sing, vdu 
 (Epic). 
 
 vlog, ov, 6, son, regular. From 
 K TIET2, G. vleog, &,c. like 
 {jaodevg. From C TI2 come 
 the Epic G. vlog, D. vh, A. 
 via, Dual, vh, Plur. N. vhg, 
 D. vUgl and vldoi, A. viag. 
 
 vgilIvv\, rjg, ?;, battle, regular. 
 From C T2MI2, D. vcqum. 
 
 Xshdcov, ovog, y, swallow, regu- 
 lar. From XEMAfLy V. 
 
 cog, see ov£. 
 
 2. Nouns, which have only one nominative, but more than 
 one form for any of the other cases, are anomalous. Such 
 are the following : 
 
 alcog, co or coog, r), threshing' 
 
 floor, 
 yilcog, co or coTog, o, laughter. 
 \repig, tog or nog or idog or 
 
 iGTog, 7], justice. 
 Idgcog, co or cotoc, 6, sweat. 
 xMg, eidog, r), key. Also Ace. 
 
 Sing, vltlv, A. V. Plur. 
 
 TcXelg* 
 fir^TQcog, co or coog, 6, maternal 
 
 uncle. 
 
 fivxrjg, ov or rjTog, o, mushroom. 
 
 ogvig, I&og, 6, n, bird, regular. 
 In the Plur. also N. A. b'g- 
 %'Tg ~Qr bgveig, G. bgvscov. 
 
 naxQcog, co or coog, 6, paternal 
 uncle. 
 
 or\g, sog or rjTog, 6, moth. 
 
 %dg, %sioog and %sgog, r), hand, 
 D. Plur. always yjgol. The 
 forms G. %eg6g, D. %sgl, Dual 
 %sig6iv, are poetic. 
 
 Note 1. All proper names in r]g gen. sog (§ 42), have y or 
 r\v in the accusative singular. E. g. 
 
 AgiGTOCpdvyg, sog ace. AgiOTOcpdvrj and r\v. 
 
 Note 2. Some nouns in ig have idog or Log in the genitive. 
 E.g. 
 
 H^vig, gen. [irjndog or firjnog, resentment. 
 
§§ 47, 48.] ADJECTIVES. 45 
 
 Note 3. In the Ionic dialect, the accusative singular of 
 nouns in r t z gen. ot», often ends in st<. E. g. riyr^, ov, ace. 
 Tvyiu. for i 'vj 
 
 Note 4. A few proper names in j-:, otv, and re, are de- 
 clined according to the following examples : 
 
 /u));%-, G. Imrrifj D. *Iur*ji } A. 7«»tj]V, V. /«j 
 
 "i . \ / 
 diorvc, (i. diorit D. diorv, A. . /. im. \ . Jivii. 
 
 DEFECTIVE NOUN& 
 
 §47. D$fectiv< of which only some of the 
 
 Such arc the follow mj : 
 
 m winds, I pic 
 
 ilar. ilar. 
 
 A. IMnr. used onlv i: dream, used only in 
 
 the formula V tpd A. 8 
 
 02 or CUES'* Dual 
 
 N \ If. G. ouatjy, 
 
 No singular. <<;/<jf. 
 
 (khknttoge, used 
 jii. < . ( iu, /t/nn. D. /./ . A onlj iii the N B 
 
 y/< 
 //////. used only ilar. 
 
 in the ['lir d only in the formula 
 
 under t f ande$tinely. ( > thou, 
 
 i apposed 
 singular. <<1 only in the 
 
 I ft, N. and A. SniL r . 
 
 ADJECTIVKS. 
 
 ^48. 1. In adjectives of three endings, the 
 feminine is always of the first declension; the mas- 
 culine and the neuter are either of the second or 
 of the third. 
 
 2. Adjectives of tiro endings are either of the 
 second or of the third declension ; the feminine 
 is the same with the masculine. 
 
46 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§49. 
 
 3. Adjectives of one ending are either of the first 
 or of the third declension. Such adjectives are 
 either masculine, feminine, or common. 
 
 ADJECTIVES IN 02. 
 
 § 49. 1. Most adjectives in og have three endings, og, 77, ov. 
 E. g. oocpog, oocpr], oocpov. 
 
 When og is preceded by a vowel or by g, the feminine 
 has a instead of ?;. E. g. a$iog, «£*«, a$iov ' (Accxoog,, [.laxgd, 
 fiaxQor. 
 
 S. 6 {ivise) 
 
 r) (ivise) 
 
 to (wise) 
 
 N. oocpog 
 G. oocpov 
 
 GOCpi] 
 
 oocpr\g 
 
 GOCpOV 
 GOCpOV 
 
 D. oocpco 
 
 OOCff] 
 
 oocpco 
 
 A. oocpov 
 
 OOCp1]V 
 
 GOCpOV 
 
 V. GOCpS 
 
 oocprj 
 
 oocpov 
 
 B. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V. OOCpCO 
 
 oocpd 
 
 GOCpCO 
 
 G. D. Gocpdlv 
 
 Gocpouv 
 
 oocpdlv 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 N. GOCpol 
 G. OOCpbOV 
 
 D. oocpotg 
 
 GOcpctL 
 oocpoov 
 oocpcug 
 
 oocpd 
 
 oocpcov 
 
 oocpolg 
 
 A. Gocpovg 
 
 Gocpctg 
 
 oocpd 
 
 V. aoqpo/ 
 
 oocpac 
 
 GOCpd 
 
 So all participles in og. 
 
 TVJtTOflSVOV. 
 
 S. 6 (worth}/) 
 
 E. 
 
 g. Tvmofitvoc, rvnzofitrrj, 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 azLog 
 aUov 
 
 aliov 
 
 D. 
 
 N.A.V. feU> 
 G. D. aUoiv 
 
 r) (worthy) 
 a^'iag 
 
 a$iav 
 
 ciSiaiv 
 
 to (worthy) 
 
 a^iov 
 d$lov 
 
 a$iov 
 a$iov 
 
 a$loiv 
 
§49.] 
 
 •] 
 
 
 ADJECTH 
 
 
 p. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 :l 01 
 
 aztcu 
 
 ana 
 
 G. 
 
 : U)V 
 
 u^iwv 
 
 it$ia)V 
 
 D. 
 
 r'nu 
 
 a£lw$ 
 
 it$!oig 
 
 A. 
 
 1 l V 
 
 u&Um$ 
 
 5$ia 
 
 V. 
 
 :,0l 
 
 :,t(l 
 
 
 47 
 
 Noti: 1. A< we j) in the feminine. Except 
 
 when go*; La preceded bj n. E. g. 
 
 >OP 
 
 Many id only two endings, og, ov. 
 
 E. g. 
 
 Particularly, compound adjectives in 
 
 E. g 
 
 But compound haw three endings. 
 
 8 <<<t) 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 ^ou 
 
 f/OU 
 
 D. 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 v 
 
 
 /> 
 
 
 V \ \ 
 
 
 ( i D 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 Notk 2. Id Attic v. id in tl. many & 
 
 .inch commonly have three endings, are 1 
 with only two. E g. 
 
 .\"i iding a of the feminine is long. Except 
 
 the feminine of fo^ dwime t ami a few others. 
 
 Note 4. For the accent of the genitive plural of the feminine of bary- 
 tone adjectives and participles in «*, see above (§ 31. N. 2). 
 
48 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§50,51. 
 
 3. Adjectives in eog f ect, eov, and oog, or], oov, are contracted 
 (§§32: 34). E.g. 
 
 Xgvoeog xovoovg, xgvoea %ovofj, xqvgbov %qvoovv, G. %qvg£ov 
 
 Xgvoov, XQvaiag xgvafjg, golden, 
 agyvgeog dgyvgovg, dgyvgeoc agyvgoc, ocgyvgeov agyvgovv, G. 
 
 dgyvgeov dgyvgov, dgyvgiag dgyvgdg, of silver. 
 dnXoog dnXovg, dnX6r\ utiX?}, dnXoov dnXovv, G. dnXoov dnXov, 
 
 dnXorjg dnXi]g, simple. 
 
 Note 5. For the accent of some of the contracted forms of adjectives in 
 to$, oo$ , see above (§ 34. N. 2). 
 
 ADJECTIVES IN S12. 
 
 § 50* Adjectives in cog have two endings, 
 are declined like vecog and dvcoyzcov (§ 33). 
 evyecov. 
 
 S. o, t] (fertile) to (fertile) 
 
 N. 
 
 cog y cov. They 
 E. g. evyecog, 
 
 evyecog 
 
 G. 
 
 evyeo 
 
 D. 
 
 evyeco 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 evyecov 
 evyecog 
 
 D. 
 
 
 N.AV 
 G. D. 
 
 r. >r 
 
 . evyeco 
 evyecov 
 
 P. 
 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 evy&cov 
 evysyg 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 evytcog 
 evyeco 
 
 evyecov 
 
 evyeco 
 
 evyeco 
 
 evyecov 
 
 evyecov 
 
 evyeco 
 evyecov 
 
 evyeco 
 
 ivyecov 
 
 evyecog 
 
 evyeco 
 
 evyeco 
 
 ADJECTIVES IN T2, 
 
 § 5>1. Adjectives in vg, gen. eog, have three endings, vg, 
 eia, v. E. g. yXvxvg, yXvxela, yXvxv. 
 
 s. 
 
 (sweet) 
 
 i] (sioect) 
 
 to (sweet) 
 
 N. 
 
 yXvxvg 
 
 yXvv.eia 
 
 yXvxv 
 
 G. 
 
 yXvxeog 
 
 yXvxtiag 
 
 yXvxeog 
 
 D. 
 
 yXvxe'i yXvxeH 
 
 ylvxela 
 
 yXvxei yXvxei 
 
 A. 
 
 yXvxvv 
 
 yXvxuav 
 
 yXvxv 
 
 V. 
 
 yXvxv 
 
 yXvxtla 
 
 yXvxv 
 
§§ 52, 53.] 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 49 
 
 D. 
 
 N.A.V.yXvxie 
 
 G. G. yXvxioiv 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 yXvxitg yXvxiig 
 yXvxiwv 
 
 ; ii uiwg yk\ 
 
 yXvxtiu 
 yXvxiiaiv 
 
 yXvxuai 
 
 yXvxtiwv 
 
 yXvxeiaig 
 
 yXvxtiug 
 
 yXvxilui 
 
 yXvxts 
 yXvxioiv 
 
 yXvxia 
 
 yXvxicjy 
 
 yXvxioi(v) 
 
 yXvxia 
 
 yXvxia 
 
 Note 1. The Ionics make fan. im or u r E. g. fia&vg, 
 fta&iu or (ImS 
 
 NoTO 3. Tlie poets sometimes have mas. and fern. iy, neut. 
 v. E. g. 
 
 ADJECTIVES IN H2 AND n. 
 
 §52. 1 A i\e two endings, 
 
 J 1 • L r 
 
 s 
 
 (trui ) 
 
 
 lb (tru< ) 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 ftig 
 
 
 0, 
 
 «/./, 
 
 
 
 ' Oovg 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 >'Ju 
 
 A. 
 
 Ma 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A.V 
 
 tdm&S 
 
 
 ', &y 
 
 (.. 1). 
 
 u/.>, ."' /oT* 
 
 >101V 
 
 -Vol* 
 
 J> 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 aiil&im 
 
 
 0. 
 
 '^ojr 
 
 
 friwv 
 
 .^cuv 
 
 D. 
 
 altftioiyv) 
 
 uh,dioi(v 
 
 
 A. 
 
 uk% 
 
 
 
 \ #)? 
 
 V. 
 
 frit$ 
 
 
 iiiu 
 
 
 2. A mx, have two endings, *c, 4. E. g. 
 
 , G. T(5ofo;, knov 
 
 ADJECTIVES IN A2> JJ±\ UN t Ot2> Vt, SIN, SIZ. 
 
 § S3. 1. Adjectives in ug, gen. orro?, have three endings, 
 ag } «aa, ar. E. g. *£f t nuort, nay. 
 5 
 
50 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§53. 
 
 & 
 
 o {all) 
 
 f) (all) 
 
 N. 
 
 nag 
 
 Tiaaa 
 
 G. 
 
 nccvrog 
 
 naar\g 
 
 D. 
 
 navxl 
 
 naor] 
 
 A. 
 
 navxa 
 
 naoav 
 
 V. 
 
 nag 
 
 Tiaoa 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V.Trajrs 
 
 TlCtOOt 
 
 G.D 
 
 TTCtVTOlV 
 
 ndociLV 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ndrxsg 
 
 naoai 
 
 G. 
 
 7MXVTCOV 
 
 naowv 
 
 D. 
 
 naGl(v) 
 
 Tiaaaig 
 
 A. 
 
 navxag 
 
 ndoag 
 
 V. 
 
 navrsg 
 
 nuoai 
 
 So all 
 
 PARTICIPLES in dig* E. g. 1 
 
 ■tvtpotviog. 
 
 
 
 to {all) 
 
 nay 
 
 navxog 
 
 navxl 
 
 nay 
 
 nay 
 
 7iaVTS 
 TtaVTOLV 
 
 navxa 
 ndvxcov 
 
 naGl(v) 
 
 ndvxa 
 ndvxa 
 
 E. g. xvipag, xvipaoa, xvipav, G. 
 
 Remark 1. These two adjectives in ag, fieXag and xdlag> 
 have aiva in the feminine. Thus, 
 
 fiilac, fislawa, [izXav, G. [islavog, black. 
 xdXug, xdlauva, xdXav, G. rdlavog, unfortunate 
 
 2. Adjectives in sig, gen. svxog, have three endings, eig, 
 £GGa y sv. E. g. xctglsig, XttgisGocx, xagUv. 
 
 S. 6 (graceful) 
 
 V (graceful) 
 
 to (graceful) 
 
 N. %v.ohig 
 
 Xaghoaa 
 
 Xaglw 
 
 G. %aglsvxog 
 
 XaguGG^g 
 
 %aghvxog 
 
 D. %CtoUvTl 
 
 XUQLSGGTJ 
 
 Xagisrxi 
 
 A. %agUvTtt 
 
 %agt?GGav 
 
 XagUv 
 
 V. x a Q uv 
 
 XagUaaa 
 
 yaghv 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V.%uqUvts 
 
 XaQUGGa 
 
 XagUvTS 
 
 G. D. %tXQlSVTOW 
 
 Xagiiooaiv 
 
 Xagiivxoiv 
 
 p. 
 
 
 
 N. %v.{)hvTtg 
 
 %agUaoui 
 
 Xaglevxa 
 
 G. %agiivT(x)v 
 
 XUOltGOOJV 
 
 Xagievxwv 
 
 D. xaQuoi(v) 
 
 X<ygisGGctig 
 
 XagleGi(v) 
 
 A. xctqiEVTctg 
 
 XagiEGGag 
 
 Xaghvxa 
 
 V. %oi()UvTEg 
 
 %agUooai 
 
 Xaglsvxa 
 
$53.] 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 51 
 
 Note 1. The endings r^ig t yeooa, ijtr, are contracted into 
 jjfc i'uou, >>. E. g. 
 
 TifiTjirog, valuable. 
 
 The endings 6eig, otooa, oiv, are contracted into ovg, ovooa, 
 oiv. E. g. 
 
 nXaxong nXaxovg, nXaxotooa nXaxovooa, nXaxosv nXaxovv, G. 
 TiXaxoivxog nXaxovvrog, flat. 
 
 Remark 2. The dative plural of adjectives in us forms an exception to 
 the general rule (§ J 2. 
 
 8. Participles in f /; have three endings, tig, tloa, iv. E. g. 
 
 Ti&tig, Tit/tluu, Ti- 
 
 & o 
 
 (plar, 
 
 n {placing) 
 
 to (placing) 
 
 N. 
 
 ' i <v 
 
 uoa 
 
 nOiv 
 
 G. 
 
 
 111* > 
 
 jiOiviog 
 
 D. 
 
 Tichi N 
 
 Ti9t!uf t 
 
 TiOtrxi, 
 
 A. 
 
 u&tvtm 
 
 Tl&HOOLV 
 
 Tl&EV 
 
 V. 
 
 TiOtig 
 
 JtduUU 
 
 ri&iv 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 N.A.V.t^' 
 
 nd it an 
 
 xi&ivri 
 
 G. D. 
 
 iiOivxoiv 
 
 u&tiuaiv 
 
 tldtVTOlV 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Tifhi 
 
 Tiduoat, 
 
 n&irrm 
 
 (.'. 
 
 
 n&aawy 
 
 TiOtvTOjy 
 
 D. 
 
 Tithloi(v) 
 
 
 ni)uoi(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 Tl&il 
 
 ndiuing 
 
 Tt Stria 
 
 V. 
 
 jidti 
 
 u&uaas 
 
 Tidina 
 
 4. There are but two adjectives in r t v ' o rio^r, V i*QtM*> 
 to jtoei. Q* i \ n o?, tender] and o £o*np or Sffap s to uqoev or 
 agytv, G. lioatvog or tiootvog, mail. 
 
 5. Participles in oiv have three endings, otV, oiJaa, oV. 
 E. g. didoig, did ova a, did 
 
 s. 
 
 6 (giving) 
 
 V (g^g) 
 
 to (giving) 
 
 N. 
 
 did 
 
 didovaa 
 
 didov 
 
 G. 
 
 didovjog 
 
 didovarjs 
 
 dldoVTOQ 
 
 D. 
 
 didorn 
 
 didovar\ 
 
 didovu 
 
 A. 
 
 didona 
 
 didovoav 
 
 didov 
 
 V. 
 
 did ovg 
 
 dtdovoa 
 
 didov 
 
52 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§53. 
 
 D. 
 
 N.A.V.MoV« 
 
 G. D. Sidovtoiv 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 didovrsg 
 
 didovai(v) 
 
 didoviag 
 
 didovxsg 
 
 didovoa 
 didovoaiv 
 
 didovaai 
 
 didovowv 
 
 didovoctLQ 
 
 didovoctg 
 
 didovoou 
 
 didovrs 
 didovxoiv 
 
 didovra 
 
 didovrojv 
 
 didovGi(v) 
 
 didovTU 
 
 didovra 
 
 6. Participles in vg have three endings, vg, voce, vv. E. g. 
 dsixvvg, deixvvGu, deixvvv. 
 
 S. 6 (showing) 
 
 ^ (showing) 
 
 to (showing) 
 
 N. deixvvg 
 
 deixvvoa 
 
 deixvvv 
 
 G. deixvvvxog 
 
 deixvvGr\g 
 
 deixvvvxog 
 
 D. deiY.VVVTl 
 
 deiXVVOJ] 
 
 deixvvvxi 
 
 A. dsiY.VVVTd 
 
 deixvvoav 
 
 deixvvv 
 
 V. deixvvg 
 
 deixvvoa 
 
 deixvvv 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V.deixvvvTS 
 
 deixvvoa 
 
 deixvvvxe 
 
 G. D. deixvvvxoiv 
 
 duy.vvoaLV 
 
 dsiXVVVTOW 
 
 p. 
 
 
 
 N. deixvvvxeg 
 
 deixvvocu 
 
 deixvvvxcc 
 
 G. deixvvvxcov 
 
 deixvvaSv 
 
 dsLXVVVTOW 
 
 D. fo»«ri5(H(i') 
 
 dsr/.vvoaig 
 
 deixvvoi(v) 
 
 A. deixvvvjoig 
 
 deixwoag 
 
 deixvvvxa 
 
 V. <5£txvi;Vr££ 
 
 deixvvoai 
 
 deixvvvxa 
 
 Adjectives in cuv, gen. ovxog, have three endings, av, ovaa, 
 E. g. excov, exovoa, exov. 
 
 S. 6 (ivilling) 
 
 ri (willing) 
 
 xo (willing) 
 
 N. exav 
 
 exovoa 
 
 exov 
 
 G. exovxog 
 
 exovor\g 
 
 exovxog 
 
 D. exovxu 
 
 exovat) 
 
 exovxi 
 
 A. exovxa 
 
 kxovoav 
 
 exov 
 
 V. kxojv 
 
 exovoa 
 
 exov 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 NA.V.IxoVts 
 
 exovoa 
 
 exovxe 
 
 G. D. eXOVXOlV 
 
 lXQVGV.IV 
 
 hxovxoiv 
 
§63.] 
 
 •J 
 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 
 p. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 fawrrag 
 
 cxoi/aou 
 
 ixovxa 
 
 G. 
 
 6X0JT0JV 
 
 IxouaaJv 
 
 SXOVTOJV 
 
 D. 
 
 cxoi} (/*(*) 
 
 ixoiW*£ 
 
 kxov(ji{v) 
 
 A. 
 
 «XO) 
 
 £xofaa£ 
 
 ixo% TOt 
 
 V. 
 
 fattJTtf 
 
 cxoracu 
 
 ixovia 
 
 53 
 
 So all participles in wk. E. g. Ti/Trrwr, Ti'Troi;a«, rvmov, 
 G. Ti'.Troi to, * qiltwr, (, ydiov, G. (fdioviog, contracted 
 
 JOV9U, (/f/oir, G. qi/.oiuog. 
 
 Not* 2. The feminine of adjectives in «;, i/?, *i/?, £>-, «», gen. r<r#f, is 
 formed by dropping o,- of the genitive, and annexing **. K 
 
 \kumj ixourt; 
 
 fern, vrura. \ 1 
 
 TtSitrx libid.) 
 lilovja i! 
 lux *urx (ibid.) 
 txzZrct (ibid.) 
 X«(**<* (§ 12. N. 2). 
 
 8. Adjectives in wv, gen. ovog, have two endings, <wy, ov. 
 E.g. 
 
 *S. 0, 
 
 n ( n >) 
 
 N. 
 
 io)y 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 V 
 
 10V 
 
 D. 
 
 
 N.A.V.ntnove 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ninowiv 
 
 P. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 nVi 
 
 G. 
 
 ntnovoiv 
 
 D. 
 
 )(Jl{v) 
 
 A. 
 
 ninovaq 
 
 V. 
 
 rortf 
 
 to (Hp< ) 
 
 ninov 
 ninovog 
 
 ion 
 ninor 
 ninov 
 
 ntnovs 
 ntnovoiv 
 
 ntnova 
 
 ninovoiv 
 
 ntnoot(v) 
 
 ntnova 
 
 ntnova 
 
 9. Participles in tig have tnree endings, rig, via, 6g. E. g. 
 rnvcfojg, T9TW}vt*t TttxMpoe, having struck. 
 
54 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§§ 54, 55. 
 
 s. 
 
 c 
 
 
 € 
 
 V 
 
 TO 
 
 N. 
 
 T£i vq>tig 
 
 TiTVCpvItt, 
 
 TETVQpOg 
 
 G. 
 
 Ttxvcpoxog 
 
 Tsrvq)vlocg 
 
 reivyoTog 
 
 D. 
 
 TSTVyOTL 
 
 T8TV(fvl(X 
 
 JtTVifOIl 
 
 A. 
 
 TETVtyOTCt 
 
 T&Tvepviav 
 
 TSTVCpOQ 
 
 V. 
 
 TSTV<p(tig 
 
 TSTV(pVl(X 
 
 tsivqpog 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A.V. TSTVCpOTE 
 
 TETVCpvla 
 
 TtTVCpOTS 
 
 G. D. 
 
 TSTV(f)OTOlV 
 
 TSTvyvlaiv 
 
 TZTVCfOTOLV 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 TSTVtyOTSg 
 
 TtTVCpvlui 
 
 T8TV (pOTCC 
 
 G. 
 
 TElVtyOTbiV 
 
 TSTVCpVLbyV 
 
 TSTVqpOTCOV 
 
 D. 
 
 T£TVq)6(Jl(v) 
 
 T£TV(fVl(Xtg 
 
 T8TVq)6'Jl{v) 
 
 A. 
 
 TSTV(f)OT(Xg 
 
 TtTVopviag 
 
 TITVCpOTa 
 
 V. 
 
 TSTvepoxsg 
 
 izxvcpvlat, 
 
 TSivqoza 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 
 
 § 54. The following are some of the adjectives which have 
 only one ending : 6 aftXrjg, qrog ' o, r\ afigcag, corog ' o, f\ dyvag, 
 (wto? * o, ?7 adfxrjg, rjrog' o, r\ alyUupy nog' o, nr\ ai'doip, nog' o 
 al'&wv, oivog ' 6 axfirjg, r\Tog * 6, tj avaXxig, idog ' b, i] ann'p', rjvog ' 
 o, r) agyrjc, rjtog or hog ' o, 7] agna$> yog ' 6 /5a«|, v.og ' 6, f\ 
 dgofiag, adog' 6 i&eXovjrjg, ov ' o, r) inr t Xv^, yog' o, r] entjXvg, 
 vdog ' rj stilts!;, xog ■ o, ?) evgiv, nog ' o, r\ evcoip, nog ' 6, i) r)fa$, 
 nog * o, r t yuL&vrjg, ijrog ' o, r\ inndg, adog ' o uaxag, agog ' o, r\ 
 
 , ec t c c ~ ^ c c 
 
 ixaxgaioiv, covog' o, r\ [laxgavxijv, eiog o, r\ pri'i, %og o, r\ 
 vopug, adog ' o, r\ nagaftXwifj, nog ' 6, i] naganh]$, yog ' 6 nivrjg, 
 tjTog ' 6 noXvui$, nog ' b ngojSXijg, rjiog ' b, r) onogdg, adog ' o, r\ 
 q>oivi$. 
 
 Add to these the compounds of S-gl^, -thJorxl, nalg, %ug. 
 E. g. o 6g&6&gil; t rgi%og ' o, r\ xaXXlnaig, aidog ' 6, r\ paxgoxsig, 
 tigog. 
 
 Note. Some of these are also used as neuters, but only in the genitive and 
 dative, 
 
 COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § S5. Compound adjectives, of which the last component 
 part is a substantive, follow the declension of that substantive. 
 
§ 56.] COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 55 
 
 Such adjectives may have a neuter, when it can be formed 
 
 after the same analogy. E. g. 
 
 ev/agig, i, G. nog, graceful, from tv, zdotg, nog 
 tveXnig, i, G. tdog, hopeful, from tv, iXntg, idog 
 dlnovg, ovr, G. odog, two-footed, from dig, novg, nodog 
 SdaxQig, v, G. vog t tearless, from «-, duxov, vog 
 ivdccifjou', or, G. oroc, happy, from rv, dai/uav, ovog 
 ^iyuXi]i(xtOy 0Q y G. 0£>0£, magnanimous, from uiyag, ijiog. 
 
 Note 1. The compounds of *oi^ generally have it)o£ in the 
 genitive. E. g. 
 
 uiioXig, i, G. *(5oc, vagabond. 
 
 Note 2. The compounds of uy]jr t Q y txui^q, and cro^'v mtW, 
 change ?? into co. E. g. 
 
 upytmo, oq, G. OfOf, mot hi rl< <$ 
 I ' I brlAi rli si 
 
 aoi(/oa'i', or, ( 1 ui$4 PI J ^. 
 
 Note 3. The compounds of f&c*?, laughter t and xt^a?, 7c0rn, 
 are either of the second or third declension. E. g. 
 
 ptlo/clttff, cor, G. co or mxog,fond of laughter 
 
 T(ji/.tou)s, ur, G. w or tefbffi having thru hams, 
 
 ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 5G. The following list contains most of the anomalous 
 and defective adject \\ 
 
 1 A. fiV and ?]tV, neut. 
 
 Plui / things* 
 
 'I be neuter m', contracted from tfj, means, ?/•///. 
 gbjg, Nom. mas. living, alive. The rest is from the regular £cooV, 
 
 y> or, 
 wf/a^, utyiar], uiya, great, is declined in the following manner : 
 
 S. o (great) 
 
 V (great) 
 
 to (great) 
 
 N. ui; 
 
 G. utyitXov 
 
 D. /"7 
 
 uiyuXi] 
 
 uty< 
 
 utyiiXj] 
 
 uiya 
 
 fjttyuXov 
 
 utyuXw 
 
 A. uiyur 
 V. fAtyuXs 
 
 ucyuX^v 
 utydXt] 
 
 uiya 
 uiya 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V. utydho 
 G. D. uiyuXoiv 
 
 utyuXcc 
 utyuXaiv 
 
 {.teydXw 
 utyuXoiv 
 
56 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§56. 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 [iiydXa 
 
 [isydXcov 
 
 fieydXoig 
 
 {izydXcc 
 
 psydXa 
 
 the cases, except the nominative and 
 masculine and neuter, come from the 
 
 {isydXai, 
 
 [isydkwv 
 
 [isyakaig 
 
 psydXag 
 
 fisydXai 
 
 (iisyaXoi 
 
 fisydXojv 
 
 (neyaXoig 
 
 [isydXovg 
 
 fisydXoi 
 
 Observe, that all 
 accusative singular, 
 obsolete METAA02. 
 
 The vocative singular psydXe is very rare. 
 
 nXmg, full, borrows its feminine from nXiog. Thus, nXswg, nXsa, 
 nkscov. In composition it has only two endings, cog, cov, (§ 50.) 
 
 noXvg, noXXtj, noXv, much, is declined as follows : 
 
 s. 
 
 o (much) 
 
 r) {much) 
 
 to (much) 
 
 N. 
 
 noXvg 
 
 ttoXXt] 
 
 noXv 
 
 G. 
 
 noXXov 
 
 noXXrjg 
 
 noXXov 
 
 D. 
 
 ttoXXm 
 
 noXXfi 
 
 noXXco 
 
 A. 
 
 noXvv 
 
 noXXrfv 
 
 noXv 
 
 P. 
 
 {many 
 
 {many) 
 
 (many) 
 
 N. 
 
 tioXXoI 
 
 noXXai 
 
 noXXa 
 
 G. 
 
 noXXwv 
 
 noXXwv 
 
 noXXcov 
 
 D. 
 
 TioXldlg 
 
 noXXaig 
 
 noXXdig 
 
 A. 
 
 noXXovg 
 
 noXXdg 
 
 noXXd 
 
 The dual is of course wanting. 
 
 Observe, that all the cases, except the nominative and 
 accusative singular, masculine and neuter, come from noXXog, 
 r\, 6v, which is used by the Ionians. 
 
 The epic poets decline noXvg like yXvavg' thus, noXvg, noXslct, 
 noXv, G. noXiog. 
 
 ngdog, meek, borrows its feminine and neuter from ngavg, ngaslcc, 
 
 ngav, G. ngasog. 
 owg, o, r\, safe, neut. gwv, A. guv, A. Plur. awg, neut. Plur. ad, 
 
 the rest from the regular owog, a, ov. The feminine od is 
 
 rare. 
 q>govdog, r\, ov, gone, used only in the Nominative, of all genders 
 
 and numbers. 
 
 
§ 57.] DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 57 
 
 DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 
 
 COMPARISON BY tepoz, tatoz. 
 
 §57. 1. Adjectives in og are compared by dropping $ 9 
 and annexing kqo* for the comparative, and tuto* tor the 
 superlative. If the penult of the positive be short, o is 
 changed into w. E. g. 
 
 JoqajTfQOJ, ir/<ir, <joqtoTUTO*, Wti 
 urTuo*, (lt>lium>r ., ctTlftOTOl 
 
 a fin Quit) ofuiuifo*-. 
 
 Noti: l. In general, o remains unaltered when it is pre- 
 ceded bj a mute and a liquid. (^ IT. 8.) E. g. i 
 
 Remark 1. In a few ins- ■ ■• s II into « even when the 
 
 penult of the positive is lot <x*oZutos, xxxoln>*rta«f. 
 
 tiw > in 1 according to 
 
 the following erfampfc 
 
 TO* 
 
 onoidu! 
 
 •> 
 
 \\\ compared by toitgog, 
 
 imrrof. 1 L g. 
 
 Ttgog, 
 
 re compared by dropping g t and 
 annexing B. g. 
 
 ., sharp, <>si fiqog, 
 
 o adject: & drop og of the 
 
 genitive, and anin i 
 
 1 Adjectirea in . uen. to?, and fig gen. £ito£, shorten ^ 
 and ti$ into eg, and annex r*o E. g. 
 
 <</.;, .9 /,\> aXtj&iortQOs, uIjj&sotc 
 XapUig, xuQiioTfnog, yandijiui 
 
58 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 58. 
 
 Note 3. 'YtvSr.c, ios, Jalse, has also comparative •^ivVic-rt^os, 
 ITivr,;, r,ros f poor, follows the analogy of adjectives in m, gen. to; * thus, 
 vtvicngo;, trivia-retro;, 
 
 5. Adjectives in wr, gen. orog, drop og of the genitive, and 
 annex eoisgog, eoTcuog. E. g. 
 
 oaicpgm', orog, uooqgortozzgog, owcpgoreoTarog. 
 
 6. The adjectives ag7ia$, S%agig, fiXd*, fidxao, are compared 
 as follows : 
 
 agna$, yog, agnaylo'Tsgog 
 a%agig, u%ctgloiegog 
 /ftta£, v.6g, /jkcr/.lo-iegog, (jiayJoraiog 
 fittxag, [axxdgjsgog, {.iccxixgraTog. 
 
 Note 4. Substantives denoting an employment or character 
 are sometimes compared like adjectives. E. g. fiaodevg, king, 
 PaodetTsgog, more kingly, ftaoihviujog, most kingly ; y.Ximrjg, 
 thief, vlimloTaTGc, very thievish. 
 
 Note 5. The pronouns do not admit of different degrees in their significa- 
 tion. Nevertheless the comedians, for the sake of exciting laughter, compare 
 a.lr'o$ in the following manner : avro;, himself, airorzgoe, himself-er, ulroraro;, 
 kimself-est, ij)sissimus. 
 
 COMPARISON BY isijy, iztos 
 
 § 58. 1. Some adjectives in vg drop this ending, and annex 
 lay for the comparative, and njiog for the superlative. E. g. 
 ifivg, pleasant, fjdlojv, rfiiorog, 
 
 2. Comparatives in cov are declined according to the follow- 
 ing example : 
 
 S.6,f t (pleasanter) 
 
 N. ffilwv 
 
 G. ffilorog 
 
 D. fjdlovi 
 
 A. tjdlora Tjdlco 
 
 to (pleasanter) 
 fidTov 
 rfilorog 
 i)b Ion 
 
 TjdlOV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 N. A. rjdlors 
 G. D. ffiiovoiv 
 
 f, d love 
 fjdiovoi* 
 
 P. 
 
 
 N. ffilovsg ffiiovg 
 
 G. fjdiorcov 
 
 D. rjdlooi(v) 
 
 A. fjdiovag ffiiovg 
 
 ffiiova fjdlca 
 fjdiorwv 
 f}dtooi(v) 
 ffilova ffiiw 
 
§ 59.] DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 59 
 
 Observe, that the accusative singular masculine and feminine, 
 and the nominative and accusative plural of all genders, drop 
 the >', and contract the two last syllables. 
 
 Note 1. A few adjectives in v; form their comparative by dropping the last 
 syllable of the positive and annexing tvuv or rvuv. E. g. 
 va^us, fat, Tti<raMV 
 /S*S*,-, dvej), (-t&ffruv. 
 
 Note 2. KourC;, jmicerful, changes a. into i or u in the comparative: thus, 
 x*otTUf, xfdar**, xoivauv, zoum**. {§§ 58. X. 1 : J. X. 3.) 
 
 The Doric xa^'wn for x»iiW*> is formetl in the following manner : x^aris, 
 *{«*r*», x*'{r«», xifptn. * X.) 
 
 .-, form their comparative by 
 dropping the la k g £*». Thus piya.i, ^ui^ £*») ; 
 
 iklyts, ix'fat. ( 
 
 ANOM OOl B AND DEFECTS E COMPARISON. 
 
 ; 50. 1 Tin* i l- anomalous 
 
 wliru t: . more than 
 
 one | 
 
 '. hen the adjective h 
 iti?e in ii 
 
 :i The Polio ing * conl which 
 
 in their oomparii 
 
 fttlti 
 
 'figtUnj the proper comparative of iotvris, belongs to the Epic language. 
 For /5iXr/*/f, Xulttv, t 1 rtooi, Xvtrieof. 
 
 K ; - of x«fiVr*y, xc-.: :cr. 
 
 For ;3»X r. 
 
 x#nV<r*>, the Ionic has x{i**»r, and the Doric xeitfu*. § 58. N. 
 The poets have xec^nrro; 2.) 
 
 The Epic language has also 6 perl. Qioivto; or Qi^rartt. 
 
 The regular comparative and superlative, xyaSunoo;, iyx^Mrccros, do not 
 occur in good wi 
 
 cuo-^ogv ( 1/2 X T2 comparative 
 
 itio/ - not much u- 
 
 ulyuvog ( /J/T2 y) painful, laytivonnog or ilylmr, £lyt$r&nme 
 
60 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 59. 
 
 or aXyioxog. The regular forms aXyuvoxtgog, aXysivotatog, 
 are more usual in the masculine and feminine. 
 
 afiuvcov, see dyct&og. 
 
 agslcav, agioiog, see ccya&og. 
 
 ^sXrliav, fiiXxiGTog, see ccya&og. 
 
 iXaxvg, see {iixgog. 
 
 EAEIXT2, infamous, iXiyxioxog. The plural of the positive 
 occurs in Homer (II. 4, 242 : 24, 239). 
 
 I'oxccTog, last, a defective superlative. 
 
 iZ&gog (EXOT2), hostile, tyfrgoTSoog or ix&lcov, ix&goxaiog or 
 
 t#Lh(7TO£. 
 
 C HKT2, see xaxog. 
 
 xaxog, bad xaxlcov xdxioxog 
 
 %uqwv x^Q LaT0 ^ 
 
 rjoowv rjy.iorog 
 
 The forms %<r<ruv, fixtrros, come from C HKT2. (§ 58. N. 1.) 
 The regular comparative xaxun^o? is poetic. 
 For x l k uv anc * % ffffuv > the Ionians have xiguav and %<nruv, 
 xaXog (KAAT2), beautiful, xaXXiwv, xdXXiGTog. The doubling 
 
 of the X seems to be an accidental peculiarity. 
 xaggcov, see uya$6g. 
 KEPAT2, crafty, xsgdlav, xegdiotog. 
 xgarvg, see ctya&og. 
 
 xvdgog (KTAT2), glorious, xvdlwv, xvdiorog. 
 xvvisgog, more impudent, a defective comparative, derived from 
 
 xvtov, xvvog, dog. 
 Xmcjv, Xoj'iorog, see aya&og. 
 fiaxgog (MAKT2, MHKT2), long, fiaxgoxsgog and ftdoocov, jua- 
 
 y.goxuTog and furjxiarog. (§ 58. N. 1.) 
 fiiyctg, great, fiu^ojv (Ionic jxi&v), fieyioxog. (§ 58. N. 3.) 
 (xixgog, small tXdooav iXd%LOTog 
 
 field) v iitioxog 
 
 jMxgoiegog uixgoxaTog 
 
 The forms iXcLrffav, lxd%t<r'ro$, come from lku%v$. (§ 58, N. 1.) The 
 superlative pilar ot is poetic. 
 
 oXlyog, little, oXI^mv, oXiyiozog. (§ 58. N. 3.) 
 
 oXxxgog (OIKTT2), pitiable, oIxtIcov, oi'xTLOTog or olxTgotaTog. 
 
 oTiXoitgog, younger, onXoxaxog, youngest, Epic. It is derived 
 
 from onXov, weapon, 
 ninojv, ripe, nenalTsgog, nmaiiarog. 
 nlcov, fat, moTsgog, moiaxog. 
 noXvg, much, nXslcav or nXicov, nXuoTog, 
 ngoTsgog, former, ngwiog, first, derived from the preposition ng6> 
 
 before, 
 gad log (PAT2?), easy, qawv, gaorog. 
 
§60.] 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 61 
 
 The Ionians say ptifiitsj pri** f pn*er»s. 
 The epic poets have pritrtgoft ptitratrog, 
 tot/is (&AXT2), swift, it'yjwv commonly duoom', Taxiorog* 
 
 (§§ 14.3: 58. N. 1.) 
 vniQTiooQ, higher, vni^taxos, highest, derived from the preposi- 
 tion inio, above, 
 vaTtgo*, later y vajuiog, lat< 
 *TVT2y high, vqrimr t vyioi 
 ytuiwtMQOQ, brighter, tpairtaros, brightest, derived from tpetiam* 
 
 uyuOo^. 
 
 Note. In a few instances new comparatives and superlatives are formed from 
 adjectives, which are already in the comparative or superlative degree. E. g. 
 r^arifTas from TftZras, %ngon£$e from %ti{*9. 
 
 NUMERALS, 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS 
 
 §60. 1. The numeral* *L, dio, 
 
 Mfflfi lined as folio 
 
 rfiZfr and itoouof; or it?- 
 
 & 
 
 u (out ) y 
 
 (one) 
 
 to { 
 
 V 
 
 
 ui <i 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 fume, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 fiiit 
 
 
 A. 
 
 vm 
 
 
 h 
 
 D. 
 
 TW, lit, IW (tlCo) 
 
 
 P. (two) 
 
 N. 
 
 A. dvo and dvoj 
 
 
 N. A. wanting 
 
 G. 
 
 dvoh' and dvuv 
 
 
 G. dvwv 
 
 D. 
 
 dwSp 
 
 
 D. dvoi(v) 
 
 P.ol, 
 
 at (three) 
 
 
 ru (th 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 1QLU 
 
 G. 
 
 IQlfxiV 
 
 
 TQIWV 
 
 D. 
 
 l{tll3l{v) 
 
 
 TQlOl(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 TOMC 
 
 
 TOtU 
 
 P.ol, 
 
 al (four) 
 
 
 T « (four) 
 
 N. 
 
 TtOOGtQtQ 
 
 
 tiaoaga 
 
 G. 
 
 Tt(JO(tQ(x)V 
 
 
 Ttoodowv 
 
 D. 
 
 riooagoi(v) 
 
 
 riaoagai(y) 
 
 A. 
 
 Ttooaoag 
 6 
 
 
 xiaoaoa 
 
62 
 
 INFLECTION OF TTOKDS. 
 
 [§60. 
 
 Remark. Jio is found undeclined. 
 
 2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100, inclusive, are in- 
 declinable (§ 45. 2). 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 11. 
 12. 
 13. 
 
 40. 
 50. 
 60. 
 70. 
 
 80. 
 
 TtOOCtQaXOVTCt 
 7ieVTT}XOVT(X 
 
 h^nxovxa 
 
 e^do^xovxa 
 
 oydor\xovxa 
 
 90. 
 100. 
 
 ivvtvr^xovta 
 kxaxov 
 
 200. 
 
 didxooioi, at, a 
 
 300. 
 
 xgiaxooiot, at, a 
 
 400. 
 500. 
 
 xexgaxooioi, at, a 
 ntvxaxooioi, ai, a 
 
 600. 
 
 eSaxoaioLf ai, a 
 
 700. 
 
 enxaxooioi, at, a 
 
 800. 
 
 oxxaxooioi, at, « 
 
 900. 
 
 ivvctxooioi, oll, a 
 
 1000. 
 2000. 
 
 x'vkioiy ai, a 
 dioxifooi, at, ot 
 
 10000. 
 20000. 
 
 [iVQioi, at, a 
 dia/uvQiot, cu, a 
 
 enxa 
 
 * r 
 OXTW 
 
 ivvia 
 
 dexa 
 
 evdsxa 
 
 doidtxix 
 
 dexaxgs7g or rgtaxaldsxa 
 
 14. 5sxocxi(S(sageg or xsooccgeo- 
 
 XVLlQlXtX 
 
 15. 5excc7tsvts or nzvxsxaldexa 
 
 16. dsxasS or exxaldexa 
 
 17. dsxasmd or eTtxoixaldsxa 
 
 18. dexaoxxoj or oxxcoxaldsxa 
 
 19. dexocsrvia or ivvsaxaldsxa 
 
 20. sI'xogi(v) 
 
 21. ti'xoai sig, or sig xtxi sl'xocn 
 30. xgtaxovxu 
 
 Note 1. The compounds ovdslg (oidi, et$) and firfdslg ([irjdi, 
 dg) have nom. plur. ovdiveg, [irjdivsg, insignificant persons. 
 
 Note 2. The accent of the feminine pla is anomalous in 
 the genitive and dative. (§ 31. N. 2.) 
 
 Note 3. dsxaxgug, dexaxiooagsg, and the first component 
 part of zsooageoxaldexa, are declined like xgtlg and xsooagsg 
 respectively. 
 
 Note 4. Thousands are formed by prefixing the numeral 
 adverbs (§ 62. 4) to xlUoi. 
 
 Tens of thousands are formed by prefixing these adverbs to 
 fivgioi. 
 
 Note 5. Instead of any number of tens -f- 8 or 9, a circumlocution with 
 Viuv (from Via, to want) is often used. E. g. Ay*n> Viovn; tlxotri, twenty 
 wanting two, simply eighteen. 'Kvbs Vtovrts rgtoixofra,, thirty wanting one, 
 simply twenty-nine. 
 
 This principle applies also to ordinals. E. g. 'Eva; 5iov tlxeffrcv trog, the 
 nineteenth year. 
 
 The participle tio>v (from 2t», am wanting) with its substantive is sometimes 
 put in the geni.ive absolute. E. g. TLtvrnxovrx /xiag liourns, forty-nine. So 
 with ordinals, f E>of Viovros r^axoffrZ lru t in the twenty-ninth year. 
 
§ 61.] ORDINAL NUMBERS. 63 
 
 Note 6. Dialects. The dialectic peculiarities of the cardinal numbers are 
 as follows : 
 
 1. Epic la for /xix, \Z> for in'. 
 
 2. Epic }oiu>, taioi, declined throughout 
 
 4. Ionic Tt<rr»^£f, Doric rirrogts or rtroai;, JEolic vriffvets, poetic dat. plur. 
 
 TlTgCtVl Ibr t'\TTtL09l» 
 
 5. Doric mijttn, 
 
 12. Ionic and poetic ou^ixa and ^uoxailixat. 
 
 14. Ionic ri<r9iotffKx' t }iKcii indeclinable. 
 
 20. Doric i"xa.Tt, Epic \uxtn. 
 
 80, 40, 80, 200, 300. Ionic r{<itx0»-r« ( rirrignxora, cy^vxovrx, 'kinxifm, 
 
 9000, 10000. Old i»i«^rx«, 3i*«^rx«. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 % 61. The ordinal number! are, 
 
 l-i. 7i£0i»ros, ij, ov 30th. T^faxoaroV, *7, ov 
 
 2d. (3m or 40th. THjauouxoorog, if, dv 
 
 3d. rgitog, r\ t ov 60th. MrrfX00T0ft >j, dv 
 
 •111 . ov 00th. i$iyxoOTOff, 91 ov 
 
 s, 17, ov 70th. tpdoptlMOOTOf, r\ y ov 
 
 0th. Fffl 80th. <<; . «V ^xooto'c, 17, ov 
 
 7th. (Moftog, r it ov 00th. IrrtPtyxooTOffj *,', dv 
 
 g, or 1 00th. fnai . ov 
 
 ov 200th. Sidbroauxj roft /;, dv 
 10th. J . ov ,ov 
 
 1 lt.li. |j I i it ov 400th. | t dv 
 
 12th. (V r lt ov 500th. ; * rt/xoo/ooToV, tj, dv 
 
 13th. rfl profj 7 n ov 600th. *£(/xoo"ioaroc, ij, dv 
 
 14th. ItUOt'O'.tXttldixUT 0£, ??, OV 700th. h-Utr/.uuHitj rO?j i' n ov 
 
 15th. priroxjxi&xaro?, 17, oy 800th. oxTaxcxrfoordf, 77', dv 
 
 16th i ixxuidixuTo*, 7;, ov 000th. m )(*xoa*ooTO£, ij, dv 
 
 17th. frrraxai^ r,, ov 1000th. ggJuaoj6g t tj, ov 
 
 i n ov 10000th. fivQiooiog, r iy ov 
 
 10th. iinnamttt8ix*toc t »?, ov 20000th. diuuvoiooiog, y, ov 
 
 b. t(XOOT< . &x. 
 
 21st nxoOYftg uracSfOfj or 7row- 
 
 ro; x«* n'xooroV 
 
 Note 1. Homer has rir^xras for rira^rof, iCbopctTOf for i^fl/zof, lybiart; 
 for Sy$i9{, ilvarof for i>»ar#f or i»«t*;. Herodotus has TKr^tfxxiJtxaTH for 
 Tirr*£axai2i*aT>:. 
 
 Note 2. A mtxerf number, of which the fractional part is A, is expressed by 
 a circumlocution, when it denotes a coin or weight. E. g. lUp*™ rip^a!** 
 
04 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§62,63. 
 
 = 4j min&; but IIivts hfiifAvettu, = J == 2j mince, "JLvvecrov hf^iroiXavray 
 = 8«| talents; but 'Evvea ri/utrccXccvru = | = 4^ talents. Tiragrov r,p.iu- 
 /3#A.av = S-i oboli ; but Ticcrcigu hpiuZoXa, = | = 2 o&oft. 
 
 NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 §63. 1. The numeral substantives end in «£, gen. <x<5o?, 
 feminine. E. g. povdg, monad, unit, dvdg, TQidg, triad, nsiTctg, 
 e$ctg, eftdoftcig, oydodg, ivvsdg, dsxdg, exarovrdg, %ihdg, fxvgidg, 
 myriad. 
 
 2. The numeral adjectives in nXoog or nldoiog correspond 
 to those in fold, in English. E. g. dnXoog, simple, dinXoog or 
 dmXdaiog, double, twofold, TomXoog or tqitiXugioc, triple, three- 
 fold, TExqanloog or TSToanXdoiog, quadruple, fourfold. 
 
 3. The numeral adjectives answering to the question no- 
 OTctiog, on what day ? end in aiog. They are formed from the 
 ordinals. E. g. devTsgalog, on the second day, rgnouog, on the 
 third day. 
 
 4. The numeral adverbs answering to the question noody.ig, 
 hoio often ? end in dxtg. E. g. rergdyug, four times, Tievidxig, 
 Jive times. 
 
 Except the first three, ana^, once, dig, twice, and rglg, thrice. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 § 03. The article 6, the, is declined as follows : 
 
 8. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 D. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 c 
 
 
 c 
 
 TO 
 
 N. 
 
 TO) 
 
 T« 
 
 TO) 
 
 N. 
 
 c 
 01 
 
 at 
 
 T« 
 
 G. 
 
 TOV 
 
 Trig 
 
 TOV 
 
 G. 
 
 Toiv 
 
 TCUV 
 
 TOIV 
 
 G. 
 
 TWV 
 
 Tb)V 
 
 xcuy 
 
 D. 
 
 Tb) 
 
 *v 
 
 TW 
 
 D. 
 
 Tolv 
 
 TCUV 
 
 TOIV 
 
 D. 
 
 Tolg 
 
 Tolg 
 
 Tolg 
 
 A. 
 
 TOV 
 
 TY\V 
 
 TO 
 
 A. 
 
 TO) 
 
 TV 
 
 TW 
 
 A. 
 
 Tovg 
 
 Tag 
 
 T« 
 
 Note 1. For quantity, accent, and dialects, see above (§§ 31. N. 1, 
 2, 3 : 33. N. 2, 3, 4.) 
 
 We only observe here that the Dorians have roi y <r«/, for el, aU 
 
 Note 2. The original form of the article was T02, from which come the 
 oblique cases, the Doric forms roi, rcti, and the adverb rus. 
 
§64.] 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 65 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 § 64. The personal pronouns are tym, av, 7. The nomi- 
 native 7 is obsolete. 
 
 , fiov 
 ffioi, iioi 
 
 D. (we tirt)) 
 
 N.A. I 
 
 G.D. von*, tujv 
 
 S. 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 ("■') 
 
 S. (thou) 
 
 N. av 
 
 G. oov 
 
 D. aol 
 
 A. gi 
 
 J), (i/tu/ [ 
 
 N.A. (i9 1 
 G.D 
 
 P. {ye, you) 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 
 S. (he, she, it) 
 N. 7 
 G ov 
 
 D. «! 
 
 A. £ 
 
 D. (they two) 
 
 N.A. o^o't 
 
 ( I i . 1 >. | ■■/ WtV 
 
 P. (<fcy) 
 
 N. jgrf'a 
 
 G. o<jpcJy 
 
 D. o(flai(v) 
 
 A. sqpag n. oqp«'a 
 
 !vimu:k. The dual > often written with- 
 
 out the iota subscript ; thus, )t ;, i , 
 
 Noti: 1. The partid d to the pronouns 
 
 of tin* tk-t and second person for the skke of emphasis. E 
 / indeed, for my port; av f, thou indeed. The ace 
 
 : 1. 3 
 
 Non 2. Dialects, The dialectic peculiarities of the per- 
 sonal pronouns are exhibited in the loll iMe. 
 
 J ; to. 
 
 « 1 SpiC and Don 
 G. I To, tui&tv, Ionic and Doric f\uiv> fav. 
 
 D. I 
 
 Plur. N. Ionic Doric op*£ (long «). 
 
 ( i . Ionic fjfiitn , Epic r* utlwv. 
 D. 1 u or Sufttr, poetic ?'/</>> (short *), ?'/; 
 
 A. I Epic uftfie, Doric uui (long a), poetic 
 
 jpac (short «). 
 6* 
 
06 INFLECTION OF WORDS. ['J 65. 
 
 Sing. N. Doric tv, Epic im <r\. 
 
 G. Epic oio, oiio, oe&ev, tsoTo, Ionic and Doric oev, 
 
 Doric also rev or jtiig. 
 D. Doric TtV, «&, Ionic and Doric to/. 
 A. Doric T£, tIv, tv (enclitic). 
 
 Plur. N. Ionic vpieg, Epic fyi^fc, Doric t^f'g (long i>). 
 G. Ionic i'fitwv, Epic vpslwv. 
 D. Epic i^t or vjjpiv, poetic fynV (short i), vpiv. 
 A. Ionic vuiag, Epic iyi/js, Doric £/*$' (long v), poetic 
 Vfidg (short a). 
 
 7. 
 
 Sing. G. Epic to, *Io, !'#«>, Sao, Ionic and Doric il. 
 D. Doric Xv, Epic go*. 
 A. Epic If. 
 Plur. N. Ionic oops??. 
 
 G. Ionic ocpewv, Epic ocpd&v. 
 D. Epic and Ionic 09/ or oqlv. 
 
 A. Ionic ocpeac, Epic and Ionic oqD£, poetic ocpdg (short 
 a), Doric ye (in Theocritus). 
 
 The Attic poets use the accusative oqoi in all 
 genders and numbers. 
 
 Note 3, The accusative filv or vlv, him, her, it, them, is 
 used in all genders and numbers. 
 
 The epic poets and the Ionians use fj.lv, the Attic poets 
 and the Dorians, rlv. 
 
 § G5# 1. The pronoun avTog is declined like oocpog 
 (§ 49. 1), except that its neuter has instead of ov. Thus, 
 
 avrog, he, himself, avnq, she, herself, avro, it, itself, G. aviov, 
 fe ov. 
 
 2. "With the article before it, avrog signifies the same, 
 (§ 144. 3,) in which case it is often contracted with the arti- 
 cle. E. g. tccvtov, Tixvib), rating, for tov olvtov, tm «ltco, t/J avTjj. 
 
 When this contraction takes place, the neuter has o or ov * 
 thus, T«tTo or raviov, for to avxo. 
 
 The contracted forms tulvt]] and Tavid must not be con- 
 founded with Tuvrt] and tuitu from oi'Tog. 
 
 Note. The Ionians insert an e before the endings of ctviu, 
 avTtjv, avibjv, ixviolg. E. g. olvtit]v for avxi]v. 
 
§66.] 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 67 
 
 REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 5) GG. The reflexive pronouns are iuavtoi, afavTov, tavrov. 
 They are compounded of the personal pronouns and aijog. 
 They have no nominative. 
 
 AM (of, nysdf) 
 
 S. F 
 
 (of myself) 
 
 G. 
 
 (fitnmtZ 
 
 G. 
 
 iptuntfi 
 
 D. 
 
 f'uaviu'i 
 
 D. 
 
 fuitvri] 
 
 A. 
 
 ium iuy 
 
 A. 
 
 fflU l 
 
 P. 
 
 (of ourselves) 
 
 P. 
 
 [of oursilvts) 
 
 G. 
 
 1 1UIV 
 
 G. 
 
 i 10JV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 yil» mnroTg 
 
 A. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 (of' 
 
 & 
 
 toftfytilf) 
 
 G. 
 
 OKtviov or 0/ 
 
 G. 
 
 ffatrtmgf or smrtajf 
 
 D. 
 
 outvuy or Oil I 
 
 D. 
 
 9t0Vrn <>r ffotraj 
 
 A. 
 
 UHU lot Or (jr 
 
 A. 
 
 utttn i^ or „Ki j/V 
 
 P. 
 
 [ofyoWTSi Ires) 
 
 r. 
 
 yowru let <) 
 
 G. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 S. 
 
 (of himself ) 
 
 s. 
 
 m 
 
 G. 
 
 TOV 
 
 G. 
 
 n k q 
 
 D. 
 
 ■tri m 
 
 D. 
 
 ■ 
 
 A. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 /' 
 
 ' tkemsdvi 
 
 P. 
 
 (of tin insr Ives) 
 
 G. 
 
 • r ui tujv 
 
 0, 
 
 i r iiiTOJV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Utmtug OF avicug 
 
 A. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 he 
 
 contracted forma of 
 
 must not be confounded 
 
 with the corresponding forma ol 
 
 Notf 1. The /////v/ person phtral 
 
 l the personal pronoun and si 
 for 
 
 is often formed by 
 E. g. (/(/our aiJzwy, 
 
 sometimes occurs. 
 \avrtu is sometimes used. 
 
 Note 2. The / -; or ayre, from iat/T«y, 
 
 Notk 3. The dual alro7i of U<l ; ronoun 
 
 Non 4. In Homer these pronouns are often written separ 
 ately. E. g. t'uti , r r'uuiii*-. 
 
wmm 
 
 68 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 67, 68. 
 
 Note 5. The Ionians use soov for civ. E. g. mbcovtov for 
 ifiaviov. (§ 3. N. 3.) 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUN 
 
 § G7. The possessive pronouns are derived from the per- 
 sonal pronouns. In signification they are equivalent to the 
 genitive of the personal pronoun. 
 
 iuog, i)> ov, my, from ipov 
 
 voo'Liegog, a, ov, of us two, " p&r 
 
 fj(j.hegog, a, ov, our, " r^xug 
 
 oog, or\, gov, thy, " oov 
 
 ocphutSQog, a, ov, of you two, " oqpau 
 
 V(A8Tsgog f a, ov, your, " v^iug 
 
 og, y, ov, his, her, its, " ov 
 
 ocpeieoog, a, ov, their, " ocpug 
 
 Note 1. Dialects. First Person Plur. Doric upog (long «), 
 Epic u{i6g (long «), for fjpsTeoog. In the Attic poets dpog is 
 equivalent to the singular e^og. 
 
 Second Person Sing. Ionic and Doric Tsog for oog, Plur. 
 Doric and Epic vpog (long v), for vpsTtoog. 
 
 Third Person Sing. Ionic and Doric hog for og> Plur. Epic 
 and Doric ocpug for oyeisoog. 
 
 Note 2. The dual vu'l'rtgos and <rq>u1ri£o; are used only by the poets. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § GS- The interrogative pronoun jig, who? which? what? 
 is declined in the following manner : 
 
 S. M. F. N. D. M. F. N. P. 31. F. N. 
 
 N. tig ii N. tive N. rirsg jlrot 
 
 G. TLVOCyTOV TLI'OQ, TOV G. TlVOlV G. JLVWV iLlOiV 
 
 D. TLVL, TO) jivi, TM D. TIVOLV D. t/o"/(v) Tiffi(j') 
 
 A. Tiva tI A. jlvs A. tlvug tira 
 
 The forms tov, tm, must not be confounded with the articles 
 
 TOV, TO). 
 
 Note. Dialects. Sing* G. Epic Wo, Ionic and Doric Tf£, 
 for tov, D. Ionic Ww for tw, P/wr. Ionic, G. t*W, D. Tioig, 
 
 TtOLOt. 
 
$§ 69, 70.] 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 69 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 69. I. The indefinite pronoun tfe (grave accent), any, 
 certain, some, is declined as follows : 
 
 s. 
 
 31. F. 
 
 N. 
 
 Z>. 
 
 IT F V. 
 
 p. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 iV. 
 
 N. 
 
 \ 
 
 Tl 
 
 N. 
 
 Ttri 
 
 N. 
 
 Tll'f',' 
 
 T/r« 
 
 G. 
 
 TIJ'OC, TOV 
 
 ttrog, rov 
 
 G. 
 
 t/voTv 
 
 G. 
 
 TO OH' 
 
 TH'tUV 
 
 D. 
 
 Tin, TO) 
 
 im, roi 
 
 D. 
 
 TIl'OlV 
 
 D. 
 
 Tl0l(v) 
 
 TlOt(%') 
 
 A. 
 
 TLVU. 
 
 > 
 
 A. 
 
 Tilt 
 
 A. 
 
 inn,' 
 
 Tint, aooot 
 
 Note 1. Dim tt G. Epic t c 'o, Ionic and Doric t«i', 
 
 for toi D. 1 i v "., Plur. G. Ionic TtW, all enclitic. 
 
 2. The indefinite pronoun <5 *?>•«, siuh-a-r ■•clined as 
 
 follows : 
 
 P. 
 
 N. 
 
 & 
 
 .1// fenders 
 
 N. 
 
 
 (. 
 
 tog 
 
 D. 
 
 fcij i 
 
 A. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 1). 
 A. 
 
 All gi nders. 
 
 Note 2. Aristophanes (Thesm. 622) has rtu ItTta, for raw Si/Va* . 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOl \. 
 
 § 70. The demonstrative pronouns are qI . and 
 
 u 0d pi J the article with ti rable particle di. 
 
 Thu todt, G. t 9«, 
 
 Ovn. lined u folio 
 
 A JK (this) F. (this) N. (this) 
 
 N. 
 
 
 r 
 
 ain, 
 
 Tul'TO 
 
 G. 
 
 
 rov 
 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ttu 
 
 roi 
 
 TOVTb) 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 T«l I / ( ) 
 
 101 10 
 
 D. 
 
 
 (these tico) 
 
 (//i£<e f?ro) 
 
 (these ti 
 
 N. 
 
 A. 
 
 TOVTb) 
 
 xat in 
 
 TOVTb) 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 joiioiv 
 
 TUIV 
 
 TOVTOIV 
 
 P. 
 
 
 (these) 
 
 (these) 
 
 (these) 
 
 N. 
 
 
 oiioi 
 
 7 
 
 uvxai 
 
 ruvia 
 
 G. 
 
 
 TOITMV 
 
 TOVTb)V 
 
 TOVTbJV 
 
 D. 
 
 
 T(/l roig 
 
 Tttl'TOtlQ 
 
 TOVTOig 
 
 A. 
 
 
 toitov; 
 
 Tctviag 
 
 TUVTU 
 
INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [$7I. 
 
 Exslvog, he, that, is declined like ovzog. Thus, ixsivog f T], o, 
 G. exehov, ijg, ov. 
 
 Note 1. Dialects. D. Plur. Epic xolodsoot, xolcdsoi, for 
 xolode, from ids. 
 
 The Ionians insert an s before the endings of xovxov, xavxrig, 
 
 TOVXCJ, XOVXMV, XOVTOVg. E. g. XOVxioV for TOUTOl*. 
 
 For (xhioc, the Ionic dialect has tcuvog, the Doric, tt^os, 
 and the ^Eolic, x?^vo£. 
 
 Note 2. The letter / (long) is often appended to the de- 
 monstrative pronouns for the sake of emphasis. E. g. oixool, 
 ccvir/tj this here ; exeivoul, that there. 
 
 The short vowel is dropped before L E. g. 6dl, rfil, xodl. 
 xovxl, xavxl, for cdt'i, rjdt'i', xodt'i, xovxo'i', xavxd'i. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 71. 1. The relative pronoun og, who, which, that, is de- 
 clined as follows : 
 
 8. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 D. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 p. 
 
 31. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 CI 
 
 CI 
 
 ct 
 
 ' 
 
 N. 
 
 OJ 
 
 a 
 
 CI 
 
 N. 
 
 c> 
 
 01 
 
 cu 
 
 a 
 
 G. 
 
 ov 
 
 i g 
 
 OV 
 
 G. 
 
 OlV 
 
 CUV 
 
 olv 
 
 G. 
 
 (x)V 
 
 cov 
 
 (OV 
 
 D. 
 
 ft 
 
 s 
 
 0) 
 
 D. 
 
 olv 
 
 alv 
 
 olv 
 
 D. 
 
 olg 
 
 alg 
 
 olg 
 
 A. 
 
 OV 
 
 T(V 
 
 u 
 
 
 A. 
 
 CI 
 
 0) 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 A. 
 
 ovg 
 
 CI 
 
 a? 
 
 CI 
 
 a 
 
 2. The relative baxig y whoever, who, is compounded of og 
 and the indefinite pronoun xlg, which are separately declined. 
 Thus, 
 
 s. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 OCFTig 
 OVUVOQ, OXOV 
 
 
 rug 
 r 
 
 TjOXlVOQ 
 f t TlVL 
 
 r\vxiva 
 
 TO 
 
 ovxivog, oxov 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 bJTlVl, OXO) 
 
 ovxiva 
 
 
 OiXLVl, OXb) 
 XI 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 o'lxtveg 
 
 OJVXIVWV, OX(x)V 
 
 
 ctixivig 
 
 OJlXlVMV 
 
 uxiva, uxxct 
 
 OJVXIVOJV, bxcov 
 
 D. 
 
 olaxiot(v), bioioi(v) 
 
 aloxuuiv 
 
 OL(JXlGl(v), OXOLOl(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 OVOTLVUg 
 
 
 tiaxivag 
 
 iixira, lixxa 
 
 The neuter 3 xi is often written b\xi, to prevent its being 
 confounded with the conjunction oxi, that. 
 
§§ 72, 73.] pronoun. 71 
 
 Note 1. Dialects. Sing. Epic, N. 2t/£ for b'ong, G. ozeo, 
 otsv, oxxev, for oTof, D. oTStt) for orw, A. oiira, neut. orn, for 
 ovuva, o xi, respectively, Plur. Ionic, G. oxewv for oxav, D. 
 oiioiai, fern. 6xsj t (ji. 
 
 The accusative singular cmya stands also for the neuter 
 plural axivoc. 
 
 Note 2. The particle 7r^ is often appended to og. E. g. 
 3<77rf£, tJtt^, 07rf^>, G. ovneg, rjaneo, written also separately og 
 
 IZtQ, rj 7180, O 71SQ. 
 
 Note 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the com- 
 pound relatives boxig and bonto. E. g. ootloovv, ootisqovv, 
 whoever, written also separately, Saris ovv, bonsg ovv. 
 
 RECIPROCAL PRONOUN 
 
 § 72. The reciprocal pronoun is aXXrjXcov, of one another. 
 The nominative case and the singular number are of course 
 wanting : 
 
 D. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 aXXi)Xoiv 
 
 aXXrjXoiv 
 aXXr]Xu) 
 
 aXXrjXaiv 
 aXXrjXaiv 
 (xXXr t Xa 
 
 aXXyXoiv 
 aXXyXoiv 
 aXXr^Xta 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 aXXyXav 
 aXXrjXotg 
 aXh]Xovg 
 
 aXXijXcov 
 aXXrjXaig 
 aXXqXag 
 
 aXXijXav 
 aXXijXoig 
 aXXr { Xa 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 73. 1. From the obsolete 1102, what? c 0II02, who, 
 and T02, this, and from the relative pronoun og, who, come 
 the following corresponding pronominal adjectives : 
 
 Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. 
 
 nooog, how much ? nooog, of a xooog or xoooods oaog or 
 
 how many 1 certain or xoaovxog, so onooog, as 
 
 quantity much much as 
 
72 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 ft 7* 
 
 noiog, of what 
 quality ? 
 
 noiog, of a 
 certain 
 quality 
 
 joiog or roioode 
 or TOLovxog, such 
 
 olog or 
 O7io7og, as 
 
 noTsgog, which of 
 the two ? 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 
 OTTOTFQOg, 
 
 whichever 
 of the two 
 
 itooxog, of what 
 number ? 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 
 onooTog, of 
 what num- 
 ber soever 
 
 nooTcuog, in how 
 many days ? 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 
 07I0OT0U0g f 
 
 in what- 
 ever num- 
 ber of days 
 
 nrjXlxog, howoldl 
 how large 1 
 
 7i7}Xlxog y of 
 a certain 
 age, of a 
 certain size 
 
 T7)Xlxog Or TTjXir' 
 
 y.oude or ir t ).L- 
 xovzog, so old, 
 so large 
 
 Tjllxog or 
 o 7i ijllxog, 
 as old as j 
 as large as 
 
 nodanog, of what 
 country 1 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 
 oTioSanog, 
 of what 
 country 
 soever 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 rvvvog or twvov- 
 jog, so little 
 
 wanting 
 
 _Note 1. TooovTog, ToiovTog, and tt]hxovTo$ coincide with 
 ovxog in respect to the diphthongs ov and av. E. g. toqovtoq, 
 rooavit]. 
 
 In the neuter they have both o and ov. E. g. togovto or 
 toooviov. 
 
 Note 2. The demonstrative forms often take / (§ 70. N. 2). 
 E. g. TooovTool, as much as you see here. 
 
 Here also the short vowel is dropped before the letter /. 
 E. g. Toaoudl for togooou. 
 
 Note 3. The particle ovv is often appended to the relative 
 forms (§ 71. N. 3). E. g. boooovv, how much soever. 
 
 2. The following adjectives also belong here : 
 
 aXXodanog (ulXog),r}, ov, foreign, afiqpbi, both, G. D. u^icpdlvy used 
 SXXog, rj, o, other. (§ 33. N. 1.) only in the dual. 
 aficpoTtpog (uficpto), a, ov both. txaoTog, 77, ov, each, every. 
 
§ 74.] verb. 73 
 
 exaTSoog, a, ov, each of two. navToSanog (nag), r\, ov, of all 
 
 ETsgog, a, ov, other, another. kinds. 
 
 fjfiedanog (fifing), t], 6v, our ifiedanog (ifing), t\, ov, your 
 
 countryman. countryman. 
 
 I'd Log, a, ov, proper, peculiar, 
 
 his own. 
 
 VERB 
 
 ^74. 1. The Greek verb has three voices; 
 the active voice, the passive voice, and the middle 
 voice. 
 
 2. There are five moods; the indicative, the 
 subjunctive, the optative, the imperative, and the 
 infinitive. 
 
 3. There are six tenses, the present, the imper- 
 fect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the future, and the 
 aorist. 
 
 The primary or leading tenses are the present, 
 the perfect, and the future. 
 
 The secondary or historical tenses are the im- 
 perfect, the pluperfect, and the aorist. 
 
 4. The indicative is the only mood in which the 
 imperfect and pluperfect are found. The subjunc- 
 tive and imperative want also the future. 
 
 5. There are three persons ; the first person, 
 the second person, and the third person. 
 
74 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§74. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Perfect 1. 
 Perfect 2. 
 Pluperfect 1. 
 Pluperfect 2. 
 Future 1. 
 Future 2. 
 Aorist 1. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Perfect. 
 Pluperfect. 
 Future 1. 
 Future 2. 
 
 Fnturp 3 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 ZVTtZCO 
 
 ezvitzov 
 
 zszvcpa 
 
 zhvrca 
 
 izszvcpsiv 
 
 izszv7tecv 
 
 zvipo 
 
 zvjtico 
 
 ezvxpa 
 
 ezvjtov 
 
 zvTtzo[iai 
 ezviizoix^v 
 
 ZSZVfJlfAOU 
 
 izezv/jtfirfv 
 
 ZV(p&7J(jO(lCU 
 
 zvTtrJGOfiai 
 zszvyjoftou 
 izvcp&ijv 
 Izvniiv 
 
 zvirtzofxai 
 
 izv7tz6fxr^v 
 
 zezv/xfxai 
 
 ezezvf.ifxijv 
 
 zvipopou 
 
 ZV7Z£O[l0U 
 
 izvipdfAqv 
 izv7t6fxrjv 
 
 Synopti- 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 zvnzco 
 
 zszv(pco 
 xszvTta 
 
 
 
 
 zvyjco 
 
 ZV7CC0 
 
 PASSIVE 
 zvTtzcofxat 
 
 zszvpfjiivos a 
 
 
 
 Aorist 1. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Perfect. 
 Pluperfect. 
 Future 1. 
 T^iiturp Q, 
 
 zvcp&ca 
 
 ZV7ZG) 
 
 MIDDLE 
 
 TV7ZZCd[A6U 
 
 Z£ZV[l[livOS to 
 
 
 
 Aorist 1. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 ZlSlfJCOfAOU 
 TV7t(0(JlOU 
 
§74.] 
 
 VERB. 
 
 75 
 
 cal Table. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 TVUTOlfXl 
 
 j£Tv cpoc fit 
 
 TSTV7ZOL(XL 
 
 TVTtTS 
 
 xkxvcpB 
 
 T£TV7t£ 
 
 TVTCTStV 
 
 TSTvcpevai 
 
 T€TV7Z8Vai 
 
 TV7ZTOV 
 
 Tsrvcpcog 
 
 TSTVTlcis 
 
 TVlfJOtfll 
 TVTCiotflL 
 
 rvxpatfu 
 
 tV7ZOl(jlL 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 TV7tTOCfXrjV 
 
 TVipOV 
 TVTtS 
 
 Tvipetv 
 
 TVTieeiv 
 
 xvxpat 
 
 TVTC£IV 
 
 Tvxpav 
 rvnecov 
 rvipas 
 
 TV71COV 
 
 in v 
 
 TV7CTOV TV7tT£(j&(U TV7ZTO[l£VOS 
 
 TSTVfifiivos si- TSTVyjO TSTVCp&CU 
 
 Tvcp&rjGroLfijjv 
 
 TV7CTf(jOif,l7fV 
 
 T£TVipOl{l7]V 
 
 TVCp&styv TV(p&rfTL 
 
 rvneirfv TVUll&t 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 TV7tTOlfirjV TVJIXOV TV7tT£0&CU TV7tl6fjl£VOS 
 
 ; ini — — 7— ; 
 
 T£TVflfi£VOS £L- TSTVipO T£TV<p&(U TSTVfifjLSVOS 
 
 TV(p&7J<j£(J\}0U 
 
 CV717JOSO&OU 
 
 TSTVipEG&OLl 
 
 Tvcp&rjvat 
 
 TVTtijvCU 
 
 T£TVflfX£VOS 
 
 [vos 
 
 TVCp&^COfU- 
 
 TV7T7j(j6[A£VOS 
 
 TSTVyjOfASVOS 
 
 TVCp&SlS 
 
 TVTtetS 
 
 Tvyjoifxrfv 
 
 TV7t£oifX7jV 
 TVipatfAljV 
 TV7tOC i UTfV 
 
 TVlfJOU 
 TV710V 
 
 TVlf)£6&0U 
 XV7Z££(J&CU 
 
 Tvxpao&ou 
 xvnio&at 
 
 TV\pOfl£VOS 
 TV7Z£0(A,£VOS 
 TVXpd[X£VOS 
 TV7t6fl£VOS 
 
^"~" 
 
 76 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 74. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. / strike, I am striking. 
 
 S. TVTITW D. TVTITOflSV P* TVTlTOfiEV 
 
 TVTTTSig TV71TETOV TVJITETE 
 
 TVJVTSl TV71TETOV TV7lTOVOl{v) 
 
 Imperfect. I struck, I was striking. 
 
 S. ETV7TTOV D. £TVnTO[l£V P. hvTTTOflSV 
 
 ETVTITEg hVTllSTOr ETV7TTSTS 
 
 Itv7its(v) sTvmirrjv etvtitov 
 
 Perfect 1. I have struck. 
 
 S. TETVCpU D. TETVCpttflEV P. T6TVq>a^£V 
 
 rhvcpotg TETVcpoaov TETvepaxs 
 
 TZTVcp£(v) TSTvqxxiov Tsvu(p<x(u{v) 
 
 Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
 ihvnoL, inflected like Perfect 1. 
 
 Pluperfect 1. / had struck. 
 
 S. ETETVCpELV I). ETETVCpELflEV P. ETETVCpElfXEV 
 
 ETETVCpELg ElETVCpElTOV ETETVCpElTE 
 
 ETETVCpEL ETETVCpEVXYlV ETETlKptlG(XV Or -SOOtV 
 
 Pluperfect 2. Synonymous with Pluperfect 1. 
 hETVTiEiVy inflected like Pluperfect 1. 
 
 Future 1. I shall or will strike. 
 
 S. TVlpto D. TVlpOfieV -P. TVlJJOfiEV 
 
 TVlpEig TVlfiETOV TVlpElS 
 
 TVtyEl TVljJETOV TVlpOVOiiy} 
 
 Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
 TV7ti(o contracted xvnw, inflected like (pitta (§ 116). 
 
 Aorist 1. I struck. 
 S. 'zTVipot, D. hvyanEV P. itvipafiEV 
 
 ETVlpUg ElVlpCtTOV ETVlpUTE 
 
 ixvyt(y) iivifjarrjV Etvipav 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 zxvnov, inflected like the Imperfect. 
 
§ 74.] ACTIVE VOICE. 77 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. I strike, I may or can strike. 
 
 S. TV7tX(0 D. XVTtXWflSV P. XVTIXW^SV 
 
 TvnjriQ xvnxr\xov xvtixtjxs 
 
 tvtixt) xvttxtjxov xvnxtoaiyv) 
 
 Perfect 1. I have, or may have, struck, 
 xsxvyco, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
 TETVTib), inflected like the Present. 
 
 Aorist 1. I strike, I may or can strike. 
 
 S. XVXpbi D. XVlpW^lEV P. XVlpCOfiSV 
 
 TVipt]g xvip^xov xvijj^xb 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 xvnco, inflected like Aorist 1. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, i* might, could, would, or should strike. 
 
 S. XVTZXOlflL D. TVTlTOlfitV P. XVTTXOLfiSV 
 
 XV7ZXOIQ XV71XOLXOV TV7IXOIXS 
 
 XVTtXOl 1V7lTOLTr t V XV71XOLSV 
 
 Perfect 1 . i" might, could, would, or should have struck. 
 tzTvcpoiiii, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
 xzxvnoiiii, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Future 1. / would or should strike. 
 Tvyoijii, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
 xvuioiixi contracted xvjioIul, like cpilioL^iv (§ 116). 
 
 Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should strike. 
 
 S. xvipui^iv D. rvipaifiEV P. xvipai^isv 
 
 xvipaig xvyanov xvipcuxs 
 
 xvipai TVipalxrjV tvijjousv 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 
 xvnoini, inflected like the Present. 
 
 7 * 
 
78 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 r§74. 
 
 S. 
 
 s. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. Strike thou, be thou striking, 
 D. P. 
 
 TV7ZXS 
 
 wjixixa 
 
 XV7XXSXOV 
 
 xvnxixviv 
 
 TV7IXEX8 
 
 tv nx £1(00 av or -nxovxav* 
 
 Perfect 1. Have struck, 
 rhvys, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Perfect 2. Synonymous with Perfect 1. 
 xixvne, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Aorist 1. Strike thou. 
 - D. - — — P. 
 
 xvipov xvipaxov xvipaxs 
 
 xvipaiu) xvipdiwv xvydxaoav or -dvx&v 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 xvns, inflected like the Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, xvnxuv, to strike, to be striking. 
 
 Perfect 1. xtxvyivai, to have struck. 
 
 Perfect 2. xtxvnivai, synonymous with Perfect 1 
 
 Future 1. xvipeiv, to be about to strike. 
 
 Future 2. xvniuv contracted xvnelv, synonymous with Future 1. 
 
 Aorist 1. xvipai, to strike. 
 
 Aorist 2. xvnuv, synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present, xvnxuvy ovoa, ov, sticking. (§ 53. 7.) 
 
 Perfect 1. xexvywg, via, 6g, having struck. (§ 53. 9.) 
 
 Perfect 2. xexvTiojg, via, 6g, synonymous with Perfect 1. (ibid.) 
 
 Future 1. xvymv, ovoa, ov, about to strike. (§ 53. 7.) 
 
 Future 2. xvntojv, iovoa, iov, contracted xvnwv, ovoa, ovv. (ibid.) 
 
 Aorist 1. xvipag, aoa, av, striking, having struck. (§ 53. 1.) 
 
 Aorist 2. xvtiojv, ovoa, ov, synonymous with Aorist 1. (^ 53. 7.) 
 
§74.] 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 79 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 TV71TTJ Of -71TSI 
 
 S. 
 
 s. 
 
 s. 
 
 Present. 1 am struck. 
 D. tvttto^ie&ov P. Tvmout&a 
 
 TV71TEG&OV 
 
 Tvmsa&ov 
 
 STV7IT0V 
 BTV71TSTO 
 
 rixvycu 
 
 Imperfect. I was struck. 
 D. (tvtitous&ov P> 
 
 ITVTITSO&OV 
 iTVTITSO&ljV 
 
 TV71TSO&8 
 
 iTvmous&a 
 
 iTVTlTEG&S 
 ixVTITQVTQ 
 
 Perfect. I have been struck. 
 
 D. TSTl'UUS&OV .P. TETVjJUi&CC 
 
 zizvq&ov zizvqj&s 
 
 TSTVCpdoV TEZV[i{lEVOl slot 
 
 Pluperfect. I had been struck. 
 
 S. (zEzvuuiyv D. etezvuiie&ov P. eTsrvfiusd-a 
 
 izizvipo iisTVCf&ov izEzvy&s 
 
 izizvnzo izEziq&r { v teiv^ueioi r\oav 
 
 Future 1. 
 
 xvcp&i)(jouu.i D* 
 
 Tvcfdr^oi] or -OEl 
 
 TVCf&l'jOETClL 
 
 I shall or icill be struck. 
 Ticf&rtooue&ov P. zvcp&rjoouE&ct 
 
 TVCf&rjOtO&OV TVy&ljGSO&S 
 
 TVcpdilaEG&ov Tvy&rioovxai 
 
 Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
 xvnrfiopou, inflected like Future 1. 
 
 Future 3. I shall remain struck, 
 TETvipopou, inflected like Future 1. 
 
 8. hv^p&rjp 
 
 izicp&r t g 
 izvcp&rj 
 
 Aorist 1. I icas struck. 
 
 D. iii'Cf&ijusv P. frvy&rjusv 
 
 ixi'cp&rjov izi'cp&TjZS 
 
 iz i(pdi]Tr { v iTicp&7}oav 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 frvnriv, inflected like Aorist 1. 
 
80 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 74. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. I am struck, I may or can be struck. 
 S. Tvmw^ai D. tvtitwug&ov P. Tvnroofis&a 
 
 tV7TTtJ TVTtTyG&OV TV7lTf}G&e 
 
 XVTlT7\Xai TVTTtqO&OV tVTtTOJVTOlIf 
 
 Perfect. / have been struck, I may have been struck. 
 S. TSTVppsvog (rj, ov) ca, fjg, jj 
 
 D. TETVfUflSVb) (of, b)) Of^lSV, VJTOV, TjTOV 
 
 P. letvfifisvoi (oil, a) copsv, tjts, wai(v) 
 
 Aorist 1. I am struck, I may or can be struck. 
 
 S. TVQp&W D. TV<p&W[lSV P. TVq)$W(/,£V 
 
 Tvqj&fig Tvqj&rjjov xv(p&i]TS 
 
 xvcp&fj zvy&rJTOv Tvq)&w(u(v) 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 TVTtw, inflected like Aorist I. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. I might, could, would, or should be struck. 
 
 8. 7V7lT0l(l7}V D. TVTITolflsdoV P. TVTITolflS&CC 
 
 TV71TOIO TV71TOLG&OV TVTTTOIG&S 
 
 TV7ITOITO TV71T01G&7]V TV71TQLVTO 
 
 Perfect. I might, fyc. have been struck. 
 S. rervfifiivog (rj, ov) sI'tjv, ur\g, el'rj 
 D. TtTVUfisvw (a, (a) d'rjfisv, tl'ijiov, nr\xr\v 
 P. TSTVfipsvoi (at, a) sl'rjpsv, ui]TS, d'rjaav 
 
 Future 1. I should, or would be struck. 
 Tvcp&rjool[xr]v, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
 rvTtrjoolfirjv, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Future 3. I should or would remain struck. 
 TSTVtpolfirjv, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Aorist 1. I might, could, would, or should be struck. 
 S. jvcpdslrjv D. rvcp&8hiasv P. TVcp&sl^^sv or -tipsy 
 
 jvcp&slrjg TVcp&elrjTOV TVcp&slrjTS or -sits 
 
 Tvcp&urj Tvq>$uy]Tt]v cvqj&slriGoiv or -utv 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 Tvnslrjv, inflected like Aorist 1 . 
 
§74.] 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 81 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 D 
 
 Be thou struck. 
 P. 
 
 TVTITOV 
 TVTllio&CO 
 
 JV71T60&OV 
 TVTlTio&CtiV 
 
 TV71TSO&S 
 
 TVTiT so & wo otv or -o&cov 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 8. 
 
 D. 
 
 Be thou struck. 
 P. 
 
 TSTVljJO 
 TSTVQO&CO 
 
 TV(f)&r]TL 
 
 Tvcp&riico 
 
 TSTvep&ov rhvcp&s 
 
 THVCp&COV TSTVCp&CJOCtV Of -q)&(>)V 
 
 Aorist 1. 
 
 D. 
 
 Be thou struck. 
 P. 
 
 TVty&TjTOV TVCp&TjTS 
 
 Tvqj&riTcov Tvy&rjTMoav or -Cp&6VTlQV 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1 
 Tvnrj&i, inflected like Aorist 1. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. xvizizoSui, to he struck. 
 
 Perfect. TSTvy&ai, to have been struck. 
 
 Future 1. Tvyd-faso&ui, to be about to be struck. 
 
 Future 2. jvn^oio&aL, synonymous with Future 1. 
 
 Future 3. Ttivyto&ai, to remain struck. 
 
 Aorist 1. Tvy-d-rjvai, to be struck. 
 
 Aorist 2. Tvnrivou, synonymous with Aorist 1 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. xvmo^vog, r\, ov, being struck. 
 Perfect. Tszvfifiivog, rj, ov, struck, having been struck. 
 Future 1. Tvcp&rjoofxsvog, rj, ov, about to be struck. 
 Future 2. Tvm]o6fisvog, r\> ov, synonymous with Future 1. 
 Future 3. TSTvifj6fisvog : about to remain struck. 
 Aorist 1. Tvcp&slg, uoa, iv, being struck. (§ 53. 3.) 
 Aorist 2. Tvnsig, uoa, iv, synonymous with Aorist 1. (ibid.) 
 All participles in og are inflected like oocpog (§ 49. 1). 
 
82 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 74. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. I strike myself, 
 TWirofuxi, like the Present Passive. 
 
 Imperfect. I was striking myself. 
 iw7n:6fi7]v, like the Imperfect Passive. 
 
 Perfect. / have struck myself. 
 TfTiY^uca, like the Perfect Passive. 
 
 Pluperfect. I had struck myself.. 
 iTSTv^rjv, like the Pluperfect Passive. 
 
 Future I. / shall strike myself. 
 tvipofiiM, inflected like the present. 
 
 Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
 Tvnsoficu contr. Tvnovfiai, inflected like cpileo{icu (§ 116). 
 
 Aorist 1. I struck myself . 
 
 S. iivi/joifi^v D. hvi}ja[A£&ov P. eTVipdfiSxroi 
 
 ixvipo) ETVipaG&QV hvipccode 
 
 irvipaxo ETVijjau&Tiv ixvxpaVTO 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist I. 
 iTvnofxrjv, inflected like the Imperfect. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. I strike, I may or can strike myself 
 rvTiTCtificu, the same as in the Passive. 
 
 Perfect. / have, or may have, struck myself 
 TEivptievog (t), op) w, as in the Passive. 
 
 Aorist 1. I strike, or may or can strike, myself 
 S. Tvyjwficci D. TvipM^eO^ov P. rvipcofisd-a 
 
 TVlpf] TVtprjG&OV TVlp7]0&8 
 
 TUifjrjTai Tviprjo&ov TVipwvTCti 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 zvncofiai, inflected like Aorist 1. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. I might, &,c. strike myself 
 TVTtTolfitjv, the same as in the Passive. 
 
$ 74.] MIDDLE VOICE. 83 
 
 Perfect. I might, &.c. have struck myself. 
 Tsrvptievog (rj, ov) sfyv, as in the Passive. 
 
 Future 1. I should or would strike myself, 
 ivijjolfirjv, inflected like the Present. 
 
 Future 2. Synonymous with Future 1. 
 TvnsoLprjv contr. jvnol^v inflected like q>deol[ir}v (§ 116). 
 
 Aorist 1. I might, &c. strike myself. 
 
 S, TVipalfirjV D. TVipal^Lid-ov P. TVipctlus&a 
 
 TVipaio Tvyjaio&ov Tvycuo&s 
 
 TVipaiTO Tvya'us&riv TVipcuvTO 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 TV7iol[ir]v, inflected like the Present. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. Strike thyself 
 tvtitov, as in the Passive. 
 
 Perfect. Strike thyself. 
 TETvipo, as in the Passive. 
 
 Aorist 1. Strike thyself. 
 S. D. P. 
 
 TVipda&ca xvi/jdodwv tv if> a o&cooav or -o&av 
 
 Aorist 2. Synonymous with Aorist I. 
 xvnov, inflected like the Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. Tvmso&at, to strike one's self. 
 
 Perfect. Tezixp&ai, to have struck one's self. 
 
 Future 1. Tvipeo&ai, to be about to strike one's self. 
 
 Future 2. tvttssoScu contracted rvjislo&ai, synonymous with 
 
 Future 1. 
 
 Aorist 1. Tvipaa&at, to strike one's self. 
 
 Aorist 2. TVTiso&ou, synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present, rvmousvog, q, ov, striking himself. 
 
 Perfect. Terv/xuevog, r\, ov, having struck himself. 
 
 Future 1. tvyouevog, r t , ov, about to strike himself 
 
 Future 2. jvnsouevog contracted rvnovpevog, r], ov, synonymous 
 
 with Future 1. 
 Aorist 1. xvipafievog, r[, ov, striking or having struck himself. 
 Aorist 2. Tvnofisvog, i], ov, synonymous with Aorist 1. 
 
S4 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 75, 76. 
 
 AUGMENT. 
 
 § 75. 1. The perfect and third future of all 
 the moods and of the participle, and the imperfect, 
 aorist, and pluperfect of the indicative, receive an 
 increase at the beginning, called augment. 
 
 2. There are two kinds of augment ; the syllabic 
 augment, and the temporal augment. 
 
 The syllabic augment is formed by prefixing a 
 syllable or two syllables to the verb. 
 
 The temporal augment is formed by lengthening 
 the first syllable of the verb. 
 
 SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 
 
 § 76. 1. When the verb begins with a con- 
 sonant followed by a vowel or a liquid, the augment 
 of the perfect is formed by prefixing to the verb 
 that consonant together with an s. E. g. 
 
 tvtitci} perf. Tcrvqpa, tstv[J{xou 
 ygdcpco " yiyQucpct, yiyfja^ixai. 
 
 So &vco> Te&vxa' cpvo), nscpvxa' /alrco, vJxrjvu' xgctco, ni%Q7}- 
 pat. (§ 14. 3.) 
 
 This kind of syllabic augment is called reduplication. 
 
 2. When the verb begins with a double con- 
 sonant (f, |, yj) 9 or with two consonants the second 
 of which is not a liquid, the augment of the per- 
 fect is formed by prefixing an s. E. g. 
 
 £i7T£&> perf. ifyjrjxa, fQri T V^ aL 
 
 OXU71TO) " LOXaCptt, t(JXU(Jl[tai. 
 
 Note 1 . Some verbs beginning with a liquid take u instead of the redupli- 
 cation. See the Anomalous kay%civu t kufiCdvu, Xtyu collect, MEIPH, 
 TEft say. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs beginning with fil, yX, fip f are variable in 
 the augment of the perfect. E. g. yXvopu, tylvcpa or yeylvyct' 
 /jivfjfiovevta, (ixvr^ovivy.u ' (aijlivtjOxoj, ^efxvrjfxaL. 
 
§§77-79.] AUGMENT. 85 
 
 Those beginning with yv always prefix an s. E. g. yvwglfr, 
 
 iyrcogr/.a. 
 
 Note 3. In a few instances, verbs beginning with *-t take the reduplication. 
 See the Anomalous cr/V™, *rn<rff*>. 
 
 The verb xraofiut, jwssess, has perf. pass. tscrr,fjt,eu and xixrnp&at. 
 
 Note 4. The Epic language, in a few instances, prefixes the initial consonant 
 together with an it. E. g. 2/*», }tihu for lihec. 
 
 §77. 1. The augment of the pluperfect is 
 formed by prefixing an f to the reduplication of the 
 perfect. (| 76. 1.) E. g. 
 
 rvTiTb), ibjvcpa pluperf. emvtp&v. 
 
 2. But when the perfect begins with s , the plu- 
 perfect takes no additional augment. (§ 76. 2.) E. g. 
 
 oxdmco, taxaqpa pluperf. goxdqsir. 
 
 Note 1. The additional augment s of the pluperfect is often 
 omitted. E. g. Tsltvrdco, sxtTs).£Vir l y.£iv or m&Utntyftar. 
 
 Note 2. The verb 'tcrrtipt often lengthens the syllabic augment t into u in 
 the pluperfect active. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 §7 8. When the verb begins with a consonant, 
 the augment of the imperfect and aorist is 
 formed by prefixing an s. E. g. 
 
 TVTiTuj imperf. tivnxov aor. Ixvifa. 
 
 Note 1. These four verbs, GouXopcu, ^uvapat, Xxua, and pix\&>, often take 
 the temporal augment in addition to the syllabic. See in the catalogue of An- 
 omalous Verbs, 
 
 Note 2. In the Epic dialect the second aorist active and 
 middle often takes the reduplication through all the moods and 
 participle. E. g. xdpPm, i(i*aftGP ' /.aufidrco, ).E/.a i 36 i ur i v. 
 
 In some instances an s is prefixed to this reduplication, but 
 only in the indicative. E. g. qp^ajco, nsygadov or enicpgudov. 
 
 Note 3. The syllabic augment of the imperfect and of the 
 aorist is often omitted by the epic poets. E. g. ytgco, cpigov for 
 ecpsgov' tqsjio), TQa7io i ur j v for iTganoprjv. 
 
 §79. When the verb begins with g, the aug- 
 ment is formed by prefixing an s, and doubling the 
 P (V 13). E.g. 
 
 qoctitcq, imperf. ^qqanxovy perf. eggacpa, pluperf. iggdcpeiv, aor. 
 tggaya. 8 
 
86 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 80. 
 
 Note 1. In a few instances, Homer does not double the £ after the syllabic 
 augment. E. g. pi^ej, tgi^a. for ippt^a. 
 
 Note 2. The verb putriat, in Homer, has perf. pass. part, psevrufzivu for 
 ippvT&fxivx. 
 
 Note 3. The verbs AEIfl, MEIPil, and <rtvu, in some of the past 
 tenses, double the initial consonant after e. See in the catalogue of Anomalous 
 Verbs. 
 
 TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 
 
 ^80. 1. When the verb begins with a short 
 vowel, the augment of all the past tenses is formed 
 by lengthening that vowel. A and f become ij 9 
 and o becomes a. E. g. 
 
 oixoXov&ia, imperf. rjxoXov&sov, perf. rjxoXov&Tjxa, pluperf. 
 
 tjxoXov&7]XElv, aor. rjxoXov&r}G(X. 
 eXeew, tjXeeov, 7]Xtr}yM t rjXsrjxeiv, TjkE^oa. 
 &q&&cq, wq&o6(j.7]v } wQ&wfiai, dg&ojfA^v, ugfroooa. 
 
 So Xxetevoj, Ixetevov, Txetevou* vyiaivw, vyiaivov, vylavot. 
 
 2. If the vowel is already long, no change takes place; 
 except that « (long) is commonly changed into r}. E. g. ^uc- 
 Qoco, rjfiEQOOv' oodlvb), wdivov' ai'aaco, Tj'i^a. 
 
 3. When the verb begins with a diphthong, the augment is 
 formed by changing the first vowel of that diphthong in the 
 manner above specified (§ 80. 1, 2). E. g. ahioi, fjisov • ada, 
 i]dov' avkio), r^vksov * sv/opai, rjv%6[iriv ' oIxeco, ojxeov. 
 
 For the iota subscript, see above (§ 3). 
 
 Note 1. Some verbs lengthen s not into y but into a. Such are Ida, 137£&/, 
 iXitftrco, iXku, IXxvcj, '(^ttoj, Ioctu^co, igyu^of&ai, itrnoia. See also the Anomalous 
 'EAil, itu, %%&>, 'Ell, 1* ?u. 
 
 Note 2. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment. 
 See the Anomalous ccyw/xi, u.X'tcrKOfjt.tt.i, uvhuvu, ukco, uXXu, Ellin, zXku, 
 ifvof/,1, EPrO, oupi&j, cj^-'ict), uv'iof/.at. 
 
 Note 3. A few verbs beginning with a vowel take both the syllabic and tem- 
 poral augment at the same time. See the Anomalous uvhuvu), td-u, r/i/ut, olyc*, 
 hoata. See also the pluperfect of the anomalous uku, 'iXxca^ and EPril. 
 
 Remark 1. The perfect of the Anomalous tS-co lengthens the syllabic aug- 
 ment t into u. (Compare §§ 77. N. 2 : 78. N. 1.) 
 
 Remark 2. The verb loora^u, (originally o^riX^u) changes ia into \u in the 
 augmented tenses. E. g. imperf. iu>gru%ov. 
 
§§ 81, 82.] AUGMENT. 87 
 
 Note 4. The temporal augment is often omitted in the 
 Attic dialect. E.g. drfil^o^ai, ar^dt^o^v ' svgloxco, evgioxov' 
 olroio, olvoov. 
 
 Verbs beginning with the diphthong ov are never aug- 
 mented. E. g. oiia'Qco, ovict&i', never covia£ov. 
 
 Those beginning with si are seldom augmented. 
 
 Note 5. The Epic and the Ionic dialect may omit the tem- 
 poral augment in all verbs. E. g. dyogevco, dyogsvov ' iQo^uxi t 
 zCfllirp ' opiXico, bfiiuov. 
 
 § 81. 1. Some verbs beginning with «, s, o, followed by 
 a single consonant, form the augment of the perfect by pre- 
 fixing the first two letters to the temporal augment. E. g. 
 
 dyslgco perf. qyegy.a, ccy-rjytgy.a 
 
 ogvaoco " cogv^a, og-c6gv%a. 
 
 This kind of augment is called Attic reduplication. 
 Verbs which take the Attic reduplication : dXdcpco, dXico, 
 iXiy/co, eXlaaco, t'fuiico, igsldco, ogeyco, ogvaoco. See also the An- 
 omalous dydgco, uyco, c/.igtco, ANEOSl, dgagloxco, d/sco, eyeigco, 
 iXavvco, EAETOJ1, ENErKSL, E^EOSl, ivdy.co, igdnco, f^w, 
 
 TJfLVCO, oQcO, oXXVfjll, OflVVflL, OflJl, OQVVpi. 
 
 2. The pluperfect in this case takes no additional aug- 
 ment. E. g. uyugw, ayiyytgy.a, dyr t yigxeiv. 
 
 Except cly.ovo), dxTjxoct? rjxyxotiv' zXavvco, (XriXa^iai, TjXrjXdfLirjV. 
 See also the Anomalous EslETOJl. 
 
 Note. The epic poets sometimes omit the augment of the second syllable. 
 See the Anomalous u,xa%{£tvo4, ukccopen, a.^tt^vKu^ ccx^w. 
 
 AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 § 82. 1. Verbs compounded with a preposition 
 receive the augment after that preposition. E. g. 
 
 ngoo-ygdcpco, imperf. ngoo-eygacpov, perf. ngoo-yeygacpa, plu- 
 
 perf. Tigoo-eyeygdcpeiv, aor. Tigoa-iygaipa. 
 ngoo-anico, Tigoo-rjTiTOV, Tigoo-rjcpa, Tigoo-rjcpsiv, Tigoo-Ztyu. 
 
 So ifi-nljitco (§ 12. 1), £v-inuiTOv ' iy-y.givco (§ 12.2), &i- 
 xgwov, ey-xegixa ' ovX-Xvco (§ 12. 3), ovv-sXvov, ovX-XiXvxa' ov- 
 £v(i6co (§ 12. 4), ovv-t'Qiifioov ' tx-Xvco (§ 15. 3\ ($-£Xvov. 
 
SS INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 83. 
 
 KkMARK. Propositions ending in a vowel lose that vowel before the syllabic 
 augment I. (^ 135. 8.) E. g. kicoxo<xrat 9 avcixoTrdv. 
 
 Except srtg/ and tqo. E. g. irigtxotfru, vi^iixoTrov ' vrgokiyw, rgotXsyev. 
 (ibid.) 
 
 Note 1. Some verbs compounded with a preposition take the augment before 
 that preposition. Such are ocfx^tatriricuy uvriGoXia, \(jLiro\a.u y IvoLvrtoopeu. See 
 also the Anomalous a.p(p/tvvvfu, a^-rs^o/, a,va.\t<rxu t avoiycu, a,$in/xi, xa,$i£ofiai 9 
 xa3t(u> t 
 
 Note 2. Some take the augment either before or after the preposition. 
 E. g. T^o^vfAiofjcctiy W^oS-vfjaof&riv or *£o&up.ibfj[,nv* See also the Anomalous 
 
 X*§ivSu. 
 
 Note 3. A few verbs take the augment before and after the preposition at 
 the same time. Such are uvofoow, *hta.ira.a t Stccxoviwp lvo%Xia t orctgotviat. See 
 also the Anomalous ccvukio-xw, ocvi^uy xciS-ypcti. 
 
 2. In verbs compounded with other words the augment 
 stands first. (§ 135.) E. g. 
 
 aoefiiio, rjotfooVf ^as^xt/, derived from aa8/3i]g (w-, gs(jco). 
 
 Note 4. From Wyrorootpiu, derived from ivrorgotyos ('i9nro$, r^i<pu) 9 Ly- 
 curgus forms perf. \<7t<xo-rir^o^xcc for l<7r<xor(w(pvixu,. 
 
 3. Verbs compounded with the particles sv and dva-, if they 
 begin with a, £, o, take the augment after these particles. In 
 all other cases the augment precedes these particles, or, in 
 compounds with tv, it may be omitted (§ 80. N. 4). E. g. 
 
 EVttQSOTZb), FVygsaTSOV, £Vr}p£oT7)X(X 
 dvO(XQ£lJTE(t) 9 dv(J7]QSOTSOV, &V(jr)()£OTr}Xa 
 
 tvdoy,i(xio} 9 rjvdoxl^soVf rjvdoxl^irjxa 
 dvotvxiw, idvoxvxsov, dsdvaiv^xa. 
 
 VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 
 
 § 83. 1. The root of a verb consists of those letters which 
 are found in every part of that verb. It is obtained by drop- 
 ping m of the present active (§§ 94 : 96). E. g. the root of 
 Xi/b) is ley. 
 
 2. The root of a tense consists of those letters which are 
 found in every part of that tense. E. g. zvip is the root of the 
 first future active of tvtitu). 
 
§ 84.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 89 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. * 
 
 § 84. 1. The following table exhibits the terminations of 
 the primary tenses of the indicative. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Pass 
 
 ive and 1 
 
 Middle 
 
 Person. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 S 
 
 ot 
 
 \iai 
 
 oat, at 
 
 xai 
 
 Dual. 
 
 fliV 
 
 TOV 
 
 TOV 
 
 [J.E&OV 
 
 o&ov 
 
 o&ov 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fMEV 
 
 TB 
 
 VOL 
 
 fie&a 
 
 o&e 
 
 VTULh 
 
 2. The following are the terminations of the secondary 
 tenses of the indicative. 
 
 Passive and Middle. 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 fir ( v oo, o to 
 
 [IS&OV O&OV 0&7JV 
 
 ped a o&s vto 
 
 Active. 
 Person. 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 Singular, v g 
 
 Dual. flSV TOV TtjV 
 
 Plural. [i£V T£ GUV, v 
 
 Note 1 . The terminations pi and <ri are found in the indicative of verbs in p t 
 (§ 177). In the greatest number of verbs they are dropped. E. g. rvrrat, 
 vvrru, TiTvfya.) rirutpi, for rucirropi, rvcmri, TiTv^ctpi^ rirvQitrt. 
 
 Note 2. The first aorist active has no termination in the first person singular. 
 
 Note 3. The third person singular of the secondary tenses of the active has 
 no termination. 
 
 Note 4. The termination a-xv is found in the pluperfect. Also in the im- 
 perfect and second aorist of verbs in p t (§ 117). Also in the aorist passive 
 (§ 92^. In all other cases it drops <ra. 
 
 The Alexandrian dialect frequently uses this termination in the imperfect and 
 Second aorist. E. g. <r^a^, \<r^dZ > oira.v for ta-^a^ov ' EAEY0H, tjkS-oo'av 
 for vikS-ov. 
 
 Note 5. The terminations <rai, iro, are found in the perfect and pluperfect 
 passive ('§ 91). Also in verbs in pi (§ 117). In all other cases they drop <r. 
 
 The Alexandrian dialect sometimes uses a-ott in the present passive of verbs in 
 a. E. g. ohvvaa, 2d pers. sing, oduvcinrcii contracted obuvoitrui. 
 
 Note 6. Dialects. The following table exhibits the dia- 
 lectic peculiarities of the indicative mood. 
 
 Active. Sing. 2d pers. Old o&a, ot, for g. The Attic dia- 
 lect uses oda in some instances. 
 
 The old termination oi is found only in 
 the old iool for elg from tlpi, am. 
 3d pers. Doric tX for ot, as dldufu, dldmi for 
 did wot. 
 
 8* 
 
90 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 85. 
 
 Plur. 1st pers. Doric peg for pw, as £qI£w, igi&fieg 
 for €oi£opsv. 
 3d pers. Doric rn for vot y as pox&L£w, pox&l- 
 foiTt for {iox&L£ovgl (that is pox9i£ovoi). 
 
 Passive. Sing. 1st pers. Doric pv for p?jv, as hvuxopav for 
 
 2>wa/. 1st pers. Doric and poetic p£o&ov for ps&ov, as 
 
 Tvnrofiso&ov for Tvmope&ov. 
 Plur. 1st pers. Doric and poetic p£o&a for ^£#«, as 
 TV7iTO[iso&a for Tvnrofis&a. 
 3d pers. Ionic and Epic tffd*, «to, for *!<**, jto. 
 These terminations are found in the per- 
 /k^ and pluperfect passive. Also in the 
 present and imperfect of verbs in pi (§ 117). 
 The termination «to is found also in the 
 imperfect of verbs in a> (§ 85. N. 6). 
 
 § 85. 1. The vowel, which stands between the termination 
 and the root (§§ 83 : 84), is called the connecting vowel. It 
 is an o in the first person of all the numbers, and in the third 
 person plural ; in all the rest it is an s. Except that, 
 
 (1) The connecting vowel of the perfect active, and first 
 aorist active and middle, is an «. But in the third person 
 singular of the perfect and of the first aorist active it is an s. 
 
 (2) The connecting vowel of the pluperfect active is an u. 
 In the third person plural it is an et or s. 
 
 (3) The present and future active lengthen o into w, in the 
 first person singular, and s into u, in the second and third 
 person singular. 
 
 2. The followiug table exhibits the terminations and the 
 connecting vowels united. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pres. fy Fut. Active. 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 
 Pres. 4* 
 1st. 
 
 Fut. Pass. $? Mid. 
 2d. 3d. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 (o ei-g si 
 
 0-\l£V £-X0V C-TOV 
 0-U8V £-T£ OVOi (§ 12 
 
 .5) 
 
 o-p.ai 
 
 0-fi£&OV 
 
 o-p£&a 
 
 £-(Xl, 7], £1 £-TOLl 
 £-G&OV £-O&0V 
 £-0&£ O-VTOLl 
 
 P. 
 
 Imp erf $f 2d A. Act. 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 
 ImpfPass.fyMid. fy 2 A.Mid. 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 
 O-V £-g £ 
 0-p£V £-JOV £-%r\v 
 
 
 o-\xr\v 
 
 O-[i£&0V 
 
 £-0, OV £-TO 
 £-O&0V £-0&7jV 
 
 P. 
 
 0-fl£V 8-TS O-V 
 
 
 o-pe&a 
 
 £-0&£ O-VTO 
 
§ 85.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 91 
 
 First Aorist Active. 
 
 First Aorist Middle. 
 
 P. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 
 1st. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 ct-g 
 
 s 
 
 
 a-fiyv 
 
 a-o, (0 
 
 a-TO 
 
 D. 
 
 a-jusv 
 
 a-TOV 
 
 a-Tr\v 
 
 a-{j.E&ov 
 
 a-a&ov 
 
 a-a&T]V 
 
 P. 
 
 a-fisv 
 
 a-TS 
 
 a-v 
 
 Perfect 
 
 Active. 
 
 a-ode 
 
 Ct-VTO 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1st. 
 
 
 2d. 
 
 
 3d. 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 a 
 
 
 a-g 
 
 
 € 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 a-fisv 
 
 
 Ct-TOV 
 
 a-Tov 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 a-fisv 
 
 
 a-T8 
 Pluperfect Active. 
 
 aoi (§ 12. 
 
 5) 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1st. 
 
 
 2d. 
 
 
 3d. 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 el-v 
 
 
 si-g 
 
 
 El 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 El~[lEV 
 
 
 EL-TOV 
 
 El-TT k V 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 ll-^EV 
 
 
 EL-JE 
 
 Ei-oav, E-oav 
 
 Remark 1. For the terminations of the first and third jyerson singular of 
 the active, see above (§ 84. N. 1, 2, 3). 
 
 Remark 2. The endings tut, to, ao, of the second person singular of the 
 passive and middle, are contracted into * or u, ov, u, respectively. In Attic 
 authors, u is more common than in. 
 
 Note 1. In some instances the third person plural of the perfect active 
 takes a.v for ccai. E. g. yiyvuffxu, tyveoxav. 
 
 Note 2. In the Alexandrian dialect the second aorist active and middle often 
 takes the connecting vowel a of the first aorist. E. g. EIAH, uoec for ulov ' 
 <ptuyeo, tQvyav for ityvyov * tv^'urxu, tugctf&nv for tugc/aw. 
 
 On the other hand, the first aorist active and middle, in some instances, takes 
 the connecting vowels {o, i) of the second aorist. See the Anomalous fiatvcj, 
 duuy ixAofAai. 
 
 Note 3. The Doric dialect uses the short connecting 
 vowel e in the second person singular of the present active. 
 E. g. cf^iElyco, a^iU'/Eg for a^ilyEig. 
 
 Note 4. The Epic and the Ionic dialect have, in the singular 
 of the pluperfect active, ev, sag, ee, for eiv, sig, si. E. g. ^amu, 
 EXE/ipta, E'/.yrjVEag, exe/)]vee. 
 
 The Attics contract these endings into r\, r t g, rj. 
 
 In some instances the ending ee of the third person singular 
 takes v movable before a vowel. See the Anomalous EldSl. 
 
 Note 5. In the imperfect and aorist active, the Epic and the 
 Doric dialect often use the endings axov, oxEg, oxe, plur. 
 
W INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 86. 
 
 oxoutr, oxsts, (jxor. In the imperfect passive and aorist middle 
 they often use the endings oxoptp', oxto, axfro, plur. oxofie&ot, 
 
 (JXf(Jt>f, OXOJTO. 
 
 In the imperfect and second aorist of niftffc and liquid verbs, 
 an £ stands between these endings and the root. E. g. 
 
 rVTrrtaxofj TvntEax6^r]v for hvnjov, trvnionqv 
 
 TVJieoxor, iVTisoxopipr t( etvnov, eivnoprjV. 
 
 In the imperfect ot pure verbs these endings are very seldom 
 
 preceded by s. 
 
 In the ^rsf aorist active and middle an a stands between 
 these endings and the root. E. g. 
 
 Tvtptxisxov, TVipaax6p.i]v for Irvipa, tTvipoc^Tjv. 
 
 In some instances the imperfect also prefixes an « to these 
 endings. E. g. x^i'titw, aQvnxaaxov for txQvmov. 
 
 Notc 6. The Ionic dialect uses the termination aro in the 
 imperfect passive ; in which case the connecting vowel be- 
 comes f. E. g. yoacpw, iyoacplttjo for eyottcporxo. In pure 
 verbs the connecting vowel is omitted before aro. E. g. /i?}- 
 %aveofiixi, tp.i]y w aviaio. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 § 8G. 1. The subjunctive mood uses the terminations of 
 the primary tenses of the indicative (§ 84. 1). 
 
 2. Its connecting vowels are w and ?;. But the second and 
 third person singular active have ?/. 
 
 3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
 connecting vowels united. 
 
 Passive and Middle. 
 2d. 3d. 
 
 y-cu, rj t]-Tdi 
 r r odov y-a&ov 
 y-o&e co-vial 
 
 Remark. The ending >?a/ in the second person singular of the passive and 
 middle is contracted into *?. 
 
 Note 1 . The perfect of the subjunctive active is sometimes formed by means 
 of the perfect active participle and t)fi\. E. g. nruQu; (v7cc } og) a, %s, ?, for 
 riruQWf tig* y> 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 
 Pas. 
 
 P. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2d. 3d. 
 
 
 
 1st. 
 
 s. 
 
 0) 
 
 V J S V 
 
 
 
 ix)-[iai 
 
 D. 
 
 W-//5V 
 
 r r iov r)-TOV 
 
 
 
 C0-,U£#OV 
 
 P. 
 
 03-fXZV 
 
 1]-TE WOl (§ 
 
 12. 
 
 5) 
 
 co-fieda 
 
§87.] 
 
 VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 
 
 93 
 
 Note 2. The Epic language often uses copt,, r,o&a t yoi, for 
 (o, gg y y. (§ 84. N. 6.) E. g. Tvxwfii, Ti/r t a&vi t tizjjoi, for Tt>x<o, 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the Epic language uses the connecting 
 vowels (o, e) of the indicative. E. g. eqvxco, (p&lco, subj. igv- 
 £opev, y&lsiou, for igv^eofiEV, cp&ir^ai. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 § 87. 1. The optative mood uses the terminations of the 
 secondary tenses of the indicative (§ 84. 2). 
 
 But the first person singular of the optative active takes 
 fii (§ 84. 1) ; and the third person plural ends in ev. 
 
 2. For its connecting vowel it has oi. But in the first 
 aorist active and middle it has ai. 
 
 3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
 connecting vowels united. 
 
 P. 
 
 8. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 P. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 1st. 
 
 01- fLl 
 
 OL-flEV 
 
 Ol-flSV 
 
 Active. 
 2d. 
 
 oi-g 
 
 Ol-TOV 
 OL-TE 
 
 3d. 
 
 01 
 
 oi-Trfi 
 ol-ev 
 
 First Aorist Active. 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 ai-fisv 
 
 c(L-g ai 
 ui-tov ai-xriv 
 ttl-TE ai-sv 
 
 Passive and Middle, 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 Ol-fiTJV Ot-0 OL-TO 
 
 OL-fXE&OV OL-O&OV OL-G&f}V 
 
 Ol-^LE&U OL-O&E OL-VIO 
 
 First Aorist Middle. 
 1st. 2d. 3d. 
 
 ai-firjV ai-o ou-to 
 
 ai-fit&ov ul-o&ov ai-G&rp 
 ai-ps&a (xi-ods ai-vio 
 
 Note 1. The perfect of the optative active is sometimes formed by means of 
 the perfect active participle and up*. E. g. Tzrv(pu>s {via, os) tlnv, tins, un> for 
 
 T6TV<p0tfitly 01$, ot. 
 
 Note 2. In many instances, particularly in contract verbs, 
 the optative active takes the endings afyv, olr^, olrj, dual oltjtov, 
 ol^ttjv, plural oItj^ev, oItjte, oi^aav. E. g. cpEvyco, ntcpEvyolrjv for 
 
 7lEq)EVyOl}IL. 
 
 Note 3. The first aorist active in the optative has also the 
 endings ekx, eivc, ele, dual e/utov, Eidrrjv, plural Eia[iEv t EiarE, emxv. 
 E. g. tvtttu), TvifjEia for jvipai^L. The second and third person 
 
94 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 K 
 
 singular, and the third person plural, of this form, are more 
 common than the corresponding persons of the regular form. 
 These endings are said to belong to the iEolic dialect. 
 
 Note 4. In the Epic language the third person 'plural of 
 the optative passive and middle often takes the termination aro 
 (§ 84. N. 6). E. g. aodopcti, (X(j1]0(xI(xto for agyouuvTO. 
 
 Note 5. In some instances the second person singular of 
 the optative active takes the termination o&a (§ 84. N. 6). 
 E. g. xXalh), xlaloio&ct for y.laloig. 
 
 Note 6. The Alexandrian dialect uses, in the third person 
 plural, oioav, aioar, for our, aier, (§ 84. N. 4.) E. g. xvmco, 
 Tvyoiaav, Tvyouoar, for jyjioiev, tvipauv. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 § 8 8. 1. The following are the terminations of the impera- 
 tive mood. 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Passive and Middle. 
 
 P. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 s. 
 
 $X 
 
 TO) 
 
 
 00, 
 
 odtO 
 
 D. 
 
 TOV 
 
 TMV 
 
 
 o&ov 
 
 c&wv 
 
 P. 
 
 T£ 
 
 Twoav, 
 
 TTbJV 
 
 ode 
 
 odcuoav, o&(ov 
 
 Note 1 . The terminations 9-/, <ro, are used when the connecting vowel is 
 dropped '§§ 91. N. 6, 7 : 117). But when the connecting vowel is used, 
 9-/ is dropped, and <ro becomes a. 
 
 2. The connecting vowel of the imperative is an s. 
 
 But in the first a ovist active and middle it is an a. In the 
 second person singular, however, the first aorist active ends in 
 ov, and the first aorist middle in ai. 
 
 The termination vrwv is preceded by o. But in the first 
 aorist active it is preceded by «. 
 
 3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
 connecting vowels united. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 
 Passive. 
 
 P. 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 8. s 
 
 s-tco 
 
 
 £-0, OV 
 
 e-o&co 
 
 D. S-TOV 
 
 S-TCOV 
 
 
 e-o&ov 
 
 E-O&WV 
 
 P. e-xs 
 
 e-Ttaoccpf 
 
 0-VTCOV 
 
 s-o&s 
 
 e-o&woav, s-o&tov 
 
§89.] 
 
 VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 
 
 95 
 
 
 First Aorist Active. 
 
 
 first Jlorist Middle. 
 
 P. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 s. 
 
 ov 
 
 a-TW 
 
 
 at 
 
 a-a&co 
 
 D. 
 
 a-TOV 
 
 0t-T(OV 
 
 
 u-o&ov 
 
 a-a&cov 
 
 P. 
 
 a-rs 
 
 a-r coo ccv, a- 
 
 ■VTWV 
 
 a-G&s 
 
 ol-g&woov, a-o$(ov 
 
 Note 2. The ending so of the second person singular of the passive and 
 middle is contracted into ov. 
 
 Note 3. In some instances, the first aorist takes the connecting vowel t of 
 the second aorist. See the Anomalous iLyco, AEXH, OIH bring. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 § 89. 1. The terminations of the infinitive mood are the 
 following. 
 
 Active. 
 Present, Future, 2 Aor. 
 Perfect 
 
 Passive and Middle. 
 All tenses, except Aorist Pas- 
 sive (§ 92), G&ai 
 
 2. For the connecting vowel, the present, future, and second 
 aorist, active, have an si. In the first aorist middle the con- 
 necting vowel is an a. In all the other tenses it is an s. 
 
 But the first aorist active infinitive ends in at. 
 
 3. The following table exhibits the terminations and the 
 connecting vowels united. 
 
 Active. 
 Pres., Fut., 2 Aor. si-v 
 
 Perf. s-vcu 
 
 Passive and Middle. 
 Pres., Fut., 2 A. Mid. s-g&cu 
 1 Aor. Mid. a-o&oct 
 
 For the perfect and aorist passive, infinitive, see below 
 
 m 91 : 92 )- 
 
 Note 1. The termination of the infinitive active in the Epic 
 language is ptvat or ^v, which is always preceded by the con- 
 necting vowel s. E. g. nivoj, mv£[izvai or mvsfiev for nivuv. 
 
 Note 2. In the infinitive active, the Doric has zv or r\v for 
 siv. E. g. /?o'o"xw, fioGxsv for fiooxuv* xaiQtt, %aiQr}v for xalgsiv. 
 
 Note 3. The Ionians change up of the second aorist active 
 into isiv. E. g. /fo'AAw, fiaUeiv for faluv. 
 
96 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§90,91. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 § 90. 1. The root of the present , future, and second 
 aorist, active, participle, is formed by annexing ovx to the root 
 of the tense (§ 83. 2). E. g. 
 
 Present, tvtttwv, Tvm-ovT-og, (§ 36. 3, R. 1) 
 
 Future 1. xvywv, rvip-ovx-og, (ibid.) 
 
 Future 2. xvnhov, xvni-ovx-og, (ibid.) 
 
 Aorist 2. Tvntov, xvn-ovx-og, (ibid.) 
 
 The first aorist active annexes avx to the root of the tense. 
 
 E. g. XVlfJOLQ, xvip-nvx-og, (§ 36. 2.) 
 
 The perfect active annexes or. E. g. xsxvcpwg, xsxvcp-ox-og, 
 (§ 36. 2.) 
 
 Note. The iEolic dialect uses aig, aioa, in the first aorist 
 active participle, for ag, aoa. E. g. dioxiia, dio^oaig for 
 dtffxmoag* 
 
 2. The participle in the passive and middle ends in ofievog. 
 But in the first aorist middle it ends in dpevog. E. g. xvnxo), 
 TVTiTOfierog, xvipdjiisvog, (§ 49. 1.) 
 
 For the perfect and aorist passive participle, see below 
 (§§ 91 : 92). 
 
 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE AND 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 §91. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive and middle 
 have no connecting vowel (§ 85. 1). E. g. nava, 
 
 Perfect. 
 Indic. S. ninav-^iai, ninav-oai, ninav-xm, D. Ttsnotv^s&ov, 
 
 nsTiocv-G&ov, ninav-o&ov, P, ninav-iiz&a, nsnav-o&e, Tie- 
 
 nav-vxai. 
 Subj. and Opt., see below (§ 91. 3, 4, 5). 
 Imperat. S. ninav-oo, ntTtav-o&to, D. Txsnav-o&ov, nsTtav- 
 
 o&oov, P. 7i£nav-o&e, neTiav-o&cooctv. 
 Ixfin. 7iB7iav-o&au 
 Part, ntnuv-nivog, r\, ov. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 S. insnav-firiv, ininav-Go, ininav-xo, D. inenDiV-fis&ov, 
 tntnuv-odov, ininav-od^^v, P. e7iE7iav-ixs&ix, ininav- 
 oOe, ininav-VTO. 
 
§ 91.] VERBAL ROOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 97 
 
 2. In mute and liquid verbs, the third person plural of the 
 perfect and pluperfect passive is formed by means of the per- 
 fect passive participle and slot, i]aar 3 from slpl. E. g. zvnxw, 
 
 Perf. 3d plur. zezv/jfisroL (at, a) uol, for zizvn-vzai. 
 PI up. 3d plur. izzvy{.izroi (at, a) ?]aco', for iiizvn-vzo. 
 
 Note 1. The Epic language in a few instances drops <r of the termination 
 cm, E. g. fixkXu, perf. pas. pifiXn/xcci, fii(h\r>cti for fii(Zkti<rcti. 
 
 Note 2. The Epic and Ionic dialects form the third person 
 plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive by annexing azou, 
 azo, to the root of the verb. (§ 84. N. 6.) E. g. cpduyw, 
 
 Perf. 3d plur. tyduqaxai for iopd-aq^iroL uol 
 Plup. 3d plur. iqpdaQaio for eXpfraopiroL rjoctv. 
 
 (1) //is commonly changed into £ before araz, aTo. E. g. 
 olxtw, olxiazai, oixsuzo, for ojy.r t iTai, wxijito. 
 
 (2) The consonants tt, /J, x, /, are generally changed into 
 their corresponding rough ones (9,^), before azou, azo. E. g. 
 Xiya), itXfZ&jett, kele/azo. 
 
 (3) Z becomes <5 before aiat, aro. E. g. aywvl^w, aymldazai, 
 ri/tovidoiio. 
 
 3. The perfect passive subjunctive and optative is formed 
 by means of the perfect passive participle and slpl. E. g. 
 
 Perf. Subj. TSTVfifiivog (r), or) a), fig, fi, r]zov, a) ft si', fjze, ojiji. 
 Perf. Opt. tszvfjfiirog {r t , or) s\r t r, sh]g, sir], si'rjzor, siijjijv, sYrj- 
 
 flSf, ffcTyTf, U)](JUr. 
 
 4. The perfect passive subjunctive of verbs in am, sm, and 
 o(a, is, in a few instances, formed by prefixing the augment of 
 the perfect to the contracted present subjunctive (§ 116). 
 In this instance as are contracted into 77. E. g. xzaopai, 
 
 Perf. Subj. xsy.zolfiai, ?/, rjzai, (ops&ov, r,o&ov, wfisda, rjo&s, 
 ojrzai. 
 
 5. The perfect passive optative of verbs in aco, too, and ow, 
 is, in a few instances, formed by dropping fiat of the perfect 
 passive indicative, and successively annexing the regular ter- 
 minations of the optative passive (§ 87. 1 ) preceded by t. E. g. 
 xzaofiai, xixzr^ai, 
 
 Perf. Opt. y.sy.zfifiriV ', f t o, jJto, f^is&ov, fio&ov, ijO&yv, rjfis&a, 
 
 f t O&£, ])VZO. 
 
 9 
 
( JS INFLECTION or words. [§91. 
 
 Note 3. These two verbs, xrdi/ueti and fjuitwK.*, form the perfect middle 
 optative also by prefixing the reduplication to the contracted present middle 
 optative. Thus, xixr^unv, £>o y <uto, &c, ju.i/xvto/u.r>v t £«, uTo y &c. 
 
 y\iuvr,<rxa> often changes w into ot, in the perfect middle optative. Thus, 
 fit/utnur.Vs 010, etro, iSiC. 
 
 In the Ionic and the Epic dialect these verbs change ay into e&>, in the perfect 
 
 middle optative. E. g. K-EKrtn/uLrjv, ptjUVicoftWy for KiKToipriv, f*t/xvcyiu.t)v. 
 
 Note 4. Avv is perhaps the only verb in vco, which forms the perfect passive 
 optative after the analogy of verbs in uu, ieo y o&j, § 91. .5.) Thus, Xva, Xs- 
 Xvuai, XiXi{*v)v t vo t uro, &c, or, more analogically, XiXvif/yv, vTo, v7<ro, &c. 
 
 Note 5. In the perfect passive subjunctive and optative of verbs in ctu, tea, 
 coj, uco, § 91. 4, 5, N. 4, some grammarians place the accent on the ante- 
 penult, if the last syllable permits it (§ 20 . E. g. they write xixTypm, 
 
 xixryo. 
 
 Note 6. In some instances the second perfect active drops the connect- 
 ing vowel in the dual and plural of the indicative, and throughout the impera- 
 tive. In this case, the second pluperiect follows the analogy of the second 
 perfect. See avuyu, AKI11, Xyti^oa, EIAfl, iUu, EAET0H, xg&£ea, 
 vraaxu, -rtiS-co, in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Note 7. The second perfect active of a few pure verbs 
 in ao), *«, is syncopated (§ 91. N. 6.) in the dual and plural of 
 the indicative, throughout the imperative, and in the infinitive. 
 In the subjunctive and optative it follows the analogy of verbs 
 in ui (§ 117). In the participle it is contracted. E. g. from 
 BASl, 
 
 Perfect 2. 
 
 Indic S. (Sifictn, pipitag, ftifttitf D. /St^apsv, ftifiatov, ^s^aiov, 
 
 P. fitfttxutv, fitfiaTS, ptpuoi(r). 
 Subj. S p^M, pi/jjig, P^Pf h D. fopwpsv, pep^xov, foPnjov, 
 
 P. fitfitoUtV, fitftfjTS, ptpO)Ol(v). 
 
 Opt. S. (jfftulrtv, pffinltfc, fttfifxirj, D. /3?Piy.l?]{isv } Ptftalrjiov, 
 
 (jtfjairjxrjV, P. psPalt^Fv, pepuUjTF, ptpalr^av. 
 Imper. S. pifta&i (§ 88. N. I), ^/Sw'zw, D. pifiatov, fopdnov, 
 
 P. fisftuTF, pFpUZUHSCtV. 
 
 Infin. feftixvou. 
 
 Part. /5f/J«wV» /fo/W<m (sometimes fe/Havla), fopaoc, G. /?«- 
 ftuoiog, contracted p^p^g, pepcoaa, ptpug, G. ptpwiog. 
 
 Pluperfect 2. 
 S. iptpchiv, tP^Pafig, ?/?£/?««, D. fpspa^iev, ipipajov, ipz- 
 puTyv, P. epepuptr, dptpare, Iptpuaav. 
 
 Note 8. The singular of the second perfect and second 
 pluperfect of verbs in «w, em, is not used in the indicative. 
 
§ 92.] VERBAL HOOTS AND TERMINATIONS. 99 
 
 Note 9. The feminine participle of verbs in aw generally 
 ends in oa, in the second perfect, its uncontracted form is 
 not used. 
 
 Note 10. The accent of the third person plural of the 
 indicative (§ 91. N. 7) is placed on the penult, contrary to the 
 general rule (§ 93. 1). 
 
 AORIST PASSIVE. 
 
 § 92. 1. The root of the first aorist passive is formed by 
 annexing &e or dri to the root of the verb. (§ S3. 2.) 
 
 The root of the second aorist passive is formed by annexing 
 s or ?;. (ibid.) 
 
 2. The aorist passive uses the terminations of the active 
 voice, and, in its inflection,' follows the analogy of the second 
 aorist active {M&tjv) of li^r^i (§ 1 17) ; except that all the reg- 
 ular terminations of the indicative, imperative, and infinitive 
 are preceded by rj. E. g. tvtitoh, 
 
 Aorist 1. 
 Indic S. sTiy&rjV, yg t rj, D. Tj/usr, r\xov, yrrjv, P. frixp&rjpev, 
 7?T£, ijoav. 
 
 Subj. S. tvty&iw, sijq, stj, D. toippv, ir\iov, ir\xov, P. i(xtp.tv, 
 srjTe, iwvi, contracted xvcp&w, jjg, jj, wp.ev, r\xov, rjiov, cofxev, 
 rjre, wui. 
 
 Opt. S. ivcpfrdr]v, tlrjg, elrj, D. tlrjfitv, ur^ov, w{]Tr\v, P. elrjpsv, 
 *//,Tf, flrjaav. 
 
 The syncopated endings el^sv, firs, elsv, (see the par- 
 adigm,) are more common than the regular ones. 
 
 IMPERAT. S. TVCpdrjTt (§ 14. N. 4), ^TW, D. fjTOV, fiTWV, P. 
 
 ?/Tf, i)xbnsav or ivrtfly. 
 Infin. Tvy&rjvai. 
 Part, jvy&elg, noa, iv, G. tvrog. 
 Aorist 2. 
 izv7ir]v, throughout like Aorist 1. 
 
 Note 1 . The Epic language often changes yio-xv of the third person plural 
 of the indicative into tv. E. g. xorfAiw, Ko<r/x*}B-iv for lxo(r/xr,B-riira,v. i§ 1 17. N. 17.) 
 
 Note ST. The Epic language often changes e in the uncontracted subjunctive 
 into u. E g. <rv<p§i'iu for rv(p§i&. (§ 117. N. 17.) 
 
 Note 3. The Epic language often takes ftzvat or ftzv for vat, in the infinitive. 
 
 E. g. <rv<pS-r,/u.tv(Zi or TtxpS^asv for ru<pS-ijvxt. ($ 89. N. 1.) 
 
 Note 4. The Epic language, in some instances, drops the connecting vowels 
 in the second aorist middle. See the Anomalous uXXefteti, ccou^'ktkoo, yi- 
 yvofjceciy Vi^o/uaiy 'EA.H, Xtyat, AEX.Q, fi'tyvvui, ogvupt, vrifftu. 
 
100 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§93. 
 
 ACCENT OF VERBS. 
 
 §93. 1. In polysyllabic forms the accent is placed on 
 the antepenult, if the last syllable permits it (§ 20) ; if not, it 
 is placed on the penult. E. g. 
 
 Tvnjo(xiVy liivcpu ' (Ttti'MiTjv, iivqp&r^. 
 
 Compound verbs are not excepted. E. g. iwayv, arays. 
 
 2. In dissyllabic forms the accent is placed on the penult. 
 E.g. 
 
 TVJTTOi), Tl'TlTSig. 
 
 3. The perfect active infinitive, the first aorist active infini- 
 tive, the perfect passive infinitive and participle, and the 
 second aorist middle infinitive, take the accent on the penult. 
 E. g. 
 
 TETVopivcti, cpdijoai, TSivcp&ca, imtflfiivog, TVJieo&ou. 
 
 Also the Epic infinitive in psv. E. g. 7r/*w, mvtptv. 
 
 Note 1. In the Epic language, the perfect passive infinitive and participle, 
 in some instances, take the accent on the antepenult. See ihe Anomalous 
 etXcicfiai, aXtroclyu, u%iu, 'JEil seat. 
 
 4. The second aorist active infinitive and participle, and the 
 perfect active participle, take the accent on the last syllable. 
 E.g. V '•; 
 
 TVTielv, TV7HOV, xtivcpwq. 
 
 Note 2. The verbs EIAH, Einn, EAET0H, i^'rx*, x«,w£av», in the 
 second person singular of the second aorist active imperative, take the acute 
 on the last syllable. In composition, however, they follow the general rule 
 (§ 93. 1). See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 5. The second person singular of the second aorist middle 
 imperative usually takes the circumflex on the last syllable. 
 
 E. g. TI/7ITW, TVTIOV. 
 
 6. In compound verbs the accent cannot go farther back 
 than the augment. E. g. tiqog^o), nooau/ov not 7tq6u£i%ov. 
 
 Note 3. In verbs compounded with a preposition, the ac- 
 cent is placed on that preposition when the augment is omitted. 
 (§ 78. N. 3.) E. g. ejjqiulvb), tfjupvuvov for tviipuiror. 
 
 Note 4. When the augment, upon which the accent would 
 have been placed (§ 93. 1), is omitted (§ 78. N. 3), the accent 
 is placed on the penult. E. g. nlnxo), nlms for tntnie. 
 
§§ 94, 95.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES. 101 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES, . 
 
 PRESENT ACTIVE. 
 
 § 94. 1. The present active indicative is the 
 source from which all the other tenses are derived. 
 
 2. Verbs are divided into pure verbs, mute verbs, and liquid 
 verbs, according as the letter before co is a vowel, a mute (n, 
 
 & <i>' *> / ; x' T > <$> #> a * so ?)» or a figuid (X, p, v, q). E. g. 
 
 Tificco), (piUb), are pure verbs ; Xtlnco, nXiv.io, are mute verbs ; 
 fiekw, r^uM, are liquid verbs. 
 
 Note. 1. These statements apply also to deponent verbs (§ 208 \ as such 
 verbs are supposed to have been derived from a corresponding active voice. 
 E. g. ctoviopcci, a pure verb ; Vi%ofAou, a mute verb ; ftufioptas, a liquid verb. 
 
 Note 2. The title, " Formation of the tenses," relates 
 only to ike first person singular of the tenses of the indicative. 
 For the inflection of the tenses in the other moods, see above 
 
 (§§83-92). 
 
 ^ 95. The penult of a pure verb (§ 94. 2), if 
 short, is lengthened in the perfect, pluperfect, future, 
 and aorist. A 9 in the penult, when it is not pre- 
 ceded by f, *, or q, is changed into y. 
 
 For examples, see below, 
 
 Remark. This rule does not apply to the second perfect, 
 second pluperfect, second future, and second aorist. 
 
 Note 1. Some pure verbs retain the short vowel through all 
 the tenses. Such are aldiapou, dxiopou, cejUVj dvvm, doxsco, 
 aooco, ccqvui, ytiuM, f/zsw, &Xaoi, xotsco, psfrvai, rsixito, leoi, 7ttvco, 
 andbj, ruri'M, TfXsw, to sot, /(/.XtiO). See also the Anomalous aya- 
 ficti, aX£oin</.i, dficpienvui, «of/o/axo>, aoioxw, data) divide, duuaw, 
 daxioyai, daaraj, iXavrw, ivtvpr, fo«o>, ead-ico, itjfu, iXdaxofiai, 
 y.aXbw, xXuoi break, jiaioptu, fie&vcj, valco, ofivvpi, ONSIMI, net- 
 liopcu, neiarrvfii, uxeddnvfii* 
 
 Note 2. The quantity of the penult of some pure verbs is 
 variable. See the Anomalous nivew, algiou dxir/i^w, ftiuvca, 
 yauzco, did) bind, dldu^^i, dvr<i[i<u, duco, egva), ivglaxui, S^vto, 
 Xotiiul, i\j/o), y.ogsrrvjAL, xofparvvfii, Xvm, ya'r/ouai, vefxta, o£g), 
 nlXvrjfii, n^ungijui, nirco, tiltttu), Tio&dw, PESl, ofiivvvp.i x qtsqscj, 
 OTOQevpvpi, TL&ijfAi, (py^l, cp&drco. 
 
 Note 3. X««a> changes a into >j, contrary to the rule. E. g. xi** 6 ** Xi*~ 
 crsficct. — ' Ax^adofAxi does not change a into «, as «K^oaffofiea. 
 
 9* 
 
102 l.MLr.rrioN or words. [^ 06. 
 
 Note 4. T&n/ut lengthen* i into u in the perfect active and passive. See 
 in the catalogue of Anomalous Vet DC 
 
 § 96. The present in actual use is not always the foundation 
 upon winch the other parts of the verb rest. Many verbs have, 
 or are supposed to have, more than one present. In order there- 
 fore to be able to ascertain the original or simple present, the 
 learner must become acquainted with the methods by which 
 new presents may be derived from a given present. These 
 methods are exhibited in the following paragraphs. 
 
 1. Some verbs beginning with a consonant, followed by a 
 vowel or a liquid, prefix that consonant together with t. E. g. 
 
 didoat from JOIi 
 TtTOcew " 1PASL. 
 A few verbs beginning with or, a/, xrr, prefix I. E. g. 
 Iotixco from 2TA&. Also the verb c ESl, thus, Uw. 
 
 Note 1. A few take the Attic reduplication, but without 
 the augment of the second syllable (§ 80. 1.) E. g. AVAPSl 
 from uyix). 
 
 Note 2. The Attic reduplication of ovivvpt from ON AH, and the prefix of 
 fittifjtau from pauy are anomalous. 
 
 2. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a labial (n, /?, op), 
 drop co and annex tw. E. g. 
 
 TVTiTfo from TTllfL 
 XQvmta " KPTBJl, (§ 7) 
 (tin™ " c Pld>fL, (ibid.) 
 
 So ixTiTb) (qp), Punxia (qp), ftXdnTat (/3), 5 yv tit at (qp), xrumat {(f)), 
 xrQVTiTat (qp), xuXvTttw (/?), xleJiTO) (71), xo7itcu (ji), vlma) (/5), 
 Q(X7iT(tt (qp), axuTiia) (qp). 
 
 Hence it appears, that the root of the simple present of 
 verbs in 7ttw ends in a labial ; generally in n. 
 
 3. Many verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (x, y, %), 
 or lingual (t, d, &), drop w with the preceding consonant, and 
 annex ooat. E. g. 
 
 cpoLoaa} from &PTKJI rdaoay from TATSl 
 
 nouoaa) " IIP4PJI fiUaaat " ByllTJl 
 
 p/juiia) M B1IXSI xoyixjoat " KOPTOJl. 
 
 So //A>UitftfG> (/), ^Qfiaaai (t), iQSUoat (t), ifjaaaat (t), x^oiWw 
 (x), UaoopM (t), pixkixaoa) (x), ntxaaat (t), nldooat (&), tocquogm 
 (#), (pvXuooa) (x). 
 
§ 9G.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 103 
 
 Hence it appears, that the simple present of verbs in aaco 
 ends either in a palatal or in a lingual ; generally in y or d. 
 
 Note 3. Tlxru is formed from TEKH by changing i into i and annexing 
 r to the root. § 96. 16.; 
 
 Note 4. The last syllable of the simple present of a<pva-<raf and vacrcru is either 
 yu or *&ci>. 
 
 4. Some verbs, of which the root ends in a palatal (*, y, %), 
 or lingual (7, d, «4), drop w with the preceding consonant, and 
 annex £o>. E. g. 
 
 xorr£w from KPATSl OTafr from 2TATJI 
 
 So I'^ouiu (<5), fjaoTi^w (/), ol[A(x)'£cx) (y), ot^qiQu) (y) 9 o"t/Jw (/), 
 <rqp?j£co (^), t^'^w (/). 
 
 Note 5. In most cases presents in got, especially in po/y- 
 syllabic verbs, are considered simple. E. g. ilni'iw, ^oiq'^cj. 
 
 Note 6. The last syllable of the simple present of a£<ra£«, $uffru£w t vvo-rd- 
 £a/, vrai^Wy ffaXTi^a), is either yu or So;. 
 
 Note 7. Some verbs have <t<tcj or £* in the present. Such are <r<pdff<rcj or 
 g-Qeigeo from S^ATH, cc^o^u or u.ofjLouau) from 'APMOAH. 
 
 5. Some verbs annex y to the last letter of the root. E. g. 
 ts^ivcj from t^w, 7mVw from lilJl. 
 
 6. Many verbs insert v before the last letter of the root. 
 E.g. 
 
 XAN/ISL from XAASL 
 
 AAMBSl " jtABSLi (§ 12. 1) 
 
 ENEr&Jl " J.IY^/OZ, ($ 12. 2) 
 flallta " BAyJJl, (§ 12 3.) 
 
 Here belong all verbs in Ma and ^w, and some in yyw, as 
 
 7. Some verbs annex avco or uivto to the root. E. g. au|«Vw 
 from »?|oi, chufrulia) or ohodtlvia from OslISOSl. 
 
 Some annex genu to, and insert y before the last conso- 
 nant of the root. E. g. 
 
 (jmfrurw from MA OH 
 
 Upfrivm " A A nil, (12. 1) 
 
 jvyzi'trM " TTXSl, (§ 12. 2.) 
 
 8. Some annex o-*o> or ioxw to the root. E. g. y^gdaxo) 
 from yrtouti), xvloxoa from xt'w. 
 
104 lMlIiTIOX OF WORDS. [§96. 
 
 Sometime* the vowel before oxlo is lengthened. E. g. 
 &yj-oxio from (-)y Ul. 
 
 9. Some annex wvm to the root. In pure verbs this ending 
 very often doubles the v. E. g. 
 
 dttxrwa from dKTKSl 
 a^ni'w " 2: BE ft. 
 
 Sometimes the vowel preceding this ending is lengthened. 
 E. g. ^wjji'w irom ^o'co. 
 
 10. New presents are very often formed by annexing aco, 
 «co, oo), or v(o, to the root of a verb. E. g. 
 
 QL711 EM frO m (J /tttw 
 
 OMOSL " 0.1/J2 
 
 11. New presents are formed by changing « of the perfect 
 into co. E. g. 
 
 qri'co, perfect nicpvy.a, new present Titcpvy.w. 
 
 12. Sometimes the sound of the present is strengthened by 
 the endings u#o>, *#o>, utfio. E. g: diojxix&o) from <5iCo'xco, qtlsyi- 
 &w from q ley co, y&irvdco from cpfrlrw. 
 
 Note 8. "E<r3« comes from ££4/ by annexing S-/y to the root j thus t2-$a>, 
 ir-3-o>, v§ 10. 3.; 'E^S-i'o; is immediately derived from 'irS-w. 
 
 13. Many presents are formed from dissyllabic presents, 
 which have f in the penult, by changing the 1 into o and annex- 
 ing *co. E. g. TToofrtw from 7ie<)d oj. 
 
 Or by changing t into co and annexing aco. E. g. orgoycxu) 
 from 0T££cpa>. 
 
 Note 9. TLirof4.xi gives vorioficti, vrordopeu, and Turdtpat. 
 
 14. A few verbs insert 0* before the last consonant of the 
 root. E. g. juwj/w from MlVJl. 
 
 Note 10. Ai$ar*<y comes from AIAAXfl by changing % into * after the 9. 
 Tldffxu is formed from nA0fl by inserting a before S-, and changing S> 
 into^. 
 
 15. A few r verbs annex rjco to the root. E. g. av$ta from 
 ATFJl, ULin. from ULT.Q.. (§§ 9. 2 : 10. 2.) 
 
 16. A few change f into /. E. g. 7imco from IlETfL, oxl- 
 dvTjftt, from 2QEJASI. (§ 96. 5.) 
 
§ 97.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 105 
 
 Note 11. All the tenses of verbs in two, vow, £w (§ 96. 4), 
 rw (§ 96. 5), kXtoj q$o)j avm or airw (§ 96. 7), axb), ioymi, vv(0, 
 a&w, £da>, t/#w, Sa (§ 96. 15), except the imperfect, generally 
 come either from the simple present, or from a new present in 
 ea (§96. 10), or from both. 
 
 17. In dissyllabic verbs the radical vowel is sometimes 
 placed after the last consonant of the root. (§ 26. 2.) E. g. 
 
 ONAJl from OANJ1 
 TMESl " t5>oj 
 QPOSl " OOPJl. 
 
 18. In many instances, the penult of the original present is 
 lengthened : 
 
 a becomes r\ or ai ' as AABJ1, ATIBSl ' VANSt, qxxlrco. 
 
 X — a, and, before a liquid, I • asEPIIISL, {(jutim' KPINJI, 
 
 s — 8i (rarely ?;) ; as ZflEPfL, ontlqw. 
 o — ov ' as AKOJly axovto. 
 
 v — sv, and, before a liquid, v ' as ftrril, cptvyco ' AIZXTNSL, 
 aio'/vnx). 
 
 On the other hand, at is shortened into a f a into T or s, 
 iv into v, 77 into a (rarely into f), I into £, ov into 0, iJ into v. 
 
 Note 12. Sometimes ev in the penult is shortened into s. 
 See the Anomalous aXioftctt, Otto run, nltta, nvaot, (jtw flow, ^eca. 
 
 Note 1 3. 'Ex* vie* comes from Ikda by lengthening a. into aw, and annexing 
 9 to the rcot. (§ 96. 5.) 
 
 19. The radical vowel is often either *, «, or o (rarely oj).- 
 This takes place chiefly in dissyllabic verbs. (§ 2. N. 3.) E. g. 
 2LLEPJI, JSiiyUPJl, 2110PJ2. 
 
 Note 14. In some instances the diphthongs si and tv are 
 changed into 01 and ou respectively. See the Anomalous AEISl, 
 EIAJl, ei'xojy EAETOJl % ntldw. 
 
 IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 ^97. To form the imperfect active, drop a of 
 the present, annex oi>, and prefix its augment. 
 E. g. 
 
 jvmta imperf. livmov. 
 
106 INFLECTION OP WORDS. [^ 98. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 ^98. 1. To form the perfect active, drop o 
 of the present, annex xa, and prefix its augment. 
 E.g. 
 
 TlKVb) 
 
 pert. 
 
 Tisnavxa 
 
 yiltw 
 
 t( 
 
 nf(plh}xa (§ 95) 
 
 dilob) 
 
 i( 
 
 dedfaoxa (ibid.) 
 
 ad(xi 
 
 a 
 
 $x<* (§ 10. 4) 
 
 iiti&a 
 
 a 
 
 TisiisLxa (ibid.) 
 
 ili£a 
 
 ({ 
 
 jjlmxa (ibid.). 
 
 So Ttfuuoi, Ttiifiyxa (§ 95) ; dgdw, dsdQuxct (ibid.) ; x/to, tztT- 
 xa (ibid.) ; <5m*ol'w, dtduxfjvxu (ibid.). 
 
 (1) The first perfect active of liquid verbs is always derived 
 from the simple present. E. g. uyyula), )\yyilxu ' yuXXw, tyaXxa ' 
 qpa/)a>, necpixyxa' xadalyb), xtxu&ayxoi. (§ 96. 6, 18.) 
 
 (2) When the vowel is either ?, a, or o, the first perfect 
 of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes «. E. g. otsIXw, eotuXxa' 
 (fdtlocor^daoxa. (§ 96. 6, 18, 19.) 
 
 Note 1. The verbs xX/v«, x^ivu t vrlvvu, drop v in the first perfect active. 
 Thus, xixXtKct, xix.f>ika, w'i'xXvKa,. 
 
 2. To form the perfect active of mute verbs 
 whose root ends in a labial (7r, /3, <p) or a palatal 
 (x, 7, x)j drop & of the present, annex a, change 
 the preceding smooth or middle mute into its cor- 
 responding rough mute (9, #), and prefix its aug- 
 ment. E. g. 
 
 TQifiw perf. TETQiqa 
 
 yQttifca " ytyQaya 
 
 nXixm " ntTiXf/a. 
 
 So TV71TC0, titV^a ' TlQtWOto, TllTTQir/a. (§ 96, 2, 3.) 
 
 The perfect formed according to these rules (§ 98. 1, 2) 
 is called the fikst pkrfrct activk. 
 
 Note 2. The first perfect of the following verbs changes the radical vowel i 
 into o ( 96. 19 : k\Wtu, x'acXotpa, ' vrifiTu, TiTrofd-tpa. ' r^tcreo^ rirgoQa 
 (sometimes r'kT^u.<pa . See also the Anomalous ayw, i'^a/, ENETKH, and 
 Xiyu coiled. 
 
 Note 3. The anomalous AEIH, in the first perfect, changes u into et 
 (§ 96. N. 14;. See in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 
 
§99.] 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 107 
 
 § 99. Some verbs form their perfect active also by drop- 
 ping a of the present, annexing u, and prefixing the augment. 
 E. g. 
 
 or)7i(o perf. oio^na. 
 
 The perfect thus formed is called the second perfect 
 active. 
 
 The following list contains nearly all the verbs which have a 
 second perfect active. For the changes of the root, see above 
 (§ 96). 
 
 ayvv/xi (Am), say a. 
 dxovco (AKOJl), dy.qxoa. 
 avdottoj (AAJl), iiida. 
 ANEOJl, drrjvo&a. 
 avwyoj, uvwyu. 
 agaol(jy.(x) (APfl), (xquqoi. 
 @alito (BAJ2), fitfjaa. 
 Pi{jQ<x'>axb>{BPOJl), part. fttfiQug. 
 povlouui (BOTASi), Ptfovla. 
 pQixtu), pipol&a. 
 yrj&iw (niOJl), yzyrj&a. 
 ylyrouui (PB?sfl, FAfi), yiyo- 
 
 itx, ytyitu. 
 myjl, ytyoivft. 
 dalai (A All), dedrja. 
 AASl, dtdua. 
 dso/.o^K/.i, dedooxa. 
 dlo)y dcdnt. 
 
 dov-rto) (JOMSI), StdovTia. 
 APEMH, vtdoouu. 
 iyriyoi BVLPJl), tygrjyoQa. 
 idw, Mrjda. 
 t&O), tl'o)ftu. 
 ETJSl, o/(5«. 
 ti'xto, so ix ft, oixu, hixtt. 
 EAi:r()Sl (XyirOSl), ^Ivda. nd&w, Titiioi&a. 
 
 XSVdb), X8X8V&VI. 
 
 xr t db), xi/.r^a. 
 
 xla^b) (Kyi Am), x\ix\r\ya, xi- 
 
 xhtyya. 
 xonxix) (KOnil), xixoiia, 
 XOK3O) ( l\PA I Jl ), xixtjuyct. 
 xitliw (kTENJl), exiova. 
 Xa^TiMy Xtht^Tta. 
 iav&avh (ylAOJl), Xilridct. 
 IdoxM (AAKSl), likaxa. 
 Xtino), Xtloina. 
 fiulvu) ( 1//3V2), fiifitjva* 
 lAuonTut (MAPUJI), fiefxagna. 
 {mm, [ituuu. 
 1M1APSL (MEPSi), t'lApoQa. 
 
 MMJS'JL, pufiova. 
 
 fXtjxdafiai (.1/ IK Si), fii(XT}xa. 
 
 t>Jo> (()AJl), odatdu* 
 
 0?'/c«), horya. 
 
 oUij.li ( OAli), okaiXa. 
 
 OuSl, Sntfiittt. 
 
 oorvui (OPJl), bga)Qci. 
 
 ndo/M (lIAOJl), ninov&Li, tts- 
 
 IV.ttdj, t'olna. 
 ETfESJU eripofrct. 
 igtljico (JlPIllSl), ioriQintt. 
 lyto, o/o) •/.(/.. 
 
 &ulho (OAAJl), T5^/jA«. 
 0A(J>11, TS&1,71U. 
 
 &vr t oy.(t) (OyASl), Te&vaa, 
 loitjiu (^TAIl), I'oraa. 
 
 ntqdo), ninooda. 
 
 7ir t yrv^i (ll Am), ninriya. 
 
 nljiTw (lIETJl), part, nsmoig 
 
 Til 1] So>, 71 in), r, h . 
 
 nhjouM (if A Am), TtenXrjya. 
 
 TtQitoooj { //PAJ'Sl), neTTQuya. 
 
 g r rjyri'fii ( PAFSl), tgoayyct. 
 
 Qiy ioj (PIIJl), Igglya, 
 
103 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 100-102. 
 
 oalgco (y.lPSl), oeotjQu. q-evyoi, tt iiptvyu. 
 
 ct>,'t<.>, g m) i^iu. qp&tiya (<I>OKPSl), ecp&oga. 
 
 onttQco {2:lILPfL)> t-moqa. (p-qiuim (<l*PlKfl) t n£q)(jtxa. 
 
 OTekiw (£TJL4A), iotoXix. fl'l'ZJl, part. nf<pv£(6g. 
 
 oitgyco, toiogyit. cpvw, nicpva. 
 
 T?;xw, teTTjxa. x ai>(x} (XANJl), xixyra. 
 
 rlxTb) [TEKfl) t Tiioxa. zapduna (XAAJl), x^«y£a. 
 
 TA1J1, Tijkoca. jjfifti {XLASl), xf>o<5«. 
 
 tq!£cj {TPirfL), TtTQTya /iafw (XylAjSl), xe^Xadoc. 
 
 Note. In Homer, a few pure verbs in au % tut, form their second perfect parti- 
 dple by changing a. or i into n and annexing us- E. g. /Sa^sa/, (hifiK^nus. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 ^100. To form the first pluperfect active, drop 
 a of the first perfect, annex eiv, and prefix its aug- 
 ment. E. g. 
 
 tvjitw, rixvcpa 1 pluperf. sTEivcpsiv. 
 
 §101. To form the second pluperfect active, drop « of the 
 second perfect, annex iir 9 and prefix the augment. E. g. 
 (xxovco, axrjxooi 2 pluperf. ijxrjxofiv. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE ACTIVE. 
 
 § 103. To form the future active, drop to of the 
 present, and annex aa. E. g. 
 
 7iuv(o fut. Tiai'Obi 
 
 qiXtb) " (ptltjoco (§ 95) 
 
 d-,X6co " drfkbioio (ibid.) 
 
 Xeinco " Xilipw (§ 5. 2) 
 
 nlixb) f * 7iX£*cx) (ibid.). 
 
 So Tifidaj, Tifjr t Gb) (§ 95) ; dguo), dgdaoj (ibid.) ; t/w, tTow 
 (ibid.) ; (iaxovoi, daxQvam (ibid.) ; to/^co, iQlipw (§ 8. 2) ; ygccqxo, 
 ygoajjo) (ibid.) ; Xiym, Xt$co (§ 9. 2) ; tr'/g>, ra&ft (ibid.); adco, 
 aoo) (§ 10. 2); n tlOo), nelocx) (ibid); tXni^o), iXniao). (ibid.); 
 onivdu), onuoo) (§) 12. 5). 
 
 The future thus formed, is called the first future active. 
 
§ 103.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 109 
 
 Note 1. Futures in Hoc*, from verbs in *£&?, often drop the 
 o, and are inflected like contract verbs in soj (§ 116). E. g. 
 
 ycofil^b), fut. y.o^ilob), xo^idJ, u?g, in, dual leItov, plur. lovpev, 
 
 l SITS, LOVOV. 
 
 Note 2. Some futures in uow and sow often drop the a, and 
 are contracted like verbs in aa and fw. (ibid.) E. g. 
 
 fAtt'co fut. ilaaco, eXdco sXw 
 
 duxoTCsdu^Q) " diaoxeddoh), dictoxsddco diaoy.sdw 
 
 tsIsco " TsXsaoo, tsXeco tb'Kw. 
 
 Note 3. The Doric dialect, in the inflection of the first 
 future active, follows the analogy of contract verbs in ao 
 (ibid.). E. g. rofisiu), fut. rofAsvoa), Doric ro^usvaoj. 
 
 Note 4. The Doric often forms futures in £qj from pure 
 verbs or from verbs in £w, which among the Attics have oca in 
 the future. E. g. ysldco, yelu^co ' y.oal^b), xo^i^oj. 
 
 Note 5. The poets often use ooa for ooo, in order to make 
 the preceding syllable long by position. E. g. dvvw, uvvaoov * 
 yeluoo, yeluGGGj. 
 
 § 103. To form the future active of a liquid 
 verb, drop co of the simple present, and annex eco 
 contracted 6. E. g. 
 
 fiiva 
 
 fut. 
 
 (Hrdw contr. 
 
 psru 
 
 
 7CQLVCJ 
 
 tt 
 
 Y.(jtv£(x> 
 
 xqiroj, 
 
 (§ 96. IS 
 
 dflVVO) 
 
 it 
 
 afivv&oj 
 
 a^vrw, 
 
 (.bid.) 
 
 xadalgo) 
 
 k 
 
 y.adc/gsb) 
 
 VM&aQOJ, 
 
 (ibid.) 
 
 y.Tslrco 
 
 it 
 
 xtstuo 
 
 y.TsrJ), 
 
 (ibid.) 
 
 OTtlkco 
 
 a 
 
 OTSlsO) 
 
 oitlw, 
 
 (§ 96. 6.) 
 
 The future thus formed has been called the second future 
 active. 
 
 Note 1. A few liquid verbs have their future in <ru. Such are xv^u, xv^u' 
 fvgco, (pC^tru ' xiWu (KEAX1), xixcu. See also the Anomalous u^uo'ia-KUy 
 
 OOVVfil. 
 
 Note 2. The pure and mute verbs have no second future active. In the 
 paradigm rvrru, the second future tvttiu twptu is introduced merely for exam- 
 ple's sake. 
 
 10 
 
110 INFLECTION OF words. [§104. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND AORIST ACTIVE. 
 
 ^ 101. 1. To form the aorist active, drop co of 
 the present, annex ca, and prefix its augment. E. g. 
 
 Tinvco 
 
 tpilioi " iwtlrjaa (§95) 
 
 itfkota u edrj.eooa (ibid.) 
 
 IsiTicQ " thiipa (§ 5. 2 
 
 nUy.b) " I'nXsSa (ibid.) 
 
 So Ttuaco, hlf.ir^aa (§ 95) ; dydco, I'dgaaa (ibid.) ; drum, 
 fjrtdaa (ibid.); t/co, luaa (ibid.); day.gvco, tdaxgvoa (ibid.); 
 f, tTQupa (§ 8. 2) ; yortcpco, tygaipa (ibid.) ; Xsyco, I'Xt^a 
 (§9.2); Tfi'^co, trivia (ibid.); riJw, f t aa (§10.2); ttbI&oj, 
 f'.Tf/a« (ibid.); eXjii^co, ijXjiioa (ibid.). 
 
 Note 1. A few pure and mute verbs annex a, instead of est. See the An- 
 omalous aXtofjcctiy %a.Tiofjt.a.i i EIII.Q, ENETKH, iviixu, xaieo, tnuu, %(w. 
 
 Note 2. Three verbs take xm. instead of <ra. See the Anomalous tltvpt, 
 'tzp.1, and TiS-y/Au 
 
 Note 3. The Dorians often form aorists in £« from pure 
 verbs, or from verbs in £co. E. g. ytXuco, ryila^a ' xo ( a/Jw, 
 ty.ouiSo:. 
 
 Note 4. The poets often double the o after a short vowel. 
 E. g. arva) 3 ijrvqoa ' yzXuio, iyiXaaaa. 
 
 2. To form the aorist active of a liquid verb, 
 drop co of the simple present, annex a, lengthen 
 the penult, and prefix its augment. A, in the 
 penult, is lengthened into if, and s into a. E. g. 
 
 y.Qiro) aor. I'xolra (§ 96. IS) 
 
 auvro) " ijfivva (ibid.) 
 
 rtuco li trtuiu (ibid.) 
 
 tUXu " hilu ' (§ 91. 6, IS) 
 
 o(f<u).(a " t'jcfjjXa (ibid.) 
 Tho«e liquid verbs, which have at in the penult of the pres- 
 ent, take r t ox u in that of the aorist. E. g. quuoj, stpypa' 
 ilgto, ixad 1,0(1 or e/.aOaou. (§ 9(3. IS.) 
 The aorist formed according to these rules (§ 104. 1, 2) 
 tiled the first aorist acti\ 
 
 I v. 5. Alow and akXepai change u. into * only in the indicative (m con- 
 sequence of the augment). Thus, ^a, ccpgj, ctQCLifxt) cigov, agon, ccgcc;' cl/.Xoju,cti J 
 
§ 105.] 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 riXcc/xnv, aXapou, ccXxcrB-a,i f ocXd^ivo;. See in the catalogue of Anomalous 
 Verbs. 
 
 Note 6. A few liquid verbs take tree, in the first aorist active. Such are 
 
 XttgCO (KEPil), IKiOffU. ' KiWoJ (KEAH), iKiXffOC ' KVOU, 'iKVQffCt ' Tit^U 
 
 (TJEPH , irtoffcc. See also the Anomalous a^ufHirxw, t/kXu, c^tv^it. 
 
 §105, Some verbs form their aorist active by dropping 
 a) of the present, annexing or, and prefixing the augment. E. g. 
 
 jifim aor. ersfiov. 
 
 The aorist thus formed is called the second aorist active. 
 
 The following list contains nearly all those verbs which 
 have a second aorist active. For the changes of the root, see 
 above (§ 96). 
 
 ayw, riyayov. 
 
 axa/t^co (AXJl), rjxrx^ov. 
 
 aXt$to (AAEKJl), ijXaXxov. 
 
 aXnaivco (AslITSL), rjkrtov. 
 
 aXcpalrco (AA&J2), rfkepov. 
 
 au agTaico (aMAPTJI ) , ijuagrov. 
 
 apulaxiaxw {AMHAAKJL), rjfi- 
 
 nXaxov or riTilay.ov. 
 drddico (^AAH), e'adov or udov. 
 dnaqjlaxw i^AfPSl), i]nacpov. 
 aoocQ'Ajy.co (APS!), r ( gagov, 
 ATPS1, avQov. 
 (tdXXa (BAASl), I'ftaXov. 
 piaoTavM (BslAJ?TSl), tfiXciOTOV. 
 p).aj<jy.to (l\I0vU2), l\uoXov. 
 BPAXSl, l' ; 3ga/ov. 
 duxrto (zJAKJl), edaxov. 
 A AH, edaov, 
 
 dag&drco (AAPOSl), edag&ov. 
 dsgxopcu, i'dgaxov. 
 AIKSl, ISixov. 
 APAMSL, tdgapov. 
 EIAn. (lAJl), eldov. 
 EIIlfL, UTiov. 
 
 EAETOSl (EATOJl), %Xv&ov. 
 'EylJl, e'dov. 
 ENETKJl, yvtyxov. 
 ivljiTco (ENIIIfL), ivivlnov. 
 irlono], I'vlotcov, 
 
 871(0 , ZG7T0V. 
 
 egslxco (EPIKJl), ijgtxov. 
 tgeiTicx) (EPIIIJ2), rjgiTiov. 
 igvyydvoo (EPTr/l), rjgvyov. 
 igvxco, egvxccxov. 
 evgloxo) (ETPJl), evgov* 
 e/co, eo%ov. 
 OA&J1, eiacpov. 
 &iyydrco (Oim), £&tyov. 
 ■&irjGX(x) {OA2\fi) i i&avov. 
 ■d-gcoax(x) (OOPJl), I'&ogov. 
 KAAS1, xsxadov. 
 xalrcx) (KANSl), sxavov. 
 xdurco (KAMJ2), txafiov. 
 xsv&u (KTOSl), I'xv&ov. 
 xi/drco (KIXJI), txr/ov. 
 xXd£oo (KylAFJl), I'xXccyov, 
 xgdZco (KPATJl), txgayov, 
 xielrw (KTENJl), I'xjavov. 
 xTVTiiw (KTTIIJl), I'xtivtiov. 
 Xayzdro) (AAXJl), eXa/ov. 
 Xafufidvco (AABJl), llafiov* 
 Xav&dvw (AAOJ2), ila&ov. 
 Xdaxco (AAKIl), iXaxov. 
 Xdnw (ATJJfl), eXtTiov. 
 fiav&dvco (MAOJl), I'fia&ov. 
 pdgTiTb) (MAPIIJl), [isfiagnov. 
 MEIPfL (MEPSl), l\u{iogov. 
 firjxdofMU (MAKJl)y I'fiaxov. 
 fihxdo^ai (MTKSL), I'^vxov. 
 6XiG&alvb) (OAlZOfi), uilio&ov. 
 
112 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 106, 107. 
 
 oytlho (0<I>JLIJl), fcHptAor, 
 o(fXnjx('utx) (()<1>^1J1), wifXor. 
 
 uo (7/ LUi), trr«).ov. 
 ndo^o) (JIAOJl), i7T«&or. 
 TimVa) (lllOSl), tm&oi>. 
 Tisgdto, tTiaQdoi 1 . 
 
 itxTCo (TJBKJl), Irexoi'. 
 
 TITVOXO/UIXI (iTKJl), tTVXOV. 
 
 t^'/co (TMAFSl), ETfiayov. 
 
 TOO£(0 (lOPSl), tTOQOV. 
 TQ17TG), ITQCtTCOV. 
 
 TOEqpco, ligaqor. 
 
 Tfjwyco (TPArSl) y iTQayov. 
 
 Tr/'-rrcu (lIllTSl), intoor, ittstov. tvyx&Vta (TTXJl), I'ti^ov. 
 
 tt/jw (niJl)y i'mor. 
 
 TtXi'ioob) (JlAArfL)) \nkr\yov, 
 
 JJOPSL, i'nogor. 
 
 jTTtu'qw \l2TAPJl), imagov. 
 
 oiei/b} (2'TIXJl), tOTi/ov. 
 
 arvfim (^TTrJl), eonyov. 
 
 TArSl y hayor. 
 
 Tiurco (tsjuw), I'ltfiOV, ha^ov. 
 
 TETMSl, ztet^ov. 
 
 Note. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist active. See a^a^iffjcu, 
 in the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 &AFJ2, tcpayov. 
 Q>ENJl t nsqvov, tmcpvov. 
 qsvyco {(l>TrSl), I'yvyov. 
 qgd^cx) (&PAAJ2), eqiQudov. 
 %i<Z(o (XA/Ml), xsxadov. 
 /altoo (XAl\Jl), fyavov. 
 %ccrdih'b) (XAASl), fyadov, 
 XPAl^JMfL, e^txtofiov. 
 
 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE. 
 
 § 106. 1. To form the present passive, drop o 
 of the present active, and annex opai. E. g. 
 
 Tvmoi pres. pass, tl'tttojuou. 
 
 2. To form the imperfect passive, drop opai of 
 the present, annex ofjtqv, and prefix its augment. 
 E.g. 
 
 tvktco, TVTtTopat, imperf. pass. irvnTOfi^v. 
 
 PERFECT PASSIVE. 
 
 § 107. To form the perfect passive, drop co of 
 the present active, annex pou, and prefix its aug- 
 ment. E. g. 
 
 Tiavo) perf. pass, ninav^iciv 
 
 qdio) " 7i6q>ikTjfiai (§ 95) 
 
 fylon " didrjlcjpaL (ibid.) 
 
 Xtlnco " XiXiififiou (§8- 1) 
 
 nUy.o) " ninXiy^ai (§ 9. 1). 
 
§ 108.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 113 
 
 So Tiuatt), zi.Tiu.vaui (§ 95); dvidai, qi' la fiat (ibid); tcoj, tbtT- 
 fiui (ibid.) ; daxgi'M, dsdoatgHfiai (ibid.) ; TgliSw, Tsrgiufiai, 
 (§8. 1); yodcpoi, yiygauiiai (ibid,); Xsyco, XeXfypoa' Tfi^co, T£- 
 TBVyfiai (§9. 1) ; adco, yapai (§ 10. 1) ; nudw, neneLa^ocL (ibid.) ; 
 XtagiQWj xs%(dgiG[icu (ibid.) 
 
 For the inflection of the perfect passive, see above (§ 91). 
 
 (1) The perfect passive of liquid verbs is always formed 
 from the simple present. E. g. dyyeXXco, ^yysX^iai ' (pixlvo), 
 ni(f( H iuai. {§ 96. 6, 18 : 12. 3.) 
 
 (2) When the vowel of the root is either s, a, or o, the 
 perfect passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes «. E. g. oiiX- 
 Xw, toTttXucu' (f&slgu), i'cp&uguou. (§ 96. 6, 18, 19.) 
 
 Note 1. Some pure verbs, especially such as retain the 
 short vowel in the penult (§ 95. N. 1, 2), insert a before the 
 terminations pen, toci, ps&ov, [le&a, E. g. 
 
 TSlsCOy TSTeXsOflOU TETskeOTCtl, TSTsXea^e&ov, TSTsXio^s&a. 
 
 Note 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above '§ 98. N. l), and a few others, 
 drop the v in the perfect passive. E. g. xktva, xixkipai. 
 
 Note 3. Some liquid verbs in rco change v before f.i into <j» 
 E. g. cpalra), 7i iqxxoiA a i for necpafi^iau 
 
 Note 4. If the terminations pat, jlie&ov, fje&a, be preceded 
 by two consonants, the consonant immediately preceding them 
 is dropped. E. g. Tegnoo, TSTeg^ou, TSTsgpt&oi', TtTsgut&a. 
 
 Note 5. In a few instances, the epic poets retain the lingual ($, S-) un- 
 changed before p.. E. g. KAAH, xixezlpcti • xo^vaeoj ( KOPT0J\), xix'o- 
 
 Note 6. The following mute verbs change s into & in the perfect passive : 
 trr^cof strrgx/xftxt ' rgirtu, tit gap. pat ' *(n$u (0PE<I>,Q), r'tB-oappai. 
 (§ 96. 19.) 
 
 PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 
 
 ^ 108. To form the pluperfect passive, drop 
 pcu of the perfect passive, annex pp, and prefix 
 its augment. E. g. 
 
 TVTITCOf TtTVUfMXl plup. paSS. iTSTV[l[XT}V. 
 
 10* 
 
114 INFLECTION or WORM. [§§109,110. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE. 
 
 § 109. To form the aorist passive, drop a of 
 the present active, annex #?/v, and prefix its aug- 
 ment. E. g. 
 
 7i a v to aor. pass, inav&rjv 
 
 yiXsa) " scpdtj&rjv (§ 95) 
 
 dr t l6o) " idijkoi&Tiv (ibid.) 
 
 XtlTTOO " iltl(f>&1]V (§ 7) 
 
 TiUxco " ItiUx&viV (ibid.). 
 
 So Tij.iciWy iTif.n]d-i]v (§ 95) ; avidco, ipta&yv (ibid.); qpw^ao), 
 fytogiT&ijv (ibid.) ; tqljSw, eTQiCp&i]v (§) 7) ; ygdcpo), iyqd(p&7]V ' 
 Xiyco, ilb%&r]v (ibid.); rev^a, sisvx&rjV' tidco, ijo&r^v (§ 10. 3); 
 Tiel&to, ijiela&7]v (ibid.) ; ^ojqi^co, e^ooglo&^v (ibid.) 
 
 The aorist passive thus formed is called the first aorist 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 (1) The first aorist passive of liquid verbs is always derived 
 from the simple present. E. g. dyysXXa, r\yyiX&riv ' (palvco, 
 icpuv&rjP. (§ 96. 6, 18.) 
 
 (2) When the vowel of the root is either e, a, or o, the first 
 aorist passive of dissyllabic liquid verbs takes a. E. g. oxiXXoo, 
 eoza).&7 l v * (p&slgco, icp&dg&rjv. (§ 96. 6, 18, 19.) 
 
 Note 1. Some j^re verbs, particularly such as retain the 
 short vowel in the penult (§ 95. N. 1, 2), insert o before &r)v. 
 
 tele co, iceXbO&riv. 
 
 Note 2. The liquid verbs mentioned above (§ 98. N. 1) often drop the v 
 in the first aorist passive. E. g. xXivu, lx'ki&w 9 commonly IxX/S-av. 
 
 § 1 1 O. Some verbs form their aorist passive also by drop- 
 ping w of the present active, annexing r t v, and prefixing the 
 augment. E. g. 
 
 Xeyco aor. pass, iXeytjv. 
 
 The aorist passive thus formed is called the second aorist 
 passive. 
 
 The following list contains nearly all those verbs which have 
 a second aorist passive. For the changes of the root, see 
 above (§ 96). 
 
 Syvvfjii^ (Am), tuyrjv or iayr\v. aXXdooco (AAAAttl), r\XXayr\v. 
 
 i 
 
§§ 110, 111.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 115 
 
 agjid'Qo) (APHAm), fiQTidyriv. 
 
 fidmoj (BA&Jl), ifidyrp. 
 
 fiXdnxu {BAABSl), £/3/l«/%. 
 
 plena], tfiXimv. 
 
 fige/co, ipga&)V. 
 
 ygdcpw, £ygdcpr\v. 
 
 AAJlf idixtjv. 
 
 da^udco (AAMJl), iddprjV. 
 
 degxofiai, edgdxTjv. 
 
 dsgco, idagrjV. 
 
 etkm {EASL), edlrjV. 
 
 tsvywfit (ZTm), e^vyrjv. 
 
 fidnxco (OA&fl), iidcprfV. 
 
 &igo[iai, e&igrjV. 
 
 •d-QViiTto (OPTfrJl), irgvcprjv. 
 xslga (KEPJl), ixdgrjv. 
 y.Xsnxco (KAEITJl), ixXdnriv. 
 nXlvco, ixXlrrjV. 
 xojxxco (KOlIJl), ixOTXTjV. 
 %alw or y.abJf ixaqv. 
 vgvnTW (KPTBJl), ixgvfir)v. 
 Xsyw, iXiyr\v. 
 Xstxw, iXinr\v. 
 fialvco (MANJl), ipdvyv. 
 liiyvv[.u (Mini), ifilyr\v. 
 ol'yoj, oYyi)v. 
 
 ogi'GGco (OPTm), wgvyrjv. 
 ndXXw (iJAylJl), indlriv. 
 Tielgco ^IIEPSl), £nagr)v. 
 nriyvv{XL (iIArSl), indyrjv. 
 txXsxo), inXdxr\v. 
 TiXrjuoco (nAArSL), inXrjyrjv, 
 inXayrjv, 
 
 nviyw, tnviyrjV. 
 
 gico (PTSl), sggvrjV. 
 
 g^yvvfii (PArfl), eggdyqv. 
 
 glnxco (PI&Jl), igglcpr}V, 
 
 a^nco (2AI1S1), iodnrjV. 
 
 oxdnxco (^KA&Jl), eoxdcprjV. 
 
 onslgo) (J^IIEPJI), eoTxdgrjv. 
 
 oxlfioj, ioTiflrjV. 
 
 oxsXXco (2TEASI), SaxdXr,r. 
 
 orsgio) (2?TEPfl), ioTtgrjV. 
 
 oxgtcpw, eorgdq)7jv, 
 
 org to, iovgrjv. 
 
 ocpdXXb) (^fPAAJl), iocpdXrjv. 
 
 ocpdooh) (^(PArSl), iaydyrjv. 
 
 xdooco {TATfl), hdyr\v. 
 
 TSfivb) (lip), ixdfxrjv, 
 
 TEgTico, hdgnr\v. 
 
 Tegoofiou, ixsgoi]V. 
 
 T?jxw {TAKSl), ixdxrjv. 
 
 Tfi^yco (TMArii), irfidyrjv. 
 
 rgsnco, £xgdnr\v. 
 
 xgtcpco and xgdopw, ixgdcprjv, 
 
 rglfico, ixglfirjv. 
 
 Tl'TIXb) (TTIlJl), ixVTlTjV. 
 
 xvcfw (OT&S1), hvcprp. 
 
 qxxlvco {(I) ANSI), icpdvr^v. 
 
 cp&tigco (fyOEPSl), scp&dgrjv. 
 
 yXeyco, (cpXiyr\v. 
 
 cpgdooo) ((PPAttl), icpgdyrjv. 
 
 (pgvyco, icpgvyriv. 
 
 q)Vco, icpvr]V. 
 
 Xctlgw (XAPJl), fydgrjv. 
 
 yv%co (jFTrSL), iipvyyv 
 
 FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 
 
 ^111. 1. To form the first future passive, drop 
 &7}v of the first aorist passive, annex drjdofiai, and 
 reject the augment. E. g. 
 
 tvtxxw, ixvcp&rjv 1 fut. pass. jvcp^ao(xai. 
 
 2. To form the second future passive, drop rjv of the second 
 aorist passive, annex rioo{iai, and reject the augment. E. g. 
 
 TV71TW, izVTTTfV 2 fut. paSS. TV71TIOO[IOU. 
 
116 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 112-114. 
 
 ^ 112. To form the third future passive, drop 
 at of the second person singular of the perfect 
 passive, and annex opou. E. g. 
 
 1V:IT01, TSTVyjJCll, TtlVXpOU 3 fut. TElVipOflOU. 
 
 Note. Liquid verbs, and verbs beginning with a vowel, very seldom have a 
 third future passive. 
 
 PRESENT, IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLU 
 PERFECT, MIDDLE. 
 
 ^113. The present, imperfect, perfect, and plu- 
 perfect, middle, are the same as in the passive. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE MIDDLE. 
 
 ^114. 1. To form the first future middle, drop 
 o of the first future active, and annex ofxcu. E. g. 
 
 TV71TCO, TV\JJ(0 1 fut. mid. TVlpOfJlCU. 
 
 Note 1. When the first future active ends in o7 (§ 102. 
 N. 1,2, 3), the first future middle ends in ov^lvli. E. g. 
 
 v.oful'Cco, y.ofiiw, 1 fut. mid. ^o^iov^ai, inflected like cpdovfiai. 
 xaUw, y.aXoj, 1 fut. mid. Tialov^ai. 
 
 So in the Doric dialect, Tvnroj, ivipw, 1 fut. mid. Tvipoi\uou. 
 The Attics sometimes use the Doric first future middle. 
 
 2. To form the second future middle, drop co of 
 the second future active, and annex ofxai. E. g. 
 
 otQIw, ojeXto) Gielb) 2 fut. mid. oieltoficti, contracted 
 
 OTSloVfidL. 
 
 Note 2. In a few instances the second future middle is found in mute and 
 pure verbs. See the Anomalous t£efioti, fAuvB-uvw, /u,ci%ofAoii } viva, ^ri<rra i 
 
 rixrcd. 
 
§115.] 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 117 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND AORIST MIDDLE. 
 
 § 115. 1. To form the first aorist middle, drop 
 a of the first aorist active, and annex ccpp. E. g. 
 
 tvutco, I'Tvipa 1 aor. mid. iivipdptjv. 
 
 2. Some verbs form their aorist middle by dropping 
 a of the present active, annexing oprjv, and prefixing the aug- 
 ment. E. g. 
 
 c EAJl aor. mid. uXoprp. 
 
 The aorist middle thus formed is called the second aorist 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 The following list contains nearly all those verbs which 
 have a second aorist middle. For the changes of the root, 
 see above (96). 
 
 aydgco (ArEPSL) , rjyegofirjv. 
 ccyco, 7]ya/6.ur]V. 
 al'gco (APSl), r^o^v. 
 alo&ixropai (Al^Ofl), f t o&6- 
 
 aXtialvco (AAITSI), rjXnofirjV. 
 dxayj^to (aXJI), rjxa%6[ATiv. 
 ccXXo^uccl (^AAJl), rjiopr]*. 
 (ttiXXw (BAJSl), ipalopif*. 
 ylyroficxi (rEyfl), eysvo^v. 
 dalco (AAJl), fdtxofjL^v. 
 eytiqou {ETEPSl), rjygoprjv, 
 EI A SI, sidoutjv. 
 EAJlj 8iX6 h ur ( v. 
 en to, ianofxriv. 
 
 tQOflttl, 7]Q6lU]V. 
 
 SVQlOTtto (ETPJl), EVQOfirjV. 
 
 I'yco, ioyo^v. 
 
 ixvsofiai ( I v. co ) , ~lx 6u ij v. 
 
 xiXofiai, ixsxXofirjr. 
 Xcxfifictvto (AABSl), iXafiotiqv. 
 Xav&dvco (AAOJl), eXa&6(X7]V. 
 Xdaxco (vlAKJl), XtXax6[xr}V. 
 Xelnco (AinSl), iXino^v. 
 oXXvpi (Oslfi), ioX6pr t v. 
 
 OQVVjXL (OPJl), COQOj^TjV. 
 OOCpQall'O^iaL (02?<PPSL), tQLlCpgO- 
 
 nel&co (niOSL), s7iL&6f.i7]V. 
 
 TlSTOfMXl, STITOfirjV. 
 
 7tX?](joto (ilslArSl), nsnXrjyo- 
 
 TlVV&dvOtAQU (2IT0SI), E71V&6- 
 
 ts^ivco (rs^co), hoifio^riv. 
 
 T8Q71CO, iTaQ7l6(.l7]V. 
 
 tIxtco (TEKJI), hzx6^v t v. 
 
 TQSTICO, ETQLtTlOtiriV. 
 
 Note. Some of these verbs have also a first aorist middle. Such are aXgat, 
 
118 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 116. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 § 1 1 G. Pure verbs in aco, sco, and oco, are con- 
 tracted by the Attics in the present and imperfect. 
 
 Note 1. Dissyllabic verbs in ew are contracted only when 
 a and s come together. E. g. nkita, nkisig nXslg, nlitc nlu, alio- 
 ftfv, Tikteie tiIutz, nXiovai. 
 
 Rem auk. Aiu, bind, deviates from this analogy (§ 116. N. 1). E. g. 
 Viovtri 2ov<r/ f liofjiui ^ovj&eti. 
 
 Note 2. For the contraction of *6i^a.u> %&&>, xvaw, vruva.ct), tr^a.cu, xpczo)) 
 $uu f see above (§ 23. N. 1). 
 
 Note 3. The movable v (§ 15. 1) is very seldom appended 
 to the contracted third person singular of the imperfect active. 
 
 Note 4. The Epic dialect sometimes changes the radical 
 vowel e into u. E. g. oy.vuw for oxvtoj. 
 
 Note 5. The Epic contracts isai into uai y and £eo into slo. 
 E. g. aldieou aldelai, aldeso aldslo, from aldso/ucu. Sometimes it 
 drops the second c. E. g. [iv&eai for fiv&ami from .[tv&ioftou. 
 
 . Note 6. The Epic protracts a or a (contracted) into act or 
 «a, and co (contracted) into oca or <ww or wo, and w into ow. 
 
 E ' g \ 
 
 uyooaoij.ai, (tyoQUEG&e ayogao&e, Epic a/OQftav&e 
 7isdd(o, TiedbJy Epic 7ifdoo) ' ntdasig 7itdag y Epic ntdaag 
 fjfiuw, r t fiuovoa f t {jojoa t Epic ? c ^5cJwa« * rjfjixovreg rjScovjeg, 
 
 Epic Tj/jMOVTSg 
 ulllUQliaiy OUTLUOLTO CUTlOnO, Epic CClTlOCrtTO. 
 
 In the Epic dialect, verbs in ow sometimes follow the analogy 
 of verbs in «oj. E. g. diy'iooj, drfioovro drfiovrTo, Epic d/jVo'awTO * 
 drfioouv dr/iolev, Epic d^Vo'qjer, as if from drfiata. 
 
 Note 7. In some instances the Epic changes the radical 
 vowel u into «. E. g. £aw, £ww. (§ 96. 19.) 
 
 Note 8. The Ionic very often changes the radical vowel « 
 into e. E. g. qpom'co for (poiicxco. 
 
 Note 9. The Ionic often changes «o into £co. E. g. /tfqga- 
 viavxat for (irjxavaovrcu from ^rj/avdo^iai. 
 
§ 116.] 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 119 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 
 P. 
 
 8. 
 
 D. 
 
 P. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 honor 
 
 
 I love 
 
 
 I manifest 
 
 TlfMXb) 
 
 8 
 
 cpiXsco 
 
 s. 
 
 drjXoaj 
 
 TLfACO 
 
 
 (plXb) 
 
 
 dt]Xcj 
 
 Tifxaeig 
 
 
 cpiXisig 
 
 
 drjXoeig 
 
 ji^iag 
 
 
 cpiXslg 
 
 
 dr t Xo7g 
 
 Tl{ACC£l 
 
 
 cpiXssi 
 
 
 dr t ko£L 
 
 Tifia 
 
 
 cpiXu 
 
 
 6^X61 
 
 TLfAlXOfltV 
 
 D. 
 
 cpUeo^isv 
 
 D. 
 
 dtfXoof.iev 
 
 T/paJj' 
 
 
 q)iloi\uev 
 
 
 dijXoi'iisv 
 
 Ttf.lCCSTOP 
 
 
 yikdsTov 
 
 
 dr t X6siov 
 
 Truarov 
 
 
 (piluiov 
 
 
 drjXovTOV 
 
 Tifiocsrov 
 
 
 cpiXiexov 
 
 
 dr t X6sTov 
 
 TlUCtTOV 
 
 
 cpiXslrov 
 
 
 d^Xoviov 
 
 Tifiao/jiev 
 
 P. 
 
 CfiXioixsv 
 
 P. 
 
 dijXoousv 
 
 TL/JWfiev 
 
 
 cpiXovasv 
 
 
 dtjXovpsv 
 
 TlfUXSTS 
 
 
 cpiXests 
 
 
 dtjXotTS 
 
 TlfUXTS 
 
 
 cptXelrs 
 
 
 dijXovTS 
 
 Tl[UXOVOl(v) 
 
 
 q:iXsovai{v) 
 
 
 d)]Xoovoi(v) 
 
 Tl[AtoOl(v) 
 
 
 cpiXoi'u-i(r) 
 
 
 dijXoi'ui^v} 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 
 iilfxctov 
 
 8. 
 
 scpi'Xtov 
 
 S. 
 
 id/jloov 
 
 irlucov 
 
 
 tcpt'Xovp 
 
 
 idrjlow 
 
 ttlfiasg 
 
 
 iylXesg 
 
 
 tdjjXotg 
 
 iiljj.ag 
 
 
 ecplXeig 
 
 
 edrjXovg 
 
 hi uas 
 
 
 scplXss 
 
 
 tdtjXoe 
 
 ii/\ua 
 
 
 iqjiXeL 
 
 
 idijXov 
 
 irifidofisv 
 
 D. 
 
 eq)iXeo(.iev 
 
 D. 
 
 idiiXoojiiev 
 
 sTiiicouev 
 
 
 ecpiXovusv 
 
 
 ed^Xovfiev 
 
 iTiuasTOV 
 
 
 ftylXsETOV 
 
 
 idr t Xo8Tov 
 
 sTtudiov 
 
 
 (cpiXujov 
 
 
 sdrjXoviov 
 
 hijiahriv 
 
 
 (cpiXniVfV 
 
 
 i5rjXo£TT}V 
 
 in^dxriV 
 
 
 i(f>iXuTi]v 
 
 
 £d)jXoi'T7]V 
 
 eTi^icwusv 
 
 P. 
 
 icpiXiouw 
 
 P. 
 
 ed)]Xoouev 
 
 hlllWIASV 
 
 
 iyiXoifisv 
 
 
 td^Xoi'fisv 
 
 iiLfjane 
 
 
 SCplXlETS 
 
 
 idr t X6sTS 
 
 ijlflttTE 
 
 
 icpiXslis 
 
 
 ed)jXoi>T8 
 
 £ii[iaov 
 
 
 icpiXtov 
 
 
 idrjXoov 
 
 iilucav 
 
 
 icclXovv 
 
 
 idqXovv 
 
120 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ 116. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 s. 
 
 rifidco 
 
 TlliUO 
 Ttudj,g 
 
 Tiuug 
 T i fidtj 
 Tiuix 
 
 s. 
 
 ifiXtto 
 
 ytXto 
 
 (fiXe^g 
 
 (fiXstj 
 qdf) 
 
 S. 
 
 d )]Xo oj 
 dtjXoi 
 
 8?]Xoj t g 
 d^Xolg 
 
 dijXoy 
 8i)Xdl 
 
 D. 
 
 Tl t U(XCO[lSV 
 ttU&fttP 
 
 D. 
 
 cpiXicofjisv 
 
 qtXbJ/LlEP 
 
 D. 
 
 dr t Xo(xi^EV 
 di ( ltousv 
 
 
 Tiuctrjov 
 
 TIUUTOV 
 
 
 Cflk£r t TOV 
 
 cpiXijiov 
 
 
 dijloijTOV 
 
 8) { lWT0V 
 
 
 TlflUTOV 
 
 
 qnXer^ov 
 yiXrJTOV 
 
 
 dijXorjiov 
 drjXooTov 
 
 P. 
 
 Tl^W^LEV 
 
 Tifiarjs 
 rifj-ocTS 
 
 P. 
 
 <fdib){.iEV 
 (piXw(j,sv 
 
 q)iXsr]T8 
 (piXijis 
 
 qpiXia)oi(v) 
 q)iXwoi(v) 
 
 P. 
 
 dljXoWfAEV 
 dj]l(xJjJ.EV 
 
 drJ.oriTE 
 dtjXwTS 
 
 d)]lowoi(v) 
 d?jXb}oi{v) 
 
 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 Tlfidoifil 
 
 S. 
 
 qpiXEOipi, 
 
 CplXoli.lL 
 
 S. 
 
 dqXooifii 
 d7jXol\ta 
 
 
 Tipdoig 
 Ttfiojg 
 
 Tlfidoi 
 
 Tifica 
 
 
 qdioig 
 qiXolg 
 
 yiXtoi 
 qpiXol 
 
 
 d)j).6oig 
 dr t Xo7g 
 
 <5 )]h') oi 
 dr t Xol 
 
 D. 
 
 TlfiUOlfiEV 
 
 D. 
 
 CpiXeoiuEv 
 
 D. 
 
 dlj/.OOllJEV 
 
 
 TlfAO)}J.SV 
 
 
 cpilo7utv 
 
 
 dyXolfiEV 
 
 
 TlfldotTOV 
 
 
 qiXtoiTOv 
 
 
 dyft.oouov 
 
 
 TtfAOJTOV 
 
 
 cpiXoliov 
 
 
 d^Xolrov 
 
 
 Tiuaolir t v 
 
 
 qjiXeolnjv 
 
 
 dr^.ootTJ'tV 
 
 
 rtfionrfV 
 
 
 (flXoiTl]V 
 
 
 d^XolzitV 
 
 P. 
 
 TIJJ.UOIU8V 
 
 P. 
 
 (ftltoiutv 
 cpilolaev 
 
 P. 
 
 dijXooifjtv 
 drj.olutv 
 
 
 TILUXOITE 
 
 
 CfiXeotTE 
 
 
 StjIooite 
 
 
 TlfJbJTS 
 TlfjldoiEV 
 
 
 (flXfUTS 
 
 (piXtoitv 
 
 
 (5^/oTrs 
 dijlooiEV 
 
 
 TlfAOjEV 
 
 
 (flXoiEV 
 
 
 dr^Xoliv 
 
 
 
 Or thus (§ 87. N. 2). 
 
 
 
 Ti[iojr t v 
 
 , o}r t c, on] 
 
 (fiXolr]: 
 
 v, olrjC, olr\ I 
 
 WjXoirjV, OlTjC, Oil] 
 
 oUjuiv, wriTOv, onfirp 
 
 ohjuhr, alitor, oiitTr t v 
 
 olijutr, oirjTor, oii]Tr t v 
 
 COTjfitl 
 
 i', ojr t TS, ojrfiuv 
 
 oirifiti'y ohjje, olr t aav 
 
 oltjpu 
 
 ■V, OOjTE, oi)}oav 
 
§ 116.] 
 
 S. 
 
 D. 
 
 Tip as 
 
 tlfia 
 TLfiaijco 
 
 Tirana 
 
 TlflUSTGV 
 TlfiGCTOV 
 
 Ttfia&TCJV 
 TlfiUTCJV 
 
 Tifxaeie 
 Tifiais 
 tL/xahcooap 
 
 TlfiaOVTOJV 
 TlfMXTOOOaV 
 TllltoVTWV 
 
 Tifidew 
 Tifiav 
 
 Tifidav, dovoa, dov 
 
 TL/XOOV, CGOGC, COV 
 
 G. dovtog, toviog 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 S. q>lXss S. 
 
 (pile i 
 
 OpiXsSTO) 
 
 (pilzhw 
 D. (fdisjov D. 
 
 (ptXuTOV 
 
 quXsircov 
 tydeiTCOv 
 P. cpiXins -P. 
 
 CplXlLTE 
 
 cpiXshaoav or 
 
 qplXtOVTCOV 
 
 yiXsiTwoav or 
 
 tylXoVVTWV 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 qjiXiuv 
 qnXelv 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 yiXiwv, sovoot, iov 
 (pdav, ovou, ovv 
 G. eovTog, ovvTog 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 121 
 
 d?]Xos 
 
 dijXov 
 dyXosTto 
 
 dtjXomco 
 dyXosTOV 
 
 dqXoviov 
 drjXosnov 
 
 drjXovtcov 
 drjXosTS 
 
 drjXoiiTS 
 dyXoETwoav or 
 dijXoovjaiv 
 
 dyXovTcaoavOl 
 
 drjXovvT(ov 
 
 dr]X6eiv 
 dtjXovv 
 
 dyXowv, oovoa, oov 
 dtjXcov, ovocij ovv 
 G. oovTog, ovvTog 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD.— 
 
 & 
 
 Tipaofidi, 
 
 xi\idr\ 
 rifia 
 TipaEjai 
 
 TlflUTCU 
 
 D. tifiaopeS^ov 
 
 TlfiWflS&OV 
 
 Tirfidso&ov 
 
 TlftClG&OV 
 
 Tl[ld8G&OV 
 
 TlflCtO&OV 
 
 P. Tipaous^a 
 Tifi(0(j.z&a 
 rifidsa&e 
 Tifido&s 
 
 TlflCtOVTCU 
 
 rifjim'Tai 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 
 P. 
 
 11 
 
 (piXiopav 
 
 qpiXovfiat, 
 (piXtTj or -est, 
 
 cpdjj or -{I 
 q>iXe£Tcu 
 
 cpiXelToti 
 qpdsofiE&ov 
 
 qpiXovfis&ov 
 cpiXha&ov 
 
 qpiXuo&ov 
 yiXito&ov 
 
 (piXstG&ov 
 cpiXeops&a 
 
 cpiXovfiE&a 
 (piXsso&s 
 
 qsiXelo&s 
 cpiXsovrai 
 
 cpiXovvxai 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. dr]X6ofiOM 
 dr t Xovfi(XL 
 drjXoji 
 8i)X6l 
 drjXosTat, 
 8t]Xovxai 
 X). dr^Xoope&ov 
 drjXovfis&ov 
 di]X6eo&ov 
 
 dyXovo&ov 
 driXoto&ov 
 dqXovo&ov 
 D. dr}Xooiis&a 
 drjXovfie&a 
 dr]X6so&s 
 
 d^Xovo&s 
 dr]X6ovtai, 
 dTjXovvrcu 
 
122 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ H6. 
 
 S. 
 
 D. 
 
 P. 
 
 €TL(xaov 
 hifxdsTO 
 
 iiifiwfxsd-ov 
 iiifideo&ov 
 
 4Tl(A(XG&OV 
 
 iTifida&rjv 
 irifiaofis&a 
 
 iTifideo&e 
 
 iTifidovio 
 
 ETlfMtiVTO 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 S. iq>de6[ir]v 
 i(pikovfii]V 
 icpiXiov 
 icpdov 
 
 icpiluxo 
 
 D. icpdsofis&ov 
 iydovfie&ov 
 i<prteeo&ov 
 
 iyiXtia&ov 
 iq)deio&r)v 
 iyiXslo&Tjv 
 
 P. i<pde6f.ie&ct 
 icpiXovfisd'a 
 
 i(ptXt7o&8 
 iyiXiovio 
 icpiXovvro 
 
 S. idrjXoofiqv 
 sdriXovfiTjV 
 idr t Xoov 
 idr;Xov 
 idqXoeio 
 idyXovTO 
 
 D. idrjXo6fie&ov 
 edrjXovfis&ov 
 
 idr ( Xoea&ov 
 sdrjlovo&ov 
 
 idqXoio&rjv 
 edrfXova&tjv 
 
 P. idrjXoo^i&a 
 id? t XovfiE&a 
 
 tdtjXoto&e 
 tdr t Xoi'o&e 
 
 idrfXoovro 
 idrjXoiivio 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 S, Tifidapcu 
 
 8. 
 
 cpiXita^ai 
 
 & 
 
 dtjXowiAou 
 
 Tl(J.M[ACU 
 
 
 (piXwucu 
 
 
 dTjXwfiai 
 
 Tifidr) 
 
 
 q:iXit) 
 
 
 djjXoji 
 
 Tipa 
 
 
 qjiXfj 
 
 
 dijXol 
 
 TifidrjKXL 
 
 
 qiXir}ioLi 
 
 
 d^XoijiaL 
 
 rifidtav 
 
 
 (fili^Tcm 
 
 
 dr;/. curat 
 
 D. Tifiacofis&ov 
 
 D. 
 
 (flXftOfHE&OV 
 
 D. 
 
 SijXocoius&ov 
 
 Tificofie&ov 
 
 
 qjiXat/AE&ov 
 
 
 djjXcoiue&oy 
 
 Tl[ld7}G&OV 
 
 
 (fiXerjO&ov 
 
 
 dr t XotjO&ov 
 
 Tl/AClO&OV 
 
 
 qjtXija&ov 
 
 
 dtjXcJa&ov 
 
 Tifidrjo&ov 
 
 
 q>iXh]G&ov 
 
 
 dijXor'/a&ov 
 
 rifido&ov 
 
 
 tpiXrjad-ov 
 
 
 dr { Xco(j&ov 
 
 P. TifiaafAS&a 
 
 D. 
 
 yiXtwps&a 
 
 P. 
 
 dqXocoued-a 
 
 TL(no}(.ie&a 
 
 
 q>iX(6fisd-a 
 
 
 d)}X(6u^&a 
 
 TLfidrns&s 
 
 
 q)iXir](j&8 
 
 
 dqX6r t <j&8 
 
 TLfiida&s 
 
 
 q>iXr]a&s 
 
 
 dijXaod-B 
 
 TlfiGHOVTOCl 
 
 
 (piXdtovicu 
 
 
 dtiXocovTat 
 
 Tlt-HJOITIXI 
 
 
 CplXwVTOli, 
 
 
 dtjXcbvrai 
 
s J 
 
 lO.j 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 
 VZZ 
 
 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD 
 
 
 8. 
 
 TLfiaolflTjV 
 
 & 
 
 q)dsolfxrjV 
 
 s. 
 
 drjXoolfiriv 
 
 
 TifioifirjV 
 
 
 qpdolfirjv 
 
 
 drjXolfiriv 
 
 
 Tifidoio 
 
 
 opdsoio 
 
 
 drjXooio 
 
 
 TlflWO 
 
 
 cpdolo 
 
 
 drjXdlo 
 
 
 TlfldoiTO 
 
 
 cpdsoixo 
 
 
 Sr t XooLTO 
 
 
 TL^LMTO 
 
 
 cpdolxo 
 
 
 drjXolro 
 
 D. 
 
 xifiaolfie&ov 
 
 D. 
 
 qpdEolfie&ov 
 
 D. 
 
 drjXoolftsd-ov 
 
 
 Tlfl(p{lE&OV 
 
 
 qpdolfis&ov 
 
 
 drjXolfis&ov 
 
 
 Tifiaoio&ov 
 
 
 qpdeoio&ov 
 
 
 drjXooia&ov 
 
 
 TL^MOd-OV 
 
 
 qpiXo'iG&ov 
 
 
 drjXoiG&ov 
 
 
 TLfiaolod-rjV 
 
 
 qpdeolo&rjv 
 
 
 drjXoolo&tjv 
 
 
 Tifuoo&rjv 
 
 
 cpdoio&riv 
 
 
 drjXolG&rjv 
 
 P. 
 
 Tl[A(X0l(jlS&a 
 
 P. 
 
 qpdsolfis&a 
 
 P. 
 
 drjXoolps&a 
 
 
 Tl(l(pfJ,E&U 
 
 
 qpdolfis&a 
 
 
 driXoifze&a 
 
 
 TLfldoLG&S 
 
 
 yiXioio&E 
 
 
 drjXooiG&e 
 
 
 TL/ICOG&E 
 
 
 (piXoia&s 
 
 
 dt]Xdlxs&6 
 
 
 TlfidoiVTO 
 
 
 CplXsOlVTO 
 
 
 dtjXoOLVTO 
 
 
 Tl^lWVTO 
 
 
 qpdowro 
 
 
 drjXdlvTo 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 rifidov 
 
 ft 
 
 qpdsov 
 
 8. 
 
 dyXoov 
 
 
 TlfXOJ 
 
 
 qpdov 
 
 
 dyXov 
 
 
 Tifiaio&co 
 
 
 qpdeio&co 
 
 
 drjXoio&a 
 
 
 Ttpda&a) 
 
 
 qpdslo&co 
 
 
 drjXovG&a 
 
 D. 
 
 Tifidsa&ov 
 
 Z>. 
 
 cpdito&ov 
 
 D. 
 
 drjXosG&ov 
 
 
 Tifida&ov 
 
 
 cpdua&ov 
 
 
 drjXovo&ov 
 
 
 TlfiaSG&COV 
 
 
 qpdsio&cov 
 
 
 df]X0EG&(0V 
 
 
 Tipdo&cov 
 
 
 (pdelo&cov 
 
 
 dtjXovG&cov 
 
 P. 
 
 TipdsG&S 
 
 P. 
 
 qpdiso&s 
 
 P. 
 
 dtjXoSG&E 
 
 
 Tlfild&E 
 
 
 qpdsTa&s 
 
 
 dtjXovG&s 
 
 
 Tipaeo&wootv i 
 
 or 
 
 qjdsev&woav or 
 
 
 drjloso&cooav or 
 
 
 Tifxaeo&cov 
 
 
 qjdeio&aiv 
 
 
 drjXoEG&cov 
 
 
 Tifzao&aootv 
 
 or 
 
 opdslo&cooav or 
 
 
 drjXovo&WGav OY 
 
 
 Tl[ldo&(OV 
 
 
 (pdelo&wv 
 
 
 dyXovG&wv 
 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 Tifiasad-ou, 
 
 
 <pdsEG&cu 
 
 
 drjXo&G&at, 
 
 
 Tifido&ai, 
 
 
 (pilsio&ai 
 
 
 drjXovo&ai, 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 
 
 
 Ti[ia6[j,svog, rj t 
 
 ov 
 
 ydsofisvog, 7], ov 
 
 
 drjXoofiEvog, 7j f ov 
 
 
 Tifiwpsvog, rj } 
 
 ov 
 
 (pdovfievog, r], o% 
 
 f 
 
 drjXovfiEvog, rj, ov 
 
124 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 117. 
 
 VERBS IN ML 
 
 § 1 1 7. 1 . Some verbs in aa, £ a, oa, vco, form their 
 present and imperfect, and their second aorist active 
 and middle, by dropping a, and annexing the termin- 
 ations without the connecting vowels. (§§ 84: 85.) 
 
 The augment of the past tenses of verbs in pi follows the 
 general rules (§§ 78-80). 
 
 Note 1. All verbs in fit may be inflected like verbs in <v. E. g. r&iu, iu$ t 
 itt, for rtB-nfin, tiSi nti, imperf. IrtB-tov, tts 9 «£, for W&nv, ns, n» 
 
 2. The radical vowel («, s, o, u) is lengthened in the singu- 
 la?* of the present and imperfect Indicative Active, a and £ 
 become 77, and o becomes w. 
 
 The first and third persons singular of the present indicative 
 active end in pi, 01, respectively. (§ 84. N. 1.) E. g. 
 laxdco gives Xarrjpi, rjg, rjai ' %axr\v, rjg, 77 * 
 Ti&ico " jldr^i, rjg, r\ai' frl&tjv, T]g, r\' 
 didoco " dldcopi, cog, coai ' idldcov, cog, co ' 
 dsixrvco <c delxvvpi, tig, voi ' idslxvvv, Hg, v. 
 
 Note 2. The termination voi of the third person plural of 
 the indicative active is often changed into aoi. E. g. xi^r^pi, 
 Ti&iuoi for Ti&eioi, that is, for ti&ivai, (§ 12. 5.) 
 
 3. The Indicative Passive and Middle generally retains 
 the short vowel of the root. E. g. 
 
 laraco, 'larrjpi, pass. Xarapai, aaai, arai ' lorapiyv, aao, aro " 
 ridico, ri&r t pi, " ri&tpai, eaai, srai' in&iprjv, eao, sro " 
 
 didoco, dldcopi, " dldopai, oaai, orai ' ididoprjV, ooo, oro ' 
 
 dtixvvco, delxvvpi, " delxvvpai, vaai, vrai ' idsiy.vvprjv, vao, vto. 
 
 Note 3. The terminations aai, 00, of the second person singu- 
 lar, often drop the a, and are contracted with the radical 
 vowel. E. g. tl&rjfii, rl&tpai, Ti&Fom, Ti&sai contracted rl&y. 
 
 The old writers (as Homer, Hesiod, Herodotus) generally 
 use the uncontracted second person singular. 
 
 4. The Subjunctive of verbs in r\pi and copi takes the con- 
 necting vowels and is contracted. In this case ar\ and ay are 
 contracted into r\ and r\ respectively. The subjunctive of verbs 
 in vpi follows the analogy of rimrco. E. g. 
 
 lardo), lorr^pi subj. laraco, dyg, ay contracted lorco, yg, y 
 
 ti&soj, ridr t pi " ri&sco, iyg, ey " n&co, yg, y 
 
 didoo), blbo)(xi " didoco, oyg, 6y " didco, cog, co 
 
 duy.ivco,dtiy.vvpi " dtixvvco, vyg, vy. 
 
§ 117] VERBS IN (XL. 125 
 
 Note 4. In some instances the subjunctive of verbs in vfii rejects the connect- 
 ing vowel. JE. g. ^tatrxiSavvupi, ^taaKibc&vvvffi for dHMTKihcivvuy. Such forms may 
 be easily mistaken for the corresponding ones of the indicative. (§ 86. N. 2. ) 
 
 5. The Optative Active of verbs in r^ii and wp annexes 
 to the root of the verb the endings r\v, rjg, r\, dual tjxov, t\xk\v, 
 plural rjfisv, yxe, yaw, preceded by i. E. g. 
 
 loxdco, iaxr\\ii opt. act. loxalrjV, alrjg, alrj 
 xi&ico, xl&T}[ii 7L\}slt}V, elrjg, sir] 
 
 didoco, dldcoui didolrjV, olrjg, olrj. 
 
 The optative active of verbs in vpi follows the analogy of 
 Timet. E. g. dsixvvco, deixvvfii, dsacvvoi^i, voig, vol. 
 
 Note 5. The dual and plural of the optative active often 
 drop r\ ' in which case r\aav becomes ev. See the paradigms. 
 
 Note 6. In a few instances, the diphthong oi in the optative active of verbs in 
 ufjt.i is changed into u>. E. g. dfiufit, 2 aor. opt. £«>?v, $&»)?, for %o'inv, %oin$, 
 
 6. The Optative Passive and Middle of verbs in rjfit 
 and topi annexes the terminations (§ 87), likewise preceded 
 by an l. E. g. 
 
 loxdco, Xaxrjfii opt. pas. loxalfirjv, ouo, cCixo 
 xi&sco, xl^y\iii " Ti&elfirjv, uo, sixo 
 
 didoco, dldco/iL " didolfj.r}v, oio, olxo 
 
 The optative passive and middle of verbs in vpi follows the 
 analogy of xvnxco. E. g. dsixvvco, delxw^L, dsixvvolfirjv, voio, voixo. 
 
 Note. 7. In some instances, the optative of verbs in vpu is formed after the 
 analogy of verbs in npi or &>fi*. E. g. taiww, tiatw/Ai, pres. mid. opt. 3d pers. 
 sing, lecivvro (more analogically ^cuvuito), 
 
 7. The Imperative annexes the terminations to the 
 root. (§ 88. 1.) E. g. 
 
 loxdco, Xoxri^ii imperat. Xoxa&i, dxco * Xoxaoo, cla&to * 
 xi&sco, xl&rjfxi " xidzii (§ 14. N. 4), ixco ' xl&soo, io&co * 
 
 didoco, dldcofZL n dldo&i, oxco ' dldooo, oo&co ' 
 
 dsixvvco, dslxvvfiL " duxvv&i, vxco ' dsixwoo, vo&co. 
 
 Note 8. The second person singular of the imperative active 
 sometimes drops S-l, and lengthens the radical vowel. E. g. 
 Xoxr ti ui, Xoxr\ for Xoxdd-i * dslxvv^ii, dslxvv for dsixvv&i. 
 
 Note 9. The termination ao of the second person singidar 
 of the imperative passive and middle often drops the g, and is 
 contracted with the radical vowel. E. g. Xoxrjpi, Xoxaoo, Xoxao 
 contracted Xoxco. 
 
 8. The Infinitive Active annexes vcti to the root of the 
 verb. E. p*. 
 
 * 11* 
 
196 INFLECTION or words. [§ 117. 
 
 hniao, XoTfjpt infill, act. \gtuvoli 
 
 ji&iw, vL&fifit u Ti&evai 
 
 didoco, oidtofU " didorou 
 
 deixri'w, dtixWfMt " dsixvvvou, 
 
 9. The Infinitive Passive and Middle annexes o&ca to 
 the root. E. g. 
 
 laTcxb), 'i(jiri{ii inf. pas. &, mid. Xorcto&ai, arda&ca 
 
 did oca , dldwfu " dldoa&cu, doo&ai 
 
 daxn'a), dslxvvfit, " dslxvvo&cu. 
 
 10. The root of the Participle Active is formed by an- 
 nexing ri to the root of the verb. E. g. 
 
 tffxatt, YoTrjfiL part. act. loxdg, dvrog, (§ 36. 2) 
 
 Ki^Ew, il&i^i " Ti&elg, ivTog, (ibid.) 
 
 didooj, dldwjj.L " didovg, ovrog, (ibid.) 
 
 dsixvvb), dslxvv^i * dsixvvg, vvTog, (ibid.) 
 
 11. The Participle Passive and Middle annexes psrog to 
 the root of the verb. E. g. 
 
 toraw, XarrjfiL part. pas. &/ mid. lotdfievog, ardfievog 
 
 Tl&£(0, tld-^fll " Tl&£(AEVOg, &£[l£VOg 
 
 didoco, dldwfii " didofuevog, dopsvog 
 
 deixvvco, dslxvvfxi " deixvvfievog. 
 
 12. The Second Aorist Active lengthens the radical vowel 
 throughout the indicative and imperative, and in the infinitive. 
 A, when it is not preceded by q, becomes r\. E. g. /ft/Saw, /?//%/*, 
 
 2 aor. i'firjv, r)g, r\, tjtov, tjttjv, r^xiv, r\xt, yaav * imperat. fiij&t, 
 i)T(x)j tJtov, ijicov, rjjs t rjiwoav ' infin. firjvcti. 
 
 Note 10. KTHMI and OTTHMI retain the short vowel in the second 
 aorist active. See the Anomalous ktuvco and ovrda). See also x\vu. 
 
 Aio&jp/ and rlB-n/xt lengthen the vowel only in the singular of the second 
 aorist indicative, and in the second aorist infinitive. See the paradigms. 
 
 Note 1 1 . The second person singular of the second aorist imperative, in a few 
 instances, takes s instead of Sv. See the Anom. Vtiafju, 'ix, M * 'V"> ^iS-j^*/, <pfiw> 
 
 Note 1 2. The imperatives /3>5S/ and (rrvSt, from (Zifiv/ut and 'Icrmfjct, in com- 
 position, often drop $/, and change n into a. E. g. *«<r«/3a for xardfinB-j. 
 
 Note 13. The verbs riB-tifit, 'inpt, and Vtiwpt, lengthen s and o into «/ and at/ 
 in the second aorist active infinitive : thus, SzTvcu, tTvcu, Souvat. 
 
 Note 14. KTIMI, IIIMI, 3>0IMI, and nAHMI, in some of the parts 
 of the second aorist follow the analogy of verbs in upt or upi. See the 
 Anomalous KTIfl, <rUu, q>§Uu, and <7r\&>cj. 
 
 Note 15. In a few instances, the second aorist middle lengthens the 
 radical vowel in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and participle. See the 
 Anomalous (hoiXXu, Kt%a.vu, ovtvrj/xi, tfiffrXtipi. 
 
 Note 16. Those verbs in v/m, of which the present is used, 
 
§ 117.] VERBS IN (XI. 127 
 
 have no second aorist. On the other hand, when the second 
 aorist is used, the present is obsolete. E. g. delxwpt, has no 
 second aorist ; and I'yijv comes from the obsolete &TML 
 
 In order, therefore, to complete the paradigm of verbs in 
 vfii, the second aorist of JTMlis subjoined to dsixvvpa. 
 
 Note 17. Dialects. (1) In the indicative the Doric has 
 Ti, vxi, for at, vol, E. g. xI&tjxl, xi&ivxi. (§ 84. N. 6.) 
 
 (2) In the imperfect and second aorist indicative, the Epic 
 and Ionic dialects often use axov, oxopirjv, in which case the 
 radical vowel always remains short. E. g. xl&rjfu, xl&eoxov for 
 etI&tjV * XaxrjpiL, oxdaxov for I'oxrjv. (§ 85. N. 5.) 
 
 (3) The Epic often drops oa in the third person plural of the 
 imperfect and second aorist active indicative, in which case the 
 preceding long vowel is shortened. E. g. %oxr\pu, i'oxav for \gxt\- 
 oav ' xl&rijj,i, txi&sv for frl&saav' ATMI, edvv for tdvoav. 
 
 (4) The Ionic often uses axai } axo, in the indicative passive 
 and middle. E. g. xl&ypu, xi&saxcti, ixi&iaxo. (§ 84. N. 6.) 
 
 (5) The Epic and Ionic often use the uncontracted sub- 
 junctive. E. g. rld-rifii, &sm for &a. 
 
 (6) Sometimes the Epic, in the subjunctive, lengthens the 
 radical vowel s into ei or 77. E. g. xl&rjfii, d-dw, &rjr t g, for -fria, 
 &ipg. (§ 116. N. 4.) 
 
 (7) It sometimes shortens the connecting vowels of the sub- 
 junctive. E. g. Tl&rjfu, &uo[isv for &sIo)[iev. (§ 86. N. 3.) 
 
 (8) In the third person singular of the subjunctive active, it 
 sometimes uses 01. E. g. dldapii, dwoi for dm, (§ 86. N. 2.) 
 
 (9) Verbs in wfn sometimes change the radical o into w in 
 the subjunctive. E. g. dibjofii, dwco, dcoyg, for 6w 9 6$?. 
 
 (10) The epic poets sometimes lengthen the radical vowel 
 in the infinitive active, and participle passive and middle, 
 E. g. Ti&rjfii; xi&rjfievcti, xi&qfisvog ' dldcapii, didovvcu. 
 
 Note 18. Accent, The rules stated above (§ 93) apply also to verbs in pts. 
 We only observe here that, 
 
 (1 ) The accent of the regular third person plural of the indicative active devi- 
 ates from the rule (§ 93. 1). 
 
 (2) The dissyllabic forms of the present active indicative of upti and Qnptt, de- 
 viate from the rule (§ 93. 2). In composition, however, they follow the rule. 
 
 (3 ) The infinitive active takes the accent on the penult. E. g. srrdvas. Ex- 
 cept the Epic infinitive in ptzvou, as riSyptveu. 
 
 (4) The participle active takes the accent on the last syllable. E.g. ltrrcisi < r&iU» 
 
 (5) When the syllabic augment is omitted (§ 78. N. 3), long monosyllabic 
 forms take the circumflex. E. g. yvca for lyvu from yiyvaxrxu. 
 
 ( 6) For the accent of the subjunctive and optative passive of 'Irrupts and Vtiu- 
 ptty see the paradigms. 
 
 Asovpts sometimes throws the accent back on the antepenult in the subjunctive 
 and optative passive, when the last syllable permits it (§ 20). "Irrvpts sometimes 
 does the same in the optative passive. 
 
r:s 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 K "7. 
 
 Synopti- 
 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 iaxriv 
 lcxi\v 
 
 ttfrtS 
 
 tfTfiJ 
 
 laraiifv 
 <sxaii\v 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 TL&TJfXL 
 
 hi&7fv 
 
 TL&C) 
 
 &6 
 
 TL&SL7JV 
 &SL7JV 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 SlScOflL 
 
 iStScov 
 eScov 
 
 8186 
 8S 
 
 StSotyv 
 Sotyv 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 Aorist 2. 
 
 8sixvvfxi 
 iSscxvvv 
 eSvv 
 
 SsLXVVO 
 SvCJ 
 
 8sLXVVOLf.U 
 
 
 
 PASSIVE AND 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 2 Aor. Mid. 
 
 i'cmxuaL 
 LOidfjirfv 
 iardfirfp 
 
 1(jTG>[jLOU 
 OTCOUCU 
 
 laxaipjv 
 azacfzqv 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 2 Aor. Mid. 
 
 Tt&8fxai 
 izi&ifirfv 
 
 i&ifjLTfV 
 
 
 Tt&etfxriv 
 •freifirfv 
 
 Present. 
 Imperfect. 
 2 Aor. Mid. 
 
 SiSoficu 
 
 i8t86fJLTfV 
 
 iSopijv 
 
 SlScouou 
 d&fiou 
 
 SiSot[.iriv 
 8oi(.njv 
 
 Present. Setxvvfiai Sstxvvco k uat SsLxvvoiuqv 
 
 Imperfect. i8stxvvf,i7jv 
 
 2 Aor. Mid. iSvpqv Svcofxou Svfajv 
 
§ 117.] 
 
 VERBS IN pi. 
 
 
 cal Table. 
 
 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infijstitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 idra&i 
 
 loxdvcu 
 
 lards 
 
 tirfj&L 
 
 azfjvcu 
 
 aids 
 
 TL&STL 
 
 Ti&ivcu 
 
 TL&SLS 
 
 &8TL 
 
 fteivcu 
 
 &SIS 
 
 diSo&t 
 
 SiSovat 
 
 8t8ovs 
 
 So&i 
 
 Sovvat 
 
 Sovg 
 
 Sstxvv&i 
 
 Shtcvvvcu 
 
 Ssixvvs 
 
 Sv&t 
 
 Svvai 
 
 dvs 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 
 i'aratio 
 
 icnaa&ai 
 
 ididfisvos 
 
 (jjdao 
 
 tijdo'&aL 
 
 didfxsvos 
 
 TI&S60 
 
 ji&sa&aL 
 
 Tl&ifl£VOS 
 
 &S0O 
 
 &ia&ai 
 
 &S[lSVOS 
 
 Stdoao 
 
 Si8o(j&qu 
 
 diSopsvos 
 
 Soto 
 
 86o&ai 
 
 S6 L U€VOS 
 
 Seixvvoo 
 
 Sscxvvd&cu 
 
 8siXVV[A£VOS 
 
 Svao 
 
 Sva&ou 
 
 Svpevos 
 
 129 
 
130 
 
 INI l.K.CTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ U7, 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 I place 
 
 I put 
 
 I give 
 
 I show 
 
 & 
 
 Xoxqui 
 tongs 
 
 xl&tjpi 
 xl&yg 
 
 Tl&7)Ol(v) 
 
 dldcofxi 
 
 dldojg 
 
 dldojoi(v) 
 
 delxrviM 
 delxrvoi(v) 
 
 D. 
 
 Xoxaxov 
 
 xl&sfisv 
 xl&exov 
 
 dldoptv 
 dldoxov 
 
 delxvvixev 
 delxvvxov 
 
 
 Xoxaxov 
 
 rl&sxov 
 
 dldoxov 
 
 delxvvxov 
 
 P. 
 
 XoXCtflEV 
 
 Xoxaxs 
 
 xl&sxe 
 
 dldoutv 
 dldoxe 
 
 delxvi\uev 
 delxvvxe 
 
 
 loraai(y) 
 
 ti&uoi(v) or 
 xi$iaoi,(v) 
 
 didoi>oi{v) or 
 didooioi(v) 
 
 deixvvoi(v) or 
 dsixrvdoL(v) 
 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 & 
 
 toxrjy 
 taTTjg 
 
 XoXJ] 
 
 ixl&yv 
 ixl&rj 
 
 (dldcav 
 (dldojg 
 (dldco 
 
 (delxvvv 
 (delxvvg 
 (deixrv 
 
 D. 
 
 Xoxotfiev 
 
 XoXOLXOV 
 
 (xl&spev 
 (xl&sxov 
 
 (dldoutv 
 (dldoxov 
 
 (delxvvusv 
 (delxvvxov 
 
 
 loxaXTjV 
 
 ixi&ixrp 
 
 (didox^v 
 
 (deiXVVX^V 
 
 P. 
 
 Xoxafisv 
 Xoxaxs 
 
 (xl&spsv 
 ixi&sxs 
 
 (didopsv 
 (dldoxe 
 
 (delxvvuev 
 (delxvvxe 
 
 
 Xoxaoav 
 
 (xl&eoav 
 
 (dldooav 
 
 (delxvvoav 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 Xoxrp 
 toxr^g 
 toxrj 
 
 I'&TjV 
 
 i&7)g 
 e&7] 
 
 tdojp 
 Id cog 
 
 tdb) 
 
 I'dvv 
 
 tdvg 
 tdv 
 
 D. 
 
 loxr^tv 
 
 I'OXTJXOV 
 
 (oxr^x^v 
 
 e&rxov 
 (&ixr\v 
 
 edofiev 
 edoxov 
 (doxr t v 
 
 toi\utv 
 edvxov 
 (dvxi]v 
 
 P. 
 
 10X7] UlY 
 
 taxr t xs 
 ioxr { oav 
 
 I'&EflEV 
 
 I'&exe 
 t&eoav 
 
 i'dofiev 
 
 tdoxe 
 
 Xdooav 
 
 Idvuev 
 
 I'd it a 
 
 \dvoav 
 
 (§ 117. N. 16.) 
 
§117.] 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE OF VERBS IN fti. 
 
 131 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. 
 
 D. 
 
 f(JTW 
 
 Ti&a 
 
 dtdS 
 
 deLxvvw 
 
 lotf t g 
 loijj 
 
 Ti&jjg 
 
 didcog 
 didco 
 
 dsixvvyg 
 duxvvji 
 
 loxMfisv 
 
 IOTTJTOV 
 
 ioirjiov 
 
 TL&OJ(jI£V 
 TL&JJTOV 
 Tl&TjTOV 
 
 didwiov 
 didwiov 
 
 deixvvoopsv 
 buxvyrpov 
 dsLxvvrjTov 
 
 i0T7]T& 
 
 
 didwpev 
 didcoTS 
 
 deLxvvcojAev 
 
 deixvvrjTS 
 
 dst,xrv(o<si(v) 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 Oreo in- 
 
 #(3 inflected 
 
 da inflected 
 
 dvco (§ 117.4.) 
 
 fleet, like like the like the 
 
 the Pres. Pres. Pres. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 s. 
 
 \0XaiT\V 
 
 Tl$UT\V 
 
 didolyv 
 
 dsixvvoifiL 
 
 
 loTttlr t g 
 
 Tl&U7]g 
 
 didolrjg 
 
 dsixvvoig 
 
 
 loTCtlrj 
 
 JL&sif) 
 
 didolr] 
 
 dsixrvoL 
 
 D. 
 
 loTulriuiv 
 
 TL&elrjfxtv 
 
 didolrjuev 
 
 dsixvvoifxsv 
 
 
 loxalijTOV 
 
 Tiddr\TOV 
 
 didolqjov 
 
 dsiXVVOLTOV 
 
 
 lOlU.ir}T1]V 
 
 Tl&UT(l7\V 
 
 didoirjTrjV 
 
 dsixvvoljrjv 
 
 P. 
 
 lOTalrjfxsv 
 
 xi&elrjusv 
 
 didolr ti usv 
 
 deixvvoifisv 
 
 
 iGialrjjs 
 
 TL&slrjTS 
 
 didders 
 
 deixvvoiTS 
 
 
 loictlrjGav 
 
 Ti&drioav 
 Or thus 
 
 didolrjOctv 
 (§ 117. N. 5) 
 
 deixvvoisv 
 
 D. 
 
 lOTCUTOV 
 
 Tl&sllOV 
 
 didoijov 
 
 
 
 \QTaiT7]V 
 
 Ti&ehrjv 
 
 didoltrjv 
 
 
 P. 
 
 loToTijizv 
 
 TL&HfXSV 
 
 didolfisv 
 
 
 
 IOTGUTS 
 
 71&HTS 
 
 didolTS 
 
 
 
 loTGUSV 
 
 jid-slsv 
 
 didolsv 
 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 
 GTOilrjv in- 
 
 &drjv inflect 
 
 dolrjv inflect. 
 
 dvrjv 
 
 
 flect, like 
 
 like the 
 
 like the 
 
 
 
 the Pres. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 (§ 117. N. 7.) 
 
138 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 t§ 117. 
 
 S. 'lOTCt&l 
 
 tI&sti 
 
 dldo&i 
 
 delxvv&i, 
 
 or Xair) 
 liijdjta 
 
 tl&£t(0 
 
 didoTW 
 
 or deixvv 
 dsLxyincj 
 
 D, XoTOLTOV 
 
 tI&stov 
 
 didorov 
 didonov 
 
 dslxvvrov 
 dstxvvicov 
 
 P. XoTaie 
 
 loTanoociv 
 or iaiuvTwv 
 
 tI&ste 
 or Ti&ivrwv 
 
 dldoTS 
 or didovTwv 
 
 dsixvvTS 
 deixvvHQOctv 
 or deixvvvTwv 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 OITjTb) 
 
 dirt, or &eg 
 &£t(o 
 
 do&t or dog 
 
 doTOD 
 
 Sv&o 
 dvxoo 
 
 D. GT7JTOV 
 OT)]T(OV 
 
 &hov 
 
 doiov 
 docotv 
 
 dvrav 
 
 P. OTTITE 
 
 or oTavnov 
 
 or &£vjtov 
 
 Sots 
 doTwoav 
 or dovnov 
 
 dvTwaav 
 or dvvtiov 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Pres. loxavai 
 2 Aor. GTrpHxi 
 
 &UVOU, 
 
 didovai 
 dovvcu 
 
 dsixvvvai, 
 dvvcu 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 
 Pres. loTag 
 2 Aor. oidg 
 
 Ti&eig 
 ■&elg 
 
 didovg 
 dovg 
 
 bsixvvg 
 dvg 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 8. 
 
 \oxaoai 
 
 jLdtOfU 
 
 dldof/ai 
 dldooai, 
 
 dtixvvfjtat 
 delxvvoon 
 
 
 Xoxaxai 
 
 or rid-rj 
 
 dldoTCU 
 
 ddxvvxcu, 
 
 D. 
 
 lozao&ov 
 
 tI&eo&ov 
 
 did6[ie&ov 
 dtdooftov 
 
 8flXVVfl£&OV 
 
 dtlxvvo&ov 
 
 
 'iotao&ov 
 
 tI&so&ov 
 
 dldoo&ov 
 
 dtixvvo&ov 
 
 P. 
 
 Xozuto&e 
 
 tISso&s 
 
 dldoa&e 
 
 dsixvvfis&a 
 ddxvvo&s 
 
 
 'loiuvtui 
 
 T.L&IVTVLI 
 
 dldovxat, 
 
 btixvvvTai 
 
§117.] 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE OF VERBS IN fit. 
 
 133 
 
 Imperfect . 
 
 8. 
 
 D. 
 
 P. 
 
 lardfirjv 
 
 iTl&i[At}V 
 
 ididofirjv 
 
 idsixrvfiqv 
 
 Xotuoo 
 
 ETC&EGO 
 
 id Id ooo 
 
 idEly.WGo 
 
 or Xgtco 
 
 or frl&ov 
 
 or idldov 
 
 
 Xoitxzo 
 
 ill&ETO 
 
 Edldoxo 
 
 EOEIXVVTO 
 
 lOTCtfit&OV 
 
 £Tl&E[J,E&OV 
 
 idido^uE&ov 
 
 idsixrvfisd-ov 
 
 Xgtgco&ov 
 
 frl&EO&OV 
 
 idldoa&ov 
 
 £&UWVG&OV 
 
 lOTUG&rft 
 
 eti&so&tjv 
 
 ididoG&TfV 
 
 idELy.rvG&rjV 
 
 l0TCA[Xbda 
 
 iTi&sfie&a 
 
 idLdopExta 
 
 ideiy.ri\us&(X 
 
 Xoxao&s 
 
 ixt&Eo&e 
 
 idldoG&s 
 
 idEiy.rvo&E 
 
 XgTUVTO 
 
 iiidevTO 
 
 idldovTO 
 
 edeixrvi'TO 
 
 Second Aorist Middle. 
 
 ioTaurjV 
 
 i&iflTjV 
 
 idofxrjv 
 
 idvjiirjV 
 
 inflected 
 
 inflected 
 
 inflected 
 
 inflected 
 
 like the 
 
 like the 
 
 like the 
 
 like 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 edeiavvfiriv 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present 
 
 S. 
 
 D 
 
 fOtjl 
 
 loTrjrtu 
 
 loTtOfAE&OV 
 
 loTrfG&ov 
 IgttJg&ov 
 
 P. loT(6[lE&a 
 
 IgttJg&s 
 Igtcovtou 
 
 Ti&cofiou 
 
 Tl&7}TCU 
 
 TL&(t)flE&OV 
 
 Tld-JjG&OV 
 
 U&TjG&OV 
 
 71&C0VTCXL 
 
 did co 
 
 dldtOTLU 
 
 dido\uEd-ov 
 
 didcoG&ov 
 
 didcoo&ov 
 
 dcdo^uE^a 
 
 $lSiQG&8 
 
 didcovTcu 
 
 dsixvioopaL 
 
 feixvvytak 
 
 deixrvraftsd-ov 
 
 dEiy.vvr^G&ov 
 
 dtittvvria&ov 
 
 dElxrVtofiB&Cl 
 
 deiitrvriG&s 
 
 dsiXVV&VTCti, 
 
 Second Aorist Middle. 
 
 GTtQfiai 
 
 -frcofiou 
 
 dtoficu 
 
 dvcofxcti 
 
 like the 
 
 like the 
 
 like the 
 
 like 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 diixvvwfiat 
 
 12 
 
134 
 
 INFLI OF WORDS, 
 
 [^ 11' 
 
 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 & 
 
 iatalfAfjp 
 
 IGIliW 
 IGTlillO 
 
 Tl&El(At]V 
 
 ti&elo 
 
 didoij.ii]v 
 didolo 
 did olio 
 
 deixrvoi(j)]v 
 
 dsixrvoio 
 
 dsiTivvoiio 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 lOTaliiie&ov 
 
 \gTOUG&OV 
 
 IgtccIg&i]v 
 IgtuIo&e 
 
 Tl&El^E&OV 
 
 Tl&sl(J&OV 
 
 Tl&SLOd-fjV 
 
 TL&stpe&a 
 
 TI&eIo&S 
 Tl&UPTO 
 
 dtdoi\u8d-ov 
 
 didolo&ov 
 
 didolGfrrjV 
 
 dtdolfjiE&a 
 
 didolo&s 
 
 didcuvio 
 
 deiv.vvolfie&ov 
 
 deixvvoia&ov 
 
 dsixvvolo&riv 
 
 dsLxvuol^e&oi 
 
 duxivoio&E 
 
 duxvvoivio 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist Middle. 
 
 
 
 OTal t ur}V 
 like the 
 Present. 
 
 like the 
 Present. 
 
 like the 
 Present. 
 
 (§ 117. N. 17.; 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 S. XOTCIOO 
 
 or IffTw 
 Igtuo&gj 
 D. \oiao&ov 
 
 LGTUG&CJV 
 
 P. Igtug&e 
 loiuo&woav 
 or Iotuu&cov 
 
 OTUOO 
 
 like the 
 Present. 
 
 Pres. XoTuo&at 
 2 A.M. oido&ou 
 
 Pres. 
 2 A.M. 
 
 ujzuiusvog 
 OTUfiivog 
 
 tI&sgo 
 
 or jl&ov 
 ti&eo&co 
 ji&eg&ov 
 
 Tl&EG&GJV 
 
 tI&eg&s 
 
 Tl&iofr(j)G(XV 
 
 dldoao 
 
 or dldov 
 didoo&a) 
 dldoa&ov 
 
 dldoGd(x)V 
 
 dldoG&e 
 didoufrwGuv 
 
 or ti&eg&wv or didoG&wv 
 Second Aorist Middle. 
 
 &EGO or &ov Sogo or dov 
 like the like the 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 jl&EO&ai 
 d-EG&ai 
 
 didoofrai 
 dooduc 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Tl&lflEVOQ 
 &E(AEVOq 
 
 did6 t uEvog 
 domrog 
 
 SeIxvvgo 
 
 dsixvw&a 
 
 delxvvo&ov 
 
 deixvvG&ojv 
 
 dEixrvG&s 
 
 dsixrvG&coGav 
 
 Or dELXVVG&QOV 
 dl'GO 
 
 like 
 
 dElXVVOO. 
 
 dELxvva&ai 
 dvodcu 
 
 dEr/.rvinvog 
 dvfXEiog 
 
 Remark. It is supposed that the aorist of verbs in p.t originally ended in 
 0» t 6//>jv, (§§ 105 : 115. 2.) Hence its name second aorist. 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 135 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 § 118. 1. Anomalous verbs are those which have, or are 
 supposed to have, more than one present (§ 96). 
 
 2. All verbal forms, which omit the connecting vowel (§ 85. 
 1), are anomalous ; except the perfect and aorist passive 
 
 (§§ 91 : 92). 
 
 3. The following catalogue contains nearly all those verbs 
 which are apt to perplex the learner. 
 
 Remark. In this Grammar, obsolete or imaginary Presents 
 (§ 96) and Nominatives (§ 46), are always printed in capitals. 
 They are so printed " in order that the eye may not become 
 accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude 
 of unused and merely imaginary forms, and thus rendered less 
 capable of detecting barbarisms at first sight. " 
 
 originally FA TO, whence xuvaQoits 
 (see xeeroiyw^, which originally 
 was xaFFaZuts. (§§ 1. N. 1, 3 : 
 10. N. 2.) 
 aya>, lead, «ifo), ?'|#, Perf. r^a 
 and dyr } oxa, rjyfiai, ijx&i]v, 
 2 A. jjyayov, 2 A. Mid. jya- 
 yo^v. (§§ 96. 19, N. 1 : 
 81. 1.) The Perfect dyr t o X a 
 is not Attic. 
 
 Note 1 . 'Ayf,o%ei is formed as 
 follows: elya, ArAm, AFOm, 
 vyoX&i ayr'ys^a, u.yr,o^oc. The 
 omission of the second y is acci- 
 dental. 
 
 Note 2. In Homer we find 
 Aor. Imperat, 2d pers. plur. a|sr« 
 for cI&tz. (§ 88. N. 3.) 
 
 C A/IJ1, see avduvct). 
 
 ddgco (AEPfL), regular, = 
 at'ow. The epic poets have 
 Pluperf. Mid. 3d pers. sing. 
 
 aWQTO for 7JEQT0. (§ 96. 19.) 
 
 «f|o), Epic, z= av$oj. 
 
 Srjfii (AEJl)y blow, Lifin. drjvou, 
 
 Part, dug, Imperf. a^v (in 
 
 Homer). Pres. Pass, ur^uui. 
 
 J§117.N.17.) 
 
 alrsb), praise, ioto and rjao), toot 
 
 AASl, injure, A. aaoot contract- 
 ed aoa, A. Pass. ddodi^v, A. 
 Mid. daod^v. Pres. Mid. 
 3d pers. sing, ddica. (§ 109. 
 N. 1.) 
 
 Sya/noa {ArAfL y ATIIMI), ad- 
 mire, A. Pass, rjydo&rjv, F. 
 Mid. uyduoficti, A. Mid. (not 
 Attic) rjyuodfjrjv. (§§ 117 : 
 95. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
 
 The Present dyiopcu or 
 dyuLotMu, am angry at, envy, 
 is used by the epic poets. 
 
 ^ (§96. 18.) 
 
 dysiQco (ArEPJl), collect, dys- 
 ow, riysiga, ayyysQxa, ctyiqysQ- 
 fxcu, r t yig&rjV, 2 A. Mid. i]y£- 
 qoixtiv (Epic), Infin. dysgt- 
 o&ou, Part, dyyofnevog for 
 dyeQOfxerog. (§§ 96. 18 : 81 . 
 1 : 26. J.) 
 
 Syvvfit (ArJl), break, F. «&), 
 
 A. «x|« (rarely r t $a), 2 Perf. 
 
 t'uya, 2 A. Pass, iayrp or 
 
 iayrp. (§§96.9: 80. N.2.) 
 
 Note. The simple Am was 
 
130 
 
 INFLECTION OP M(II!I)S. 
 
 [§118. 
 
 and r t (Ht> \Y.<.t> )ju<u, $\hpr. 
 (§95. N.2.) 
 cuqh<\ tak(\ choose, 7 t ow, rjxa, 
 *, iin,,-. (fc 95. N. 2.) 
 Yrom'EASl, 2 A. tiXov, 2 A. 
 Mid. tlXoprir, 2 F. Up (rare). 
 
 In tlie Perfect, the Ionics prefix 
 to this verb a sort of Attic redupli- 
 cation with the smooth breathing, 
 agaigrixcc, a^ttt^rif^ett. (§ 81.) 
 
 al'gw (APJl), raise, dow, rjga, 
 
 ^oy.cx, rjrxnYi, ro&?jV. (§}§} 96. 
 
 18: 104. N. 5.) 
 alo&dropai ( l/^Ofl), perceive, 
 
 feci, Perf. Mid. fju&rjfiaL, F. 
 
 Mid. aiuihiGOfi(u,2. A. Mid. 
 ^ yo&owr. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
 axaxl'Qto (AXSL), trouble, afflict, 
 
 F. kx^'(ow, A. ijXix/^ua, 2 A. 
 
 rjxazop, 2 A. Mid. i]yM^6^p. 
 
 Mid. uy.axLQoiMu, grieve, feel 
 
 grief, am afflicted, (§96. 
 ^ 10, N. 1.) 
 ctxaxpivog, r\, ov y sharpened, 
 
 pointed, a defective Perf. 
 
 Pass. Part, from AXJ2. 
 
 , <$ 81 - N -> 
 
 axouw (AKOJl), hear, r^ovoa, 
 tJxov/.u (not Attic), ovafiai, 
 ova&rjV, ova o pat, 2 Perf. mxtJ- 
 y.o«, 2 Pluperf. fwHotiv. 
 (§§96. 18:81: 107. N. 1: 
 
 ^ 109. N. 1.) 
 
 uXdouat, wander, rove, Perf. 
 Mid. aXulrjfiai synonymous 
 with the Present, Infin. dXd- 
 Irjo&cu, Part. dXaXrifievog. 
 
 t (;§81. N. : 93. N. I.) 
 
 iilb'dvM (AAAfi), increase, Im- 
 perf. (as if from dXddvw) 
 
 ^ fjltaror. (§ 96. 7.) 
 
 ulbi'iGy.o) (AA ASl)> grow, thrive, 
 cause to grow, F. dXdrjob). 
 (§96. 10,8.) 
 
 dXtfa (AAEKSl), ward off, F. 
 
 dXeS^ow, A. Mid. i]Xt$dpip', 
 2. A. r-Xalxor. (§§ 96. 15, 
 
 10, N. 1 : 26. 1.) 
 
 Note. The Aor. factXxov is ob- 
 tained in the following manner : 
 AAEKH, AAAAEKn,^aX«*tfv f 
 
 TJkakxov. 
 
 aXiopai or aXsvopat, avoid, es- 
 cape, A. Mid. rjXeufitjv or 
 ^Xevdfxrjv. (§§ 96. N. 12 : 
 104. N. 1.) 
 
 aXelg, see ti'XXco. 
 
 aXuqxa (AAI&Jl), anoint, uipta, 
 siipa, Perf. aXrjXiqja, dXrjXip- 
 pat. (§§96. 18:81.) 
 
 c AAI2KSl (AASL ) , capture, 
 Perf. edXcoxa and rjXwxa have 
 been captured, F. dXwoofiat, 
 shall be captured. From 
 'AAJLMI, 2 A. edXav and 
 ijXoov was captured, dXw, dXol- 
 tjv and dXcoTjv, dXwvai, dXovg. 
 Pass. dXloxopat, am cap- 
 tured. (§§ 96. 8, 10 : 80. 
 N.2: 117. 12, N. 6.) 
 
 aXiTulvv) (AAITJL), sin against, 
 offend, F. dXtTtjaco, 2 A. rjXi- 
 
 TOV, 2 A. Mid. TjXlTO^V. 
 
 (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
 
 The Perf. Mid. Part. 
 aXtTrjptvog has the force of 
 an adjective, that has sinned 
 against, that has offended. 
 (§93. N. 1.) 
 dXXopat ( c AAJl), leap, spring, 
 A. Mid. fjMiifty> 2 F- M "*. 
 aXovpat, 2 A. Mid. rjXourjV. 
 (§§ 96. 6: 104. N. 5.) ' 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 2d pers. 
 sing. ccXo-o, 3d pers. sing. uXro, 
 Part, akptvosy all with the smooth 
 breathing, for qktffo, r,\iro t aXopt- 
 vos. (§ 92. N. 4.) 
 £Xoa (AAJl), used only in the 
 compound draXow, which 
 
§113] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 137 
 
 see. See also c AAI2KJl. 
 , (§ 98. 10.) 
 aXvoxw (AATKJl), shun, avoid, 
 
 F. ilvfr, A. rjkvfr. (§ 96. 
 
 3 14 ;) 
 
 cdcpodvb) or ccXqxivco (AA&Sl), 
 
 procure, bring, find, 2 A. 
 
 rjlcpoj'. (§ 96. 7.) 
 c AAJl, see aUoxoucu, alow, aX- 
 
 Xo^iai. 
 afictyidvoj (AMAPTJl), err, sin, 
 
 miss, Perf. r^dgTrjxu, Perf. 
 
 Pass. fjfMXQirjfiai, A. Pass. 
 
 rjuagrij&riv, F. Mid. dfiao- 
 
 T1]GOUaL, 2 A. TjUdQTOV. (§ 96. 
 
 7, 10.) 
 
 For tiuolqtov Homer has al- 
 so rjufjQOTov, with the smooth 
 breathing. 
 
 Note. The Homeric ^^arav 
 is formed as follows : 'AMAPTXl, 
 'AMOPTO, rifjco^Tov, yipgorov, n/u- 
 fyorov. (§§ 96. 19: 26. 2, N.) 
 
 aftSMa/.h) and d^^Xou, miscar- 
 ry, ctfAftAGJGO), ij[i fiXw a a, iju- 
 fiXtoxa, rjfifihouai, r}ufiXbjdr t v. 
 (§ 96. 8.) The Present du- 
 ftXow occurs only in com- 
 pounds. 
 
 afjiTisxo) (apcpl, fya), wrap a- 
 round, clothe, Imperf. d^nist- 
 %ov, F. dficps^w, F. Mid. d{i- 
 cpi^ouai, 2 A. rjfiTiioxoVy 2 A. 
 Mid. i\ [in loxo^v. Mid. d^ini- 
 Xo^ai, wear, put on. (§§ 14. 
 3:82. N. 1.) 
 
 auniaxviopat, (c^qp/, lo%vioucu), 
 
 — (X{A7I8XO[iai. 
 
 ct^inXaxlaxG) and anfiXaxlaxw 
 (AMIIAAKJI), miss, err,F. 
 a unlay. i](S(x), 2 A. r\^nXaxov, 
 Infin. dunXaxeiv and some- 
 times dnXaxuv, without the 
 
 s iu. (§ 96. 8, 10.) 
 
 apcpiivvvui (dfupl, I'vvvui), clothe, 
 12* 
 
 F. untyiiow or dfjicpih), A, 
 TjfMpleaa, Perf. Mid. y^fis- 
 ofioti, A. Mid. 7]{jq)iEodnT]v. 
 Mid. dficpLevvv^ioti, put on, 
 dress myself. (§§ 102. N. 2 : 
 82. N. 1.) 
 
 dvaXloxw sometimes «*>«Ao'ai 
 (a^«, c AslI2KSl, dXow), ex- 
 pend, consume,, Imperf ca^'- 
 Aiaxov or dvdXovv, F. avaAco- 
 aco, A. avdXbJoa or a^'Aaiaw, 
 Perf. avdXwxa or «*>?jAajx«. 
 In double composition, A. 
 i]vdXonja, as xaT7]vaX(oa(X. 
 (§§80. N. 4: 82. N. 1.) 
 
 «^«rw (AASl)> please, delight, 
 Imperf. rjvdavov or edvdavov 
 or krjidavov, F. atf^'dO), 2 A. 
 f'cc<5oy or ddov, 2 Perf. etfdw. 
 (§§96. 7, 10: 80. N.2, 3, 5.) 
 
 For %a$ov Homer has also itiothov, 
 with the smooth breathing. 
 
 The Doric has 2 Perf. 'iaSx, with 
 the smooth breathing. 
 
 Note. The simple 'A AH was 
 originally FA AH, from which came 
 2 A. t'FFa^v (like B^uogov from 
 MEIPfl\ which finally was chang- 
 ed into iiixSov. (§ 1. N. 1, 3.) 
 ANEOSL, spring forth, 2 Perf. 
 dvrjvo&a synonymous with 
 the Present. (§§ 96. 19 : 
 
 i 81.) t # 
 
 ayg^w (av«, fc^w), AoM w/?, F. 
 Mid. dviSofxcu, 2 A. dvao/ov, 
 2 A. Mid. rjvsaxofirjv. Mid. 
 dvexo^ai, endure, Imperf. ij- 
 
 ^ r£0fi«* (§ 82. N. 3.) 
 
 avolyco (avd, ol'/co) f open, Im- 
 perf. dviwyov, F. «jW|a), A. 
 dvEoj^ct (later i]vot$n), Perf. 
 dviojxoty Perf. Pass, dvicay^ai, 
 A. Pass, dvecpx&rjv, 2 Perf. 
 dveoiya stand open, 2 A. Pass. 
 (later) ^ro//^. (§ 82. N. 1.) 
 
13S 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ 118. 
 
 tumyim, Imperf. dvcoysor, = fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 imij»i command, order, £w, £a, 
 2 Perf. gamy* synonymous 
 with the Present. 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 Perf. I st pers. 
 plur. ccvcoy/u.iv, Imperat. oiveo^^i, 
 av&fcS-cu, a,vw%S-s, for civcuys, ir&>, 
 »T£. (\\ 91. N. 6: 88. N. 1.) 
 
 The last two forms take the Pas- 
 s : ve terminations tr§a>, o-B-i, uvuy- 
 rS-a, civvy -oS-i. (§ § 11 : 7.) 
 
 anuvouco (utto, ai'QHb)), take 
 away, A. Part. dnovov.Q, A. 
 Mid. Part. djiovodpsrog. 
 
 anaqioxh) (A&SL), deceive, F. 
 anotq)i]<jo) f 2 A. tfnacpov. 
 
 ^ (§ 96. 8, 10, N. 1.) 
 
 uTToXavw (arco, Xav(x)), enjoy, Im- 
 perf. uTisXavov or anrjlavov, 
 F. unolavoM, A. «7r£Aauo~« or 
 ajiijlavucc, F. Mid. «7roA«i;ao- 
 
 anovoag, see ctnaVQaw. 
 
 dgdouai, invoke, curse, dao- 
 pcu, aodprjv, regular. From 
 APHMI comes Epic Infin. 
 a aoiuerai. (§ 117. N. 17.) 
 
 aQctoiay.bi (APJl), Jit, adapt, 
 join, F. aoow, A. ?](>o-a, Perf. 
 Pass. do^oFfiai, 2 A. rjyaoov, 
 2 Perf. uouqm (Ionic uotjqu), 
 Part. fern, douovla: (§§ 96. 
 8, 10, N. 1 : 81. N. : 103. 
 N. 1 : 104. N. 6.) 
 
 Note. The syncopated 2 A. 
 Mid. Part, agptvos has the force 
 of an adjective, suitable t adapted, 
 f§ 92. N. 4.) 
 
 igiaicia (4PS1), please, gratify, 
 F. (loiao), Perf. Pass. //ofc^ura. 
 (§5? 96. 10, 8: 95. N. 1 : 
 107. N. 1 ) 
 
 Sovvfiui (APSl), procure, ac- 
 
 quire, cam, save, Imperf. 
 j)Qvvnnv. (§ 96. 9.) 
 
 clqog), plough, till, oaco, oaa, 
 
 aQVQOxa, uQi]Qo^ai, 6&tjv. 
 
 From APSIM1, Injin. Act. 
 
 (Epic) doouuevcu. (£A 81 : 
 
 . 95. N. 1 ) 
 
 «(j7r«Jw, seize, snatch, daw or 
 d$oj, aoa or «if«, ccxcc, aa^ou, 
 or aytxai, da&r\v or dx&tjv, 2 
 A. Pass. rjoTtdyriv. (§ 96. 
 N. 6.) 
 
 APJl, see tt?'joa), aQaqioxbi, dgi- 
 axej, ccQrvfzoa. 
 
 av$co or-av$dv(o (ATttL), in- 
 crease, F. «^?[o-cu, A. rjvtyaa, 
 Perf. Pass. r}v%r][iai, A. Pass. 
 4«$0ip'. (§ 96. 15, 7, 10.) 
 
 ctvqdo), avoico, avQiaxop.ca, (AT- 
 PSl,) used in the compounds 
 anavgaw, inavgsco, inavol- 
 axonai, which see. (§ 96. 
 8, 10.) 
 
 ATPSl, see the preceding. 
 
 acpswvTou, see acplr]p.L. 
 
 aqjlrjfii (anc, Xrifii), let go, Im- 
 perf. dcpUov or Tjyleov some- 
 times r\q*iY\v, F. dyijow, A. 
 occprjyM, Perf. acpBLxn, Perf. 
 Pass. dq>el[mi, A. Pass. «qp£- 
 #*7*> or dqjsl&rjv, 2 A. caprfV, 
 2 A. Mid. depiutjv or «qpc7- 
 w . (§ 82. N. 1.) 
 
 Note. The form d<pie>fvrai, in 
 the New Testament, stands for 
 Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. cttptTvrcn, 
 (See Inpt.) 
 
 dqv<j(j(x), draw forth (liquids), 
 F. depv^o), A. rjqjvaa. (§ 96. 
 
 N. 4.) 
 
 A'hfi, see uriuiploxcj. 
 
 d%i(t) (AXSl), Pa?'t.dxecav, ovact, 
 
 afflicted, grieved, Perf. Pass. 
 
 dy.ri%Ffj.ou or dxd%r}[iai, am of- 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 139 
 
 jlicted, grieve, Lifin. axd^r]- 
 
 o&cil, Part, uxayj^iti og or 
 
 axr]%i i usi>og. (§§ 96. 10: 95. 
 
 N. 2:81. N. :93. N. 1.) 
 &x&oi*ai (AX Oil), am offended, 
 
 pained, feel indignant, A. 
 
 Pass, rix&ia&nv, F. Mid. 
 
 ax&ioofiai. (§§ 96. 10 : 95. 
 
 N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
 Sxvv[ji(u or a/ofiai (AXfl), e= 
 
 dxa%l£o[iai, which see. (§ 96 t 
 
 9-) 
 Axil, see axaxL£(o, a/eco, &xrv- 
 
 pai. 
 an, blow, Imperf. aov. (§ 80. 
 
 N. 5.) 
 «w, s/eep, Aor. ataa or do a. 
 
 ;.- (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 aoj, satiate, Injin. Spsvau (Ep- 
 ic) for tt€iir, aaw, aa«. Pass. 
 So^ai, 3d pers. sing. «r«i 
 Epic««T^. (§116. N. 6.) 
 
 &ojqto, see atlga). 
 B. 
 
 fialva and /Saaxw (BASl), go, 
 walk, F. /fy'aa> s/m// caz/se to 
 g-0, Perf. pefaxa, Perf. Pass. 
 Pe(3cc[iat, (only in composi- 
 tion), A. Pass, ifid&r)* (only 
 in composition), F. Mid. 
 ffr,aofiai t A. Mid. (Epic) f/fy- 
 odfirjv and ipijooftrjv, 2 Perf. 
 /&'/?««, fihdp. /fc^ol, J/jj£w. /5f- 
 /faVuu, P«r£. pefiwg. From 
 fit ( 3r) t ui t 2 A. fJ5^y, /5w, fiaiTjv, 
 fafrt (in composition often 
 /?«), rfrai, /?«?. (§§ 96. 5, 
 18,8: 95. N. 2: 85. N.2: 
 91. N. 7.) 
 
 Note. The Homeric filofitti or 
 
 (Zttafiat, I shall live, is a 2 A. Mid. 
 
 Sub;, for (ZZ/Aas. (§§ 116. N. 8, 
 
 4: 117. N. 17: 215. N. 7.) 
 
 fidklb) (BAASl), throw, cast, 
 
 F. ftalo) sometimes /faU^ao), 
 Perf. pipkrixa, Perf. Pass. 
 pifiXripca, A. Pass. e^Xrjd-rjv, 
 F. Mid. (ftrjoopai (Epic), 
 2 A. ^«;W, 2 A. Mid. *'/?«- 
 Ao> ? v. (§96. 6, 10, 17.) 
 
 From BAESl, B J II ML 2 
 A. l'px V v, 2 A. Mid. ifilj- 
 fitjv, Subj. 3d pers. sing. 
 pirjeiai for (SXijTai, Opt. /5A«- 
 p^v, Injin. pkjjo&cci, Part. 
 pXrjpevog, all Epic. (§§ 117. 
 N. 15, 17: 96.19.) 
 
 fidoxw, see finlvoo. 
 
 fiaozd£(o, carry, doca, aoa, a- 
 y/uat, ofr^. (§ 96. N. 6.) 
 
 J3^J2, see fialvw. 
 
 Ptop.ai or fieloficu, see (SaLvw. 
 
 ffifidfo or /?//%* (BAH), = 
 (Salvo), which see. (§ 96. 1.) 
 
 Pij3(j(6(sx(o (BOPSl), cat, F. 
 Pqwow, Perf. {SifiQcoxa, Perf. 
 Pass. jSefiQwpou, A. Pass. 
 (figw&rjv, 3 F. fifftgajGOfim, 
 2 Perf. Par*, /fc^w's. From 
 BPOMT, 2 A. r^«r. (§§ 96. 
 17, 1,8: 117. 12.) 
 
 (Slow, live, woa, (oxa, (opcei. cooo- 
 pm. From BISIMT, 2 A. 
 eftloiv, fiiw, (Siolrjv and (Siojrjv, 
 fiiwvou, fiiovg. (§ 117. 12, 
 N. 6.) 
 
 fiiwoxopai (Plow), revive, bor- 
 rows the other tenses, ex- 
 cept Imperf, from the pre- 
 ceding. 
 
 piaoT&vw (BAA2TSI), bud, 
 sprout, F. {3laoTt]oco, A. e- 
 j3XdoT7]X(x, 2 A. sj3laojov. 
 (§§ 96. 7, 10 : 76. N. 2.) 
 
 BAASl or BAEfL, see /Sa'AAw. 
 
 pXuoxb) (MOASl), come, go, 
 
140 
 
 iMi.r.cTioN op wo 
 
 [§118. 
 
 [WC ttftt/ftttXCf, 2 Aor. i\uo- 
 Xor. 3 V, Mid. unXovucu. 
 
 9& 17,8: 96. N.) ' 
 
 Note. The Present p>\<»<rxu is 
 formed as follows : MO AH, 
 MAOO, MBAOH, rfxurxu, 
 (hXvirxu. The /* is dropped because 
 the combination /x£\ cannot begin a 
 Greek word. v § 16. N. 1.) 
 
 (toda), cry out, ?;<jg>, -qua, r k xa, 
 7, uia, r r 'tr t r, rjaopm, regular. 
 From the simple BOSL come 
 the Ionic forms ^waa, eftri- 
 o&rjvipcioofiou. (§109. N.l.) 
 
 BOABSl (BAASl), Perf. Pass. 
 pe.36X)juui, = <5«AAw. (§ 96. 
 19, 10.) 
 
 BOAJ1, see ftovXo/noci. 
 
 BOPSl, see fitftoojaxa). 
 
 ftoaxco {BO ft), feed, pasture, 
 F. ft o ax/} oca, A. iftoaxrjacx. 
 (§ 96. 8, 10.) 
 
 ftovlouui (BO Aft), will, Imperf. 
 iSovKou^v or T/ftovlo^irjv, Perf. 
 Pass, fttftovXijuai, A. Pass. 
 tSovh'i&^v or rjftovXrjftrjV, F. 
 Mid. ftovXr { aouai, 2 Perf. /fcf- 
 /?oiA« comp. in Homer 7ipo- 
 ^'/Joi/Xo. (§§96. 18, 10: 78. 
 N. I.) From the simple 
 Present come Pres. Pass. /?o- 
 lopftt, 2d pers. plur. ftoXea&s. 
 
 BO Si, see ftouco, ftooxv. 
 
 BPAXJlj crash, rattle, 2 A 
 I'ftonyov. 
 
 BPOJlt *ee ftiftoojaxo). 
 
 ftof/uouui (BPTXft), roar, 
 uuui, rfOUfirji', Perf. ftiftov- 
 yu synonymous with the 
 Present. (96. 10.) 
 
 r. 
 
 yctfiiio (TAMft), marry, F. 
 yt/uu), A. tytyia, (later */«'- 
 /u;ja«), Perf. yr/ufxrjxa, Perf. 
 Pass, ysyufir^uui, A. Pass. 
 
 tyupy&ip, Part. fern, also 
 yn^fO^fiaa, F. Mid. yaf.ieaao~ 
 ma (in Homer). (§§ 96. 10 ' 
 95. N. 2 : 102. N. 5.) 
 rAft, see nrNJi. 
 
 ysyrn'oo and ysycovso) (rftNft), 
 call aloud, 2 Perf yeyma 
 synonymous with the Pres. 
 
 ydvonrti (TEN ft), beget, bring 
 forth, am born, A. Mid. 
 eyuvdftyv begat, brought 
 forth. (§ 96. 18.) 
 
 yivxo, see ylyvo^ai, ' EAft. 
 
 TENft., see ylyvofiai. 
 
 yw&eoj (THOft), rejoice, ijaco, 
 T}oa, 2 Perf. ysyrj&a synony- 
 mous with the Present. 
 (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 yrjodoxw and yrjodw, grow old, 
 dab), ccoa, ctxa, daopai. From 
 THPHMl, 2 A. {yrioav, yi]- 
 Qavcti, yrjodg. (§ 117. 12.) 
 
 nrNsi {rENfi> rAft), pro- 
 
 duce, cause to exist, Perf. 
 Mid. ysyirrmui, Pass, iytvr,- 
 Si]r, F. Mid. yen-ao^uai, 2 
 Perf. ytyova (poetic also 
 yeyrtcx), 2 A. Mid. eyeioui])'. 
 Mid. ylyro t uru or ylroiuti, 
 produce myself make myself, 
 become. (§§ 96. 1, 5, 10, 
 19: 26. 1.) 
 
 The 2 Perf. yiyaa is in- 
 flected, as far as it goes, 
 like '(Kfimt (§ 91. N. 7.) 
 
 Note. For 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. 
 sing, iyivtro, we find 'iyivro or yiv- 
 to. (§ 92. N. 4.) 
 
 ytyv(x)OXM(l y yOSL),la.teryivojoy.a}, 
 know, A. tyvovm (chiefly in 
 composition), Perf. Zyrwxa, 
 Perf. Pass. tyrMuuut, A. Pass. 
 iyvo')a&r)v, F. Mid. yvwoouai. 
 From I-JYSIMI, 2 A. i'yvow, 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 141 
 
 yrco, yvoli}V, yyoj&i, yrwrat, 
 
 yrovi. (§§ 96. 1, 8*3 76. 
 
 N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 109. 
 
 N. 1 : 117. 12.) 
 yodco (1'0j2), bewail, regular. 
 
 Imperf. also tyoov. From 
 
 rOIIMf, Infin. Epic yotjue- 
 
 via. (§§96.10: 117. N. 17.) 
 FJl^Sl, see ysycorco. 
 
 A. 
 duLvvu) or dalat, give to eat, 
 
 entertain, F. daiooo, A. sdcu- 
 
 aa, A. Pass, idalo&ip', A, Mid. 
 
 idaLGcif-iriV. Mid. ducvvfiai, 
 
 feast, Opt. 3d pers. sing. 
 
 dalvvxo. {%% 96. 9: 109. 
 
 N. 1: 117. N. 7.) 
 daica (AAJl), divide, Perf. Pass. 
 
 dsdaofiai, 3d pers. plur. ds- 
 
 balaxai (in Horner), F. Mid. 
 
 daaof.iai, A. Mid. tdaod^ijv. 
 
 (§§96. 18: 107. N. 1: 95. 
 
 N. 1.) 
 data {AASl), burn, 2 Perf. <5c- 
 
 drja, 2 A. Mid. idao^v. Mid. 
 
 daio^uca, am on fire, burn. 
 
 (96. 18.) 
 ddxro) (AAKfl), bite, Perf. de- 
 
 drj/oi, Perf. Pass, didy/pai, 
 
 A.Pass. idw&r)v, F.Mid. jjjL. 
 
 |o ( a«/, 2 A. f^«xov. (§ 96. 5, 
 
 18.) 
 dapccb) (AAMJl), subdue, tame, 
 
 da^idaa), eddpotovc, Perf. ds- 
 
 dfirjxa, dsdfxijfAai, A. Pass. 
 
 id(iy&r}v, 2 A. Pass, iddprpr. 
 
 (§§96.10,17:95. N. 1.) 
 dd^ivj]^ (dandcd), Pass, ddfiva- 
 
 [im, = preceding. (§ 96. 5.) 
 dag&dia) (AAPOfi), sleep, Perf. 
 
 dzdcwx} ly/.a, A. Pass, iddg&rjv, 
 
 F.Mid. duQ&rjOGuca, 2 A. 
 
 editQ&ov or I'doa&ov. (§§ 96. 
 
 7, 10: 26. 2? 11.) 
 
 daisofiai, divide, share, A. Mid. 
 
 idandpTjv. (§ 104. N. 1.) 
 A An., see data. 
 A All, cause to learn, teacli, 
 
 Perf. dsddrjxa have learned, 
 
 Perf. Pass, dedd^^m, F.Mid. 
 
 dixr l aof.iat, 2 A. edaov, 2 Perf. 
 
 didcta have learned, 2 A. 
 
 Pass, iddyv I learned. From 
 
 AEAAJl, Pass. dtddopai. 
 
 (§96. 10, 11.) 
 dedloxopai or dtdiGGopca, =2 fot- 
 
 diaxofiat. 
 del (dew), it behooves, one must, 
 
 Impersonal, F. der^ou, A. 
 
 dsLdloxojiou or dzidlGGOfiai (diet), 
 frighten, scare, A. Mid. £$**- 
 &J«>ifi>. (§§ 96. 11, 8, 3 : 
 76. N. 4.) 
 
 fotdw, see AETJl. 
 
 delxvvfu (AEIKSl), shoiv, F. 
 dsl$ot), A. I'tfala, Perf. Pass. 
 dedsiyixai, A. Pass. idelx&rjV. 
 (§ 96. 9.) 
 
 The Ionic has di$(o, edeSa, 
 didsy^iai, idex&rjv. 
 
 AEISl or d/w or Ssldwyfear, A. 
 i'dsioa (in Homer eddeiaa), 
 Perf. dedoLxa am afraid, 
 F.Mid. Maoptti, 2 Perf. &'- 
 &« am afraid. (§§ 96. 18, 
 N. 14:98. N. 3: 79. N. 3.) 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 Perf. Ss/^sv, £«/- 
 S/re, Imperat. liil&i, 2 Pluperf. 
 sfciVsn. (§§ 91. N. 6 : 76. N. 4 : 
 88. N. 1.) 
 
 di^co, build, A. I'dsipa, Perf. 
 dadfirjita, A. Mid. idsipdfijjv. 
 (§ 96. 17.) 
 
 dsoiAai, see deco, to ant. 
 
 digitofiai; see, 2 A. edgaxov, 
 2 Perf. didogy.tx, A. Pass. 
 
IK 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ US- 
 
 fdto/ftjp', 2 A. Pass, edofixjjr. 
 
 (§§96. J 9, 17: 26. 2.) 
 dt^o^iai, rtctivc, dtdi/fiai, idi- 
 X&Wy dt-Souat, i5i$aur { r,regu- 
 far. 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. Wtyptiv, 
 tliKTo, (for ihi%oftnv t Wi^tro, ) Jn- 
 Jin. Si^S-a/ vfor }t%iffS-*^, Part, 
 Viypivos as Present (^§ 92. N. 4 : 
 9. 1 : 7:11.) 
 
 dew (rarely ftdtyu)> &*W* ^w, 
 
 ?;o"w, f*tf, ^uaf, idf^v, 3d F. 
 
 ^edijao/ua*. (§§ 95. N. 2: 
 96. 1: 116. R.) 
 
 fc'w, ffm tcanting to, want, F. 
 <5f?;o-a}, A. ids7]oa, A. Pass. 
 td(7]&rjv, F. Mid. detjoofxai. 
 Mid. Stomal, want, need, 
 pray, beseech. (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 For A. 3d pers. sing. 
 iderjoev, Homer has djjoev. 
 
 AHKSl, see ddxr co. 
 
 drjb) (AASl), as Future, shall 
 find, 
 
 didciisxa) (AlAAXJl), teach, F. 
 dtdu$G) (poetic also dtdaoxr]- 
 cjw), A. tdldasa (poetic also 
 idtduoxTjou), Perf. dtdlda/a, 
 Perf. Pass, dzdlduypai, A. 
 Pass. idtda X &tiv. (§ 96. 10, 
 N. 10.) 
 
 didrjui, see <5ao, 6iW. 
 
 didocw/.w (APASl), run away, 
 Perf. didQuy.a, F.Mid. dgdao- 
 fan. From APJ/MT, 2 A. 
 tdour, 5qo), dfjuirtv, 8qol^l, 
 dounxi, dad?. (§§96. 1, 8: 
 117. 12.) This verb occurs 
 only in composition 
 
 d'dbifjii and didoa (AOSl),give, 
 F. do')ao), A. I'dioxu, Perf. 
 dtdo)y.u, Perf. Pass, dtdopai, 
 A.Pass. id6dr { r, A. Mid. t<3w- 
 
 yu/n^r (not Attic), 2 A. *'(3wr, 
 <5w, doh t , do&i or <5oV> dovrat, 
 taig, 2 A. Mid. tfopny. 
 (§§96. 1 : 117: 104. N. 2: 
 95. N. 2.) 
 
 di£to, seek, F.Mid. di&joouai. 
 Mid. diZqpai, seek, retains 
 the i] throughout, as Part. 
 S&uatog. (§§96. 10: 117. 
 3.) 
 
 AIKJ2, cast, fling, 2 A. tdixov. 
 
 dlco, see AE1SI, dsidlaxofim. 
 
 A31AS1, AMESl, see dapam, 
 df/uco. 
 
 doaTcu or diarou, it seems, Im- 
 personal, A. Mid. dodaoa- 
 to, Subj. doaoosTai, Epic. 
 (§§ 102. N. 5: 86. N. 3.) 
 
 doxiw (AOKSl), seem, think, 
 F. flolw, A. iflofa, Perf. Pass. 
 dsdo/pou. The regular forms 
 dox7]o(o, rjoa, Tj/uou, are not 
 common. (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 dovnsco (AOTIISl), resound, 
 sound heavily, A. edovn^oa 
 (also iySovntiaa), 2 Perf. ds- 
 dovnu. (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 Note. The A. Xylovvwa. comes 
 from rAOTIIEn, which is formed 
 after the analogy of xrvrtaf from 
 
 Txna. (§ 7.) 
 
 APAMJl or APEMSl, Perf. de- 
 5gixfi?j>:u, Perf. Pass, dedou- 
 ptipw (little used), 2 A. \8oa- 
 fiov, 2 Perf. didgofia (Epic), 
 F. Mid. dgai.iovuui, = rof^w, 
 which see. (§ 96. 10, 19.) 
 
 MvayLui {ATNASl, ATNILMl), 
 am able, can, Imperf. edvrd- 
 (Ltrjv or r^vvu^v, Perf. Pass. 
 dtdvvTjfiai, A.Pass. idmr^^v 
 or rjdvvrj&r t v (and tdvvao&yv), 
 F.Mid. dvvr t oo^ai y A. Mid. 
 (in Homer) idvvijoduTjv. 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 143 
 
 (§§ 78. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 
 109. N. 1.) 
 dvcj and dvvco, enter, set, cause 
 to enter, F. dvoco, A. I'<5i}<ja, 
 Perf. fo'di/xa, A.Pass. edv&rjv, 
 F. Mid. dvaopai, A. Mid. 
 idvadfir^v (Epic also idvoo- 
 (.ir,v), Part. dvoo^isvog as 
 Present, setting. From 
 ATMI, 2 A. !'(5i>, <5£o>, dC?^, 
 #i»#*, J^a/, Wff. (§§ 96. 5 : 
 95. N. 2: 85. N. 2: 117. 
 12, N. 7.) 
 
 tdcf&r} or fdcp&Tj, was fastened, 
 Aor. Pass. 3d pers. sing., 
 found only in Homer. 
 
 eyslgco (EFEPJl), wake, rouse, 
 F. iysgw, A. ly/sigct, Perf. 
 eyr^/egxa, Perf. Pass. (yr\ysg- 
 pixi, A. Pass. rjysQ&iiv, 2 Perf. 
 iygyyoga am awake,2 A. e/^o- 
 jU??r, eygolprjv, sygso (Epic), 
 iyosa&ai. Mid. sytlgopai rise. 
 (§§96. 18: 81: 26. 1.) 
 
 Note 1. The Attic reduplication 
 of iy^yo^a. is anomalous. 
 
 Note 2. Homer has 2 Perf. 3d 
 pers. plur. lygtiyogS-zin for ly^nyo- 
 Z*<n, as if from EPEP0P-. 
 
 Note 3. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 Perf. Imperat. 
 2d pers. plur. iy^yo^B-e, Infin. 
 lygnyogS-xt, with the terminations 
 of the Passive, o&t, crSat. 
 
 sdw, see iu&lto. 
 
 c EdfL, see the following. 
 
 e'Qoficu ^EASl)> seat myself, sit, 
 Imperf. e£6[ir}v, A. Pass. §'- 
 o&yv (later), 2 F.Mid. tdov- 
 (iai. (§§96. 4: 114. N. 2.) 
 This verb is chiefly used in 
 the compound xa$i£ofiai, 
 which see. 
 
 i&ika or #£'ylo), will, F. i&sXrjoco 
 or d^sl^oo), A. rj&skrfoa, Perf. 
 j^ftpte, (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 I'^co, aw accustomed, 2 Perf. 
 aw #a (Ionic f'w^«) synony- 
 mous with the Present. 
 (§§96. 19: 80.N.3, R. 1.) 
 
 EIASl {l/JSl) y see, F. eldrjoa (rare) sAa// £71020, F.Mid. sloopou 
 shall know, A. Mid. uaaprp seemed, 2 A. sJdov (rarely idov) 
 saw, idoi, I'd ot pi-, i'ds and Ids, Iduv, idoov, 2 A. Mid. sldo^v saw, 
 i'do)uca, IdolfiTjv, idov (as interjection, Idov, behold!), Idio&ai, 
 idofisrog, 2 Perf. oida know, sldw, sidslyv, i'o&i, sidsvai, sldwg, 
 2 Pluperf. r t dsiv knew. Pass, sldouca, seem, resemble. (§§ 96. 
 18, 10, N.14: 93. N. 2 : 80. N. 4.) 
 
 The 2 Perf. oidoc, and 2 Pluperf. fldsiv, are inflected as 
 follows : 
 
 Perfect 2. 
 
 P. 
 
 Ind. S. 
 
 oidct 
 
 D. iopsv 
 
 oia&a 
 
 I'otov 
 
 oids(v) 
 
 VoTOV 
 
 lOflSV 
 
 i'ojs 
 loaoiiv) 
 
 Subj. S. sidco, sidf t g, sidy, I). sldijrov, P. sldwfisv, sldrjrs, 
 
 sldcjoi(v). 
 Opt. S. sldsir\v, sldslrjg, sldsh], D. sldslrjiov, sldsir^v, P. 
 
 sldslrjfisv, sldslriTS, sidslr ( aav. 
 Imp. S. Vg&l D. Vorov P. Vors 
 
 Vo'TO) i'aiCt)V i'oTwoav 
 
144 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 118. 
 
 Inf. eldivai. 
 
 Part. udoi$, via, oc, G. o'roc. 
 
 Pluperfect 2. 
 
 S. jjdsii', jjdfj D. jjdeifiev, fj(j(.iev P. jjdeifi-ev, fjopiv 
 
 jjdeiQ, tjdeio&a, jjdeuov, fjaiov jjdsiTe, i}ote 
 
 jjdti, j'jdT], jjdtLV fidelity, jjoiriv jjdeoav, i]auv 
 
 Note 1. Perfect. Ind. 2d pers. sing. oltrSet stands for ofocurSa, (§§ 84. 
 N 6 : 91. N. 6 : 10. 2.) In the dual and plural, the forms <W*v, JV^ev, 
 iff-rsy stand for J'£t<jv, fiptv, H^ri. (§§ 91. N. 6 : 10, 1, 3.) 
 
 Slbj. and Opt. e/Sar, utility come from EIAEH, whence also the F. 
 uhnru. § 91. N. 6.) 
 
 Ikp. I&t, 'laru, &c. for '/$$/, ftrv, &c. (§§ 91. N. 6 : 88. N. 1 : 10. 3.) 
 
 Pluperfect. For 1st pers. sing. yln, and 3d pers. sing, fin or yhiv, see 
 above ;§ 85. N. 4.) — For 2d pers. sing, yhio&a, or ffiwrSx, see above 
 (§^ 84. N. 6 : 85. N. 4.) — For the syncopated forms ycpiv, jlWe, ycretv, 
 see above (§§ 91. N. 6 : 10. 1, 2. 3.) 
 
 Note 2. The regular forms of the Perfect o7$ot$, otluptv, o'ficcrov, ofietrt, 
 oft an, belong chiefly to the later Greek- 
 
 Note 3. Dialects. Perfect. Ind. 1st pers, plur. Epic and Ionic ft/an 
 for IcfjLi v. 
 
 Inf. Epic ftftsvus for l^i^iveti for tfttvou. (§ 89. N. 1.) 
 
 Pluperfect. Epic and Ionic riiftuv, 9}$, u or y, plur. mihtf&sv, etrt, 3d pers. 
 JVav. (§§ 85. N. 4: 91. N. 6 : 10. 2.) Here the prefix h seems to be 
 the syllabic augment lengthened. (§ 80. N. 2.) — For 3d pers. sing, ffiu, 
 Herodotus ( 1, 45) has null. 
 
 tixo), seem, resemble, 2 Perf. a/iw or ulw or siktat (EslJl), 
 
 i'oixa, sometimes six a (Ionic roll up, drive to, F. eikrjGco, 
 
 oha), synonymous with the A. tilrjoa, Injin. also ekaai 
 
 Present, 2 Pluperf. downr. or ieXuai, Part, also Uoag, 
 
 (§§ 96. N. 14 : 80. N.*2, 3, Perf. eil^a, Perf. Pass. 
 
 4.) dl7](Aai, hXfim, A.Pass. elXri- 
 
 For 2 Perf. 3d. pers. plur. d^v, 2 A. Pass. eaXrjv, Injin. 
 
 loi/.uoL we sometimes find akr\vai, Part. iXtig. (§§ 96. 
 
 el'Sfioi. 18, 10, 6: 104. N. 6: 80. 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- JV. 2.) 
 
 necting vowel, 2 Perf. Uygs NoTE# The form Uxy)ro for piu , 
 
 Vxref, for UUafti*, io<x*rov, 2 _ Flu- petf p asg 3d pers< sing> ^^ } g 
 
 perf. ?tonr» for ipxi/m*. (§§ 91. formed as follows : EAH, OAEH, 
 
 ._; ' „.. okvpyiVy Uk^fAfiv, -ncro, \oKnro. ( § § 96. 
 
 The epic poets have also ytxro or ^ . gQ^ ^ g.) 
 
 i/*t« for gy'*g/, with the Passive ter- 
 mination ro (§ 84. 2). BtfjLtxQfim, see METPSl. 
 
§ 118.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 145 
 
 eifil (ESl> EZSl), am, co, sl'^v, lodi, thai, cuV, Imperf. r t r (some- 
 times rjiAqv), F. eoopai, ioolp^r, loso&cu, eoouerog. 
 
 Present. 
 Ind. S. e^ul D. iopii P. topi* 
 
 eh, si ioxov ioxi 
 
 ioxl(v) ioxov elol^v) 
 
 Subj. S. w, ?Jc, fi, D. eopev, rjxov, rjTor, P. wper, ?;t8, cooi(r). 
 Opt. S. d'tjv, sl')]s, sir), D. el'r^ev, d'r^xov, eh\xi]v } P. elr^usr, 
 
 sTyxe, ti\ouy. 
 Imp. S. I'o&l D* ioxov P. lots 
 
 i'oTO) eoxcov eoxwoccv, eoxav 
 
 Inf. slvai, to be. 
 Part. wv, ovoa, ov, G. ovxog, being. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 S. IjV, Tj D. l]utV P. fiLltV 
 
 qg, rjo&a r t xov, r t oxov r t xe, ijots 
 
 rj, i]v rjir^y rjoxr^v ?] oar 
 
 Future. 
 Ind. S. too^ca, eor t or i'oei, eoexr/i or I'otcu, D. ioous&ov, 
 
 eoeo&ov, eoeo&ov, P. ioopsda, k'oeo&s, eoovxai. 
 Opt. S. ioolpyp', I'ooio, I'oolto, D. ioolpe&ov, eooio&ov,iool- 
 
 o&r\v, P. iooifxe&a, eooioOe, 1'ooirxo. 
 Inf. I'oeo&ai, to be about to be. 
 Part, wo^ero?, t], ov, about to be. 
 
 Note 1. Present Ind. The 2d pers. sing. i7 belongs to the Middle 
 voice. Compare (pikio/ucti, 2d pers. Qi\in or <pi\iu contracted (ptXu.) — 
 The forms Io-t'i, l<r/u.iv, Ic-rcv, lari come from the original E2fl. — The 3d 
 pers. plur. tUi is formed from EH after the analogy of <riS-i7cn from riS-nptm 
 
 Subj. and Opt. Z, ur,v are formed from EH after the analogy of f&» 9 
 t/9-e/jjv, from TiS-nfii. 
 
 Imp. }VS/, itrru, &c. come from the original E2Dt. In the 2d pers. 
 sing, the radical vowel i becomes /. 
 
 Part, uv, cZoa, oV, stands for lav, \ou<ru, lav. (See next Note.) 
 
 Imperfect. The 1st pers. sing. % is contracted from ia. (See next Note.) 
 
 — For the 2d pers. sing. r.trS-a, see above § 84. N. 6.) — The 3d pers. 
 sing. jfr is contracted from yjiv. (See next Note.) — The forms vjrrov, fi(rrr,v f 
 yarn, come from the original E2H. 
 
 Note 2. Dialects. Present. Isn. 1st pers. sing. Doric ly.,ui for sjfti. 
 
 — Cd pers. sing, old itrvl for uc, from the original E2H. (§ 84. N. 6.) — 
 3d pers. sing. Doric Urr, not to be confounded with the 3d pers. plur. — 
 
 13 
 
146 IN. WORDS. [$ 118. 
 
 1st pers. plur. Ionic s/^asv, poetic \pU. — 3d pers. plur. Ionic i&<rt (like 
 riS'ixji from riSn/Lu), Doric ivr/ (§ 117. N. 17). 
 
 Subj. uncontracted i'a/, tys, ifij, if«^£v, sjjts, JW/(v\ Ionic. 
 
 Ore. uncontracted ta/yc*/, tots, tot, &c. Ionic. 
 
 Imper. 2d pers. sing, tcro, after the analogy of the Middle. — 3d pers. 
 sing, tire* for tar*. 
 
 Inf. Epic 'ipptvai, tpptv, tp&vcu, 'iptv, Doric ^usv, jifits. (§ 89. N. 1. ) 
 
 Imperfect. 1st pers. sing. Ionic tot or net, tov, trxov. (§ 85. N. 5.) — 
 2d pers. sing. Ionic tots, 'itrxts, Epic «VS-«. (§§ 84. N. 6 : 85. N. 5.) — 
 Sd pers. sing. Ionic ^s(v), fr*i, Epic Uv, Xw, Doric fc. (§ 80. N. 2.) — 
 3d pers. plur. Ionic and Doric to-av. 
 
 Note 3. The 3d pers. sing, to-ri takes the accent on the penult, t<rn, 
 when it signifies he, she, or it exists. Also when it comes after si, ayx, «;, 
 aXX' (for aXXa), and t«ut (for rouro) ; as ay* ttrn, aXX' e^r*. 
 
 « t uf (/"J2, Efl, EISl), go, shall go, i'co, toigu or lolrjv, l&i, tsvai, 
 ico)', Imperf. ijsiv, F. Mid. efcopcri (Epic), A. Mid. (Epic) 
 «*«>;*.-■ (§§96. 18: 87. N. 2.) 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows : 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ind. S, slpi D. 3 t[usv P. i'fiSV 
 
 sig, si Itov Its 
 
 slat(v) iiov lauiiv) 
 
 SuBJ. S. la, I'jjg, i'r, D. i'wfisv, I'rjTor, YrjTor, P. I'ojfAtv, I'tjts, 
 
 i'cQOl(v). 
 
 Opt. S. 1'oijj.L, loig, Vol, D. Vol^lsv, Voltov, IoIttjv, P. Yoifisv, 
 
 i'OLTS, VoLSV. 
 
 Imp. & l&i, si D. I'tov P. Its 
 
 lib) trcuv I'TCoaar or lovrmv 
 
 Inf. UroLi. 
 
 Part. Iojv, lovoa, iov, G. lovrog. 
 Imperfect. 
 S. i]slv D. ysL^isv, Jif.isv P. jjeifisv, fjfj.sv 
 
 fjsig, fjsio&a fjtnor, jjtov j]sns, j]r 
 
 fist, jjsiv jjsIttjv, Tfirp jjfOtt* 
 
 Note 1 . Present. Ind. The 2d pers. sing. s7, like u from Ufi\, follows 
 the analogy of the Middle. — The 3d pers. plur. "&n follows the analogy 
 of riS'i&tri from rlS-v/ut. (} 117. N. 2. > 
 
 Imp. 2d pers. sing. CI is used only in composition, as 3 i\u for t%t$i from 
 e%up/. Compare 5 117. N. 8.) 
 
 Inf. Kmu comes from the imaginary IEH, IHMI, after the analogy of 
 r/S-jva/ from riS-ia, rtS-rifu. 
 
 Imperfect. The forms Ztiv, r,us, &c. follow the analogy of the Pluperfeet 
 Active. 
 
§118.] 
 
 AXOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 147 
 
 Note 2. Dialects. Present. Ind. 2d pers. sing. Epic iTa-B-x for 
 ft. (5 84. N. 6.) 
 
 Inf. Epic Ifjcivat or J^sv, without the connecting vowel i. (§ 89. N. 1.) 
 
 Imperfect. 1st pers. sing. Ionic %'i'x, yet, Epic %'i'ov, yov. The Ionic forms 
 are often used by the Attics. — 3d pers. sing. Ionic Site, Epic 1i. — 3d pers. 
 dual Epic 'Imv. — 1st pers. plur. Epic jfc^sv* — 3d pers. plur. Ionic »jiV«v, 
 Epic '/j<rav, 2rei« 
 
 HhiOL, see el'y.oi. 
 
 Ellin. (aEflJZ), say, A. sSr«, 
 2 A. einov, ti'na), tXnoitii, 
 eItts, tinuv, elnwv. (§)$) 96. 
 18: 104. N. 1: 93. N. 2.) 
 From c PEJl (which see), 
 Perf. uoiyAa, Perf. Pass, el- 
 Qrjftut, A. Pass. (qqr\^r\v OX 
 igos&riv, 3 F. siotjGOfxca. 
 From ei'gco, F. iqio) fow. 
 
 The epic poets have also 
 2 A. lunov (§ 80. N. 2.) 
 
 eXgyvi\ut, or ao^cu (old I'gyco, 
 itgyco), inclose, include, shut 
 in, F. aoi-w, A. ?Io£a or 
 i^lff, Perf. Pass, tigypai or 
 itQyuai or egyucu. (§§ 96. 
 18,9: 80. N. 5.) 
 
 efyw (EPJl), F. * J ££0) f^w, =- 
 EinfL, which see. (§ 96. 
 ,18.) 
 
 si'oxw or Toxw («Jxoi), liken, 
 compare, Imperf. rj'ioxov or 
 Brno*. (§96. 14.) 
 
 d'(o&cc, see £#w. 
 
 (2owu (rarely &«'«), dhve, 
 march, F. ildaa or £/lc5, A. 
 V.«cj«, Perf. ikijXaxa, Perf. 
 Pass. ib/jXaftai, later ilrjla- 
 ouai, A. Pass. rjXdd-rjV, later 
 $laQ&nr. (§§ 96. N. 13 : 95. 
 N. 1 : 102. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 
 109. N. 1.) 
 
 EAETOSl (EATOJl), F. Mid. 
 iIfvooucu, 2 A. 7]kv&ov com- 
 monly ?]A#ov, I';.#o), ll&oipi, 
 il&i, iX&eir, il&av, 2 Perf. 
 
 fXrjkv&a (rarely i-Xvfrct), = 
 tgyopc/.i, which see. (§<s 96. 
 18: 26. 1 : 93 N. 2.) 
 
 Note. Homer has 2 Perf. u\r>- 
 XeuS-u, 1st pers. plur. tl\ri\ou§fjt,iv 
 for ilknXouSxpiv. (§§ 96. N. 14 : 
 81 : 91. N. 6.) 
 
 sXttcj, cause to hope, give hope, 
 2 Perf. toXna as Present, 2 
 Pluperf. ioj/.Tieiv as Imper- 
 fect. Mid. ZXnoucu, cause 
 myself to hope, simply I 
 hope. (§ 80. N. 2, 3.) 
 
 C EAJ1, F. Uw (rare), 2. A. 
 tlXov, l/co, e'Xoipi, e'Xs, slur, 
 kXwv, 2 A. Mid. slXojxrjv 
 (Alexandrian elXduijv), = 
 a\o£w, which see. (§§ 80. 
 N. 1: 85. N. 2.) 
 
 Note. It may be supposed that 
 •EAP- was originally FEAP-, of 
 which the 2 A. Mid. 3d. pers. 
 sing., without the connecting vowel, 
 would be YiXro or Fivro (like 
 fiiNriffros for )3s Arnrrog). The 
 form Tivro was finally changed into 
 yivro, he seized) which is found in 
 Homer. (§§ 1. N. 3 : 92. N. 4.) 
 
 EAP-, see ei'XXco. 
 
 ENErKJl (EyEKfl), A. ?>*/- 
 xa, Perf. ivrjvo%a, Perf. Pass. 
 ivijvsyiiai, A. Pass. rjVsx&rjr, 
 2 A. /jVsy/.ov, =z epsgeo, which 
 see. (§96. 6: 104. N. 1 : 
 98. N. 2: 81.) 
 
 EiSEBSl, float, lie on, sit, 2 
 Perf. ivfjvo&a. (§§ 96. 19 : 
 81.) 
 
 ENEKJl, see ENErKJl. 
 
148 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [$ liS. 
 
 ico or frrfedi or MNJBJl or 
 
 Emznn (*v, Eiin.), F. $n- 
 
 orr/;oco or eviyjco, 2 A. tvionov, 
 poetic, = E1IIJI, which see. 
 (§ 96. 14, 16, 10.) 
 
 erinxco or iviaata (ENIIISL), 
 chide, 2 A. (vivlnov and (as 
 if from ENITIAnSL), iplna- 
 nov. (§ 96. 2, N. 1.) 
 
 ENIZIIJly see era?**. 
 
 hvtTuxi, see spina). 
 
 evvvfii (ESl), put on, clothe, F. 
 law, Perf. Pass, dyiai or 
 (Ofiai, Pluperf. Pass, niirp or 
 eojni]v or kiafirjr, A. Pass. 
 eo&tjv, A. Mid. teoaui]v, 
 poetic. (§§ 96. 9 : 95. N. 1 : 
 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1 : 80. 
 N. 2.) 
 
 (olrpo, see tillw. 
 
 inavgeo) or inavgloxoficu (JtxI, 
 avgea), avgloxoLiai), enjoy, 
 F. Mid. inavoijOOfiai, 2 A. 
 eTiTjVQov, inavgco, enavguv, 
 2 A. Mid. snrjvgoLirjv, imxvgco- 
 fittiy tnavgio&ai and inav- 
 
 inioxaiiai {EIITZTASLy EI1I- 
 STlIMi), understand, Im- 
 perf. TjmaiafiTjv, A. Pass. 1)7x1- 
 oxr k di]v or enioii]&7]v, F. Mid. 
 in njTriOonai. (§§ 117: 80. 
 N.4.) 
 
 2H7J2, see EinfL. 
 
 iTiw, am occupied ivith, can 
 busy, Imperf. elnov, F. Mid. 
 tipouai, 2 A. ianor, ojho, 
 
 GTlliv, 071(J)V, 2 A. Mid. £(J7TO- 
 [AT}V, OTKjJuai, OTXOliir^V, OTIOV, 
 
 OTxeo&ai, onounoQ. Mid. Ztxo- 
 pcu, follow. (§ 80. N. 1.) 
 
 The old poets have 2 A. 
 Mid. SuLj. iGTXMLiai, Inf. 
 eon so & a ■■, Part, eonoutrog. 
 
 Note. It seems that tru was 
 
 originally SEIM, whence 2 A. 
 ttrtrav, syncopated iWov. (Compare 
 vs , <rug, sus ; iTo/Ltoti, sequor : l<x%^ 
 super ; vro t sub ; s, se ; r.^itrus, 
 semis; tgoftat or rather 'EAfl, 
 setfeo ; «A?, ««/, solum.) 
 
 sqcco) (poetic tauuui, inflected 
 like c ioTcxuui)> luvc, am in love 
 tcith, A. Pass, ifedtfdtfr, A. 
 Mid. rjguGGtLirjV (poetic) fell 
 in love. (§§ 95. N. 1 : 109. 
 N. 1 ) 
 
 EPFSL or h'gdci), see £«£«. 
 
 igetna) (EPIIMl), demolish, 
 throw down, egsiipojy ijgsii{>a, 
 ^QEtipaLiriv, 2 A. jjoLTior fell 
 down, 2 Perf. igi\gina have 
 fallen down, Pluperf. Pass. 
 3d pers. sing, ioimixxo. 
 (§§96. 18r 81. N.) 
 
 ige(o, see I'goiicti. 
 
 igidalvw (EPT/JSl), quarrel, vie 
 with, A. Mid. Inf egidtjoa- 
 o&ca. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
 
 egojitcu (EPSl)j Ionic hoouou, 
 Epic also fos'to, ask, inquire, 
 F. Mid. tgi-ooLiat, 2 A. Mid. 
 T)g6ii7]r, \'g(OLiai, igoiLir^y egov, 
 egeodca, igoiizvoQ. (& 96. 18, 
 10.) 
 
 The Present tgopcu is not 
 Attic. 
 
 i'gga (EPJl), go forth, go to 
 perdition, F. i66r t o<x). A. //d- 
 grjoa. (§96. 6," 10.) 
 
 Note. From the simple Present 
 comes the Homeric A. 3d pers. 
 sing, totrt, in composition a.-7r'oio<ri, 
 he caused to go forth, he hurried 
 away. | § 104. N. 6.) 
 
 igvyydvb) or egsvyotiai (EPITfl), 
 eructate, 2 A. ijgvyov. (§ 96. 
 7, 18.) 
 
 igv&alrco, (EPTOPJ)y make red, 
 F. igv&i]0(a y A. i)gvdrjOa t 
 Perf. 7^^x«. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
 
§11S.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 149 
 
 igvxa or igvxdra or igvxardta, svgloxa {ETPR),Jind, F. evgi-- 
 impede, keep, 2 A. (Epic) oco, Perf. zvgi]xci, Perf. Pass. 
 
 igvxaxov (as if from £pr- 
 KAKfl), Inf. igvxaxiuv. 
 (§§ 96. 7, 10 : 89. N. 2.) 
 cpiso) or slgvoj, draw, egvaco, 
 Perf. Pass, sl'gvpou, A. Mid. 
 
 svgr^utxi, A. Pass, svgsdr.v, 
 
 2 A. n/porj 2 A. Mid. dgou^v 
 and, in writers not Attic, 
 efyaW- (§<$> 96. 8, 10 : 95. 
 
 N. 2: 85. N. 2.) 
 
 ugvodftijv. (§ 95. N. 2.) sz&a, hate, Perf. Pass. ifc&TJuai, 
 From EIPT3II, Pres. J/?/. F.Mid. fy&rjooiicu, 2 A. Mid. 
 
 ugvuevoci, Pres. Pass. />?/*. 
 
 ti'gva&ai or I'gi'o&at, Imperf. 
 
 Pass. 3d pers. sing, d'^t'io or 
 
 I'^i/ro, all Epic. 
 tgXOfAai, go, come, Imperf. 17^0'- 
 
 H7)v. From EAETOSL (which 
 
 see), F. Mid. eXevoofiui, 2 A. 
 
 ijXv&ov commonly r t X&ov, 
 
 I'X&co, s'X&oifii, iX&s, iX&uv, 
 
 eXdcor, 2 P. eXrjXv&a. 
 EPSl, see ego t aai, sgqa. 
 E20EJI, Perf. Pass. Part. 
 
 io&Tjfisrog or iiod^r^ivog, rj, ov, 
 
 clothed, dressed. 
 io&L(o, poetic ea&co or i'da, eat, 
 
 Perf. Pass. fdtjdtofKxi, 2 A. 
 
 Pass, ydeodrjv, 2 Perf. eftq&x 
 
 (Epic). Pres. Pass. I'douai, 
 
 as F. Active, shall eat. From 
 
 &Attl (which see), 2 A. 
 
 Vq>ayov. (§§96.10, 19, N. 8: 
 
 93. N. 2 : 81 : 107. N. 1 : 
 
 109. N. 1.) 
 
 Homer has Inf. Act. Xtptvat 
 (for iMfAtvar, and Perf. Pass. 
 i^Vi. (§ 89. N. 1.) 
 eanoo (EIISl), used only in the 
 
 TiX&o^v. Pres. Pass, e'x&d- 
 ro t uou (later ex&ouai), used 
 chiefly in the compound 
 dnex&drouca, am hated. 
 (§96. 10,7.) 
 I/go ( C EXJ1), have, Imperf. *7- 
 /ov, F. I'ifw, 2 A. fGy'or, <j/a5, 
 o/oivjV, o%uv, oxmv, 2 A. Mid. 
 ioXOfAtiv, oxwpcu, (JXOtfitjV, 
 oxov, axsad^aL, axo^evog. 
 (§§ 14. N. 5 : 80. N. 1 : 
 87. N. 2.) From 2XESI, 
 2XHM1, 2 A. Impcrat. 
 o X sg. (§ 117. N. 11.) 
 
 The forms v^ffu, i<r%*ix*, %<?xt)- 
 (ttt.ii ia-x&r,*, which commonly are 
 subjoined to tx,w, in strictness be- 
 long to "ffxou, which see. 
 
 Note 1 . Homer has a 2 Perf. 
 •#«** (II. 2, 218), formed as fol- 
 lows : gg«t OXn (§ 96. 19\ 
 *£ a » ^X u X a f o^uko, contrary to 
 the rate(§ 14. 3). 
 
 Note 2. It would seem that the 
 original form of i%w was SEX II, 
 whence 2 A. t<rs%ov, syncopated 
 1r%o*. (Compare s<r<v. ) 
 
 Impcrat. 2d pers. plur. tans- £<//« (rarely sipsco), cook, boil, 
 
 is (poetic), = EinSl, which F. ktyr t aw, A. fyrjaa, (§96. 
 
 see. (§ 96. 14.) 10.) 
 
 wads, see dvddvot). ESI, am, see slpL 
 
 siido), sleep, Imperf. yvdov, F. c EJl, put on, see evwpu 
 
 8vd}}oco. (§ 96. 10.) Q EJ2, send, see tiyu. 
 
 C ESL, place, cause to sit, set, A. sloa, Perf. Mid. r^uou sit, Pluperf. 
 Mid. r^rp sat, F.Mid. uaoum, A.Mid. elod^v. (§ 80. N. 1.) 
 13* 
 
150 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ us- 
 
 The Perfect and Pluperfect Middle are inflected as follows : 
 Perfect Middle. 
 
 Ind. S. 7}jicu D. iifis&ov P. rj^is&a 
 
 yam, fio&ov fjode 
 
 fjTCtl, 1]OTCU fjO&OV 1}VXVLI 
 
 Subj. cofiai, used only in the compound Ttd&rj^cn, which 
 
 see. 
 Opt. oXfxriVy only in the compound xd&rjfiai. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 I). i)(J&ov 
 
 P. tja&s 
 r\a&(aaav 
 
 S. rjOO 
 
 ijo&a 
 Inf. T}o&ai,. 
 Part, fywog, rj, ov, (§ 93. N. 1.) 
 
 Pluperfect Middle. 
 
 1) (SO _ TjG&OV 
 
 fjTO, r ( aro r t ad-^v 
 
 Note 1. For the forms *<rrat, %<rro, see above (§ 107. N. 1.) 
 Note 2. For fortu, nvrs, the Ionic has t«T«/, 'iaro. (§ 91. N. 2.) 
 
 P. rjfis&a 
 
 TjVTO 
 
 tm'icu, see ftypf. 
 z. 
 
 £aw, live, tfocj, IZyou, I'fijxa, 
 tioojucci. (§ 116. N. 2.) 
 From ZUMI, lmperat. tf&i 
 (sometimes £?j), Imperf. s&v. 
 (§ 117. N. 8.) 
 
 Zsvyvvfti (zrr/L), yoke, F. 
 £ev$(o, A. IXsvSa, Perf. Pass. 
 e&vypai, A. Pass. i&vx&r}v, 
 2 A. Pass, etfyrjv. (§ 96. 
 18, 9.) 
 
 £o)vrv[xi (ZOSl), gird, F. fwaw, 
 A. ^waa, Perf. I£wxa, Perf. 
 Pass, i%woucu, A. Pass, ejoi- 
 a^v (§§ 96. 9 : 107. N. 1 : 
 109. N. 1.) 
 
 //. 
 
 r,liai, see C .EJ2, place. 
 
 rjfil, say. The Imperfect ?]*>, ?], 
 is used chiefly in the formulas 
 
 tjv <5' iywy said I ; t\ d* og, 
 said he. 
 
 r^ivM, bend down, regular. 
 Homer has Perf. 3d pers. 
 sing, efivrjiivxe (in composi- 
 tion V7i8^ivrjfivxs) for 7)uvxe. 
 (§81.) 
 
 0. 
 
 OANSl, see dvrjoxa). 
 
 &do[i(u and dritonaiy admire, 
 F. Mid. dwaoticu, A. Mid. 
 e&r)odiAr)v and i&jfflo'diuijy. 
 (§96. 18, 10.) 
 
 &dmw (OA&Jl), bury, ddipo), 
 z&ouj.ia, Ts&afifjiou, 2 A. Pass. 
 hi<nv. (§§96.2: 14. 3.) 
 
 OA<l>fL, am astonished, 2 A. 
 tiacpov, 2 Perf. liOrina (con- 
 trary to § 14. 3) synonymous 
 with the Present. (§ 96. 18.) 
 
 OAJl, suckle, suck, A. Mid. 
 
§ US.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 151 
 
 i&itatxptp. Pres. Mid. Inf. 
 
 drio&ai (contracted from 
 
 ■adeG&ai, § 23. N. 1). 
 dtXco, see i&tla. 
 OEPSl, warm, F. Mid. &£qoo- 
 
 ynn> 2 A. Pass, i&sgriv. Mid. 
 
 &too[xai, warm myself. 
 
 (§103. N. 1.) 
 #£'w (OETJl), run, F. Mid. 
 
 &8voopai y xtevoovixat,. (§§ 96. 
 
 N. 12: 114. N. 1.) 
 dew, put, see tI&t^l. 
 \rr t £ottai, see tfixoficti. 
 &iyydrto ( OirfL), touch, F.Mid. 
 
 dlSo^di, 2 A. t&iyov, ftiyiiv, 
 
 Siyuv. (§ 96. 7.) 
 dv^oxa (OAJyfl), die, Perf. 
 
 TiSvrpa am dead, 2 A. e#a- 
 
 rov, 2 Perf. zi&vcca, te&vuItjv, 
 
 Ti\}va&i y Ts&vavaiy tb&vswq 
 
 OOPSl, see dgwoxa). 
 OPE<PJl, see Tgecpa. 
 QPEXSly see t^6>w. 
 &qv7it(o (OPT&SI), crumble, 
 
 dgvyw, e&Qvtpot, 2 A. Pass. 
 
 iigvcprtv. (§§96.2: 14 3.) 
 &Q<6oxo) (OOPSl), leap, spring, 
 
 2 A. e&ooov, F. Mid. &oqov- 
 
 pai. (§96. 17, 18.) 
 OT&Jl, see Tvcpco. 
 &vco, sacrifice, ftvow, s&vaa, 
 
 Ts&vxa, iTv&rtV. (§§ 95. N. 
 
 2 : 14. N. 3.) 
 
 /. 
 
 Idgvco, locate, vaa. vaa, vxa, 
 vfiaiy A. Pass. Idv&^v and 
 Idgvv&riv. (§ 95. 5.) 
 I/W., see EIASl. 
 Uco, see X^ul. 
 (Epic xi$vr t wg or Tf^yfiwc), l£w and t£«Vo) ( c EJJl), seat, sit, 
 F. Mid. ^avovucci. From F. law and [w, A. law, F.Mid. 
 TEONHKSl, F. Tf^TjIw, %j 0/ uat. (§§ 96. 16, 4, 7, 
 
 -it&vfauou. (§§ 96. 17, 8, 10: 102. N. 1.) 
 11 : 91. N. 7: 99. N.) 
 Xtjfii and Uco (EJl), send, Imperf. tip or Xow, F. ^w, A. i)y.a, 
 Perf. «Ik«, Perf. Pass, uuai, A. Pass. i&r t v or a,',9?yr, 2 A. i]v 
 (not used in the sing, of the Ind.), w, rfijr, id-i or ?$, eWi, 
 eXg, 2 A. Mid. !/^r / *' or ufir t v, w^at, sXp^v, too or ov, eovai, 
 luevog. (^ 96. 1: 104. N. 2: 80. N. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 117. 
 N. 11, 13.) 
 
 The Present and Imperfect, and the Second Aorist Active 
 and Middle are inflected as follows : 
 
 Present Active. 
 
 
 Present Passive and Middle 
 
 D. S. Xtjfxc 
 Ltjg 
 Xtjol(v) 
 
 
 S. 
 
 XtflGU 
 
 Xioaiy Xji 
 
 XtTOU 
 
 D. XsfAEV 
 XSTOV 
 
 
 D. 
 
 U[l£&OV 
 XeO&OV 
 
 XsTOV 
 
 
 
 Xeo&ov 
 
 JP. Xefxev 
 
 XSTE 
 
 
 P. 
 
 Xso&s 
 
 Iuol(v)> laoi{v) 
 
 
 Xtvtai 
 
152 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS 
 
 Subj. uo, like ji&w from 
 
 Ti&lfUt. 
 
 Opt. Uli)v y like tl&eItjv. 
 Imp. S. Xs&i, Utb, D. Vs- 
 
 JOV, UlCOVy P. UTS, 
 
 Ihcooctv, 
 Inf. Isvai. 
 Part. Ulg, sloa, iv. 
 
 Imperfect Active. 
 
 S. Xtjv, c L7]g f %r\, D. 
 terovy isTqv, P. 
 Xete, Xsaav. 
 
 Second Aorist Active. 
 Ind. S. r\v 
 
 VJ 
 
 V 
 
 tfisv, elfxsv 
 
 STOV, ELTOV 
 ETOV, ELTTjV 
 
 euev, si [lev 
 ete, site 
 soav, sioav 
 
 LEfJLEV, 
 XsflBV, 
 
 D. i'u 
 
 p. 
 
 [§118. 
 Subj. Iwjmt, like n&coficu. 
 
 Opt. Uifirjv, like ri&tlfirjv. 
 Imp. S. Xeoo or Xov, Uo&iOy 
 
 D. XeG&OV, Uo&WV, P. XeO&S, 
 IsO&MGaV. 
 
 Inf. Xeo&gii. 
 
 Part. Ufievog, rj, ov. 
 
 Imperf Passive and Middle. 
 S. Ufxrjv, Xeoo or Xov, Xeto, 
 
 D. UllE&OVy XeO&OV, U(J&T)V, 
 
 P. U[i.E&ct, Xeo&e, Xevto. 
 
 Second Aorist Middle. 
 S. e^tjv, Ellfirjv 
 too 
 
 ETO, ElTO 
 
 D. EfiE&oVy sXps&ov 
 
 EO&OV, ELO&OV 
 
 EO&Tjl'j EXad-tjv 
 
 P. e'fiE&a, eX^ieOu 
 
 EO&E, ELG&E 
 EVTO, ELVTO 
 
 Subj. w, inflected like the Subj. w ( ua*, inflected like the 
 Present. Present. 
 
 Opt. Eir\Vy like the Pres- Opt. eXutjv, like the Present, 
 ent. 
 
 Imp. e&i, like the Present. Imp. too, like the Present. 
 
 Inf. elvoli. Inf. eoScu. 
 
 Part. sXg, tlaa, ev. Part, e'^evoc, 77, ov. 
 
 Note 1. The Present Ind. 3d pers. plur. la<ri is contracted from li&trt. 
 (§ 117. N. 2.) 
 
 Note 2. For Imperf. Act. 7»jv, there occurs a form uiv, found only in 
 composition. 
 
 Note 3. Homer has F. t<ru, A. tVa, eW. (§§ 95. N. 2 : 80. N. 3.) 
 
 Note 4. The form leovrat for Perf. Pass. 3d pers. plur. uvrea, is obtained 
 as follows: 'EH, 'OH, u^ai/iu^ai.iuvrau (§§ 96. 19: 80. N. 3.) See 
 
§113.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 153 
 
 Ixviopcu and ly.drco and 1'xoj, 
 co/rae, Perf. t^a*, F. Mid. 
 I'lo^icu, 2 A. Mid. Ixofiyv. 
 (§ 96. 5, 10, 7.) 
 
 Note. Homer has A. Act. 3d 
 pers. plur. J%ov for Tgav. (§ 85. 
 N. 2.) 
 
 C 1AHM1 flAJJt), am propitious, 
 Tmperat. Xla&i or ttij&i, 
 Perf. (as Present) $*//>/. llr\- 
 xw, 0^>£. iXrjxoifjii, F. Mid. 
 iXdoopai, A. Mid. iXaodprjv. 
 Mid. IXdaxopai (rarely u« - 
 ^ca), propitiate. (§§ 96. 8 : 
 95. N. 2.) 
 
 Xma^ui (iITASl, 7/7T7/3I/), 
 F. Mid. nxrjoofiai, 2 A. I- 
 tjt?/*', 2 A. Mid. inidfxr/VyZ^ 
 nsTopcu, which see. (§ 96. 1.) 
 
 laxw, see eiGxco. 
 
 lari^u {2TAJI), place, cause to 
 stand, F. ar^'aca, A. iGTr\GV., 
 Perf. iortjxa stand, later 
 taxdxa have placed, Pluperf. 
 eoTr t xsiv or slarrjy.siv was 
 standing, Perf. Pass. hjt«- 
 //«<, A. Pass. eoTu&r}v, 2 Perf. 
 EiSTaa stand, sgtw, eaTaltjv, 
 I'oTa&i, eotuvou, eoicog, 2 A. 
 SGTqv stood, ai(x), (jxalrjv, gttJ- 
 ■&t, OTrjvai, Gidg. Mid. Ilgtu- 
 [xcu, cause myself to stand, 
 stand, (§§96. 1: 117: 77. 
 N. 2: 91. N. 7: 95. N. 2.) 
 
 Note. The augment of the 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect, in this verb, 
 
 takes the rough breathing, 
 lo^avdw and lo/arai, == toga, 
 
 which see. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
 loxviofiott,, = i'GZOfica. (§ 96. 5, 
 
 10.) 
 I'oxw (i'/a), take hold of, hold, 
 
 restrain, F. j/tjo-w, Perf. 
 
 Zaxqxa, Perf. Pass, soy^um, 
 
 A. t&zi&tp, F. Mid. o%y<jo- 
 
 pcu, 2 A. eg%ov. Mid. lor^o- 
 ^a/, restrain myself (§§ 96. 
 1, 10: 95. 2.) 
 
 IJ2, see tl^, go. 
 K. 
 
 KAASL, see xalvv^ai. 
 
 xu&£'£opou (xaid, s£o[i<u) 9 sit 
 down, Imperf. ixade'Qopr^v, A. 
 Pass, ixa&sodyv (later), 2 F. 
 Mid. xad-edovfiai. (§§ 14. 1: 
 82. N. 1.) 
 
 xa&svdca [xaxd, tvdw), sleep, 
 Imperf. xa&r t vdov or xct&ev- 
 dov or ixd&svdov, F. xa&sv- 
 AgW (§§ 14. 1:82. N. 2.) 
 
 xd&r u uai {xard, i)fiou), sit dozen, 
 Subj. xd&a) t u(y.i, Opt. xa&ol- 
 [irjv, Imperat. xd&r^o (later 
 xdfrov),Inf. xa&rJG&ca, Part. 
 xct&ijfiEroQ, Pluperf. Mid. xa- 
 &v\yLr\v or ixa$r\pr\v sat down, 
 (§§ 14. I : 82. N. 3 ) 
 
 xa&l£b) and xafri£dra) (xaid, 
 I'fo?, ^aiG)), sea£, cawse £0 sit 
 dowti, sit down, Imperf. ixd- 
 %ri£ov, F. xa&lGu or xa&iw, 
 A. ixd&iooi, Perf. xsxd&ixa, 
 F. Mid. xa&i&oopou. (§§ 14. 
 1 : 82. N. 1.) 
 
 xalvvfiou, surpass, excel, Im- 
 perf. ixouvvfiriv, Perf. Pass, 
 (from KAASl), xixaG^iat or 
 K&cr^fKo, (§ 107. N. 5.) 
 
 x«/w or x«w, burn, A. (Epic) 
 Ixfja or I'xsa or sxcur, 2 A. 
 Pass. ?x«?7*>. From KATJl, 
 F. xat'aw, A. sxavGCiy Perf. 
 Pass, xixctvficu, A. Pass, e- 
 jcav^y. (§§96. 18: 104. 
 N. I.) 
 
 xaUw (KAsJJl), call, F. xc^saw 
 or xaXai, A. ixdksaa, Perf. 
 xsxlrjxa, Perf. Pass. xtxXrjfiah 
 Opt. xsxlrjprjv, Inf. xtxXrj- 
 
154 
 
 INFLECTION OF WO 
 
 
 o&cti, Part, y.r/./.i.unos, A. 
 Pass, fidiffrpr. (§§ 90. 10, 
 
 17: 95. N. 1 : 91. 5: 102. 
 
 N. 2.) 
 xcturia (KAMSl), labor, am 
 weary, Perf. y.tv.uiy/.a, 2 A. 
 I'xauor, F. Mid. xauovucu. 
 
 (§96.5, 17.) 
 
 xaiayyiui (actio, tr/rvui), break 
 down, break to pieces, F. 
 xaraifw (also xtmfiifw, with 
 
 the augment of the Aor. 
 Ind.), A. y.((Ttuh<, Part, y.a- 
 izdiu; with the augment of 
 the Indicative, 2 Perf y.uii- 
 xtyn am broken to pit i 
 A. Pass, xentajnp'. 
 
 Note. For Aor. Opt. 2d pers. 
 sing. xa-a|a/,-, Hesiod \,Op. et D. 
 692) has xava^a; {see ayvvfju). 
 
 xaiLiSca;, see the preceding. 
 KATP-, see xa/w. 
 
 xelficu (xtw, xsiu, KEI2II), lie down, recline, xeoutai, xa>///?;r, 
 vtioo, xelo&ai, xeiuzroz, Imperf. extiur t r, F. Mid. y.duouai. 
 (§§96. IS: 117.) 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are inflected as follows : 
 
 Present, 
 Ind. S. xtluai D. xtius&ov 
 
 xuaai xtlo&ov 
 
 xuiai xHod-ov 
 
 Subj. xicouca, like rinrrwuca. 
 Opt. xeoiiLirjv, like tvxrolfitpf. 
 Imp. S. xuao D. xsio&ov 
 
 xeto&co xelo&cov 
 
 Inf. xuo&ou. 
 Part, xeiusroi, ?;, or. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 S. 
 
 xeius&ot 
 
 XiiO&E 
 
 xiincu 
 
 xttod-e 
 xelo&cjoav 
 
 {xtiu^r 
 i'y.tioo 
 
 D. ixiluzSov 
 
 I'xsio&ov 
 
 P. 
 
 extius&a 
 I'y.ua&s 
 
 I'y.tno 
 
 extiG&^v 
 
 
 I'xeirTO 
 
 Note. The Present xtso or mtm has the signification of the Future, shall 
 He down ; also, desire to lie down. 
 
 xi/.oue.i, command, F. Mid. xs- 
 
 uai, A. Mid. ixtlyoafiipr, 
 
 2 A Mid. buxXofitj* for £xa- 
 
 utlofiffp. ($« OiS. 10 : 7S. 
 
 N. 2 : 26. 1.) 
 
 xeyrio), prick, regular. From 
 KEN1'JI % A. Inf. xiroai. 
 96. 10: 12. N. 4.) 
 
 xt qui rent (poetic xfoJco), ?nix, 
 F. 7itQ&om 9 A. ly.iouuu, Perf. 
 
 xfxottx/*, Perf. Pass, xixgapai 
 or xt'/tgaouut, A. Pass. *- 
 Koithp or ixtQaod ?,> . ( ^ 96. 
 9: 26. 1: 107. N. 1 :" 109. 
 N. 1.) 
 
 For Aor. Act. I7if. xioaceu^ 
 
 Homer has xfivoLi. 
 
 xtodithco (KLPJSl), gain. F. 
 
 xegdeo w (in writers not Attic 
 
 xtod^ow), A. ixiodura (not 
 
§118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 155 
 
 Attic txtydrjoa), Perf. xexeq- 
 di/xa or xExigdfjxoc. (§ 96. 
 7, 10.) _ 
 
 y.iw, see xslfiau 
 
 y.i]do) (KAJSL), trouble, vex, 
 worry , F. Mid. xexa^'ao/icu, 
 A. Mid. Imperat. 2d. pers. 
 sing, vrfitoouy 2 Perf. xixrjdot 
 am anxious. Mid. xydoficti, 
 am anxious about, care for. 
 (§§90 18, 10, 11:95.N.2.) 
 
 xidrtifti, Mid. xldvafjiai, = axl- 
 dnjui, -a^ai. 
 
 xixh']ox(x) i^KAASl), zr: xaXioa. 
 (§!)0. 17, 1,8.) 
 
 XlQVTjfil «'llid xforwoi), m xsouv- 
 
 vv(ai. (§90. 10,0.) 
 xi%ui'Oi (K/XJl), reach, find, F. 
 Mid. xi//]oo(dai, A. Mid. *xt- 
 X)](5if.^)]v, 2 A. I'xi/ov. From 
 KfXIIMly 2 A. fefrq*, &/&/. 
 x//tu (Epic x/^f/w), O/tf. xi- 
 Xtup', Inf. xL/iiraiy Part, xi 
 jc/c, 2 A. Mid. Part, xw\- 
 ptrog. (§§90.7, 10. 117. 
 N. 17, 15.) 
 x'xQi](.a (xgciw), lend, the rest 
 from^rta), which see. (§ 90. 
 
 xtcu, go, Imperf. Ixiov. 
 
 xld'Cta (KAArSl), clang, F. 
 y.XdySw, A. I'xAa/ija, 2 A. t- 
 xXayov, 2 Perf. xsxXi]ya or x£- 
 xXayya. From xexbiyw, Pres. 
 Ptf;Y. xExXijywv. (§ 90. 4, 
 0, 18, 11.) 
 
 xAa/oj or xAww, wc^p, F. xXairjoco 
 or xXurjijb). From KAATSl, 
 A. h'xlotvoa, F. Mid. xAauao- 
 //«/, xXavoovuai. (§90. 10: 
 114. N.l.) 
 
 xAaco, 6>Wr, xAacrco, IxAacia, x£- 
 xAaxa, XExXaoficu, ixXdo&tjv. 
 From KAHMI, 2 A. Pa>^. 
 
 xA«V (§§ 95. N. 1 : 107. 
 N. 1 : 109. N. I : 117.) 
 
 xXixo, hear, Imperf. exXvov sy- 
 nonymous with the Aorist. 
 From KATMr, 2 A. Imperat, 
 xXv&l and xixXvfri, 2 A. Mid. 
 Part. xXv^livoq as adjective, 
 celebrated, famous. (§§78. 
 N. 2: 117. N. 10.) 
 
 KM All, see xdjnv(a. 
 
 xoQbwv[u (KOPSl), satiate, F. 
 xoQtaoj, A. exoQsaoi, Perf. 
 xexoo^xa, Perf. Pass, x^xoot- 
 a/u«i (Ionic xExogiijuai), A. 
 Pass. exoQso&ip>. (§§ 90. 
 10, 9 : 95. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 
 109. N. 1.) 
 
 xo«£w (KPAril)y crxj, F. x^'Soj, 
 F. Mid. xqa^ai, 2 Perf. 
 xixoaya synonymous with 
 the Present. From 7CE- 
 KPArii), F. Mid. xfx^a- 
 $ouoa, A. (later) exexquSol. 
 (§90.4,11.) 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 Perf. 1st pers. 
 plur. xix£et.y pi*, Imperat. 2d pers. 
 sing. KiKooc^ty 2Pluperf. 1st. pers. 
 plur. iKiK^uyfjtiv. (§ 91. N. 6.) 
 
 XQEfiVfiiai (xQEfiact), KPJIMHMl), 
 suspend myself, hang, Subj. 
 xgtfuofiai, Opt. xoE^aiiATjV or 
 xQE^.ol^ii]Vy F. Mid. xoeujJgo- 
 fiat. (§117.) 
 
 xQEjudvvvjui (later xQE^xdwi), sus- 
 pend, hang, F. x^ao-w or 
 xQEficjy A. ixQEfiaoa, A. Pass. 
 EXQE(.ido&riv. (§§ 90. 9: 95. 
 N.l: 102. N. 2: 109. N. 1.) 
 
 XQrjpvrffii, XQr^ivauaiy Imperf. 
 ixQr](jiv(ijj,7jVy = preceding. 
 (§ 90. 0: 117.) 
 
 xxdofxaiy possess, Perf. Mid. x£- 
 xT7]^iai and IxTfyucu, Subj. xs- 
 
15G 
 
 INFLECTION- 01' WOKDS. 
 
 [§118. 
 
 XTinuca, Opt. y.fxTj' t ur t r aiii! 
 matrvftrpf (Ionic xexTeoju^r), 
 Infin. y.exri'fG&ai, Part, y.s- 
 xii]uivo;, F. Mid. y.Tijtsouitt, 
 A. Mid. e-Ajy-oauyp', (§§76. 
 N. 3: 91. N. 3.) 
 xrf/rw and y.ihvvui (KTENJl, 
 KTAJl\ kill, F. y.Tsrto, A. 
 EXTEiro, Pert. zxTaxa and f- 
 xTOPipta, Perf Pass. grra/Uctf, 
 A. Pass. fXTct&jjv (sometimes 
 ixTur&r t r), 2 A. sKtaror, 2 
 Perf. extofcl From KTIIMT, 
 2 A. \xtulv, y.Tto, y.iaii]), Kra- 
 rai, y.ia;, 2 A. Mid. sxTafifjv, 
 y.Tuo&ai, xTiiuero*. (§§ 96. 
 5, 19, 18, 16, 9, 13: 117. 
 N. 10.) 
 
 Homer has also F. xTctviu, xrec- 
 titfteu. 
 
 KT1SL, KTIMI, build, 2 A. 
 Mid. Part, ktlfisrog, r iy or, 
 built. (§§ 117. N. 14.) 
 
 Kivniv (KTTIZJl), make noise, 
 
 thunder t ?;croj, ?;o"«, i\xu, yuca, 
 7j&r t r, 2 A. e'y.TiTioy. (§ 96. 
 
 10.) 
 
 yevvib) (KTSL), kiss, F. y.VOCO, 
 A. ey.vaa. The compound 
 TTgooxtrio), prostrate myself, 
 adore, is generally regular, 
 
 aS F. 7TOO(JXIT?;(70J. (§§ 96. 
 
 5, 10: 95.N.1.) 
 
 nvm or xviw or xvi'oxo), con- 
 ceive, to be pregnant, F. 
 xvtjofo, A. ikvrjoa, A. Mid. 
 ixiJ/juur,}-, poetic ixioduj l r. 
 
 (§96.' 10, 8.) 
 
 ylABP-, see /.ctu.jdro). 
 
 no, (AAXSl), receive by 
 lot, obtain, F. Mid. h'}ouai 
 (Ionic )m$oucu), 2 A. ^'/.a/ov, 
 Perf. itltix* and Ukoyxa. 
 
 '< 96. 7, 18, 19, 6: 76. 
 N. 1.) 
 
 AAOll, see htrd-drto. 
 
 AAKSl, see /.Jcj/w. 
 
 lappa** {AABflY receive, take, 
 Perf. tS&Npft, Perf. Pass. eH 
 /.ruaai, A. Pass. ghfg&tyr, F. 
 Mid. Ifoopai, 2 A. gUr/fey, 
 2 A. Mid. f j ;.«io'a ? ;r. (§§96. 
 7, IS: 76. X. I.) 
 
 From AAMBO, the Ionic has 
 Perf. Pass. \ika/u.uxf, A. Pass, 
 IkaapS-r.v, F. I\Iid. kuu^cuas. It 
 has also Perf. ksXdfaxct. (§§ 96. 
 6, 10: 107. N. 4.) 
 
 /.tiiOuito {AAOJl, lift**), am 
 hid, escape notice, Perf. Pass. 
 Ulrjofuu (in Homer JUlo- 
 ouc(i\ F. Mid. Ifjaofiah 2 A. 
 SU^ox, 2 Perf. ktytf*, 2 A. 
 Mid. f/.ad-oui-r. Mhl.).«y&u- 
 rouai (sometimes fold-ouca), 
 forget. (§96. 7, 18.) 
 
 lacrxu (AAKS1), talk, gabble, 
 A. uciy.^ou, F. Mid. /.r<x?;o"o- 
 pat, 2 A. daxw, 2 Perf. U- 
 lay.a (Ionic k'Zijxa), 2 A. Mid. 
 (Epic) /.uuxcan-y. (§§ 96. 
 14 ; 10: 78. N. 2.) 
 
 Ica'o), i'/.ctvor or rjlavov, /.mow, 
 Uavaot used only in the 
 compound anolavm, which 
 see. () 78. N. 1.) 
 
 .1AXS1, see la/jar*. 
 
 ).e'/co, collect, §», S^, Perf. e&o- 
 /f<, Perf. Pass. t}).eyuai. 2 A. 
 Pass. S ; 76. N. 1 : 
 
 98. N. 2.) soy, is 
 
 regular. 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 
 3d pers. sing. xUto, for tXtyi 
 iXiy: 92. N. 4: 7.) 
 
 ABXJl, < oust to lie eloic 
 
 A. Mid. &$bjmp fay rfwWj 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 157 
 
 Impcrat. (in Homer) Xi&o, 
 Inf. Xifro&ai, 2 A. Mid. 
 IXiypnv lay down, 3d pers. 
 sing. Xixxo, Impcrat. Xi$o. 
 (§§88. N. 3: 92. N. 4 : 9. 
 I: 7.) 
 
 AHBSl, see Xupfidvco. 
 
 h]$uiw or Xri&co, cause to for- 
 get, F. fo-oo), 2 A. (Epic) 
 UXa&ov, 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
 XtXa$6pnv. (§§ 9G. 7: 78. 
 N. 2.) See also Xav&dvw. 
 
 Xqxico, Ionic, === Xdoxco, which 
 see. 
 
 slirXJl, see Xayxdra. 
 
 Xovo) (old Aow, iotoi), wash, 
 bathe, Xovow, t'Xovoa, XiXovxu, 
 XtXovpai. Mid. Xovopai, com- 
 monly Xovpui, wash myself, 
 bathe. (§90. 18, 10.) 
 
 The Present and Imper- 
 fect commonly drop the con- 
 necting vowels o and e. 
 E. g. Pres. Xovpsv for Xovo- 
 per, Xoviul for Xoveiat, Xovv- 
 iui for Xovovtcu, Xovo&ai for 
 Xovta&ut, Imperf. I'Xovv for 
 cAoirov, eXovro for fAovwo. 
 
 yluw, /oas?, so/ye, Xvooj, i'Xvon, 
 XsXvxct, XtXvpai, (Xv$r]v. (^ 95. 
 N. 2.) 
 
 From ATMI, 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
 
 3d pers. sing. Xuro as Passive. — 
 
 For the Perf. Pass. Opt. 3d pers. 
 
 sing. XiXvro, see above (§ 91. N. 
 
 4.) 
 
 M. 
 MAO SI, see pav&dvco. 
 liv.ijj.dQ), see pdoa. 
 puiopui (pdoj), feel, touch, 
 
 handle, F. Mid. pdoopai, A. 
 
 Mid. *paod m y. (§§96. 18: 
 
 95. N. I.) 
 niAKSL, see p^xdopat. 
 pav&dvo) (ZfAOSl), learn, un- 
 14 
 
 der stand, Perf pepd&rjxa, 
 F. Mid. padijoopai, 2 A. 
 I'pa&ov, 2 F. Doric pafrtiipat, 
 contracted from pa&iopat. 
 (§§96. 7, 10: 114. N. 2: 
 23. N. 1.) 
 
 pdgvapcu, fight, Opt. pagval- 
 pi]v or pagvolp^v, Imperf. 
 ipugvdprp, inflected like 
 XoTapcu. 
 
 pdgmu (MAPIISl), take hold 
 of, seize, F. pdgipoi, A. 
 i'pagipa, 2 A. Xpagnov (also 
 tpunov, without the g), 2 
 Perf pepagna. (§ 96. 2.) 
 
 lidxop.ui (loriic paxto pa i), fight, 
 combat, Perf. Mid. ptpdxn- 
 pai, F. Mid. paxioopen (Epic 
 paxr\Oopai)y A. Mid. tpaxs- 
 odpr\v, 2 F. Mid. paxovpai. 
 (§§96.10: 95. N. 2 : 114 
 N. 2.) 
 
 pdo) and paipdw, desire, am 
 eager, strive, feel a strong 
 impulse, 2 Perf. pipaa sy- 
 nonymous with the Present. 
 Mid. pdopai, desire, seek, 
 Impcrat. [uwzo, Inf. pa~o&ai. 
 (§§96. N. 2: 116. N. 7.) 
 
 The 2 Perf. /tip** is inflected, 
 as far as it goes, like $\$a.a. (§ 91. 
 N.7.) 
 
 pzftvoxw (psdvo)), make drunk y 
 intoxicate, F. ptdvoco, A. 
 tpi&voa, A. Pass, ipt&va&riv. 
 Mid. ps&voxopai, am intoxi- 
 cated. (§§ 96. 8 : 95. N. 1.) 
 
 ps&voj, am intoxicated, equiva- 
 lent to the Middle of the 
 preceding. 
 
 MEIPJl(MEPJl), divide, share, 
 Perf. Pass. 3d pers. sing. 
 upugjai it is fated, Part. 
 dpagpevog fated, destined, 
 
153 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 is 
 
 IIS. 
 
 Pluperf. Pass. 3d pers. &ittg. 
 e'iuagio it was fated, 2 A. 
 tuuogov I obtained, 2 Perf. 
 tppoQa have obtained. Mid. 
 (.iziQouca, receive a share, 
 obtain. (§§96. 18, 19: 76. 
 N. 1 : 79. N. 3.) 
 
 The augment u of the Perf. 
 and Pluperf. Pass, takes the rough 
 breathing. 
 
 The forms fitf/.o^rai, fti/u,oo/xtvo; 
 are sometimes used for uuczorat, 
 
 U(A.O.^fL%V0$. (§ 96. 13.) 
 
 fiikku, am about to be or do any 
 
 thing, shall, F. pekkrjou, A. 
 
 iuuh^a. (§ 96. 10.) 
 pikto, am a concern to, F. u*- 
 
 h']0(x), A. euehjocc, 2 Perf. 
 
 (Epic) pipyl*. (§ 96. 10, 
 
 18.) 
 
 The epic poets have Perf. Pass. 
 3d pers. sing. f^i^XiTcci for /u,tp$- 
 \ira.i. ^§ 26. N.) 
 
 fiiva and ptyow, remain, F. 
 fAsrw, A. euEiva, Perf. ue/di- 
 w^xa. (§§96. 1, 10:26. 1.) 
 
 MENSl (not to be confounded 
 with the preceding), intend, 
 purpose, 2 Perf. jae^ova sy- 
 nonymous with the Present. 
 (§ 96. 19.) 
 
 fir^uoi.iaL (MAKSl), bleat, 2 A. 
 tiuuy.ov, 2 Perf. usjurjxa. 
 From fiFfAiy/.co, Imperf. f y*g- 
 fArjy.ov. (§96. 18, 10, 11.) 
 
 fxiuivoi, stain, regular. Homer 
 (II. 4, 146) has A. Pass. 3d 
 pers. plur. ^mv^^v for ulav- 
 (rtv for e^LUV&^oar. (§ 92. 
 N. 1.) 
 
 {iiyivi.u and ployo) (MITSl), 
 mix, F. p&u, A. e/iti-a, Perf. 
 Pass, (iifuyftai, A. Pass. 
 fulyjh)v, 2 A. Pass. i{ilyr t v. 
 
 96. 9, 14.) 
 
 Note. Form Without the con- 
 necting vowel 2 A. 3Jid. 3d pers. 
 sing. 'iptKro or (jcIkto for 1/u.iyiro. 
 (§§ 91. N. 4: 7.) 
 
 {.iuir)j(jy.co (My All), cause to 
 remember, remind, F. ^r/j(jo?, 
 A. sfivrjaa, Perf. Mid. utuvr r 
 liai remember, Subj. ju^rw- 
 
 ^CM, O/tf. fAEflVljfiTiV Ot flBflVti- 
 
 fir t v or fis^volfjirfV (Ionic 
 peuvscojuijv), Imp. (aeurr]oo, 
 Inf. (.lEjLiijjo&at, Part, ^u^ur?;- 
 (jdrog, A. Pass, ifiv^a&^v, 
 3 F. fiEfirrjaofjiai, F. Mid. 
 firyoopai, A. Mid. e i uv?]ad{.ir i v. 
 Mid. [iifjivrjOxofiai, remind 
 myself, remember. (§§ 96. 
 1,8: 91. N.3: 109. N. 1.) 
 
 jjh\uvco, see ^sVoj. 
 
 MNASL, see pipvyaxto. 
 
 MO A ft, see fikciaxta. 
 
 fivxdofjicu (MTKSl), bellow, ?Jao- 
 ^a*, rjGaprjV, 2 A. I'jlivxov, 
 2 Perf. ff^ririh* (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 TV. 
 
 r«tw (NASI), dwell, A. gVacra 
 caused to dwell, placed, Perf. 
 Pass, vsraouai, A. Pass, Ewjt- 
 G#?;r, F. Mid. ruoouai, A. 
 Mid. baoiiiip. (§§96. 18: 
 95. N. 1 :107. N. 1 : 109. 
 N. I.) 
 
 vugoco, pack closely, stuff, F. 
 j«|o), A. tfVofet, Perf. Pass. 
 ruuo-aw/. (§ 96. N. 4.) 
 
 NASI, see *Wco. 
 
 vf'/iw, distribute, F. rquoj or 
 vep^oo), A. tveifia, Peri, rcF£- 
 ^u?ix«, Perf. Pass, vfviprjfiaij 
 A. Pass. eieu7]^j { v or eisus- 
 &!*. (§§ 96'. 10 : 95. N. 2.) 
 
 rfw (y£TIl), swim, A. zrtvoct, 
 Perf. reVftfxo, F. Mid. ru'cjo- 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 159 
 
 pai, rsvaovfiai. (§§ 96. N. 
 12: 114. N. 1.) 
 
 tuoj or vItikx) (?TIBJl), wash, 
 
 7'lif'co, zriipa, vsriupai, ivlcfd^^v. 
 
 (§ 96. 2.) 
 voico (lVOJ2\ think, yotJow, 
 
 ivorjGu, vsvonxoc, rsroi]uai, 
 
 ivorfiriv. {% 96. 10.) 
 
 The Ionic has vutru, tv&ura,, &c. 
 
 all from the simple Present. 
 vvoiu^w, feel sleepy, rvoid^co 
 
 and vvotuow, ivvoxala and 
 
 ivvviaou. (§ 96. N. 6.) 
 
 £i'£f'coand tvydco (ZTPJl), shave, 
 regular. Mid. svpiofiai, <xo- 
 {ioti, commonly Svpoficu, shave 
 myself, shave. 
 O. 
 
 o£w (O/JJl), emit an odor, have 
 the smell of, smell, F. o&gw 
 (Ionic o^soo)), A. cj^oct, 2 
 Perf. odcoda synonymous with 
 the Present. (§§ 96. 4, 10: 
 95. N. 2.) 
 
 or/co or oiyvvpi, open, Imperf. 
 twyor, F. ol$to, A. eoj$(x, Perf. 
 I'to/a, Perf. Pass, eat/am, A. 
 Pass, iipzdijv, 2 Perf. I'coya 
 stand open. (§§ 96. 9: 80. 
 N. 3.) See also iroijrm. 
 
 The epic poets change the diph- 
 thong aj into ui, as ui\a. for Z\cc. 
 
 old a, see El A P., 
 
 oidodico or oidava or oldew, 
 swell, F. ot'J/Jow, A. wdtjOix, 
 Perf. o)dr t xu. 
 
 oY/o^ai, depart, am gone, Perf. 
 ofyooxa (in Homer also & m /r\- 
 m«)i Perf. Pass. $xvfjtai f F. 
 Mid. o^'cjo t u«f. (§96. 10.) 
 
 ofo or ota (both Epic), think, 
 suppose, A. Pass, cprj&rjv 
 (Epic bna^v), F. Mid. o^- 
 
 ocpui, 
 
 A. Mid. ULodn:v 
 
 (Epic). Mid. cn'o^ca or oi ( ucu 
 (Epic otbftat),- synonymous 
 with the Active, Imperf. 
 o)6ur]v or o)^}}'. (§§ 96. 10 : 
 i09. N. I.) 
 
 OISl, F. ol'oo), A. qjiaa (rare), 
 Imper. olas, F. Pass. oio&r\- 
 (jopcti, = gpt^oo, which see. 
 (§§ 88. N. 3 : 109. N. 1.) 
 
 oho&alrh) and oXia&dvoj (OAI- 
 2:eSl),slip,slide,F.oXio&)]aco, 
 A. ooliafr^aa, Perf. wXi(j&r i v.a, 
 2 A. c^Uc/^. (§ 96. 7, 10.) 
 
 6'yUi;^ (OJSl\ destroy, cause 
 to perish, F. oXioco or o>Lw, 
 A. wXsoa, Perf. oAoUexo?, 2 
 Perf. oXbiXa have perished, 
 F. Mid. 6XovfiaL, 2 A. Mid. 
 coXoutjv. Mid. oXXvfiai, perish. 
 (§§96. 6, 10: 81.) 
 
 Note. The poetic 2 A. Mid. 
 Part. oXopivo; or ovXo/^svos has the 
 force of an adjective, destructive, 
 fatal, pernicious. 
 
 ourvpi (03IJ1), swear, A. w'^uo- 
 oa, Perf. oi.icj^oy.u, Perf. Pass. 
 ojj.b\uoo[.iai and o^ixi^iofjiaL, A. 
 Pass, uiiodrtv, F. Mid. o^oi;- 
 lua*. (§§96. 9, 10: 95. N. 
 1 : 107. N. 1 : 81.) 
 
 6uopyvZ\ui (OMOPm), wipe 
 
 Off, F. OfXOp^b), A. W/ZOpifCf, 
 
 A. Mid. w^oold^v. (§ 96. 
 
 ovlvtjfju ( ONASl, ONHMl), bene- 
 fit, F. OVTjOCOj A. Wl'TjOlX, 2 A. 
 
 Mid. (x)vdpr t v and (ovyfirjv. 
 Mid. orivvptxi, derive benefit, 
 enjoy. (§§ 96. N. 2: 117. 
 N. 15.) 
 ONJLMI ( ONOJl, OIVJ2), Pass. 
 ovofiai (inflected like didopai, 
 from didcopt), blame, find 
 
160 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ 118. 
 
 fault with, insult, A. Pass. 
 moGdijVy F. Mid. ovooofiou, 
 A. Mid. m'oad[Ai]v and cora- 
 tup. (§§96. 10: 95. N. 1: 
 109. N. 1 : 117.) 
 
 The form ofottrSt (II. 24,241) 
 stands for Pres. Pass. 2d pers. 
 plur. ovetrS-s from ONH. 
 
 077J2, Perf. Pass, w^ai, A. Pass. 
 wcp &i]y, F. Mid. oyo{iai y A. 
 Mid. oipdfirjv (little used), 
 2 Perf. ouMTia (poetic), — 
 oqccco, which see. (§ 81.) 
 
 ogdw, see, Iraperf. kogaov (Ionic 
 mqwv), Perf. kbjQaxa, Perf. 
 Pass, eolgauvu. From £7^J1 
 (which see), 2 A. *i£oj>, Ida), 
 i'dotui, Ids, idsiv, tdwv, 2 A. 
 Mid. tldofifjv, Idcijftaif Idolfxr^v, 
 Idov, idta&vu, ld6(xerog» From 
 OnfL{ which see), Perf. Pass. 
 wfifiai; A. Pass, diq)-&rjv 9 F. 
 . Mid. Sipogtai. (§ 80. N. 3.) 
 
 oQvvfxi (OPJl), rouse, excite, F. 
 oooco, A. co()(7«, Perf. Mid. 
 oQcogs^ai, 2 Perf. ogaga have 
 risen, 2 A. Mid. cogofi^v. 
 Mid. oQvvfuxt,, also ogo t ucu, 
 6o60[irti, rouse myself, arise. 
 (|§ 96. 9, 10: 103. N. 1 : 
 104. N. 6: 81.) 
 
 Note. Forms without the con- 
 necting vowel, 2 A. Mid. 3d pers. 
 sing, u^ro, Imperat. 2d pers. sing. 
 ogtro and o£<rio, Inf. ogS-a/, Part. 
 c^ivos. (§§ 92. N. 4: 11.) 
 
 ieipgairofitti (02 ( I J PfL), small, 
 F. Mid. GocpQi'tOoptu, A. Mid. 
 (xiaqgr^ad^v (later), 2 A. 
 Mid. waqfjofjLjjv rarely wo^a- 
 jttV' (§§ 96. 7, 10: 85. 
 N. 2.) 
 
 oi'QEO), mingo, Imperf. eovgtov, 
 F. Mid. ovo^aouoa. (§ 80. 
 N. 2) 
 
 ovtocm, wound, regular. From 
 OTTIIMI, 2 A. oviav, Inf. 
 (Epic) ovTautrai or ovidfisv, 
 2 A. Mid. Part, ovidperog 
 as Passive, wounded. (§ 117. 
 
 ^ N. 10, 17.) 
 
 6(pdl(o (OfPEslSl), owe, must, 
 ought, F. ocpEiXrjow, A. wqpc/- 
 V«. (§ 96. 18, 10.) 
 
 The 2 A. utQiXov and apsXov, 8?, 
 g, always expresses a ww/i, Ma* / 
 would to God! (§ 217. N. 3, 4.) 
 ocphoxdrw (0<PAJl), incur, for- 
 feit, F. ocph'iow, Perf. weph]- 
 xix, 2 A. w^oy. (§ 96. 8, 7, 
 10.) 
 
 IIAOJl, see ndo/co. 
 
 nal£w, play y jest, enaiGct, tis- 
 TKxtOfiai, inaiG&rjVf F. Mid. 
 7iai%o{im, nai^ovuai. In later 
 writers, mai^ct, ninaiyfjiai, 
 inal/^v. (§§ 96. N. 6: 
 114. N. 1.) 
 
 nam, strike, F. natoo) and 
 Tiairjoco, A. tTiaiGUy Perf. 7rs- 
 7ioft>ia, Perf. Pass, nivtaiafuth 
 A. Pass. iTralo&rjv. (§§ 96. 
 10: 107. N. 1: 109. N. I.) 
 
 Tiattfft) {I1AOSI, nENOPJ) y suf- 
 fer, A. £7ir/(ya (not common), 
 F. Mid. nslaoiiou (rarely i£ 
 aofiat), 2 A. sna&ov, 2 Perf. 
 ninov&a (rarely nenr^a). 
 (§§ 96. 6, 18, 19, N. 10: 
 12. 5.) 
 
 Note. The form vi-rixrSs Od. 
 23, 53', for <ri<rovS-a,<ri, is ob- 
 tained as follows: IIA0n, HO- 
 
 0fl, TlT0§a., <T£^»-(rS£ (for TITOS'' 
 
 trS-t with the Passive termination 
 <rSs. (§§ 96. 19: 10. 2.) 
 naxionai (iJAJl), eat, Perf. 
 Pass. nsnao^ai, A. Mid. 
 
« us] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 161 
 
 inaouuijv. (§§ 95. N. 1 : 
 107. N. I.) 
 
 ZL4J2, Perf. Mid. nina^aiy pos- 
 sess, acquire, A. Mid. 67ia- 
 ouur t v. 
 
 nel&a (iIIOSL), persuade, nd- 
 aco, sjceioa, ninsixcc, tzztiu- 
 Oj.ia.iy iTteia-d-rjv, 2 A. e'm&ov, 
 (poetic), 2 Perf. nfnoi&a 
 trust, 2 A. Mid. em&oprjv. 
 Mid. jTtl&ouai, trust, believe, 
 obey. (§ 96. 18, N. 14.) 
 
 Note. The form WW&fjuv 
 stands for 2 Pluperf. 1st pers. plur. 
 iriro&uf&iv. (§ 91. N. 6.) 
 
 ntXu£m and neXdut, cause to 
 approach, bring near, ap- 
 proach, come near, neXdoa), 
 eJisXaoa, iirsXdo&rjv and inXd- 
 &r]v. From nAHMI comes 
 2 A. Mid. inXr^v. (§§ 26. 
 
 1 : 117. N. 15.) 
 
 n&B, revolve, move about, am, 
 Imperf. 3d. pers. sing, txU 
 for k'neXe. Mid. nilouai sy- 
 nonymous with the Active, 
 Part, nXopsrog used only in 
 composition, Imperf. 2d 
 pers. sing. i'nXeo I'nXev thou 
 art, 3d pers. sing. I'ttXsto he 
 is. (§§26. 1: 23. N. 1.) 
 
 IlEyOJl, see 7ido%u). 
 
 TiinoG&s, see Tidaxco. 
 
 nigdto, pedo, F. Mid. ntxgdijoo- 
 fiai 3 2 A. tnagdor, 2 Perf. 
 TisTiogdu. Mid. Tiegdo^ca, sy- 
 nonymous with the Active. 
 (§96. 19, 10.) 
 
 7TSQ&C0. Sack, 7I8QO00, S7I8QOCC, 
 
 2 A. Itqci&ov. (§§ 96. 19 : 
 26. 2 ) 
 
 Note. Homer has 2 A. Mid. 
 Inf. TioSai without the connecting 
 vowel for <repdsr3*4 (§§ 92. N. 
 4: 10. 2: 11.) • 
 
 14* 
 
 Tieooo), later niniw, boil, d t . 
 
 F. niipco, A. eTieijja, Pert. 
 
 Pass. 7i£n£u{.iai, A. Pass. 
 
 inecp&rjV. (§ 96. 2.) 
 mxavvvni (nETAJl), expand, 
 
 spread, F. nsTaaco or 7rfTc5, 
 
 A. inixaaay Perf. Pass, tts- 
 
 mauou, A. Pass. sTtsrda&^v. 
 
 (§§ 96. 9 : 95. N. 1 : 102. 
 
 N. 2: 109. N. 1 : 26. 1.) 
 
 7IST0IA0U, fly, F. Mid. TTSTTjOO- 
 
 fuca, 2 A. (tito^v (for iTitTo- 
 
 prjv), TlTWUCtl, 7lTOl\u7]V, 7118- 
 
 o&ca, nTopsrog. (§§ 96. 10: 
 26. 1.) 
 
 IJETfl, see nlntca. 
 
 nETOJl, see Ttvv&dvoficci. 
 
 niyvov, see ftEX/l. 
 
 nriyvvtiL (lIArSl), later 7i>;(j<ja>, 
 jfar, fasten, F. 7r^a), A. cmplcr, 
 Perf. Pass, ninrj^aiy A. Pass. 
 eJiriZ&rjv, 2 Perf. nintj/a 
 stand fast, 2 A. Pass, ItfeJ- 
 m (§ 96. 18, 9, 3.) 
 
 17HOJ1, see Trao^co. 
 
 IIIOESl (nWSl), obey, follow, 
 trust, m&y'jaa) also ti en ixrijoco, 
 inl^au. (§ 96. 10, 11.) 
 
 niOSl, see 7T8/^w and the pre- 
 ceding. 
 
 niXv^ui and niXvdco (neXdto), 
 Mid. Tillvafxai, = neXd^co, 
 which see. (§96. 16, 6.) 
 
 nlpnXr t in and munXdcj [iZAAJi), 
 fill, F. 7iXj}oo), A. enXr^oa, 
 Perf. 7is7iXr]xct, Perf. Pass. 
 ninXrjGpoci, A. Pass. inXrj- 
 o&rjV, 2 A. Mid. inXqfitjv, 
 Opt. TrXdfirjv, Imperat. nXr r 
 oo, Part. nXijuevoc. (§§ 96. 
 1 : 107. N. i : 109. N. 1 : 
 117. N. 15.) 
 
 The letter ^, in the first sylla. 
 ble, is dropped when, in composition, 
 
I(E 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§118. 
 
 another ^ comes to stand before the 
 first syllable of this verb ; as tfi~ 
 9rt<rXn^-h no * i/^-Tt/u,'r\nfit. The 
 same is observed of *-ipir£tifii. 
 ni^ii Qt]UL and mfXTigdo) (jlR4Jl), 
 burn, F. ttqi]ow, A. sngrjoa, 
 Perf Pass. ninqr^uoa, A. 
 Pass. sTtg^a&rjp. (§§ 96. 1 : 
 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) 
 
 For the omission of p, in com- 
 position, see *{ftTkt)fti. 
 
 nlvb) (ilIJl), drink, 2 A. emov, 
 2 F. Mid. mov^tai (later). 
 Pass, nlopai, as F. Active, 
 shall drink. From nOSl, 
 Perf. ninwxa, Perf. Pass. 
 ntno{iuL, A. Pass, ino&yv. 
 From niMI, 2 A. Imperat. 
 2d pers. sing. 7u#*. (§§ 96. 
 5: 114. N. 2: 95. N. 2: 
 117. N. 14.) 
 
 mnlaxto (niSl), cause to drink, 
 give to drink, F. it loco, A. 
 emoa. (§96. 1,8.) 
 
 mngctGitb) (negdco), sell, Perf. 
 nznotxxa, Perf. Pass. ninga- 
 pai, A. Pass, ingd&rjv, 3 F. 
 TitTiQftoofiai. (§§ 96. 1, 8 : 
 26. 1.) 
 
 tt/ttto) (lIETJl), fall, A. cTraja 
 (little used), Perf. ninzwxa, 
 2 A. I'nsaov (Doric f7r£Tov), 
 2 Perf. Part. neTiTScog, tie- 
 nTrjOjg, nsTucag, 2 F. Mid. 7ia- 
 aoV- (§§ 96. 1, 19, 17, 
 15: 114. N. 2.) 
 
 7tLtvdo) and nhvri^i (nETAJl), 
 z=. niTCiwvui, which see. 
 (§96. 16,6: 117.) 
 
 7ziirab)(llETJl),=nl7iT(a, which 
 see. (§96. 16,5, 10.) 
 
 nicfday.o) or ntcpavoxo) (teAIl), 
 show, make known, communi- 
 cate. (§ 96. 1,8.) 
 
 JIIfLi see jilvoo, mnioxoi. 
 
 IlAArSl, see nkd£(0, nXyaaa). 
 ttX(x£(o (IlAArSl), cause to ican- 
 
 der, F. nXocy^co, A. enXay^a, 
 
 A. Pass, inldyx&riv. Mid. 
 
 nXd&fica, wander about, rove. 
 
 (§ 96. 3, 6.) 
 TtXeca (nAETfL), sail, I'nXevoa, 
 
 Perf. ninXevxa, Perf. Pass. 
 
 ntTiXsvafiai, A. Pass, enXsv- 
 
 O&TJV, F. Mid. 71 fovGOflCtl, 
 
 nksvoovfiai. (§§ 96. N. 12 ; 
 107. N. 1 : 114. N. 1.) 
 TtXrjooo) {lJAATSl), rarely nXf r 
 yvv{ii, strike, F. nXrjJ-co, A. 
 l'7rAi?!?a, Perf. Pass, ninlri- 
 ytiai, 2 A. ninXr\yov (Epic), 
 2 Perf. ni7ilr\ya y 2 A. Pass. 
 inXr^yr\v (in composition |- 
 nldyrjv), 2 A. Mid. (Epic) 
 TisnXrjyo^rjv. (§§ 96. 18, 3, 
 
 9 : 78. N. 2. ) 
 
 7tAwO) (7tA£0)), <W(J(W, &/C. 2 A. 
 
 (from nAfLMl) InXav, Part. 
 nXcog, G. nXuJvTog, Ionic, zz: 
 TtXea), which see. (§§ 96. 
 19: 117. N. 14.) 
 nvi(o (UNETJl, nNTSl), blow, 
 breathe, A. envsvoa, Perf. 
 ninvtvxa, Perf. Pass, ninvzv- 
 Ofxav, A. Pass. invivG&riv, F. 
 Mid. nvsvooiActi, tivevgov^oll. 
 (§§ 96. N. 12 : 107. N. 1 : 
 109. N. 1 : 114. N. 1.) 
 
 Poetic forms, Perf. Pass. ?rl?rvy- 
 pat, am prudent, animated, intelli- 
 gent, A. Pass. 3d pers. sing. IrvvvS-n 
 used in the compound a,fjt,->rvv&yi, 
 from avaTviu, 2 A. Mid. (from 
 IINTMI) iTrtftw. (§§ 96. 6: 
 117. N. 15.) 
 no&iw, long for, desire, miss, 
 no&eo(o and tio&tJow, etio&t)- 
 oa, nenod-rjxa, TTETto&rjfAai, 
 ijio&so&rjv. (§§ 95. N. 2 : 
 109. N. 1.) 
 
§ 118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 163 
 
 IlOPJl, give, 2 A. ettoqov, Perf. 
 Pass. 3d. pers. sing. tieiiqw- 
 rat it has been decreed by 
 fate, Part. nsTtQwpivog des- 
 tined. (§ 96. 17.) 
 
 JJOfly see nova. 
 
 JJPAfLy see n I fin grj yu. 
 
 IIPIAMAI, buy, 2 A. Mid. 
 iTTQidfinv, Tigiwfxcu, nQiaifiTjv, 
 nqlaoo or nglco, nglao&ou, 
 ngidpsvog. (§ 117. N. 9.) 
 
 nPOSly see UOPSL. 
 
 TLTASly see Xmapai, 71ttJgg(o. 
 
 TiTrjooG), crouch, F. mrjSco, A. 
 iTTTr^a, Perf. tnxrixct. From 
 I1TASI comes 2 Perf. Part. 
 nemyojg. From I2THMI, 2 
 A. 3d pers. on dual tit?J- 
 T^y, in composition y.aia- 
 mjtrjv. (§§ 96. 3 : 99. N. : 
 117. 12.) 
 
 IITOJly see bJjito?. 
 
 nvv&drofiai (iJTOSl), poetic 
 nev&opcu, inquire, Perf. Mid. 
 ninvofiaiy F. Mid. Tisvaofiai, 
 2 A. Mid. inv&ouyv. (§ 96. 
 18, 7.) 
 
 P. 
 
 c PATSl, see qr\yvvpi. 
 
 galvco, sprinkle, regular. From 
 c PAdSl, A. Imperat. 2d pers. 
 plur. qdooaze, Perf. Pass. 3d 
 pers. plur. Egoddccnxt, Epic. 
 (§§ 104. N. 4: 91. N. 2.) 
 
 £e?cki or e?da> or EPttl, F. ^co, 
 A. f^f|« (Epic also e^la), 
 2 Perf. lo()/«, 2 Pluperf. ioig- 
 yuv. (§ 80. N. 2, 3. 
 
 gaw (PETSly c PTJl)y flow, A. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 eQQVT]XCt, 
 
 F. 
 
 Mid. gtvaopai or qvr\oopai, 
 
 2 A. Pass. foo'iV (§96.18, 
 10, N. 12.) 
 c P£/2, Perf. tf^xa, Perf. Pass. 
 
 el'gTjficcL, A. Pass, iqgrftriv 
 or (ggi&riv (not Attic f/^?J- 
 x^r, UQi\ri]v)y 3 F. e^'ao- 
 uca, = EinfLy which see. 
 (§§ 76. N. 1 : 95. N. 2.) 
 
 grjyvvpi (PATJl), later Qijooco, 
 tear, burst, F. g^co, A. I'^- 
 £a, 2 Perf. Iggcoyoi am torn 
 to pieces, 2 A. Pass. iggdyriv. 
 (§ 96 18, 9, 3, 19.) 
 
 gTyiw (PirJl), shudder, giy^ow, 
 &,c. 2 Perf EQQlya synony- 
 mous with the Present. 
 (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 c POSly see gcorvvpi. 
 
 c PTSly see gin, flow. 
 
 C PJ1FS1, see gyyvvpi. 
 
 qvrrupi (POSl), strengthen, F. 
 QOJOb), A. egqcjoa, Perf. I'ggco- 
 xct, Perf. Pass. IggM^at, Imp. 
 Egg^Go farewell, &c. A. Pass. 
 *66<&o&w (§§ 96. 9 : 109. 
 N. 1.) 
 
 2. 
 
 ocdmfa (ZAsinirSL), sound a 
 trumpet, F. oalniySw, later 
 aaXTiioco, A. iodXniyla % later 
 fWATnaa. (§96. 6, N. 6.)^ 
 
 aaow (rarely odw), save, cj«w- 
 gcu, &c. From 2ASIMI 
 comes Imperf. Act. 3d pers. 
 sing. (Epic) odco. (§§ 96. 
 10: 78. N. 3: 117.) 
 
 ofiivvvpt {2BESl)y extinguish, 
 F. g(3egco, A. safoocc, Perf. 
 Pass. I'ofoopou, A. Pass, fa/ftf- 
 a#??j'. From 2BHMI, 2 A. 
 I'ofirjv, ofolrjv, Gfirrcu. (§§ 96. 
 9:95. N. 2: 107. N. 1: 109. 
 N. 1.) 
 
 aevw (-2TJ2), shake, move, agi- 
 tate, F. af^(70), A. EGGSVOt, 
 
 Perf. Pass, EGovpai, Pluperf. 
 Pass, eoovuip', A. Pass, eg- 
 
1G4 
 
 INFLECTION' OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ US. 
 
 toS&tjp sometimes iov&ipr. 
 From STMT, 2 A. Mid. 
 imsvuijv and ovui]r. Mid. 
 ozvouou and, without the 
 connecting vowel, osvucu. 
 (§§96. 18: 104. N. 1:78. 
 N. 3 : 79. N. 3.) 
 
 oxtdto rvfju (2KEAAJ1), scatter, 
 disperse, spread, F. oxtddaoj 
 or oy.tdu), A. ioxidaoa, Perf. 
 ioxidaxu, Perf. Pass, ioxida- 
 ouui, A. Pass, eoxedda&rjv. 
 (§§96 9: 102. N. 2: 107. 
 N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
 
 oxe)./.co(2KEAJ2,2KAylJl),dri/, 
 cause to wither, F. axdw, 
 A. hjx?;;.c/, Perf. zaxhjxa am 
 dried up, F. Mid. axlr^opca. 
 From 2KMIMI, 2 A. I' ax^*', 
 auXalrjr, ax)S)iai. Mid. axfAAo- 
 pm, wither. (§96.6,17,18.) 
 
 exidrijUL (2KEAASI), Mid. (/*/- 
 druuai, zz oxtdavrvpi, which 
 see*. (§96.6,16.) 
 
 ooiuca (otvb)), Imp. 2d. pers. 
 sing, oovao, 2 A. Pass. 3d 
 pers. sing, i'aoova, in compo- 
 sition ujitaaovtx (Laconic) 
 /jc £s gone, he is dead, =z 
 oEvuru from aau'co, which see. 
 (§ 96. N. 15.) 
 
 ooo), see (joijW. 
 
 untofruiy see 67rw. 
 
 STASli see loirjui. 
 
 GTtrjZb) Or OZtQlOXO) (2TEPSL) y 
 
 deprive, bereave, F. arfo^aw, 
 A. iarigfjam, Perf. iarsQrjxa, 
 Perf. Pass. (oxiQr t uai y A. 
 Pass. iuTtQjj&rjv, 2 A. Pass. 
 P«r£. ar^f^ (poetic). Pass. 
 ortotouai or atigofiai. (§ 96. 
 8 10.) 
 
 OToghriui or oroorvui or (jtocov- 
 rvui (2TOPJI), strew, spread, 
 F. aToqiuot, otqojuoj, A. iojo- 
 
 qsocc, eoTQwact, Perf. Pass. 
 
 tOTQCOUCtl, A. PaSS. f(JTOQ8- 
 O&rjV, SOTQ(6&1]V. (§§96.10, 
 
 9,17:95. N. 1: 109. N. 1.) 
 
 ffiu/fw (ZTrril), fear, hate, 
 oivyr\oo), &x. 2 A. eoTvyov. 
 Aor. also Icfti/Scx I terrified. 
 (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 o#e7j>, see t^w, To^o). 
 
 (TcJ^co (Epic (jow), sayc, acuaco, 
 e'oaoa, osocoxa. osoojoimxi, 
 iatidtyr, 
 
 (7w'w (ffaw),=preceding. (§116. 
 N. 7.) 
 
 T. 
 
 TAttl, see T^J2, ta£e. 
 
 TAAAJl, bear, suffer, venture, 
 A. hdlaaa, Perf. zithyxa, 2 
 Perf. jh).aa, Opt. tsrXcxlrjv, 
 Imp. rhXa&c, Infin. zzxldvai. 
 From TAIIMT, 2 A. f'rV, 
 tAw, xXair\v y tX?]&i, tXrjrai, 
 -rick. (§§ 26. 1 : 95. N. 2 : 
 91. N. 7: 117. 12.) 
 
 Tccproj, F. rapeco, Ionic, zz xg- 
 
 TASl, TArfL, take, lmperat. 
 2d pers. sing, xrj (contracted 
 from r«f) take thou, 2 A. 
 Part. xsTaywv, Epic. (§§ 23. 
 N. 1 : 78. N. 2.) 
 
 ruvb) (TENJL, TASl), stretch, 
 extend, F. xzvw, A. I'teivoc, 
 Perf. TSTccxa, Perf. Pass. Tf'za- 
 liai, A. Pass. hd&r]v. (§ 96. 
 19, 5, 18.) 
 
 TEKSl, see t/xtw. 
 
 Tf^uj'w (rarely ripa), cut, F. t*- 
 ^w, Perf. Thprjxa, Perf. Pass. 
 
 TSTflTjUai, A. PaSS. £TUrj\rT}V, 2 
 
 A. ttmov and srapov, 2 A. M. 
 hafiopijv. (§ 96.5,17, 19.) 
 TfT/iov or tTZTuov, I found , met 
 icith, a defective 2 A. Act 
 (§ 78. N. 2.) 
 
§ us.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 165 
 
 TJSTXJl, see tvyxuva. 
 
 jrj } see TAJ2, take. 
 
 TIES1, Perf. Part, tmipk af- 
 flicted, Perf. Mid. Ttxir\iiai 
 am afflicted, am sorrowful. 
 (§§ 99. N.) 
 
 TL&T}[ii (rarely Tt&ico, xh'w), 
 put, place, F. ^Vw, A. $&rj- 
 xa, Perf. U&tixtx, Perf. Pass. 
 rs&eipoci, A. Pass. iU&rjv, A. 
 Mid. e&rjxdfirjv (not Attic), 
 2 A. £^7', #co, -&nr]v, &STL 
 or #«$ &slvai, -&sIq, 2 A. 
 Mid. ^a'^v. (§§ 96. 1 : 
 104. N. 2:95. N. 2,4: 14. 
 3, N.3: 117. N. 11, 13.) 
 
 t/ktco (TEKJl), bring forth, F. 
 T£$w, A. Pass, (later) htx&rjv, 
 F. Mid. is^ofxat, 2 A. Itskoi', 2 
 Perf. t£tok«, 2 F. Mid. t^xoij- 
 ^u«t, 2 A. Mid. (poetic) exexo- 
 ^. (§§96.N.3:114.i\.2.) 
 
 riv<a, rlvvfAi, tIvvvju, = t/w, hon- 
 or, which is regular. (§ 96. 
 5, 9.) 
 
 t^«w (TPASL), bore, F. t^'- 
 (jw, A. eiorjGa, Perf. xeTgrjxa, 
 Per. Pas. thor^ou. (§96.1.) 
 
 TMrgoJcrxG) (TOPJl), wound, F. 
 
 T£C0(JG), 
 
 ST^WdWj 
 
 Perf. 
 
 jQwxn, Perf. Pass, rirgcoyai, 
 A. Pass. Itow&ijv. (§ 96. 
 17, 1, 8.) 
 
 titvoxo{xou (TTKSl), prepare, 
 take aim at, 2 A. tstvxov, 
 2 A. Mid. tstvxoutiv, Epic. 
 (§§96. 1, 14: 78. N. 2.) 
 
 TAAJl, see TAAASl. 
 
 TMEJl, TMASl, see jsfxrco. 
 
 %oqim (TOPSl), pierce, tooijoco, 
 &c.2A, hogov. (% 96. 10.) 
 
 TOPSl, see rtT^oiaxoi, Togtw. 
 
 Toooai, Toouag, == Ti'/m', ti^ojV, 
 from Tvyxdvw, which see. 
 
 TPAm, see r^w^w. 
 
 TPAIl, see titquw. 
 
 tqs^cj (OPE&Jl), nourish, feed, 
 support, F. d-geyo), A. £#gg- 
 i//«, Perf. TtTQocpa, Perf. Pass. 
 
 Tb&QClfifiai, A. PaSS. £#££- 
 
 (p&tjv, 2 A. Irgaqov (Epic), 
 
 2 A. Pass. ttQuiptjv* (§§ 14. 
 
 3 : 96. 19 : 107. N. 6.) 
 T^/co (OPEXSl), run, A. £#££- 
 
 |a, F. Mid. &qi$o[mxi. From 
 APAMSl or APE MSI (which 
 see) come Perf. dsdgdfirjxa, 
 Perf. Pass, dedgdprjfxai, 2 A. 
 tdgajuor, 2 Perf. dtdgopa 
 (Epic), F. Mid. dgu^ov^ai. 
 {% 14. 3.) 
 
 t^w/w ( TPAm), eat, gnaw, F. 
 Mid. jgw^opcu, 2 A. £T£a/oj>. 
 (§ 96. 19. 
 
 Tvyxdvw (ttXSL), happen, at- 
 tain, A. frvxtjou (Epic), Perf. 
 T£Ti^r/xa, Perf. Mid. (poetic) 
 TSTV/fxai or jhsvypui, F. Mid. 
 T£iJJ:o ( u«z, 2 A. txvxov. (§ 96. 
 7, 10, 18.) 
 
 T1J7TTOJ (TTIIJl), strike, F. ti'^w 
 commonly ti»7it/7j(jo), A. frvyu, 
 Perf. t£ti*<jp«, 2 Perf. xhvp- 
 ftai commonly Tsrvm^fxai, A. 
 Pass. hvcpfrr}v, 2 A. Pass. 
 #rwfci*. (§ 96. 2, 10.) 
 
 r. 
 
 in e t uvrj[j.vxF, see ypvco. 
 vTiioxviofiai and {mlaxofxcu (vtto, 
 
 laxvio^ifu, i'oxofiou), promise, 
 
 Perf. Pass, vnioxntxai, A. 
 
 Pass, vjisoxs&yv, F. Mid. 
 
 V7ioox^aop,ai, 2 A. Mid. t/7T£- 
 
 axourjv. 
 
 (P. 
 (pAttl, 2 A. zyayov, Pass, qpa- 
 
 ^o/(«t (later) as F. Active, 
 
 = io&la, which see. 
 
100 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 [§ 113. 
 
 qctuxLo, see (fijul. (which see), A. rjvtpta, Perf. 
 
 <I>AJ1, see nKfdaxcj, OEJSJ2, hrpoxa, Perf. Pass, hips/pai, 
 
 <p;,u/. A. Pass. r)ve%&r}v, 2 A, ijrey- 
 
 &ENJI ( VAJl), Ml, Perf. Pass. nov. 
 
 7it(fa^aL, t SY.7ie(pr l (jof.im y ( 2A. ^yy^ (ftrrSl), flee, escape, 
 
 niifvoi' or entyvov. (§§ 96. F. Mid. <psv$ofKn, «pev£oS/iai, 
 
 5, 19:95. N. 2 : 78. N. 2 : 
 26. 1.) 
 cpiyw, bring, carry, bear, Im- 
 perf. tifsgov. From QUI, F. 
 ol'ow, A. Imperat. 2d pers. 
 sing. o?(j£. From ENErKSL 
 
 2 A. tqyvyor, 2 Perf. Titytu- 
 ya. (§§96 18: 114. N. 1.) 
 
 Homer has also 2 Perf. Part. 
 vritpv^'orts (as form <I>YZn), and 
 Perf. Pass. Par*, vrtipwypiva; hav- 
 ing escaped. 
 
 (pr^il and qdoxw (&AJ2), say, Imperf. ecpip', F. cp^acj, A. ny^on, 
 Perf. Pass, necpaotiai, 2 A. Mid. ^cpd^v, Imperat. cpdo (Epic), 
 Infin. cfdo&ai. (§§ 96. 8 : 95. N. 2 : 107. N. 1 : 117. N. 9.) 
 The Present and Imperfect Active are inflected as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 Present. 
 
 P. yapsv 
 (pari 
 
 D» (paper 
 cpaxov 
 cpoaov (paoL{i) 
 
 D. cpcofiev, yfJTOV, cprjrov, P. yinftsv, 
 
 Ind. S. cprjiil 
 cprjg 
 cpr}ol(v) 
 
 Sub J. S. cpco, (pyg, opy, 
 
 cprjTE) (pooot(v). 
 Opt. S. (palyv, (paltjg t cpalr\, D. (palrjfisv, (palrjiov, yourJTrjV, 
 
 P. cpairiiitv, cpalrjis, <palr}oav Or cpousv. 
 Imp. & qpa'#t(§14.N.4) D. (pdrov P. (pais 
 
 (paTto cpdicov cpdrwoav, cpdvxwv 
 
 Inf. cpdvcti. 
 Part, (pdg, (puaa, cpdv, G. cpdviog. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 S. eqrjV D. tyafisv 
 
 tcprjg, I'yrjO&a zcpaxov 
 
 I'ccr] icpdxrjv 
 
 Note 1. The 2d pers. sing, of the Ind. is very often written <pjs. 
 Note 2. For the 2d pers. sing, of the Imperfect, see above (§ 84. N. 6). 
 
 P. syapsv 
 l'(pais 
 tcpaoav 
 
 (fOdio) {(hO Aft), come before, 
 anticipate, F. ip0aow, A. 
 ty&aaa, Perf. tcp&(txoi f F. 
 Mid. (f&r^o^ui. From &OH- 
 
 MTj 2 A. z<2&j}V, cp&oj, <p Sat- 
 yr, y&rjvai, y&dg, 2 A. Mid. 
 t(p&d[jn]v, (p&dfizroc. (§§96. 
 5.95. N.2: 117.) 
 
§118.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 167 
 
 ipd-ivw, (fdioj, consume, perish, 
 cp&lacj, ecp&ioa, I'cp&r/.a, k'<p&i- 
 uai. From &OIMI, 2 A. 
 Mid. iy&ljLiTjv, Subj. <p&l(o- 
 uai, Opt. (p&Tfitjv, Inf. cp&l- 
 o&ai, Part. cp&lusvog. 
 (§§96. 5: 117. N. 14.) 
 
 gcfyU'w, love, regular. From the 
 simple &lAft> A. Mid. tcpl- 
 Idu^v, Imperat. 2dpers. sing. 
 cfV.ai, Epic. 
 
 cpogito, carry, bear, wear, regu- 
 lar. From <1jOPUMT, Inf. 
 (in Homer) (fooi)vai. (§117. 
 N. 17.) 
 
 cfoio) (qrsow), cpoi^ico, &c. used 
 only in composition. From 
 &P1IMI comes 2 A. Imp. 
 qotg. (§§ 96. 17: 117. N. 
 11.) 
 
 (prril, $>TZfL, see cpbvyw. 
 
 qvw, produce, qvoa), ecpvoa, n£~ 
 cpv'Act am, 2 Perf. niepva am, 
 2 A. Pass, (later) icpvriv. 
 From &TMI, 2 A. eq>w am, 
 Subj. cpixa, Opt. cpvr t v, Inf. 
 qi'vai, Part. qcu'e. (§ 117. 
 N. 7, 16.) 
 
 X. 
 
 X A Ally see ^«Jw> #tt*#ara». 
 
 *«£« (XAASl, K A/1 Si), yield, 
 give way, F. xey.udjjGa) shall 
 deprive, 2 A. y.iy.adov I made 
 to give way, deprived, 2 A. 
 Mid. y.sy.ad6uj]v. (§§ 96. 4, 
 10, 11 : 78. N. 2.) 
 
 Xah'oj (XANSl, XAJl), com- 
 monly ^«(jxw, gape, 2 A. 
 y%cn>ov, 2 Perf. yj/rjvee, F. 
 
 Mid. tarovueu. (§ 96. 5, 18, 
 
 £o£$a (XAPJl), rejoice, F ^«f- 
 o/;(jo), Perf. y^yjiQ^y.a, Perf. 
 Pass, y.exdgr^cu (poetic x?- 
 
 Xaguoti), A. Mid. iyjifjai-ir^ 
 (poetic), 2 A. Pass, v/dqrp, 
 2 A. Mid. xtxaqouiyv (Epic). 
 Homer has also F. x^«^'yw, 
 xiXagrjGopui. (§§ 96. 18, 10, 
 11: 78. N. 2.) 
 
 Zarddvto {XAASl, XANASL, 
 XENAJl), contain, hold, re- 
 ceive, F. Mid. %uoofiaiy 2 A. 
 s'zadov, 2 Perf. xs/avda. 
 ^(§§96.6,7, 19: 12. 5.) 
 
 xduy.w, see yalvco, 
 
 X^co (XEAJl), caco, A. t'zsGct 
 and fywor, Perf. Pass, x^- 
 or^ua:, F. Mid. xsgouoci, %sgov- 
 pai, 2 Perf. xi X oda. (§§ 96. 
 4, 19: 85. N. 2: 114. N.J.) 
 
 2*« (XETSl, XTSl), pour, F. 
 ^f'co sometimes ysvaco, A. 
 %%zu sometimes I'xsvGa (Epic 
 e/sva), Perf. y,i%vya, Perf. 
 Pass, xsyvpcu, A. Pass, t/v- 
 &r t v. From XTMI, 2 A. Mid. 
 f/i'^>'. (§§ 96. 18, N. 12 : 
 95. N. 1 : 102. N. 2 : 104. 
 N. 1 : 117.) 
 
 %6co, see xojvpv (jii. 
 
 XPAT^MSl, help, F. zqaiG^GO), 
 A. ixqcuG^Gcty 2 A. Exgair- 
 GUOV. (§ 96. 10.) 
 
 XQuw, deliver an oracle, ^o^'aw, 
 6lc. Mid. xQuofiou, use. 
 (§§95. N. 3: J 16. N. 2.) 
 
 Xqtj \xQao)), it is necessary 9 Im- 
 personal, Subj. XQ}1> Oft- 
 Xodrj, Inf. XQVai, Part. 
 neut. zotav, Imperf. f/oTjv 
 or £ftg?, F. xgrjosi. 
 
 The compound «7ro/^^, if 
 rs enough, has jfof. anozQjjv, 
 Imperf. anixgv 
 
 Note. The Ind. ^^ regularly 
 would be x& (§ 116. N. 2.) 
 The Opt. ^e/»j and the Inf. 
 
168 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [\\ 119. 
 
 xfivxi come from Xi lu (I° n ic\ *P. 
 
 XPHMI. (65 116. N. 8: 117. f 7 ,„ x A 
 
 N 17 , yvxa, cool, yvsw, <fcc. 2 A. 
 
 The Part. X i™* stands for ^ aSS# fyvyrjv (as if from 
 
 xt&o*. r$ 116. n. 9.) wrrsi) 
 
 The Imperfect i^Jjv is contracted J2. 
 
 from sx£*tv (§ 116. N. 3). For , 
 
 ^Sv, see above (§§ 78. N. 3: «#«« (JlOJl), push, Imperf. 
 
 93. N. 4 : 23. N. 3). ia&EOV, F. w^gw or a/aw, 
 
 Xgo)yrv i ui (XPOJl), color, F. A. I'aocc, Perf. IWa, Perf. 
 
 Xgwaw, A. I'xQwoa, Perf. *£- Pass, twofiou, A. Pass. £cJ- 
 
 XQcoxa, Perf. Pass. xexQcoofuu, odrjV,F. Mid. wooficct. (§§ 96. 
 
 A. Pass. i X9 <io&i]v. (§§ 96. ^ 10 : 80. N. 2.) 
 
 9 : 107. N. 1 : 109. N. 1.) mveojuai, buy, Imperf. icoveofirjv, 
 
 xdwvfju, (/oca), heap up, dam, Perf. Pass, iwvrjficu, F. Mid. 
 
 F. ^cotjto, A. tywoa, Perf. xs- dv^aofxca, A. Mid. (not Attic) 
 
 Xcaxa, Perf. Pass. xsxcoofiai, Ixav^od^iriv or dvr]odfit]v. (§80. 
 
 A. Pass, ixuo&rtv. (ibid.) N. 2.) 
 
 Note. In the catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, tenses of 
 easy formation (as F. Pass.) are not generally given. 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 § 119. 1. Many adverbs answering to the question nag, 
 how? in what manner? are formed from adjectives, pro- 
 nouns, and participles, by changing og of the nominative or 
 genitive into cog. E. g. 
 
 oocpwg, wisely, from oocpog, wise ; 
 
 XUQiivTcag, gracefully, from xugleig, tvtog, graceful; 
 
 dlrj&ewg, contracted dXy&wg, truly, from dhj&rjg, sog, true ; 
 
 oi>T(og, thus, from ovrog, this ; 
 
 ovTwg, indeed, from alv, oviog, being. 
 
 2. Some adverbs of this class end in d?]v or ddrjv. Such 
 adverbs are derived from verbs. E. g. ygdfidrjv, scratchingly , 
 from ygdcpw, scratch; Xoyddrjv, selectedly, from Xsyoo, select, 
 collect. (§§ 7 : 96. 19.) 
 
 3. Some end in dov or rjdov. Such adverbs are derived from 
 nouns. E. g. dysXrjdov, in herds, from dyilr), herd ; TSTganodr}- 
 dov, like a quadruped, from xsigdnovg, odog, four-footed. 
 
 4. Some end in I or el, xl or rsl. E. g. i&eXovxl, voluntarily, 
 from e&iXwv, ovrog, willing ; pagftagioxl, like a barbarian, from 
 PuqPuqL'Qw, act like a barbarian. 
 
§§ 120, 121.] ADVERB. 169 
 
 5. Some end in |. E. g. iraXlafe, by turns, crosswise, from 
 ivmXXdoow, place across. 
 
 6. A few adverbs of this class end in Ivdyv. E. g. nXovjlv- 
 drjv, according to {his) wealth, from nXowog, riches. 
 
 § 120* Adverbs answering to the question noodxig, 
 how often ? end in dug. Such adverbs are derived from 
 adjectives. E. g. ovxvdxig, often, from ov^vog, frequent. 
 
 For the numeral adverbs, see above (§ 62. 4). 
 
 § 121« 1. Adverbs answering to the question no&i or 
 nov, where? in what place? end in &i or ai(v). E, g. 
 avTo&h i n that very spot, from «^toc- 
 
 The termination oi(v) is chiefly appended to names of toicns. 
 It is preceded by r\ ' but when the nominative singular of the 
 noun ends (or would end) in « pure or get, it is preceded by a. 
 E. g. 3 A&yvrioi, at Athens, from 'A&yvaiy Athens ; Oeomaoi, at 
 Thespice, from Osvmal, Thespice. 
 
 (1) Some adverbs of this class end in ov or axov. E. g. 
 avToi), there, from ccutoV * navjctxov, everywhere, from tt«£, itav- 
 Tog. 
 
 (2) Some end in 61. E. g. 'io&pol, at the Isthmus, from 
 *Io&u6g, Isthmus. 
 
 (3) The following adverbs also answer to the question 
 where ? ayxi or ccy/ov, avtxdg, urcx), eyyvg, exdg y exti, exjog, tvdov, 
 I'v&a or ivdude or ivxnv&a (Ionic ivdavxai), (vxog, 15m, law, I'y.Tao, 
 xdzco, niXag, tisqci and tisqoiv, 7iXr t alov, tioqqoi), nqoow, ttJXe or 
 Ttjkov, wde, and some others. 
 
 Note 1. The adverb «**«, ctf /iome, from oJkos, house, takes the acute on the 
 penult. (§ 20. N. 1.) 
 
 2. Adverbs answering to the question no&ev, whence? 
 from what place ? end in dev. E. g. 
 
 3 A&r}ni&ev,fro?n Athens, from ^Ad-rpm, Athens; 
 ovgav6&£v,from heaven, from ovgavog, heaven. 
 
 Here belongs i'vfrev or iv&evds or ivTsv&ev (Ionic iv&svTsv), 
 hence, thence^ whence. 
 
 3. Adverbs answering to the question no as, whither ? to 
 what place ? end in as, 8e, or £?. E. g. 
 
 ixslae, thither, from &«7, there; 
 oixovde, to the house, home, from olxos, house; 
 Orifice, to Thebes, from <9?J/3at, Thebes. 
 15 
 
no 
 
 INFLECTION OF WORDS. 
 
 m i 
 
 oo 
 
 123. 
 
 Note 2. In strictness, the ending St is appended to the accusative singular or 
 plural of the noun. 
 
 Note 3. The adverbs olxadt, home, and Qvyah, to Jlight, imply nom. OIH, 
 <&T5, whence accus. o7xet, q>u<ya, t 
 
 4. Adverbs answering to the question nr (i in what direc- 
 tion ? end in ?; or oc/rj. E. g. 
 
 ovdctfitj, in no way, from oidct t u6g, none ; 
 otkXaxrj, in another direction, from Sklog. 
 
 Note 4. The ending n becomes >j only when the nominative of the adjective, 
 from which such adverbs are derived, is not obsolete. 
 
 § 12S. The following adverbs answer to the question 
 
 71 6 1 S, WHEN ? IN WHAT TIME ? asl, OtVQlOV, eXOHSTOTS, tTtSlTtt, 
 
 fyd-tg or %&ig t vsajoxi, vvxtcoq, rvv, oipi, nakai, ndviors, tisqvgi, 
 nqlvy TiQox&eg, ngcarjv, tiqco'L', o^fiegov, ttJt££, vgtbqov, and some 
 others. 
 
 § 1 23. The following table exhibits the adverbs derived 
 from n02 y c On02 y T02 y and og. (§§ 73. 1 : 63. N. 2 : 71.) 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Relative. 
 
 Tiov or 710&L, 
 where 1 
 
 tvov or Tio&l, 
 somewhere 
 
 ro'vh, here, 
 in this 
 place 
 
 ov or o&i or 
 
 0710V Or OTtO- 
 
 &l, where 
 
 no&sv, whence , 
 
 7 no &iv, from 
 some place 
 
 to&sv, thence 
 
 b&ev or otto- 
 &ev, whence 
 
 nol or Tro'af, 
 whither ? 
 
 not, some- 
 whither 
 
 wanting 
 
 ol or onoi, 
 whither 
 
 ni] , in what 
 direction ? 
 
 ny, in some 
 direction 
 
 rfi or Tflds or 
 raviy, in this 
 direction 
 
 fi or vtitj, 
 in which 
 direction 
 
 tiots, when ? 
 
 ttots, at some 
 time, once 
 
 tots, then 
 
 OTS Or OTtOTS 
 
 when 
 
 7i6jg, how ? 
 
 Ttcog, some- 
 how 
 
 rag or dods or 
 ovioog, thus, so 
 
 cog or bnoog, 
 as 
 
 7ii}viy.a, at 
 ivhat time ? 
 
 wanting 
 
 Trjvlxa, jrp'ixd- 
 ds, TrjvixavTa, 
 at this or that 
 time 
 
 rjvlxa or 
 oTirjvlxct, at 
 which time 
 
 nijfiog, when ? 
 
 wanting 
 
 rrjfjog or ti]- 
 fj.6ode or xr\- 
 [xovTog, then 
 
 rjjiog or 07i7]~ 
 [tog, when 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 T8wg f so long 
 
 toog, until 
 
 wanting 
 
 wanting 
 
 Tocpga, so long 
 
 oqjgoi, as long c 
 
§§ 124, 125.] adverb. 171 
 
 Note I. The forms n'oSri, ToS-'t, roB-t, o$t, ro&iv, ot, reus, vrrjftes, rtj/Ao$, rSfiog, 
 ro<pga, $<pga, are poetic. 
 
 Instead of <rv$, the poets sometimes use v$, with the acute accent. 
 
 Note 2. The letter < is annexed to the demonstratives raury, v^z, ourvs, for 
 the sake of emphasis. Thus, rauryi, vbt, curvet. (§ 70. N. 2.) 
 
 Note 3. Also the adverbs iivgo, U&uSs or ivnuS-iv, and vuv, take i. Thus, 
 %iu^i, i&etVt or IvrauB-t, zvnuBsvi, vuvi. 
 
 Note 4. Some of the relative adverbs are strengthened by <rig or ouv, or 
 by both united. E. g. «; , vtrvrsg, vtrTtgouv, as ; oirou, onououv wherever* 
 
 § 124. 1. Some genitives, datives, arid accusatives are 
 used adverbially. E. g. dr]fxoola, publicly, from drjfiooiog, pub- 
 lic ; xeloq, finally, lastly, from tsXoq, end. 
 
 2. Especially the accusative singular or plural of the neuter 
 of an adjective is often used adverbially. E. g. povov, only, 
 from ^uoro?, fl/owc ; ttoAv or nolla, much, from noXvg, much. 
 
 Note. In some instances, a word with the preposition, which governs it, is 
 used adverbially. E. g. vragaxgHfia ( *aga. pewf**), instantly ; vgougyou (rgo 
 t^you], to the purpose ; pcaS-ding (xa!¥ a<rs£, as. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 § 12t>. The comparative of an adverb derived from an 
 adjective is the same with the neuter singular of the compara- 
 tive, and the superlative is the same with the neuter plural of 
 the superlative, of that adjective. E. g. 
 
 tfoqpwc, ivisely, ooqxoisQov, more wisely, oocptoTona, most wisely, 
 
 from oocpoc, wise. (§ 57.) 
 ijdtoig, pleasantly , jjtfrov, wore pleasantly, TJdiata, most pleas- 
 antly, from j5<5l's, pleasant. (§ 58.) 
 
 Note 1. Some adverbs of the comparative degree end in v$, E. g. #aXg- 
 
 nvsi %>**.? Trvrigvsy from ^aXs^roj. 
 Superlatives in <w$ are rare. 
 
 Note 2. Some comparative and superlative adverbs end in v, particularly 
 when the positive ends in v. E. g. aw, up, awri^v, oc.wra.rv. 
 
 Note 3. The following adverbs are anomalous in their comparison: 
 
 ay%i or dyy^ou, near, acerov, ay^ttrra. (Compare § 58. N. 1.) 
 
 SKa?, afar, Ixarrigv, ixatrrdrv. (§ 125. N. 2.) 
 
 tvtiov, within, \vboriov, Ivoordrv. (ibid.) 
 
 pd\a, very, paXkov, more, rather, fjcaXiirra, very much, especially. 
 
 vutcrvg, nightly, by night ; vuxrtairtoov, farther back in the night, that is, ear- 
 
 Her in, the morning, vuxrtairara, very early in the morning, 
 irtga, farther, beyond, mgatrigv or vtgair&gov, vngatrdrv. (ibid.) 
 vrgougyou, to the purpose, vrgougytairtgov, more to the purpose, Tgougytairarcc, 
 
 very much to the purpose. 
 
172 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [ §§ 126, 127. 
 
 DERIVATION OF WORDS. 
 
 § 12G. All words, which cannot be proved to be deriva- 
 tive, must be considered as primitive. 
 
 DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 § 127. Substantives derived FROM OTHER SUB- 
 STANTIVES end in 
 
 idqg, ddqg, iddyg, Icov, Ig, ag, Xvrj, icovrj, patronymics : 
 
 iov, Idiov, dgiov, vXXiov, vdgiov, vcpiov, loxog, vXXog or vXog, lour), 
 Ig, diminutives : 
 
 tog, iTi]g, vtTTjg, r]xr\g, laxr^g, icoxrig, avog, rjvog, tvog, tvg, a, ig, ag, 
 cov, covid, Trig, Tig, ooa, 100a, appellatives. 
 
 1. Patronymics, that is, names of persons derived from 
 their parents or ancestors, end in idrjg, adijg, tadqg, gen. ov, and 
 icov gen. b)iog, masculine : ig gen. idog, ag gen. adog, and ivr\ 9 
 
 ....... fomininn 
 
 iOJtij, iciiiiuiin;! 
 
 (1) Patronymics from nouns in r t g or ag, of the first declen- 
 sion, end in adi\g (fem. ag). E. g. 'irnioirig, ^nnoTad^g son of 
 Hippotes ; Bogiag, Bogeddrjg son of Boreas. 
 
 (2) Patronymics from nouns in og and tog, of the second 
 declension, end in idrjg (fem. ig) and ladyg (fem. tag) respec- 
 tively. E. g. Kgorog, Kgovldijg son of Saturn; *AoxXr\niog, 
 ^AoxXrjniddrjg son of jEsculapius. 
 
 In this case, the poets often use icov (fem. ivrj, lcovtj) for idrjg 
 E. g. Kgovlcov for Kgovldtjg ' "AdgrjGTog, 'Adgriojlvrj daughter of 
 Adrastus. 
 
 (3) Patronymics from nouns of the third declension are 
 formed by dropping og of the genitive of the primitive, and 
 annexing idrjg (fern, ig) or tad^g. E. g. IlsXoy, nog, IleXoTildrjg 
 son of Pelops ; (I>sgr}g, tjtoc, flngrjTiddrjg son of Pheres ; "ArXag, 
 avTog, ^AxXavxlg daughter of Atlas. 
 
 The poets sometimes use icov for idqg. E. g. IliiXevg, eog, 
 IlrjXelcov son of Peleus. 
 
 Note 1 . The epic poets often form patronymics from nouns in tus, by drop- 
 ping os of the Ionic genitive (§ 44. N. 2), and annexing iccdvif, is, E. g. II»j- 
 Xivsi *os> HnXn'i'aSns son of Peleus ; H^iaus, nos, Hgio-nts daughter of Briseus* 
 
 Feminine patronymics in rTis are sometimes contracted in the oblique cases. 
 E. g. Nngtus, not, N^ff daughter of Nereus, Nereid, gen. plur. N>j£>}$a/v. 
 
 2. A diminutive signifies a small thing of the kind denoted 
 by the primitive. 
 
§ 128.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 173 
 
 Diminutives end in iov, idiov, agiov, vXXiov, vdgiov, vytov, 
 neuter : ioxog, vXXog or vXog, masculine : ioxtj, ig gen. idog, fem- 
 inine. E.g. av&Qomog, marly av&gojmov, a little fellow ; (jrs'qpa- 
 vog, crown, ozscpav loxog, a little crown ; [isiga$, xog, girl, [iuga- 
 Ttloxr), a little girl. 
 
 Note. 2. The first syllable of thov is contracted with the preceding vowel. 
 E. g. ficu;, fioo;, ox, fiolhov, a little ox ; "hfiyu io*s, word, Xifytitov, a little ivord. 
 In this case, the ending utiov often becomes tIiov. 
 
 Note 3. Many diminutives in tov have lost their diminutive signification. 
 E. g. vritiov, WiSiOv, plain, 
 
 3. National appellatives end in iog, izqg, azyg, ^t^c, tazrjg, 
 mz^g, avog, rjvog, ivog, gen. ov, and svg gen. eog, masculine : a, 
 ig gen. idog, and ag gen. adog, feminine. E. g. Kogiv&og, Cor- 
 inth, Koglvdiog, a Corinthian ; JZidyeiga, Stagira, ^zaysiglzrjc, 
 a Stagirite ; Ttyia, Tegea, Teyeairjg, a Tcgean. 
 
 Note 4. When the nominative singular of the noun denoting the place ends 
 (or would end) in a or n, the ending to; is generally contracted with the preced- 
 ing vowel. E. g. 'AS^fva/, 'AS-waTos. 
 
 4. Nouns denoting a place, where there are many things of 
 the same kind, end in wv or wvia. E. g. ddcpvr], laurel, dctyvwv, 
 laurel-grove ; godov, rose, godcovid, rose-garden. 
 
 5. Many masculine appellatives end in rrjg gen. ov. E. g. 
 noXtg, city, 7ioXhr t g, citizen ; Xnnog, horse, Innozijg, horseman. 
 Those in izrjg have the i in the penult long. 
 
 Feminine appellatives of this class end in zig. E. g. noXlztg, 
 female citizen. 
 
 6. Some masculine appellatives end in svg. E. g. Xnnog, 
 horse, Inmvg, horseman. 
 
 7. Some feminine appellatives end in ooot or looct. E. g. 
 Oga$, a Thracian, Ogaooa, a Thracian woman ; fiaoiXsvg, king, 
 fiaoiXiooa, queen. 
 
 §19 8. Substantives derived FROM ADJECTIVES end 
 in la, zrjg gen. r { zog, ovvr\, og gen. eog, a gen. ag, and rj. Such 
 substantives denote the abstract of their primitives. E. g. 
 
 xaxla, vice from xaxog, wicked 
 
 6$vit}g, sharpness " o$vg, sharp 
 
 dixaioovvi], justice " dlxaiog, just 
 
 ftd&og, depth " /?a#vc> deep. 
 
 Note 1. If the ending /« be preceded by c or o, a contraction takes place. 
 E. g. akvB-ua, truth, from ocXn^rii, ios, true; oivoia., folly, from civoos, foolish. 
 
 15* 
 
174 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§ 129. 
 
 The ending not often becomes la,, E. g. a^aaS-Za for upuSua, ignorance, 
 from ufjcaSris, ignorant. 
 
 Note 2. Those in rvs are always feminine. They are generally paroxy- 
 tone. (§ 19. 2.) 
 
 Note 3. If the penult of the primitive be short, the ending o<ruvv) becomes 
 vrvvv. E. g. h^avvn, priesthood, from n^os, sacred* 
 
 Note 4. Those in eg are always derived from adjectives in us (§ 51), by 
 changing us into as. 
 
 Note 5, Abstract nouns in a or », from adjectives in es, are always paroxy- 
 tone ( § 1 9. c 2) . E.g. %x,§%k, enmity, from i%$£6$ 9 enemy, 
 
 V129. Substantives derived FROM VERBS end in 
 
 «> ty 0£, T7}0, Tl^, TWO, €1/£, ^?> «?> <™C, o7«, J*Off, /*«, fJt^. 
 
 1. Verbal nouns in a, r\, and o$ gen. ov or so?, denote the 
 abstract of the primitive. E. g. 
 
 Xaqa, joy from ^a/^w, rejoice, (§ 96. 18) 
 
 ^u«£?7, battle " iiaxo^iai, fight 
 
 skeyxog, confutation " iXsyxu, confute 
 TiyuyoQ, thing " rcoaoaw, do, (§ 96. 3.) 
 
 Note 1. When the radical vowel is either s, a, or o, (§ 96. 
 19,) verbal nouns of this class (§ 129. 1) have o in the penult. 
 E. g. loyoq, word, from Uyw, say. 
 
 Note 2. Feminines in t/« come from verbs in sua, E. g. (fuztriXua, sove- 
 reignty, from faciXivU) reign, 
 
 2. Verbal nouns denoting the subject of the verb (§ 156) 
 end in xr\q (fern, tsiqu, iqia, rglg gen. Idog), Ti]g, two, £U£> ^? 
 (fern, ig gen. /<5o^), «c, and og gen. ou. The penult of those in 
 TtjQ, jr t g, two, is generally like that of the perfect passive 
 (§ 107)'. E. g. 
 
 qvttjq, one who draws from c P2 , J2, draw 
 TioirjTTjg, maker " noiew, make 
 
 <5?Jtwo, speaker " *PEJl, speak 
 
 yqaqpsvg, writer " yqacpm, write. 
 
 Note 3. Those in rjg, ctg> gen. ov, annex these endings to 
 the last consonant of the verb. They are chiefly found in 
 composition. E. g. yfrnphgrig, geometer, from yw, earth, and 
 fiBtgio), measure ; yvyadoStiQag, hunter of fugitives, from yvyrig, 
 fugitive^ and #?7o«w, hunt. 
 
 Note 4. Those in oc are generally found in composition. 
 E. g. firjTQoyovog, a matricide, from ^'t??o and &ENSL. 
 
§§ 130, 131.] DERIVATION OF WORDS. 175 
 
 3. Nouns denoting the action of the verb end in aig, out, 
 fxog. Their penult is generally like that of the perfect passive 
 (§107). Eg. 
 
 ogaoig, vision from ogdco, see 
 
 sixaala, conjecture " axa'fw, / conjecture 
 
 diwyiiog, pursuit " dtcoxto, pursue, (§ 9. 1.) 
 
 4. Nouns denoting the effect of the verb end in pa. Their 
 penult is generally like that of the perfect passive (§ 107). 
 
 xofiua, that which is cut off, piece, from xonrco, cut, (§§ 96. 
 
 2: 8. 1.) 
 
 5. Verbal nouns in ^ sometimes denote the action and 
 sometimes the effect of the verb. E. g. iniarrjprj, knowledge, 
 from sniorapai, understand ; yga^x^, line drawn, from ygctyco, 
 write, (§8. 1.) 
 
 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 §130. Adjectives derived FROM OTHER ADJEC- 
 TIVES end in tog, oiog, y.og, axog. E. g. eXev&tgog, free, eXev- 
 &tgiog, liberal; ixwv, ovxog, willing, txovotog, voluntary, (§ 12. 
 5;) dr t lvg, female, S^Xvxog, feminine. 
 
 §131. Adjectives derived FROM SUBSTANTIVES 
 
 end in 
 
 tog, aiog, eiog, oiog, o)og ' ixog ' eog, sirog, ivog ' sgog, ygog, 
 a)Jog, 7}).6g, coXog ' ipog ' ysig, Isig, oug ' ojdrjg. 
 
 1. The endings tog, aiog, eiog, oiog, ojog, ixog, denote be 
 longing to or relating to. E. g. al&rjQ, sgog, ether, al&igiog, 
 ethereal; Orjjjai, Thebes, Or^^alog, Theban ; noir^g, poet, 
 TTOLTjTivog, poetic. 
 
 2. The endings sog, uvog, ivog, generally denote the material 
 of which any thing is made. E. g. xgvoog, gold, zgvosog, 
 golden; dgvg, oak, dgvivog, oaken. 
 
 3. The endings sgog, r t gog, aXsog, rjXog, wXog, denote quality. 
 E. g. rgvyq, luxury, jgvepsgog, luxurious ; xrdggog, courage, 
 &aggaXsog, courageous. 
 
 4. The ending ipog generally denotes fitness. E. g. idiody, 
 food, idajdipog, eatable. 
 
 5. The endings r\ng, mg, oug, generally denote fulness. E. g. 
 xifiri, value, Tiprjeis, valuable ; %dgig, grace, xaglsig, graceful. 
 
176 INFLECTION OF WORDS. [§§ 132-134. 
 
 6. The ending adrjg denotes resemblance, E. g. nvg, fire, 
 nvQoidng, like fire. 
 
 § 132. Adjectives derived FROM VERBS end in T 6g, 
 riog, log, vog, rjg, og, (utav. 
 
 1. Verbal adjectives in rog are equivalent to the perfect 
 passive participle. E. g. noieco, make, noirjTog, made. 
 
 Frequently they imply capableness. E. g. dsdofiai, see, &ea- 
 toc, visible, capable of being seen. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes verbal adjectives in rog have an active signification. 
 E. g, xotkvTTno, cover, xaXv-rrog, covering. 
 
 2. Verbal adjectives in rsog imply necessity, obligation, or 
 propriety. E. g. tiolsco, make, noirjisog, to be made, that must 
 be made. 
 
 Note 2. The penult of adjectives in rog and nog is generally like that of the 
 perfect passive (§ 107). 
 
 3. A few verbal adjectives end in log, vog. E. g. /1EIJI, 
 fear, dsdog, timid, dsivog, terrible. 
 
 4. Many adjectives are formed from verbs by annexing rjg 
 gen. sog, og gen. ov, to the root. Such adjectives are generally 
 found in composition. E. g. dfxa&i]g, ignorant, from a- and 
 pav&dvw, (§§ 96. 7: 135. 4;) nolvloyog, talkative, from noXvg 
 and tiyw, (§§ 135. I : 96. 19.) 
 
 5. Verbal adjectives in [iwv are active in their signification. 
 E. g. s7iLOTr h ucov, knoioing, from ixiotapai, know. 
 
 § 133. A few adjectives in ivog are derived FROM AD- 
 VERBS. E. g. x&ig, yesterday, x&soivog, yesterday's, of 
 yesterday. 
 
 DERIVATION OF VERBS. 
 
 § 134. Derivative verbs end in da, ia, 6a, eva, d£oa, l£co, 
 alva, vva, oela, ida. 
 
 1. In verbs derived from nouns of the first and second de- 
 clension, the verbal ending takes the place of the ending of the 
 nominative (§§ 31. 1 : 33. 1). E. g. 
 
 Tifxri, honor rip da, I honor 
 
 xoivaivog, partaker noivavia, partake 
 
 [iio&og, ivages pio&oa, let, hire 
 
 dlxrj, justice dixd^a, judge. 
 
§ 135.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 177 
 
 In verbs derived from nouns of the third declension, the 
 ending takes the place of the termination og of the genitive 
 (§ 35. 1). But when the nominative singular ends in a vowel, 
 or in g preceded by a vowel (§ 36. 1), the verbal ending 
 generally takes the place of the ending of the nominative. E. g. 
 oi'a$, xoc, rudder oiay.i£w, steer 
 
 dav^a, wonder ■&uvfia£b), admire 
 
 Note 1 . Verbs in atvu, uv&, generally come from adjectives in os, vs gen. 
 io; t respectively. E. g. pvoo;, foolish, pu^ccUu, act in a foolish manner ; 
 fiaS-usy deep, (ZaB-uvu, deepen. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs in uslm express a desire, and are formed by 
 annexing this ending to the root of the primitive verb. E. g. 
 dodw, do, doaotlw, desire to do. 
 
 Also some verbs in iao) or «w express a desire. Such verbs 
 are derived from substantives. E. g. oT^airjyog, general, otqol- 
 Trjyida), desire to become a general. 
 
 2. Some verbs are formed from nouns by changing the end- 
 ing of the nominative into o>, and modifying the penult accord- 
 ing to § 96. E. g. yjdtTToq, injurious, -/uXitztw, injure, (§ 96. 
 2;) fjtaXaxog, soft, puluoaw, soften, (§96. 3;) SyyeXog, mes- 
 senger, dyysXXw, announce, (§ 96. 6 ;) v.adao6$, clean, x«^«/pw, 
 I clean, ($ 96. 18.) 
 
 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 § 1 35. 1. When the first component part of a word is a 
 noun of the first or second declension, its ending is dropped, 
 and an o is substituted. E. g. 
 
 fiovooTioiog, singer from (jovaa, tiolsoj 
 
 UgoTiQsnjjg, holy " itgog, tiqetki). 
 
 But when it is a noun of the third declension, the termina- 
 tion og of the genitive is dropped, and an o is substituted. E.g. 
 TKxidoiQlprjg, instructor, from nuug, naidog, Tglfita. 
 
 Note 1. The o is generally omitted when the root of the 
 first component part ends in av, i, ov, v. (§ 36. 1, R. 1.) E. g. 
 noXlnoQ&og, city -destroying, from noXig, ttsq&co. 
 
 Note 2. The o is often omitted when the last component 
 part begins with a vowel. E. g. vtwvrjTog, newly bought, from 
 viog, (avr\j6g. 
 
ITS INFLECTION OF WlUlDS. [§ 135. 
 
 Note S. The e is sometimes omitted when the root of the first component 
 part ends in v. (jbid.) E. g. ftiXdyxuoros, producing black fruit, from ^Ua;, 
 -avos, notfvds, (§ 12. 8.) 
 
 Note 4. When the first component part is yiet, earth, the o is changed into 
 at, E. g. yiuy^a^o;, geographer, from y«a, yod.<Qu>. 
 
 2. When the first component part is a iw&, the connecting 
 letter is e or i. Sometimes i becomes 01. E. g. 
 
 fAereucc/og, brave from pew, ,uoot 
 
 aQ%iy.igavrog, thunder-ruling " (*$?**) xfparros 
 dnldcjQoc, receiving presents " dt^oum, dwgov, (§ 9. 2.) 
 
 Note 5. Sometimes <r/ drops / before a vowel. E. g. piypcctms (for pi^la- 
 rviSt that is, pt*-ri-*ff*is) 9 coward, from pi*r*t, arvris, (§§ 96. 2 : 8. 2.) 
 
 3. The primitive prepositions are the only ones with which 
 other words are compounded. (§ 226. 1.) 
 
 These prepositions generally lose the final vowel, when the 
 word, with which they are compounded, begins with a vowel ; 
 except tisqI and ngo. E. g. 
 
 av-ayw, lead up from ava, Syco 
 
 in-curiw, praise u inl, alveco 
 
 ntQL-ixw, contain u nsgl, e%oj 
 
 ngo-i/co, creel " ngo, tyco* 
 
 Note 6. In ttqo, the o is often contracted with the following 
 
 VOWel. E. g. 7tQ0V%(ti for ngOtyOJ. 
 
 Note 7. 'Ap$i often retains the / before a vowel. E. g. appivrvpti from 
 aptpl, ivvv/xi. 
 
 Note 8. The Epic language often drops the final vowel of a 
 preposition even before a consonant. E. g. an-71iy.no) for uno- 
 ni/xneo. 
 
 4. The negative prefix a- (called alpha privative) corre- 
 sponds to the English prefix un-, or to the suffix -less. Before 
 a vowel it generally becomes av-. E. g. 
 
 a-ooqog, unwise from «-, aocpog 
 
 a-XQrjGTog, useless " a-, %or t oi6g 
 
 av-d£iog, unworthy " a-, 5&o£. 
 
 
PART III. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 § 136. 1. A substantive annexed to another 
 substantive or to a pronoun, for the sake of explana- 
 tion or emphasis, is put in the same case. E. g. 
 
 ZigSng ftaoiltvg, King Xerxes. Here fiaodevs is an- 
 nexed to Ztg^g. 
 *E (is top TrjQtci, Me Tereus. 
 
 A substantive thus annexed to another substantive is said to 
 be in apposition with it. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the substantive is repeated for the sake of emphasis. 
 E. g. AaaS-o>j B-wyccrng "AXtoco yigovro; ' "AAt£4», $s A.£\iyitr<ri <ptXo<rro- 
 Xipoitrtv avoifftni, Laothoe the daughter of old Altes ; of Altes who rules over the 
 warlike Leleges. 
 
 Note 2. The repeated noun (§ 136. N. 1) is, in some instances, put in the 
 nominative. E. g. 'Av^o^a^n, B-uyxryg fjciyccXriro^o; 'Hit iwvos ' 'H £ - 
 r'ico,, os houiv vto YIxockcu v\n(o-<rri, Andromache the daughter of magnanimous 
 JEetion ; Eetion, who dwelt at the foot of woody Placus. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes a substantive supplies the place of an adjective. E. g. 
 2av>j vdki; 'ExXa'j, Sane, a Grecian city, where the substantive 'EAXaj, 
 Greece, stands for the adjective 'Ex^w*^, Grecian. 
 
 Remark. Personal or national appellatives are often accompanied by the 
 word ocvrio, man. E. g. 'Bolo-i^iv; avri^, a man who is a king, simply a king. 
 J 'Av^sj ' AS-waToi, men of Athens, simply Athenians. 
 
 Note 4. An abstract noun is often used for the corresponding concrete. 
 E. g. Tlxiccvov, 3-zwv y'&vifftv, Oceanus, the parent of the gods, where the 
 abstract yUnriv, production, stands for the concrete yivirw, producer. 
 
 Note 5. The limiting noun, which regularly is put in the genitive (§ 173), 
 sometimes stands in apposition with the limited noun. E. g. As** fjt,va7 
 ti<r<po£oi, for Atxa pvuv uo-Qo^u., a contribution often mince. 
 
 2. A substantive in apposition with two or more substantives 
 is put in the plural. E. g. 
 
 Afilatgrjg, Agjccq)Q s V7]g, ncu Msyaftd£7)g, xctyol Ueg- 
 ocov, Amistres, Artaphernes, and Megabazes, leaders of 
 the Persians. 
 
180 SYNTAX. [§ 137. 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 ^137. 1. An adjective agrees with its substan- 
 tive in gender, number, and case. E. g. 
 
 3 Avt]q ooyog, A wise man. *Avdgbg ooyov, Of a wise 
 
 man. 
 "Avdgeg aoyol, Wise men. ^Avdgwv aoqxuv, Of wise 
 
 men. 
 
 This rule applies also to the article, to the possessive, inter- 
 rogative, and demonstrative pronouns, and to the participle. 
 
 Note 1. A feminine substantive in the dual often takes a 
 masculine adjective, article, pronoun, or participle. E. g. 
 Tov 7(0 tw rs'xva, for Tama to, je'xva, These tivo arts. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the gender of the adjective or participle has reference to 
 the gender implied in the substantive. E. g. ^v^h OnCuioo Ttigitricto, 
 %gvtrtov (rxri'rrffov t%euv, the soul of the Theban Tiresias, holding a golden 
 sceptre, where the masculine 'i%wv is used on account of Tuprieto. 
 
 Note 3. In some instances the gender and number of the adjective or par- 
 ticiple are determined by the noun governed by its substantive. E. g. IIr>7- 
 vuv kyiXa.1 uvrodilffavris, Jlocks of birds fearing, where the masculine 
 bnobiiffcivTis refers to nrwuv, although it agrees in case with ocyiXai. 
 
 2. If an adjective, pronoun, or participle refers to two or 
 more substantives, it is put in the plural. If the substantives 
 denote animate beings, the adjective, pronoun, or participle, is 
 masculine, when one of the substantives is masculine. If 
 they denote inanimate beings, the adjective, &/C. is generally 
 neuter. E. g. 
 
 Bovv ytal Xrcnov ycal ytdfxrjlov bkovg onxovg^ An ox, a 
 
 horse, and a camel, roasted whole. 
 Ai&oi is xal n Xlv& oi xal %vXa ardxrcog eggififxiva, 
 Stones, clay, wood, and brick, thrown together without 
 order. 
 
 Note 4. The adjective often agrees with one of the substan- 
 tives. E. g. "AXo%ot, xal vr\nia tixva nor id iy [levai, wives 
 and infants expecting. 
 
 Note 5. The adjective or participle is often put in the dual, 
 if it refers to two substantives. E. g. KaXXlag xal *AXxi- 
 (jiddr)g rjxeTrjv ayovTe tov IlQodixov, both Callias and Ah 
 cibiades came bringing Prodicus. 
 
§§ 138, 139.] ARTICLE. 181 
 
 3. A collective substantive in the singular often takes an 
 adjective or participle in the plural. E. g. 
 
 TqoIi]v eXovrsg Ugydoav or 6 log, The army of the Greeks 
 having taken Troy. Here the plural participle kXorieg 
 agrees with the singular substantive oToXog. 
 
 Note 6. A noun or a personal pronoun in the dual often 
 takes a participle in the plural. E. g. IV w xaTctfidvTsg, ice 
 both going doicn. 
 
 On the other hand, a noun in the plural sometimes takes 
 a pnrticiple in the dual, in which case only two things are 
 meant E. g. Aiyvniol xXu^ovts, two vultures uttering 
 loud shrieks. 
 
 Note 7. In Homer, the dual nouns oWs and $ouos are accompanied by plural 
 adjectives. E. g. "Oaci QetuveL, two bright eyes, " 'A A. k t ft a lov^i, two 
 stout Sj>ears. 
 
 Note 8. The duals ^vo and ol/u,<pca are frequently joined to plural substantives. 
 E. g. Ay (? *^f^a?> for i\vo ^v%u, two souls, 
 
 § 13 8. 1. An adjective is often used substantively, the 
 substantive, with which it agrees, being understood. E. g. 
 &lXog sc. avr t q, A friend. 
 Oi &vr}Toi, sc. avfrgcoTioi, Mortals. 
 
 2. The neuter singular of an adjective or participle is often 
 equivalent to the abstract (§ 128) of that adjective or participle. 
 In this case the article precedes the adjective or participle. 
 E. g. To xaXov, the beautiful, beauty. To fxiXXov, the future. 
 
 Note 1. Mascidine or feminine adjectives often supply the 
 place of adverbs. E. g. Zeig %&i£6g §jfy, Jupiter went yester- 
 day, where the adjective x&i±6g, hestcrnus, is equivalent to the 
 adverb %&&, yesterday. 
 
 So all adjectives in tiiog answering to the question tiootouoq, 
 onichatday? (§62.3.) E.g. ToiTalog dcplxsTo, he came 
 on the third day. 
 
 Note 2. It has already been remarked, that the neuter of an adjective is often 
 used adverbially. (§ 124. 1.) 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 § 139. 1. In its leading signification the Greek article 
 corresponds to the English article the. E. g. 
 
 c O avriQ, The man. Ol ardgeg, The men. 
 
 C H yvvr h The iv oman. Al yvraly.sg, The women. 
 
 To dtrd<joy, The tree. Ta devdoa, The trees. 
 16 
 
1S2 SYNTAX. [§ 14J. 
 
 2. A Greek noun without the article is equivalent to the 
 corresponding English noun with the article a or an. E. g. 
 0F$p, a man; yvvtj, a woman; dirdyov, a tree. 
 
 3. Proper names very often take the article. But the article 
 is generally omitted when the proper name is accompanied by 
 a substantive with the article, (§ 136.) E. g. 
 
 c O ''Olv^nog, Olympus. 
 
 llLTTtty.bg o MvTiXip'aJog, Pittdcus the Mytilenian. 
 
 Note 1. The article accompanies the leading character of a well-known story 
 or anecdote. E. g. T» Ss^/ip/a; Xiyovrt, on \Q)i(jt.iffroK'knf\ ob £/ ctvrov, 
 aXXa S/a rrjv toXiv tu^oxt/AoT, to a Seriphian saying, that he [Themistocles'] had 
 become famous not through himself, but through the city, where the article <ru is 
 used, because the remark of the Seriphian and the reply of Themistocles were 
 well known in Athens. 
 
 Note 2. The article sometimes accompanies the second accusative after verbs 
 signifying to call (§166). E. g. '~E-rix,iioov<n fictWuv tov Atfywrov, a, v a. k a- 
 X o v v r s s th or (> o^ d r 9i v, they attempted to strike Dexippus, exclaiming, 
 " The traitor ! " not calling him a traitor. 
 
 § 140. 1. The article is very often separated from its 
 substantive by an adjective, possessive pronoun, participle, or 
 by a genitive depending on the substantive (§ 173). E. g. 
 
 c xaXXts7iT)g 'Ayd&av, The elegant Agdthon. 
 
 Tov (pbv Xnnov, My horse. 
 
 c OeoaciXwv ftixodsvg, The king of the Thessalians. 
 
 The article is also separated by other words connected with 
 the substantive, in which case a participle (commonly yeroius- 
 vog or o)V) may be supplied. E. g. Tov year' aojqa Zrjrog, 
 of Jupiter, who dwells among the stars. 
 
 Remark 1. Two or even three articles may stand together. E. g. To r v\ 
 wiXtt <rvupioiv, that which is profitable to t lie city. Ta rr\? t u> v voXkav 
 "^vX/is ofiifAeera, the eyes of the souls of the majority of mankind. 
 
 Note 1 . In Ionic writers, the article is often separated from its substantive 
 by the word upon which the substantive depends (§ 173). E. g. T u v n; 
 ff t £ a r / oj v iay, for Tuv <rr(>a,rturiuv ng t one of the soldiers. 
 
 Remark 2. Sometimes the article is separated from the word, to which it 
 belongs, by an incidental proposition. E. g. ' ATomuffas rod, okoti fiovXoivro 
 tx$t0TM t yvvouxot, a, y i ff § a, i , for * A'TO'Tauffo:; tov yvvauKoc c&yzff&ou, otots fiou- 
 s.otvTo iKurroi, having stopped them from marrying whenever they wished. 
 
 2. The words connected with the substantive are often 
 placed after it, in which case the article is repeated. The 
 first article however is often omitted. E. g, 
 
 KXtiyiwTjs 6 fiixfjog, Little Cligenes. 
 
 Tug wrjug tug It eg a g, The other seasons. 
 
§ 140.] ARTICLE. 183 
 
 This arrangement is more emphatic than that exhibited 
 above (§ 140. 1). 
 
 Note 2. In some instances this order is inverted. E. g. T a\\ a raynS-a 
 for TayaS-a raXkae, the other good things. 
 
 3. The participle preceded by the article is equivalent 
 to ixuyog og, he wlw, and the finite verb. E. g. Tovg 
 noksfirjGavTccg xolg fiuQpaQoig, those who fought against the 
 barbarians, where xovg nole^oavxag is equivalent to iaehovg qS 
 inoXs^oar. But 7io).ef.n;ouvxag Tolg (3ugfidgoig would mean hav- 
 ing fought against the barbarians. 
 
 Note 3. Hence, a participle preceded by the article is 
 often equivalent to a substantive. E. g. Ol cpdooocfovi'xsg, equiv- 
 alent to Ol cpdooocpoi, the philosophers. 
 
 Note 4. When the adjective stands before or after the sub- 
 stantive and its article, the substantive with the article involves 
 the relative pronoun og. E. g. Ov (jdvavoov xrjv xixvr\v &*f* 
 od t ur t v, equivalent to C H xi-/yr\y r t v exxrjodfiriv, ov fidiavoog ioxw, 
 the art which I possess is not low. 
 
 4. When a noun, which has just preceded, would naturally 
 be repeated, the article belonging to it is alone expressed. E. g. 
 
 Tor t 5lov Twy idicjTtvovTWV, r t x 6 v iwv xvgavvtvovxwv, The 
 life of private persons , or that of those who are rulers. 
 
 Note 5. In certain phrases a noun is understood after the 
 article. The nouns which are to be understood are chiefly the 
 following : 
 
 y rj, land, country, as Elg x ?; v tavxwv, To their own country. 
 yro)fxr jf opinion, as Kara ys xjjv ipijv, In my opinion at least. 
 odog, way, as Tj] v xayioxrp. The quickest way. 
 Tzoixyua, thing, as T« t?]c noXeag, The affairs of the state. 
 vlog, son, as c O Kluviov, The son of Clinias. 
 
 5. The demonstrative pronoun, and the adjective -nag or 
 iinag, are placed either before the substantive and its article, 
 or after the substantive. E. g. 
 
 Ovxog 6 ogvig, or c O ogvig ovxog, This bird. 
 To fidgog xovxo, or Tovxo xb fidgog, This burden. 
 Anctvxag xovg agixrpovg, or Tovg ag i&fiovg dnav- 
 xag, All the numbers. 
 
 The article, however, in this case is often omitted. E. g. 
 Oviog dvrjg, this man. nd vx eg dv&gwTioi, all men. 
 
IS i SYNTAX. [§§141,142. 
 
 Note 6. Uci; in the singular without the article often means every, eacfu 
 E.g. II«f «v»j£, every man. 
 
 Note 7. "Okos and ixao-rog often imitate era*. E. g. Tow <rxd<pous 
 e'kcu, of the whole ship. T ov ovrktrnv txao-rov, every heavy-armed sol- 
 dier. 'Ex derm $ rns olxiag, of every house. 
 
 Note 8. Totouros is sometimes preceded by the article. E. g. 'Ev Ta7$ 
 roicivrcui IvipiXtlatSi in such pursuits. 
 
 Note 9. The article is sometimes placed before the interrogative pronoun 
 tU and the pronominal adjective <ro7os. E. g. To ri ; what is it? Ta vroioc, 
 Ta.vTa. i such as what ? 
 
 Note 10. The indefinite pronoun h7v» is preceded by the article. E. g. 
 '0 $E?ya, such-a-one. 
 
 §141. 1 . An adverb preceded by the article is equivalent 
 to an adjective. E. g. Ol to re av&qwnoi, the men of that 
 time, the men who lived in those days. 
 
 2. An adverb preceded by the article, without any substan- 
 tive expressed, has the force of a substantive. E. g. 7/ u i- 
 giov, sc. ZfieQa, the morrow. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the article does not perceptibly affect the adverb before 
 which it is placed. E. g. To vrdkxt or <ro**aAa/, in olden time, anciently. 
 T« vt/v or rawv, now, at the present time. To - ecvrUtz, immediately. 
 
 3. The neuter singular of the article often stands before an 
 entire proposition. E. g. To ouoluig a{Ufolv dxooao&ai, to hear 
 both impartially. 
 
 4. The neuter singular of the article is often placed before 
 single words which are explained or quoted. E. g. To v/i'slg 
 otuv elncj, zr\v noliv liya, when I say you, J mean the state. 
 To} ilvai xyrjo&ai, xal ioj %oj gig, to use the words shea, 
 and xbjqlg. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the article is of the gender of the substantive which refers 
 to the quotation. E.g. KaX^y itpvt ir a. gtzivts t v tUvai rriv xa^ vv it p t v 
 «*3ciy, he said, " To sacrifice to the gods according to thy power ," is very 
 good advice, where the gender of the article before the expression KulSuvafur 
 tohuv is determined by the substantive xa.ga.Uieiv. 
 
 Note 3. In grammatical language, every word regarded as an independent 
 object takes the gender of the name of the part of speech, to which it belongs. 
 E. g. 'H iyeo sc. dvrcdWftiu,, the pronoun lyd>, I. *H vvro SC. tf(>o§-i<Ti;, the 
 preposition vto, under. '0 yd% sc. <ruvh<rp.o$, the conjunction yd^for. 
 
 § 142. 1. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the 
 article is very often equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, 
 or to avTog in the oblique cases. E. g. 
 
§ 143.] 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 185 
 
 Tov ovHQoVy equivalent to Tovxov tov ovsigov, This dream. 
 Trjg ds o^sdov r)X&* 'Evogiz&uv, And the Shaker of the earth 
 
 came near her. Here jr]g is equivalent to avxr^. 
 The Attic dialect also often uses the article in this sense, 
 
 particularly in the formula 6 fisv 6 ds, the one .... the other, 
 
 one another. E. g. 
 
 "Oiotv 6 fiev rslvjj fiialcog, 6 d' inavctorgscpsiv dvvr\xai, When 
 the one pulls violently one way, and the other is able to 
 pull back. 
 Tolg \isv ngoai/ovTag tov vovv, twv ds ovds ttjv qjcovqv 
 ave/ofisvovg, Paying attention to some persons, but not 
 tolerating even the voice of others. 
 
 Note 1. The article is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun, when it 
 stands immediately before the relative 2V, o<ro$, or o7o$. E. g. Oubivos ruv ova. 
 ai<T%uvnv \<rri (pigovra, none of those things which bring shame. M«rz7v robs 
 old; v£g ouros, to hate those who are like this man. 
 
 Note 2. The proper name to which o ^sv refers is sometimes joined with it. 
 E. g. 'O f&lv ourectr* * Arvpviov o|gi' ^ov(>), 'Avriko%os, the one, namely, An- 
 tilochus, pierced Atymnius with the sharp spear. 
 
 Note 3. 'O ph and I ti are not always opposed to each other, but, instead 
 of one of them, another word is sometimes put. E. g. Ttupyog /xh i7s, o $t 
 olxohofAis, the one a husbandman, the other a builder of houses. 
 
 Note 4. The second part (o ¥i) of the formula o /u,h o Vi generally 
 
 refers to a person or thing different from that to which the first part (o piv) 
 refers. 
 
 2. In the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, the article is 
 often equivalent to the relative pronoun. E. g. "Ogvig Igbg, tw 
 ovrofjia cpolvi*, a sacred bird, the name of which is Phenix, 
 where to> stands for w. 
 
 Note 5. The tragedians (iEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides) sometimes use 
 the article in this sense, 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 § 14:3. The personal pronoun of the third person may refer 
 either to a person or thing different from the subject of the 
 proposition, or to the subject of the proposition, in which it 
 stands. E.g. (II. 4, 533 — 5) Ogrj'ixsg, o% s coootv anb ocpslcav, 
 the Thracians who drove him away from their position, where 
 s refers to the person driven away, and oyslwv to Ogfasg, the 
 antecedent of ol'. 
 
 16* 
 
ISO SYNTAX. [§ 144. 
 
 It often refers to the subject of the preceding proposition, 
 if the proposition, in which it stands, is closely connected with 
 the preceding. E. g. A^gtadimp furj xl ol yirrpai xocxov, 
 faring Ust any evil should befall him, where ol refers to the 
 substantive with which doowdtwv agrees. 
 
 ss o 
 
 Note 1. In Homer and Herodotus the pronoun of the third person generally 
 refers to a person or thing different from the subject of the proposition, in which 
 it stands. In the Attic writers, it is generally reflexive, that is, it refers to the 
 subject of the proposition, in which it stands, or of the preceding, if the second 
 be closely connected with it. 
 
 Note 2. In some instances the personal pronoun of the third person stands 
 for that of the second. E. g. (II. 10, 398 : Herod. 3, 71.) 
 
 Note 3. The personal pronoun is sometimes repeated in the same proposition 
 for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. 'Efzoi ph, ti xod fjch xaS-' 'ExxWv 
 %&ovct nB-gafAfttS-' , aXX' ouv \u\ira. pot $oxt7; Xiyiiv t to us, although we 
 have not been brought up in the land of the Greeks^ nevertheless thou seemest to 
 speak intelligible things. 
 
 Note 4. The forms i^iov, ipol, epi, are more emphatic than 
 the corresponding enclitics pov, (xol, pL E. g. Aog ipol, give 
 to me, but Aoq pioiy give me. 
 
 After a preposition only ifiov, ifxol, i(xs are used. Except pi 
 in the formula nqog fis, to me. 
 
 § 14 4. 1. Avxog, in the genitive, dative, and accusative, 
 without a substantive joined with it, signifies him, her, it, them. 
 E.g. 
 
 c O rofioc avxbv ova la, The laic does not permit him. 
 
 ''jC/n ttfqI avxov xlva yr(ifir t v ; What does she think of him ? 
 
 Note 1. Avrog in the abovementioned cases is sometimes used in this sense, 
 when the noun, to which it refers, goes before in the sanie proposition. This 
 happens when the noun is separated from the verb, upon which it depends, by 
 intermediate clauses. E. g. 'Ey*/ ph ovv fixffiXta, Z veoWa, oilrus tv?) to. 
 ffu/u,fta%ci, i"crt(j <x^o§v[Ji.ura.i '/i/ucis a,vro\i<rcti, ovk tuba, o ti 3*7 ttvrov o/u-otrai, 
 now, for my part, I do not see why the Jcing y whose resources are so great , should 
 kwear to us, if he really meant to destroy us. 
 
 Remark 1. Auto; in the oblique cases is sometimes joined to the relative 
 pronoun for the sake of perspicuity. E. g. ^r i /uh ai/rav, one of whom* 
 Examples of this kind often occur in the Septuagint and New Testament. 
 
 2. Avzog, joined to a substantive, signifies self, very. In 
 this case, it is placed either before the substantive and its 
 article, or after the substantive. The article, however, is often 
 omitted. E. g. 
 
 Tn avxbv xovguvov xbv xvxxagov, Under the very vault 
 of heaven. 
 
§ 145.] pronoun. 187 
 
 Note 2. The personal pronouns iyd, ov, fifing, vfitlg, with 
 which aviog is put in apposition, are very often omitted ; in 
 which case aviog has the appearance of these pronouns. E. g. 
 Avxol evdselg softer twv xa& 3 rifitoav, we are in want of our 
 daily bread. AvtoI cpalrto&t pallor xovjoig moievovieg, 
 you seem to place more confidence in these men. 
 
 Note 3. Auros often signifies p.ovo$, alone* E. g. Aurot ya.% lo-psv, xouvru 
 %ivot vroigtiffivjfor we are by ourselves, and strangers have not yet come. 
 
 Remark 2. Autos is used when a person or thing is to be opposed to any 
 thing connected with it. E, g. UoXXas V ttpB-ipous ypv^ag M Ai% Tgo'l'ayptv 
 tigcjcov, aureus o^i IXuigia riu^i xuvi<r<riv, and sent prematurely many brave 
 souls oj heroes to Hades, and made their bodies the prey of dogs, where aurous, 
 them, that is, the heroes, or rather, their bodies, is opposed to ^u^as- 
 
 Remark 3. Autos denotes the principal person as distinguished from servants 
 or disciples. E.g. ( Aristoph. Nub. 218-19) Tis euros o ctvr,o ; IVIA0. 
 Autos. 2TP. Ti$ auros; MA0. lafxgeims, Pray who is that man? 
 Disc. It is he. Str. What he ? Disc. Socrates. 
 
 Note 4. Autos is often appended to the subject of a proposition containing 
 the reflexive pronoun laurou, for the sake of emphasis. E. g. Tlakaurrhv vuv 
 ^ra^atrxiud^irat it' a urcs ecu tu>, he is preparing a combatant against himself. 
 
 In such cases auras is placed as near lavrou as possible (§ 232). 
 
 Note 5. Aviog is often used with ordinal numbers, to show 
 that one person with others, whose number is less by one than 
 the number implied in the ordinal, is spoken of. E. g. c HiQe&rj 
 ngso ftevTrjg Ig AaxtdaLuova avTOxoaTWQ, dexctjog avxog, he, 
 with nine others, was appointed plenipotentiary to Laccdamon, 
 where dey.axog avxog is equivalent to pex* allasv ivvia, with nine 
 others. 
 
 Note 6. In some instances, auros is equivalent to the demonstrative pronoun. 
 E. g. 'ATivrrucr 1 aurnt, I despise that {woman). 
 
 3. Avxog, with the article before it, signifies the same. E. g. 
 
 Ilsgl xcov avxcov xijg avxrjg r^iiqag ov xavxa yiyvwoxo- 
 fjisv, We do not have the same opinion concerning the 
 same things on the same day. 
 
 REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 145, The reflexive pronoun refers to the subject of the 
 proposition in which it stands, or to the subject of the preced- 
 ing, if the second be closely connected with it. E. g. 
 2avxr\v sTiLdelxvv, Shoio thyself. 
 
 Zrjxslxs Gi\u/3ovlovg xovg afietvov qoovovvrag vpwv av- 
 t c5 v, You wish to have those for your advisers, who reason 
 better than you. 
 
188 syntax. [§§146-148. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person stands for that of 
 the first or second. E. g. -W i\y.a; uvigio&cu iavrovs, we must ask ourselves, 
 where tocurov; stands for r,/u.ci; cevrovi. M^av rov uvrns oJ<r$a., thou k no west 
 thy lot, where avrvg stands for o-ccut?,s. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes this pronoun in the third person dual and plural stands 
 for the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. KaS-' t&vroiv, for Kar' aA.AjjXo/v, against 
 each other. <&S-ovouvres \avro7$, for QSovovvrt; aXXriXois, envying one 
 another. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 140. It has already been remarked, that the possessive 
 pronouns are, in signification, equivalent to the genitive of the 
 personal pronouns (§ 67). E. g. 
 
 Oiy.oQ g oog, equivalent to c olxog gov, Thy house. (§ 173.) 
 Utttg oog, equivalent to Iloug gov, A son of thine, (ibid.) 
 
 Note 1. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively. E. g. 2 a* 
 *oS-o;, my regret for thee, not thy regret for others. (§ 173. N. 2.) 
 
 Note 2. In some instances the possessive pronoun of the third person is put 
 for that of the Jlrst or second. E. g. <&gtriv % triv, for <&gtrh ip,oc7$, in my soul. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes io$, his, stands for <r<piri£o$, their, and (r<pi<rtgo$ for tog. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 147. The interrogative pronoun %lq is used either in 
 direct or in indirect questions. E. g. sSf Tig si; who art 
 thou ? Olds t I fiovUxou, he knows what (it) wants. 
 
 This head includes also the interrogative pronominal adjec- 
 tives (§73). E. g. Kara no lag nvlag eiaijl&Bg ; through what 
 gates did you come in ? 
 
 Note 1. It is to be observed that rig does not always stand 
 at the beginning of the interrogative clause. 
 
 Note 2. Tig is sometimes equivalent to nolog. E. g. Tlva 
 avibv qji]GOfiev uvai ; what kind of person shall we call him ? 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 148. 1. The indefinite pronoun jig annexed to a substan- 
 tive means a certain, some, or simply, a, an. E. g. "Ogvi&eg 
 tivtc, some birds. 'ipovidv two:, a id ell-rope. 
 
 2. Without a substantive it means some one, somebody, a 
 certain one. E. g. 'Avtig&svt}v Tig xctlsGUTw, let some one 
 call Antisthenes. 
 
§ 149.] pronoun. 189 
 
 Note 1. T/; is sometimes equivalent to %jta.<rros. E. g. E£ rts Vo^v Sr,£«- 
 ffS&f, let every one sharpen his spear well. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes ri; refers to the person who speaks, and sometimes to 
 the person addressed. E. g. lloT rt$ Qvyoi ; where can one (that is, I go? 
 "Hjcu reu xaxov, misfortune is coming to some body t^that is, to thee . 
 
 Note 3. T)j is often joined to adjectives of quality or quantity. E. g. Tuvk 
 u£tt.iora.rn tis, a most blooming woman. (PikovroXis ti$ sVS-' o o^aiftcov, the 
 god is friendly to the city. YLoo-os rig; how great ? 'Hpigeis lfio*op.rixovTec 
 rivets, some seventy days, or, about seventy days. 
 
 Note 4. T); sometimes means somebody, in the sense of a distinguished 
 person, a man of consequence, and rt means something great. E. g. Qctlvofzat 
 vis r,[tis, I seem to be sotne body, that is, a man of consequence. "FSo%i 
 n unuv, he seemed to say something great. 
 
 Note 5, Sometimes the poets double c)$. E. g. "Ear/ <r/; ou *go<ra) 
 "S-ru^rns rokts rt$, there is a certain city not far from Sparta. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 
 
 §149. 1. Ovxog and ode regularly denote that which 
 is present or near in place or time, or something just men- 
 tioned. E. g. Ovjog 6 clrrJQ, this man. "Hds tj yvvr\, this 
 woman. Tuvra dxovoag, hearing these things. 
 
 Note 1 . Ouro$ and o$t are sometimes equivalent to the adverbs hravB-a, utt y 
 here. E. g. Ayr*; Vt aoi yris vri(>ioo*os ntko-K. 'Ogqis » A7£s fjtXv 'AS-qvatt 
 Here thou hast a map of the whole earth. Seest thou ? Here is Athens, 
 
 2. 'Exelvog regularly refers to a remote person or thing. 
 E. g. Tovzovl yovv old' fym, xaxsivovl, I know this one 
 and that one. 
 
 Note 2. 'Exuvog often refers to that which immediately 
 precedes, in which case it corresponds to the English he. E. g. 
 jExtHvog rf^s tov rpaywdixov dpovov, he had possession of the 
 tragic throne. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun refers to a noun which goes 
 before in the same proposition, if that noun has been separated from the govern- 
 ing word by intervening clauses. E.g. Tov pavriv, as ilxiro t% o-rgxTtyi 
 
 tccvtti, ^tliyiffrinv tov 'Axugvijvot, tov tov tov ilictzvru, Ix tcuv \qcov 
 
 tu. (jliWovtu. a'ipi Xx&oiivziv, <pa,vi^os itrri Atavfins o\ t Koxt(jt.'7rcav, it is evident that 
 Leonidas tried to send away the soothsayer Megistias the Acarnanian, ivho 
 
 followed this army, / mean the one who prophesied what would happen to 
 
 them. 
 
 Note 4. The demonstrative pronoun sometimes follows the 
 relative in the same proposition. E. g. 'ivdbv nozapLov, og xqo- 
 xodeilovg devifgog ovxog noiapiwv ndtTcav 7ictp8%STcu, the river 
 Indus, which is the only river in the toorld, except one, that 
 produces crocodiles. 
 
190 SYNTAX. [§ 150. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 150. 1. The relative pronoun agrees with the 
 noun, to which it refers, in gender and number. 
 Its case depends on the construction of the clause 
 in which it stands. E. g. 
 
 NeoxXeldTjg, bg eon ivcflog, JVcodides, who is blind. 
 
 Jliow nollxnv, bang coyeleh' naiqav figadvg necpvxe, I 
 hate that citizen who is slow to aid his country. 
 
 Tcoy dajdexa {ivwv, agllccpeg, Of the twelve mince, which 
 thou rcceivedst. 
 
 The word, to which the relative refers, is called the ante- 
 cedent. 
 
 This head includes also the relative pronominal adjectives 
 (§ 73). E. g. "Allot oooig (xexeoTi tov xgrjorov tqotiov, as 
 many others as possess a good character. 
 
 Note 1. In some instances a masculine relative pronoun in 
 the dual refers to a feminine noun. E. g. c Huwv iv exdoTO) dvo 
 Tire eomv Idea uoyorie xal llyovje, olv enoue&a, in each one 
 of us there are two ideas governing and leading us, which 
 iv e foil ore. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the gender of the relative is determined by the gender 
 implied in the antecedent. E. g. Ta? 'AS-jjva*, ol yi tfii xa) xari^n rh 
 I/aov vTy,o\a.v cihixa. *§u5ms, Athens, which city began first to injure me and 
 my father, where ci refers to the inhabitants of Athens. 
 
 Note 3. The relative often agrees in gender and number 
 with the noun which is joined to it by a verb signifying to call 
 or name, to be, to believe, (§ 166.) E. g. ^Axq^v, a§ xaltvvtai 
 Klr/ideg, a promontory, which is called Cleides. °0 qcSog, 
 i]v a i do) ti'nouer, that kind of fear, which ice called respect. 
 
 2. If the relative refers to two or more nouns, it is 
 generally put in the plural. If the nouns denote animate 
 beings, the relative is masculine when one of the nouns is 
 masculine. If the nouns denote inanimate objects, the relative 
 is generally neuter. E. g. Ai'ug y.nl Tevxoog, o c i (.leyioror e/.ey- 
 yor tdooav t>~c avt&v urdgiug, Ajax and Teucer, who gave the 
 greatest proof of their valor. neql nole^iov xtu el o> y 'j ?;e, a 
 fxeyloiijv eyei dviaiutr, concerning war and peace, which have 
 very great power. 
 
 Note 4. The relative often agrees in gender with one 
 
§ 150] 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 191 
 
 of the nouns to which it refers. E. g. ^AnaXXayivxtg noXtfxwv 
 y.al v.ivdvrwv y.al Tagaxr\g, £ ^ % v > *• T - *•* being delivered from 
 wars, dangers, and trouble, to which, fyc. 
 
 3. The relative is often put in the plural, when it refers 
 to a collective noun in the singular. E.g. shins Xabv ovg 
 raqgog e'gvxBv, he left the people, whom the ditch kept back. 
 flag Tig Sfivvai, olg ocpuXw, every one, to whom I happen to 
 owe money, swears. 
 
 Remark. The relative is put in the plural also when it 
 refers to a whole class of persons or things implied in a singu- 
 lar antecedent. E. g. Avyg, avxov gyog, olnsg oco'^ovai yi)v, 
 a man of the working class, which class are the safety of the 
 land. 
 
 Note 5. The relative in the singular often refers to an 
 antecedent in the plural, when one of the persons or things 
 contained in that antecedent is meant. E. g. Ohog gs rgwet 
 jjitXirfi),?, og ts y.al aXXovg fiXamsi, og av {iiv %av8ov tXr if sweet 
 wine affects thee, which injures whoever else takes it freely, 
 where 6g refers to any person contained in aXXovg. 
 
 4. The proposition containing the relative is often placed 
 before the proposition which contains the antecedent, when 
 the leading idea of the whole period is contained in the former. 
 This is called inversion. E. g. Ovg av iwv Xoycov dXyw xXvwv, 
 lovude y.al ngdaoetv atvy&i J do not dare to do those things, 
 which it gives me pain to hear. Msi'^ov 3 ooxtg dvxl xi]g aviov 
 ndigag tplkov ropl^it, tovtov ovdapov Xiyco, whoever thinks 
 that he has a dearer friend than his own country, him I call a 
 contemptible man. 
 
 This inversion often takes place also for the sake of emphasis. 
 
 Note 6. This remark applies also to the relative adverbs. 
 (§ 123.) E. g. Oi d° ore di] q* \y.avov, o&l oy.onbv "Ey.xogoq 
 i'y.Tuv, si>& Odvoosig uev i'gv^s dxiag Xnnovg, and when they 
 came there where they had killed the spy of Hector, then 
 Ulysses stopped the swift horses. 
 
 5. The antecedent is often omitted, when it is either a gen- 
 eral word (xgrjpa, ngdyua, ovrog, iy.uvog), or one which can be 
 easily supplied from the context. E. g. "A fiovXea&s Xiyovxsq, 
 saying what you like, where a refers to Tigdy^axa governed by 
 leyoiTtg. To ueye&og, vnig co v ovvtXrjXv&auev, the magnitude 
 of the business, for which we are assembled. 
 
 So in the formula Elolv o% Xiyovoiv, there are who say. 
 
MB SYNTAX. [§ 151. 
 
 Note 7. In some instances the antecedent is implied in a 
 possessive pronoun. E. g. \hcadoia rjj ty.psT.epo, oXt trig os 
 
 ov dieacooauer, through the cowardice of us, who did not save 
 thee, where ^mW is equivalent to /-uolr, to which the relative 
 o'invtg in reality refers. 
 
 § 151. 1. In general, when the relative would 
 regularly be put in the accusative, it is put in the 
 genitive or dative, according as the antecedent is in 
 the genitive or dative. This is called attraction. 
 E e 
 
 *£n ToiTcov, (ov Hyu, From these things, which he says. 
 Here cov stands for the accusative a after liyu. (§ 163. 1.) 
 
 D £y aiiolig olg inuyyilXovxaiy In those things ichich they 
 profess. Here olg stands for « after inayyillovTai. (ibid.) 
 
 Remark 1. If the antecedent be a demonstrative pronoun, 
 this pronoun is generally omitted (§ 148. 5), and the relative 
 takes its case. E. g. Zjiqyovxag olg av I'^couev, for ^isgyovxag 
 i'/.tlroig, a av l'%(ouev, being satisfied with what ice have. 
 f^iiuEv e$ (ov ivy%avoutv t/orrtg, for E$ ixtiwov, a rvyxaropsv 
 I'zorTsg, we go away from those possessions ichich we happen to 
 have. 
 
 Remark 2. In attraction the noun joined to the relative 
 pronoun by a verb signifying to call, to be, to believe, (§ 166,) 
 also takes the case of the relative. E. g. Tovtwv, cjv ov 
 d to to iraj v y.aXelg, for Tovkov, ag ov deonolvag xalug, of these, 
 whom thou callest mistresses. 
 
 Note 1. In some instances the relative, even when it would be in the nomi- 
 native, is attracted by the antecedent. E. g. v Herod. 1, 78) Ot^sv xu ilo'oris 
 <ra>v r,v mo) 2a^/j, for OVo'-v %u il^ors; ix&Uav a, «v kip) 2a^/£, as yet know- 
 ing nothing of what happened in Sardes. 
 
 Remark 3. The nominative of the pronominal oTcs is often attracted by the 
 antecedent. E. g. TLgo$ avo^as ToXprioovs, olovs xa.) 'AS-waiovs, to 
 daring men, such as the Athenians are, where o'lovs xou ' ASwaiov; stands for 
 clot ku.) 'AS-jjvoTo/ £ Iff I. 
 
 Remark 4. In some instances the personal pronoun, connected with oJo?, 
 remains in the nominative, though oJo; has been attracted by its antecedent. 
 S-a.vtets ^£ } olovs o-by o*tao*io*ga,xorasi but young men, like thee, 
 decamping, where olovs av stands for oTos ov u. 
 
 Remark 5. e Hx/x«j sometimes imitates o7o$ (§ 151. R. 3). E. g. 'Exuvo 
 ro7<riv fiktxoio-t v*Zv, that is a hard thing to men of our years, where 
 .7i v£v stands for r,>.ixot vu i<rp,iv. 
 
§ 152.] pronoun. 193 
 
 Note 2. Relative adverbs (§ 123) also are attracted by the 
 word to which they refer. E. g. 'Ex yr\g, o&ev ngovxuzo, 
 from the place where it lay, where odiv stands for o&i or onov. 
 
 2. On the other hand, the antecedent is sometimes put in 
 the case of its relative. E. g. 
 
 MtXsaygog rag t uiv Tipdg Sg eXafie (pavsgal, The honors ivhich 
 Meleager received are well known, where rag tiiidg stands 
 for al Tifxal. 
 
 Ovx oloda fxolgag tjg Tvx&* avTtjv xgsoiv ; Knowest thou not 
 the fate which she must meet ? for fidlgav r\g. 
 
 Note 3. The same is true of relative adverbs. E. g. *'aX- 
 Xoos ojiol dp dqlxj] dyan^oovoi as, they will love thee m 
 other places whither thou mayest go, where dXXoos stands for 
 alio & i or aXXa%ov. 
 
 3. Very frequently, in case of attraction, the antecedent is 
 put after its relative. E. g. 
 
 KaTuoxsva^ovTa tjg ugzoi %(agag, for Kaxaoxtva^ovja ttjv %(ti- 
 gav, i)g vlq^ol, Improving the country, which he governed. 
 
 Remark 6. Frequently the principal words are attracted by, 
 and placed after, the relative. E. g. OX%i%ai ytvycor, bv yysg 
 udgjv ga, for c O (xdgxvg y bv Tj/sg, ol'xtiai, qpsvywVj the wit- 
 ness whom you brought has decamped. Ol naXaiol exelvoi, 
 <hv or6f.utTa ptyuXu Xtytxtti in\ aoqp/ra, JIitt axov re xa\ B Lav- 
 tog, those ancient persons , Pittacus and Bias, who are re- 
 nowned for wisdom, where wp attracts only the proper names. 
 
 Remark 7. The antecedent may be placed after its relative 
 even when apparently no attraction takes place. E. g. ^Anocpv- 
 yotg av i]vtlv dp 6ovXi] dlxwv, you can get clear in any 
 lawsuit you please. 
 
 Note 4. Sometimes only the adjective belonging to the antecedent is placed 
 after the relative. E. g. Aoyov; axovrov, oils o-ot 2 v c r u ^tl 's r\xoi tpi^uv, for 
 A'oyov i cLxovrov }u<rTv%i7; t ovs ffot 'axo (plguv, hear the melancholy news which I 
 have brought to thee. 
 
 § 1 52. The relative pronoun often stands for the demonstra- 
 tive pronoun, especially in the Epic language. E. g. JldrgoxXov 
 xXal(x){iSP ' o ydg yigag toil &av6rrm', let US mourn JPatrocluSy 
 for this (that is, to mourn) is honor to the dead. 
 
 So in the formula bg uev.... bg de, equivalent too uiv.... 
 5 di, (§ 142. 1.) 
 
 17 
 
194 syntax. [§§153-156. 
 
 So in the formula Kal og, for Kal ovrog. E. g. 7v« * og, «^u- 
 /Swaag psya, tlyuVgwoxti, and he, uttering a loud cry, jumps up. 
 So in the formula 7/(5' og, said he, used parenthetically. 
 
 Note 1. Frequently the relative is apparently put for the 
 demonstrative. E. g. (II. 10, 314, etseq.) l H» ds Tig iv Tgweoat, 
 
 doXtov, l±v i ur i deog vlog, og ga tote TqcooIp tc xal '.Exjogi jjlv- 
 
 -tor buitev, there was among the Trojans a certain Dolon, son 
 
 of Eumedes, that man, I say, spoke to the Trojans and 
 
 to Hector. 
 
 Note 2. This rule (§ 152) applies also to the relative ad- 
 verb & q . (§ 123. N. 1.) 
 
 § 153. The relative often stands for the interrogative rig, 
 but only in indirect interrogations. E. g. (l>gci~zi tw ravxX^gco 
 otitis iaii, he declares to the captain of the vessel who he is. 
 
 Note. °0(jnc is particularly used when the person, who is 
 asked, repeats the question before he answers it. E. g. (Aristoph. 
 Nub. 1496) "Ai&gwne, it noing ; ZTP. c> ii tioico ; Man, what 
 are you doing ? Str. What am I doing ? 
 
 § 154. Frequently the relative has the force of the con- 
 junction ha, in order that, that. E. g. ITgeo^slav 7isfi7tsiv 3 
 yiig iavz sgel, to send an embassy to say these things. 
 
 RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 
 
 § 153. The reciprocal pronoun regularly refers to the 
 subject of the proposition in which it stands, which subject is 
 either in the dual or plural. E.g. Toiavza ngog dXXqXovg 
 u/ogsvor, such things iccre they saying to one another. 
 
 Note. Sometimes aWfauv stands for ictvruv. E. g. An(pB-uau.> aXXvXovs, 
 they destroyed themselves, that is, each destroyed himself. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 § 15G. 1. The subject of a proposition is that of which 
 any thing is affirmed. The predicate is that which is affirmed 
 of the subject. E. g. *AXxf3iudr)g sIjisv, Alcibiades said, where 
 'MMifkaiqg is the subject of the proposition, and univ, the 
 predicate. 3 VJ/w utoXiwc hui, I am timid, where iyco is the sub- 
 ject, and lliioXuog etui, the predicate. 
 
 2. The subject is either grammatical or logical. 
 
§ 157.] 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 195 
 
 The grammatical subject is either a substantive or some 
 word standing for a substantive. 
 
 The logical subject consists of the grammatical subject with 
 the words connected with it. E. g. in the proposition \-Ly.ovauq 
 TuiTu 6 Kioog inti&ero, Cyrus, hearing these things, was 
 persuaded, Kioog is the grammatical, and cc/.oiui:g nxvia 6 
 Kvqos, the logical subject. 
 
 § 157. 1. The subject of a fixite verb 
 
 is put in the nominative. 
 
 A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative 
 in number and person. E. g. 
 
 jL/co ).8'/o), I say. 
 
 Si Is/tig, Thou sayest. 
 
 Hxstrog ).i y s i, He says. 
 
 2. The nominative of the neuter plural very often takes the 
 verb in the singular. E. g. 
 
 Tit a t out £ v u a t « a y »*&£*% a h The armies are fighting. 
 
 Tu i t a i y ipkx o, Th se th ings h appened. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes masculines and feminines dual or plural take the verb in 
 the singular. E. g. £a.r$a* xofActi K*r*vn*oB-tv upov;, her auburn hair 
 was JI >ui>ig over her shoulders. 'HpTv olx, ttrrt kolov \k <poop.t}o$ Sovku 
 vaoapptTrouvn r s7; B-'&uiw;, we do ?wt exhibit two slaves throwitig nuts 
 out of a basket to the spectators. 
 
 So in the phrase "Rerrtv oi, (§ 150. 5,) there are who. 
 
 3. If the verb belongs to more than one subject, it is put 
 he plural and in the chief person. The chief person is 
 
 the first with respect to the second* or third, and the second 
 with respect to the third. E. g. 
 
 Tot? u r t T locovt o Iloasiddca v xal A tt 6 1 ). o v rel/og ccuaX- 
 dvraij Then Neptune and Apollo resolved to demolish the 
 icall. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently the verb agrees in number with one of 
 the substantives, and especially with that which stands nearest 
 to it. E. g. ^iv <5 J Evoog Tt IXoTog t zttsos, Zeqvoog ts dvoarjc, 
 xfti Boqbhsj Eurus and Notus rushed together, the blustering 
 Z:phyrus and Boreas. 
 
 Remark 1. The verb is often put in the dual, if it belongs 
 to two substantives in the singular. E. g. 7/ /.roono/zKr, v.cu tj 
 xi&aoKjTr/.i) tto/.v diucfEQZTor (O.h-'/.oiv, the art of making lyres, 
 and the art of playing on the harp, differ much from each other. 
 
196 SYNTAX. [§ 157. 
 
 Nora 3. When the substantives are connected by the con- 
 junction r h or, the verb is put either in the plural or in the 
 singular. E. g. Ei di x' A(*ff; uqxwui ut*%r t c t ij flwlftvg 'AtioX- 
 Xtor, but if Mars commence the jight, or Phoebus Apollo. c 'Ov 
 xsv 4/m uyuyu), ij aXXog 'A/uiwv, iclwm I or any other of the 
 Achccans may bring. 
 
 4. A collective noun in the singular very often has the verb 
 in the plural. E. g. 
 
 To nX7j&og oioviai, The multitude think. 
 *1> a auv r\ nXy&vg, The multitude spake. 
 
 This rule applies also to the pronominal adjectives tnuarog 
 and uXXog. E.g. "j^tsXXov $.a$ta&at oq/^oSjv txuoiog dixa 
 doa/utu-, each person ivas to have for his share ten drachma. 
 
 Note 4. A noun in the dual often takes a plural verb. 
 E. g. ~qo) ou waste, you two will save. 
 
 On the other hand, a noun in the plural takes a verb in the 
 dual, when only two persons or things are meant. E. g. 
 (II. 3, 278-9) OV rlwo d ov, you two who punish i where o* 
 refers to Pluto and Proserpine. 
 
 Note 5. The nominatives tyw, ro\, fjutfg, are of the first 
 person ; <ji', oqo), v^f/c, are of the second person ; all other 
 nominatives are of the third person. 
 
 The nominatives of the first and second person are usually 
 not expressed, except when emphasis is required. 
 
 Note (). The verb which agrees with the relative pronoun 
 is in the first or second person, according as the antecedent is 
 of the first or of the second person. E. g. 'y/jun- ov &veie, 
 al'itNc irjoovfifv vuug, you do not sacrifice to us, who pre- 
 term you. Apiiortf A tig, oc t/eig tip yr t v fitrt'otfjor, O thou 
 immeasurable Air! who /widest the earth suspended. 
 
 So when the antecedent is implied in a possessive pronoun 
 (§ 150. N. 7). E. g. ^AnirSoiu rjj f) p treyy, oittrig as ov 
 dilution per, through the cowardice of us, who did not save 
 thee. 
 
 Remark 2. Any noun which is in apposition with the omitted personal pro- 
 noun (§§ 196 157. N. 5) of the first person, mny have the veib in the first 
 person. E. g. GiiptrroKXri; rl x u <xaoa ai, I, Thcmistucles, have come to t/iee. 
 
 ri 7. Sometime! the verb agrees in number with the nominative in the 
 predicate § K>0. 1 ). This takes place chiefly when the nominative in the pred- 
 icate precede! the verb. E. g. 'Errov lut \o$ox i\ 'YbiuUn v-^riXui, equivalent 
 to * 'llofjiitri \trr\ ICo ?.o$u u^v'/.u, Jdomene is two hi^h hills. 
 
§ 158.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 197 
 
 Note 8. The third per son of a verb is often found without 
 a subject, 
 
 (1) When any thing general and indefinite is expressed. 
 E. g. Ovdi v.zv tv&a tiov ye fisrog y.cu yfiQug broixo, SC. rig, 
 even here no one would find fault with thy valor and strength. 
 yliyovGi or gsugl sc. txvfrg&noi, they say. 
 
 Frequently the word noaypa is to be supplied. E. g. ArjXa- 
 S-r^GSTat, the thing will show itself. Ouitog ejfz.i; it is so. lloX- 
 Xov del, it wants much, far from it. delist, d?) xdyu, the event 
 will soon show. 
 
 (2) When the verb indicates the employment of any person, 
 the word denoting that person is generally omitted. E. g. 
 *E y. i\ o v | e loh "L't.h}oi Tiaoaoxsi'uuao&ai, sc. o xtjoiJ the herald 
 proclaimed to the Greeks to prepare themselves. Tov vopov 
 v{iiv avtbv uvayrojasjaij sc. 6 ygajui^iaxevg, the secretary shall 
 read to you the laio itself 
 
 (3) Frequently the verb is changed into the third person 
 singular passive, and its subject-nominative into the dative 
 (§ 206 2). E. g. Tolg Tiolsfjiloig zvxv zr\xai, for Ol TioXifiioi 
 eiii'x^y.aui, the enemy have succeeded. Kalwg ooi anev.iy.q no, 
 for Kahvg aitEx£x%>txFO, thou hadst ansioered well. 
 
 (4) The subject of verbs denoting the state of the weather 
 or the operations of nature is not expressed. E. g.^Tei, it rains. 
 Klqst, it snows, "Hgslge, there ivas an ea?'thcpiake. JZvoxoxa&i, 
 it groics dark. 
 
 Note 9. Frequently the subject of a proposition becomes 
 the immediate object (^ 103. 1) of the verb of the preceding 
 proposition. E. g. &ioi vvv afrgyou tiqmtov xovxovi, o xl 
 do a, for rptgi vlv u&Qr-ooi, o tl dgii ovtogi, now let me see first 
 what this fellow here is doing. 
 
 Note 10. The verb ual, am, is very often omitted, but 
 chiefly when it is a copula (§ 1G0. 1). E. g. "jlea andvai, sc. 
 taxi, it is time to go. 
 
 Remark 3. Other verbs also may be omitted, but only when 
 they can be supplied from the context. 
 
 Note 11. The nominative is often used for the vocative. 
 E. g. fylXog, for 0lXsi friend. 
 
 § 15 8. 1. The subject of the infinitive 
 
 mood is put in the accusative. E. g. 
 
 Bovfoo&s avjov iX&tlv ; Do you wish him to come? Here 
 the accusative aixbv is the subject of the infinitive ik&elv. 
 Eivai &soi'g ivouigtv, He believed that there are gods. 
 &aolr aixbv /5 a a ikevsiv, They say that he reigns. 
 
 17* 
 
 ■ 
 
108 SYNTAX. [§ 158. 
 
 2. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed 
 when it is the same with the subject of the pre- 
 ceding proposition. E. g. ■ 
 
 Cii^uti n'o/jx£>«/, I think I have found. Here the sub- 
 ject (fU) of fVQjjxifMi is not expressed because it refers to 
 the subject (eyut) of ol^au. 
 
 Tvcflot yrMvcci doxu tovto, A blind man seems to ktww this. 
 
 3 JCtii U vuio u 7i o fi e o ,u ), q i <j u i, I tvish io doze. 
 
 Note I. Sometimes the accusative of the personal or reflexive pronoun is 
 expressed before the infinitive, contrary to the preceding rule i§ 158. 2), E. g. 
 *E/ks <pv/xt XiXccrpiw t/utvat ciXxns, I sai/ that I have forgotten my valor. 
 
 Note 2. The subject of the infinitive is frequently put in 
 the case of the subject of the preceding independent proposi- 
 tion. This takes place chiefly when both subjects refer to the 
 same person or thing. E. g. 
 
 JVo/z/Jf/c rjftag filp ixvi£ta&ai gov, civiog c5«. tv tit i] as IV; 
 
 Dost thou imagine that we shall tolerate thee, and that 
 
 thou canst strike? Here aviog stands for aavror. 
 Eps oieod-' Vfilv fiaolasit', v{is7q de vefuslo&ui; Do you 
 
 think that I shall contribute, but that you will enjoy the 
 
 contribution ? Here ifitlg stands for vpixg. 
 
 So y, JZ qp r t a & a Koovtawi ol'v koiyov u (.iv v a i t thou said st that 
 thou alone avertedst destruction from the son of Saturn. Here 
 oi'i] stands for 6\'av agreeing with oe understood. 
 
 Note 3. Frequently the subject of the infinitive is wanting 
 even when it is different from that of the preceding independ- 
 ent proposition. E. g. Ilr^ovmot xu^ititouui, nav/hiv uXyei- 
 vciiGiv, I am afflicted with sufferings painful to endure, where 
 the subject of nwr/siv (tivu understood) is different from that 
 of xufiTttofiau (See also § 219. N. 3.) 
 
 3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed 
 also when it is the same with the object of the pre- 
 ceding proposition. E. g. 
 
 'Eouto hvtwv ftoii&tlv ffioi, Tic prayed them to aid me. 
 Here the subject (uvrovg) is not expressed, because it re- 
 fers to the object {altmr) of idfho (§ 181). 
 
 IlttQrryyuUv r\n\v xaO evdsiv, He commanded us to sleep. 
 Here the subject (fjiuuc) of xn&tvdnv is omitted because it 
 is the same with the object (Jiuii) of nuojiyytdtv (§ 190 2). 
 
 "Avdpe dvw xiXevoptv akb]kcjv nsi^rjxr^vuij We request 
 
§§ 1^9, 160.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 199 
 
 two men to try each other's skill. In such instances the 
 accusative denoting the object of the verb (§ 1(53) must 
 not be mistaken for the subject of the infinitive. 
 
 Note 4. A participle agreeing with the omitted subject of 
 the infinitive is very often put in the accusative. E. g. 3 £yw 
 vpcov dcouai y. ut a yrjcplu u(j & a l OtofirvjUiov, ev&vfiovpi- 
 yovg, otl ovx ilv yivono tovtov ftfl^av uyoiv poi, I beseech you 
 to condemn Thcomncstus, when you consider that I could not 
 have had a severer trial than this, gtvlh tjxtip naoiyyeile, 
 iafiorja tov^ nrdgag, he requested Xenias to take the men and 
 come. (§158. 3.)" 
 
 Note 5. When the infinitive has the force of a neuter sub- 
 stantive (§§ 159. 2 : 221), its subject is frequently omitted, in 
 which ca^e the accusative of i\g or aviog is to be supplied. 
 E. g. /iyuv luvia -/oil, sc. tlvu, one must do these things. 
 
 § 159. 1. In general, any word or clause may be the 
 subject of a proposition. E. g. 
 
 <I>IAO {Uv f'uTiv uQxh ?ov xaxov, The word <1>IA0 indeed is the 
 beginning of the evil. 
 
 2. Particularly, the subject of a proposition may be an 
 infinitive with the words connected with it. E. g. 
 
 IToo/eigov e\jTi)' enaivdaat ii\v aQSTtjr, It is easy to praise 
 virtue. Here intuyitim rr t v uyeirjv is the subject of the 
 proposition. 
 
 Note 1. The subject of <5?7, doxel, erSe/noci, TToenei, nooorixei, 
 avuSalvsi, /ot], and some others, is generally an infinitive. 
 E.g. 
 
 A el Ijue It'/BiYy I must say, or It is necessary that I should 
 say. Here fpi liyuv is the subject of del. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs, of which the subject is an infinitive are called impersonal. 
 Such verbs must not be confounded with those, of \vhich the subjeet is not 
 expressed (§ 157. N. 8;. 
 
 3. The subject of an infinitive is frequently another infini- 
 tive with the words connected with it. E. g. Ou cpr^L XQr\- 
 voli tovq vtovg tip yldiuotxv doxelv, he says that young men 
 ought not to exercise the tongue, where rovg viovg xi]v yXwoctr 
 voxel* is the subject of XQn v(iL (§ WP- N. 1, 2). 
 
 § 160. 1. The predicate, like the subject (§ 156. 2), 
 is either grammatical or logical. 
 
SYNTAX. [§161. 
 
 The grammatical predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb 
 (commonly a verb signifying to be, to be called), and a sub- 
 stantive, adjective, pronoun, or participle. In the latter case, 
 the verb is called the copula. 
 
 The logical predicate consists of the grammatical predicate 
 with the words connected with it. E. g. l Hv KardavkrjQ iv- 
 gecrrog ^aydlcov, Candaules was king of Sardes, where rjv 
 tvQhrvoq is the grammatical, and i]v ivguivog Jtuodlwr, the logical 
 predicate. 
 
 2. A substantive in the predicate is put in the same case as 
 the subject when it refers to the same person or thing. (§ 136.) 
 E. g. 
 
 jB/oj etui nlovxog, I am Plutus. Here nlovrog agrees in 
 
 case with iym. 
 ~IIv Kavd airly g rvgavvog ^aodlcor, Candaules teas king 
 
 of Sardes. Here zvQavrog in the predicate agrees with 
 
 the subject Kavdavl^g in case. 
 
 3. The gender, number, and case of an adjective, standing 
 in the predicate, and referring to the subject, are determined 
 by § 137. E. g. 
 
 °£ y oj d&d v arog slpi, I am immortal. 
 
 BovXhj&s avjov ysria&ai ooyov; Do you wish him to be^ 
 come icise ? 
 
 Note 1. When the subject is any word but a nominative 
 (§ 159), the adjective or pronoun in the predicate is neuter 
 (commonly neuter singular). E. g. Ov dlnaiov eaxi xovg 
 xqiLttov; tmv r;norwv uqzelv, it is not right, that the stronger 
 should rule the weaker. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently a neuter adjective in the predicate 
 refers to a masculine or feminine noun. E. g. ^hIqIy.xksxov 
 yvir, iofi, woman is a very tendcr-hcai^ted thing. 
 
 In such cases, the word nquyuu. is sometimes expressed. 
 E. g. rvvaHxa (5' eivcu itqayki tyr] vovfivanxov, but 2C0- 
 man, he said, is a prudent thing. 
 
 §161. 1. When the subject of the infinitive is not ex- 
 pressed (§ 158. 2, 3), the substantive or adjective, standing in 
 the predicate and referring to the omitted subject, is put in the 
 case, in which the subject has already appeared. E. g. 
 
 'SIxqu tlvai doxuQ, Thou secmest to be pale. Here the ad- 
 jective is put in the nominative on account of ov with 
 which doxug agrees (§ 157. N. 5). 
 
§ 162.] 
 
 OBJECT. 
 
 201 
 
 Kvqov idiovTo kqo&v poxdxov ysvi&ai, They besought 
 
 Cyrus to be very eager, 
 /fiaxeltvooiuai toIq iovisiv tivai n qo&v fiox dxo ig , I icill 
 
 command those icho go to be very eager. 
 
 Note. This construction ($ 161. 1) may take place also when the infinitive 
 has the article before it (§ 221). E. g. 'O Al<r%v\os vdXtv Simiai* 0**0,0*1, 
 o*ta, to ffvvtros tJvctt, JEschylus returns home because he is wise. 
 
 It takes place also when the infinitive comes after the particle uvn (§ 220\ 
 
 Also when the infinitive depends on a participle (§219). E. g. Uokkot 
 
 reiJY <r o or* e i n <ra t u s v u v tTvai tr o<p i <r r a v, for TIiXXo) txiivcov ot T^oei- 
 
 xowuvto that o-otpto-rxij many of those who pretended to be sophists, (§ HO. 3.) 
 
 2. When a proposition is made the subject of another propo- 
 sition (§ 159. 2, 3), the substantive, adjective, or participle in 
 the predicate or subject of the former proposition is often put 
 in the case of the noun which is in the predicate of the latter. 
 E. g. 3 Ly>' i] u I v toxin to inittxiai xal qxxvlo ic s *r a i, for 
 To ffftag tnieiy.Hg xal qtuvlovg una toiai scp' i)uh', to be respecta- 
 ble or loortldess will depend upon us, where the proposition to 
 
 imuxiot sirai is the subject, and icp r}u"iv eoiui, the 
 
 predicate. 
 
 In such cases the predicate always precedes the subject. 
 Further, this takes place only when the attracting word in the 
 predicate is in the dative. 
 
 OBJECT. 
 
 § 162. 1. That on which an action is exerted, or to 
 which it refers, is called the object. 
 
 The object is put in the accusative, genitive, or dative. 
 
 2. Participles and verbal adjectives in tsov 
 (§ 132. 2) are followed by the same case as the 
 verb from which they are derived. 
 
 For examples, see below. 
 
 Note 1. The verbal in xenv with iati (expressed or under- 
 stood) represents del (§ 159. N. 1) and the infinitive active or 
 middle of the verb from which it is derived. E. g. 
 
 axovio, hear, axovorsov equivalent to du dxovsiv, one must hear. 
 
 ptfiiopm, imitate, ^tpr t xiov equivalent to du pipeHo&cu, one 
 must imitate. 
 
 In some instances it represents del, and the infinitive passive. 
 E. g. TjTTixoiica, am surpassed, r^xr^iov, one must be surpassed. 
 
202 syntax. [§§ 163, 164. 
 
 Note 2. The neuter plural of the verbal adjective in xsov 
 is often used instead of the singular. E. g. dxovoxia for 
 nxovorivr. 
 
 3. Any word or clause may be the object of a verb. E. g. 
 KvQog fxei'rio dtooa i'dwxs, Xnnov /ovao/dkirov, xcti oxoenxov %qv- 
 Goviy xe.l t r t r %w oav [i i] x sx i a (j tt a J s a & a i, Cyrus gave him 
 presents, a horse with a golden bridle, a golden necklace, 
 and that the country should no longer be plundered, where the 
 proposition xr t v %u>Qav [iijxhi dgnd&o&cu is one of the objects 
 of edcoxs. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 ^163. 1. The immediate object of a transitive 
 verb is put in the accusative. E. g. 
 
 Ta vxa noiw, I do these things. 
 
 Jlonjoag xavxu, Having done these things. (§ 162. 2.) 
 
 noii}xiov xana, One must do these things, (ibid.) 
 
 2. Many verbs, which are intransitive in English, are transi- 
 tive in Greek. E. g. ^A&avdxovg dlixioft ai,lo sin against 
 the immortals. 
 
 Verbs of this class are alixalvw, anodidodoxo), doovcpogect), 
 smooxtco, pfivvfii, (nixQontvw, Xav&dva), and many others. 
 
 § 104. The accusative of a substantive is often joined to 
 a verb of which it denotes the abstract idea. (§ 129.) In 
 this case the accusative is generally accompanied by an adjec- 
 tive. E. g. 
 
 JIsoelLV nxw[iax ovx dvccoxsxd, To fall an insupportable 
 
 -, f alL 
 
 'ilii av doo at] p ds lvov, They rushed furiously. 
 
 So in English, To die the death of the righteous. To run 
 a race . 
 
 Note I. A substantive is, in the poets, often joined to a verb signifying to 
 see, to look, (/3Xst&/, ^igxopeu, XsiW/w, ogueo,) to mark the expression of the look. 
 E. g. <& ofiov j3 X £ t eov, looking terrible. e H Bai/X»j i'jSXf^e vaTf, the 
 Senate looked ynnstard, that is, looked displeased. 
 
 Sometimes the substantive Vi^y^a, is to be supplied after these verbs. E. g. 
 K X i 5r r o v /3 X i 7f 1 1, he looks thievish. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs signifying to conquer (as vixdw) are often 
 followed by the accusative of a noun denoting the place or 
 
§ 165.] 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 203 
 
 nature of the conquest. E. g. Md^nv *«*$** to § a ™ a battle. 
 *OXv\inia vevixrjxwg, having conquered in the Olympic games. 
 The nouns following verbs of this description are chiefly 
 dycjv, yvwfAr), fia/i], vai\ua/la, noXepog. Also the names of the 
 public games, 'OXvpma, IJvdicc, N^usa, ^lo&fiia. 
 
 Sometimes an accusative denoting the name of the person 
 conquered is added. E. g. Mdjiadrjg 6 xi\v iv 31i*Q<y.dcon \x d- 
 %r\v jovg ftaQpdgovg vixrjoag, Miltiades who conquered the 
 barbarians at the battle of Marathon. 
 
 § 165. 1. Verbs signifying to ask, to teach, to take 
 away, to clothe, to unclothe, to do, to say, and some 
 others, are followed by two accusatives, the one of 
 a person, and the other of a thing. E. g. 
 
 Tavxd ps eQMTrtg, Thou aslccst me about these things. 
 Alxitv tov dij it ov yvXaxdg, To ask guards of the people* 
 Tov dijpov %Xa\voiv jjpTuo/ov, I clothed the people with 
 robes. 
 
 Verbs of this class are aliico, ptjini^^h ajuquivvvfii, avnyxd^a, 
 avadtw, umtntw, anooxtQioj, acputysoiuxi, didduxai, dgdcti, exXzyco, 
 ixdwb), erdmco, eStxigioiiai, e^einur, ££ct<*£<», eodco or Qt^w, iqyd- 
 £opai, loo^rti, igo)idw, xqvtttw, Xiyco, Tiuidsvo), ntl&o), mn'oxco, 
 noiiw, TTgdaaojictif areqparow, avXtua, and a few others. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the accusative of the thing denotes the abstract of the 
 Verb (§ 164^. E. g. 'O ^Puk/ko; toXi/lco; oLSt/uivvTov TCLiSsiacv ccurovg 
 i* ai^turivy the Phocian war taught them an ever memorable lesson. 'ILcov- 
 rov AwjSaraj Xuforiv a»?j kktt ov, he injures himself' incurably. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently verbs signifying to do, or to say, are 
 followed by an accusative and the adverb tv t well, or xaxwg, 
 badly. E. g. To vg ylXovg ev noiov a i, they do good to their 
 friends, where sv noiovai is equivalent to dyad a noiovat. A'«- 
 xcu>£ Xiyovoiv ol dyairol xovg xaxovg, the good speak 
 ill of the bad, where xoexcog Xsyovoc is equivalent to xaxot 
 Xeyovai. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the word denoting the person is put in the dative (§ 196. 
 4). E.g. HoXXa, xcix' civB-fw'ToKriv \ugyii, he did much evil to men, 
 M*j£sv uyxB-ov TotYnrxs t% toXsi, having done no good to the state. 
 
 Remark. 'Arotr-rs^ieo, and, in the later writers, a.{pa.t^iofjcai t are often followed 
 also by the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing. (§ 181 . 2.) 
 
 2. Verbs signifying to divide take two accusatives. E. g. 
 To GTydjevpa xutsv eipe dwdsxa pegrj, he divided the 
 army into twelve parts. 
 
204 syntax. [§§ 166, 167. 
 
 The preposition tig i s often found before the accusative 
 denoting the number of parts. E. g. ^ipiag avxovg eg c£ 
 poi ong d itlXor, they divided themselves into six parts. 
 
 Note 4. Sometimes the noun denoting the thing divided is put in the geni- 
 tive (§ 1 73 , and depends on the accusative denoting the parts. E g. i\ni\'o- 
 fi&a. rr d ; t tl u> X o<x on ky, ; *i'3)j %6 a, equivalent to A/iiko/aiS-cc, t>jv ii%a>\o~- 
 voujehv us t'/h) $uo, we divided the art oj 'making images into two parts. 
 
 § 106. Verbs signifying, to name or call, to choose, to 
 render or constitute, to esteem or consider, are followed by two 
 accusatives denoting the same person or thing. E. g. 
 
 2x QtxTrjyov avxbv an id si$er, He appointed him general. 
 
 Tor via v I Tine a i d i d a if a x o aya&6 v, He caused his son 
 to be brought up a good horseman. 
 
 Note !. In the passive such verbs become copulas (§ 160. 1). E. g. 
 '2*(>arr)'yi; a-TriSs/^S^, he ivas appointed general. 'O vlo; i^a^S-*) IxTtUf 
 ayccSo;, the sim u-as brought up a good horseman. (§ 206. 1.) 
 
 Note 2. Frequently the infinitive uvai is expressed before the second accu- 
 sative. E. g. jLtxpiarbv uvofjt.d.Z t f)vo-i rov ccv^ga. t'tvecs, they call him a 
 sophist ■> or rather, they say that he is a sophist. 
 
 So in the passive. 'Atj^^^ rr,$ 'irvou tlvai 'l-rfet^osj he was ap» 
 pointed master of the horse. 
 
 § 167. The accusative is very often used to 
 limit any word or expression. E. g. 
 
 Kqqiooc i]v ylvdog x6 y sro g, Crazsus was a Lydian by birth* 
 Here the accusative yivog limits or explains further the 
 meaning of Avdog. 
 
 Tavxa iptvdvixui, They lie in these things. 
 
 *H &ulaoon ovdsv yiyvtxau TtXtiwp, The sea does not become 
 larger, literally The sea becomes larger hi nothing. 
 
 The accusative thus used is called the synecdochical 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 Remark. The neuter accusative xl (from xlc) often means 
 for what ? why ? E. g. Tt xavxa fiarddvoo, for what am I 
 learning these things ? 
 
 Note 1 . Here belong most of the accusatives which commonly are said to 
 be used adverbudly { § 1 24) . 
 
 Note 2. Hither we may refer parenthetical phrases like 
 the following. To foyopivov, as the saying is. To xov c Opr\- 
 qov, as Homer has it, or according to Homer. Jlav xovvavtlov, 
 on the contrary. 
 
 
§168.] 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 205 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the preposition Kara or us is used before this accusative. 
 E. g. Ka§a£ov koc) Kara, ro o-upa xai Kara rnv yjsuxtv, pure in body 
 and in soul, Alva; a§avarr t <ri Ssiis i\$ una 'tiuxtv, slie astonishingly re- 
 sembles the immortal goddesses in looks. 
 
 Note 4. The accusative is sometimes subjoined to a clause 
 in order further to qualify the contents of it. E. g. Kal ps 
 -frrjTaveiv 7iixtt]Q &vt]T<xj nap' ardol, rwrd anoiv , yrayxaosv, and 
 the father compelled me to serve icith a mortal man as a recom- 
 pense for these. To) ncuds tw ow piXXsTov, ToXfiy pax* alaxioxa, 
 [iovofiaxslv, thy two sons are about to fight a duel, a most dis- 
 graceful act, where ToXfirjjuaTa qualifies tw nalde na aw {liXXnov 
 fiovofta/uv. Eyco d £v, amfj xtoipatiov dsixrvg rodl, n go (pa- 
 ct, v, tcpaoxov, and I, showing to her this garment here, as a 
 pretext said. 
 
 ^ 16 8. 1. A noun denoting duration of time 
 is put in the accusative. E. g. 
 
 Jixa !'t 7] xoip&viai, They sleep ten years. 
 
 Tovtov fiBja JZndXxovg tmvov zbv xqovov, During this 
 
 time I was feasting with Sitalces. 
 IIoXvv xqovov vfigixe, He has insulted a long time. 
 
 2. Frequently the accusative answers to the question when ? 
 E. g. * EvTttXaixtvoq xr\v S)qr\v inayivhiv oqpiai Tag aiyag, com- 
 manding (him) to bring the goats to them at the regular time. 
 
 Note 1. When the substantive is accompanied by an ordinal 
 number (§ 61), it denotes duration of time past. E. g. ' Ev va- 
 ry v r)[i£Qav ytyati7][iivr)v, married nine days ago, or having 
 been married nine days. 
 
 Also when it is accompanied by cardinal numbers. E. g. 
 "Og jiSvt]xs xavxa jgla err}, ivho lias been dead these three 
 years. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the accusative is equivalent to the 
 genitive absolute (§ 192), particularly the following neuter 
 accusatives : dedoyuivov, doxovv, do$av, from doxeco ' UQ7]}ievov 
 from c PESl • fifoV from e$»im * ov from ufd ' naqixov from na- 
 qix^ ' TiQooijxov from ngooijxa ' tvxov from tvyxdrco ' and a few 
 others. E. g. 
 
 E$ov aviolg anodovoiv c EXhyv dnrjXdx^ at twv nagovTiov 
 xaxwv, Although it was in their power to give up Helen, 
 and be delivered from the impending danger. The con- 
 struction of the clause *E$bv avxolg xaxwv, in the 
 
 indicative would be "e&otiv avrolg xaxcov, (§ 159. 
 
 2, N. 1, 2.) 
 
 18 
 
206 syntax. [§§169-172. 
 
 Note 3. Frequently, for the sake of emphasis, a preposition (chiefly \<rt) is 
 placed before this accusative. E.g. 'Ecr/ hx.ru tea) i1*,o<rt ina n^xov rns 
 'Affltit ot 2*y.$au, the Scyt/iia7is ruled Asia for eight and twenty years* 
 
 § 169. The accusative is used to denote ex- 
 tent OF SPACE. E. g. 
 
 At iaxov dXXrjXcov TQidxovra oxd d la , They were thirty 
 
 stadia from each other. 
 2t ad I ovg ds nsvr s y.al reooaQaxovTa diaxof.uor*VTsg ani- 
 
 kovto eg to Igor, And carrying (her) forty-jive stadia they 
 
 arrived at the temple. 
 
 § 170. Sometimes the accusative answers to the question 
 
 WHITHER ? E. g. 
 
 Ai'yXr) 7i a {lip av 6 wo a di* aifrtgog ovqctvbv ixev, The bright 
 
 effulgence went to heaven through ether. 
 'AyXadg tfiag Oypag, Thou earnest to illustrious Thebes. 
 
 § 171. The accusative follows the particles of protesta- 
 tion [id and vr\. E. g. 
 
 Mot ttjv * Avunvor\v, pa to Xdog, fid tov 'a£qv., By Breathy by 
 
 Chaos, by Air. 
 Ni] tov no as id a cpiXwos, By Neptune I love thee. 
 
 Notk 1. Ma is used only in negative, and vr, only in affirmative, propositions. 
 But when vai, yes, certainly ; is placed before /u.cc, the proposition is affirmative. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes pd is omitted. E.g. 01, r'ovV "OXupyrov, no, by 
 this Heaven. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the name of the god sworn by is omitted after these 
 particles, in which case the article of the omitted name is always expressed. 
 E. g. Ma tov — \yoi (Av ov^' a.v WtSopw, by — I should not believe it, 
 
 ^ 172. The accusative is put after the following 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 y Aficpl, about, around. 3 Afxcpl dslXrjv, about evening. J Afi(p 3 
 avxov , around him. So in connection with numerals. z A{iep\ 
 in eKxaldexa iT7] ysr6 t un>oc, being about sixteen years old. 
 
 3 Avd, on, in, through, throughout, during. *Avd tov noXtfAov, 
 during the war, throughout the war. 3 Avd gtqv.tov , in the 
 army. * Avu nvqiv.ijv, on a tamarisk. 
 
 With numerals it means at the rate of, a-piece. * Avd tisvts 
 naqaodyyag t?Jc rj/usQag, at the rate of [five parasangs a day. 
 
 Aid, through, on account of, in. "A vvv ogpa/w did oi, which 
 I now owe on your account. Aid vvy.za, in the night. 
 
 Elg, to, into. Eig KiXixlav , to Cilicia. 
 
§ 173.] GENITIVE. 207 
 
 With numerals it generally means about. Elg xnga- 
 
 xioxillovg , about four thousand men. 
 
 Frequently slg is found before a genitive, the noun, to 
 
 which it properly belongs, being omitted. Elg naidoTgl- 
 
 (3ov, sc. oiy.ov, to the teacher's house. 
 *Enl, upon, against. 3 EtiI &qovov, upon a throne. 3 En 
 
 auioj', against him. 
 Kara, according to, in relation to, in, on, near, during. Kctxa 
 
 xov " O {iriQovy according to Homer. Kara to awfia, in re- 
 lation to the body. Kara xov nokspov, during the war. 
 Msxd, after. Mexd de xavxa, and after these things. 
 Ilagd, to, besides, along, contrary to, on account of. Ilaqd 
 
 Kapffvosa, to Cambyses. flag a xavxa, besides these. 
 After comparatives it means than. Tsvolax* dv xal nag a. 
 
 xr\v hwvxMv cpvoLv dpuvovsg, they might become superior to 
 
 their nature. 
 IJsgl, synonymous with dficpl. 
 IIqoq, to, in respect to, towards. Ilgbg ndvxag, to all men. 
 
 Kalbg ngbg dgofiov, good in running, or a good racer. 
 c Tti8q, over, beyond, against. c Ttt£q xovg aXXovg, over the 
 
 others* 
 c Tn6, under, at. c Tti6 yr\v, under the earth. c Tnb "ikiov, 
 
 under Ilion. 
 c Slg, synonymous with elg. It is always placed before nouns 
 
 denoting intelligent objects. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 § 173. A substantive which limits the mean- 
 ing of another substantive, denoting a different 
 person or thing, is put in the genitive. E. g. 
 
 To xs\usvog xov & eqv , The temple of the god. 
 
 To v c In 7i a q xov &dvaxov , The death of Hipparchus. 
 
 2xv&cov ftaailelg, Kings of the Scythians. 
 
 This rule applies also to the personal, reflexive, and recipro- 
 cal pronouns, and to the indefinite pronoun dslva. 
 
 The genitive thus used has been called the adnominal 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 Note 1. The adnominal genitive denotes various relations, 
 the most common of which are those of possession, quality, 
 subject, object, material, source, a whole, component parts. 
 
203 syntax. [§§ 174, 175. 
 
 Note 2. The adnominal genitive is called subjective when 
 it is equivalent to the subject-nominative (§ 157. 1). It is 
 called objective when it denotes the object of an action (§ 162. 
 1). E. g. *'Egyov 'llcpcti arov , the work of Vulcan, that which 
 Vulcan did, where the genitive is used subjectively. c // dxgo- 
 a o i s t to v IsyovTMv, the act of hearing the speakers, where 
 the genitive is used objectively. 
 
 Note 3. A substantive is sometimes followed by two geni- 
 tives denoting different relations. E. g. 7'jJv nilonoq and- 
 oi]i IJeXoTiovvijaov y.ajdXenpLi' x the taking of the whole of 
 Peloponnesus by Pelops. 
 
 § 174:. Possessive pronouns and adjectives implying 
 possession, are frequently followed by a genitive, which is in 
 apposition with the genitive implied in the possessive pronoun 
 or adjective (§§ 67: 131. 1). E. g. 
 
 Tov ifibv avjov tov t al a i tico qov $Lov, The life of me, 
 a miserable man. Here avion tov xaXainagov is in appo- 
 sition with ifjiov implied in ipbv. 
 
 Togyzir\v xsqxxXrjv, d etvolo tisXojqov, The head of Gor go, 
 a terrible monster. Here rogyui]v is equivalent to the 
 genitive rogyovg with which ndawov is in apposition. 
 
 Note. Under this head belong the adjectives 1ho$, hoop, xoivo;, olxuos. E. g. 
 To7$ clvt eo v Idiots vrgoffixetv tov vovv, to attend to their private affairs. 'Itgog 
 yuo ovto; ruv xara x^ ov ^ & tuv, for he is consecrated to the infernal deities. 
 "JLpyov xotvov Aaxi^atjAovi wv ts xai *A9-*ivaict>v, a work performed by 
 the Lacedcemonians and Athenians in common. "A olxtTa ruv xaXaJg )3«-> 
 tfiXivovTuv i<rrt } which belong to those who rule well, 
 
 § 175. The genitive is put after vepbs signify- 
 ing to be, to belong, to denote the person or thing 
 to which any thing in any way belongs. E. g. 
 
 c O noug Aaxedatfiovlcav iorl, The boy belongs to the 
 
 Lacedaemonians. 
 *Avolag earl to &r)goca&ai, xsva, It is characteristic of folly 
 
 to be in pursuit of vain things. 
 Elvdl ixuJv TgiaxovTUy To be thirty years old. 
 
 Verbs of this class are ylyvo^ai, up.l % xvgia, niyvxa and lyw 
 from apvoa. 
 
 Note 1. This genitive is often preceded by the preposition vrgos. E. g. 
 Ai%tou irfof avisos \ttTL, it is the characteristic of a man of parts. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently the genitive after these verbs denotes 
 the person or thing from which any thing proceeds. E. g. 
 dageiov xal IJotovaotTidog yiyvovjat, naldeg dvo, of Da- 
 
§§ 176, 177.] genitive. 209 
 
 rius and Parysdtis two children were born, or Darius and 
 Parysdtis had two sons. Ovrjrov nsyvxag ncngog, thou 
 art the offspring of a mortal father. 
 
 Sometimes the genitive, in such instances, is preceded by &. 
 E. g. nougbq in tosvtov ytyag, being bom of the same father. 
 
 Note 3. Frequently the adjective us or the pronoun t)s is to be supplied 
 before this genitive (§175). E. g. Tourwv yttov, become one of these. 
 
 § 176. The neuter of the article followed by a substantive 
 in the genitive denotes something to which that substantive is 
 related. E. g. 
 
 Au <$iguv t« twv &£wv, We must bear what comes from 
 the gods. 
 
 To tov c O fii} gov, That which Homer says. 
 
 Note. This idiom gives rise to phrases like the following: 
 Tec rijg oo/jje, for c II ogyrj, anger, wrath. Toe rrjg ipnsiglag, for 
 C II iunugla, experience. Ta tojv OsttccXwv, for Ol OsiTctkol, the 
 Thessalians. To toov im&vfiicov, for At em&vplou, desires. 
 
 ^ 177. 1. Adjectives, pronouns, and ad- 
 verbs, denoting a part, are followed by a genitive 
 denoting the whole. E. g. 
 
 c £xaojw toov n oXeoov, Each of the states. 
 
 Ovdeig toov psigaxloov, No one of the young men. 
 
 II ov ytjg ; Where on earth ? 
 
 c O yfAiavg tov dgi&iAov, Half the number. 
 
 Tr]v 7ilsl<jTt]v Tjjg oTgaTiag, The greatest part of the 
 army. 
 
 Trjg (nagllrjg ovxvqv, A good deal of coal-dust. 
 
 This rule applies to the genitive after numerals (§§ 60 : 61 : 
 62. 4), after interrogative, indefinite, demonstrative, and relative 
 words (§§ 68-71 : 73 : 123), after superlatives, and in general, 
 after any adjective or adverb designating a part. 
 
 Note 1. A participle preceded by the article is often fol- 
 lowed by the genitive. (§ 140. 3.) E. g. Ol xaTctcpvyovTsg 
 ctvToov, equivalent to *Exuvot, ccvtqov ot xuTicpvyov, such of 
 them as escaped. 
 
 Sometimes ix is used in such cases. E. g. *Ex toov civd-goo* 
 ncov Tolg tv ngctTTovoi, to the prospering part of mankind. 
 
 Note 2. The nature of the noun denoting the whole determines the number, 
 in which the genitive is put. 
 
 18» 
 
210 SYNTAX. [§ 178. 
 
 Note S. The adjectives 'ha.ifjt.ovias, £?<>?, raXxgy r^iTX/ay, and a few others, are 
 often followed by the genitive plural. E. g. A7a yuvatxatv, divine woman. 
 Ta.Xa.ivx vag&iva>>, unfortunate virgin. S^e'rX/' av^<vv, unfortunate 
 man. 
 
 It is supposed by many that the idea of superlative ness lies in these adjectives. 
 
 2. Frequently the genitive denoting a whole depends on a 
 neuter adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun. E. g. 
 Ms gov i) psoas, The middle part of the day. 
 Trjg oTQUTiijg to nollov, The greater part of the army. 
 To xsxoauusvov twv /?« o/3« o w *-, The defeated part of 
 
 the barbarians. 
 Elg to via avdyy.i)Q y To this degree of necessity. 
 
 Note 4. In some instances the neuter plural is used before this genitive 
 (§ 177. 2> E. g."A<rn/xu (lovs, for "Affypov pons, indistinct noise. 
 
 Note 5. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun often follows 
 an adjective of the superlative degree; in which case the 
 highest degree, to which a person or thing attains, is expressed. 
 E. g/'Ois dsivozcu o g a a v x o v tuvtix rjo&a, when your skill in 
 these matters was highest. Tjj sv qvtcct rj iajl aiTi) swvijjg, 
 where it is widest. 
 
 ^ 17 8. 1. The genitive maybe put after any 
 verb, when the action does not refer to the whole 
 object, but to a part only. E. g. 
 
 n sun si twv Avdwv, He sends some of the Lydians. But 
 
 JltuTisi xovg Avdovg, He sends the Lydians. 
 Twv xgsujv sy.lsTzxovy I stole some pieces of the meat. 
 AupGvz a tcuv tcclvicov, Taking some of the fillets. 
 
 2. Particularly, the genitive is put after verbs 
 signifying to partake, to enjoy, to obtain, to inherit. 
 E.g. 
 
 Msts/g) &odusog, I partake of courage. 
 
 Tijg dvvdfiscjg xoivcjvoiu i, They partake of the power. 
 
 Verbs of this class are arnuo), anolavto, aiyxirt, tnavoloxo- 
 uca, yj.qoovouiw, xoiviurtb), y.i'ptoi, lay/uro), us\u).rr//ui w, usiaXau- 
 ftdvoj, nixiyb), orlvautu, ovvct'iQouui, ivy/urcj, and some others. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes fit/to;, party is found after ^'TaXay^avw and fjt.tri%a>. 
 E. g. Mt§i%iiv raQou ptgofy about to partake of burial. 
 
 "Miri^u is also found with the accusative in which one participates. E. g. 
 MiTir^i? rag 1oa.i *\nya,s ipoi, thou didst receive the same number of 
 strips with me. 
 
§ 179.] GENITIVE. 211 
 
 'AcraXaJa/, Xay%dvu, and rvy^dvoj are often followed by the accusative. 
 E.g. 'Azrokctunv r t y to enjoy any thing. 'AyKwva ru^u*, hitting the 
 elbow. 
 
 K\ngovojuia>, inherit^ in some instances takes the accusative of the thing in- 
 herited. The name of the person of whom one inherits is put in the genitive, 
 and depends on the thing inherited. E.g. K A ng ov ofttlv r a, x. r v\ p. a. r a 
 rtvost to inherit the possessions of any one. Later authors put even the name 
 of the person in the accusative. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive in connection with [aitsoti and ttqoo- 
 i\ku depends on the subject (expressed or understood) of these 
 verbs. E. g.'Slvfirjdsv [is yog Toig novrjgolg fi8TSOTt,in which 
 the wicked do not participate. Ovv. ojtio ngoorjy.siv oidevl 
 vQXVSy h e thought that no person ought to rule. 
 
 Note 3. The preposition Ig or Ik is sometimes used before this genitive 
 (§ 178. 1). E. g. Aa|5«» fx t«> «^i1wv, taking some (or one) of the 
 shields. 
 
 ^ 179. 1. Verbs signifying to take hold of, to 
 touch, to feel, to hear, to taste, to smell, are followed 
 by the genitive. E. g. 
 
 Aafito &e tovtov, Take hold of this man. 
 "ATiTSGxrai avTOjv, To touch them. 
 
 T tv o a i Ti]g &voag, Knock at the door, literally Taste of 
 the door. 
 
 Verbs of this class are aio&dvofiai, dioi, axovoi, ay.oouoiJ.aL, 
 amoral, yevouai, dgaooo^ai, £%o[iai, -friyyavco, xlvw, lajj^urofxai, 
 o£w, oocfoaivo^iaty nuqaooai, nvv&uvofuai, yjavco, and some 
 others. 
 
 2. Verbs signifying to take hold of are frequently followed 
 by the accusative of the object taken hold of, and the genitive 
 of the part by which it is taken. ^.g.'Eldfiovjo rjjg £covr}g 
 ■tbv 'OgovTTjv, they took Orontes by the girdle. 
 
 . Note I. 'Axovw and its synonymes, and §iyya.\a) and ij,xua>, are frequently 
 followed by the accusative. E. g. 'A*<»y<ra$ raura, hearing these things. 
 
 ^ Note 2. Frequently clkouoo and its synonymes take that which is heard in the 
 accusative, and that from which the thing heard proceeds, in the genitive. E. g. 
 Tov civ^^cc TuvSdvou rav o$ ot <r o guv, inquire of the travellers about the 
 man. 
 
 Note 3. Viva, cause to taste, is followed by the accusative of the person, 
 and the genitive of the thing. E. g. Yivuv avrov rivos, to make him 
 taste of any thing. 
 
 Frequently this verb is followed by two accusatives. E. g. Tivitcj a 
 fAtS-u, I will give thee wine to taste. 
 
 
212 SYNTAX. [§§180,181. 
 
 § ISO. 1. Verbs denoting to let go, to cease, 
 to desist, to free, to miss, to separate, to escape, are 
 followed by the genitive. E. g. 
 
 Tovzov ps&lsG&ai, To let this man go. 
 
 *Ayot{ie[iviov Xr\y %qi8og, Agamemnon left off hi [s wr at A 
 
 Jiioxov aXXqXwv, They separated from each other. 
 
 Verbs of this class are aXvoxca, dpctQidrw, dimXoty.loxto, dns- 
 %o[ioti, anoXunofxai, anoGTaTsw, (xq>Ufj.-(xi, dis/co, ti'xo) retreat, &- 
 qievyto, iXXslnm, h]y(o, [isd-irjfu commonly [is&lsfiai, jus&loia^ai, 
 naoaxoooho, ovyxwgsw, cpsvyco, /coqso), and some others. 
 
 2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
 tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. 
 E.g. 
 
 II a vco as tovtov , J make thee cease from this. 
 
 Tr\v *Aolt}v 8 lovqI^wv ttJq Ai$vi]q y Separating Asia 
 from Libya* 
 
 Such verbs are dfivva, anaXXdoaw, anixa, dajloT^^i, 8ioqI£w, 
 el'oyoi), iXsv&eQow, sqtjtvq), xct&algco, xooXvco, Xvco, navw, and some 
 others. 
 
 Note. The genitive in connection with verbs signifying to free, to cease, 
 sometimes depends on the preposition ix or ux'o. E. g. H.av<r<iv ix xaxuv 
 ift's, deliver me from evil, 
 
 § 181. 1. Verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, 
 implying fulness, emptiness, bereavement, are fol- 
 lowed by the genitive. E. g. 
 
 Ilsvlctg f) noXig i'yefisv, The city zoas full of poverty. 
 Ksvojv 8o£ao (juHtwv nXrioziq, Full of vain notions. 
 Twv Ts&vyxoTcov dXig, Enough of dead persons. 
 
 Words of this class are &8r\v, dXig, d^irixnvia, dnoQeo), drog, 
 acpvEiog, (jqidw, yifuo, 8e(o and 8so[uu, sniSbijg, tQtjfiog, xa&ciQog, 
 xsvog, fisoiog, nsv^g, nivoficu, nXswg, nXrj&b), 7iXi^Qr]g, nXovatog, 
 onaviQw, XQy&> an< ^ some others. 
 
 2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
 tive of the immediate, and the genitive of the remote, object. 
 E.g. 
 
 ndqiv voocpislg (ILov , Thou wilt deprive Paris of life. 
 
 Such verbs are dnoottQia, igrifioo), xsvoto, xogivvvfit, [tovotn, 
 voocpl&t nl^nXri^L, 7zXr}(>6b), and some others. 
 
§$ 182, 183.] GENITIVE. 213 
 
 Note 1. zlsl and xQn are followed by the accusative of a 
 person and the genitive of a thing. E. g. Avtov as d si 
 IlQO[*7}&s(og, thou thyself needest a Prometheus. Teo as 
 %Qr}> what wantcst thou? 
 
 Note 2. Asl sometimes takes the dative of the person and 
 the genitive of the thing. E. g. A slvwv vol ftovlsvfiaTtov 
 tows dslv nQog avTov, it seems that thou must employ profound 
 reasoning against him. 
 
 § 182. Verbs signifying to remember, to for- 
 get, to admire, to contemn, to desire, to care for, 
 to spare, to neglect, to consider, to understand, are 
 followed by the genitive. E. g. 
 
 Ms [iv yes 6 jiov, Remember me. 
 "jyaaxrai rrjg d^sTrjg, To admire virtue. 
 MsydXav inL&v^islg, Thou desirest great things. 
 
 Verbs of this class are uyct^xai, aXsyL'Qw, avTinoisopai, yXfyoficu, 
 eldivouy f'find^ofxoiL, iv&vfisoiJ.ai, t im&vpsco, iniaTafjicd, squ^icu,, egd(o, 
 icpls^xai, &av[iaQ(Ai f I^lslqm, xarayslaco, xctTayQOvso), Tti^dofj-cxt, kav~ 
 3-cxvofiai, W>uLo{xaiy ^i^r^axo^ctL, tivrnxovsvw, oliycoptto, ogsyo^oct, 
 owLi][ii } vnsQOQuoay (psldofxcu, qpoovi/Jw, and some others. 
 
 Note 1. Most verbs of this class often take the accusative instead of the 
 genitive. E. g. <&£ovrigovrcts rk roiaura, caring about such things. 
 
 Note 2. 'Mi/xvr,<rxu and XnS-avu or XySu, and their compounds, are followed 
 by the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. "T«rs- 
 pvyeriv rt i tt a. r ^'o g , and he reminded him of his father. 'Ex ¥t f&& vrav- 
 tcov X >? 3- a v « / , and makes me forget all things. 
 
 Sometimes ptpvyuntu is followed by two accusatives. E. g. 01 y TfLyi<r<rouoi 
 %vft/uci%ta,v a. v af&iftvqtr xovrts 'AB-fjvetious 9 the Egestians reminding 
 the Athenians of their alliance. 
 
 Note 3. MsXs/, it is a care, it is a concern, is generally followed by the 
 dative of the person, and the genitive of the thing. E. g. MiXs/ cot rovrov, 
 thou carestfor this. (§ 157. N. 8.) 
 
 Note 4. The genitive in connection with some of these verbs sometimes de- 
 pends on a preposition. E. g. TI 0.40*0$ trig* rod ipov /xh p,vn<r3-9Jrt 
 trt, as to my son, make no more mention of him. H s^i ruv iv Alyv7rru xa.) 
 lv ^ixiXia. MvaoSou Qgovriguv, to be able to take care of the affairs of Egypt 
 and Sicily. 
 
 ^183. 1. Verbs signifying to accuse, to prose- 
 cute, to convict, are followed by the accusative de- 
 noting the person accused, and the genitive denot- 
 ing the crime. E. g. 
 
214 SYNTAX. [§ 1S4. 
 
 J i w$o u in' as d f ill u c , i" Witt prosecute you for cowardice. 
 Kit toy a diootor lloPttg, Convicting Clcon of bribery. 
 
 Verbs of this class are algtto, atntiofim, diy.a£w, diuxta, Hodyia, 
 
 i;e.i. 
 
 Remark 1. <&suyw, a ?n accused, and aXwva/, to be convicted, are followed 
 only by the genitive. E. g. 'AVf£f/«; ^£i;'y«vT«, accused of impiety, 
 'Eav Ti? aXa) x^cr?;, if any one shall be convicted of theft. 
 
 Atrtdoftat, accuse, is sometimes followed by taw accusatives. 
 
 2. Verbs of this class compounded with the 
 preposition xaid are followed by the genitive of 
 the person and the accusative denoting the crime 
 or punishment. E. g. 
 
 Stavxov y.ctTadixd£eig ddvaxov , Thou condemnest thy- 
 self to death. 
 
 Such verbs are xiijayiyrdaxm, xatadix(i£w t xtxtaxQivm, yuTw/u- 
 poiO >'£&>, y.t/.Titujt-vdoiuti, y.t/.Taipr l qiZouai, y.aizytiv, xuti^/oquo. 
 
 Remark 2. The accusative is often wanting after these verbs (§ 183. 2). 
 E.g. YLctr r,yo(>i7 v ctbrov, to accuse hint. 
 
 Note 1. YLaryiynoico is sometimes followed by two genitives. E. g. Ila^a- 
 vr%i<r(hiius a v rod tcarr, yogitv, to indict him for unfaithfully discharging 
 his duties as ambassador. 
 
 Note 2. The noun denoting the punishment is sometimes put m the genitive. 
 In classical Greek, however, only S-a.va.rou is found in connection with verbs of 
 this sort. E. g. Qa.va.Tov vTayayuv MiXiriulia, Wiojki, he accused Mililia- 
 des capitally. 
 
 Note 3. "EvoyoQ, under sentence, guilty, which generally is 
 followed by the dative (§ 196. 1), sometimes takes the genitive. 
 
 c Tntvdvioq } guilty, is followed by the genitive denoting the 
 crime. 
 
 ^ 184. 1. Verbs signifying to begin, to rule, 
 to surpass, are followed by the genitive. E. g. 
 
 "AQfi ft ay. v e , Begin thefght. 
 
 2n a u Tr t q a r a uawv, Ruling Sparta. 
 
 II (a vztov dLUTiqineig, Thou surpasscst all men. 
 
 Verbs of this class are druuao), (Iqiotivg), uq'/m, (juoilsvw, de- 
 ono'sM, dianoino), diaqtoo) excel, imarartfo, xuXhottCofiou, xgalvco, 
 
 XOIQUVIO), VplXTtO), TUrOiyiyrOLHfJ., TTFOIfljUL, 7TQO?X<0, 7lQoi'OTCtf.lCtl, 
 
 or^Ltdvb), oTQUTtj-yeo), tvquviivoj, vrnofnula), vjitotyo), and soma 
 others. 
 
§§ 1S5, 186.] 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 215 
 
 Note 1. Those derived from substantives or adjectives may be said to take 
 the genitive in consequence of the noun implied in them. E. g. Tajv xa$' 
 lavTov; a. v 3 £ u> vr u v a. gitr r i u <r u v r i ; is equivalent to 07 cLokttoi tuv xaS- 
 lav-rob; uvS-o&jT&tv y,a-<iv, having surpassed the men of tlieir limes, (§ 177.) 
 
 Note. 2. Some verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the dative or 
 accusative. E. g. KiXtn z re a,\>^oi<r<riv avu.ffiruv, ruling over the 
 Cilicians. 
 
 Note 3. 'Avci<r<r& is, in Homer, sometimes followed by the preposition p,i<reL 
 with the dative. E. g. (II. 1, 252.) 
 
 2. Causative verbs of this class are followed by the accusa- 
 tive and genitive. E. g. Nix a p s r t dgeri] tt,q t/d-gag, his 
 valor affects me more than his enmity. (§ 205. 2.) 
 
 Such verbs are vl'/mcj, ngoxaTayMra, ngoxglvcj, and some 
 others. 
 
 § 185. Many verbal adjectives which have 
 an active signification are followed by the genitive. 
 
 E.g. 
 
 Tg l(jaiv Itztzlx rj g , Skilled in horsemanship. 
 *Agxixbg a v & g cJ n o) v , Qualified to rule men. 
 
 Adjectives of this class are aypdg, uidoig, cut tog, annldsvTog, 
 I'dgig, Ivaavlug, jolfjiov. Also many adjectives in r t gieg, r/.og, as 
 tyxTrjowg, ug^ixog, (§§ 131. 1 : 129. 2.) Also, many adjective? 
 in r t g, og, {icov, as avrjxoog, adding, dar t uo)V, (§ 132. 4, 5.) 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes adjectives of this class are followed by the accusative, 
 provided the verbs, from which they are derived, take the accusative. E. g. 
 Tfl'ifi &tv tu. roiu^z, skilled in such things. 
 
 Note 2. Adjectives of this class, which are derived from verbs followed by 
 the genitive, are often said to take the genitive in consequence of the verb im- 
 plied in them. E. g. uvixoo; takes the genitive because xjcouu is followed by 
 the genitive (§ 179). 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the genitive or accusative, in connection with adjectives 
 of this class, depends on the preposition . <tioi. 
 
 ^186. 1. The genitive is put after adjectives 
 and abverbs of the comparative decree to de- 
 note that with which the comparison is made. E. g. 
 
 Kg s I it a v tovtov , Superior to this man. 
 
 Note 1. When the substantive which is compared is the 
 same as that with which it is compared, the latter is omit- 
 ted, provided it be limited by a genitive (§ 173). The 
 
216 SYNTAX. [§187. 
 
 ambiguity which may arise from ibis construction can be re- 
 moved only by considering the nature of the statement. E. g. 
 XtoQccy 1'x*ts ovdh ?)ttov yfAwv IV it/* or, for XwQctv c^ere 
 ovdiv i,jjor tigs x^Q u 9 y^wr tvTipov, you have a country not less 
 valuable than ours. 
 
 2. The genitive is put after some positive adjectives and 
 adverbs irnplying a comparison. E. g. 'Exigovg xwv vvv 
 or x cor, other than those icho note arc. 
 
 Adjectives of this class are aXXolog, aXXog, aXXoxoiog, dtvxsoog, 
 dioccfogog different, I'xegog, yptoXiog, Trsgixxog. Also numeral ad- 
 jectives in nXoog or nXaaiog (§62. 2). 
 
 Remark. Atxipogos and aWorpos are sometimes followed by the dative. 
 
 Note 2. 'Evavr/oj, which commonly is followed by the dative, sometimes 
 takes the genitive. The following example shows, that the idea of comparison 
 lies in this adjective : Tovvavriev S^&Jv, rt T^offn* aitrai toisTv, doiiig contrary 
 to what he ought to do, (Aristoph. Plut. 14.) 
 
 Note 3. Atct<pi^eo, differ, and its derivative $i&cp<oovrus, differently, are fol- 
 lowed by the genitive, because they imply a comparison. E.g. Anx.<pi^n 
 tt.vr,o tuv a. XXuv Z,u uv , man differs from the other animals. 
 
 Note 4. Sometimes this genitive depends on avr't or r^o. E. g. 'Mtigov' 
 uvr) rtjg avrou rdr^ag QiXov vo/u.i%ti, he loves another more than his own 
 country. Oltrtv h ru^avvts rr go iXtuB-igir)$ >jv acrcurrdrfgov, to whom 
 tyranny was more welcome than liberty. 
 
 Note 5. When the conjunction ?/, than t is introduced, the 
 word compared, and the noun with which it is compared, are 
 put in the same case. E. g. MiXXsig In avdqotg otqcxtsv£o&cu 
 aptly or ag ij J?xv&ag, thou art about to march against men 
 superior to the Scythians. Totg /StxaiXsvat xwv slaxsdoiifio- 
 vlcov udixslv rjxxov i&oxiv r t x olg Id iwxcci g, the kings of the 
 Lacedaemonians have less power to do harm than private indi- 
 viduals. 
 
 Note 6. Sometimes the nominative is used after »», the context determining 
 its verb. E. g. T«/V vtwrigois xc) [auXXov a,x/uccZ,ou<riv >j tycu, <xa.^ai\oj, 
 sc. a.Kfi.tt.Z > u i I advise tlie young who are more vigorous than I am. 'H^v 
 it (jci t v ov , ft ixi7vot, to ftiXXov •xgoogcofjt.ivuv, sc. wgooguvrczt, we foreseeing the 
 future better tlian they. 
 
 ^187. 1. The genitive is often used to denote 
 that on account of which any thing takes place. 
 Kg. 
 
 ZrjXbJ oe xr\g ev povXing, I admire you for your wisdom. 
 Tf] vptTtpu noXu zrig yr\g xi)g vri Jlownlcov didouivng y&o- 
 
 vovov, They are jealous of your city, on account of the 
 
 land given to you by the Oropians. 
 
§ 188.] GENITIVE. 217 
 
 2. The genitive, with or without an interjection, is used in 
 exclamations. E. g. 3 Jl Uoastdov, xov pctxgovg, Neptune, what 
 a length ! Kal xig elds nconoxs fiovg xQifiavixctg / xwv ccla^o}- 
 vsv^dxcov, and who eve?" saw whole oxen roasted in the oven ? 
 what tough stories ! 
 
 3. The genitive after verbs signifying to entreat denotes 
 the person or thing, for the sake of which the person entreated 
 is to grant the request. E. g. My ps yovvwv yovvd^so, 
 psds x oarjcov, do not entreat me by my knees, nor by my 
 parents. Frequently the preposition vtisq, dvxi, or nqog, is 
 placed before this genitive. 
 
 4. Sometimes the genitive, in connection with a passive 
 form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. nlr^yslg 
 &vy axqbg xr\g i prig vtisq naga, being struck in the head by 
 my daughter. 
 
 5. Sometimes the genitive denotes the instrument of an ac- 
 tion. E.g. Jigrjoac nvQog drj'L'oio dvgsxga, to burn the gates 
 with burning fire. 
 
 § 18 8. 1. The genitive is used to denote that 
 in respect of which any thing is affirmed. E. g. 
 
 "Anaig i' q o s v o c yorov, Childless in respect to male off- 
 spring, in other words, Having no sons. 
 
 Alia vv xov ys &sol fildnxovoi x slsv&ov, But the gods now 
 injure him in respect to his way, that is, hinder him. 
 
 *Eovaav TJdrj dvdgog wgaLr}v y Being now of the right age to 
 be married. 
 
 2. The genitive is used to limit the meaning of the following 
 adverbs : aiyxb or ay%ov, avw, dl%a, iyyvg, exag, l&v or lSvs§ 
 IxTag, xaxomv, x/ixco, xgvya, h't&ga, nslag, nlrjolov, Ttoggoo, TtgoGCO, 
 xijlov, xrilo&sv, and some others. E. g. 3 Eyyvg xivog, near 
 any thing. 
 
 Note. "E%&> and %xu, limited by an adverb, are often followed by the 
 genitive. E. g. 'Hj ^X l r * X ° u s > as f ast as he could run. Ev #*£/v 
 Siov, to be well advanced in life. 
 
 3. The genitive is put after verbs denoting to take aim at, 
 to rush against, to throw at. E.g. 5 £uto;kJjto xov psi- 
 gav.lov, he was taking aim at the stripling. 3 0'L'ot sv o ov 
 Msv sldov, shoot an arrow at Meneldus. Avxolo xixvoxs- 
 xo, he took aim at him. 
 
 19 
 
•2 IS SYNTAX. [§^139-191. 
 
 ^ 189. The genitive is used after verbs and 
 adjectives to denote the material of which any 
 thing is made. E. g. 
 
 XaXxov noiiovxai oiydl^aia, Statues are made of brass. 
 c Pirov n o 1 7] x r\ v , Made of ox-hide. 
 
 Note. The prepositions \k, avro, are often used before the genitive. E. g. 
 EV/^ara uvea \v\uv <r&9roin/x,iva, garments made of cotton cloth, 
 
 ^ 190. 1. The noun denoting the price of any 
 thing is put in the genitive. E. g. 
 
 SI r £ o v x a i xdg yvvouxag naga xcov yovswv %gr] [idxav fisyd- 
 lav, They buy their wives of their parents for much 
 money. 
 
 Tcj v nop (ov nwXovoiv ^(/iv ndvxa xaydtf 61 &eol, The 
 gods sell to us every good thing for labor. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the thing bought is in the genitive, in which case the 
 verb of the proposition does not signify to buy or to sell. E. g. 'Arag ri x&s 
 «/3« fAi fjt-ira tov Tlcurictv ; Tgtts pvaT $t <p gi rx ou, Then iv/iat debt came upon 
 me next to Pasias's ? Three mince for a little carringe. 
 
 Note 2. The dative (§ 198) is sometimes used for this genitive. E.g. 
 Ohi^ovro, ctXXoi fjtXv %a,kxu, ccXXoi V al&wyt fft^ri^co, tlwy bought wine, 
 some for brass, others for bright iron. 
 
 2. "Ahoq, aU<oq y and cavtjxog are followed by the genitive. E. g. 
 ^Tiovdijg a£ia , deserving serious consideration. 
 
 Note 3. "A|/a? is sometimes followed by the dative (§ 196. 1), in which 
 case it means ft, proper, becoming. 
 
 Note 4. The verb «^ow, think worthy, is followed by the 
 accusative of a person, and the genitive of a thing. E. g. 
 *A$iovaiv avxbv psydXwv, they think him worthy of great 
 things. 
 
 ^191. 1. The genitive often answers to the 
 question when ? E. g. 
 
 Trj q vvxxog vifiovxai, They feed in the night. 
 
 2. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question how 
 long since? E.g. Holov xgovov nenog&Tjxat nohg ; how 
 long since the city has been taken? IJolXuv ixwv iv&dds 
 ovv. imdediifirixEv, he has not been at home for many years. 
 
 3. Sometimes the genitive answers to the question how 
 soon? E. g. Tgidxovxa tj(j.8Q(j)v UTio xuvxr\g xr\g fjpigag, 
 within thirty days from this day. 
 
§ 192.] GENITIVE. 219 
 
 Sometimes the adverb ivxog accompanies this genitive. E. g. 
 ^Evxog ov nollov xqovov , within a short time. 
 
 ^ 192. A substantive with a participle is very 
 often put in the genitive, to denote the time or 
 cause of, or any circumstance connected with, 
 an action. E. g. 
 
 Tavj sngdx&r], Kovwvog OTgarrj/ovvjo g , These things 
 
 were done when Conon teas general. Here the genitive 
 
 denotes the time when ravx* inqax&ri* 
 TekEVTrjoexvTog AlvdrTeco, eifsdt'lfaro tr]V jSctadrfi'rjv KqoI- 
 
 oog, After the death of Alyattes, Croesus received the king- 
 
 dom. 
 The genitive thus used is called the genitive absolute. 
 
 Remark 1 . Strictly speaking the genitive absolute is a modification of the 
 genitive of time (§ 191). 
 
 Note 1. In some instances the genitive of the participle uv is wanting. E. g. 
 T Hv ixpnynrajy, who being leaders, where ovruv must be supplied. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently wc, wonto, war?, ute, ola, that, as if hi- 
 asmuch as, on the supposition that, stand before this genitive. 
 
 Jig wd i%6vTwv rcovd (nioTao&ai os xgy, Thou must 
 
 know that these things are so. 
 Remark 2. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often used in connection 
 with the abovementioned particles. E. g. 01% "fy" *Xyu rtzV, «XX* \x,il- 
 vov u: v a. £o v r a, vuv, I do not say these things out of wantonness, but because 
 I believe that he is near us. TLs i%ov fan crotttv avroTs, o rt civ (hovXotvro, 
 inasmuch as they had now the liberty to do what they pleased. (See § 168. N. 2.) 
 
 Note 3. When the subject of a proposition is not expressed 
 (§ 157. N. 8), the participle alone is put in the genitive abso- 
 lute. E. g. c, Tovxog nottw, it raining heavily, which in the 
 indicative is "Tec noMtp, it rains heavily. 
 
 Note 4. The genitive absolute is used also when the sub- 
 ject is a proposition commencing with on, that. (§ 159. 1.) E. g. 
 2!a<fwg dtjlaS-ivTog on iv ratg vavol twv 'EXXrjvwv, x. x.h, it 
 being quite apparent, that in the ships of the Greeks, fyc, 
 which in the indicative is ^acpag idrjXa&r) oil iv xalg, tc. t. X., 
 the subject of which is on iv xvug, x. t. X. 
 
 In such instances, the genitive plural is sometimes used. 
 hi. g. JEloayyelS'svTwv oti <I>oLviooai vijeg in 3 avrovg ini- 
 Ttlsov, it being announced that Phoenician ships were sailing 
 against them, where, however, the plural vrjeg may be said to 
 affect the participle. 
 
220 syntax. [§§ 193, 194. 
 
 Note 5. But when the subject of the proposition is an in- 
 jinitive (§ 159. 2), the accusative is used instead of the geni- 
 tive absolute. For examples, see above (§ 168. N. 2.) 
 
 § 193* Frequently the genitive answers to the question 
 where? E. g. Ova "Agyeog 7Jev ; was he not in Argos ? 
 Aaidg xsiQog olxovoi Xalvfieg, on the left hand dwell the 
 Chalybes. 
 
 ^ 194. The genitive is put after the following 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 *Jp<pi, synonymous with negl. 
 
 "Avev, without. "Avev efter , icithout him. 
 
 ArU, instead of, for. *Av&* l^axlov £%eiv gdxog, to have a 
 
 rag instead of a garment. Avx\ no lag air lag ,- for ivhat 
 
 reason. 
 
 It is often used in comparisons with respect to value. 
 
 rwaiy.bg «V dvxl xstv^o, you are now equivalent to a 
 
 woman. (See also § 186. N. 4.) 
 3 An6, from. *Anb Hi tovnokiog, from Heliopolis. In general 
 
 this preposition denotes motion from one place to another. 
 "Axeg, synonymous with &pev. 
 
 "A/gig or u/gi, until. "Axgi xviyaog, till evening. 
 Aid, through, by means of with the assistance of in. Aid xr t g 
 
 noXswg, through the city. Aid vvv.xoq> in (or during) thp. 
 
 night. 
 w £vBxa f on account of for the sake of in respect of, as to. T ov 
 
 enaivslo&ai, tvexa, for the sake of being praised. Ilaldd 
 
 xe obv dnrjuova xov cpvkda o ovrog eXvsxsv ngoodoxa xoi 
 
 unovooTr t <juv, so far as his guardian is concerned, expect 
 
 thy son to return safe* 
 *Ef or \y, out of from, of. *E% r-rjg olxlag, from the house. . 
 In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to vno 9 
 
 by. Td kex&ivia i£ 3 A).e$dvd gov, the words spoken by 
 
 Alexander. 
 *Enl, on, upon, to, during. *En), xmv y.erpaXwv, upon their 
 
 heads. 3 Enl ^dgdtwv, to Sardes. *Elil dgxovxog Ev- 
 y.liovg, during the archonship of Euthycles, or when 
 
 Euthycles was archon. 
 Kurd, against, down from, on, upon. Kax efiov, against me. 
 Jlhxd, with, together with. Mexd xmv naidwv, with my 
 
 children. 
 Miymg or \iixgi, until, as far as. Mi%gi xovxov, until this 
 
 time. 
 
§ 195.] DATIVE. 221 
 
 Ilagd, from, of. Xgvolov nag a oov lafiojv, receiving gold 
 from thee. 
 
 Ilegi, concerning, about, in respect to. nsgl *A&r)v(ov, about 
 Athens. 
 
 nh]v } except. 
 
 Ilgo, before, in preference to. Ugo &vgoov, before the doors. 
 Ugo tovtojv toov xaxwv r^iiv ye xgsooov xal otlcjv alio 
 na&hiv eoti, it is better for us to suffer any thing else than 
 these evils. (§ 186. N. 4.) 
 
 Ugog, of for, on the side of Ugbg nargbg TV{i{jcogv%og, 
 a tomb-breaker on his father's side. Ugbg tcov €%6vtojv, 
 in behalf of the rich. 
 
 So in protestations, 2s. ngbg tov oov xixvov Ixvov^iai, 
 I beseech thee by thy child. 
 
 In connection with passive forms it is equivalent to ino, by. 
 E&sltov iia&iuv to no lev [isvov ngbg Aaxedaipovlcov, 
 wishing to know that which was done by the Laced cemonians. 
 
 c Tnsg, over, above, in behalf of , for the sake of. c Tnsg tju&v 
 nogsvofisvog, passing over us. Ta Isgd to, &v6{ieva in eg 
 Tjjg nolscog, the victims offered in behalf of the city. Ala- 
 oop* vnsg yjv%fig, I beseech thee by thy life. 
 
 c Tn6, under. c Ty dguaxog, under the car. In connection 
 with passive verbs, by. Ugooxvvovpsvog 7]drj tog ffaodsvg 
 vnb tcov dug) 3 aixbv, being now saluted as king by his at- 
 tendants. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 § 195. 1. The dative is used after adjectives, 
 adverbs, and verbs, implying resemblance, union, 
 approach. E. g. 
 
 "ixekog Ail, Resembling Jupiter. 
 
 slaxsdaifiovloig diapdxsa&ai, To fight with the Lace- 
 dcemonians. 
 
 Words of this class are ddslyog resembling, dxolovfrsco, dxo- 
 lov&og, Sfia, ajdlaiTog, diaycavl^ofiai, diads/ofiai, dialeyofj.ai, slxo- 
 Toog, zl'xto look like, resemble, enopai, egl£oj, VxsXog, I'aog, I'ooog, 
 udxo{iai, b{iog and its compounds and derivatives, naXalto, 
 naganlrjoiog, nXrjolog, noleuioo, oooavrcog, and many others. Add 
 to these the adverbs dy/ov, iyyvg, niXaa, which commonly take 
 the genitive (§ 188. 2). 
 
 2. Transitive verbs of this class are followed by the accu- 
 sative of the immediate, and the dative of the remote, ob- 
 19* 
 
321 SYNTAX. [§ 196. 
 
 ject. E. g. Kg tire i TTpooipiSe deonotiiv, he led his master 
 to victory. 
 
 Such verbs are elxd^cj, fdyvv/u, opoiow, and some others. 
 
 Note 1. The adjectives opttos and adiXQo;, and those compounded with <rv» 
 and ofAoZy are sometimes followed by the genitive (§ 188). Koivds, common, 
 which usually takes the dative, is followed by the genitive, when it implies pos- 
 session, (§ 174. N.) 
 
 Note 2. When the substantive, which depends on laog or 
 ouoio;, is the same as that with which i'oog or b^ioiog agrees, 
 the former is omitted, and the noun which limits it (§ 173) 
 is put in the dative. E. g. Kopai XolqItbgglv b^tolai, for 
 Ko/ioti bfioiai Tcilg xopaig twv Xagkcov, hair resembling that of 
 the Graces. Ov (ASTsixeg rag I'aag nXyyag ifxol, thou didst not 
 receive the same number of stripes toith me. 
 
 Note 3. The pronoun 6 avrog, the same, (§ 144. 3,) is 
 often followed by the dative. In general, however, the dative, 
 to which o aviog directly refers, is omitted, and the limiting 
 noun (& 173) is put in the dative, (§ 195. N. 2.) E. g. Ovdsv 
 twv ctvrwv ixslvoig npaiTOfiEV, we do nothing like the things 
 tchich they did, where tw^ amwv refers to the deeds, and ixelvoig 
 to the doers. 
 
 Note 4. ET? sometimes imitates e avrog. E. g. *0$ Iftot fittas lyinr* 
 Ik fjt.a.Ti.^osy who proceeded from the same mother as I. 
 
 § 196. 1. The dative is used to denote that to 
 which the quality of an adjective is directed. 
 E.g. 
 
 JJode iv bg ro7g cplXoig, Dear to his friends. 
 *'£% &ioTog &£olg, Most hateful to the gods. 
 
 Adjectives of this class are aya&og, alo%g6g, svavriog sv%gr]- 
 OTog, f'x&gog, rjdvg, xalog, no&sivog, gadtog, iplXog, xakenog, and 
 many others. 
 
 2. The dative is used after verbs, to denote the 
 object to or for which any thing is done. E. g. 
 
 Bo rj&sTv rjj ndxga, To aid the country. 
 
 Tolg & avoii o t nloviog ovdev dxpeXsl, Wealth in no way 
 
 benefits the dead. 
 Av^imvofxivri tw vexgco, Abusing the dead body. 
 *Jlyjm shut fioi doxelg, Thou seemest to me to be pale. 
 
 This rule applies also to the dative after impersonal verbs 
 {§ 159. N. 1, 2). E. g. doxzl fioi, it seems tome. 
 
§ 197.] dative. 223 
 
 Verbs of this class are aXe^w, dvddvco, dgsoxco, dgry/a, dg- 
 fioGGO), j3o7]&8oo, doxsco, si'xco yield, ivo/Xso), inagxico, imxovgsw, 
 imriXXouai, xcctuxovco, Xcctqsvco, Xvpalvouai, XvonsXeto, Xwfidouai, 
 fiificpo^LaLj nagsyyvdoo, nsl&oucu, 7ige7t(o, ngooTdooeo, ovpcpigw, 
 Ti^cogeco, VTtay.ovoj, vttslxco, V7ionTi]OG(a, vtiotI&siacxi, {p&oveca, %ci- 
 qI£ouou, and many others. 
 
 Note 1. Many verbs of this class are sometimes followed by the accusative 
 (§ 163. 1) instead of the dative. 
 
 3. The dative is used after verbs signifying to be, to denote 
 that to which any thing belongs. E. g. 
 
 TiXXco Tioudsg rjoav xaXol ts xdya&ol, Tellus had good and 
 noble children. 
 
 Note 2. The substantive in the dative after elvai, ylyvso&ai, 
 is often accompanied by a participle signifying willing, being 
 pleased, expecting. E. g. Ol KgoxwvioLTcti tinov, ovx uv oyioi 
 PovXofidvotg elvaiy the Crotonians said that they should not 
 be ivilling. 
 
 The participles, of which the dative accompanies the sub- 
 stantive, are (3ovX6{itvog, iknofisvoq, qddfievog, &sX(ov, ngoode/ofieiog. 
 Add to these the adjective dxcov. 
 
 Verbs signifying to come sometimes imitate tlvcu. E. g. 
 riyvwGxb) d* wg ocpw'lv ieXdopevo igiv Ixdvco, J know that 
 you longed for my arrival. 
 
 4. Many transitive verbs of this class (§ 196. 2) are fol- 
 lowed by the accusative of the immediate, and the dative of the 
 remote, object. E. g. 
 
 JldojfiL gol tovto, I give this to thee. 
 
 Note 3. A few verbs denoting to give apart (as psTadldcoui) 
 are often followed by the dative of a person, and the genitive 
 of the thing imparted (§ 178. ]). 
 
 5. The dative is put after the interjections ol, w, lw, and 
 oval. E. g. OV fjLoi, woe is me. 
 
 ^197. 1. The dative is often used to denote 
 that with regard to which any thing is affirmed. 
 E. g. 
 
 MdXiGTd onovdrjg a!~ia Ty noXsi, Of the utmost considera- 
 tion with regard to the state, or Deserving the most serious 
 attention of the state. 
 
 JZcpcov fih svtoXt] Aihq %%u rsXog drf, As to you two, the com- 
 mand of Jupiter is now done. 
 
224 SYNTAX. [§198. 
 
 So Ano EXMpwxWifi Jioltog »*• lorri, SvavTeg eon to xcoqlov, 
 to a person going up from the city Elephantine the country ap- 
 
 jxars steep. 
 
 Note 1. This dative is often preceded by the particle cog. 
 E. g. 'etiujisq u ysvrcuog oog \86vti, since thou art of noble 
 descent to one icho sees thee, or rather, as thy appearance zw- 
 dicates. 
 
 Hence the phrase c Slg ipol, or e, Jlg y' e^ol, in my opinion. 
 E. g. Kqsojv ))v &]Xbn6g, cog efiol, note, Creon was once, in my 
 opinion, in an enviable condition. 
 
 Note 2. Frequently the dative of the personal pronoun is 
 apparently superfluous. E. g. Einifisval \ioi, Tgoosg, ayavov 
 Ihovr t og ttmtqI qp/Aco xcel {htjtqI yorj^isvoti, O Trojans, do tell the 
 beloved father and mother of illustrious llioneus to bewail, 
 where pot might have been omitted without any essential in- 
 jury to the sense. Alia o eg *IIlvoiov nedlov a&uvaioi ni/iyjov- 
 oiv, ovvex' e'xtig 'Elsvrjv, xal ocpiv ya^Qog Aiog iooi, but the 
 immortals will send thee to the Ely sian fields, because thou hast 
 Helen for thy wife, and art son-in-law to Jupiter, where the 
 dative ocplv, referring to a&JvaToi, implies that the person, to 
 whom oi refers, is a favorite of the gods. 
 
 2. The dative is often used to limit any word or 
 expression. E. g. 
 
 AvrotTol yzvofiEvoi xmi rolg ooo^iaov xal ralg i^v^ous, Be- 
 coming strong both in body and soul. Here the dative 
 denotes that in which they became strong. 
 
 *Eyx*l# exixaoxo, He teas eminent with the spear. 
 
 Note 3. The dative is put after comparatives to denote the 
 excess of one thing over another. E. g. IJoXl XoylfAcn t\ 
 e Ella$ yeyovs da&svEoreQT}, Greece has become weaker by one 
 distinguished city. 
 
 Note 4. Particularly, the dative is often used to limit the 
 meaning of a substantive, in which case it is nearly equiva- 
 lent to the adnominal genitive (§ 173). E. g. 
 
 Or t ftaioiv (ivu$, King of Thebes. 
 
 Aooig uvft oono ia iv, A gift to men. Here the dative is 
 used objectively, (§ 173. N. 2.) 
 
 §198. The dative is used to denote the cause, 
 manner, means, and instrument. E. g. 
 
§§ 199, 200.] 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 225 
 
 To 1g nsngay uivoig alo%vv6fiisroi t Being ashamed of their 
 
 past acts, 
 dgo/ioj Ysvto eg rovg fiagfidgovg, They went running against 
 
 the barbarians. 
 Ten g cop an ig/a^ojusvog, Working with his body . 
 
 Note 1. The dative after the verb xgdoftcu, avail myself, 
 use, and its compounds, may be referred to this head. E. g. 
 Xgca [A8& a avitt) , we use it. 
 
 Note 2. This dative sometimes depends on h, <ruv, vv'o. E. g. 'Tbovv I v 
 8 /* p a r t v, seeing with my eyes. "Iva xi%<r)v vx > Atv&iaa tiafisiti, that he might 
 Jail by the hands of JEneas. 
 
 § 199. The dative is used to denote that by which any 
 thing is accompanied. E. g. ^E^ori&ijoav joilg JcogisvGiv eavioov 
 je TisvTaxooloig y.al %iXloig onXlxaig v.al tcov ^vnpa/cov 
 [xvoloig, they assisted the Dorians with one thousand jive 
 hundred heavy-armed soldiers of their own, and ten thousand 
 of their allies. 
 
 The nouns, of which the dative may thus be used, are chiefly 
 the following : Innzvg, vavg, OTiXltrjg, ns£6g, nskxaoT^g, oxolog, 
 OTgcnicoTr t g, Gigarog. 
 
 Note 1. This dative is frequently accompanied by the da- 
 tive of avxog. E. g. Tgnqgtig avrolg Ttlrjgcofiaai disqj&d- 
 griactv, galleys were destroyed with every thing on board. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the preposition ovv is found before this 
 dative. E. g. "Eltyov avibv vnongrjoou ndoag avTjj gvv noli, 
 they said that he burned them all together with the city. 
 
 § 200. 1. Frequently the dative, in connection with a 
 passive form, denotes the subject of the action. E. g. 
 
 Jig oonoXoig cpvldoa uai , He is taken care of by the 
 servants, the active construction of which is IJgoonoloi, 
 yvlcxooovGiv avxov, The servants are taking care of him 
 (§163.1.) 
 
 JoioIgl xccg lyvqroiG l da^ivrs, Being slain by two 
 brothers. 
 
 Note 1. The preposition v<r'o is often used before this dative. E. g. *Q$ 
 v*o TyJs/^ vruxtvat xXeviovro (piXotyya T^wav, thus were the close ranks 
 of tiie Trojans routed by Tydides. 
 
 2. The dative after verbal adjectives in jog and rsog (§ 132. 
 1, 2) denotes the subject of the action. E. g. El'nsg TifjtccG&cti 
 fiovlsi, MG)8li]xia gov ij Tiolig £Gilv, if thou wishest to be hon- 
 ored, thou must benefit the state. 
 
 : 
 
22G SYNTAX. [ §§ 20 1 - 203. 
 
 So when the neuter of the verbal in jeog is equivalent to du 
 with the infinitive (§ 162. N. 1), Ov yvvaiy.oov oidt7io& ) l'a& 9 
 7-rr^rffl fyu** wc li*st never be conquered by women, where 
 ijiTrjisa i)ulv is equivalent to del f lt uag rinuo&ai. 
 
 Note 2. When the verbal in %eov is equivalent to del with 
 the infinitive, the accusative is often used instead of the dative. 
 The accusative in this case denotes the subject of the infini- 
 tive implied in the verbal adjective (§ 159. N. 1.) E. g. Ovts 
 f.tLO&oq)OQ7]Teov aXXovg rj rovg orgarevofievovg, nor 
 must others, than those who serve in the army, receive icagcs, 
 where fiio&oq)ogr]Tiov is equivalent to del pio&ocpogelv. 
 
 ^ 201. The dative often answers to the ques- 
 tion AT WHAT TI3IE ? WHEX 1 E. g. 
 
 Tavxj] ttj ^fniga ovx i^ayjoaxo (jaodevg, The king did 
 notfght on that day. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes this dative depends on tv. E. g. T£ V iv Upan, on 
 this day, to-day . 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the dative is equivalent to the genitive 
 absolute (§ 192). E.g. noir\oavTi (pgwl^oj dgupu jlih'~ r 
 iov (x).ojoiv y.ou d id u^avjL eg ddxgva e'neoe to & turgor, when 
 Phrynichus wrote a play, entitled, The Capture of Miletus, 
 and acted it, the spectators wept. 
 
 § 202. The dative often answers to the question IN what 
 place? where? E. g. Maga&wvi, oV r^ev, idiojy.oi.uv, when 
 we were at Marathon, we pursued {the enemy). 
 
 % 203. The dative is put after the following 
 
 PREPOSITIONS : 
 
 'Apyl, about, on, concerning. E. g.'Aixcpl nXevgalc, about 
 the sides. 3 Aficpl xganiXaig, on the tables. *Apcpl y v- 
 vaixl, about (that is, for the sake of) a woman. 
 
 °Avd y upon, only in the poets. 
 
 *Ev, in, at. E. g. *Ev tovtoj toj to'ttw, in this place. 
 
 Sometimes iv is found before a genitive, the noun, to 
 which it belongs, being understood. E. g. 3 Ev c, Ai dov, sc. 
 do^ioi c, in the palaces of Hades, simply in Hades. 
 
 *Eni y upon, on account of, on condition that. *Enl iw yeia; ; 
 what dost thou laugh at? *Enl to! ad e rovg ngeojeig iri 
 cigioiov y.(/).oJ, on this condition I invite the a?nbassadors 
 to dinner. 
 
§§ 204, 205.] 
 
 VOICES. 
 
 227 
 
 MsT(i f among, with, only in the poets. "OcpQ sv slda, baaov 
 
 iya just a naoiv aTi^OTOiTTj &eog elfii, that I may well 
 
 know, how much I am the most unhonored goddess of 
 
 all 
 IJagd, at, by the side of, with. JIagct aoi, with thee, at thy 
 
 house. 
 IIzqL, about, on account of, for. JIsqI £lq>si, about (on) 
 
 the sicord. JJbqI yctg dls noi^iivi Xauv, for he feared 
 
 for the shepherd of the people. 
 IIqoq, with, in addition to. ngbg aoi, with thee. Hgog 
 
 x o v t o i g, in addition to these things. 
 2vv, with, by means of. 2vv aoi, with thee. 2vv [idxctig, 
 
 by means of battles. 
 c Tn6 y under. c Ttto rolg dv va fiivoioiv <Sv, being under the 
 
 powerful. 
 
 In connection with passive verbs, vno means by. c Tno 
 
 Tvdsldy xloviovro (pdkotyysg, the ranks were routed by 
 
 Tydides. 
 
 VOCATIVE. 
 
 ^ 204. 1. The vocative forms no part of a 
 proposition. It is used simply in addressing a per- 
 son or thing. E. g. 
 
 Ehsy Aihg &vyarsg, noXsuov, Depart, daughter of Jupiter, 
 from war. 
 
 2. The vocative is often put after the interjections to, lot. 
 E. g. y fL *A%iXzv, O Achilles. 
 
 VOICES. 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 § 205. 1. The active voice comprises the greater num- 
 ber of transitive or active, and intransitive or neuter, verbs. 
 E. g. X07TTO), cut ; Tgi/co, run. 
 
 Note 1. The accusative of the reflexive pronoun is fre- 
 quently omitted ; in which case the verb has the appearance 
 of an intransitive verb. E. g. i Xavrco sc. ifiavrov, impel myself, 
 proceed, march. 
 
228 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 [§205. 
 
 Note 2. The perfect and pluperfect active of the following 
 verbs borrow the signification of the passive or middle. 
 
 IdAFZKJl, capture, dXlaxofxai, oi'yw, open, oV/opai, am opened, 
 
 am captured, kdXojxa, have 
 been captured. 
 
 Pgrxdofuu, roar, pi@Qvxot, roar. 
 
 rillXSl, produce, yiyvopcu, am 
 produced, become, ytyovee, 
 am. 
 
 dala (transitive), burn, daloficu 
 (intransitive), burn, Sidya, 
 burn. 
 
 A All, teach, did act, have learn- 
 ed. 
 
 digxoftcu, see, dsdogxa, see. 
 
 eyslgco, raise, eyugofxai, raise 
 myself, rise, iygyyogee, am 
 awake. But the first per- 
 fect iyrjysgna means have 
 raised. 
 
 iQEtTKo, demolish, igr\gma, am 
 demolished. 
 
 Xaxrj^a, cause to stand, Xoza^iai, 
 cause myself to stand, stand, 
 EGTtjxa, I'oTcca, stand. But 
 the later form laraxa means 
 have placed. 
 
 xtv&w (transitive), hide, xexev- 
 &a (intransitive), hide. 
 
 xrjdw, afflict, xrjdofjitu, care for, 
 xexrjda, care for. 
 
 palvw, madden, palvo^nt, am 
 mad, fiifi7]voc, am mad, rave. 
 
 /jirjyMOfjLai 9 bleat, fiifirjxa, bleat. 
 
 fivxdofiai, bellow, (jefivxa, bel- 
 low. 
 
 tcoyoc, stand open. But the 
 first perfect !'«#« means have 
 opened. 
 
 oXXvf.ii, destroy, oXXvjiai, perish, 
 oXwXct, have perished. But 
 the first perfect oXwXsxa 
 means have destroyed. 
 
 oQvvfii, rouse, b'gvvficu, rise, 
 oQbjga, have arisen. 
 
 nsl&ct), persuade, nel&opou, am 
 persuaded, ninoi&a, confide 
 in, trust. 
 
 7ir\yvv[ii,fix, nriyvvfiai, am fix- 
 ed, ninr\ya, stand fast \ 
 
 griyvvfii, tear, eggcoya, am torn 
 to pieces. 
 
 ofiivvvpi, extinguish, apivvv^ai, 
 am extinguished, eo^xa, am 
 extinguished. 
 
 arjTito) (transitive), to rot, orjno- 
 p,ai (intransitive), to rot, 
 osGrjTia, to be rotten. 
 
 axsXXco, cause to wither, oxtXXo- 
 (mt, (intransitive), wither, 
 ivxXtjxa, am withered. 
 
 Tr\xbi (transitive), melt, rqxofiou 
 (intransitive), melt, rsi^xa, 
 am melted. 
 
 cpalvw, make appear, (palvofiai, 
 appear, nicprjvee, have ap- 
 peared. 
 
 cpvco, produce, cpvoficci, am pro- 
 duced, nsepvxa, nscpva, am. 
 
 Remark. Sometimes the perfects «r / r A 93 y a, from nX&ffu, and % <p 9- £ « , 
 from <p$ugw, take the signification of the passive. 
 
 Note 3. When the verb is both transitive and intransitive, 
 the first perfect is transitive, and the second perfect (if there 
 be any), intransitive. E. g. ngdoow, transitive, do, has 1 perf. 
 ninouxu, have done ; but ngdoaco, intransitive, am or do, has 
 2 perf. ninguya. 
 
§ 206] voices. 229 
 
 Note 4. The second aorist active of the following verbs 
 takes the signification of the passive or middle. 
 
 c AAI2K-% dXloxofiai, edXcov, teas [ivxdoficu, epvxov, bellowed. 
 
 captured. ofisvvvfii, apivvvpai, eofirjv, teas 
 dsgy.ouai, sdgaxov, saio. extinguished, 
 
 igdv.co (transitive), break, tfgi- oxeXkco, axiXkofiaL, eoxXtjv, with' 
 
 xov (intransitive), broke. ered. 
 
 igelncj, egtlnopcu, i\ginoVy fell cpvco, cpvopcu, i'cpvv, was produc- 
 
 down. ed, am. But the first aorist 
 
 e LOT7]ui, Xoxa^iav, \oxr\v, stood. ecpvoa means I produced. 
 
 (Aiy/.doiiai, I'/xaxov, bleated. 
 
 2. Causative verbs, that is, verbs signifying to cause (one) 
 to do any thing, belong to the active voice. E. g. yevco, cause 
 to taste ; ni^ivr^xca, cause to remember, remind. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 § 206. 1. The passive takes for its subject that which 
 was the immediate object of the active (§ 163. 1), That, 
 which was subject-nominative in the active (§ 157), becomes 
 genitive in the passive, and depends on vno, nagd, ngoc, or g& 
 E.g. 
 
 'jffpslg i i?« ti «t co t w t & a vno rcov ngsofiswv, We are 
 completely deceived by the ambassadors. The active con- 
 struction of this example would be Ol ngiofoig eSanaicooiv 
 fjuagy The ambassadors are completely deceiving us. 
 
 2. The dative without a preposition is often used instead of 
 the genitive with vno, particularly in connection with the_per- 
 fect and pluperfect passive. E. g. 
 
 .EToijto ravTa t co E i & v <5 rj ft co , These things had been 
 said by Euthydemus, equivalent to Elgr^.u juvia o Ev&i- 
 dr t fioc, Euthydemus had said these things. 
 
 Remark. The context will determine whether a dative in connection with a 
 passive verb denotes the subject (§ 200) or the object (§ 196) of that verb. 
 
 3. When the active is followed by two cases, the 
 passive retains the latter. E. g. 
 
 c 2Vro zJiog Innoovv ag i d id d%&7i g , Thou wast taught 
 horsemanship by Jove, the active construction of which 
 would be c Zdg Ijinoovrug as idldtx^ev, Jove taught thee 
 horsemanship, (§ 165.) 
 20 
 
230 SYNTAX. [§207. 
 
 J Toy st ml Tcoy r o p I (A w v vno Tivog, He is deprived of 
 privileges by somebody, the active construction of which 
 would be EYQyfi Tig ccvtov tcop vopi^Vy Somebody deprives 
 him of privileges, (§ 180. 2.) 
 
 Note 1. The object, which was in the genitive or dative, is 
 sometimes made the subject of the passive. E. g. 'jtixslvog 
 xtxTeyrjcpla&T], he was condemned, (§ 183. 2. ) Ot Jaxs- 
 d a i pov vo i dniOTOvvTa i vno tkxvtcov Ilelonovvrjoliov, the 
 JLacedcBmonians are distrusted by all the Peloponnesians, the 
 active construction of which would be JldvTsg nzkonovvr\oioi 
 amoTovoi Tolg slewed a ipovloig, (§ 196. 2.) 
 
 Note 2. The aorist passive frequently has the signification 
 of the aorist middle. In such cases the aorist middle is either 
 rare or obsolete. E. g. dnaXXdaoa), deliver, dnrjlXd/rjv, delivered 
 myself, not was delivered. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 §207. I. The middle is often equivalent to the active 
 followed by the accusative of the reflexive pronoun. E. g. 
 vlnTopat equivalent to vinTw epavTov, wash myself 
 
 So aydXXofjiou, avagTaofxai, andy^opai, ans^opai, ivdvofxat, 
 xdgofiai, nTSvl^Ofiai, lovofxai, ^vgdo^cct, nsgoaoopat, nagaonevd^o- 
 fic/.i, and some others. 
 
 When the active is followed by two cases, middle verbs of 
 this class retain the latter. E. g. *Ev 8v stcc i tov dwgaxa, 
 he puts on the cuirass, of which the active construction would 
 be 3 LrduH laviov tov &wguy.a, (§ 165.) 
 
 Note 1 . The accusative after ku^o/aou, vrt^ottoofAKt, tpof&lopui, and some others, 
 is properly speaking synecdochical (§ 167). 
 
 Note 2. Some middle verbs of this class (§ 207. l) have apparently be- 
 come i?itransitive. E. g. 'i\9ra>, cause to hope, 'ix<aro/u,ai, cause myself to hope, 
 simply hope ; <rXoi%at, cause to wander, nZ.oifypeu, cause myself to wander, 
 simply wander. 
 
 2. Very frequently the middle is equivalent to the active 
 followed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun. In this case 
 the middle is used transitively. E. g. 
 
 IlonXofrai ttjv uorjvrjv, To make a peace for one's self 
 
 But iioiuv Tr}v ugyvrjv, To make a peace for others. 
 IT a i) a a v. e v a 'Q o [i a I ti, I prepare something for myself. 
 But IZttgao*eva£to ti, T prepare something for somebody. 
 
§ 207.] voices. 231 
 
 3. The middle is sometimes used transitively to denote that 
 the object of the action is a thing belonging to the subject of 
 the verb. E. g. 
 
 Xgvarjg tjX&e Xvgo^evoq &vyaTga, Chryses came in order to 
 ransom his own daughter. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes, for the sake of emphasis, the reflexive pronoun is an- 
 nexed to a middle verb used transitively (§ 207. 2, 3). E. g. Tiygaft- 
 (iai IfAocur u raura, I have written these things for myself. 
 
 4. Sometimes the middle is equivalent to the corresponding 
 active with the reciprocal pronoun. E. g. Xotdogov^tE^a equiva- 
 lent to Xotdogovpsv dXXrjXotg f tve are reviling one another ; but 
 koLdoQovfis&a, in the passive, would mean we are reviled by 
 others. 
 
 5. Sometimes the middle is used transitively to express an 
 action which takes place at the command of the subject of the 
 proposition. E. g. 
 
 3 Edi,dci$d(xr}v o s, I caused thee to be taught, I have given 
 thee an education. But 3 Edlda$d oe, I taught thee. 
 
 Note 4. Frequently the middle does not seem to differ from 
 the active. E. g. idso&cu, in Homer, is equivalent to idslv, 
 to see. 
 
 Note 5. The future middle is often equivalent to the future 
 active. In such cases the future active is either rare or obsolete. 
 E g. fravfidfr, admire, xtavfidoofiai, shall admire, not shall 
 admire myself. 
 
 Verbs, of which the future middle is equivalent to the future 
 active : ayvoiw, adco, axovw, dfiagTavco, atiavrdco, anoXava, j3ot- 
 dl£(t), fialvh), fiioco, fiXwoxai, fiodw, ytXaco, yrjqaoxw, yiyvcooxWi da- 
 y.vw, dag&dvw, AETfL, didgdoxco, APAMIL, £/xw t u*a£a), ElAfl, 
 el/xl am, EAETOJ1, inaiviw, emogxicj, &avfid^(o, &ico run, &7}gdo), 
 >&T}()tv(o, &tyydrco, xtvijoxw, &gt6GXh), xdpvb), xi^dvca, xXalco, xXetztw, 
 xoXd^w, Xayxdvoo, Xafi/Sdvoi, (.lavSdvw, vita swim, olfxoj£(o, ofivvpi, 
 OIIJI, ovQsco, 7ial±w, ndoxM, nwdda, ninxvi, ttXew, nviw, Tivlyco, 
 gioa flow, oiydw, oicoTidw, oy.wmw, onovdd^w, gvqI^go, tgi/co, t^oj- 
 y(o, T(o&d£b), ysvyco, xQw, zwqsco, and some others. 
 
 Note 6. Sometimes the future middle is equivalent to the 
 future passive. E. g. wcps/Uw, benefit, wcpsXrjoopai, shall be 
 benefited, not shall benefit myself. 
 
 Verbs of which the future middle is equivalent to the future 
 
B38 syntax. [§§208,209. 
 
 passive : adixeco, an-XXdooto, pXumt), yv^ira^co, '^r^ucco, TrgoTi^idtOy 
 TQ^yco, yvXctGOb), and some others. 
 
 Note 7. The aorist middle is in a few instances equivalent to the aorist pas- 
 siic. E. g. \u*v, leave, ikdropw, was left, not left myself. 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 § 208. Deponent verbs are those, which are used only in 
 the passive or middle voice. They are called deponent passive 
 or deponent middle, according as their aorist is taken from the 
 passive or middle. In respect to signification, they are either 
 transitive or intransitive. E. g. 
 
 im^Xiouai, take care of, ensfiehj&rtv, is a deponent passive. 
 sQya&ficu, ivork, uqyaoapr\y, is a deponent middle. 
 
 Note 1. Some deponents have both the aorist passive and the aorist middle. 
 E. g. $uv&{Aa.i, am able, fduvwB-riv, in Homer thvvncreifiijv. 
 
 Note 2. Some deponents have, in the perfect and pluperfect, also a passive 
 signification. E. g. t^ya^opui, work, perf. u^yufffjccu, have worked, sometimes 
 have been worked. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the aorist passive of a deponent verb has a passive signi- 
 fication : in which case the aorist middle follows the present. E. g. xxrayl/t}- 
 (p'tZofAxt, condemn, xa,<riypr)<pto&9iv, was condemned, xetrf^rKpiO'af&nv, condemned. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT, PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE. 
 
 § SO 9. 1. The present indicative expresses an ac- 
 tion or being which is going on now. E. g. ygdcpw, I am 
 writing. 
 
 The present in the dependent moods (subjunctive, optative, 
 imperative, and infinitive) and in the participle expresses a 
 continued action. Its time in this case is determined by the 
 context. E. g. "llxovoa on ntQixXi)g noXXag zncodag en I ot al- 
 io, ag inadwv jfj noXsi inoln aiiip' cpiXslv civtov, I heard 
 that Pericles knew many enchantments, which singing to the 
 city he made it love him. 
 
 Note 1. The present is frequently used for the aorist in an 
 animated narration, in which the past is represented as present. 
 E. g. Haiti y.axd to oteqvov, v.a\ jitqojgxsi dia xov #cuoa- 
 koc, he strikes (hi?n) in the breast, and wounds him through the 
 cuirass, where nalu, titqwoxu, stand for i'naios, I'tqwos. 
 
§ 209] tenses. 233 
 
 Note 2. The present of %*&> has the force of the perfect, have come. The 
 imperfect of this verb has the force of the pluperfect, had come. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the present has the force of the future, E. g. upt 
 regularly means shall go, and sometimes am going. 
 
 2. The perfect in all the moods and in the participle ex- 
 presses an action which is now completed. E. g. yiygucfu, I 
 have written. 
 
 Note 4. The perfect of some verbs has the signification of 
 the present. In this case the pluperfect has the signification 
 of the imperfect. E. g. el'xoj, seem, 1'ot.xct, seem. 
 
 Verbs, of which the perfect has the signification of the 
 present, are fiyvvpi, avolyw, avwyco, /3gv%do{j.ai, ylyvopvu, rfiySL, 
 dalo) burn, AEUl, digxofiai, eyslgw (only the 2 perf.), tdw, 
 El/ISl, Eittflfj ilnh), XoTrjfii, xfot'Cto, xga£a), xzuouai, ),aoxo), fiuca, 
 [Aalvan, (liXiOt (jLTixdoiiai, fiiixv^oxo), fivxdofiai, nsL&w (only the 
 2 perf.), Qjjyvvfu, goivvvfii, rgi^o), cpvoa. 
 
 Note 5. The perfect is sometimes used for the present to express a cus- 
 tomary action. E. g. 'O x^utuv ufjt.ee, navra. ffuvjgraxt, the conqueror 
 takes possession of every thing. 
 
 Note 6. The perfect is sometimes used for thefuture to express the rapidity 
 or certainty of an action. E. g. "Q\a\a$, il <n ravr' itfffopoii vroiXtf, 
 tfiou shalt certainly perish, if I ask tliee again the same question, 
 
 Note 7. The second person of the perfect imperative is 
 rarely used, except in verbs of which the perfect has the 
 signification of the present (§ 209. N. 4). E. g. Kgd'Qw, 
 xixQuya, xexgcczdi cry out ; fii^vrjaxco, ^i^vr^im, [itjivrjao re- 
 member thou. 
 
 Note 8. The third person of the perfect passive imperative 
 of any verb may be used to denote the complete termination 
 of an action. E, g. Tavxa fiev ovv nenalo&w v/iiv, now you 
 have had sport enough, or let there be no more joking about this. 
 
 3. The pluperfect expresses an action which was com- 
 pleted in past time. E. g. iyiygdyuv, I had written, implying 
 that there was a time when I could say " I have written.' 1 
 
 Note 9. In the old writers (as Homer\ the pluperfect sometimes has the 
 force of the aorist, and sometimes of the imperfect. E. g. (II. 5, 66) fri^T,*- 
 xu for f/3«Xi, from $&x\u, strike; (II. 9, 671) hiYi^aro, they welcomed, from 
 ¥t%ofAcci. See also above (§ 209. N. 4.) 
 
 4. The future in all the moods and in the participle ex- 
 presses an action or event which will take place. E. g. ygdipw, 
 I shall or will write. 
 
 20* 
 
231 SYNTAX. [§§ 210 - 212. 
 
 Note 10. The future is often used to denote a probable 
 occurrence. E. g. <lJtjoeig vofil&ud-oti av nocidbg toito iov<jyov 
 thai, you will probably say, that this is considered as the busi- 
 ness of a child. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 § 2 1 O. The imperfect expresses a continued past action. 
 E. g. lyQvyov, I was ivriting, not simply I wrote. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the imperfect expresses an attempt not brought to a 
 successful conclusion. E. g. (Herod. 1, 68) 'Epio-Souro <rnv atow, he 
 tried to hire the court-yard. 
 
 Note 2. The imperfect frequently denotes a customary ac- 
 tion. E. g. Tovg TtolhuQ [*e& 3 ottXwv i^ens^nov , they 
 toere accustomed to send out the citizens armed. 
 
 Note 3. The imperfect is frequently used for the aorist, 
 especially in Homer and Herodotus. E. g. Tots drj OsfiiGTo- 
 ulsrjg y.uvov ts xal rovg KoQiv&iovg TtoXXd te not xctxa sXsys, 
 then Themistocles said many and bad things both about him 
 and about the Corinthians. 
 
 Note 4. The imperfect ^v (from tlpi) sometimes stands for Itrri. E.g. 
 Kufgts ovk &£ nv $60$, Cypris then is not a goddess fas we thought J. 
 
 THIRD FUTURE PASSIVE. 
 
 §211. The third future passive expresses a completed 
 action, the consequences of which will be permanent in future 
 time. In other words it transports that which is already com- 
 pleted to a future time. E. g. iyyQacpw, fyysyQaipo(j.ai I shall 
 remain enrolled, implying that / have already been enrolled. 
 
 Note 1. The third future is the natural future of verbs whose perfect has the 
 signification of the present (§ 209. N. 4). E. g. xrccofiai, Kixrufixt, kixtyi- 
 ffopai shall possess. 
 
 Note 2. In many instances the third future does not differ 
 in signification from the common future passive. E. g. dew, 
 bind, dsdr t oo(.i(u, shall be bound. 
 
 Note 3. The third future in some instances expresses the rapidity or cer- 
 tainty of a future action. E. g. Tr^dtrtru, sriT^trui it shall immediately be 
 done. 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 §212, 1. The aorist in the indicative and participle 
 expresses a transient past action, without any reference to 
 
§ 213.] moods. 235 
 
 another action. It simply narrates that which took place. 
 E. g. eygcapix, I xorotc, not i~ was writing. 
 
 2. The aorist in the dependent moods (subjunctive, optative, 
 imperative, and infinitive) expresses a momentary action, its 
 time being determined by the context. E. g. Uegl nXslovog 
 inoirjaajo svogxslv, r\ xaoioao&ai t<w dr^co nagd to dlxaiov, 
 he thought more of being just than of pleasing the multitude at 
 the expense of justice. 
 
 Remark. We see then that the present in the dependent moods (§ 209. 1) 
 marks a continued action ; the aorist in these moods marks a momentary action ; 
 and this is all the difference between these two tenses in the dependent moods. 
 
 Note 1. The Greeks often use the aorist indicative and parti- 
 ciple where, properly speaking, the perfect or pluperfect should 
 be used. It must not be inferred, however, from this that the 
 aorist may express the time marked by the perfect or pluper- 
 fect. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 238-9) Kondprft* <x>g *>g, trap 
 ixdiddfyg, (ov mo ovisx iXrjXv&a. 2fLK. 'HX&eg ds xaxd rl ; 
 Come down to me, to teach me those things for which I have 
 come. Soc. What have you come for ? where rjX&sg is parallel 
 with fXjXv&a. 
 
 Note 2. The aorist indicative is often used for the present 
 to express a customary action. E. g. 3 AXX* an tx&gwv o*jJt« 
 noXXct (jiav&dvovGiv ol oocpoi. Uagd ph ovv (plXov ov pd&oig 
 av tov&\o #' *x&gbg svdvg i^rjvdy xa as v, But the wise learn 
 many things from their enemies. Now from a friend you 
 might not learn this ; but the enemy (as a common thing) com- 
 pels you to learn it. 
 
 Note 3. The aorist is used for the future to denote the 
 rapidity or certainty of an action. E. g. 'AniaXonsoxf «o', 
 u xctxbv nQooolaofisv viov naXam, then we are undone, if we 
 add a new evil to an old one. 
 
 Note 4. The aorist of the verbs avroxrvco, despise, yiXau, liraivieo, rthofiat, 
 and a few others, is, in conversation, often used for the present, in order to 
 express a decided feeling of admiration, contempt, or pleasure. E. g. "Ha-S-tjv 
 kvu'ku.h, it amuses me to hear ( your J threats. 
 
 MOODS. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 §313. 1. The indicative is used in independent propo- 
 sitions. E. g. € Q dodxoov iotl {luxoov, the dragon is a long 
 thing. 
 
236 SYNTAX. [§ 213. 
 
 2. The indicative may be put after interrogative and relative 
 words (§§(38: 71: 73: 123). E. g. Tl noislg; what art 
 thou doing ? olds xl fiovksxai, he knows what (it) wants. 
 
 O avijo, bg xovx* snohios, the man who made this. 
 
 3. The indicative may be put after the following particles : 
 si, if, whether ; duel, snsidi], after, when ; bxi, that, because ; 
 wg, that ; loots, so that. 
 
 Remark. In a sentence containing a condition and con- 
 sequence or conclusion, the former is called protasis, and the 
 latter apodosis. The protasis begins with the particle si, if. 
 
 4. The indicative may be used in conditional propositions. 
 E. g. Asiva tie to 6[iso&a, si GiyrjGOfiisv, If we shall keep 
 silence we shall suffer terrible things, where u myyoofisv is the 
 protasis and dstra nsiooiiso&u the apodosis. (§ 213. R.) 
 
 5. When the condition and the consequence are both past 
 actions, the indicative is used both in the protasis and in the 
 apodosis. In this case the apodosis contains the particle av. 
 
 K g ; 
 
 Ovtol si r\oav avb*Qsq aya&ol, ovx av ttoxs xavxa snao/ov, 
 
 If they had been good men, they would never have suffered 
 
 these things. 
 Ovx a v n Qoslsysv , si [ir] snloxsvosv aXrjS-svGStv, Had 
 
 he believed that he should prove a false prophet, he would 
 
 not have predicted. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the optative is used in the apodosis, especially in the 
 epic writers. E. g. Ka) vv kim evS-' ocToXoiro ava| ocvb^Zv Am/«j, ti ^ 
 a^' o%v von a Ato$ Suydrn^ ' Atp^tm, and now JEneas, king of men, had 
 perished^ had not Venus, daughter of Jove, quickly perceived. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes av is omitted in the apodosis. E.g. E< yo\g v\v certain 
 vrooOv)\oi ra (jciWovra. yivri<ri<r§ou, obV ovrus ocroffrocriov rri tfokii rovruv %v, 
 for if those things, which were to happen, had been manifest to all, the city 
 ought not even then to have given these things up. 
 
 Note 3. The particle Sv may accompany all the tenses of 
 the indicative, without any protasis expressed. E. g. 'zi'/Sot/- 
 Xofirjv fisv av ovx sqI'Qslv iv&dds, I could have wished not to 
 be contending here. Ov yaq av rjipax avxwv, he could not 
 have touched them. "Jloxs xrjg rigijvrjg avdirjfiaQxrjxsi, so 
 that he would have missed the peace. c Jlg oxr\\piv av aywv 
 ovxog ovx todi$sxai, for this contest cannot possibly admit 
 of any evasion. 
 
 Note 4. The particles bncog, how, in order that, oyoa, in 
 order that, ^r\, lest, and the double negative ov firj, not, are 
 
§ 214.] moods. 237 
 
 frequently put before the future indicative. E. g. (Herod. 2, 
 121, 2) AnoTCtfivecv avzov tr^v xecpcxkrjv, ox cog fiij ngooano- 
 Isoei xal ixuvov, to cut off his head, lest he might bring 
 destruction upon him also. 
 
 Note 5. Sometimes the future indicative with oncog and 
 ov pr] supplies the place of an emphatic imperative. E. g. 
 "Oncog ds tovto pr) diddSsig fifjdsva, but see that you do not 
 communicate this to anybody. Ov nr\ Xrjoyosig, you shall 
 not talk nonsense. 
 
 In such cases it is customary to supply the verb oga, see, or 
 oxoTiei, consider. 
 
 Note 6. The historical tenses of the indicative are some- 
 times put after ha, cog, or pi} lest, in which case the leading 
 proposition also contains an historical tense. E. g. Tvgiov 
 old fid Xmovo efiav, %v vnb dsioccGt, Hagvaoov holts vao&wv, 
 leaving the Tyrian surge, I came in order to dwell under 
 the summits of Parnassus. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 §214. 1. The subjunctive is put after the following 
 particles : 
 
 iuv, Uv, i)v, if. {ir}, lest. 
 
 insiddv, enav, inrjv, when, after, oncog, cog, that, in order that. 
 
 Vots, until. ocfQct, synonymous with %vu or 
 
 scog, until. oncog. 
 
 Xva, that, in order that. nglv, before. 
 
 2. The subjunctive is put also after interrogative and rela- 
 tive words (§§ 68 : 71 : 73 : 123). 
 
 3. The verb of the proposition upon which the subjunctive 
 depends expresses time present or future. (§§ 209. 1, 2, 4.) 
 E.g. 
 
 "Avoiys ttjv vlr\v iV Hil&co, Open the forest, that I may 
 come out. (§ 209. I.) 
 
 JidoLxd as pr) nlr\ycov oil], lam afraid thou wilt need 
 stripes. (§ 209. N. 4.) 
 
 JElo 6[is&a amlxa, civ noLrjOcofiev yocpov, We shall im- 
 mediately know, if we make a noise. (§ 209. 4.) 
 
 *Ex($l($ao ov ai'Ti)v, Xva & saoco[is&a Tfjv drjdova, Bring 
 her out, that we may see the nightingale. (§ 212. 2.) 
 
-33 SYNTAX. [§ 215. 
 
 4. The interrogative and relative words, and the particles 
 am, lbs, ha, 07iwc, oqroa, ttqIv, (§ 214. 1, 2,) in connection 
 with the subjunctive, are generally accompanied by the particle 
 or. E. g. 
 
 Zwa ov Tavm xakslg, a av ipvxrjv BXffi Do you not call 
 animals those which have life ? 
 
 On or eg av anoxglvrjTciL to ^iBigdiaov, i$eXsyx&rjos- 
 Tai, Whatever answer the young man may give, he will 
 he confuted, 
 
 Ael noiovfisv tav& exdoTO& , otccv nra yvwfiev tiovtjqwv ovx* 
 EQaaji]v TTQayjuHXTcov, sag av avibv tfifiaXb) fisv sig xaxbv, 
 oTiMg av eidfj jovg &Eovg dsdoixivai, We always do these 
 things, when we find out that a person is a lover of evil 
 deeds, until we place him in a dreadful situation, that he 
 may learn to fear the gods. 
 
 Note 1. The subjunctive often depends on a verb express- 
 ing time 'past, contrary to the rule (§ 214. 3); in other words, 
 it stands for the optative (§ 216). This substitution generally 
 takes place when emphasis is required ; or when the verb after 
 the particle denotes an action which is continued to the time 
 of the speaker. E. g. (Eurip. Hec. 26-7) Krarcov eg o~idp 
 alog (jis&rjz , &( avTog /gvobv iv dopoig e/jj, killing (me), he 
 threw me into the surge, in order that he might keep the gold 
 in his house. ^EtioLeb ds apyoreQa xavxa, wg o te noxa^bg 
 j3(jadvTS(jog sly, xal 61 nlooi ecjol oxoliol ig ri]v Baftvlcora, 
 she did both these things, in order that the river might be 
 slower, and that the navigation up to Babylon might be 
 crooked. Eyw cpo (3r}& e}g ^7] loidogla yevrjTai, naXiv xaTE- 
 ngavvov tbv Kxy'njuinov, I, fearing lest abusive icords should 
 be used, again appeased Ctesippus. 
 
 Note 2. M^, lest, is sometimes accompanied by o<ru$. E. g. Aio*oi%' onus 
 fiot fjt-n >.txv <pavri$ aotpri, 1 fear lest you prove to be very artful. 
 
 Note 8. Instead of /uy, lest, with the subjunctive, on, oircus, or us, with 
 the indicative, is sometimes used. 
 
 Note 4. Sometimes the verb, upon which fij, lest, depends, is omitted. 
 E. g. (II. 22, 123 : Plat. Crit. 9.) 
 
 Note 5. Sometimes the subjunctive is put after the particles u, \*u, ivrutri, 
 Mrt, on, unaccompanied by av, (§214. 1,4.) 
 
 § 315. 1. The first person plural of the subjunctive is 
 often used in exhortations. E. g. Tbv MeveXegjv pipo) fj.E&a, 
 let us imitate Meneldus. 
 
§ 216.] moods. 239 
 
 2. The first person singular also of the subjunctive, pre- 
 ceded by the imperative liys or cpsge, is often used in exhorta- 
 tions. E.g. 8qs axovaoa, let me hear. 
 
 Note 1 . Homer uses the first person singular of the subjunctive in exhorta- 
 tions without ayi, <pi^i, or any auxiliary word. E. g. (II. 22, 450) "ISa/p, 9 
 or iv 1 i^yat. rirvxraa, let me see what deeds have been done. 
 
 3. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in questions 
 of doubt, when a person asks himself or another what he is to 
 do. E. g. Uwg qp w emoTeco&ai ; how can I say that I know ? 
 E Xn o) xi ; may I say any thing ? 
 
 Frequently the question begins with the second person of 
 the present indicative of fiovloiiai or -d-ilw. E. g. B ovist, 
 &wjxsv; wilt thou that we place? In such cases ^oiIsl or 
 friteig usually precedes the subjunctive. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the interrogation disappears after §i\us or fiouku 
 (§ 215. 3). E. g. E7ts n fiouXa *(>oa§?j$ r\ u<pi*.iis, whether thou 
 wishest to add or take away any thing. 
 
 4. The first person of the subjunctive is used also in 
 questions expressing indignation. E. g. (Aristoph. Ran. 
 1132-4) AlaxvXs, nugatrco ooi oibmav. AT2X.*Eyw olcottcj; 
 ^Sschylus, I advise thee to be silent. ^Esch. Am I to be 
 silent ? 
 
 Note 3. The subjunctive is often used after ov (zy\ for the future indicative. 
 E. g. Ourt yiyvtrat, aun yiyovti, ouo^i ouv pn yivnrcci, it is not, it has not 
 been, it will not be. 
 
 In Homer, the subjunctive, with or without xiv, is sometimes equivalent to 
 the future indicative. E. g. Avropou us 'AlfSaa, xa) Iv vixuiairi (pxiivw, I will 
 go into Hades, and shine among the dead. 
 
 5. In prohibitions, the second person of the aorist subjunc- 
 tive is used after ui] and its compounds. E. g. 
 
 Mi) qopridfiq. Fear not. 
 
 Note 4. The third person of the aorist subjunctive is rarely found after py 
 in prohibitions. 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 § 216. 1. The optative is put after the following parti- 
 cles : 
 
 **> if- onwq, ag, that, in order that. 
 
 ind, tTieidrj, when, after. oxi, that. 
 
 sots, until. ocpga, synonymous with Xva or 
 
 i'cog, until. onwg. 
 
 ha, that, in order that. nglv, before. 
 
 firj, lest. 
 
240 SYNTAX. [§216. 
 
 2. The optative is put also after interrogative and relative 
 words (§§ 68: 71 : 73 : 123). 
 
 3. The verb of the proposition, upon which the optative 
 depends, expresses time past. (§§ 209. 3 : 210 : 212. 1.) E. g. 
 
 \fll « a o »' f u £ #' Via cpo(Hi]xrtiriv eyco, He ivas telling great 
 stories that I might fear, or in order to scare me. 
 
 IIqwtcc di] sneLTcc rig sir}, not no&ev I'k&oi, Then he 
 asked who he was, and whence he came. 
 
 Note I. The optative often depends on a proposition 
 which contains a verb expressing present or future time. In 
 this case it generally denotes uncertainty or probability. E. g. 
 K tike oov TQoepbv Evgvxksioiv, ocpg snog si'n oijdi , call nurse 
 Euryclea, that I may say a word to her. 
 
 Note 2. When the present is used for the aorist (§ 209. 
 N. 1), it is regularly followed by the optative. This is no ex- 
 ception to the rule (§ 216. 3). E. g. Bovki]V inne^vaTou, 
 ottojc u?] akio&slsv *Ad ip-awi, he contrives a plan which 
 should prevent the Athenians from assembling. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the particle civ accompanies the words which precede the 
 optative (§ 216, 1, 2). Thus the optative is sometimes found after lav, tvtdxv, 
 "vet civ, ftn av, o<r&>s civ f oTorctv, oretv, otyga, civ t a; civ. 
 
 4. Particularly the optative is used when any thing that has 
 been said or thought by another is quoted, but not in the 
 words of the speaker. The action denoted by the optative 
 may refer to present, past, or future time. E. g. 
 
 ^AnzY.qivaTQ oti> fiav& dvotev oi nctv&avovTtg, a ova 
 
 InlaraivTOy He answered thai those, who learn, learn 
 
 what they do not know. 
 Elnov otl &(xi\ua(jTwg onovd «Jo 1 [isv , I said that we 
 
 were wonderfully in earnest. 
 *'llidri yug, on t$ uvtwv xakov tl avaxvipoixo twv f^om;- 
 
 u<tTO)r, For I knew that something good would come out 
 
 of these questions. 
 
 Note 4. Sometimes on or us is omitted before this optative (§ 216. 4). E. g, 
 
 Tat/r' a.* oiyyuXov <ro<ru yuvouxot Tirrrjv V iv Yopois siigoi, announce 
 
 thett things to my husband ; and that he will find his wife faithful in the 
 
 house. 
 
 "On may be omitted also when it has already been expressed. E. g. U^mtov 
 ftiv <roo; Iltzgtxvous rivets ehiyiv, on Ma'^xaj /Av civu uri o^ubixa. hftiguv 
 a.'ro Sa.Xoi<r<rris hVov ' 2tuB-r,s £t a^uv i ff o t r o , and first he said to some 
 Parians, that Med cus icas up twelve days' journey from the sea ; and (that ) 
 Seuthes would be the leader. 
 
§217.] moods. 241 
 
 Note 5. Instead of the optative after u, on, w;, the indicative is often used. 
 E.g. Ugoti* o vruv on tt?v 'ExXa^a i A i uS-igou <rt, having proclaimed 
 tliat they liberate Greece, where iXivB-igoTiv might have been used. 
 
 §217. 1. The optative is used in the expression of a 
 wish, E. g. 
 
 2ol ds 3sol Toaa doHsr, boa yosol of t oi fitroirixg, And may 
 the gods give thee as many things as thou longest for. 
 
 Note 1. Frequently the particles si, si yaq, sl'&s, ug, O that, 
 are placed before this optative. E. g. El yag iywv /jiog ncug 
 nlyio/oto ti'rjv, O that I were a son of cegis-bearing Jove! 
 
 Homer sometimes adds %h to these particles. 
 
 Note 2. If the wish refers to past time, the aorist indicative is used after the 
 abovementioned particles (§ 217. N. 1). E.g. E7S-' i%£xo<rnv, that 1 
 had been cut off ! 
 
 Note 3. Frequently the aorist uQzXov 'from lipiiXu) with the infinitive follows 
 the particles £/'$s, ti ydg, cog. E.g. E/'S-' &><p&\iv poi xri^tftwv iJvat, 
 that he were my guardian. 
 
 Sometimes <y<psX*v with the infinitive is not accompanied by any particle. 
 E. g. "n<p-Xe pr^iU ecXXa; 'Agurroyiirevi x at Z itv > ® that no other man had 
 delighted in Aristoglton ! 
 
 2. The optative (generally with the particle av) in an in- 
 dependent proposition, very often implies uncertainty, doubt, 
 possibility, or inclination. E. g. 
 
 Ovxovv uv ijdt] twv &ecxtcov rig Xiyoif Now some one of 
 the spectators might (perhaps) say. 
 
 "l<j(og ovv slnoisv av, They might perhaps say. 
 
 c HdibK av ovv avxwv ttv& ol iat { v , Fain would I ask them. 
 
 EX t/c sqolto {is, rl rofil'Con fisyiojov sivai twv Evayogcc 
 nsnonyuivwv, slg nolX-nv anoqlav av TcaraaT alr^v , should 
 any one ask me, which of the deeds of Evagoras I con- 
 sider greatest, I should find myself in great perplexity. 
 
 Note 4. Frequently the indicative is used in the protasis, and the optative 
 with «v, in the a podosis. E. g. E/ yko prXi ravra, oH'ba, xect ruv avSgwro- 
 ^w (pa.vXo-io'i; a. v s"vv, I should be more worthless than the slaves, if I did 
 not know these things. 
 
 Also the optative is used in the protasis and the indicative in the apodosis. 
 E. g. Od; 'id zt <TJ5j vuxro; irct(>a.yiVi7&ot,i Travtrrgartqi, t" ti «£« fth "^po^ti- 
 £* in ro7; lo-iXn'XvS-offt, who were to come in the night with the entire army, in 
 case success should not attend those who had entered. (§ 213. R.) 
 
 Note 5. The subjunctive with \dv, civ, or %v is sometimes used in the ])ro- 
 tasis, and the optative in the apodosis. E. g. "Hv ru.£%x,u<ri <ro7s ^itpUots oi 
 XV*<p9i$ %\ctiva;, TkiuoTn; vipay sy^sV av XcLfioi 'ror'i, if the fuller S furnish 
 the needy with gowns, pleurisy will never afflict any of us. (§ 213. R.) 
 
 21 
 
242 syntax. [§§ 218, 219. 
 
 3. The optative with Sv, in an independent proposition, often 
 supplies the place of the indicative. E. g. 
 
 Ovx av (ue&el^trjv xov &qovov, I will not give up the throne, 
 
 where u*&rifi7iv is equivalent to ue&qoouai. 
 Avxbg fiivtoi eloped xoi, xal ovx av Xeicp&sirjv , I will 
 
 however follow thee, and I will not he left behind, where 
 
 Xsiqj&ilrjv follows eyo/ncti. 
 
 4. Frequently the optative (with or without av) has the force 
 of the imperative. E. g. El ds pr), XsioLooyog psv fjyolro, 
 twv ds nlsvowv sxaxsoav dvo xwv nosofivxaxuv oxgaxr^ycj ini- 
 fislola&rjvy and if not, let Chirisophus take the lead, and let 
 two of the oldest generals take charge of both wings, where 
 rjysla&ca, ini^isXsla&tov, would be less polite. Asyoig av, you 
 may speak, softer than leys, speak thou. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 §218. 1. The imperative is used to express a command, 
 an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g. 
 
 qnvys, begone ! qpsvysxo), let him depart, qpsvysxs, depart ye, 
 cpsvyixcooav, let them depart. 
 
 2. In prohibitions the present imperative is used after ^ 
 and its compounds. E. g. Mr\ Xsys xavxa, say not these things. 
 
 Note 1 . Sometimes /c*»» is followed by the aorist imperative, particularly by 
 the third person. E. g. Mfioi cot fAtkncdrw, and care not. 
 
 Mote 2. The second j)er son of the imperative is sometimes used for the third 
 ]>erson, when the speaker is in great haste. E. g. X<w££/ 'otv^o vccs uirn^irni ' 
 ri^ivi was rif, let every servant come hither ; shoot, every one ! 
 
 Note 3. The imperative in connection with a relative pro- 
 noun or relative adverb, is sometimes found in a dependent 
 proposition after oh&a (from olda, know). E. g. 0la& 3 ovv o 
 5 q a oov ; knowest thou what thou must now do 7 Olo&' ug 
 noirioov ,- dost thou know how thou must do? Olo&a vvv a 
 fjioi y tvio&a) ; do you know what I desire to be done to me ? 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 ^ 219. 1. The infinitive depends on a verb, 
 
 PARTICIPLE, Or ADJECTIVE. E. g. 
 
 " TfjLtig Pov).so&e ysvia&at, aixov aocpov ; Do you wish 
 him to become wise ? 
 
§ 219.] moods. 243 
 
 'A&rjvaiovg ndvxag fierce rov &slov vofil£sig dvvrjGEO&ai 
 n oifj a a i nsl& so&al ooi ; Do you think that you will 
 be able to make all the A thenians, together with your uncle, 
 follow your advice ? Here nsl&so&cu depends on noiijoai, 
 noirjaai, on dvvrjasG&ai, and dvvi^oso&ai on vopl^sig. 
 
 Asivog vo[ii£6iisvoq thai Is y siv , Being considered an 
 eloquent speakei . 
 
 The infinitive may depend on the verbs dyysXXofiai, algsopon, 
 axovco, dwyxd^w, dvlrjpi, dvcoyw, aifjow, aJiayogsvco, dnsikib) 
 threaten, dnsinsiv, ag%(o begin, fiovXofAcu, diofiai, diavoio[iai, 
 diddoxb), doxico, dvpafiai, iaco, s&tXw, i&co, tidofiai, seem, iXni^w, 
 skftofiai, ETiayysXXofiai, inslyofiat, iiiiTsXXoixctL, sTUTginw, smxEigsoa, 
 tv'xofAtxi, l/o) can, Ixetsvq), xaisgyd^ofiai, xsXevw, xsXofica, Xiyo), 
 XiXalopai, llaoo/jioti, [Mxv&dva, [asXXoi, vsfjisol^ofxai, vofil^co, oldec, 
 oi'ofiou, ofivvfu, ofxoXoysw, oQfxdco, oigvvca, ocpslXco, nagayysXXw, 
 nctgaivicj, TTCtgaoxsva^Ofxcu, naqacprnxi, ttsL&oj, Ttsigaoficci, nsyvxa 
 and t(pvv (from qpt'co), moTevw, noiiw, 7igoaigsofj.at, ngoodoxda), 
 ngooTiOLsofiou, ngooidoaw, oivyico, ovvlr^xL, ToXfxcta, vniG/veofiai, 
 (palvo/jai, (prjul 9 and some others. 
 
 It may depend on the adjectives ddvvaxog, S&og, dsivog, dl- 
 xghoc, 9vrocrog f tJiiTijSeiog, tioifiog, rjdug, Ixavog, xctxog, o$vg, Tii&a- 
 vog, gddiog, xaXsnog, and some others. 
 
 2. The infinitive is often used after verbs, participles, and 
 phrases, to denote a cause or motive. E. g. 
 
 &viaj ^Ayafii/jrovi X si tie (pogijvcti , Thyestes left it to 
 Agamemnon to carry (it). 
 
 Note 1. MtAX*/, followed by the infinitive (present, aorist, or future) of a 
 verb, forms a periphrastic future. E. g. Me A As/ rtB-ivctt, he is about to 
 place. 
 
 The infinitive is frequently omitted, when it can be supplied from the context. 
 K. g. (Aristoph. Plut. 1100 — 2) EJV Xpoi, trb rviv Sugxv exovrts ovruff) 
 <r<po$gx ; EPM. Ma A/', aXX' tpsXXov, sc. xotthv, Tell me, was it you 
 that knocked at tlie door so furiously ? MER. Not I, by Jove, I was going (to 
 knock). 
 
 Note 2. The pronominal adjectives 7ro7o£, xoioods, olog or 
 olog T8, and rrjlixog, are sometimes followed by the infinitive, 
 in which case they imply capableness. E. g. Ov% olog t sip 
 dnooo^rioai xbv yiXwv, I cannot drive away my laughter. 
 
 Note 3. It has already been remarked (§ 158. N. 3), that 
 the omitted subject of the infinitive is frequently different from 
 that of the proposition on which it depends. We remark now 
 that this takes place chiefly after ajdectives. E. g. na^cparig 
 doxrig I8s"iv , a star all bright to behold, where the subject of 
 Idslv would be xivd. 
 
244 syntax. [§ 220. 
 
 Note 4. In narration the infinitive often seems to take the 
 place of the indicative ; in which case some part of cpri^l or 
 Xtycj may be supplied. E. g. (Herod. 1. 86) Tov ph 8r\ 
 noiseiv t«i}t«, now he was doing these things, equivalent to 
 O fitv di) enoisE t«i>t«. 
 
 Note 5. The infinitive of verbs signifying to go is in some 
 instances omitted. E. g. (Aristoph. Ran. 1279) 'jByit ph ovv 
 ig to (StxXarelov fiovkopui, sc. Uvat, for my part I wish to go to 
 the bath. (Id. Av. 1) 'Oy&ijv xdtveig / do you command us to 
 go right on ? 
 
 Note 6. The infinitive frequently stands for the second 
 person of the imperative ; in which case the imperative i'&sXs 
 or &sXe is usually supplied. E. g. M^tiote ov yvraivX rjniog 
 sir a i , you must never be indulgent to your wife. 
 
 Note 7. The infinitive sometimes stands for the third person 
 of the imperative, in which case, the subject, when expressed, 
 is put in the accusative. It is thus used especially in com- 
 mands and proclamations. E. g. Ttv/sa ovXrjoag (fegsiM xolXctg 
 inl vrjag, oo)fj,a ds oixud 3 ffiov dojusvai, taking my arms, let 
 him carry them, to the hollow ships, and let him give my body 
 to be carried home. Axovsts, Xsco, zovg onXlictg aniivai y 
 hear, ye people, the heavy-armed soldiers must retire. 
 
 Note 8. Sometimes the infinitive is put for the first person 
 plural of the subjunctive (§ 215. 1), in which case du may 
 be supplied. E. g. Nvv iv ir\ c EXXixdi aaTa^elrarTag i^iMV av- 
 TtW enifieXrj&TJvai, for the present, remaining in Greece, 
 let us take care of ourselves. 
 
 Note 9. Sometimes the infinitive expresses a wish, in which 
 case dog may be supplied. E. g. Ztv 7tmt*o, rj AXnvia Xa%s7v, 
 rj Tvdtog vlov, Father Jove, grant that the lot may fall upon 
 Ajax, or upon the son of Tydeus. 
 
 § 320. 1. The infinitive is frequently put after words and 
 phrases signifying so that, so as; especially when its connec- 
 tion with the preceding clause is not very obvious. E. g. 
 
 AvxoyjiQtg b)xod6ixrjoav 9 wots >3-av{ia£ziv ipe, They built 
 it with their own hands, so that I wondered. 
 
 Ov yuq tnu&s jovg Xlovg, wore ewvioj d ovv at viag y For 
 he could not persuade the Chians to give him vessels. 
 
 The words and phrases, after which the infinitive is put, are 
 iq>' w, iy one, on condition that, buov, caw, w?, wots, so that, 
 so as. , 
 
§ 221.] moods. 245 
 
 2. The infinitive is put also after words signifying before, 
 before that, (as nglv, nglv tf.) E. g. JIglv xbv vopov xsxrrj- 
 vai, before the law was made. 
 
 Note 1. The infinitive with tog, ooov, ooa, o xi (from ooxig), 
 is often used in parenthetical phrases. E. g. c SLg snog sin si v, 
 so to speak. c Jlg studio at, as one might conjecture. c j2g iv 
 nXsovu Xoyw dnXwoai, to explain more fully. c Slg ovvsXovxv 
 sinslv, sc. Xoym, to express it briefly, or to be brief . c 'Ooov 
 y sp sidsvai, at least as far as my knowledge extends. "O 
 x i xa\u sidsvai,, for aught I know. 
 
 Note 2. In parenthetical phrases (§ 220. N. 1) wg is often 
 omitted, in which case the infinitive appears to stand abso- 
 lutely. E. g. oi noXXw Xoyco sin si v, not to use many words. 
 3 Eg xo axgtfisg sinslv, strictly speaking, to speak strictly. 
 J ox si v spot, as it appears to me. 3 OXlyov dslv, almost, nearly. 
 HoXXov dslv, far from it. 
 
 Note 3. In phrases like 3 OXlyov dslv, (§ 220. N. 2,) dslv is 
 sometimes omitted. E. g. cx O di) oXiyov naoai at nsgl xb 
 owua yd oval txovai, ichich almost all the bodily pleasures have. 
 
 3. The infinitive is frequently accompanied by the particle 
 Sv, in which case it has the force of the indicative, subjunctive, 
 or optative, with «V, (§§ 213. 5 : 214 : 217.) E. g. 3 Enl noX- 
 Xav av xig idslv doxsl fxoi, it seems to me that one might see 
 on many occasions. But *Enl noXXwv xig idslv doxsl poi, would 
 mean it seems to me that one saw on many occasions. 
 
 ^221. Frequently the infinitive has the force 
 of a neuter substantive ; in which case the neuter 
 of the article (^ 141. 3) commonly precedes it. E.g. 
 
 Kgslxxov sail xb awqjgovslv xov n oXvngay fiovslv , To 
 act discreetly is better than to meddle with other men's 
 business. 
 
 Zspvvvopsfra snl tw fisXxiov ysyovsvai xcov aXXcov, We pride 
 ourselves upon being of nobler descent than others. 
 
 Aia xb %svog sivai ovx av oVst adixy&fjvai ; Do you sup- 
 pose that you will not be wronged, because you are a 
 foreigner ? 
 
 Note 1. Frequently the infinitive with the article xov is 
 
 equivalent to the genitive denoting that on account of which 
 
 any thing takes place (§ 187. 1). E. g. My fis vnoXdfog ov 
 
 ngb? xb ngaypa qpdovsixovvxa Xsysiv, xov xaxaqpavsg ysvso&ai, 
 
 21* 
 
246 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 [§ 222. 
 
 lest you suppose that I do not argue in order that the thing 
 may become tvidtnt. 
 
 Note 2. The infinitive with or without the article to is sometimes used in 
 exclamations of surprise or indignation, in which case avovtrov, jix^v, ttlnS-tg, 
 or fAM^v irn, maybe supplied. E. g. (Aristoph. Nub. 268j To $1 fih xwinv 
 i'xoStv i\§s7v \fA rov xaxo^ctUtov' i^ovtoc., I, a wretch, have been foolish 
 enough to come from home without a helmet; literally, that I miserable should 
 have come from home ivithout a helmet. 
 
 Note 3. The infinitive eTvat (from tlfu t am) seems to be superfluous in some 
 instances, particularly in connection with the adjective txuv, willing . E. g. 
 (HerodoU 7» 101 ) 'Ex^ <rs tJvat olY ecv /uowo^ec^io^t, I should not fight 
 even against a single man, if I had my way about it. 
 
 So in the phrases To TVfictgov uvai, to-day. To vvv iHvui, now. To 
 ru/wrav uveu, generally ■, on the whole.. 
 
 Note 4. The infinitive is often put after the substantives 
 dvdyxrj, &spig, wo«, and a few others, in which case it has the 
 force of the adnominal genitive (§ 173). E. g. 'Arotyxr) as 
 ndvToc inloTaa&ai, sc. iaii, thou of necessity must know all 
 things, "Slqa (3adl£eiv, so. fail, it is time to go. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 § 222. 1. In general, the participle is equivalent to the 
 indicative, subjunctive, or optative, preceded by a relative pro- 
 noun, or by a particle signifying if, when, after, in order that, 
 because y that, although. 
 
 For the participle with the article, see above (§ 140. 3). 
 
 2. The participle in connection with verbs signifying to 
 know, to hear, to see, to perceive, to show, to relate, to remem- 
 ber, to forget, to be ashamed, to rejoice, and a few others, is 
 equivalent to the indicative or optative preceded by the con- 
 junction or*. E. g. 
 
 Tovto fAspvri fiai, oyo) in ay yslko pdvco , I remember that 
 
 you both profess this, 
 rvovg panTi^ofjLBvov xb peiodxiov, Perceiving that the 
 stripling was overwhelmed. 
 
 Verbs of this class are alo&droixai, alaxvrofiai, dxovw, yiyvco- 
 OXO), dzr/.w/uiL, dnX6(x) (also drjXoc ripi), diauvrjpovivto, diaoixyih), 
 dioKpioco relate, iv&vpiopai, gtra^u prove, iniXav&dvopm, inloxa- 
 pai, evQi(Jyo), Iduv, xuryyopta) denote, xXvm, fiav&dvut, nipvrjpai, 
 row, oldu, 6qiaw, nvvSdvopui, (paly (a, ^a/ow, and some others. 
 
§ 222.] PARTICIPLE. 247 
 
 Note 1. The participle after avvoida and avyytyvdoxai, fol- 
 lowed by the dative of the reflexive pronoun, is put either in 
 the dative, or in the case with which these verbs agree. E. g. 
 ^Efiavxoi Swydsiv ovdev i n i o"t a /i if » , / was conscious to 
 myself that I knew nothing, ffatg ovv ifiaviw tovt gym SvveL- 
 o open, cpsvyovT a it oli) a ag Srdga ; now how shall I endure 
 the thought that I have let a defendant escape? 2vy yivw- 
 axofxsj' avxoXoi r\fi\v ov noir\oao i og&oog, we are conscious 
 of not having done right. 
 
 3. Verbs signifying to endure, not to endure, to overlook, 
 to be contented with, to be satisfied, to cease, are connected 
 with the participle. E. g. 
 
 To dvvuo&ai dupwvTct ccvi^eo&aL, To be able to endure 
 
 thirst. 
 Jlavoai eplv agoov, Stop talking nonsense. 
 
 Verbs of this class are dyandw am contented, dvixoficu, 
 ctTtcdlaooofiai, tlp/co begin, ixXditw, ifininXufiea, h%nv udrjv, 
 xetfxvco, v.(/.0TtQ8(x), h'lyct), ncevco, nsgiogdct, TsiXrixet and tAtJ^om, 
 vnofisvw, and some others. 
 
 4. The participle is often put after the verbs dictylyvofieu, 
 Siayco, diajtXea), Xavdctvw, Tvy%dvco, cp&ava), and a few others, m 
 which case the leading idea is contained in the participle. 
 E. g. 
 
 Ho loo v diayeyivTjTai, He has been doing. 
 
 didyovoi fiav& ctv ovt eg, They pass their time in learning. 
 
 AictTzlova i dixd£ovxeg, They are continually deciding 
 
 cases. 
 Ai\r\&ot. ifiavrbv oocpog cjv, I did not know that I teas wise. 
 Tv yxcivofiev in l&v ft ovvt eg , We happen to be desirous. 
 <&& ckvsl dvafidg, He went up before. 
 
 Note 2. ^w is frequently followed by a participle ; in 
 which case the verb, from which the participle comes, would 
 have been sufficient. E. g. Kovyaa* I'/eig, for txgvipag, thou 
 didst conceal. El%s xazaoTgsipdfisvog, for KUTZOTgitycixo, 
 he subjugated. 
 
 The same may be observed of ol/ofxai and the Homeric ftij. 
 E. g.*'Sli%£To cpsvycov, he escaped. Bfj ysvywv inl tiovtov, 
 he fled to the sea. 
 
 5. The future participle is regularly put after verbs of 
 motion, to express the object of the action of those verbs. E. g. 
 *Hl & s ngbg ibv ^Ayr^olkaov doncto 6 fxzv og , he came to Age- 
 sildus to bid him farewell. Aiodluv &gfir\fiai , I am going 
 to show. 
 
24S syntax. [§§223,224. 
 
 Note 3. The present participle is used after verbs of motion, 
 when the time of the action marked by it is the same as that 
 of the verb. E. g. ni^insi (xi gov cpegovxa Taod' imoToXdg, 
 he sends me in order to bring these directions to thee. 
 
 Note 4. The adverbs avxlxa, i^alqjvr^g, sv&vg, fi£ja*u, afxa, 
 are frequently followed by the participle. E. g. MstccSv 
 &vcov, while he was sacrificing. c, A}ia xaTalafiovT eg , as 
 soon as they had overtaken (them). 
 
 6. The participle with the particle Sv has the force of the 
 indicative, subjunctive, or optative, with Sv, (§§ 213. 5 : 214 : 
 217.) E. g. To. dwaiwg av grj&evTa xcera rijg noXscog, those 
 things which might justly be said against the state, where 
 xd dixalcog av grj&svia is equivalent to ixelva a dixatoog av qi ( &zIt)' 
 but t« dixalcog Qr t &ivxa would mean those things which were 
 justly said. 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 § 393. Adverbs limit the meaning of verbs, 
 
 PARTICIPLES, ADJECTIVES, and Other ADVERBS. 
 
 E. g. 
 
 Ovtoj no iw , I do so. 
 KaXojc noioov, Doing well. 
 *£7iiT7]8sLog ndvv, Very convenient, 
 ndvv xaX^g, Very well. 
 
 § 22 4:. 1. The Greek has two simple negative particles, 
 ov, no, not, and py, not. (§ 15. 4.) 
 
 2. Ov expresses a direct and independent negation. E. g. 
 Ov os y.ovipco, I will not conceal it from thee. Ova old a, I do 
 not know. Ov% olog t st/u, / am not able. 
 
 So in direct interrogations, O v nagapsi'slg ; wilt thou not 
 wait 1 Ov* i]/6qevov ; did not I say ? 
 
 3. Mr\ regularly expresses a dependent negation. Conse- 
 quently it is put after the particles Xva, Snag, coots, oog, oq>ga, 
 idv, si, indv, insiddv. Also it is put after all relative words, 
 when they do not refer to definite antecedents. E. g. Ov* av 
 ngosXsys, el [if) inlazevosv dXrj&svvsiv, had he not believed that 
 he should prove a true prophet, he ivould not have predicted. 
 Edv di xig UseXavvr] xovg Sgxovxag, xal -u >} dsxyxai, and if any 
 one shall drive away the magistrates, and shall not receive them* 
 
$ 224.] ADVERB. 249 
 
 4. Mi] is used also in propositions containing a wish, an 
 entreaty, or a. prohibition. E. g. Jlavaavhjg njjovyput 7ion]uupz- 
 vog, fit] diva uTiTto&ou Trjg Itjtqs, Pausanias proclaiming that 
 no one should touch the booty. 
 
 In prohibitions, the present imperative or the aorist subjunc- 
 tive is used with ^. (§§ 215. 5 : 218. 2.) 
 
 5. Mi], after verbs implying fear or anxiety, signifies lest; in 
 which case it is followed by the subjunctive, optative, and some- 
 times by the future indicative. {[ 214: 216 : 213. N. 4.) 
 
 6. Mr, has also the force of an interrogative particle. E. g. 
 
 itv aoi ; do UH not $4 an to thee? where the per- 
 son asked is commonly expected to say no. But Ov mj <5oxor- 
 piv ooi ; expects or presupposes the answer yes. 
 
 Note 1. The negative particles very often correspond to 
 each other. The following are the negative formula 
 
 olts ovre nt it In r nor 
 
 ovdi oidi 7N it/it r nor 
 
 ov not nor 
 
 ' oib*i in it I" r nor 
 
 ovioi air t neither nor 
 
 o\ ... ovtb not nor nor 
 
 ovts oi m itker nor 
 
 ovti ovdi neither nor i 
 
 oiTt ol oi'di ni it In /•..... nor nor 
 
 oi it if oi; III it In r nor 
 
 fi}' t Tt </ ;// itker nor 
 
 fir t dt u * neither nor 
 
 pjjri in] neither nor 
 
 iu]it fufii neither nor 
 
 Note 2. The formulas ov ti y ovts ti, (sometimes 
 
 Tfc ol- T6, ovts y.ui. oi r? di, ) are equivalent to 
 
 .... ovts, when both clauses have the same verb. E. g. 
 (11. l,C03-4)Oi5 uiv (fOQur/yo^ Titoiv >).).0)r, 
 
 v>) , neither of the harp of surp< au ty> 
 
 which Apollo had, nor of tin Muses, who icere singing. 
 
 But if the \erb of the second clause is different from that of 
 the first, the second member (t*) of the formula has an affir- 
 mative meaning. E. g. Ovts ttqotsqov fjptlg r t Q!;r*[Atv noltuov 
 nobs vpag ' rv* t i&ilo^sv onordug noino&ui, we never began 
 the war against you ; and now we are willing to make a treaty, 
 where the verb of the first clause is JfeStyierj 
 second i&elopev. 
 
250 syntax. [§§225,226. 
 
 Note 3. The first negative particle of a negative formula is sometimes 
 omitted, E. g. T^vas oi'S' 'Kax»jv/j, for Oun Tgwu$ oi/S J c EA>.>jv/y, neither 
 a Trojan woman nor a Grecian woman, 
 
 § 225. 1. Two or more negatives, in Greek, strengthen 
 the negation. E. g. 
 
 ^Oxav fit) (pTJTs ymVqv tlvcu prjdsv, When you say that 
 nothing is beautiful, or When you deny that there is any 
 thing beautiful. 
 
 2. The double negative ov prj is put either with the future 
 indicative or with the subjunctive. (§§ 213. N. 5 : 215. N. 3.) 
 
 The double negative pt) ov is commonly put with the infini- 
 tive. E. g. Oix svavnwoopai to pr) ov ysytorslv, I shall 
 not object to saying. 
 
 Note. Two negatives destroy each other in the formula 
 Ovdstg oaxig ov, no one ivho (does) not. E. g. Ovd sv o ti ovx 
 rjQWTa, nothing which he did not ask. Ovd si g ov tmv tiuqov- 
 twv vntQtnfjV sos tov Xoyov, there teas no one of those who were 
 present who did not much praise the discourse. In this case 
 both negatives belong to the same clause. 
 
 3. Verbs and expressions, which contain a negation, are 
 often followed by the particle pij with the infinitive. E. g. 
 Tov te ropov idsixr viyv txvr&i val jolg rsoig ansinsTr]v ur\ dia- 
 Myso&ai, they showed him the law, and told him not to hold 
 any conversation with young men. y E^sqvoa^7]v fioojovg tov 
 (j,r) diaQQuio&svTag tig c, Aidov (AoXslv, I delivered the mortal race 
 from being utterly destroyed and sent to Hades. 
 
 Verbs of this class are dnavddw, dnayopsvcx), aneyopcu, am- 
 gtsco, aprsofiou (also the expression l^agrog slpi), sioyco, insxa, 
 notveo, qvopiu, and a few others. 
 
 PREPOSITION. 
 
 § 226. 1. The following eighteen prepositions are called 
 the primitive prepositions : 
 
 3 Au(ph about, around, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 
 *Avd, upon, on, in, through, with Dative or Accusative. 
 'AvtI, instead of, with Genitive. 
 *An6,from, with Genitive. 
 
 Aid, through, for, on account of, for the sake of, with Geni- 
 tive or Accusative. 
 Elg or *£g, to, into, with Accusative. 
 
§ 226.] PREPOSITION. 251 
 
 *£v, in, at, with Dative. 
 
 jE£ or '.Ex, from, of, out of, with Genitive. 
 
 jE7u, on, upon, to, towards, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
 sative. 
 
 Kara, down front, against, according to, in, in respect to, with 
 Genitive or Accusative. 
 
 Mild, with, among, after, with Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
 sative. 
 
 IIaQu y from, by, with, to, besides, along, with Genitive, Da- 
 tive, or Accusative. 
 
 IIiqI, about, around, concerning, of, with Genitive, Dative, 
 or Accusative. 
 
 Hqo, before, in the presence of, in behalf of, in preference to, 
 with Genitive. 
 
 JT^oc, to, to w ard*^ by, in addition to, with Genitive, Dative, 
 or Accusative. 
 
 2vv and in. with, togetAer icith, by means of, with Dative. 
 
 c 7Vn'o, ov<r, b< i/o/id, in h half nf with Genitive or Accusative. 
 
 l Tnu. undt r, by, with Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 
 
 Note 1. Most of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the ac- 
 cent back on the penult, when they are placed after the nouns 
 to which they belong. This is called anastrophe. E. g. 
 rVf uj r a n o , for A no r f N ¥ , from the tliips. £% & qmv vntq , 
 for 'Tjibq i% & Q w v , for the em mies. 
 
 Note 2. Some of the dissyllabic prepositions throw the 
 accent back on the penult also when thejf Bland for uul, am, 
 compounded with theme In this ease, the Attics use 
 
 the old 226. V 6). B. g. nuqa for nugtoTL from 
 
 Tidofiuij tit for tVftm from trtiui. 
 
 Note 3. In the early writers (as Homer and Herodotus), the 
 preposition is often separated from the verb, with which it 
 is compounded, by other words belonging to the same propo- 
 sition. This is called tmesis. E. g. *Anh piv i'&ave 6 aiga- 
 TTjyog, for Ani&avt jj.iv 6 axgai^/6^, on the one hand, the gen- 
 eral died. 
 
 Note 4. In case of tmesis (§ 226. N. 3), the preposition is 
 sometimes put after the verb. E. g. 'Si as <$' uno qivbv 
 Xl&og, and the stone knocked of the shield. 
 
 Note 5. In case of tmesis, when the same compound word is to be repeated 
 several times, after the first time the preposition alone is sometimes used. E. g. 
 Kara p.tv I X t v it a » avrov rr.v yuvauxa., xttra. Vi rot rixia., for KartXtv- 
 rai fjiit abrou ri\* yvvxTxa., x aril t v <r a,v Vi <ra rixveCy on the one hand, they 
 stoned his icife, and, on the otlier, they stoned his children, (§ 226. N. 3.) 
 
252 syntax. [ §§ 227, 228. 
 
 2. The following particles very often have the force of 
 prepositions. 
 
 v Aviv or >f Aisg, without, with Genitive. 
 "AxQig or "Axqi, until, as far as, with Genitive. 
 "Evsmx or c, Evsxsv, on account of, in respect to, so far as con- 
 cerns, with Genitive. 
 Mi/gig or MtyQh until, as long as, with Genitive. 
 nhp'y except, with Genitive. 
 c J2g, to, with Accusative. 
 
 Note 6. The old language has eicrxl for uto' ^iai for S/a * hi, uvi, th, for 
 ix ' tcctrcci for xctra, only in composition ; vagal for -ruga, ' tqot'i, vori, for 
 irgos ' iiTti(> for utreg * vara/ for £sra. The Ionic has iivtxat or tlvixsv for tnxa. 
 
 Note 7. A preposition without a case has the force of an 
 adverb. E. g. KaTaxisru ye tiqoq, in addition to this I will 
 kill (thee). 
 
 Note 8. In the old writers, a preposition is sometimes repeated. E. g. 
 *E* $2 xiu lv Mip(pt, and in Memphis. 
 
 Note 9. Sometimes the preposition, with which a verb is compounded, is 
 repeated. E. g. 'Av V '0$u<rffivs uvifruro, and Ulysses arose. 
 
 § 927. A preposition in composition is often followed by 
 the same case as when it stands by itself. E. g. 
 
 € Ttts qsv s y xo rrsg rag vavg zov I a& pov , Carrying the 
 
 ships across the Isthmus. 
 *Eo rjl&i us, It came into my mind. 
 
 CONJUNCTION. 
 
 § 228. 1. Conjunctions signifying and, but, or, 
 than, connect similar words. E. g. 
 
 UoXsfiov xal [idxrjg, Of tear and battle. 
 Jixaicag xddlxcog, Justly and unjustly. 
 'Ayanav rj pioelv, To love or to hate. 
 
 Conjunctions of this class are xai, and, t£, and, dkXd, but, 
 %, or, rj, than. 
 
 Note 1. The conjunction rj, or, means also otherwise, else. 
 
 The formula jj 5, means either or. The formula 
 
 noTsgov or noTsga rj, means whether or. 
 
 Note 2. The conjunction rj, than, is used after compara- 
 tives ($ 186. N. 5, 6). 
 
§ %-2 CONJUNCTION. 253 
 
 A comparison between two qualities of the same object is 
 expressed by means of two comparatives, expressive of those 
 qualities, with r n than, between them. E.g. ManxajTzgoi 
 r 4 uvdgsioTSQoi, more rush than brave. 'jLrro/^ua Ta^tTf^« 
 jj oocpajTeoa, I acted more quickly than wisely. 
 
 Note 3. The conjunction xa/, in the formula xal xa/, 
 
 means both and, as well as. 
 
 After adjectives and adverbs implying resemblance, union, 
 approach, it may be rendered as. E.g. 'O/aolcjg nmoi\y.aoi 
 xal c '0^tr]Qog t they have acted in the same manner as Homer, or 
 they and Hotiur hart acted in the same manner. 
 
 Sometimes xal means tvm, also. E. g. Kal \-lxdiig xovio) 
 uiTi°olrj(joti, even AchilUs is afraid to meit him. 
 
 ie 4. Ti is always enclitic (§ 22). The formula te 
 
 xal means both and. The formula t« xal (not separated) 
 
 means buth and. The formula xal re t?, or xal 
 
 r\. il ■ little stronger than xal. 
 
 Note 5. Sometimes a possessive pronoun or a posst 
 adjtetive and a genitive are connected by xal' in which case 
 the genitive is joined to the genitive implied in the pronoun or 
 ive. (§§67: 131. 1.) E.g. Qalfa (*q\ xal nuini. 
 a i <ia& uXov , sons of me and an indiscreet father. 
 
 2. The following list contains most other conjunctions. 
 
 ui, Doric, — h. It is used also by the epic poets, but only 
 
 in the formulas aX usv s <> that. 
 
 a\/.u («r, xul), Doric, zz: \ 
 «V, a particle implying uncertainty and indefinite nrss. It may 
 
 accompany all the moods and the participle. (^<S213- 
 
 222.) 
 
 Sometimes it is doubled. E. g. (Eupol. apud Athen.) 
 
 Ovg ovx av t\ho& i ovcV ar ohoTiiag tiqotov, whom for- 
 
 nurly you would not have appointed even inspector* of 
 
 irinc. 
 
 It must not be confounded with the preceding. 
 i (paroxytone), therefore, consequently 
 t (properispomenon), an interrogative particle. 
 
 cm («, zi), inasmuch as, btcu* 
 
 avjKo or ujufj (raTf, uoa), but. 
 
 ya, Doric, = yi. 
 
 yaq, for, never stands at the beginning of a proposition. 
 
 yi, a particle of limitation, at hast. (See also \ ^4. X. 1.) 
 22 
 
254 syntax. [ § 228. 
 
 yovv (yi, ovv) == yi and ovv united. 
 
 dal, = drj. 
 
 di, and, but, for, never begins a proposition. (See also fxiv.) 
 
 dy, now, indeed, in truth, prithee. Its compounds are dynov- 
 &sv, drj&sv, drjra. 
 
 idv or Sv or rjv (si, Sv), if, with the subjunctive. (§§ 214. 
 1 : 216. N. 3.) 
 
 «|, if, whether, followed by the indicative or optative. (§§ 213. 
 3 : 216. 1 : 214. N. 5.) 
 
 si ydg, for if. It expresses also a wish, O that ! (§ 217. 
 N. 1, 2, 3.) 
 
 indv or enrjv (insl, Sv), when, after, as soon as, with the sub- 
 junctive. (§§ 214. 1 : 216. N. 3.) 
 
 insdv, Ionic, = inav. 
 
 insl (inl), since, after, inasmuch as, with the indicative or 
 optative. (§§ 213. 3 : 216. 1 : 214. N. 5.) 
 
 insiddv (insudri, Sv), = indv. 
 
 insidrj (snsl, dr{), — snsl. 
 
 insiy\, poetic, •=. insidr\. 
 
 inqv, see indv. 
 
 r\, truly, certainly. It is also an interrogative particle. It 
 is often followed by pyv, nov, rol, ydg, or dr\. 
 
 rjdi, and. See also i]fiiv, 
 
 7ji, Epic and Ionic, == tf, or, than. 
 
 rjpsv rjdi, both and, as well as. 
 
 r\v, see idv. 
 
 t^toi (tJ, to/), used commonly in the formula tJjoi ^', or 
 
 ?] 7}Toi, either or. 
 
 In Homer tJtol is equivalent to {iiv. 
 
 &7\v, a particle of confirmation. 
 
 Ids, — 7) di. 
 
 Ivoc, that , in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or with 
 the historical tenses of the indicative. (§§ 214, 1 : 216. 
 1 : 213. N. 6.) 
 
 As an adverb it is equivalent to nov or onov, where. 
 
 y.u, Doric, !== xi. 
 
 tcs or xiv, Epic, z= Sv (different from Sv, if). 
 
 [isv, commonly used in the formula psv di, indeed 
 
 but, on the one hand on the other. 
 
 inqv, a particle of confirmation, really, indeed, certainly. It 
 is often preceded by yi, y, xal, firj, ov, and by interroga- 
 tive words (§§ 68 : 73 : 123). 
 
 fiojv (fxi], ovv), an interrogative particle. (§ 224. 6.) Some- 
 times it is followed by ^\ or oiV. 
 
§ 229.] INTERJECTION. 255 
 
 vv or vvv (short v) is a weak vvv, now. The form vv is found 
 
 only in the Epic language. 
 ofiag, yet, still. 
 
 onag, that, in order that, with the subjunctive, optative, or 
 future indicative. (§§ 214. 1 : 216. 1 : 213. N. 4, 5.) It 
 must not be confounded with the adverb onwg, as. 
 otav (ore, «V), when, with the subjunctive. (§§ 214. 4: 216. 
 
 N. 3.) 
 oil (oong), that, because, with the indicative or optative. 
 (§§213.3:216. 1.) 
 
 It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives or 
 adverbs. E. g. a Ori nltloxov xqovov, as much tunc 
 as possib/f . 
 
 Also, it stands before words quoted without change. 
 E. g. Eintv oil Jug xuiqov rjxtig, he said, " You have 
 come at the right time." 
 ovv, now, therefore. (See also §§ 71. N. 3 : 73. N. 3 : 123. 
 N. 4.)^ 
 
 xa (ov, tvexa), on account of which. As a conjunction it 
 mean- rinu , beawsf. 
 ocpQcty poetic, se \va or ontag. (See also § 123.) 
 nig, very, (ju/tt, uttliuuifh. (See also §§71. N. 3 : 124. 
 N. 4.) 
 
 , Epic, z= (lou. 
 ioI (for aoi, § 64. N. 2), ctrtainh/, indeed. It often corre- 
 sponds to the English parenthetical phrases you knmo, 
 see. 
 that, in orrhr that, with the iiu1i< <i optOr 
 
 tivc, or infinitive. (§§ 213. 3 : 214. 1 : 216. 1 : 220. 1.) 
 It strengthens the meaning of superlative adjectives and 
 adverbs. E. g. c fL g ra^/axa, as quickly as possible. 
 war? (ok, t«), so that, with the indicative or infinitive. 
 (§§213.3:220. 1.) 
 
 INTERJECTION. 
 
 § 220. Interjections are particles used in exclamations, 
 and expressing some emotion of the mind. 
 
 The following list contains most interjections. 
 a, ah ! of sorrow and compassion, 
 a, «, ha ! ha ! of laughter. 
 ctl, of wonder. 
 alftol, of wonder. 
 
256 syntax. [§229. 
 
 annanal or ananal, of approbation. 
 
 axxaXaxxaxa, of joy. 
 
 axxannaxxaxa, of sorrow. 
 
 axxaxal, axaxat, or axxaxaia%, of sorrow and disgust. 
 
 ($a($ai or fta(3aia$, of astonishment. Followed by the geni- 
 tive (§ 187. 2). 
 
 !' or g, «A / of grief. 
 
 el'a (sometimes tea), on ! courage ! 
 
 uiv, well, be it so. 
 
 iksksv, of grief or joy. 
 
 svys (sit, ye), well done ! bravo ! 
 
 svol, the cry of the bacchanals. 
 
 ijv, r\vi, rjvlde, == Idov, which see. 
 
 taxxaxal or laxxaxaial, of sorrow. Followed by the genitive 
 (§ 187. 2). 
 
 lav, lavol, ho ! in answer to a call. Sometimes it is equiva- 
 lent to LOV, 1(0. 
 
 Idov (oxytone), lo ! behold! (See also BIASl in the cata- 
 logue of Anomalous Verbs.) 
 
 U] f of exultation. 
 
 lov, alas ! of sorrow. Followed by the genitive (§ 187.2). 
 
 loi, of joy or grief. Followed by the dative or vocative 
 (§§ 196.5:204.2). 
 
 (iv, liv, of pain. It is made by breathing strongly through 
 the nostrils. 
 
 6d, woe ! alas. 
 
 6f, woe. Followed by the dative (§ 196. 5). 
 
 oi'poi or ol fj.01 (oV, fiol), woe is me! Followed by the geni- 
 
 . tive (§ 187. 2). 
 
 oxxoxdl, oxoxol, oxxoxoxol, or oxoxoxoxol, of sorrow. 
 
 oval, woe ! used only by the later writers. Followed by the 
 dative (§ 196. 5). 
 
 nanaly nanaidl, of pain, sorrow, joy, wonder. 
 
 7ro7r«|, nonot, or o5 TioTioi, O gods ! of complaint. 
 
 iivnal or 7iv7t7ta£, of wonder or admiration. 
 
 qvnanal, a cry used by rowers. 
 
 v v, expresses the sound made by a person smelling of any 
 thing. 
 
 q>sv, alas! Followed by the genitive (§ 187. 2). 
 
 cpv, = epiv. 
 
 oi (with the acute accent), oh ! of wonder or grief. Fol- 
 lowed by the nominative, genitive, or dative, (§§ 187. 2 : 
 
 _ 196. 5.) 
 
 w (circumflexed), O! Followed by the vocative (§ 204. 2) 
 
 won, used in encouraging rowers. 
 
§§ 230, 231.] IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 257 
 
 IRREGULAR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 §230. 1. Frequently a nominative stands without a 
 verb. E. g. (Xen. Hier. 6, 6) 'IrZcjTTfp ol d&Xrjjal oif, orav 
 IdicoTuiv yivcovrai xgelnovg, iovto «iToiv fiygexirei, alX , otuv 
 tvjv (tvTuywvioTwv ifiToi'y, tolt 3 «iTois elnu, literally, as the 
 athletes, when they become superior to inexperienced men, — 
 this does not gladden them ; but when they prove inferior to 
 their opponents, — this grieves them, where one might expect 
 
 ol It&XtjTlil TOVTO) tVefOaiVOVTOU, TOlTfo) UVHxJriLU. 
 
 2. If in the formula 6 piv 6 b*i a whole is expressed, this 
 
 is put either in the genitive (§ 177), or in the same case as 
 
 o pfc itt E. g.(Il. 16, 317-22) XeojoQidat d\ 
 
 o psv ovxeto Atvuviov o$i'i dovgl, Avx iXoxoq rov d «v- 
 
 Tttftog O QaovjUTjdrjg i'(p&r} OQ9$mp9rog, ttqIv ovidoai, the sons 
 of Xtstor. one, that is, Antilochus, pierced Atymnius with the 
 
 sharp spt ar but godlike Thrasynndes directed his spear 
 
 itnst him before he struck. (Soph. Antig 21, 22) Ov yug 
 rut/or nov rw xaoty* rjico Kgieov, tbv uiv ngoiiocLg, xov d 
 uTiuiwa; txti ; has not Creon given one of our brothers an 
 honorable buried, and left the other unburied I 
 
 8. Instead of the nominative, the accusative is sometimes 
 
 found. E. g. (Odys. 1, 275) IffWffl <5\ if ol $ru6g eyoo- 
 
 punti '/ituifo&tti, eiy heo 4$ uiyagov nctig6g> as to thy mother, 
 
 ht vtry much dtsirts to be married, let her go back to her 
 
 father's fatU 
 
 4. Instead of the infinitive, sometimes the indicative with 
 fl t Bg, or on is used : in which case the subject-accusative 
 stands alone. E. g. (Aristoph. Av. 1268-9) Jeivov ye tov 
 UfJQVna, rov naga roi'g {Sgorovg oi%6pevov , el prjdsnois vo- 
 oif-ffft netXir, it is a terrible thing, that the herald who was 
 despatched to the mortals should not return. (Ibid. 650-2) 
 Jig er Aioojtiov koyoig earl Xsyoptvov dij n, jj]V uXcotiex , tag 
 qkivoeog exoirwvTjosv dfTto nors, that in the fables of JEsop 
 something is said about the for, that she teas once scurvily 
 treated by her partner the eagle. 
 
 § 23 1. Sometimes with two or more substantives only one 
 verb is put, which can belong only to one of them. This irregu- 
 larity of construction is called zeugma. E. g. (^Eschyl. Prom. 
 Vine. 21, 22) ' Iv* ovts qpeavr^v, ovts tov pogqprjv ftgoTwv 
 22* 
 
258 syntax. [§ -232. 
 
 oysi, where thou wilt neither (hear) the voiee, nor see the form, 
 of any mortal, where (pcorr,r, properly speaking, depends on 
 ecxovoei. 
 
 § 232. The Greeks were fond of connecting kindred 
 words as closely as possible. This often occasions a confused 
 arrangement. E. g. (iEschyl. Ag. 836) Tolg avxbg avjov 
 7Tr t uaoi SagvrETcu, he is oppressed by his otcn misfortunes, 
 (Id. Choeph. S?) IZaoct cfi/.r,; cfi/.o) yvruLy.bg codgt, from 
 a dear wife to a dear husband. 
 
PART IV. 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 FEET 
 
 § S3 3. 1. Every Greek verse is divided into portions 
 called feet* 
 
 Feet are either simple or compound A simple foot con- 
 sists of two or three syllables ; a compound foot, of four. 
 
 SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES. 
 
 Spondee, two long ; as 0wXov. 
 
 Pyrrhic, two short ; as porog. 
 
 Trochee or Choree, a long and a short ; as prjxog. 
 
 Iambus, a short and a long ; as pho). 
 
 SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES. 
 
 Dactylc, a long and two short ; as mvojjev. 
 
 Anapest, two short and a long ; as yoiqwv. 
 
 Tribrach, three short ; as xrikopsv. 
 
 Molouu$ t three long ; as avdownoi. 
 
 Amphibrach, a short, a long, and a short ; as vorjTog. 
 
 Amphimaccr or Cretic, a long, a short, and a long; as 
 
 Bacchlus, a short and two long ; as idunvtig. 
 
 Antibacchius, two long and a short ; as Sv&gco7ie. 
 
 COMPOUND FEET. 
 
 Dispondee, a double spondee ; as ommvxyovvTou,. 
 
 Procdcusmatic, ... a double pyrrhic; as Xeyo/usvog. 
 
 Ditrochee, a double trochee ; as ovXXuftovreg. 
 
 Di iambus, a double iambus ; as ooqxaiaroi. 
 
 Greater Ionic, a spondee and a pyrrhic ; as noir\*iov. 
 
 Smaller Ionic, a pyrrhic and spondee ; as anoXmXwg. 
 
 Choriambus, a choree and an iambus; as oiopsvav. 
 
260 VERSIFICATION. [§ 234. 
 
 Antispast, an iambus and a trochee ; as StlaTripi. 
 
 Epitritus I, an iambus and a spondee ; as Ttagd&ovTwv. 
 
 Epitritus II, a trochee and a spondee ; as svloyrjaac. 
 
 Epitritus III, ... a spondee and an iambus; as rjyov^isvcav. 
 Epitritus IV,.... a spondee and a trochee ; as ivd-qwiioioX. 
 
 Pceon I, a trochee and a pyrrhic ; as Amopevsg. 
 
 Pcbou II, an iambic and a pyrrhic ; as axovopev. 
 
 Pceon III, a pyrrhic and a trochee ; as TsrvcpaoX. 
 
 Pceon IV, a pyrrhic and an iambus; as dXaloywv. 
 
 2. Arsis is that part of a foot on which the stress (ictus, 
 beat) of the voice falls. The rest of the foot is called thesis. 
 The arsis is on the long syllable of a foot. For example, the 
 arsis of an iambus or anapest is on the last syllable ; the arsis 
 of a trochee or dactyle, on the first. 
 
 Note. The arsis of a spondee is determined by the nature 
 of the verse in which this foot is found. E. g. in trochaic or 
 dactylic verse the arsis is on the first syllable, thus (-' -) ; in 
 iambic or anapestic, on the last, thus (- — ). 
 
 The tribrach has the arsis on the first syllable, when it is 
 found in trochaic verse, thus (~' w w ) ; on the second syllable^ 
 when it stands in an iambic verse, thus (~ =~ ~). 
 
 The dactyle in anapestic or iambic verse has the arsis on the 
 second syllable, thus (- ~ ~). 
 
 The anapest in trochaic verse has the arsis on the first 
 syllable, thus (-' ~ -). 
 
 § 234. 1. Verses are very often denominated from the foot 
 which predominates in them. For example, the verse is called 
 dactylic, when the dactyle predominates in it. 
 
 2. A complete verse is called acatalectic. A verse, of which 
 the last foot is deficient, is called catalectic. 
 
 Particularly, a trochaic, iambic, or anapestic verse is called 
 catalectic, when it has an odd number of feet and a syllable : 
 hyper catalectic, when it has an even number of feet and a 
 syllable : br achy catalectic, when it has only an odd number of 
 feet. For examples see below. 
 
 3. The trochaic, iambic, and anapestic verses are measured 
 by dipodies ; (a dipody is a pair of feet.) Thus, an iambic verse 
 of four feet is called iambic dimeter ; of six, iambic trimeter ; 
 of eight, iambic tetrameter. 
 
§§235-237.] trochaic verse. 261 
 
 § 335. Caesura is the separation, by the ending of a 
 word, of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. There 
 are three kinds of caesura : 
 
 1 . Ccesura of the foot ; 
 
 2. Ccesura of the rhythm ; 
 
 3. Ccesura of the verse. 
 
 1. The ccesura of the foot occurs when a word ends before 
 a foot is completed. E. g. 'lliov \ e$ctka- | na$e no- \ Xtv, %*- I 
 qgjus <5' a- | yvtus, where ^aXana^s, xriqwoz terminate in the 
 middle of the foot. 
 
 2. The ccesura of the rhythm occurs when the arsis falls 
 upon the last syllable of a word ; by which means the arsis 
 is separated from the thesis. This can take place only in feet 
 which have the arsis on the first syllable. E. g. ^?c, U- | g?g 
 Pqoto- I Xoi/s, {XL- | uiqore, \ ist^foi- | nh\ja, where the arsis 
 (gsg) of the second foot falls upon the last syllable of \4otg. 
 
 This caesura allows a short syllable to stand instead of a 
 long one (§ 18. 2). E. g. Tocoeg \ fisv xXay- \ fk t iro- \ titj 
 t laav | oqvi- | Oeg wg, where the last syllable (&eg) of ogvt- 
 &eg is made long by ar-i>. 
 
 3. The ccrsura of the verse is a pause in verse, so intro- 
 duced as to aid the recital, and render the verse more melo- 
 dious. It divides the verse into two parts. 
 
 In the trochaic, iambic, and anapestic, tetrameter, and in 
 the elegiac pentameter, its place is fixed. (§§ 240: 245: 250. 
 4: -255.) 
 
 Other kinds of verse have more than one place for this 
 caesura. 
 
 § 93G. The last syllable of most kinds of verse is common, 
 that is, it can be long or short without regard to the nature of 
 the foot. 
 
 TROCHAIC VERSE. 
 
 § 337. The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is the 
 trochee. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
 trochee. The spondee or the anapest can stand only in the 
 even places (2d, 4th, 6th, 8th). 
 
 In proper names the dactyle can stand in all the places, 
 except the 4th and the 7th. 
 
262 versification. [§§ 238 - 243. 
 
 § 23 8, The trochaic monometer consists of two feet. 
 It is generally found among trochaic dimeters. E. g. 
 
 Trjvds | vvvT. 
 
 §239. 1. The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of 
 four feet, or two dipodies. E. g. 
 
 All a- | votfivr)- \ a&svxsg, | w 'vdgeg. 
 Tcov xs | nalaoX- | w*> &- | ksivcov. 
 
 First with trembling hollow motion, 
 Like a scarce awakened ocean. 
 
 2. The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet 
 and a syllable. It is found among trochaic dimeters acatalec- 
 tic. E.g. 
 
 Tovxo fiiv ye rigog ctlsl 
 BXaardvsL notl Gvxotpavtu. 
 
 Tov ds | #€^u(w- | vog na \ AiV. 
 
 Could the stoutest overcome 
 Death's assault and baffle doom, 
 Hercules had both withstood. 
 
 § 240. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of 
 seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura occurs at the end 
 of the fourth foot. This caesura is often neglected by the 
 comedians, but very seldom by the tragedians. E. g. 
 
 Ela | drj cpX- \ Xoi Xo- \ yttai, || xovqyov \ ovx e- \ vug to- | ds. 
 
 Judges, jurymen, and pleaders, || ye whose soul is in your fee. 
 
 iambic verse. 
 
 § 211. The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the 
 iambus. The tribrach can stand in every place instead of the 
 iambus. The spondee or the dactyle can stand in the odd 
 places (1st, 3d, 5th, 7th). 
 
 The anapest can stand in all the places except the last. 
 The tragedians admit an anapest in an even place only when 
 it is contained in a. proper name. 
 
 § 242. The iambic monometer consists of two feet. It 
 is found chiefly in systems of iambic dimeters. E. g. 
 
 Km roig | xoloLg. 
 
 § 243. 1. The iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four 
 feet. E. g. 
 
& 244.1 IAMBIC VERSE. 263 
 
 e £xi(p [ <J* (jU I 71Q0OSL- | 7I0V, ££ 
 
 Toy drj- pov (X- j &cov a- \ Ofievog, 
 2novdag noir\- \ oa^tsvog \ spctv- 
 Tco, TiQcc- | y^iaxoov | xe, xai \ fxa^oov. 
 
 Trust not for freedom to the Franks, 
 They have a king who buys and sells. 
 
 2. The iambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet 
 and a syllable. It is found among iambic dimeters acatalec- 
 tic. E. g. 
 
 *AV7]Q CtVSVQTJXlV XL xoilg 
 
 Snovdouoiv r\ 3v ' xovx ioi— 
 
 Ktv ov- | devi fxs- \ xadco- \ osw. 
 
 That Sylvia is excelling, 
 Upon this dull earth dwelling. 
 
 § 24:4. 1. The iambic trimeter acatalectic consists of 
 six feet. It never has a tribrach in the last place. 
 
 Its verse-caesura occurs after the second foot ; sometimes 
 after the third foot. Sometimes the verse-caesura is entirely 
 neglected. E. g. 
 
 c Oaa dr) I dsdrj- \ yficu \\ xi\v l^iuv- \ xov xocg- \ di(7v, 
 'ilo&rjv | ds /5cu~ | «, || navv \ ds ftai- | a, xsx- | xugot' 
 C A d' co- | dvvrj- | &i]v y \\ ipa/A- \ fiaxooi- \ oyag- \ yccga. 
 
 Note. The tragedians admit a dactyle only in the first and 
 third places. E. g. 
 
 Kififxegt- | xov r^stg, ov &gaovo7iXayxvcog os xgv- 
 Tr^ og&ofiov- \ Xov Oefii- \ dog ulnvf.u}ja nut. 
 
 They admit an anapest only in the first place. E. g. 
 ddufiav- | xivcov dsoiiwv sv aqgr\xxoig nsdaig. 
 
 But in proper names they admit an anapest in any place 
 except the last ; in which case the anapest is contained in the 
 proper name. E. g. 
 
 'ft navxct vb)jn(ov, Tsi- \ gsoifi, didaxxa xs. 
 SfUU (jlsv ovdeig fiv&oc, Av- \ xiyovrj, qpiXoov. 
 
 2. The scazon or choliainbus is the iambic trimeter acatalectic 
 with a spondee or trochee in the last place. E. g. 
 
 Eyta ffriXcurlg, || r t nlfttoxog av&gooTioig, 
 Evxav&ct yr t gu || tw uaxoco xyAoifirjfiat. 
 
2G4 versification. [ §§ 245 - 249. 
 
 § 24fl>. The iambic tetrameter catdlectic consists of 
 seven feet and a syllable. Its verse-caesura is at the end of 
 the fourth foot; but this caesura is often neglected by the 
 comedians. E. g. 
 
 Ovxovv | nalai \ drjnov \ leya ,• || gv d* av- | rog ovx \ owov- \ eig, 
 c O de- | anoTrjg \ yag <prj- | oiv v- \ fiag t\- \ dscog \ anav- \ rag. 
 
 A captain bold of Halifax, || who lived in country quarters. 
 
 DACTYLIC VERSE. 
 
 § 2416. The fundamental foot of the dactylic verse is the 
 dactyle. The spondee may stand for the dactyle. 
 
 § 24 7. 1. The dactylic dimeter acataUctic consists 
 of two dactyles. It is found among dactylic tetrameters. 
 E.g. 
 
 Mvoxodo- | xog dopog. 
 
 2. The dactylic dimeter catdlectic on two syllables con- 
 sists of a dactyle and a spondee or trochee. E. g. 
 TrioS* ano \ xwgag. 
 
 § 248. 1. The dactylic trimeter catdlectic on one syl- 
 lable consists of two feet and a syllable. E. g. 
 
 c Alfirj- | evra no- | gov. 
 
 2. The dactylic trimeter catdlectic on two syllables 
 consists of three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or 
 trochee. E. g. 
 
 3 Alxav | ovfiepVTog | alow. 
 Jla^iTigs- | nroig iv s- \ dgotioi. 
 
 §249. 1. The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic con- 
 sists of four feet, the last of which is a dactyle or a cretic. 
 E. g. 
 
 *Sl fisya | xqvosov \ aojsgo- \ nr\g q>aog, 
 3 Jl Atog | dpfigoTov \ iyxog \ nvgyogov. 
 
 2. The tetrameter catdlectic on one syllable consists of 
 three feet and a syllable. E. g. 
 
 JlolXct figo- | tg)V did- | fiSL^ofie- \ va. 
 
§§ 250, 251.] DACTYLIC VERSE. 265 
 
 3. The tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of 
 three feet and two syllables forming a spondee or trochee. 
 E.g. 
 
 OoiQiog | oovig \ Tevxoid' en \ ouuv. 
 Oid } vno- ] xkouwv, \ ov&' vno- \ Uiflwv. 
 
 § 250. 1. The DACTYLTC PENTAMETER aCCltahctic COn- 
 
 sists of five feet, the last of which is a dactyle. E. g. 
 
 J2 yjtovi- | ui pugv- | uyeeg \ opflgocfo- \ qoi &' upa. 
 
 2. The dactylic pentameter catalectic on one syllable 
 consists of four feet and a syllable. E. g. 
 
 Tcjv iiiyu- | ).ojv zJara- \ uv vno- | x).)^ous- | rctr. 
 
 8. The dactylic pentameter catalectic on two syllables 
 consists of four feet and two syllables. E. g. 
 
 \1toh- I tag utt/i- | uovg, idu- \ rj \ayo- \ duiTug. 
 
 4. T i \< ii \ i- consists of two trimeters cata- 
 lectic on one syllable (§ 24^. 1). The first hemistich almost 
 
 in a long syllable. The verse-caesura occurs after 
 the a cond foot. Thta kind of verse is customarily subjoined 
 to the heroic hexameter. E. g. 
 
 7.50 V noffliiuv o/ nuaiv o\y.ur y 
 
 i/.uv- I Ttir, ttdi- | Xttg \\ zoJjUutu | nuaupE- | rog. 
 
 "£•71. 1. The dacivi.k mulambtbr acatalcctic coi 
 
 i . feet, the last <>1* winch id ;i dactyle. It is used by the 
 liaM in systems of tetrameters. E. g. 
 
 | navTOL- I ag Cfdo- \ vqtog u- | Ltti flops- \ via yuoiv. 
 
 2. The dactylic hexameter (or heroic hexameter) cata- 
 lectic on two syllables f consists of six feet, the last of which is 
 a spondee or trochee. The fifth foot is commonly a dactyle. 
 
 The predominant rwsi-cffsura is that in the middle of the 
 third foot ; either directly after the arsis, or in the middle of 
 the thesis of a dactyle. E. g. 
 
 \li^na tioi ' tirsns, | fiovoct, \\ no- \ Xvioonov, j 6g paka \ no/lu 
 
 Jl'/AtyxSi), i- j nsi Tool- ! r t g || Is- \ gov moll- \ s&oov #- \ nsgosv. 
 
 Sometimes the verse-casura occurs immediately after the 
 arsis of the fourth foot. E. g. 
 
 Aqvifitroq rn* ts frvriiv, \\ xctl vooxov haloow. 
 
 23 
 
266 versification. [ §§ 25:2-255. 
 
 ANAPESTIC VERSE. 
 
 § 9o9. The fundamental foot of the anapestic verse is the 
 anapest. The spondee, the dactyle, or the proceleusmatic, may 
 stand for the anapest. 
 
 A dactyle very seldom precedes an anapest in the same 
 dipody. 
 
 § 95 3* The anapestic monometer consists of two feet. 
 E.g. 
 
 Toov 6- | ^vfiouv. 
 
 §954. 1. The anapestic dimeter acatalectic consists 
 of four feet, the last of which is either an anapest, a spondee, 
 or a trochee. 
 
 The legitimate verse-caesura is in the second arsis. It is 
 often made, however, in the short syllable immediately after 
 the second arsis. E. g. 
 
 Ti ov ngog \ /usXa&goig ; j| tl ov xr r \ 8s noXeig, 
 (T>oifi ; ad i- \ xsig ai, || Tifiag \ ii'sgcov 
 AcpOQi- I £o[xsvog || y.vli y.ona- \ ttovcov. 
 
 Tabourgi, tabourgi, || thy larum afar 
 
 Gives hope to the valiant || and promise of war. 
 
 2. The anapestic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet 
 and a syllable. It has no caesura. E. g. 
 
 Ilohiuov | oiTcpog \ Tiage^ov- \ xsg. 
 
 Note. Anapestic dimeters consisting wholly of spondees 
 are not uncommon. E. g. 
 
 Asdala dsiXctlov yrjgcog y 
 AovXuag rag ov xlaxag. 
 
 § 2o*>. The anapestic tetrameter catalectic (called 
 also Aristophaneari) consists of seven feet and a syllable. 
 
 The verse-caesura comes after the fourth foot ; in some in- 
 stances, after the short syllable immediately following the 
 fourth foot. E. g. 
 
 Ovjioi | Tiunsjj?] | ngog xo&e- | ctxgo v \\ le^cov, | cue 8s m \ $iog e~ \ 
 
 on. 
 diafal- \ ).o t usvog \ 8' vno xcov \ tyd-guv \\ Iv^A&rj- \ vaioig \ 
 
 t(/%v ; jov- | loig, 
 Slg y.(a~ | fuoidei \ xr\v nokiv \ rjfjicov, \\ Y.m xov \ drjpov | xa&vfigt,- | 
 
 flit- 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 In the following indexes, the figures designate the sections (§) and their 
 divisions : N. stands for Note, and R. for Remark. 
 
 a, 1. 2. — changes of, 2. N. 3. 
 
 — quantity of, 2: 17. N. 3: 
 31. N. 1 : 33. N. 2 : 35. 
 N. 1:36. N. 5: 49. N. 3.— ! 
 privative, 135. 4. 
 
 -a pure, nouns in, 31. 3. — 2 
 aor. act. in, 85. N. 2. 
 
 -«, voc. sing, in, 31.4. — nom. 
 sing, masc. in, 31. N. 3. 
 
 -«, gen. sing, in, 31. N. 3. — 
 voc. sing, of the third declen- 
 sion in, 38. N. 1. 
 
 ays or qiot followed by the subj., 
 
 ^ 215. 2. 
 
 otducfo*, with dat., 195. 1. — 
 with gen., 195. N. 1. 
 
 -ddr,)', see -5r t y. 
 
 -a'^v, patronymics in, 127. 1. 
 
 as contracted into rj, 23. N. 1. 
 
 -d&co, -e&b), -vd-w, verbs in, 96, 
 12. 
 
 a. for «, 2. N. 3. 
 
 -at permits the accent to be 
 on the antepenult, 20. N. 1. 
 
 — elided, 25. N. 1. 
 ahagerr!?, voc. sing, of, 31. R. 1. 
 -alvoj, circj, verbs in, 96. 7. 
 -aloe, adjectives in, 62. 3 : 131. 
 
 1: 138. N. 1. 
 -aig, -aioa, aor. part, in, 90. N. \ 
 -aiGi, dat. plur. in, 31. N. 3. 
 
 aijido^at with ace. and gen., 
 183. 1. — with two accusa- 
 tives, 183. R. 1. 
 
 -cty.iQ, adverbs in, 120. 
 
 dy.ovcj with gen., 179. 1. — with 
 ace, 179. N. 1. — with ace. 
 and gen., 179. N. 2. 
 
 -aXsog, adjectives in, 131. 3. 
 
 ak/.odanog, 73. 2. 
 
 ulholog, with gen., 186. 2. 
 
 ( a).o ? , 73. 2. — neuter of, 33. 
 N. 1. — with a plural verb, 
 157. 4. — with gen., 186.2. 
 
 lOlojoioz with gen., 186. 2. — 
 with dat., 186. R. 
 
 £Ur, 36. N. 1. 
 
 dlmcu with gen., 183. R. 1. 
 
 tdn'mr*, inflection of, 36. 2. 
 
 ajuqoregog, 73. 2. 
 
 diKfoj, 73. 2. — agrees with a 
 plural substantive, 137. N. 8. 
 
 -ar, gen. plur. in, 31. N. 3. 
 
 -«r, perf. act. 3d pers. plur. in, 
 85. N. 1. 
 
 u\dyv.r t , d-suic, won, followed by 
 the inf.,' 221. N. 4. 
 
 aval 36. N. 1. — voc. sing, of, 
 38. N. 4. 
 
 «j>?;o, inflection of, 40. 2. — ac- 
 cent of, 40. N. 3. — sub- 
 joined to certain nouns, 136. 
 R. 
 
268 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 -tFioc, national appellatives in, 
 127* 3. 
 
 LiiTioTyoyo*, see irmrtiog, 
 
 SSiog, attas, with gen., 190. 2. 
 — with dat., 190. N. 3. 
 
 uiioio with ace. and gen., 190. 
 N.4. 
 
 uo and «co changed into fw, 2. 
 N. 3. 
 
 -«o, -acov, gen. in, 31. N. 3 
 
 inolavm with gen., 178. 2. — 
 with ace, 178. N. 1. 
 
 \4n6kXav, ace. sing, of, 37. N. 
 o . _voc. sing, of, 38. N. 2. 
 
 dnooTtgtb), with two accusa- 
 tives, 165. 1. — with ace. 
 and gen., 165. R. 
 
 -ciQ, accent of the contracted 
 forms of some nouns in, 36. 
 N. 3. 
 
 APHN, inflection of, 40. 3. 
 
 -dgiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 
 
 -ag, neuters in, 42. — adjec- 
 tives in, 53. 1, R. 1. — nu- 
 merals in, 62. 1. — fern, pa- 
 tronymics in, 127. 1. 
 
 -aoxov, -aoxo(Ai]v, see -boxov, 
 -eoy.oiiirjv. 
 
 acmfe, dat. plur. of, 40. N. 2. 
 
 5« with gen. absolute, 192. 
 N. 2. 
 
 -uxr^y national appellatives in, 
 127. 3. 
 
 -avg, inflection of nouns in, 
 43.2. 
 
 avTog, inflection of, 65. 1. — 
 Ionic forms of, 65. N. — 
 neuter of, 33. N. I. — com- 
 parison of, 57. N. 5. — how 
 used, 144. — superfluous, 
 144. N. 1. — subjoined to 
 the relative pronoun, 144. 
 R. 1. — signifies self, very, 
 144. 2. — has the appearance 
 of iyci, ov, rjjjiEig, vptig, 144. 
 
 N. 2. — signifies porog, 144. 
 N. 3. — used in cases of 
 contrast, 144. R. 2. — de- 
 notes the principal person, 
 144. R. 3. — in connection 
 with kavTov, 144. N. 4. — 
 with ordinal numbers, 144. 
 N. 5. — equivalent to the 
 demonstrative pronoun, 144. 
 N. 6. — with the article be- 
 fore it, 65. 2: 144. 3. 
 
 ayoiLQionaij with two accusa- 
 tives, 165. 1. — with ace. 
 and gen., 165. R. 
 
 acpvrj, accent of the gen. plur. 
 of, 31. N. 2. 
 
 -aw, see -y. 
 
 -u%ov, see ov. 
 azQig or a%gi, 
 
 194. 
 a co, see wo. 
 
 15. 3. with gen., 
 
 B. 
 
 (3av, 1. N. 3. 
 
 /3r t with a part., 222. N. 2. 
 
 pi, a short vowel before, 17. 4. 
 — augment of verbs begin- 
 ning with, 76. N. 2. 
 
 fiogsag, contraction of, 32. N. 
 2, 
 
 fiovlsi or &eleig with subj., 215. 
 3, N. 2. 
 
 fiovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. — 
 ace. sing, of, 37. N. 1. — 
 inflection of, 43. 2. 
 j: 
 
 yaXa, inflection of, 36. N. 2. 
 
 yuoxriQy inflection of, 40. 1. — 
 accent of, 30. N. 3. 
 
 yelwg, compounds of, 55. N. 3. 
 
 \yev(a with ace. and gen., 179. 
 N. 3. — with two accusa- 
 tives, ibid. 
 
 yr\ omitted after the article, 
 140. N. 5. 
 
 yk, yv, a short vowel before, 17. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 269 
 
 4. — augment of verbs be- 
 ginning with, 76. N. 2. 
 
 yu, a short vowel before, 17. 4. 
 
 y vw ),irj omitted after the article, 
 140. N. 5. 
 
 ygavg, nominative of, 36. 2. — 
 inflection of, 43. 2. 
 A. 
 
 ddpcxg, inflection of. 36. N. 2. 
 
 -ds, -as, -£s, adverbs in, 121. 3. 
 
 — -ds appended to what, 
 121. N. 2. 
 
 ds7, subject of, 159. N. 1.— 
 with gen. and ace, or with 
 gen. and dat., 181. N. 1, 2. 
 
 — Sslv omitted in certain 
 phrases, 220. N. 3. 
 
 Suva, 69. 2. — with the article, 
 140. N. 10. 
 
 dsonoTTjc, accent of the voc. 
 sing, of, 31. R. 2. 
 
 dsiTsgog, 61. — with gen., 186. 
 2. 
 
 Arjur^riQ, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
 accent of, 40. N. 3. 
 
 -dr t v y -ddr t v, adverbs in, 119. 2. 
 
 diutysQG), diacpsooviojQ, with gen., 
 186. N. 3. 
 
 didcpogog with gen., 186. 2. — 
 with dat., 186. R. 
 
 8r/«ufj.a, 1. N. 3. 
 
 du, dr, a short vowel before, 
 ' 17. 4. 
 
 -bov, -ijdov, adverbs in, 119. 3. 
 
 dovgs and oaas take plural ad- 
 jectives, 137. N. 7. 
 
 dvo, 60. 1. — agrees with a plu- 
 ral substantive, 137. N. 8. 
 
 did-, see sv. 
 
 E. 
 
 f, why called ipdov, 1. N. I. — 
 changes of, 2. N. 3. 
 
 -fa, ace. sing, in, 46. N. 3. — 
 pluperf. act. in, 85. N. 4. 
 23* 
 
 -esiv, 2 aor. act. infin. in, 89. 
 
 N. 3. 
 -b&co, see -d&co. 
 si for s, 2. N. 3. — augment of 
 
 verbs beginning with, 80. 
 
 N. 4. 
 -si, see -/. 
 
 -sia, aor. act. opt. in, 87 N. 3. 
 stfxl, am, omitted, 157. N. 10. 
 
 — with gen., 175. — with 
 dat, 196. 3, N. 2. —infin. 
 of, 221, N. 3. 
 
 shut apparently superfluous, 
 221. N. 3. 
 
 -sivog, adjectives in, 131. 2. 
 
 -sig, adjectives in, 53. 2. — 
 dat. plur. of adjectives in, 
 53. R. 2. — participles in, 
 53. 3. 
 
 sig, 60. 1 . — omitted before the 
 gen., 175. N. 3. — with dat., 
 195. N. 4. 
 
 it in composition, 5. N. 1 : 7. 
 N. : 9. N. — before a con- 
 sonant, 15. 4. 
 
 txuoTog, 73. 2. — with the ar- 
 ticle, 140. N. 7. — with a 
 plural verb, 157. 4. 
 
 sy.uTSQog, 73. 2. 
 
 s-Asivog, inflection of, 70. — dia- 
 lects of, 70. N. 1. — neuter 
 of, 33. N. 1. — how used, 
 149. 2. — corresponds to the 
 English he, 149. N. 2. 
 
 i{iov, s(jLol, ifii, more emphatic 
 than pov, not, fis, 143. N. 4. 
 
 — after prepositions, ibid. 
 -sv, infin. in, 89. N. 2. 
 
 iv before g, a, £ 12. N. 3. 
 svavxlog and uvxioTqoyog with 
 
 gen., 186. N. 2. 
 svoxog with gen., 183. N. 3. 
 e| becomes §x t when, 15. 4. 
 so contracted into tv, 23. N. 1. 
 
270 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 koQTiuu}, augment of, 80. R. 2. 
 -sag. adjectives in, 4&3: 131.2. 
 inloypa, I N. 3, 
 -tgog, adjectives in, 131. 3. 
 -.%\ neuters in, 4*3. — 2d pers. 
 
 ring, in, 85. N. 3. 
 -soxor, -eaxoutp', -aoxov, -aoxo- 
 
 fi$]V t see -oxQVy -gx6^li]v. 
 -set or -soot, dat. plur. in, 35. 
 
 N. 3. 
 I'rtyog, 73. 2. — with gen., 186. 
 
 2. 
 hr^Tiaiy accent of the gen. plur. 
 
 of, 31. N. 2. 
 tv and • dva-, augment of verbs 
 
 beginning with, 82. 3. 
 ev and xaxbie with certain verbs, 
 
 165. N. 2. 
 -svg inflection of nouns in, 44. 
 
 — ace. sing, of nouns in, 
 44. N. 1. — nom. plur. of 
 nouns in, 44. N. 3. — Ionic- 
 inflection of nouns in, 44. 
 N. 4. — appellatives in, 127. 
 3,6. 
 
 eq>' w, ecp wis, with infin., 220. 1. 
 
 t X w" with' gen., 188. N. 1. — 
 with part., 222. N. 2. 
 
 -«a», cW, gen. in, 31. N. 3. 
 
 -sw, contraction of dissyllabic 
 verbs in, 116. N. 1, R. 
 Z. 
 
 £, power of, 5. 2, N, 2. — at 
 the beginning of a word 
 does not always make posi- 
 tion, 17. N. 2. 
 
 -fc, see -de. 
 
 -In, verbs in, 96. 4, N. 5, 6, 7. 
 //. 
 
 ?7, original power of, 1. N. 1. — 
 changes of, 2. N. 3. 
 
 -r\ or -fx^/J, adverbs in, 121. 4. 
 
 — becomes -??, 121. N. 4. 
 
 v tt than, 228. 1 . — after com- 
 paratives, 186. N. 5, 6. — 
 
 between two comparatives, 
 228. N. 2. 
 
 v for bw, 3. N. 3. 
 
 -w<5ov, see -<5oY. 
 
 -7] <5' oc, 152. 
 
 -ifwft adjectives in, 131.5. — 
 contraction of adjectives in, 
 53. N. 1. 
 
 rfi for u, 3. N. 3. 
 
 i\xto with gen., 188. N. — pres- 
 ent of, 209. N. 2. 
 
 i]Uxog, 73. 1. — attracted by 
 the antecedent, 151. R. 5. 
 
 -^yto's, adjectives in, 131. 3. 
 
 7}{itdoni6g, 73. 2. 
 
 rjftioXiog with gen., 186. 2. 
 
 -771/, adjectives in, 53. 4. — in- 
 fin. in, 89. N. 2. — optat. in, 
 
 87. N. 2, 
 
 -rjvoc, national appellatives in, 
 
 127.3. 
 -r)Q, syncopated nouns in, 40. 
 
 i, 2. 
 
 -77s gen. sog, inflection of nouns 
 in, 42. — ace. sing, of proper 
 names in, 46. N. 1. — ad- 
 jectives in, 52. 1. 
 
 -rjg, nom. plur. in, 44. N. 3. 
 
 -rjg or -i]oi, dat. plur. in, 31. 
 1 N. 3. ' 
 
 -riTr\g, national appellatives in, 
 127. 3. 
 
 -W*> S en - an( * dat. in, 31. N. 3. 
 
 -ywg, perf. act. part, in, 99. N. 
 O. 
 
 &<XT£QOV, 14. N. 1. 
 
 &eUig, see povlei. 
 
 frefiig, see avuyxrj. 
 
 -&tr, adverbs in, 121. 2. 
 
 -#t, 2d pers. sing, imperat. in, 
 
 88. N. 1. — becomes ™, 14. 
 N. 4. 
 
 -&i, -01, adverbs in, 121. 1. 
 &iyydv(x) with gen., 179. 1. — 
 with ace, 179. N. 1. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 271 
 
 doi.uuTior, 14. N. 1. 
 
 dvyaT^Q, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
 accent of, 40. N. 3. 
 7. 
 
 -i, inflection of neuters in, 43. 
 
 -# annexed to the demonstra- 
 tive pronouns, 70. N. 2. — 
 annexed to the demonstrative 
 pronominal adjectives, 73. 
 N. 2. — annexed to demon- 
 strative adverbs, 123. N. 2, 3. 
 
 -j, -el, adverbs in, 119. 4. 
 
 -la, nouns in, 128. 1. 
 
 -ladr^, see -Id^g, 
 
 -/^c, -iddriQ, patronymics in, 
 127. 1. 
 
 -idiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 
 
 i'diog, 73. 2. — with gen., 174. 
 N. 
 
 -lug, adjectives in, 131. 5. 
 
 Ugog with gen., 174. N. 
 
 -ixog, adjectives in, 131. 2. 
 
 -ipi, verbs in, 117. N. 14. 
 
 -ifiog, adjectives in, 131. 4. 
 
 -Ivdrjv, adverbs in, 119. 6. 
 
 -ivt], -icovT], patronymics in, 
 127. 1. 
 
 -ivog, adjectives in, 131. 2. — 
 national appellatives in, 127. 
 3. 
 
 -lov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 
 
 -tog, adjectives in, 131. 1. — 
 national appellatives in, 127. 
 3. 
 
 -ig gen. tog, eag, inflections of 
 nouns in, 43. 1, 3. 
 
 -ig, gen. idog or iog, 46. N. 2. 
 
 -ig, adjectives in, 52. 2. — pa- 
 tronymics in, 127. 1. — di- 
 minutives in, 127. 2. — na- 
 tional appellatives in, 127. 3 
 
 -loxog, -loxrj, diminutives in, 
 127. 2. 
 
 -lay.ai, verbs in, 96. 8. 
 
 i'oog with dat., 195. 1. — with 
 
 gen., 195. N. 1. — refers to 
 the limiting noun, 195. N. 2. 
 lorog, see -*W. 
 
 -htjg, -irivrjg, nouns in, 127, 3, 
 
 5. 
 iw, fut. in, 102. N. 1. 
 lav, -LOTog, comparison by, 58. 
 
 ■lav, patronymics in, 127. 1. 
 Lbjvr), see -lvtj. 
 itoTTjg, see -Iryg. 
 K. 
 
 xal og, 152. 
 
 xaxwg, see ev. 
 
 Hard, changes of, in composi- 
 tion, 10. N. 2. 
 
 xaTTjyooto) with gen. and ace, 
 183. 2. — with two geni- 
 tives, 183. N. 1. — with 
 part., 222. 2. 
 
 xegag, inflection of, 42. N. 3. — 
 compounds of, 55. N. 3. 
 
 -xlirig, contraction of nouns in, 
 42. N. 1. 
 
 xXrjoovoueu) with gen., 178. 2. — 
 with ace. of the thing, 178. 
 N. 1. — with ace. of the 
 person, ibid. 
 
 xoLvog with gen., 174. N. — 
 with dat., 195. N. 1. 
 
 xonna, 1. N. 3. 
 
 xgsag, Ttgac, inflection of, 42. 
 N. 3. 
 
 xvxewv, ace. sing, of, 37. N. 2. 
 
 xvcov, inflection of, 40. 3. 
 A. 
 
 layxava with gen., 178. 2. — 
 with ace, 178. N. 1. 
 
 h]$to, Irftdvw, with ace. and 
 gen., 182. N. 2.. 
 
 -Ilea, verbs in, 96. 6. 
 M. 
 
 -pa, nouns in, 129. 4. 
 
 lid, vr h with ace, 171 differ- 
 ence between, 171. N. 1. — 
 pci omitted, 171. N. 2. — the 
 
378 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 name of the god omitted 
 
 after, 171. N. 3. 
 piXag and tdlag, inflection of, 
 
 53. R. 1. — comparison of, 
 
 57. 3. 
 usXsi with gen. and dat., 182. 
 
 N. 3. 
 fuk$ t inflection of, 36. N. 2. 
 tiMo) with infin., 219. N. I. 
 -peno, -/uer, infin. in, 89. N. 1. 
 lAETcdayxdvb) with gen., 178. 2. 
 
 — with ace, 178. N. 1. 
 fiheoTi and nooorjxsi, with gen., 
 
 178. N. 2. 
 fisTe/co w r ith gen., 178. 2. — 
 
 with ace , 178. N. 1. 
 pixgig or pexgi, 15. 3. — with 
 
 gen., 194. 
 -fiy, nouns in, 129. 5. 
 m ' a 224. 3, 4, 5, 6. — after 
 
 negative expressions, 225. 
 
 3. 
 [irjdslg, plural of, 60. N. 1. 
 HrjTTjQ, inflection of, 40. I. — 
 
 accent of, 40. N. 3. — com- 
 pounds of, 55. N. 2. 
 -fit, 1st pers. ind. act. in, 84 
 
 1, N. 1. — subj. in, 86. N. 2. 
 
 — verbs in, 117. 
 (XL/nvr^yo), with ace. and gen., 
 182. N. 2. — with two accu- 
 satives, ibid. 
 
 fiv, augment of verbs beginning 
 with, 76. N. 2. 
 
 -fiog, nouns in, 129 3. 
 
 [iov, { uol y pi, see tfiov, ifiol, efii. 
 
 -pcov, adjectives in, 132. 5. 
 N. 
 
 v before a labial, 12. 1. — before 
 a palatal, 12. 2. — before a 
 liquid, 12. 3. — before o or f, 
 12. 4, 5, N. 2, 4. — in the 
 preposition (v. — movable, 
 15. 1,2. 
 
 vavg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. — in- 
 flection of, 43. 2. 
 
 rij, see pd. 
 
 vutdco with ace, 164. N. 2. — 
 with ace. and gen., 184. 2. 
 
 -wvb), see -Ww. 
 
 w5j, inflection of, 36. N. 1. 
 
 -vvw, verbs in, 96. 9. 
 
 -£, adverbs in, 119. 5. 
 
 0. 
 o, why called fiivoovy 1. N. 1. 
 -o, neuters in, 33. N. 1. 
 o for oc, 19. R. 3. 
 6'<5c, inflection of, 70. — dialects 
 
 of, 70. N. 1 . — how used, 
 
 149. 1. — as an adverb, 149. 
 
 N. 1. 
 6 di, see 6 (xev. 
 odog omitted after the article, 
 
 140. N. 5. 
 -otic, adjectives in, 131. 5. 
 oi for o, 2. N. 3. — for ov, 3. 
 
 N. 3. 
 -ov permits the accent to be on 
 
 the antepenult, 20. N. 1. 
 -ol, adverbs in, 121. 1. 
 ola with gen. absolute, 192. 
 
 N. 2. 
 -olrjv, opt. in, 87. N. 2. 
 -ouv, gen. and dat. dual in, 33. 
 
 N. 4 : 35. N. 3. 
 oi'xade, qjvyade, 121. N. 3. 
 olxelog with gen., 174. N. 
 oI'xol, accent of, 121. N. 1 : 
 
 20. N. 1. 
 -oLo y gen. in, 33. N. 4. 
 -oiog, adjectives in, 131. 1 . 
 olog, 73. 1. — attracted by its 
 
 antecedent, 151. R. 3, 4. — 
 
 with infin., 219. N. 2. 
 o'ig, inflection of, 43. 2. 
 oiod^ o dodoov, 218. N. 3. 
 -oioi, dat. plur. in, 33. N. 4. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 273 
 
 olxofiat with part., 222. N. 2. 
 
 okog with the article, 140. N. 7. 
 
 6 fih 6 <5f, 142. 1.— the 
 
 proper name subjoined to 
 6 piv t 142. N. 2. — are not 
 always opposed to each 
 other, 142. N. 3.— 6 pre- 
 fers to something different 
 from that to which o fiiv re- 
 fers, 142. N. 4. 
 
 oaoiog with dat., 195. 1. — with 
 gen., 195. N. 1. — refers to 
 the limiting noun, 195. N. 2. 
 
 epov, compounds of, with gen., 
 195. N. 1. 
 
 -oog, inflection of nouns in, 34 : 
 49. 3. — accent of the con- 
 tracted gen. and dat. of 
 polysyllabic nouns in, 34. 
 N. 2. — comparison of ad- 
 jectives in, 57, R. 2. 
 
 -og, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4. 
 
 -og, inflection of neuters in, 42. 
 — adjectives in, 49. — ab- 
 stract nouns in, 128. N. 4. 
 
 og ph bg ds, 152. 
 
 boov, ova, with inf., 220. 1. 
 
 ooos, see dovos. 
 
 ooTig, inflection of, 71. 2. — 
 has the force of the inter- 
 rogative pronoun, 153. N. 
 
 ooo), see ooov. 
 
 ov for o,2. N. 3. 
 
 -ov, or -a%ov, adverbs in, 121. 
 1. 
 
 ov, ova, ovx, 15. 4. — how used, 
 224. 1. 
 
 ov, augment of verbs beginning 
 with, 80. N. 4. 
 
 oi'delg, nom. plur. of, 60. N. 1. 
 
 ovdtlg boTig ov, 225. N. 
 
 -oi g, participles in, 53. 5. 
 
 oi'iog, inflection of, 70. — Ionic 
 forms of, 70. N. 1. — how 
 used, 149. 1. 
 
 OVTOJg, OVTGJ, 15. 3. 
 
 -oepi, gen. and dat. in, 33. N. 4. 
 u. 
 
 nahv in composition, 12. N. 4. 
 
 navTodanog, 73. 2. 
 
 nag with the article, 140. 5. — 
 without the article, 140. N. 
 6. 
 
 nmriQ, inflection of, 40. 1. — 
 accent of, 40. N. 3. — com- 
 pounds of, 55. N. 2. 
 
 -nloog, -nXdoLog, numeral ad- 
 jectives in, 62. 3. — with 
 gen., 186. 2. 
 
 Ttoloa, 73. 1. — with the article. 
 140. N.9. — with infin., 219. 
 N. 2. 
 
 nolig, Epic inflection of, 43. 
 N. 4. — compounds of, 55. 
 N. 1. 
 
 1102, derivatives of, 73. 1 : 
 123. 
 
 Iloosidwv, ace. sing, of, 37. 
 N. 2. — voc. sing, of, 38. 
 N. 2. 
 
 novg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. 
 
 Tigayixa, omitted after the arti- 
 cle, 140. N. 5. — omitted 
 before the relative, 150. 5. 
 
 — omitted before a verb, 
 157. N. 8. — omitted in the 
 predicate, 160. N. 2. 
 
 iiolv with subj., 214. 1. — with 
 opt., 216. 1. — with infin., 
 220. 2. 
 
 7iQoor\Y.u, see fxhson. 
 
 -TiTw, verbs in, 96. 2. 
 P. 
 
 o at the beginning of a word, 
 4. 2. — doubled, 4. 3: 13. 
 
 — augment of verbs begin- 
 ning with, 79. 
 
 -got, gen. sing, of feminines in, 
 
 31. 3. 
 q6 for go, 6. N. 
 
274 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 -^a>, verbs in, 96. 6. 
 
 () tptoai, red upl ication of, 79. N. 2. 
 
 cfinal, l.N.4. — movable, 15. 3. 
 
 -c, imperat. in, 117. N. 11. 
 
 a between two consonants, 11. 
 
 08 for £, 6. N. 
 
 oav or oocfinly 1. N. 3. 
 
 -oe, see -ds. 
 
 -a#«, 2d pers. sing. act. in, 84. 
 N. 6 : 86. N. 2 : 87. N. 5. 
 
 -oi, 2d pers. sing, in, 84. N. 6. 
 — 3d pers. sing, in, 84. N. 
 1 : 86. N. 2. 
 
 -a/, adverbs in, see -&i. 
 
 -oig, -ola, nouns in, 129. 3. 
 
 ok does not always make posi- 
 tion, 17. N. 2. 
 
 -oxov, -Gxourjv, imperf. and aor. 
 in, 85. N. 5. , 
 
 -(7X0), verbs in, 96. 8, 14. 
 
 oo changed into tt, see tt. 
 
 -craw, feminines in, 127. 7. 
 
 -craw, -ttco, verbs in, 96. 3, N. 7. 
 
 -ooav, -Trow, comparatives in, 
 58. N. 1. 
 
 g- for (jr, 1. R. 
 
 ovyyiyvwoxia, see awot^a. 
 
 -aw??, nouns in, 128. N. 3. 
 
 ovvoida and ovyyiyvcootca with 
 part., 222. N. 1. 
 
 -ocpi, gen. and dat. in, 35. N. 3. 
 
 o(ot7]q, voc. sing, of, 38. N. 2. — 
 accent of the voc. sing, of, 
 38. N. 3. 
 
 T. 
 
 ral for al, 63. N. 1. 
 
 TctXag, see fxsXag. 
 
 TS&Qinnov, 14. N. 1. 
 
 -tslqci, -TQtct, -rgig, feminines in, 
 129. 2. 
 
 -Tto£, verbal adjectives in, 132. 
 2. — neuter of verbal adjec- 
 tives in, 162. 2, N. 1, 2 : 
 200. N.2. — with dat., 200.2. 
 
 re£«£, see xQiag. 
 
 -TtQog, -jaxoQy comparison by, 57. 
 
 xrifaicovToc* 73. 1. — inflection 
 of, 73. N. 1. 
 
 -ty)q, -t?7c, -tojq, verbal nouns 
 in, 129. 2. 
 
 -T7)g, voc. sing, of nouns in, 31. 
 4. — abstract nouns in, 128. 
 N. 2. 
 
 t/?, inflection of, 68. — dialects 
 of, 68. N. — with the article, 
 140. N. 9. — how used, 147. 
 — does not always stand at 
 the beginning of a proposi- 
 tion, 147. N. 1. — for jiolog, 
 
 147. N. 2. 
 
 rig, inflection of, 69. 1. — dia- 
 lects of, 69. N. l._how 
 used, 148. — forsxaoTog, 148. 
 N. 1. — refers to the speak- 
 er, or to the person addressed, 
 
 148. N. 2. — with adjectives 
 of quality or quantity, 148. 
 N. 3. — denotes importance, 
 148. N. 4. — doubled, 148. 
 N. 4. 
 
 xol for ol, 63. N. 1. 
 
 roioods, 73. 1. — with inf. 219. 
 
 N. 2. 
 Toiovjog, 73. 1. — inflection of, 
 
 73. N. 1. — with the article, 
 
 140. N. 8. 
 -jog, verbal adjectives in, 132. 
 
 l._with dat., 200. 2. 
 T02, 63. N. 2. — derivatives 
 
 of, 73. 1 : 123. 
 Tooovrog, 73. 1. — inflection of, 
 
 73. N. 1. 
 -TQia, -TQlg, see -tsiqci. 
 tt for oo, 6. N. 
 Tvyxdvb), with gen., 178. 2. — ■ 
 
 with ace, 178. N. 1. 
 
 -TW£, 
 
 -TT)Q. 
 
 v y why called ipd6v, 1. N. 1. — 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 275 
 
 breathing of, 4. N. 1. — 
 
 quantity of, 17. N. 3: 36. 
 
 N. 5. 
 -u, contracts in, 43. 3. 
 -vdgiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 
 -v&co, see -d&co. 
 vi, improper diphthong, 3. 1, 
 
 N. 1. 
 vlog, omitted after the article, 
 
 140. N. 5. 
 -vkliovy -vXXog> diminutives in, 
 
 127. 2. 
 vfisdaTiog, 73. 2. 
 -v{ii, subj. of verbs in, 117. 4, N, 
 
 4. — optat. of verbs in, 117. 
 
 5, 6, N. 7. — 2 aor. of verbs 
 in, 117. N. 16. 
 
 vTiev&viog^ with gen., 183. N. 3. 
 -vg, contracts in, 43. 1, 3. — 
 adjectives in, 51. — parti- 
 ciples in, 53. 6. 
 vyiov, diminutives in, 127. 2. 
 
 (P. 
 cps'ge, see ays. 
 
 cpsvyco with gen., 183. R. 1. 
 -(piy gen. and dat. in, 31. N. 3: 
 
 33. N. 4 : 35. N. 3. 
 (foi'iv, compounds of, 55. N. 2. 
 cpoovdogy 14. N. 1. 
 qvyade, see ol'xade. 
 
 X. 
 Xovg, nom. sing, of, 36. 2. 
 Xgciopca with dat., 198. N. 1. 
 XO)], with gen. and ace. 181. 
 
 S N. 1. — subject of, 159. 2. 
 Xo/]OT7]g f accent of the gen. 
 
 * plur. of, 31. N. 2. 
 Xcoga omitted after the article, 
 140. N. 5. 
 
 W. 
 
 ipavco with gen., 179. 1. — with 
 
 ace, 179. N. 1. 
 
 Jl. 
 
 to, why called psya, 1. N. 1.— 
 
 changes of, 2. N. 3. — for 
 ov, 3. N. 3. 
 -a*, ace. sing, in, 33. R. 1. — 
 gen. sing, in, 33. N. 4. — 
 inflection of nouns in, 42. 
 
 — dual and plural of nouns 
 in, 42. N. 4. — Ionic ace. 
 sing, of nouns in, 42. N. 6. 
 
 — accent of the contracted 
 ace. sing, of nouns in, 42. 
 N. 7. 
 
 -codrjg, adjectives in, 131. 6. 
 
 -coyr, opt. act. in, 117. N. 6. 
 
 -ukog, adjectives in, 131. 3. 
 
 -cov, gen. and dat. dual in, 43. 
 *N. 3. 
 
 -wV, -avid, nouns in, 127. 4. 
 
 -cur, adjectives in, 53. 7, 8. — 
 inflection of comparatives in, 
 ' 58. 2. 
 
 (iovrjTog with gen., 190. 2. 
 
 -(and, see -cuv. 
 
 -coo, gen. in, 33. N. 4. 
 
 toga, see avdyy.r\. 
 
 -cog, ace. pi. in, 33. N. 4. — 
 fem. in, 42 — gen. sing, in, 
 43. 3: 44. — adjectives in, 
 50. — participles in, 53. 9. 
 
 — adverbs in, 119. 1. 
 
 ug with dat., 197. N. 1. — 
 
 with gen. absolute, 192. N. 
 
 2. — with ace, 192. R. 2.— 
 
 with inf., 220. 1. 
 co'g for zcJc, 19. R. 3 : 123. N. 
 
 1 : 152. N. 2. 
 coGTieg with gen. absolute, 192. 
 
 N. S 2. — with ace, 192. R. 2. 
 coots with gen. absolute, 192. 
 
 N. 2. — with ace, 192. R. 2. 
 
 — with indie, 213. 3. — 
 with inf., 220. 1. 
 
 aiv, diphthong, 3. 1, N. 1. — 
 for av, 3. N. 3. 
 
276 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 A. 
 
 Abstract Nouns, 128 : 129. 1, 
 N. 1,2. — for concrete, 136. 
 N. 4. — ace. of, after kin- 
 dred verbs, 164. 
 
 Acatalectic Verse, 234. 2. 
 
 Accent, 19-22. — kinds of, 
 19. 1. — place of, 19. 1, 2, 
 3, 4, R. 1. — words without, 
 19. N. 1, R.2. 3. — grave, 
 19. N. 2. — place of, in 
 diphthongs, 19. 5. — on the 
 antepenult, 20. 1,2, N. 1,2, 
 3. — on the penult, 20. 3. — 
 acute becomes grave, 20. 4. 
 — circumflex, 21. — circum- 
 flex on the penult, 21. 2. — 
 of contracted syllables, 23. 
 N. 3. — of words whose last 
 syllable has been elided, 25. 
 N. 3. — ■ of the first declen- 
 sion, 31. N. 2. — of the sec- 
 ond declension, 33. N. 3 : 
 34. N. 2.— of the third de- 
 clension, 35. N. 2: 38. N.3: 
 42. N. 7: 43. N. 5. — of 
 verbs, 93. — of verbs in p, 
 117. N. 18. 
 
 Accusative, 30. 4. — sing, of 
 the third declension, 37. — 
 how used, 163. - 172. — de- 
 notes the subject of the in- 
 finitive, 158. — after transi- 
 tive verbs, 163. — denoting 
 the abstract of a transitive 
 verb, 164. — after verbs sig- 
 nifying to look, fyc. 164. N. 
 1 . — after verbs signifying 
 to conquer, 164. N. 2. — two 
 
 accusatives after verbs sig- 
 nifying to ask, <$fc. 165. 1, 
 N. 1. — to do, to say, 165. 
 N. 2. — to divide, 165. 2. — 
 to name, fyc. 166. — synec- 
 dochical, 167. — in paren- 
 thetical phrases, 167. N. 2. 
 
 — subjoined to a clause, 167. 
 N. 4. — denotes duration of 
 time, 168. 1,N. 1. — of time 
 when, 168. 2. — for the gen. 
 absolute, 168. N. 2. —de- 
 notes extent of space, 169. 
 
 — of place whither, 170. — 
 after pa, v?}, 171. — omitted 
 after ^«, vv\, 171. N. 3. — 
 with prepositions, 72. — af- 
 ter adjectives, 185. N. 1. 
 
 Active Voice, 74. 1. — forma- 
 tion of the tenses of, 94 - 
 105. — how used, 205. — as 
 passive, 205. N. 2, 3, R. 
 
 Acute Accent, 19. 1,2. — on 
 the antepenult, 20. 2, 3, N. 
 1/ 2, 3. — becomes grave, 
 20.4. 
 
 Adjective, 30. 1. — inflection 
 of, 48-59. — of three end- 
 ings, 48. 1. — of two endings, 
 48. 2. — of one ending, 48. 
 3:54. — in og, 49. — in wg 
 gen. a, 50. — - in vg gen. eog, 
 51. — in?7£, ig, 52. — in dg, tig, 
 ovg, iJg, cov, cag gen. oxog, 53. — 
 compound, 55. — anomalous 
 and defective, 56. — com- 
 parison of, 57-59. — deriva- 
 tion of, 130-133.— derived 
 from other adjectives, 130. — 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 277 
 
 from subst., 131. — from 
 verbs, 132. — from adverbs, 
 1 33. — agreement of, 137. ■ — 
 mas. adj. with fern, subst., 
 137. N. 1. — referring to two 
 or more substantives, 137. 2, 
 N. 5. — agrees with one of 
 the substantives to which it 
 refers, 137. N 4. — referring 
 to a collective noun, 137. 3. 
 
 — plural agrees with a dual 
 subst., and vice versa, 137. 
 N. 6. — used substantively, 
 13S. 1. —neuter, 138. 2. — 
 used adverbially, 138. N. 1. 
 
 Admiration, Mark of, 27. N. 2. 
 
 Adverb, 29. 2. — of manner, 
 119. — of quantity, 120. — 
 of place, 121. — of time, 122. 
 
 — derived from nO^, 123. 
 
 — comparison of, 125. — an- 
 omalous comparison of, 125. 
 N. 3. — with the article, 141. 
 1,2, N. 1. — with gen., 177: 
 181 : 186: 188.2, N. 1. — 
 with dat, 195. 1. — limits 
 what, 223.— negative, 224 : 
 225. 
 
 Alphabet, 1. 1. — division of 
 
 the letters of, 1. 2. 
 Alpha Privative, 135. 4. 
 Anapestic Verse, 252-255. 
 Anastrophe, 226. N 1. 
 Antecedent, 150. 1. 
 Antepenult, 16. 3. 
 Aorist, 74. 3. — augment of, 78. 
 
 — reduplication of, 78. N. 2. 
 
 — 1st pers. sing, of 1 aor. 
 act., 84. N. 2. — in oy.oi', oy.6- 
 prjv, 85. N. 5. — inflection 
 of aor. pass., 92. — 2 aor. 
 mid. syncopated, 92. N. 4. 
 
 — formation of, 104: 105: 
 109: 110: 115. —2 aor. act. 
 of verbs in pi, -117. 12. — 
 
 24 
 
 how used, 212. — for the 
 perfect or pluperfect, 212. N. 
 
 1. — for the present, 212. N. 
 
 2, 4. — for the future, 212. 
 N. 3. 
 
 Aphaeresis, 26. 3. 
 
 Apodosis, 213. R. 
 
 Apostrophe, 27, 
 
 Arsis, 233. 2. 
 
 Article, 29. 1. — inflection of, 
 6'3. — quantity, accent, and 
 dialects of, 63. N. 1. — old 
 form of, 63. N. 2. — how 
 used, 139 - 142. — with 
 proper names, 139. 3. — ac- 
 companies the leading char- 
 acter of a story, 139. N. 1. — 
 with the second accusative 
 after verbs signifying to call, 
 
 139. N. 2. — separated from 
 its noun, 140. 1, N. 1, R. 2. 
 
 — two or three articles stand- 
 ing together, 140. R. I. — re- 
 peated, 140. 2. — with the 
 part,, 140. 3, N. 3. — adjec- 
 tive standing before or after 
 the substantive and its article, 
 
 140. N. 4. — alone, 140.5.— 
 without a noun, 140. N. 5. — 
 with pronouns, 140. 5. — with 
 olo! and IWtoc, 140. N. 7. — 
 with ro/oiTO?, 140, N. 8. — 
 with tig and ttoIoc, 140. N. 
 9. — with 8ura 9 140. N. 10. 
 
 — before adverbs, 141. 1, 
 2, N. 1. — before a proposi- 
 tion, 141. 3. — before any 
 word, 141. 4, N. 2, 3. — as 
 demonstrative, 142. 1. — be- 
 fore oq, oaoc, o(oc, 142. N. 1. 
 
 — as relative, 142. 2. — neu- 
 ter with gen., 176. 
 
 Atona, 19. N. 1. 
 Attraction with the Relative, 
 151. 
 
278 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Augment, 75. — kinds of, 75. 
 2. — syllabic, 75. 2: 76-79. 
 
 — of the pert, 76. — of the 
 pluperf., 77. — of the imperf. 
 and aor., 78. — of verbs be- 
 ginning with q, 79. — tem- 
 poral, SO : 81. — of compound 
 verbs, 82. — omitted, 78. N. 
 3 : 80. N. 4, 5. 
 
 B. 
 Barytone, 19. 4. 
 Breathings, 4. — of v, 4. N. 1. 
 
 — of p, 4. 2, 3. — place of, 4. 
 4. — power of, 4. 5, N. 2. — 
 rough changed into smooth, 
 14. N. 5. 
 
 C. 
 Caesura, 235. 
 Cases, 30. 4. — how used, 162 
 
 -204. 
 Catalectic verse, 234. 2. 
 Causative, see Verbs. 
 Circumflex, 19. 1, 3: 21. —on 
 
 the penult, 21. 2. 
 Collective Nouns, 137. 3 : 157. 
 
 4. 
 Colon, 27. 
 Comma, 27. 
 Comparison by xsgog, raroc, 57 
 
 — of substantives, 57. N. 4. 
 
 — of pronouns, 57. N. 5. — 
 by lm>, ivTOQy 58. — anoma- 
 lous and defective, 59. — of 
 adverbs, 125. 
 
 Composition of Words, 135. 
 
 Concrete, see Abstract. 
 
 Conjunction, 29. 2. — how 
 used, 228. 
 
 Connecting Vowel, 85. 1. 
 
 Consonants, 1.2. — division of, 
 5: 6. — final, 5. N. 3. — eu- 
 phonic changes of, 7 - 14. 
 
 — movable, 15. 
 Contraction, 23. — accent in, 
 
 23. N. 3. 
 
 Copula, 160. 1. 
 
 Coronis, 27. 
 
 Crasis, 24. — left to pronun- 
 ciation, 24. N. 2. 
 D. 
 
 Dactylic Verse, 246 -251. 
 
 Dative, 30. 4. — plural of the 
 third declension, 39. — how 
 used, 195-203. — after 
 words implying resemblance, 
 fyc. 195. — after adjectives, 
 
 196. 1. — after verbs, 192.2. 
 
 — after impersonal verbs, 
 ibid. — after verbs signify- 
 ing to be, 196. 3, N.'2.— 
 with interjections, 196. 5. 
 
 — denotes with regard to, 
 
 197. 1. — preceded by wg, 
 197. N. 1. — apparently su- 
 perfluous, 197. N.2. — limits 
 words, 197. 2. — with com- 
 paratives, 197. N. 3. — with 
 substantives, 197. N. 4. — of 
 cause, $?c. 198. — with /ydo- 
 (ucci, 198. N. 1. — of accom- 
 paniment, 199. — of aiiog, 
 199. N. 1, — denotes the sub- 
 ject, 200 : 206. 2. — with 
 verbal adjectives in roc and 
 xeoc, 200. 2. — of time,' 201. 
 
 — for the gen. absolute, 201. 
 N.2. — of place, 202. — with 
 prepositions, 203. 
 
 Declensions, 30. 3. 
 
 Defective, see Noun, Adjective, 
 Comparison. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronoun, 70. — 
 dialects of, 70. N. 1. — with 
 /, 70. N. 2. — pronominal ad- 
 jectives, 73. 1. — how used, 
 149. _ as adverb, 149. N. 1. 
 
 — subjoined to a noun in the 
 same proposition, 149. N. 3. 
 
 — subjoined to a relative, 
 149. N. 4. 
 
ENGLISH INDEJT. 
 
 279 
 
 Deponent Verbs, 208. — perf. 
 and pluperf. of, 208. N. 2. — 
 aor. pass, of, 208. N. 3. 
 
 Derivation of Words, 126 - 134. 
 
 Desideratives, 134. N. 2. 
 
 Diaeresis, 27. N. 1. 
 
 Digamma, 1. N. 3. 
 
 Diminutives, 127. 2. 
 
 Diphthongs, 3. — improper, 3. 
 N. 2. — commutation of, 3. 
 N. 3. — improper, in capitals, 
 4. 4. 
 
 Dipody, 234. 3. 
 
 Dissyllables, \6. 2. 
 
 Dual, 29. 3:30. N.2: 137. N. 
 1,5,6,7,8: 150. N. 1: 157. 
 N. 1, 4, R. 1. 
 E. 
 
 Elision, 25. — before a conso- 
 nant, 25. N. 2. 
 
 Enclitics, 22. — retain their ac- 
 cent, 22. 4, N. 1. — suc- 
 ceeding each other, 22. N. 2. 
 
 Euphonic Changes, see Conso- 
 nants. 
 
 F. 
 
 Feet, 233. 1. 
 
 Final, see Consonants, Syllable. 
 
 First Declension, endings of, 
 31. 1.— gender of, 31. 2 — 
 voc. sing, of, 31. 4. — quan- 
 tity of, 31. N. 1. — accent 
 of, 31. N. 2. — dialects of, 
 31. N. 3. — contracts of, 32. 
 
 Future, 74. 3. — augment of 
 the third, 75. 1. — formation 
 of, 102: 103:111: 112: 114. 
 — how used, 209. 4, N. 10: 
 211. — periphrastic, 209. N. 
 1. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gender, 30. 2. — how distin- 
 guished in grammar, ibid. — 
 masc. for fern., 137. N. 1. 
 
 — implied, 137. N. 2, 3 : 
 150. N. 2. 
 
 Genitive, 30. 4. — of the third 
 declension, 36. 1. — how 
 used, 173-194. — adnomin- 
 al, 173. — relations denoted 
 by the adnominal, 173. N. 1. 
 
 — subjective and objective, 
 173. N. 2. — two adnominal 
 genitives, 173. N. 3. — sub- 
 joined to possessive words, 
 174. — with tdio?, &,c. 178. 
 N. — with verbs signifying 
 to be, fyc. 175. — after the 
 neuter article, 176. — denot- 
 ing a whole, 177. — after a 
 participle with the article, 
 177. N. 1. — after 8m^6vioq f 
 &c. 177. N. 3. — after neu- 
 ter adjectives, 177. 2, N. 4. 
 
 — of the reflexive pronoun, 
 177. N. 5. — after verbs re- 
 ferring to a part., 178. 1. — 
 after verbs signifying to par- 
 take, fyc. 178. 2. — to take 
 hold of, fyc. 179. — to let 
 go, fyc. 180. — after words 
 denoting fulness, Spc. 181. 
 
 — after verbs signifying to 
 remember, Ape. 182. — to 
 accuse, &fc. 183. — to be- 
 gin fyc. 184. — after verbal 
 adjectives, 185. — after com- 
 paratives, 186. — denoting 
 on account of, 187. 1. — 
 after exclamations, 187. 2. 
 
 — after verbs signifying to 
 entreat, 187. 3. — denoting 
 the subject, 187. 4. — of in- 
 strument, 187. 5. — denot- 
 ing in respect of 188. — af- 
 ter adverbs, 188. 2. — after 
 verbs signifying to take aim 
 at, Sfc. 188. 3. — of mate- 
 
280 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 rial, 189. — of price, 190. 
 
 — of time, 191. — absolute, 
 10-2.— of place, 193. — with 
 prepositions, 194. 
 
 Grave Accent, 19. 1, N. 2. — 
 for the acute, 20. 4. 
 H. 
 
 Historical, see Secondary Tens- 
 es. 
 
 I. 
 
 Iambic Verse, 241- 245. 
 
 Imperative, 74. 2. — termina- 
 tions and connecting vowels, 
 88.- — how used. 2l8j — in 
 prohibitions, 218. 2. — se- 
 cond person of, for the third, 
 218. N. 2. — in connection 
 with the relative, 218. N. 3. 
 
 — perf. of, 209. N. 7, 8. 
 Imperfect, 74. 3. — augment 
 
 of, 78. — in ov.ow ffxoftrjv, 85. 
 N. 5. — formation of, 97 : 
 106. 2: 113. — how used, 
 210. — denotes an attempt, 
 210. N. 1. — denotes a cus- 
 tomary action, 210. N. 2. — 
 for aor., 210. N. 3. — for 
 pres., 210. N. 4. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs, 159. N. 1, 
 2. — with dat., 192. 2. 
 
 Indefinite, Pronoun, G9. — pro- 
 nominal adjectives, 73. 1. — 
 
 — adverbs, 123. — how used, 
 148. 
 
 Indicative, 74. 2. — termina- 
 tions and connecting vowels 
 of, 84 : 85. — of verbs in m, 
 117. 2, 3. — how used, 213. 
 
 — in independent proposi- 
 tions, 213. 1. — after inter- 
 rogative and relative words, 
 213. 2. — after particles, 
 213. 3, N. 4,5, 6. — in con- 
 ditional propositions, 213. 4, 
 5. —with «V, 213. N. 3. 
 
 Infinitive, 74. 2. — termina- 
 tions and connecting vowels 
 of, 89. — of verbs in ^n, 1 17. 
 8, 9. — subject of, 158. — 
 after verbs, participles, and 
 adjectives, 119. 1 . — denotes 
 a cause, 119. 2. — for the 
 indie, 1 19. N. 4. — omitted, 
 119. N. 5.— for the im- 
 perat., 119. N. 6, 7. — for 
 the subj., 119. N. 8. —ex- 
 presses a wish, 1 19. N. 9. — 
 with war?, &c. 220. 1. — 
 with ttqIv, &>c. 220. 1. — in 
 parenthetical phrases, 220. 
 N. 1 , 2, 3. — with S+, 220. 
 3. — as a neuter substantive, 
 221. — for the gen. of cause, 
 221. N. 1. — in exclama- 
 tions of surprise, 221. N. 2. 
 — superfluous, 221. N. 3. — 
 after avayiCrj, &c. 221. N. 4. 
 
 Inflection of words, 29- 135. 
 
 Interjection, 29. 2. — how used, 
 229. 
 
 Interrogation, 27. 
 
 Interrogative, Pronoun, 68. — 
 dialects of, 63. N. — pro- 
 nominal adjectives, 73. 1. — 
 adverbs, 123. — how used, 
 147. 
 
 Intransitive, see Verbs. 
 
 Iota Subscript, 3. 1. 
 
 Irregular Construction, 230. 
 K. 
 
 Koppa, 1. N. 3. 
 L. 
 
 Labials, 6. — before linguals, 
 7. — before u and a, 8. 
 
 Leading, see Primary Tenses. 
 
 Letters and Syllables, 1-28. 
 
 Linguals, 6. — before u, a, and 
 before palatals and other 
 linguals, 10. 
 
 Liquids, 5. 1. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 281 
 
 M. 
 
 Metathesis, 26. 2. 
 
 Middle Mutes, 5. 3. 
 
 Middle Voice, 74. 1. — tenses 
 of, 113-115. — how used, 
 207. — as active, 207. N 4, 
 5. — as passive, 207. N. 6. 7. 
 
 Moods, 74. 2. — terminations 
 and connecting vowels of, 
 84 - 90. — how used, 
 213-221. 
 
 Movable, see Consonants. 
 
 Monosyllables, 16. 2. 
 N. 
 
 National Appellatives, 127. 3. 
 
 Negative, Particles, 224. — 
 formulas, 224. N. 1, 2, 3. — 
 two negatives, 225. 
 
 Neuter, 30. 2. — has three 
 cases alike, 30. N. 1. — ad- 
 jectives with the article, 138. 
 2. — plural with a sing, verb, 
 157. 2. — adjective in the 
 predicate, 160. N. 1, 2. 
 
 Nominative, 30. 4. — sing, of 
 the third declension, 36. — 
 how used, 157. — for the 
 voc, 157. N. 11. — without 
 a verb, 230. 1. 
 
 Noun, 30. — indeclinable, 45.— 
 anomalous, 46.- defective, 47. 
 
 Numbers, 29. 3. — commuta- 
 tion of, 137. N. 6, 7, 8: 
 157. N. 4. 
 
 Numerals, Marks of, 1. N. 3, 
 5, 6. — cardinal, 60. — or- 
 dinal, 61. — substantives, 
 adjectives, and adverbs, 62. 
 O. 
 
 Object, 162. — immediate, 163. 
 
 Optative, 74. 2. — terminations 
 and connecting vowels of, 
 87. —periphrastic per f., 87. 
 N. 1. — perf. pass., 91. 3, 5. 
 — of verbs in jw, 117. 5, 6. 
 
 — of verbs in vp*, 1 17. N. 7. 
 
 — how used, 216: 217. — 
 after particles, 216. 1. — 
 after interrogative and rela- 
 tive words, 216. 2. — after 
 the past tenses, 216. 3, 4. — 
 after the present or future, 
 216. N. 1,2. — expresses a 
 wish, 217. 1, N. 1. — in in- 
 dependent propositions, 217. 
 
 2. — for the ind., 217. 3.— 
 for the imperat., 217. 4. 
 
 Oxytone, 19. 2. 
 
 P. 
 Palatals, 6. — before linguals, 
 
 7. — before ^ and a, 9. 
 Parenthesis, Marks of, 27. 
 Participle, formation of, 90. — 
 
 of verbs in pi, 1 17. 10, 11. 
 
 — with the article, 140. 3,. 
 N. 3. — followed by the case 
 of its verb, 162. 2. — how 
 used, 222. — with verbs sig- 
 nifying to know, fyc. 222. 2, 
 N. 1. — to endure, fyc. 222. 
 
 3. — with dicc/lyropoii, x. t. A. 
 222. 4. — with fyv, y.. T . I. 
 222. N. 2. — fat., 222. 5. — 
 pres., 222. N. 3. — with ad- 
 verbs, 222. N. 4. - with «V, 
 222. 6. 
 
 Parts of Speech, declinable, 
 29. 1. —indeclinable, 29. 2. 
 
 Passive Voice, 74. 1. — tenses 
 of, 106-112. — how used, 
 206. — subject of, 206. 1, 2. 
 N. 1. — retains the latter 
 case, 206. 3. — as middle, 
 206. N. 2. 
 
 Patronymics, 127. 1. 
 
 Penult, 16. 3. 
 
 Perfect, 74. 3. — augment of, 
 76. — syncopated, 91. N. 6, 
 7, 8, 9. — formation of, 93 : 
 99: 107: 113. — how used, 
 
282 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 209. 2. — as pres., 209. N. 
 4. — expresses a customary 
 action, 209. N. 5. — for the 
 fut., 209. N. 6. — imperat., 
 209. N. 7, 8. 
 
 Period, 27. 
 
 Perispomenon, 19. 3. 
 
 Person, 74. 4. 
 
 Personal Pronoun, 64. — dia- 
 lects of, 64. N. 2 . — how- 
 used, 143: 144. —of the 
 third person, 143. N. 1, 2 
 
 — repeated, 143. N. 3. — 
 Eiiot) and uoi', 143. N. 4. 
 
 Pluperfect, 74. 3. — augment 
 of, 77. — in ««, 85. N. 4. — 
 passive, 91. 1. — syncopated, 
 91. N. 6, 7, 8. — formation 
 of, 100: 101 : 108: 113.- 
 how used, 209. 4. — as im 
 perf. 209. N. 4, 9. — as aor., 
 209. N. 9. 
 
 Polysyllables, 16. 2. 
 
 Possessive Pronoun, 67. — dia- 
 lects of, 67. N. 1. — how 
 used, 146. — used objective- 
 ly, 146. N. 1. — third pers 
 of, 146. N. 2, 3. 
 
 Predicate, 156 : 160. — noun 
 in, 160. 2, 3. 
 
 Preposition, 29. 2. — how used, 
 226 : 227. — primitive, 226. 
 1. — after the noun, 226. N. 
 l._for slpl, 226. N. 2. 
 
 — separated by tmesis, 226. 
 N. 3, 4, 5. — in composition, 
 135. 3, N. 6, 7, 8. — with 
 ace, 172. — with gen., 194. 
 
 — with dat., 203. 
 Present, 74. 3. — formation of, 
 
 94 -96. — simple or original, 
 96. — how used, 209. 1.— 
 for the aor., 209. N. 1. — for 
 the perf., 209. N. 2. — for 
 the fut., 209. N. 3. 
 
 Primary or Leading Tense9, 
 
 74. 3 — terminations of, 
 
 84. 1. 
 Privative «, 135. 4. 
 Pronominal Adjectives, 73. 
 Pronoun, 64-72. — how used, 
 
 143-155. 
 Pronunciation, 28. — Modern 
 
 Greek, 28. 2. 
 Proparoxytone, 19. 2. 
 Protasis, 213. R. 
 Punctuation Marks, 27. 
 Pure Syllable, 16. 4. 
 
 a. 
 
 Quantity, 17 : 18. — of a, *, v, 
 17. N. 3. — Marks of, 2:27: 
 
 — of the first declension, 31. 
 N. 1. — of the second de- 
 clension, 33. N. 2. — of the 
 third declension, 35. N. 1 : 
 36. N. 5. 
 
 R. 
 
 Reciprocal Pronoun, 72. — 
 how used, 155. — for the re- 
 flexive, 155. N. 
 
 Reduplication, 76. 1. — of the 
 2 aor., 78. N. 2. — Attic, 81. 
 
 Reflexive Pronoun, 66. — dia- 
 lects of, 66. N. 4, 5. — how 
 used, 145. — of the third 
 person, 145. N. 1. — for the 
 reciprocal, 145. N. 2. 
 
 Relative Pronoun, 71. — dia- 
 lects of, 71. N. 1. — how- 
 used, 150 - 154. — referring 
 to two or more nouns, 150. 
 2. — referring to a collective 
 noun, 150. 3. — before its 
 antecedent. 150. 4 : 151. 3. 
 
 — refers to an omitted ante- 
 cedent, 150. 5. — refers to a 
 possessive pronoun, 150. N. 
 7. — attracted, 151. 1. — 
 attracts its antecedent, 151. 
 2. — as demonstrative, 152. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 283 
 
 — as interrogative, 153. — 
 for Xva, 154. — verb of, 157. 
 N. 6. 
 
 Relative Adverb, 123. — be- 
 fore its antecedent, 150. N. 
 6. — attracted, 151. N. 2. — 
 attracts its antecedent, 151. 
 N. 3. — as demonstrative, 
 152. N. 2. 
 
 Root, of nouns of the third 
 declension, 36. R. 1. — of 
 verbs and tenses, S3. 
 
 Rough Consonants, 5. 3. — in 
 two successive syllables, 14. 
 3, N. 2, 3, 4. — not doubled, 
 14.4. 
 
 S. 
 
 San or Sampi, 1. N. 3. 
 
 Secondary or Historical Tens- 
 es, 74. 3. — terminations of, 
 84.2. 
 
 Second Declension, endings of, 
 33. 1.— gender of, 33. 2.— 
 quantity of, 33. N. 2 ac- 
 cent of, 33. N. 3. — dialects 
 of, 33. N . 4. — contracts of, 
 34. 
 
 Smooth Breathing, see Breath- 
 ings. 
 
 Smooth Consonants, 5. 3. — be- 
 fore the rough breathing, 14. 
 1,2. 
 
 Subject, 156-159. — of a fi- 
 nite verb, 157. — omitted, 
 157. N. 8.— of the inf., 158. 
 
 — of impersonal verbs, 159. 
 N. 1, 2. 
 
 Subjunctive, 74. 2. — termina- 
 tions and connecting vowels 
 of, S6. — periphrastic perf, 
 86. N. 1. —perf. pass., 91. 
 3, 4. — of verbs in ^z, 1 17. 4, 
 N. 4. — how used, 214: 215. 
 
 — after particles, 214. 2. — 
 after interrogative and rela- 
 
 tive words, 214. 2, 4. — after 
 pres. or fut., 214. 3. — after 
 past tenses, 214. N. 1. — in 
 exhortations, 215. — for the 
 fut. ind.,215. N. 3. — in pro- 
 hibitions, 215. 5. 
 
 Substantive, 30. 1. — deriva- 
 tion of, 127- 129. — in ap- 
 position, 136. — as an adjec- 
 tive, 136. N. 3. 
 
 Syllables, 16. 
 
 Syncope, 26. 1. 
 
 Svnecdochical, see Accusative. 
 
 Synecphonesis or Synizesis, 
 23. N. 2. 
 
 Syntax, 136-232. 
 T. 
 
 Tenses, 74. 3. — root of, 83. 2. 
 — terminations of, 84. — 
 how used, 209-212. 
 
 Thesis, 233.2. 
 
 Third Declension, endings of, 
 35. l._ gender of, 35. 2.— 
 quantity of, 35. N. 1. — ac- 
 cent of, 35. N. 2. — dialects 
 of, 35. N. 3. — formation of 
 the cases of, 36 -39. — syn- 
 copated nouns of, 40. — con- 
 tracts of, 42 - 44. 
 
 Tmesis, 226. N. 3, 4, 5. 
 
 Trochaic Verse, 237 - 239. 
 V. 
 
 Vau, 1. N. 3. 
 
 Verbal Roots and Termina- 
 tions, 83 - 92. 
 
 Verb, 74-1 18. — accent of, 
 93. —division of, 94.2.— 
 penult of pure, 95. — con- 
 tract, 116. — in pi, 117. — 
 anomalous, 118. — subject 
 of a finite, 157. — transitive 
 and intransitive, ^05. 1 . — 
 causative, 205 2. — passive, 
 206. — middle, 207. — de- 
 ponent, 208. 
 
284 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Verse, final syllable of, 236. 
 Versification, 233-255. 
 Vocative, 30. 4. — of the first 
 
 declension, 31. 4. — of the 
 
 third declension, 38. — how 
 
 used, 204. 
 Voices, 74. 1. — how used, 
 
 205-208. 
 
 Vowels, 1. 2: 2. — doubtful, 2. 
 N. I, R. — commutation of, 
 2. N. 3. — short, before a 
 mute and liquid, 17. 3. — 
 long made short and vice ver- 
 sa, 18. — connecting, 85. 1. 
 Z. 
 
 Zeugma, 231. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 ou 
 
 at 
 
 u 
 
 ini 
 
 & 
 
 a& 
 
 c&v 
 
 duo 
 
 <% 
 
 4 
 
 % 
 
 ti&ai 
 
 CUf 
 
 av 
 
 dj 
 
 ev 
 
 as- 
 
 aa 
 
 $ 
 
 ydg 
 
 !w 
 
 1JV 
 
 tf 
 
 ax 
 
 7f. 
 
 77 
 ysv 
 
 
 xal 
 
 % 
 
 3 
 
 TGU 
 
 X 
 
 79 
 
 tt. 
 
 XX 
 
 &u 
 
 rav 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 $, 
 
 filSV 
 
 < 
 
 r 
 
 T7fV 
 
 <ft 
 
 Si 
 
 @o 
 
 OS 
 
 4 
 
 TIJS 
 
 A/* 
 
 Sia 
 
 X 
 
 ov 
 
 f 
 
 TO 
 
 ? 
 
 si 
 
 
 716QI 
 
 ga 
 
 f 
 
 70V 
 TCOV 
 
 ek 
 
 ex 
 
 e/ 
 
 9 L 
 
 WJ 
 
 VV 
 
 Qi) 
 
 iv 
 
 es 
 
 go 
 
 e 
 15570 
 
 vTto ;• 
 
 W.H3T 
 

*? *yz*. * v .*i^*:* «* -*P *yz- * 
 
 0>*^ - 
 
 ♦ 4? * k . aX 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 &> °] 
 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 <6 ^ *° • * Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 ♦W222*.'.. PreservationTechnologies 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
.'i> 
 
 ^.jMfc.% 
 
 
 
 ^< 
 
 
 * *♦ 
 
 
 
 
 f ^^ 
 
 o* »•"£ 
 
 
 ^•^i^.% 
 
 • ** A 
 
 
 W •*; 
 
 
 V . * • °- 
 
 4°* 
 
 O > # ^ 
 
 
 
 " **&*- \^ :*M£°* \f : -aj|: \ 
 
 HECKMAN 
 BINDERY INC. |~ 
 
 #FEB 89 
 N. MANCHESTER, 
 INDIANA 46962 
 
 V **T*